CT 701 · BEX and BCT · Year IV Part I · 80 marks · 3 hours

Project Management

A complete reader for CT 701, written from the course notes and built around every question the Institute of Engineering has set since 2069. This is meant to be read like a book, front to back, not searched like a question bank. The question bank is here too, at the end, and every single question in it is answered.

23
past papers read
292
questions, all answered
39
numericals worked
80
marks in the paper
2069 Chaitra to 2082 Bhadra Regular and Back papers Attempt All questions Pass 32 of 80

Where the marks actually areWhat this paper repeats

This is not a guess. Every question from 22 CT 701 sittings was transcribed and classified against the 15 chapters of the official syllabus, and this is how many of those 22 sittings touched each one. Four chapters appear in essentially every paper, and between them they are worth more than half the marks.

Read this before anything else: the shape of the paper

Twenty three papers in a row follow the same skeleton. Once you see it, the paper stops being a surprise and becomes a checklist.

  • Attempt All questions. There is no choice except inside the short notes question, so you cannot revise selectively and hope. You can, however, revise in the right ORDER.
  • Roughly 8 to 16 questions for 80 marks, so the average question is worth about 6 marks and deserves about 12 minutes and roughly a page.
  • One or two numericals, in 21 of the 22 sittings. Only the oldest paper, 2069 Chaitra, had none, and nine sittings set two. It is almost always a network diagram or earned value, and often both. Every one of them, with the formulas, is on the numericals page.
  • A comparison question is near certain. Look for “Compare the followings” with four pairs at 3 or 4 marks each. Answer these in a TABLE, never in prose.
  • Short notes closes the paper, worth 12 to 20 marks. Balanced scorecard has been an option in 20 of the 22 sittings. That is the single most reliable mark on the paper.

How the highlighting works

Repetition is marked quietly, so it informs you without shouting over the text you are trying to read.

  • A pill after a heading says how many of the 22 sittings asked it, like asked 22× or asked 10× or asked 3×. Magenta is a near certainty, blue is common, grey is occasional.
  • An untagged card is connective tissue. It has rarely been asked on its own, but the tagged cards around it do not make sense without it. Do not skip these on the first read. Skip them on the third.
  • Examinable only in the sidebar hides everything untagged, which is what you want on the last night, and exactly what you do not want on the first day.

How to use thisA reading method that actually sticks

The three techniques with the strongest evidence behind them are retrieval practice, spaced practice and interleaving. Re-reading and highlighting, which is what most revision actually is, are close to the weakest. The guide is built so the strong ones are the path of least resistance.

Click a heading to collapse it, and use that

Every topic heading folds. That is not just tidying: it is the retrieval tool.

  1. First pass, everything open. Read the chapter as prose, in order, including the untagged cards. Do not take notes. Just read.
  2. Second pass, hit “Collapse every topic” in the sidebar. The chapter becomes a list of bare headings. Go down it and say the answer out loud, or on paper, before you open the card. The gap between what you produced and what is inside is your real revision list.
  3. Third pass, examinable only. Now the untagged material is gone and you are drilling the cards that carry marks.

What each card is showing stays remembered, so a half folded chapter is still half folded tomorrow.

The recall prompts are the spacing, and they are deliberately awkward

Scattered through the chapters you will find dashed boxes like the one below. Each one asks about something from an EARLIER chapter, not the one you are reading, which is the interleaving. The answer is hidden until you ask for it, because reading an answer is not retrieval and does almost nothing for memory.

Answer it before you open it, even when you are sure. Being sure and being right are different, and the whole value is in finding out which one you are.

CPI is below 1 (over budget) and SPI is above 1 (ahead of schedule). Both indices work the same way: below one is bad, above one is good, and the letter in the middle tells you whether the bad thing is money or time.

You have not read the cost chapter yet. That is on purpose. Notice the difference between guessing and knowing, and remember what that felt like.

Where mnemonics are used, and where they are not

Some answers must come out word for word: the nine knowledge areas, the five process groups, the four scorecard perspectives, the response strategies for risk. You cannot paraphrase a list and expect the mark. Those get a mnemonic card.

  • Ordered lists get a sentence or a letter string, because both preserve sequence. Unordered lists get a single pronounceable word, which is faster to retrieve.
  • Rude, absurd or Nepali flavoured beats tidy. Unusual material is remembered better than ordinary material, so the mnemonics here are chosen to be slightly ridiculous rather than elegant. That is the point, not a lapse of taste.
  • Every mnemonic card shows what it stands for and why it is shaped that way, so if one does not stick you can build your own on the same skeleton.

Mnemonics are for the exact lists only. For everything else, understanding the mechanism beats memorising a string, and the examiner can tell the difference.

Numericals: how they are worked here

Every numerical in this guide was computed by a program first, then written up. Nothing was solved in prose and hoped over.

  • Each worked example names its source paper, so you know it is a real question and not an invented one.
  • The method is separated from the arithmetic. The method is what earns marks even when a number goes wrong, so the steps are written to be copied under exam pressure.
  • Where a question is genuinely ambiguous, it says so and states the assumption it makes. Several past questions omit a value they then ask you to use. Writing “assuming BAC is X because Y” is a correct answer to a broken question.
  • They are gathered in one place as well. The numericals page lists all 39, the formula sheet first, with each solution closed until you ask for it, so it can be worked through as a practice sheet.

ProvenanceWhat this is built from

Sources, and one warning about the question paper file

  • Notes: the complete ICT Project Management notes by Prabin Gautam, 187 pages, plus the merged course slide set.
  • Questions: 23 scanned papers. The scans have no usable text layer, so every page was read and transcribed by hand. Question wording here is verbatim, including the occasional typo in the original, because recognising the exact phrasing is worth marks.
  • One paper in that file is not your subject. The 2070 Ashad paper on CE 701 Project Engineering is for BCE, BEL and B.Agri. Its questions on EPS, book value and capital structure planning are not on the CT 701 syllabus. It is kept in the bank, clearly marked, so you are not thrown if you meet it in a shared drive.

These are revision notes, not the official course. Copyright in the original notes and papers rests with their authors. Any error in the writing up is mine.

Chapter 1 · 2 hours · appeared in 21 of 22 sittings

Introduction

What a project is, what separates it from ordinary work, what limits it, how projects are classified, and the life a project lives from idea to handover.

What this chapter is about
  • The object of the whole subject: what makes a piece of work a project rather than ordinary work.
  • What a project aims at and what boxes it in: its objective (SMART) and its limits (the triple constraint).
  • How projects differ: the bases of classification, and what is special about IT projects.
  • The life of a project: its phases, the feasibility study, and the proposal.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 1 defines the project.
  • Chapters 2 and 3: the frameworks for managing it, PMBOK and PMI.
  • Chapters 4 to 6: its surroundings: life cycle, organisation, process groups.
  • Chapters 7 to 13: the knowledge areas one at a time: integration and scope, time, cost, quality, communication, risk, procurement.
  • Chapters 14 and 15: custom processes, maturity, ethics, the balanced scorecard.
  • Two ideas from here return almost everywhere: the triple constraint and the life cycle.
What you will learn
  1. What a project and project management are, the nine characteristics, and project versus operational work
  2. SMART objectives and the triple constraint
  3. How projects are classified and what is special about IT projects
  4. The project life cycle
  5. The feasibility study and the project proposal
  6. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • Every sitting, nearly always as question 1, for 2 to 5 marks a part.
  • Favourites: define a project and describe its characteristics; the triple constraint and how one change affects the others; project versus operational work; the life cycle phases.
  • How to score: definition, then a list with a line per item, and a figure wherever the question says “with figure”.

1.1What a project is

What a project is, and what project management is asked 9×

Definitions to quote PMI (Project Management Institute, USA): a project is a temporary effort undertaken to create a unique product, service or result.
Notes: a set of organised activities designed to fulfil a specific objective within a limited time and with limited resources.
Cleland and King: a combination of human and non-human resources pulled together in a temporary organisation to achieve a specific purpose.

What every project has

  • A definite beginning and end (time).
  • A specified outcome (scope), at a stated level of performance (quality), within a budget (cost).
  • Planning, execution and control.
  • Uniqueness: a particular job that is unique, non-routine, temporary, with a clear objective.
  • Purpose: converts a vision, a dream or a need into reality.

The two words that carry the definition

  • Temporary: it has a definite end date, not that it is short. A ten-year dam is temporary.
  • Unique: the output has never been made in exactly this form before.

Projects are made of activities: the rules the notes give

  • Clear start and stop: every activity has a known duration.
  • Dependencies: some activities cannot start until others finish.
  • Visible: the start and stop must be easy to see and measure.
  • Project plan: a schedule of activities showing each one's start and stop.
  • Why it matters: these rules are the basis of network diagrams and CPM (chapter 8).
  • Engineering project: a technological system, often defined by law, so it must be done by registered engineers or registered engineering companies (in Nepal, under the Nepal Engineering Council).

Examples of projects (notes and slides)

  • Construction: a warship, a call centre, an IT system, a building, a road.
  • Research: business modelling, a model of the Nepali economy, a new crop variety, code breaking.
  • Re-engineering: converting a currency, renumbering Nepal's telephones, installing an intranet.
  • Procurement: outsourcing a construction or research job, or a business function.
  • Business implementation: a new business process, installing e-commerce.
  • Everyday ones: a new information system, a robot, a training programme, an awareness campaign, a thesis.
Project management PMI: the application of knowledge, skills, tools and techniques to project activities to meet the project requirements and the stakeholders' needs and expectations.
Notes: the use of methods, techniques, skills, knowledge and experience to power the activities of planned projects.
In one line (slides): completing the project on time, within budget, without compromising quality.

What project management involves (notes)

Project planningProject monitoring
Definition of work requirementsTracking progress
Definition of the quantity of workComparing actual to predicted
Definition of the resources neededAnalysing the impact
Making adjustments
  • Management in general: understanding problems and needs, and controlling the use of resources, cost, time, scope and quality.
In the exam
  • “Define project” (1 to 2 marks): the PMI sentence, with temporary and unique explained.
  • “Explain the project and describe its characteristics”: definition, then the nine characteristics in the next card.
  • “Describe project management”: the PMI definition plus the planning and monitoring table.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain about the project and describe in detail about the characteristics of the project. (2080 Bhadra Q1, 2079 Baishakh Q1)
  • Define project. List some key benefits of conducting feasibility study. (2081 Baishakh Q1)
  • Define project. Discuss final year project characteristics of your own. How you compare SMART objective of your final year project? (2079 Bhadra Q1a)
  • What is the project? Explain the triple constraints of project with figure and describe their relationship. (2074 Ashwin Q1a)
  • What is project? Explain the triple constraints of project with figure. (2072 Chaitra Q1a)
  • Describe project management? Explain the roles and responsibilities of key project members. (2071 Chaitra Q2b)
  • What is a project? List out its characteristics. (2070 Ashad Q1)
  • What is a project, and what are its main attributes? How is a project different from what most people do in their day-to-clay jobs? Discuss the specific attributes that are specific to IT related projects. (2069 Chaitra Q1)

The nine characteristics of a project asked 6×

A characteristic is a feature every project has. Read each as an answer to “how would I recognise a project?”

  1. Specific objective: clearly defined; the project succeeds when it is achieved.
  2. Temporary (life span): cannot continue endlessly; has a birth and a death.
  3. Unique: no two projects are exactly alike.
  4. Non-routine and non-repetitive: not the day-to-day work of the organisation.
  5. Planning and control: an effective planning and control system for efficient completion.
  6. Resource integration: the four M's, man, machine, money and minutes (or materials), integrated for efficient use.
  7. Flexibility: risk and change are unavoidable, so it must absorb them.
  8. Constraints: works within the limits of time, cost and quality.
  9. Team work: a manager leads a team to the goal.

The slides add

  • Unique requirements delivered within the project's boundaries.
  • Its own resources and budget.
  • Progressively elaborated: detail is added step by step as understanding grows.
  • For a customer.
  • Cross-functional: often draws people from several departments or organisations.
In the exam
  • “Describe in detail the characteristics of the project”: the name of each, then one line. Nine items is a comfortable 4 or 5 marks.
  • Paired with the feasibility study (2076 Chaitra): finish with the feasibility card below.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain about the project and describe in detail about the characteristics of the project. (2080 Bhadra Q1, 2079 Baishakh Q1)
  • What are the key differences between project and process as per the context of project management? Explain briefly the characteristics of a project. (2082 Baishakh Q1a)
  • Describe about the characteristics of a project and explain the role of feasibility study for the successful completion of a project. (2076 Chaitra Q1b)
  • List out the characteristics of a project. Explain the role of effective feasibility study for the successful completion of a project. (2070 Chaitra Q1a)
  • What is a project? List out its characteristics. (2070 Ashad Q1)

Answers: “Describe in detail the characteristics of the project.” Nine of them.

How it decodes: Nine words, nine characteristics, initials in order, and the semicolon splits them exactly where the list does. It reads as the cheap tempo dances upside down; the police throw out the rakshi and the chappal comes out. The first four words are the tempo, and they are what a project is. The last five are the police, and they are how a project is run. Two T’s: Tempo is Temporary, the word is sitting right inside it, and Thokchha, the very last word, is Team work.

  • SSasto Specific objective. A sasto tempo runs one fixed route to one place
  • TTempo Temporary, it ends. TEMPOrary, the word is inside it
  • UUlto Unique output. No other tempo has ever danced upside down
  • NNachchha Non-routine, not business as usual. A dancing tempo is not a normal day
  • PPulis Planning and control. The police arrive, and the police are control
  • RRakshi Resource integration, the four M’s
  • FFyaakchha Flexibility. Throw out whatever is not working
  • CChappal Constraints of time, cost, quality. The chappal is what stops you
  • TThokchha Team work. Everybody gets hit together

Project versus operational work asked 6×

  • Operational work: the ongoing execution of activities after a product exists, producing the same result or service again and again (a bank's daily transactions, a production line, a helpdesk).
  • Project: the one-off effort that creates something new; operations then take it over.
  • Also asked as “project versus process”: the notes call the management of operations business process management.
AspectProjectOperational work
NatureTemporary, defined start and endPermanent, ongoing
OutputA unique product, service or resultThe same product or service, repeatedly
ObjectiveAttain a new objective, then closeSustain the business, keep the system running
BudgetDefined, fixedNot defined per piece of work; must earn a profit
RiskHigher: done for the first timeLower: done before
CharacterInnovative, transformationalRepetitive, improves normal practice
TimingExists before the productExists after the product
TeamAssembled, then disbandedStable, permanent
Managed byProject managementBusiness process management
ExampleBuilding a billing system, a roadRunning the billing system, maintaining the road
Two trees: projects branch into temporary, unique product and innovative; operations into permanent, similar to previous product and repetitive
Projects are temporary, unique and innovative. Operations are permanent, similar to what came before, and repetitive. Course notes, p. 3
In the exam
  • Always a table, never paragraphs.
  • Close with: building a road is a project, maintaining it is an operation.
  • Same question: 2069's “how is a project different from what most people do in their day-to-day jobs”.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the triple constraints of Project? How is project different from operational work? (2076 Ashwin Q1a, 2075 Ashwin Q1a)
  • What are the key differences between project and process as per the context of project management? Explain briefly the characteristics of a project. (2082 Baishakh Q1a)
  • What is the triple constraint of Project? How is project different from operational work? (2076 Chaitra Q1a)
  • What are the triple constraints of project? What makes a project different from operational work? (2074 Chaitra Q1b)
  • What is a project, and what are its main attributes? How is a project different from what most people do in their day-to-clay jobs? Discuss the specific attributes that are specific to IT related projects. (2069 Chaitra Q1)

1.2What a project aims at, and what limits it

Project objectives and SMART asked 1×

  • No objective, no project: defining it is the first step in a project's life.
  • The end: a project ends when its objective is achieved.
  • What a good objective does: confirms the right target, builds team commitment, involves every interested party.

How to define objectives (notes)

  • Uniquely and specifically.
  • Focus the team on what the project is about.
  • Create commitment and agreement in the team.
  • Involve all interested parties.

SMART: the test for an objective

  • Specific: clearly defined, not ambiguous; answers what, why, when, who, where.
  • Measurable: has metrics: how much, how many, how will I know it is done?
  • Achievable: within the team's skill and ability, agreed by all members.
  • Realistic (slides: relevant): fits the resources, experience, knowledge and time, and the organisation's long-term plan.
  • Time bound: a stated deadline; without one it will not be completed.
A bad and a good objective (notes) Bad: “I want to build a software.”
Good: “I want to build a music streaming software within 2 years, since I have all the needed resources and the agreement of our team members.”
  • Your own final year project, all nine characteristics and all five SMART tests worked out: end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • 2079 Bhadra: discuss your own final year project's characteristics and compare its objective with SMART.
  • Have one ready: a real objective with a number and a date, tested letter by letter.
Asked in past papers
  • Define project. Discuss final year project characteristics of your own. How you compare SMART objective of your final year project? (2079 Bhadra Q1a)

Answers: “How should the project objective be?” and 2079's “compare the SMART objective of your final year project”.

How it decodes: Five letters, five items, one for one. Nothing hidden and nothing doubled.

  • SSpecific. Clearly defined, not vague.
  • MMeasurable. You can tell whether it was met.
  • AAchievable. Possible with the resources you have.
  • RRealistic. Sensible in the real conditions of the project.
  • TTime bound. It has a deadline.

The triple constraint: scope, time and cost asked 9×

Definition The triple constraint (project triangle, iron triangle) is the model of project management: every project is limited by scope, time and cost, balanced to deliver the customer's quality requirements.
  • Time: the schedule for completion, and the deadline of each phase.
  • Scope: the tasks needed for the goals; the goals, deliverables, features and functions.
  • Cost: the budget: materials, labour, vendors, quality control.
THE TRIPLE CONSTRAINT Fix any two and the third must move. Refuse, and quality absorbs the difference. QUALITY the give SCOPE what must be delivered TIME the schedule available COST the budget available cut scope,finish sooner cut scope,spend less more time usuallycosts more

Why one never moves alone: the three relations (notes)

  • Time and scope: running late, so reduce scope to reduce duration.
  • Scope and cost: less scope means fewer tasks, so lower cost.
  • Time and cost: often directly related: rented equipment and hired labour cost money every day.

The same as rules (slides)

  • Reduce cost: reduce scope or add time.
  • Reduce time: add cost or reduce scope.
  • Increase scope: add cost or time.
  • The consequence: you cannot fix all three. Fix two and the third must move.
  • If you refuse: quality silently absorbs the difference: rushed work, cut testing, defects.

How they influence each other through the life cycle

  • Early (initiation, planning): all three are flexible; a change means redrawing a plan, which is cheap.
  • Later (execution): scope is fixed in designs and finished work, money is committed, the deadline is near, so each change costs more.
  • Result: a late scope change usually costs both time and money, so scope is frozen and changes go through change control.
  • Same shape as the cost of change curve (chapter 4).
  • Applied to software quality (2072): varying resources, time and the amount of product: end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • Nearly always paired with “how does a change to one affect the others” or “describe their relationship”. That half carries the marks.
  • Answer shape: the triangle (when “with figure”), the three relations, the sentence about quality.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the triple constraints of Project? How is project different from operational work? (2076 Ashwin Q1a, 2075 Ashwin Q1a)
  • What is the triple constraint in project management? How does change to one constraint affect the others? (2082 Bhadra Q1a)
  • Explain project triple constraints. How do these project constraints influence each other throughout a project lifecycle? (2081 Bhadra Q1a)
  • What is the triple constraint of Project? How is project different from operational work? (2076 Chaitra Q1a)
  • What are the triple constraints of project? What makes a project different from operational work? (2074 Chaitra Q1b)
  • What is the project? Explain the triple constraints of project with figure and describe their relationship. (2074 Ashwin Q1a)
  • What is project? Explain the triple constraints of project with figure. (2072 Chaitra Q1a)
  • A project manager can modify three basic elements of a software project: the resources available, the time available and the amount of product to be built. Describe how each of these three can be varied during a development process in order to ensure the resulting software is of high quality. (2072 Chaitra Q4)
  • Explain the triple constraints of Project with figure and describe their relationship? (2072 Kartik Q1a)

1.3How projects are classified

Nine bases of classification asked 1×

  • Why classify: it tells a manager what organisation, funding, speed and risk to expect.
  • How to read the table: each basis is a question about a project; the categories are its possible answers.
BasisCategories
Sponsorship: who pays and owns it?Customer, organisation, contractor, government, donor
Nature: how staffed, how complex?Individual, staff, special, complex
Orientation: what does it deliver?Product oriented, process oriented
Speed: how urgent?Normal, crash, disaster
Funding sourcePrivate sector, government sector, grant, loan
Size, by durationMega (5 to 10 years), major (3 to 5), medium (1 to 3), small
Technique: what does it consume?Labour intensive, capital intensive
Number of key purposesSingle purpose, multi purpose
Relationship with other projectsIndependent, dependent, mutually exclusive
  • Crash project: run at maximum speed, paying extra to finish sooner (like crashing in chapter 8).
  • Disaster project: responds to an emergency, such as earthquake reconstruction.
  • Mutually exclusive: alternatives; choosing one rules out the other.

The slides' shorter classification

  • Objectives: social development, economic growth.
  • Sectors: agriculture, public health, IT, private, government.
  • Number of key purposes: single, multi.
  • Relationship: independent, mutually exclusive.
  • Nature: emergency, fixed budget, fixed time.
In the exam
  • “List out the type of project on different bases of classification”: 5 marks for a pure list.
  • Learn the size row exactly: the year ranges are the only hard numbers here.
Asked in past papers
  • List out the type of project on different bases of project classification. (2080 Baishakh Q1a)

Answers: “List out the type of project on different bases of project classification.” Nine bases for five marks, which is the cheapest mark on the paper.

How it decodes: Nine words, nine bases, initials in order. It reads roughly as “the small Nepali officer always passes the time in style”, which is a joke about a government office, and that is exactly why it stays put. Three S words, so watch them: Sano is Sponsorship, Sadhai is Speed, Sanga is Size.

  • SSano Sponsorship customer, organisation, contractor, government, donor
  • NNepali Nature individual, staff, special, complex
  • OOfficer Orientation product oriented, process oriented
  • SSadhai Speed normal, crash, disaster
  • FFurti Funding source private, government, grant, loan
  • SSanga Size mega 5 to 10 yrs, major 3 to 5, medium 1 to 3, small
  • TTime Technique labour intensive, capital intensive
  • PPass Purposes single purpose, multi purpose
  • RRakhcha Relationship independent, dependent, mutually exclusive

IT projects: types, how they are built, and their challenges asked 5×

The four types of IT project (notes and slides)

  1. System integration: brings diverse ICT products and services together into one working system. Example: a nationwide WAN.
  2. Facilities management: takes full responsibility for establishing and operating the customer's IT facility without taking ownership. Example: an automated security and disaster control centre.
  3. Software application development: building software. Example: an ERP application.
  4. Services consulting: a specific consulting service, which may or may not end in a product. Example: ICT training and counselling.

How IT system development proceeds (notes 1.10)

  • Communication: requirement analysis, feasibility analysis, proposal.
  • Planning: scheduling, cost estimation, quality, change and risk management.
  • Modelling: analysis and design.
  • Construction: coding and testing.
  • Deployment: maintenance and feedback.

Challenges in IT projects, with the slides' remedies

ChallengeWhat to do about it
CommunicationTrain communication skills; active communication management
Staff turnoverBetter job satisfaction; non-compete agreements
Information security and privacyAn IT user policy and regulations
Visibility: work is hard to seeThe PM stays closely involved with the team
Political and cultural riskPlan for it in the risk register
Environment and infrastructure riskBackup power, redundant links
Connectivity problemsRedundant connectivity, offline-capable design
Brain drain, loss of institutional knowledgeDocumentation, knowledge sharing, succession
Legal and regulatory requirementsEarly legal review; compliance in the requirements

Why projects fail (slides, chapter 3 section)

  • Improper requirement analysis.
  • Poor project management.
  • Lack of executive level support.
  • No linkage to business strategy.
  • Wrong team members.
  • No measures to evaluate project success.
  • No risk management.
  • Inability to adapt to change.
  • Lack of control and visibility.
  • The key reason for IT project failure (notes p. 81): poor project scope management. Good scope management is the foundation of success (chapter 7).

The same causes as surveys of IT projects report them (the Standish Group's CHAOS reports), useful to widen the answer

  • Users: lack of user involvement.
  • Requirements: incomplete or unclear, then changing, with scope creep.
  • Support: lack of top management support.
  • Expectations: unrealistic time frames and budgets.
  • People and resources: too few, unskilled, or leaving.
  • Planning: poor planning and estimation; unclear objectives.
  • Technology: new or immature technology.
  • Communication and risk: poor communication; no risk management or methodology.
  • Nepal adds: brain drain mid-project, unreliable power and connectivity, procurement delays, shifting government priorities.

What makes IT projects different

  • Diverse in size, kind and technology.
  • Mixed teams: hardware, software, networks, databases, business analysis.
  • Fast-changing technology.
  • Intangible product: progress is hard to see.
  • Moving requirements and a high failure rate.
  • Full lists (IT attributes, why IT PM is necessary): end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “How can IT projects be classified?”: the four types, with an example each.
  • “Challenges of IT projects”: the challenges table.
  • “Major causes of failure of the ICT project” (2074, 2072): the slides' reasons, the key reason from the notes, and the survey list. Do not reuse the challenges table for this one.
  • Nepal: brain drain and infrastructure are the real answer; say so.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the major causes of failure of the ICT project? Explain how organizational structures influence projects? (2074 Ashwin Q3a)
  • How can IT projects be classified? Write about the challenges of IT projects. (2073 Shrawan Q2a)
  • What are the major causes of failure of the ICT project? Describe what bodies of knowledge are required by a PM to contribute for a successful project implementation. (2072 Chaitra Q2)
  • Explain the necessity of IT Project Management? How do you perform feasibility study in IT project? (2071 Chaitra Q1b)
  • What is a project, and what are its main attributes? How is a project different from what most people do in their day-to-clay jobs? Discuss the specific attributes that are specific to IT related projects. (2069 Chaitra Q1)

1.4The project life cycle

The project life cycle, phase by phase asked 7×

Definition The project life cycle is the logical sequence of activities a project goes through to accomplish its goal. Each project has its own life: a beginning and an end. It is a cycle because each stage builds on the one before and triggers the next.

The four phases in the notes (the “project development life cycle”)

  1. Formulation: identify the idea and set evaluation criteria.
    • Project identification: creative ideas from the environment and from internal and external resources.
    • Project evaluation: identify constraints; fix the objective; develop the proposal after a pre-feasibility study and prototype design.
  2. Planning: a detailed plan with time, cost and quality.
    • Feasibility study: technical, economic, market, management and environmental analysis.
    • Appraisal and estimation: judge the chance of success; compare with similar projects; develop the requirements and implementation plan.
  3. Implementation: activities carried out and controlled.
    • A proper team is formed; the PM monitors and supervises.
    • Inspection and testing from time to time; progress reviewed regularly.
  4. Termination: the work is complete; the project is evaluated and handed over.
    • Operation and evaluation: review the outcome and results; return to an earlier phase if required.
    • Handover: to the client; resources released; success evaluated.
The four phases of the project life cycle drawn as a circle split into quarters, formulation, planning, implementation and termination, with arrows showing that the cycle repeats
The life cycle as your notes draw it: formulation, planning, implementation and termination, and a cycle because each stage builds on the one before and triggers the next. Course notes, p. 9

The same life in PMI's words (slides): initiation, planning, execution, closure, with monitoring and controlling running through

PhaseWhat happensTypical steps
InitiationIdentify the need or opportunity; set the objective; judge feasibility; name the deliverablesFeasibility study; scope, deliverables, stakeholders; business case; statement of work
PlanningBreak the work into tasks; build the team; scheduleProject plan and timeline; milestones; budget; resources; risks and quality roadblocks; kick-off meeting
ExecutionTurn the plan into action; keep work on trackAssign tasks; brief the team; communicate; monitor quality; manage the budget
Monitoring and controllingTrack work against the planActivity, goal and budget tracking
ClosureDeliver; release resources; judge successPerformance analysis; closure documents; post-implementation review; unused budget
  • Same life, two vocabularies: formulation = initiation; implementation = execution with monitoring and control; termination = closure.
  • Planning takes about half the effort, and never fully stops: revise the plan until the work is done.

Effort over the life cycle

  • Shape: low in initiation, rising through planning, peak in execution, falling fast at closure.
  • Draw it: effort or cost up the side, time along the bottom: one hump skewed right.
  • Add: risk and uncertainty highest at the start; the cost of change rising steeply.
COST, STAFFING, RISK AND THE COST OF CHANGE The two crossing curves are the whole diagram: early is cheap and uncertain, late is expensive and certain. LEVEL TIME INITIATION PLANNING EXECUTION CLOSING cost and staffing risk and uncertainty cost of a change Planning is about half the total effort. Execution is the tallest part of the curve.

Why understanding the phases makes management effective (2082 Baishakh)

  • Gates: each phase ends in a deliverable and a go or no-go decision, so failure is caught early.
  • Staffing: effort can be planned for the execution peak.
  • Early planning pays: changes are cheapest early.
  • Early risk work: uncertainty is highest at the start.
In the exam
  • “Phases in the project life cycle”: the four phases, a line or two each.
  • “Project development life cycle: part, phase, stage and activities” (2075, 2074): the notes' four phases with their sub-activities.
  • “According to PMI”: initiation, planning, execution, monitoring and controlling, closure.
  • “With time and effort graph”: draw the effort curve.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the phases in project life cycle? How does project life cycle differ from product life cycle? (2080 Baishakh Q2a, 2076 Ashwin Q3a)
  • What are the phases in project life cycle? How does a project life cycle differ from product life cycle? (2082 Bhadra Q2b)
  • Explain the concept of the project life cycle according to PMI (Project Management Institute). Discuss how understanding these phases contributes to effective project management with illustration of time and effort graph. (2082 Baishakh Q1b)
  • What do you mean by project development life cycle? Explain describing various part, phase, stage and activities of the project development life cycle. (2075 Chaitra Q3)
  • What do you mean by Project Development Lift Cycle? Explain various phases of the project development lift cycle. (2074 Chaitra Q1a)
  • What are the phases in project life cycle? How does a project life cycle differ from a product life cycle? (2070 Ashad Q5)

1.5Before committing: feasibility and the proposal

The feasibility study asked 4×

Definition A feasibility study is a survey and study at the start of a project to decide whether the idea is realistic: a measure of how beneficial developing the product will be for the organisation from a practical point of view, done before money is committed.

The four types in the notes

  1. Technical: are the hardware, software and technology enough? Does the team have the skills?
  2. Economic: cost and benefit analysis; will it pay off financially?
  3. Operational: does it meet the service requirements; how easy to operate and maintain?
  4. Legal: is it lawful? Data protection, copyright, licences.
  • A fifth, from textbooks: schedule: can it be delivered in the time available?

Areas of feasibility analysis (slides)

  • Market: potential market and market share.
  • Technical: technical viability and a rational choice of technology.
  • Financial: financial risk and economic return.
  • Socio-economic: costs and benefits in shadow prices; economic and social impact.
  • Ecological: environmental damage and restoration measures.

How a feasibility study is performed (notes' diagram)

  1. Generate project ideas.
  2. Initial evaluation: is the idea promising? If not, stop.
  3. Plan an in-depth study.
  4. Market analysis and technical analysis.
  5. Financial analysis.
  6. Economic and ecological analysis.
  7. Second gate: is it worthwhile? If not, terminate; if yes, prepare the funding proposal.
  • In an IT project: the technical analysis covers platform, architecture and team skills; the financial analysis covers development, licence, hosting and maintenance cost against the benefit.
Feasibility study flowchart: generate project ideas, initial evaluation, is the idea promising (no: terminate), plan an in-depth study, market and technical analysis, financial analysis, economic and ecological analysis, is the project worthwhile (no: terminate, yes: prepare funding proposal)
How a feasibility study is carried out: screen the idea, study the market and the technology, then the finances, then the wider economic and ecological effects, and decide at two gates whether to go on. Course notes, p. 13

Key benefits of a feasibility study (slides)

  • Focus: improves the team's focus.
  • Opportunities: identifies new ones.
  • Go or no-go: gives valuable information for the decision.
  • Alternatives: narrows the business alternatives.
  • Reason: identifies a valid reason to undertake the project.
  • Success rate: raised by evaluating many parameters.
  • Decisions: aids decision making on the project.
  • Stop signals: identifies reasons not to proceed.

Its role in the successful completion of a project

  • Stops money going into something that cannot work.
  • Sets realistic cost and time expectations before the budget is fixed.
  • Exposes technical, legal and market obstacles while they are cheap to solve.
  • Gives the sponsor evidence for the go or no-go decision.
  • In one line: it is the cheapest place to kill a bad project.
In the exam
  • “Types”: the notes' four, then schedule as a fifth.
  • “Key benefits” (2081 Baishakh): the slides' list.
  • “Role in successful completion” (2076, 2070): the role list with the benefits.
  • “How do you perform one in an IT project” (2071): the steps, with the IT detail.
Asked in past papers
  • Define project. List some key benefits of conducting feasibility study. (2081 Baishakh Q1)
  • Describe about the characteristics of a project and explain the role of feasibility study for the successful completion of a project. (2076 Chaitra Q1b)
  • Explain the necessity of IT Project Management? How do you perform feasibility study in IT project? (2071 Chaitra Q1b)
  • List out the characteristics of a project. Explain the role of effective feasibility study for the successful completion of a project. (2070 Chaitra Q1a)

Answers: “What are the types of feasibility study?” TELOS is a Greek god who will not let you start until all five boxes are ticked, and he is extremely annoying about the last one.

How it decodes: Five letters, five items. Your course notes only list the first four. S for Schedule is the fifth that most textbooks add, so write the four from the notes and then add schedule with one line.

  • TTechnical. Are the current hardware, software and required technology enough? Does the technical team have the skills and capability?
  • EEconomic. Cost and benefit analysis. Will the project be financially beneficial to the organisation?
  • LLegal. Data protection, copyright, licensing, and whether implementation is lawful.
  • OOperational. Does it meet the service requirement, and how easy will it be to operate and maintain after deployment?
  • SSchedule. Can it be delivered in the time available?

The project proposal asked 2×

Definition A project proposal is the document that asks for approval and money once the feasibility study says yes. It explains the project's overall planning, why it exists, what problems it addresses, what makes it successful, and what resources it needs.

The seven key elements (notes)

  1. Reasons for the proposal: the problem or opportunity.
  2. Project planning matrix: goal, purpose, inputs and outputs.
  3. Solution of the problem.
  4. Implementation plan: estimates, cost benefit analysis, resources, schedule, risk and contingency plan, milestones, deliverables.
  5. Plan for technical and administrative support.
  6. Budget or financial plan.
  7. Relevant past experience: why this team can deliver.
  • Technical and financial proposals: large bids split into what will be done and what it will cost: end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Key elements of a project proposal” (2073 Shrawan, 5 marks): the seven, a line each, with the implementation plan spelled out.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain the key elements of project proposal. (2073 Shrawan Q2b)
  • Define concept of project appraisal. Explain about contents of technical and financial proposal. Also explain input analysis of project formulation. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q2)

1.6Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 1.

Characteristics and SMART objective of your own final year project asked 1×

“Define project. Discuss final year project characteristics of your own. How do you compare the SMART objective of your final year project?”

2079 Bhadra, 1+1+1 marks

Not in the notes: the notes give the characteristics and a SMART example, not an application to your own project.

  • Definition: a temporary endeavour undertaken to create a unique product, service or result (PMI).
  • Example used: “Real-time Nepali Sign Language recognition app”. Substitute your own; keep the structure.

Its characteristics

  • Specific objective: recognise the Nepali Sign Language alphabet from a phone camera.
  • Temporary: proposal in the seventh semester to final defence in the eighth, about ten months.
  • Unique: no identical app exists; the dataset and model are our own.
  • Non-routine: not regular coursework.
  • Constraints: time (defence date), cost (about Rs 20,000 for cloud training and a test phone), quality (accuracy target).
  • Flexibility: dataset, model and scope change with supervisor feedback.
  • Resource integration: four members, laptops, a cloud GPU, the dataset, the budget.
  • Team work: four members with a leader, guided by a supervisor.
  • Planning and control: proposal, mid-term and final presentations as milestones; a Gantt chart; weekly supervisor meetings.

The objective against SMART: “Build an Android app that recognises every alphabet sign of Nepali Sign Language with at least 90 percent accuracy, before the final defence in the eighth semester, using the team and budget already approved.”

TestHow the objective meets it
SpecificWhat (an Android app), for what (NSL alphabet signs), for whom (NSL users)
MeasurableEvery alphabet sign, 90 percent accuracy or better on a held-out test set
AchievableThe team has machine learning skills and can use pre-trained models
RealisticFits the team's time alongside coursework, and the approved budget
Time boundDeadline: the final defence in the eighth semester
  • Contrast: “make an AI app for sign language” fails the measurable and time bound tests, so it can never be judged a success or a failure.

Varying resources, time and the amount of product to ensure software quality asked 1×

“A project manager can modify three basic elements of a software project: the resources available, the time available and the amount of product to be built. Describe how each of these three can be varied during a development process in order to ensure the resulting software is of high quality.”

2072 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: the notes give the triple constraint and its relations (p. 5 and 6), not how to use them to protect quality.

  • The idea: these are the triple constraint seen by a software manager: resources = cost, time = schedule, amount of product = scope. Quality sits in the middle.
  1. Amount of product (scope): the most effective lever
    • Prioritise features (must, should, could); build the essential ones properly.
    • Move the rest to a later release; deliver in fully tested increments.
    • Control scope creep through change control, so testing time is not eaten.
    • Cut features, never testing.
  2. Time available
    • Extend the deadline where possible to protect design reviews, code reviews and testing.
    • Build schedule buffers; plan testing as its own activity.
    • Iterate, so problems are found early when they are cheap to fix.
  3. Resources available
    • Add skilled people early, especially testers and experienced reviewers.
    • Better tools: automated testing, continuous integration, static analysis, version control.
    • Train the team.
    • Brooks's law: adding people to a late software project makes it later (training and communication overhead).
  • The balance: scope fixed and time cut, then add resources early; resources fixed, then cut scope or extend time.
  • Never: keep all three fixed and let testing shrink; quality then absorbs the whole shortfall without anyone deciding it.

What is specific to IT projects, and why IT project management is necessary asked 2×

“What is a project, and what are its main attributes? How is a project different from what most people do in their day-to-day jobs? Discuss the specific attributes that are specific to IT related projects.”

2069 Chaitra, 4 marks

“Explain the necessity of IT project management.”

2071 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: the notes (p. 34) and slides (slide 53) list the advantages of project management, but not the attributes of IT projects or the IT-specific case for project management.

Main attributes of a project

  • Unique purpose.
  • Temporary.
  • Progressively elaborated: detail added as understanding grows.
  • Requires resources, often from several areas.
  • A primary customer or sponsor.
  • Uncertainty.
  • Versus day-to-day jobs: those are operational work, ongoing and repetitive (see project versus operational work).

Attributes specific to IT projects

  • Diverse in size and kind: one person installing hardware to hundreds building a national system.
  • Diverse teams: hardware, software, networking, database, security, business analysis, domain experts.
  • Many, fast-changing technologies, sometimes changing during the project.
  • Intangible product: progress and quality are hard to measure.
  • Requirements hard to state and always changing.
  • Integration with existing systems and data; security and privacy.
  • High failure rate.

Why IT project management is necessary

  • Poor track record: the 1995 CHAOS report found only about 16 percent of software projects on time and on budget with all features, and about 31 percent cancelled.
  • High stakes: IT is central to almost every organisation and absorbs large investments.
  • It removes the causes of failure (IT projects card): clear objectives and scope, proper estimates, change control, risk management, user and management involvement, visible tracking of an intangible product.

Advantages it brings (notes p. 34 and slides)

  • Control: of financial, physical and human resources.
  • Customers: better relationships.
  • Quality and reliability: higher.
  • Profit and productivity: higher.
  • Coordination and morale: better.
  • Time and cost: shorter development, lower cost.

Contents of the technical and the financial proposal asked 1×

“Explain about contents of technical and financial proposal.”

2070 Ashad (the CE 701 Project Engineering paper)

Not in the notes: the notes list the elements of a project proposal, not the split into technical and financial proposals.

  • When used: a client invites proposals, usually for consulting or design services.
  • Two envelopes: the technical proposal is evaluated first; only bidders who pass have their financial proposal opened.
  • Ranking: technical and financial scores combined (quality and cost based selection).
Technical proposalFinancial proposal
Covering letterCovering letter and offer validity period
Understanding of the project; comments on the terms of referenceSummary of the total cost
Approach and methodologyRemuneration: person-months times rates per expert
Work plan and schedule, usually a bar chartReimbursables: travel, accommodation, equipment, surveys, reports
Organisation and staffing, with CVs of key expertsTaxes and duties, such as VAT
Firm's experience and relevant past projectsContingency, if allowed
Quality assurance plan; facilities and equipmentPayment schedule and terms
  • Technical: what will be done, how, by whom, and when.
  • Financial: how much it will cost and how it will be paid.
  • Why separate: the client judges quality without being swayed by price.

Sasto Tempo Ulto Nachchha: Specific objective, Temporary, Unique, Non-routine. These are the four features that define what a project is.

Quality absorbs it. If scope, time and cost are all frozen, quality is the only variable left, and it degrades silently rather than announcing itself.

Back to the nine characteristics and the triple constraint.

Chapter 2 · 4 hours · appeared in 21 of 22 sittings

Project Management Body of Knowledge

The standard framework for managing projects, the environment every project sits inside, and the skills the project manager brings.

What this chapter is about
  • PMBOK: the profession's agreed way of managing a project. All work is a process with inputs, tools and outputs.
  • Five process groups follow the life of a project; nine knowledge areas organise the same processes by subject.
  • The environment: the internal, task and external forces that push on every project.
  • The project manager: the role, effective versus ineffective managers, the eleven interpersonal and managerial skills, and problem trees.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 1 defined a project; this chapter gives the standard way to manage it.
  • The five process groups get their own chapter: chapter 6.
  • The nine knowledge areas become chapters 7 to 13: integration and scope (7), time (8), cost (9), quality (10), communication (11), risk (12), procurement (13).
  • The environment returns in organisational structure (chapter 5) and risk (chapter 12); the manager's skills return in communication (chapter 11).
What you will learn
  1. PMBOK, its five process groups and nine knowledge areas, and what is unique to project management
  2. The project environment and problem trees
  3. General management skills and the project manager's role and effectiveness
  4. The eleven essential interpersonal and managerial skills
  5. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • “What is PMBOK?”: ten sittings, usually paired with the external environment or the knowledge areas.
  • Interpersonal and managerial skills: more than ten sittings, one of the most reliable questions on the whole paper.
  • Typical marks: 2 to 5 a part. Definition, then a list with a line per item.

2.1PMBOK: the standard way of managing projects

PMBOK, its five process groups and nine knowledge areas asked 13×

Definition The Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK) is the sum of knowledge within the profession of project management: a collection of processes and knowledge areas generally accepted as best practice. It recognises five process groups and nine knowledge areas for every type of project.
  • What it contains: widely used, proven traditional practices, plus some innovative and advanced ones.
  • What it is for: guidelines for managing individual projects; good practice for most projects, most of the time.
  • Who publishes it: the Project Management Institute (PMI), founded in the USA in 1969, as the PMBOK Guide.
  • How it describes work: it is process based; every process is defined by its inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs.

The shape of every process

  • Inputs: what the process works on: documents, plans, designs, artefacts.
  • Tools and techniques: the mechanisms applied to the inputs.
  • Outputs: what it produces: documents, products, services, knowledge.

The five process groups, in the order a project meets them

  1. Initiating: formally recognising that a new project exists, or that an existing one should continue into its next phase.
    • Determines the nature and scope of the project.
    • First document: the project charter, answering “what are we trying to do?”
  2. Planning: plans the project to the right level of detail.
    • Goal: manage risk through execution by planning time, cost and resources efficiently.
  3. Executing: completes the work defined in the project management plan.
    • Coordinates people and resources, completes and integrates the project operations.
  4. Monitoring and controlling: tracks, reviews and monitors progress and performance.
    • Problems are identified quickly so the team can take corrective action.
    • Ends when the project meets the goals set in the contract.
  5. Closing: all tasks in every process group completed, the team disbanded, and the project approved by the client.

Answers: “Discuss the concept of project management process groups.” Five stages of a deeply unfortunate evening, in the right order.

How it decodes: Five words, five process groups, in order. The catch is the fourth. The group is Monitoring and Controlling, and its letter comes from Controlling, not from Monitoring. So the two C's at the end are Controlling then Closing, and it is one group, not two.

  1. II Initiating. Formally recognising that a project exists or should continue into its next phase. First document: the project charter, which answers “what are we trying to do?”
  2. PPeed Planning. Planning the project to the right level of detail, managing risk by planning time, cost and resources efficiently.
  3. EEveryone Executing. Coordinating people and resources and completing the work defined in the plan.
  4. CClapped Monitoring and Controlling. Tracking and reviewing progress and performance so problems are caught early enough to correct.
  5. CCringe Closing. Completing every task in every process group, disbanding the team, and getting client approval.

The nine knowledge areas: the same processes grouped by subject; each area contains some or all of the process groups

  1. Integration: coordinates all the other areas into one plan and manages change across them (chapter 7).
  2. Scope: defines and controls what work is and is not in the project (chapter 7).
  3. Time: schedules activities so the project finishes on time (chapter 8).
  4. Cost: estimates, budgets and controls cost (chapter 9).
  5. Quality: makes sure the project satisfies the needs it was undertaken for (chapter 10).
  6. Human resource: acquires, develops and manages the team.
  7. Communications: generates, distributes and stores project information (chapter 11).
  8. Risk: identifies, analyses and responds to risk (chapter 12).
  9. Procurement: acquires goods and services from outside (chapter 13).
  • A tenth area: the fifth edition of the PMBOK Guide adds stakeholder management. Your notes say nine: write nine, then add this as one line.
  • The picture: how the nine areas fit together, core, facilitating and integrative, is the PMI framework figure in chapter 3.
In the exam
  • “What is PMBOK?” (ten sittings): the definition box, then the names of the five process groups and nine knowledge areas.
  • “Knowledge contents that fall under PMBOK”: the nine areas, a line each.
  • Trap: the fourth process group is Monitoring and Controlling, one group. Writing six loses a mark.
Asked in past papers
  • What is PMBOK? How the external environmental influences on ICT project? (2080 Baishakh Q1b, 2078 Bhadra Q1a, 2075 Chaitra Q1a)
  • What is PMBOK? What are the knowledge contents that falls under PMBOK? (2073 Shrawan Q1a, 2072 Kartik Q2b)
  • Write Short Notes on: (Any Two) a) PMBOK b) Balanced Scorecard c) SWOT d) COCOMO Model e) Pareto Chart (2082 Bhadra Q11)
  • What is PMBOK? Explain problem tree approach for solving project management issues. (2079 Bhadra Q1b)
  • Write short notes on: a) Project management process groups b) Statement of works (SOW) c) Pareto chart d) PM-BOK (2076 Chaitra Q7)
  • What is PMBOK? And how the external environmental influence on ICT project? (2075 Ashwin Q3a)
  • What is PMBOK? And how the external environmental influences on ICT project? (2074 Chaitra Q5b)
  • Explain about knowledge areas of PMI framework. (2071 Chaitra Q2a)
  • Define project management body of knowledge. (2070 Ashad Q3)
  • What is a Project Management Body of knowledge? Explain different general management skills necessary to be a good project manager. (2069 Chaitra Q2)

Answers: “What are the knowledge areas that fall under PMBOK?” One long guilty evening in a Kathmandu tea shop, in nine steps.

How it decodes: Nine words, nine knowledge areas, initials in order. Two C's, and they sit four apart so they are hard to swap: Cost is the fourth, Communications is the seventh.

  • II Integration management
  • SStole Scope management
  • TThe Time management
  • CChiya Cost management
  • QQuietly Quality management
  • HHid Human resource management
  • CChicken Communications management
  • RRan Risk management
  • PPanicked Procurement management

What is unique to project management, and the five areas of expertise asked 3×

Some of PMBOK belongs to project management alone; some is shared with other management.

  • Unique to project management: tools such as the critical path method (CPM), PERT and the work breakdown structure (WBS).
  • Shared with general management: planning, organising, staffing, coordinating, leading and controlling an organisation's operations.
  • Shared techniques: financial forecasting, organisational behaviour, planning.

The five areas of expertise PMI says a project team needs, with the manager where they overlap

  1. The PMBOK Guide: process groups, knowledge areas and project tools.
  2. Application area knowledge, standards and regulations: the field the project is in (software, construction, banking), its standards and the laws that apply.
  3. Understanding the project environment: cultural, social, political and physical setting.
  4. General management knowledge and skills: planning, organising, staffing, controlling, finance, procurement.
  5. Interpersonal skills: communication, influence, leadership, motivation, negotiation, problem solving.
Venn diagram with PM at the centre, where the PMBOK Guide overlaps with interpersonal skills, application area knowledge, general management knowledge and understanding the project environment
PMBOK is one of five areas a project manager draws on. The others are application area knowledge, understanding the project environment, general management, and interpersonal skills. The overlap is the point. Course notes, p. 17
In the exam
  • “The area of knowledge a project manager needs” and “bodies of knowledge required by a PM”: the five areas, a line each, and the figure.
  • Full answer with explanations: end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain about the Project Management Institute (PMI) and describe the area of knowledge for the project manager to successfully completion of the project. (2080 Bhadra Q3, 2079 Baishakh Q3)
  • What are the major causes of failure of the ICT project? Describe what bodies of knowledge are required by a PM to contribute for a successful project implementation. (2072 Chaitra Q2)

2.2Understanding the project environment

The project environment: internal, task and external asked 7×

Definition The project environment is the set of forces that influence a project's ability to achieve its objectives. Projects are environment specific: they must keep adapting as the environment changes.
  • How the environment acts on a project: through complexity, uncertainty, competition for resources, the need for flexibility, and rapid technological change.
  • Three layers: internal, task (operating), external; control falls as you move outward.
THE PROJECT ENVIRONMENT Three layers of forces push on every project. The further out, the less the organisation can control them. PROJECT INTERNAL staff, budget, culture TASK (OPERATING) client, suppliers, government, media EXTERNAL economy, competition, politics, technology INTERNAL: under the organisation's control Forces: objectives, constraints, structure, resources Acts through: staff, budget, corporate culture Gives the project its strengths and weaknesses TASK (OPERATING): can influence, cannot control The stakeholders the project deals with directly: client, contractors, consultants, suppliers, government, competitors, financiers, media Their interests and impacts are interrelated EXTERNAL: beyond the organisation's control Economy: inflation, interest and exchange rates Competition; politics: policy, tax, law, stability Customers and suppliers; technology change Monitor it and adapt, because it cannot be controlled

1. Internal environment: inside the organisation, under its control, giving the project its strengths and weaknesses

  • Project objectives: the desired end results; work stays within them, and the project ends when they are met.
  • Constraints: time, cost and quality, which set the scope and boundaries.
  • Structure: the project is temporary and works within its structure.
  • Resources: human and non-human, usually with its own budget.

How it affects the project in practice:

  • Staff: even capable people fail when politics and internal conflict take over.
  • Budget: limited cash restricts hiring, equipment and spending; money gives flexibility.
  • Corporate culture: the values staff follow; cooperation builds, internal competition turns toxic.

2. Task environment (the slides: operating environment): the stakeholders the project deals with directly

  • Who: client, contractors, consultants, suppliers, government, competitors, financiers, media.
  • Key feature: their interests and impacts are interrelated; each can help or hinder, depending on how the project affects them.
  • Control: can be influenced, not controlled.

3. External environment: outside the organisation, beyond its control, but able to force internal change

  • Economy: inflation, interest, unemployment and exchange rates; a bad economy can sink a well-run organisation.
  • Competition: every organisation except a monopoly fights for market share.
  • Politics: government policy, taxes, laws and stability.
    • Notes' example: since the 1950s, tobacco companies have had to print warnings, lost television advertising and faced smoking bans, and their market has shrunk.
  • Customers and suppliers: a supplier's power comes from how unique its goods are; a customer's power, from being free to choose a competitor.
  • The slides' grouping: economic, political, socio-cultural, technological.
  • What to do: monitor it continuously and adapt; ignoring it is a damaging mistake.

How the external environment influences an ICT project in Nepal

  • Economic: exchange rate and import duty raise hardware and licence costs mid-project.
  • Political and legal: ICT policy, the Electronic Transactions Act and data rules change requirements; instability delays approvals.
  • Socio-cultural: users' language, literacy and trust in digital services decide adoption.
  • Technological: a platform can go obsolete before launch; power and bandwidth shape the design.
  • Market: a competitor launches first, or a vendor with a unique product holds the price.
  • PMBOK's related terms (chapter 4): enterprise environmental factors, the conditions a project cannot control, and organisational process assets, the processes and knowledge the organisation already has.
Project influencers split into enterprise environmental factors, internal and external, and organisational process assets, meaning processes and procedures and the business knowledge base
Two things influence every project: enterprise environmental factors, internal and external, and organisational process assets, the processes and knowledge base the organisation already has. Course notes, p. 48
In the exam
  • “How does the external environment influence an ICT project?”: asked almost every other year, usually with “What is PMBOK?”.
  • Answer shape: the three layers in a line each, then the external factors, each with a concrete ICT example like those above.
Asked in past papers
  • What is PMBOK? How the external environmental influences on ICT project? (2080 Baishakh Q1b, 2078 Bhadra Q1a, 2075 Chaitra Q1a)
  • What are the external environmental factors affecting the project? Discuss on interpersonal and managerial skills of project manager? (2082 Bhadra Q1b)
  • What is PMBOK? And how the external environmental influence on ICT project? (2075 Ashwin Q3a)
  • What is PMBOK? And how the external environmental influences on ICT project? (2074 Chaitra Q5b)
  • Differentiate between Bilateral, Multilateral and Joint Venture project with example? Discuss the external environment in which a project is operated. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q1)

Solving problems with problem trees asked 1×

Definition A problem tree is a pictorial representation of a problem, its causes and its effects. It analyses an existing situation by identifying the major problems and their main cause and effect relationships.
  • Why use it: the team sees at a glance how many complex issues feed one problem, and how that problem branches into effects.
  • How it is arranged: causes and consequences in order of hierarchy: roots below, effects above.

Steps for developing a problem tree (notes)

  1. Identify the major problems within the stated problem area.
  2. Analyse their interrelationships, and pick the core problem.
  3. Write the causes of the major problems.
  4. Write the effects of the core problem.
  5. Draw the tree: causes, problems, effects.
  6. Review it for validity and completeness; repeat from step 2 if needed.
  • Brainstorming supplies the ideas: a method of generating ideas and sharing knowledge to solve a problem, with participants encouraged to think without interruption.
The schematic
Problem tree schematic: contributing factors at the bottom lead to identified causes, which lead to two main problem issues, which lead to the key problem scenario, which leads to its effects at the top
The example in the notes
Problem tree for a water supply project: lack of top management support leads to insufficient maintenance funds and a deteriorated water system; low bureaucratic income leads to corruption and few service connections; both lead to the core problem, lack of sufficient clean water, whose effect is a high rate of diseases
Read a problem tree from the bottom up: contributing factors cause the causes, the causes create the major problems, those feed one core problem, and the core problem produces the effects at the top. Projects then attack the roots, not the symptoms. Course notes, p. 25

Applied to a project management issue: an IT project keeps missing deadlines

  • Core problem: late deliveries.
  • Major problems: rework after testing; idle time waiting for decisions.
  • Causes: unclear requirements; an absent sponsor.
  • Contributing factors: no requirement sign-off; no escalation procedure.
  • Effects: penalty payments; an unhappy client.
  • Lesson: longer hours treat a symptom; requirement sign-off attacks a root.
In the exam
  • “Explain the problem tree approach for solving project management issues” (2079 Bhadra): definition, the six steps, a small tree with its levels, and one project example.
Asked in past papers
  • What is PMBOK? Explain problem tree approach for solving project management issues. (2079 Bhadra Q1b)

2.3The project manager: general management, role and effectiveness

General management skills, and project management versus general management asked 2×

A project manager is first a manager, so the classic functions of general management apply.

The eight general management skills (notes)

  1. Planning: deciding in advance what to do. Its steps:
    • Determine the objectives; set planning premises and constraints; decide the planning period.
    • Collect, classify and process information; list alternative courses of action.
    • Evaluate the alternatives and select the best plan.
    • Prepare supporting plans for the master plan, and plans for controlling it.
  2. Organising: arranging work, people and resources into a structure.
  3. Staffing: filling positions with the right people, and developing them.
  4. Directing: guiding and instructing people in the work.
  5. Motivating: creating the will to perform well.
  6. Controlling: measuring performance against the plan and correcting deviations.
  7. Coordinating: making separate parts work together.
  8. Communicating: passing information so everyone understands and acts.
  • The slides' shorter list: planning, organising, staffing, executing, controlling.

Project management versus general management (notes)

General managementProject management
FocusGeneral, ongoing activitiesProjects and related tasks
ProcessContinuousTemporary, one time
NatureRepetitive and regularNon-repetitive and unique
StateA single steady stateMoves from one state to another, bringing change
Start and endNo real start and end pointsDefinite start and end points
Place of workWithin the organisation's premisesInside and outside the premises
AuthorityWide authority over their staffLittle formal authority over the team
RolePermanent or long termRole and team membership are temporary
In the exam
  • “General management skills necessary to be a good project manager” (2069): the eight, with planning's steps.
  • Short note “project management and general management”: a line on each, then the table.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgements d) Project management and General management e) S - curve (2080 Bhadra Q13)
  • What is a Project Management Body of knowledge? Explain different general management skills necessary to be a good project manager. (2069 Chaitra Q2)

Answers: “Explain different general management skills necessary to be a good project manager.” Eight skills (2069 Chaitra).

How it decodes: Eight words, eight skills, initials in order, and the sentence breaks 5 + 3 exactly where the skills do: five management verbs, then the three C’s. It reads as the mad officer always demands daal, plus sugar, rice and tea, which is a joke about a government office that has never signed a file. The three C’s are the trap, because they all start the same, so each one carries its meaning: chini is what gets controlled, chamal is what cooks together, chiya is where the talking happens.

  • PPaagal Planning. He is mad, and yet there is a plan on the wall with arrows on it
  • OOfficer Organising. An officer organises, it is the whole job. Pens sorted by length
  • SSadhai Staffing. Sadhai means always, and one more peon is what he always wants
  • DDaal Directing. He points at the door and names the thing. That is all directing is
  • MMaagchha Motivating. He demands it louder. Terrible motivation, still motivation
  • CChini Controlling. Every Nepali uncle is told to control his chini
  • CChamal Coordinating. One pot, every grain cooking together, or half comes out raw
  • CChiya Communicating. Nothing gets discussed without chiya guff

The project manager: role, and effective versus ineffective managers asked 4×

Definition A project manager is the person responsible for leading a project from its inception to its execution and completion. They carry overall responsibility for success, usually with little formal authority over the team.

The role of the project manager (notes and slides)

  • Responsibility: overall responsibility for project success; keeps perspective on the whole.
  • Planning: develops and maintains the detailed plan; delivers on time against it.
  • Scope and progress: manages the scope; monitors progress and performance.
  • Coordination: coordinates partners and working groups; resolves cross-functional issues.
  • People: recruits project staff; manages resource use and performance.
  • Issues: records and manages project issues.
  • Standards: sets and maintains the project's standards and policies.
  • Stakeholders: builds a win-win situation for everyone.
  • Who fills it: a senior manager or a general manager.

Effective and ineffective project managers (notes and slides)

Effective project managersIneffective project managers
Lead by exampleSet bad examples
Are visionariesAre confused, not self-assured
Are technically competentLack technical expertise
Are decisiveAre indecisive
Are good communicatorsAre poor communicators
Are good motivatorsDemotivate the team
Stand up to top management when necessaryComplain about top management
Support team membersLack team spirit
Encourage new ideasAre conservative

How to be an effective IT project manager: the left column, plus what IT demands

  • Technical understanding: enough to judge estimates and risks, and earn respect.
  • Bridging: translate between technical staff and business users.
  • Scope and change control: IT requirements keep moving.
  • Visible tracking: make progress on an intangible product measurable.
  • Early risk work: security, integration, technology choices.
  • Tools: scheduling software, version control, issue trackers.
In the exam
  • “Define a project manager; how can you be an effective IT project manager?” (2080 Bhadra): definition, effective traits, the IT list.
  • “Traits of effective and ineffective project managers” (2071): the table.
  • “Role of the project manager” (2078, 2070): the role list.
Asked in past papers
  • Define a project manager. Explain how you can be an effective IT project manager. (2080 Bhadra Q2)
  • What is the role of Project Management and also explain the recommended skills for all project managers as well as ICT project managers. (2078 Bhadra Q1c)
  • Briefly explain the traits of being an effective and ineffective project manager? (2071 Chaitra Q1a)
  • What is the role of project manager? What are suggested skills for all project managers and for information technology project managers? (2070 Chaitra Q1b)

2.4Essential interpersonal and managerial skills

The eleven essential interpersonal and managerial skills asked 13×

The idea Interpersonal skills are the qualities and behaviours we show when dealing with other people. The project manager must be a people manager: the team does the technical work, so the manager contributes above all soft skill.

The eleven skills (syllabus and notes), each with where it decides the outcome

  1. Energised and initiator: energy and fitness; works under pressure and odd conditions; takes the initiative.
    • Example: server fails a week before go-live; the PM starts recovery that evening.
  2. Communication: expresses ideas clearly in writing and speech; simple, with feedback.
    • Example: a written change note prevents a later scope dispute.
  3. Influencing: gets people to do what they otherwise would not, often without authority.
    • Example: persuades finance to release licence money early.
  4. Leadership: imparts vision, gains consensus on goals, sets direction, inspires, motivates, is self-assured.
    • Example: one clear goal, “live before Dashain”, held through a crisis.
  5. Motivator: energises people to high performance and past barriers to change.
    • Example: recognises extra effort publicly; shares dull work fairly.
  6. Negotiation: resolves conflict, makes agreement possible, finds the best solution.
    • Example: trades a vendor's delay penalty for longer support.
  7. Problem solver: deals with problems with an analysing, problem-solving attitude.
    • Example: traces a failed bank API integration to its root cause.
  8. Perspective nature: looks beyond the team; sees how project and team fit the organisation.
    • Example: spots that one department's feature breaks another's process.
  9. Result oriented: works to achieve the objectives, not for work's sake.
    • Example: measures progress by delivered features, not hours.
  10. Global literacy: works in cross-cultural environments; understands cross-cultural issues.
    • Example: plans around an offshore team's time zone and holidays.
  11. Problem solving using problem trees: examine, analyse, then build a problem tree.
    • Example: traces repeated slips to missing requirement sign-off.
  • Why they matter: a project is delivered through people the manager rarely commands; these skills keep stakeholders aligned, the team performing and the project on its objective.
  • Skills for IT project managers specifically: end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • Asked as: “essential interpersonal and managerial skills”, “managerial and soft skills”, “different skill sets required”.
  • Open with: the project manager must be a people manager.
  • Then: the skills with a line each; add the example when asked to illustrate (2081 Bhadra).
Asked in past papers
  • What are the essential interpersonal and managerial skills to be a successful project manager? (2074 Chaitra Q2a, 2072 Chaitra Q1b)
  • What are the external environmental factors affecting the project? Discuss on interpersonal and managerial skills of project manager? (2082 Bhadra Q1b)
  • Write short notes on: (Any Four) a) Decision Tree analysis b) S-curve c) PDCA cycle d) ICT code of ethics e) Soft skills for project manager (2082 Baishakh Q8)
  • Discuss the essential interpersonal and managerial skills required for a project manager to be effective. Illustrate how each skill contributes to successful project outcomes by providing practical examples. (2081 Bhadra Q1b)
  • Describe the different skill sets required by a project manager and briefly explain each of them. (2079 Baishakh Q2)
  • What is the role of Project Management and also explain the recommended skills for all project managers as well as ICT project managers. (2078 Bhadra Q1c)
  • What are the essential interpersonal skill and managerial skill to be a successful Project Manager? (2076 Ashwin Q1b)
  • What are the essential managerial skill and soft skill to be a successful Project Manager? (2075 Ashwin Q1b)
  • What are the managerial skills and essential soft skills to be a successful project manager? (2074 Ashwin Q1b)
  • What are the essential interpersonal and managerial skill to be a successful project manager? (2072 Kartik Q1b)
  • What is the role of project manager? What are suggested skills for all project managers and for information technology project managers? (2070 Chaitra Q1b)
  • What are different skill sets required by a project manager? Briefly explain each of them. (2070 Ashad Q2)

Answers: “What are the essential interpersonal and managerial skills to be a successful project manager?” The eight core skills; the notes add three more.

How it decodes: Eight words, eight skills, initials in order. It reads as even a Nepali engineer takes tea first, internet and mail later, which is true of every engineer you know. Two P’s, and they are the trap: Pani, early on, is Perspective. Pachhi, the very last word, is Problem solver. Then add the notes' last three as a tail: result oriented, global literacy, problem trees.

  • NNepali Negotiation. Every Nepali bargains, at every pasal, for every rupee
  • EEngineer Energised and initiator. The engineer is the one who starts things
  • PPani Perspective, sees past the team
  • CChiya Communication. Nothing gets discussed without chiya guff
  • LLincha Leadership. Lincha means takes, and a leader takes charge
  • IInternet Influencing. Influencers live on the internet
  • MMail Motivator
  • PPachhi Problem solver. Every problem in the office gets solved pachhi

2.5Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 2.

The areas of knowledge a project manager needs asked 3×

“Explain about the Project Management Institute (PMI) and describe the area of knowledge for the project manager to successfully complete the project.”

2080 Bhadra, 2079 Baishakh

“Describe what bodies of knowledge are required by a PM to contribute to a successful project implementation.”

2072 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: page 17 shows the figure of the five areas but does not explain them.

  • PMI: the Project Management Institute, the professional body founded in the USA in 1969 that publishes the PMBOK Guide (chapter 3).
  • PMI's model: a project team needs expertise in five overlapping areas, with the project manager at the centre.
  1. The Project Management Body of Knowledge
    • Knowledge unique to project management: five process groups, nine knowledge areas.
    • Tools such as CPM, PERT, the WBS and earned value.
    • Necessary, but not sufficient on its own.
  2. Application area knowledge, standards and regulations
    • Application area: the field of the project, such as software, telecom, construction, banking, health.
    • Standards: recommended guidelines, such as ISO and IEEE standards.
    • Regulations: compulsory rules, such as Nepal's Electronic Transactions Act or Public Procurement Act.
  3. Understanding the project environment
    • Cultural and social: the people affected and their values.
    • International and political: laws, customs, time zones, stability.
    • Physical: geography, climate, infrastructure.
  4. General management knowledge and skills
    • Planning, organising, staffing, executing and controlling an ongoing enterprise.
    • Supporting disciplines: finance, purchasing, marketing, contracts, logistics, HR, IT.
  5. Interpersonal skills
    • Communication, influencing the organisation, leadership, motivation.
    • Negotiation and conflict management, problem solving.
  • The point: success needs all five together, which is why the manager sits in the overlap.
  • Draw: five overlapping ovals with PM at the centre, as in the figure on the overlap card.

How each skill contributes to project success, with practical examples asked 1×

“Discuss the essential interpersonal and managerial skills required for a project manager to be effective. Illustrate how each skill contributes to successful project outcomes by providing practical examples.”

2081 Bhadra, 3+3 marks

Only partly in the notes: pages 23 and 24 list and define the skills, but give no examples.

SkillHow it contributesPractical example
Energised and initiatorKeeps the project moving under pressureServer fails a week before go-live; recovery starts that evening
CommunicationEveryone works from the same informationA written change note prevents a scope dispute
InfluencingGets resources without formal authorityFinance releases licence money early after seeing the cost of delay
LeadershipGives the team one direction“Live before Dashain”, held through a crisis
MotivatorKeeps performance high over a long projectPublic recognition; dull tasks shared fairly
NegotiationResolves conflict, reaches agreementVendor's delay penalty traded for longer support
Problem solverRemoves blockers before they become delaysFailed bank API traced to an expired certificate
PerspectiveKeeps the project aligned with the organisationOne department's feature found to break another's process
Result orientedEffort goes to the objective, not to activityTracks delivered features; drops a low-value report
Global literacyMakes distributed teams workPlans around an offshore team's time zone and holidays
Problem treesFinds root causes, not symptomsRepeated slips traced to missing requirement sign-off
  • Open with: the project manager must be a people manager.
  • Close with: the project is delivered through people the manager rarely commands, so these skills decide the outcome.

Skills suggested for all project managers, and for IT project managers asked 1×

“What is the role of project manager? What are suggested skills for all project managers and for information technology project managers?”

2070 Chaitra

“What is the role of Project Management and also explain the recommended skills for all project managers as well as ICT project managers.”

2078 Bhadra

Only partly in the notes: the notes give the general skills (p. 23 and 24) and the role (p. 50), not separate lists for all managers and for IT managers.

  • The role: overall responsibility for success; plans, manages scope, time and cost, coordinates people, resolves issues, tracks progress (full list on the project manager card).

Skills suggested for all project managers (Schwalbe's IT project management textbook)

  • Communication: listening, persuading.
  • Organisational: planning, goal setting, analysing.
  • Team building: empathy, motivation, team spirit.
  • Leadership: sets an example, energetic, has vision, delegates, positive.
  • Coping: flexibility, creativity, patience, persistence.
  • Technology: experience and knowledge of the project's field.

What IT project managers need in addition, because IT work is intangible, fast-changing and technically diverse

  • Technical knowledge: hardware, software, networks, development methods; enough to judge estimates and risks.
  • Business knowledge: how the system creates value for the organisation.
  • Bridging: explain technical and business needs to each other.
  • People skills first: surveys of IT managers rank people skills, leadership, listening, integrity, trust, verbal communication, team building, conflict resolution, critical thinking and balancing priorities at the top.
  • Change and risk management: requirements and technology move during the project.
  • Tools: scheduling software, issue tracking, version control.

Integration, Scope, Time, Cost, Quality, Human resource, Communications, Risk, Procurement. (I Stole The Chiya, Quietly Hid Chicken, Ran, Panicked.)

Five process groups. The one wrongly split is Monitoring and Controlling, which is a single group.

Back to PMBOK.

Chapter 3 · 2 hours · appeared in 17 of 22 sittings

Portfolio and the PMI framework

How organisations manage many projects at once, the office that governs them, the institute that sets the standard, and what makes a project succeed or fail.

What this chapter is about
  • Above the single project: programs and portfolios, and project portfolio management (PPM), which chooses the right projects for the organisation.
  • The project management office (PMO): the department that sets and keeps the standards.
  • PMI and its framework: the institute behind PMBOK, and its picture of how the knowledge areas fit together.
  • Drivers and inhibitors of project success, and the criteria for judging success.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 2 gave PMBOK's process groups and knowledge areas; this chapter shows PMI's framework that arranges them, and the institute itself.
  • Chapter 1 managed one project; here the view widens to the whole organisation.
  • Project selection (NPV, payback) is worked out in chapter 9; the PMO's standards link to maturity in chapter 14.
  • The drivers and inhibitors summarise what every later chapter tries to secure.
What you will learn
  1. Project, program and portfolio, and portfolio management
  2. The project management office
  3. PMI and the PMI framework
  4. Drivers and inhibitors of project success and success criteria
  5. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • The PMI framework: six sittings, as a question and as a short note.
  • Key benefits of portfolio management: five sittings.
  • Drivers of project success: five sittings, sometimes with the inhibitors.
  • Project management versus portfolio management: three sittings, always a table.

3.1Portfolio and portfolio management

Project, program and portfolio, and portfolio management asked 9×

The three levels (slides and notes)

  • Project: a temporary endeavour creating a unique product, service or result.
  • Program: a group of related projects managed in a coordinated way to obtain benefits and control not available from managing them individually. It may include work outside the projects.
  • Portfolio: a collection of projects, programs and processes managed together to meet the organisation's strategic objectives.
  • The notes' line: a project defines end goals and objectives, but a portfolio represents a strategic planning commitment.
PORTFOLIO, PROGRAM, PROJECT Each level contains the one below it, and asks a different question. PORTFOLIO all projects, programs and related work, managed to meet strategic objectives PROGRAM A related projects, together PROGRAM B related projects, together PROJECT standalone other work, processes P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P = project. Each project delivers its own unique output; a program coordinates its projects for benefits they could not deliver separately. Portfolio Are we doing the right things? Program Are these projects pulling together? Project Are we doing this project right?
Project portfolio management (PPM) The analysis and optimisation of the costs, resources, technologies and processes of all the projects and programs in a portfolio, carried out by portfolio managers or the PMO. Its goal is to balance risk and reward, making sure every outcome supports the organisation's strategic goals.
  • Like an investment portfolio: manage projects the way you manage stocks; a balanced portfolio lowers the risk of individual projects and raises the overall return.
  • It lets managers spot project risks early and address them quickly.

The five steps of the PPM process (notes)

  1. Define the business objectives.
  2. Collect project ideas for the portfolio.
  3. Select the best projects: cost benefit analysis, payback period, net present value, risk level (chapter 9).
  4. Validate portfolio feasibility: a feasibility study of the chosen projects.
  5. Execute and manage the portfolio: coordinate the projects and programs with their managers.
Portfolio management loop: clarify business objectives, capture and research ideas, select the best projects, validate and initiate, manage and monitor the portfolio, then select again
Portfolio management as a loop: clarify the business objectives, capture ideas, select the best projects, validate and start them, then manage and monitor the portfolio and select again. Course notes, p. 27

Key benefits of PPM: the six to write, with the notes' “why PPM” points under each

  1. Strategic alignment: every project serves the strategy.
    • Managers can make business-based decisions.
  2. Better project selection: pick the projects that pay.
    • Predicts outcomes and plans for the projects that will give the best results.
  3. Efficient resource use: resources shared across the portfolio, not fought over.
    • More accurate estimating and management of the financial resources of a group of projects.
    • Reduces cost and increases productivity.
  4. Balanced risk and reward across the set.
    • Shows which project risks can offer the most reward.
  5. Visibility for senior management.
    • A global view of each project, to predict future problems.
    • Real-time monitoring of progress, with detailed data.
  6. Fewer failed and duplicated projects.
    • Enables people to succeed.

Project management versus project portfolio management (notes)

Project managementPortfolio management
Do projects rightDo the right projects
Applies knowledge, skills, tools and techniques to meet project goalsA collection of projects to meet the organisation's strategy
Directs a single project successfullySelects and executes the right projects for the organisation
Temporary, uniqueOngoing, performed every day
Does not make strategic plans or prioritise projectsMakes strategic plans and prioritises projects
Goal: complete one project and deliver its serviceGoal: look at all projects, improve return on investment, reduce cost
Smaller scale, more detailedLarge scale and more diffuse
  • The slides in one line: project management focuses on one project's path to completion; PPM considers every project and potential project for its fit with business goals, with a view of past, present and upcoming projects.

Types of PPM user (notes)

  • Execution-focused users: manage the technical side of execution; report progress and spending to sponsors and executives.
  • Portfolio-level users: build decision frameworks, select projects with them, plan and track the investments, and report.
In the exam
  • “Define PPM and its key benefits” (five sittings): the definition box, then the six benefits with their sub-points.
  • “Project management versus portfolio management”: the table, starting with do projects right versus do the right projects.
  • “Program: define it, how it differs, its strategic role” (2082 Bhadra): the full answer is at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Define the project portfolio management and what are the key benefits of project portfolio management? (2078 Bhadra Q1b, 2075 Chaitra Q1b)
  • What are the key benefits of project portfolio management? Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram. (2074 Ashwin Q2a, 2073 Shrawan Q1b)
  • Define “Program” in the context of project management. How does it differ from project and portfolio? Discuss its role in achieving strategic objectives of Project. (2082 Bhadra Q2a)
  • Explain about the project management and project portfolio management. Explain differences between them. (2081 Baishakh Q2)
  • Describe with comparison between the project management and project portfolio management. (2079 Baishakh Q5)
  • Define PMI framework. What are the key benefits of project portfolio management? (2075 Ashwin Q2b)
  • Compare project management with project portfolio management. Explain the characteristics of simple generic life cycle with necessary diagrams. (2072 Kartik Q3)

Answers: “What are the key benefits of project portfolio management?” Asked by name in at least five sittings.

How it decodes: Six words, six benefits, initials in order. It reads as the dream: a marriage, England, abroad, video calls, and then it fails. That is every Nepali parent’s plan, and the plan is a portfolio: several projects, one budget, one person watching all of them. Two B’s: Bihe is choosing which projects to take on, Bidesh is balancing risk across the ones you hold. England and bidesh are both abroad, so keep them apart: England is the money, bidesh is the gamble.

  • SSapana Strategic alignment. Every child serves aama’s sapana, and a project that does not serve the strategy gets stopped
  • BBihe Better project selection. An arranged bihe is project selection: cost benefit analysis, payback, NPV, risk level. With a horoscope
  • EEngland Efficient resource use. England fees eat most of the budget, so the rest is allocated across the portfolio, not fought over
  • BBidesh Balanced risk and reward. One child in bidesh is the big bet, the rest at home are safe. Balanced across the set, not inside one project
  • VVideo Visibility. One video call, every child on the screen at once. One view of everything under way, for senior management
  • FFail Fewer failed and duplicated projects. Fail is how the dream ends. The portfolio makes it end that way less often, and stops two projects doing the same thing

3.2The project management office

The project management office (PMO)

Definition A project management office is a group or department within an organisation that defines and maintains the standards of project management, and gives guidance and standards for executing projects. It can be internal or external.
  • A successful PMO combines good people, processes and tasks.
  • PMI's view: the PMO is a major catalyst for organisational excellence.

Benefits of a PMO (notes)

  • Strategic planning and governance.
  • Best practices and processes.
  • A common language and culture.
  • Resource management.
  • Project artefacts and tool set, created and maintained.

Types of PMO (notes)

  • By organisational exposure: enterprise PMO; organisational (departmental) PMO; special-purpose PMO.
  • Functional PMO: serves one functional area, such as information systems; main goal is resource management; may or may not manage projects.
  • Corporate (strategic) PMO: serves the whole company on corporate and strategic issues; manages projects only for cost reduction.
  • Customer group PMO: clusters common customers or projects for better customer management; acts like a company within a company, with permanent project managers.

The thirteen functions of a PMO (notes)

  1. Standardises estimating, planning, scheduling, controlling and reporting.
  2. Simplifies project management roles and responsibilities.
  3. Develops project management templates and methodology.
  4. Improves the methodology: recommends and implements changes.
  5. Identifies standards of project management.
  6. Identifies best practices.
  7. Strategic planning for project management.
  8. Training: coordinates or runs project management training.
  9. Knowledge transfer through coaching and mentoring.
  10. Assesses risks in projects.
  11. Plans disaster recovery for projects.
  12. Portfolio management: performs or takes part in it.
  13. Guards the organisation's project management intellectual property.
What it owns
PMO at the centre of a wheel of standards, policies, training, resources and processes
What it does
Projects are injected into the PMO office, which applies people, process and technology, and projects are delivered out the other side
A PMO owns the standards, policies, training, resources and processes. Projects go in, it applies people, process and technology, and delivered projects come out. Course notes, p. 30

Answers: “What are the functions of a Project Management Office?” Six headline functions that cover the thirteen.

How it decodes: Six words, six functions, initials in order. The joke is that a PMO is often accused of being exactly this, which is why the real functions are worth naming precisely.

  • SSome Standardises estimating, planning, scheduling, controlling, reporting
  • OOfficers Owns the methodology and the templates, and improves them
  • IIgnore Identifies standards and best practices
  • TTea Trains and mentors transferring knowledge through coaching
  • AAnd Assesses risk across projects, and plans for disaster recovery
  • GGossip Guards the intellectual property of project management in the organisation

3.3PMI and the PMI framework

PMI and the PMI framework asked 12×

Definition The Project Management Institute (PMI) is a U.S.-based, not-for-profit professional organisation for project management. It publishes the PMBOK Guide and considers the PMO a major catalyst for organisational excellence.

What PMI does for the profession (slides)

  • Standardisation: brings standards to the profession of project management.
  • Common language: one vocabulary of project management across the world.
  • Ethics: defines the principles of ethics and a code of conduct for professionals.
  • Network: brings project managers from many countries into one network.
  • Improvement: continuous improvement, knowledge sharing and network building.
  • Definition of the discipline: in its current guide, 10 knowledge areas, 5 process groups and 47 processes, each with defined inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs (your notes, following the older edition, say 9).
  • Certification (notes, chapter 14): entry-level CAPM and the professional PMP, among others.

How PMI relates to project management

  • PMI is the profession's body: it defines what project management is (PMBOK), certifies who practises it, and sets how they must behave (ethics).
  • Project management practice across the world follows its standard.

The PMI framework: the knowledge areas arranged into one structure (notes)

  • Stakeholders' needs and expectations: the starting point. A stakeholder is anyone with an interest in the project and its outcome: employees, customers, shareholders, suppliers, communities, governments.
  • Core knowledge areas: scope, time, cost and quality: they produce the project's specific objectives.
  • Facilitating knowledge areas: human resources, communication, risk and procurement: the means by which the objectives are achieved.
  • Integrative knowledge area: project integration management, which affects and is affected by all the others.
  • Tools and techniques: help in every knowledge area, most of all in the core ones; software helps, but the same techniques long worked with paper and pencil.
  • The result: project success.
PMBOK framework: stakeholder needs on the left, four core function areas above and four facilitating areas below project integration management, leading through tools and techniques to project success
The PMI framework: stakeholder needs and expectations on the left; the four core knowledge areas above and the four facilitating ones below project integration management; tools and techniques; and project success on the right. Course notes, p. 27

Why the framework “provides a basic structure for understanding project management” (2074 Chaitra)

  • It orders the whole discipline: every piece of project work falls into one of nine knowledge areas.
  • It separates ends from means: core areas set the objectives; facilitating areas achieve them.
  • It shows the linkage: integration ties the areas together, so a change in one is managed across all.
  • It starts from stakeholders and ends at project success, so every activity has a purpose.
  • It is shared: the same structure is used worldwide, giving a common language.
In the exam
  • “Explain the PMI framework” (six sittings): the five parts, then the figure.
  • “Define PMI”: the definition box. “Roles of PMI for the profession” (2080 Baishakh): the slides' list.
  • “Justify: the framework gives a basic structure” (2074 Chaitra): the justification list.
  • “Project management practice” (2069): end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain about the Project Management Institute (PMI) and describe the area of knowledge for the project manager to successfully completion of the project. (2080 Bhadra Q3, 2079 Baishakh Q3)
  • Define PMI. What are the drivers of the ICT projects success? (2081 Baishakh Q3)
  • What are the roles of PMI for the development of project Management profession? Discuss about different forms of organizational structure. (2080 Baishakh Q1c)
  • Describe PMI's framework for project management. List out common enablers of project success. (2079 Bhadra Q2a)
  • Write short notes on: a) Effective meeting conduction process b) PMI framework c) Seller selection criteria d) Tornado analysis (2078 Bhadra Q8)
  • Define PMI framework. What are the key benefits of project portfolio management? (2075 Ashwin Q2b)
  • "The Project Management Institute's Framework provides a basic structure for understand project management." Justify the statement. (2074 Chaitra Q2b)
  • Explain the Project Management Institute's (PMI) framework. (2072 Kartik Q2a)
  • What is project management institute (PMI)? How is it related to project management? Discuss PMI framework in relation with project management. (2070 Chaitra Q2a)
  • Explain about Project Management Institute Framework. (2070 Ashad Q4)
  • What does it mean by the term "project management practice"? Discuss project management framework as per the standard of Project Management Institute (PMI) along with the concept. (2069 Chaitra Q3)

Answers: “What are the roles of PMI for the development of project management profession?” (2080 Baishakh).

How it decodes: Five words, five roles, initials in order. The label is what the letter answers for, not the first word of the sentence in the notes: C is Certifies, not “credentials”. The slides' extra role, a worldwide network of project managers, rides on Prestige.

  • SSome Standard publishes the PMBOK Guide, so the profession shares one vocabulary
  • CCertificates Certifies practitioners: PMP for experienced managers, CAPM for associates
  • EEarn Ethics defines a code of ethics and professional conduct
  • RReal Research promotes it, and republishes the body of knowledge as practice evolves
  • PPrestige PMO treats it as the catalyst for organisational excellence

3.4What makes a project succeed or fail

Drivers and inhibitors of project success asked 5×

  • Drivers (enablers): the conditions that push a project towards success.
  • Inhibitors: the conditions that slow it down or sink it. Most are a driver turned upside down.

The eleven drivers of project success (notes and slides)

  1. Top management support.
  2. Clear goals and objectives.
  3. Client support.
  4. Realistic plan.
  5. Appropriate resources: the four M's: man, machine, material, money.
  6. Ownership.
  7. Formal methodology.
  8. Hard-working, focused staff.
  9. Standard and structured ICT support infrastructure.
  10. Effective communication.
  11. Experienced project manager.

The inhibitors of project success (notes, with the slides' additions)

  • Communication and leadership: poor communication; lack of leadership; lack of teamwork.
  • Goals: unclear expectations; conflicting objectives; changing business strategies.
  • Planning and analysis: poor up-front planning; poor feasibility study; poor requirement analysis.
  • Support: poor top management (executive) support; an inbuilt negative attitude towards IT.
  • Resources: inadequate resources; financial limitations; lack of historical data.

Drivers and inhibitors side by side

Driver of successThe inhibitor that mirrors it
Top management supportPoor top management support
Clear goals and objectivesUnclear expectations, conflicting objectives
Client supportFailure to coordinate with stakeholders
Realistic planPoor up-front planning, poor feasibility study
Appropriate resources (4M)Inadequate resources, financial limitations
OwnershipInbuilt negative attitude towards IT
Formal methodologyLack of historical data, poor requirement analysis
Hard-working, focused staffLack of teamwork
Standard, structured ICT infrastructureChanging business strategies
Effective communicationPoor communication
Experienced project managerLack of leadership, lack of skilled team members
  • Use the four M's wherever “appropriate resources” appears: four concrete words score better than one vague one.
In the exam
  • “Drivers of project success” or “common enablers” (five sittings): the eleven, a line each.
  • “Factors slowing project success” or “inhibitors”: the inhibitors list, or the table.
  • “With detailed explanations and examples” (2081 Bhadra): an example per driver is at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the key drivers of project success according to the PMI framework? Provide detailed explanations and examples of how these drivers contribute to the success of a project. (2081 Bhadra Q2a)
  • Define PMI. What are the drivers of the ICT projects success? (2081 Baishakh Q3)
  • Describe PMI's framework for project management. List out common enablers of project success. (2079 Bhadra Q2a)
  • Describe the drivers for the project success and factor that slowing the project the project success in detail. (2078 Bhadra Q2a)
  • Explain with example the concept of drivers of project success and inhibitors of project success. (2070 Chaitra Q2b)

Answers: “Describe the drivers for the project success” and “what are the common enablers of project success?” Asked in five sittings.

How it decodes: Eleven words, eleven drivers, initials in order. The story: a big thief in Chitwan, once the rakshi arrived, threw away his medicine, and ended up totally alone with an elephant. Two C’s: Chor is Clear goals, Chitwan is Client support. The two E’s are the last two words, ekdam eklai: Effective communication, then Experienced manager. The inhibitor list is this list negated, so one story answers both questions.

  • TThulo Top management support. Thulo manchhe, the big boss
  • CChor Clear goals and objectives. A chor always knows exactly what he is after
  • CChitwanma Client support
  • RRakshi Realistic plan
  • AAayepachhi Appropriate resources, the four M’s: man, machine, material, money
  • OOkhati Ownership
  • FFyaakyo Formal methodology
  • HHatti Hard working, focused staff. Works like a hatti
  • SSanga Standard, structured ICT support infrastructure
  • EEkdam Effective communication
  • EEklai Experienced project manager

Success criteria for projects, and obstacles asked 2×

  • Success criteria: the measures by which a project is judged a success. The notes split them into two families.
Technical: tangible, quantitativePeople: intangible, qualitative
Deadlines metCommitment
Performance specifications metCooperative attitude
Quality standards metPositive image and total project focus
Cost requirements metRisk evaluation
Resource constraints respected

Obstacles to project success (notes)

  • Planning: poor project planning and direction.
  • Communication: insufficient communication.
  • Management systems: no change, risk, financial or performance management.
  • Stakeholders: failure to coordinate with them.
  • Management: ineffective involvement of management.
  • People: lack of skilled team members.
  • Tools: poor or missing technology and tools.
In the exam
  • “Explain success criteria for projects” (2081, 2079, paired with the need for a WBS): the two families as a table; the WBS half is in chapter 7.
Asked in past papers
  • Describe the need of Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) and explain success criteria for projects. (2081 Baishakh Q4)
  • Describe the need work breakdown structure (WBS) and explain success criteria for projects. (2079 Baishakh Q4)

3.5Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 3.

What a program is, how it differs, and its role in strategy asked 1×

“Define ‘Program’ in the context of project management. How does it differ from project and portfolio? Discuss its role in achieving strategic objectives of project.”

2082 Bhadra

Only partly in the notes: slide 46 defines program, project and portfolio, but does not compare them or explain a program's strategic role.

  • Program: a group of related projects managed in a coordinated way to obtain benefits and control not available from managing them individually; it may include work outside those projects (slides).
  • Example: a national “digital government” program made of an e-passport project, a national ID project and an online payment project, managed together because they share data and infrastructure.
ProjectProgramPortfolio
What it isOne temporary, unique endeavourA group of related projectsAll projects, programs and processes
FocusDeliver a defined outputDeliver combined benefitsMeet strategic objectives
ScopeNarrow, fixedWider, evolves with the benefitsOrganisation-wide
TimeIts own life, then closesSeveral project livesContinuous
Success measured byOn time, on budget, to specificationBenefits realisedReturn on the whole investment
Managed byProject managerProgram managerPortfolio manager or PMO
QuestionAre we doing this right?Are these pulling together?Are we doing the right things?

The program's role in achieving strategic objectives

  • Translates strategy into projects: it takes one strategic goal from the portfolio and breaks it into a set of projects that together deliver it.
  • Manages interdependencies: shared data, infrastructure and deadlines are coordinated, so projects do not block or duplicate each other.
  • Shares resources: people, budget and vendors move between projects where they add most value.
  • Realises benefits: it measures and delivers the business benefit, which no single project can on its own.
  • Controls program-level risk and governance: one board, one set of standards, one escalation path.
  • Keeps alignment: when strategy changes, projects are added, reshaped or stopped at program level.

What “project management practice” means asked 1×

“What does it mean by the term ‘project management practice’? Discuss project management framework as per the standard of Project Management Institute (PMI) along with the concept.”

2069 Chaitra, 5 marks

Only partly in the notes: the framework is in the notes (p. 27 and 28), but the term “project management practice” is not explained.

  • Project management practice: the actual application of project management knowledge, processes, skills, tools and techniques to real projects.
  • “Good practice” (PMBOK's sense): there is general agreement that applying these skills, tools and techniques correctly improves the chance of success over a wide range of projects.
  • Not one size fits all: good practice does not mean every process is applied the same way to every project; the team decides what suits the project (tailoring, chapter 14).

What project management practice is made of

  • Processes: the five process groups.
  • Knowledge areas: the nine subjects of PMBOK.
  • Tools and techniques: WBS, CPM, PERT, earned value and the rest.
  • Professional responsibility: ethics and a code of conduct.
  • Continuous improvement: lessons learned feed the next project.
  • The framework part of the question: explain the PMI framework from the PMI card: stakeholders' needs, core, facilitating and integrative knowledge areas, tools and techniques, project success, with the figure.

How each driver contributes to success, with examples asked 1×

“What are the key drivers of project success according to the PMI framework? Provide detailed explanations and examples of how these drivers contribute to the success of a project.”

2081 Bhadra, 5 marks

Only partly in the notes: the notes and slides list the drivers, but give no explanations or examples.

DriverHow it contributesExample
Top management supportClears budget and removes blockers fastThe CEO approves overtime and a vendor contract within a week
Clear goals and objectivesEvery decision is judged against one target“Online admission live by Shrawan 1 for 5,000 applicants a day”
Client supportQuestions answered fast, less reworkThe client names a product owner who replies within a day
Realistic planDeadlines that can actually be metEstimates from past projects and a WBS, not a heroic guess
Appropriate resources (4M)Work never waits for inputsSkilled developers, test servers, licences and funds released on time
OwnershipPeople fix problems without being toldThe payment module's owner chases its defects
Formal methodologyPredictable steps, reviews and recordsScrum sprints with reviews every two weeks
Hard-working, focused staffAttention stays on one projectA dedicated team, not people split across five projects
Standard ICT infrastructureFewer environment problemsVersion control, stable test servers, automated builds
Effective communicationEveryone works from the same informationDaily stand-ups and a weekly status report
Experienced project managerRisks foreseen from past projectsPlans around the Dashain and Tihar staff shortage
  • Open with: PMI's view that success comes from meeting stakeholders' needs through the knowledge areas; the drivers are the conditions that make that possible.
  • Close with: remove any one driver and it becomes an inhibitor.

Core: scope, time, cost, quality. Facilitating: human resources, communication, risk, procurement. Integrative: integration.

Man, machine, material, money. Use them anywhere “appropriate resources” appears, especially in the drivers of project success.

Back to the PMI framework and drivers of success.

Chapter 4 · 4 hours · appeared in 14 of 22 sittings

Project management, life cycles and methodologies

Why organisations manage projects formally, PMI’s picture of phases and life cycles, how a project’s life differs from a product’s, the SDLC and the methodologies that carry it out, and the people and influences around a project.

What this chapter is about
  • Why project management pays: its ten advantages, and why no project can run in isolation.
  • PMI’s project management context: every project is cut into phases, each phase ends in deliverables and a stage gate, and the phases together form the project life cycle.
  • The project life cycle itself: the characteristics every life cycle shares, and how it looks in different fields.
  • Product life cycle versus project life cycle: the product lives far longer than the project that builds it.
  • The IT product development life cycle (SDLC), and the methodologies that carry it out, from waterfall to agile and lean.
  • The people and forces around a project: project influencers, key project members and stakeholders.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 1 defined a project and named its phases; this chapter studies the life cycle those phases form.
  • Chapter 2’s five process groups (initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing) are the same five phases seen as processes. Chapter 3’s PMI framework is where PMI’s “context” sits.
  • The methodology chosen here decides how scheduling (chapter 8) and quality and testing (chapter 10) are done in an IT project.
  • Key members lead into organisation structures (chapter 5); stakeholders come back in communications management (chapter 11), where the manage stakeholders process lives.
What you will learn
  1. Project management and its advantages
  2. Project management context as per PMI
  3. Characteristics of the project life cycle and life cycles in different fields
  4. Product life cycle versus project life cycle
  5. The SDLC
  6. System development methodologies: the models, choosing one, and comparing three
  7. Project influencers, key project members and stakeholders
  8. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • Product life cycle versus project life cycle: seven sittings, the most repeated question in this chapter.
  • Characteristics of the project life cycle, with a diagram: three sittings.
  • SDLC and the methodologies: three sittings (define SDLC and its role; the model you prefer and why; list the methodologies and compare three).
  • Key project members: two sittings. PM context as per PMI: two sittings. Stakeholders as a short note: two sittings.

4.1Project management and its advantages

Project management, and why it pays

Project management The application of knowledge, skills, tools and techniques to project activities to meet the project requirements (slides). The notes put it as the use of methods, techniques, skills, knowledge and experience to power the activities of planned projects; it involves project planning and monitoring.

The ten advantages of project management (notes p. 34, slide 53)

  • Resources and money: increased control of financial, physical and human resources; increased profit margins; lower costs.
  • Output and customer: higher quality outcome; enhanced reliability of solutions; improved customer relations.
  • People and work: improved productivity at work; better internal coordination; higher work morale.
  • Time: shorter development time.

Every advantage is something going up (control, quality, reliability, customer relations, profit, productivity, coordination, morale) or down (development time, cost). Recall them by the four groups above.

Why a project cannot run in isolation (notes p. 34)

  • Broad environment: a project operates inside a wider organisation, next to other projects, departments, customers and regulators.
  • Systems thinking: the project manager must see the project as one part of the whole organisation (the systems view of chapter 2).
  • Business fit: senior managers must make sure the project keeps supporting current business needs; a project that drifts away from them gets cancelled.

4.2Project management context as per PMI

Project management context as per PMI asked 2×

Project management context (as per PMI) As per PMI, a project is subdivided into phases (initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing) to decrease uncertainty. Each phase is marked by the completion of one or more deliverables, and the phases together make up the project life cycle (notes p. 34, slide 54).

The three terms PMI’s context is built on (slide 54)

  • Project phase: a division of the project, made so that uncertainty falls; each phase ends when one or more deliverables are complete.
  • Deliverable: a tangible, visible, verifiable work product, such as a feasibility report, a design document or working code. The notes: a product or service produced or provided as part of the project.
  • Project life cycle: a rational collection of project phases, with a definite beginning and end, which links the project to the ongoing operations of the performing organisation.

Stage gates (slide 56)

  • Also called phase exits or kill points.
  • At the end of each phase management reviews the key deliverables and the project performance.
  • The review decides whether the project continues to its next phase, and corrects errors if required. A project that no longer makes sense is killed here, cheaply, instead of failing later, expensively.
Stage gates between four phases drawn as arrows: concept, development, implementation and closure. Under each: the decision at its gate, idea approval, carry on, decision to kill the project; the plan, management plan, project plan, last work package; the deliverables, preliminary cost estimates and primary WBS, budgetary cost estimates and complete WBS, definitive cost estimates and performance report, lessons learned and customer acceptance; and the project manager’s perspective, formation, design, estimation and planning early, maturity, evaluation and termination late
PMI’s context in one picture: phases, the stage gate after each, and the deliverables each phase must produce before the gate lets it pass. Course slides, slide 55
PhaseGate decision after itPlanDeliverables
ConceptIdea approvalManagement planPreliminary cost estimates; primary WBS
DevelopmentCarry onProject planBudgetary cost estimates; complete WBS
ImplementationContinue, or kill the projectLast work packageDefinitive cost estimates; performance report
ClosureThe project endsManagement planLessons learned; customer acceptance
  • Estimates sharpen phase by phase: preliminary, then budgetary, then definitive. That is uncertainty falling, exactly what the phases are for.
  • The project manager’s perspective moves from formation, design, estimation and planning early on, to maturity, evaluation and termination later.

The five phases in brief (notes pp. 35, 36)

  • Initiation: decide what the project should accomplish. Two activities: develop the project charter and identify stakeholders (recorded in the stakeholder register). Once the charter is approved, the project is officially authorised.
  • Planning: about 50% of the whole process. Sets the scope and objectives, takes the outputs of initiation, and its outputs feed execution. Do not execute before the initial planning is finished, and keep revising the plans until execution starts.
  • Execution: carry out the activities defined in the project management plan: manage stakeholder expectations, coordinate people and resources. Actions here may change the plan and its documents.
  • Monitoring and controlling: track, review and regulate progress against the objectives; check that what is built follows the plan; spot changes from the plan and decide preventive action.
  • Closing: the notes group it with monitoring and controlling. The work is accepted by the customer and the lessons learned are recorded (the last column of the table).
Beyond your notes: the fuller PMI answer In the PMBOK Guide (1996 and 2000 editions), chapter 2 is titled “The Project Management Context”, and it has five parts. Your notes cover the first; this guide covers the rest elsewhere:
  1. Project phases and the project life cycle: this card and 4.3.
  2. Project stakeholders: 4.7.
  3. Organisational influences: organisational systems, cultures and styles, structure (chapter 5), and the project office (chapter 3).
  4. Key general management skills: leading, communicating, negotiating, problem solving, influencing the organisation (chapter 1).
  5. Social, economic and environmental influences: standards and regulations, internationalisation, cultural influences, sustainability.
In the exam
  • “Define PM context as per PMI” (2074 Ashwin, with key members): the definition, the three terms, and the stage gate figure.
  • “Explain project management context as per PMI” (2080 Bhadra): add the phase table and how the gates work; for a long answer, name PMBOK’s five context areas with a line each.
  • Always draw the phases with a gate after each one.
  • “The concept of the project life cycle according to PMI” (2082 Baishakh) is answered in chapter 1; this card is its background.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain project management context as per PMI. (2080 Bhadra Q4)
  • Define PM context as per PMI. Explain the role and responsibility of key project member. (2074 Ashwin Q2b)

4.3The project life cycle

Characteristics of the project life cycle asked 3×

Project life cycle A collection of project phases that defines what work will be performed in each phase, what deliverables will be produced and when, who is involved in each phase, and how management will control and approve the work produced in each phase (notes p. 35).

The characteristics (notes p. 37, slide 56)

  1. Passes through every phase: a project should successfully pass through each phase in order to continue on to the next.
  2. Each phase ends in a review of the key deliverables and project performance: the phase exit, stage gate or kill point, where management decides whether to continue and corrects errors.
  3. Cost and staffing: low at the start, higher toward the end (peaking in execution), and dropping rapidly as the project closes.
  4. Risk and uncertainty: highest at the start, because the probability of success is lowest then; they fall as the project proceeds and more becomes known.
  5. Stakeholder influence: the stakeholders’ ability to influence the final characteristics of the product and its final cost is highest at the start, and gets progressively lower as the project continues.
  6. Cost of change: low early, rising steeply as the project goes on (the notes’ diagram).
  7. Phases usually overlap (notes p. 40): they are rarely clean handovers.

Points three to six are one idea from four angles: early is cheap and uncertain, late is expensive and certain. Remember that sentence and you can regenerate them.

COST, STAFFING, RISK AND THE COST OF CHANGE The two crossing curves are the whole diagram: early is cheap and uncertain, late is expensive and certain. LEVEL TIME INITIATION PLANNING EXECUTION CLOSING cost and staffing risk and uncertainty cost of a change Planning is about half the total effort. Execution is the tallest part of the curve.
Graph over project time: stakeholder influence, risk and uncertainty start high and fall; the cost of changes starts low and rises; the two lines cross
The one sentence as a graph: stakeholder influence, risk and uncertainty start high and fall, while the cost of changes starts low and climbs. This is the diagram the question asks for. Course notes, p. 38
In the exam
  • “Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram” (2074 Ashwin, 2073 Shrawan): the definition, then the characteristics as numbered points.
  • Draw both graphs: cost and staffing across the phases, and stakeholder influence and risk falling while the cost of change rises.
  • “Simple generic life cycle” (2072 Kartik): the same answer, with the generic phases every project shares (initiation, planning, execution, closing, with monitoring and control running through them) named along the time axis.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the key benefits of project portfolio management? Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram. (2074 Ashwin Q2a, 2073 Shrawan Q1b)
  • Compare project management with project portfolio management. Explain the characteristics of simple generic life cycle with necessary diagrams. (2072 Kartik Q3)

Answers: “Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram.” Asked in 2074, 2073 and 2072.

How it decodes: six words, six characteristics, in order. The two C words pull opposite ways: the chulo fire rises and dies like cost and staffing, the chichyaain only gets louder like the cost of change.

  • PPahilo Phases each ending in a deliverable and a decision to continue. Pahilo, then the next one
  • CChulo Cost and staffing low at the start, peak in execution, drop sharply at the end. Like a chulo fire: small, blazing at dinner, then out
  • RRaakhda Risk and uncertainty highest at the beginning, falling as more becomes known. While it is still being put down, nobody knows if the spot is right
  • SSaasu Stakeholder influence highest at the start, because early decisions lock in later ones. The saasu has the most say before the chulo is fixed
  • CChichyaain Cost of change rises steeply as the project proceeds. Move it later and she screams louder
  • OOho Overlap phases usually overlap, they are rarely clean handovers

The life cycle in different fields, and the representative software life cycles

  • Every field names its phases differently, but the shape is the same: check the idea, design it, build it, hand it over and support it.

Project life cycles in different fields (notes p. 37)

FieldPhases, in order
ConstructionFeasibility study; planning and design; construction; turnover and start-up
PharmaceuticalsDiscovery and screening; preclinical development; registration workup; post-submission activity
Government officeFeasibility study; concept and technology development; system development and demonstration; production and deployment; support
DefenseStrategic planning; concept and technology development; system development and demonstration; production and deployment; support

Representative software life cycles (notes p. 41)

  • Spiral: proof of concept cycle; first build cycle; second build cycle; final cycle. Each cycle is one loop of the spiral model.
  • Waterfall: concept; analysis; requirements; design and development; programming; testing; verification; maintenance.
  • The IT product development life cycle in the syllabus is the SDLC.

4.4Product life cycle and project life cycle

Product life cycle versus project life cycle asked 7×

  • The idea that unlocks it: the product life cycle is the longer, outer thing, and one or more project life cycles live inside it.
Product Anything that can be offered to a market to solve a problem or to satisfy a want or need. It is not limited to physical objects: software, an app or a service is a product too (slide 57).
Product life cycle The stages a product passes through from conception to retirement (notes p. 40): its life from birth to death, and the course of its sales and profit over that lifetime (slides 59, 60).

The five stages (slides 60 to 63)

StageSalesCost per customerProfitCustomers targetedCompetition
Product developmentZeroInvestment highNegativeNone yetNone yet
IntroductionLowHighNegativeInnovatorsLittle
GrowthRising rapidlyAverageRisingEarly adoptersGrowing
MaturityPeakLowHighMiddle majorityHigh
DeclineDecliningLowDecliningLaggardsDeclining
  • Development: begins when the company develops a new product idea.
  • Introduction: the new product is first distributed and made available to buy.
  • Growth: sales start climbing quickly. Maturity: sales growth slows or levels off. Decline: sales fall.
THE PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE: SALES AND PROFIT Sales climb, peak in maturity and fall. Profit stays below zero until the product has paid back its development. SALES, PROFIT TIME 0 a project builds it here sales profit loss DEVELOPMENT INTRODUCTION GROWTH MATURITY DECLINE sales zero heavy investment low sales, losses innovators buy sales climb fast early adopters sales peak, high profit middle majority sales fall laggards Competition: little in introduction, growing in growth, high in maturity, falling in decline.

It follows a life, birth to old age, so it needs no mnemonic: develop, introduce, grow, mature, decline. The notes call the last stage retirement.

The project life cycle, for contrast (notes p. 40)

  • Phases: initiation, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing: the five process groups of chapter 2.

The differences (notes p. 40)

Product life cycleProject life cycle
LengthAlways longer than a project’sShorter than the product’s
RelationshipSuperset of the project life cycleCan be a subset, part of one or more product phases
EndingMay or may not endHas a definite end
PhasesDevelopment, introduction, growth, maturity, declineInitiation, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing
OverlapAlways sequential, never overlapPhases usually overlap
How manyCan contain more than one project life cycleA single project during its life cycle
A small circle labelled project life cycle inside a larger circle labelled product life cycle
The project life cycle sits inside the product life cycle: the product lives on long after the project that built it has closed. Course notes, p. 40

Product versus project, as the slides put it (slide 57)

ProductProject
Permanent, until decommissionedA beginning and an end date
Long-lived feature teamShort-term project team
Adaptive planning (iterative)Predictive planning (up front)
Continual improvementsOne-off delivery
Evolving customer needsProject requirements
Investment delivers benefits and KPIsInvestment delivers scope
In the exam
  • “How does a project life cycle differ from a product life cycle?” (six sittings): define both in a line each, draw the circle-inside-circle figure, then the six-row table from the notes. Add the slide 57 rows when the question carries five or more marks.
  • “What is product life cycle?” (2082 Baishakh): the definition and the five stages, with the sales and profit curve.
  • “Similarities and differences” (2076 Chaitra): your notes give only the differences; the similarities are answered at the end of this chapter.
  • “What are the phases in project life cycle?”, which comes with it four times, is answered in chapter 1; the five phases are also in 4.2.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the phases in project life cycle? How does project life cycle differ from product life cycle? (2080 Baishakh Q2a, 2076 Ashwin Q3a)
  • What are the phases in project life cycle? How does a project life cycle differ from product life cycle? (2082 Bhadra Q2b)
  • What is product life cycle? What are the existing system development methodologies? Compare three different methodologies. (2082 Baishakh Q2a)
  • Distinguish product life cycle with project life cycle. (2079 Bhadra Q2b)
  • What are the similarities & differences between product life cycle & project life cycle? Define & explain role of system development life cycle (SDLC) in ICT project management. (2076 Chaitra Q1c)
  • What are the phases in project life cycle? How does a project life cycle differ from a product life cycle? (2070 Ashad Q5)

4.5The SDLC: IT product development life cycle

The SDLC, and its role in ICT project management asked 2×

Software development life cycle (SDLC) The process used by the software industry to design, develop and test high quality software. It aims to produce software that meets or exceeds customer expectations and reaches completion within time and cost estimates (notes p. 38). The syllabus calls it the IT product development life cycle.
  • Phases and their order: the SDLC describes the phases of the software cycle and the order in which they run (slide 66).
  • Deliverables chain: each phase produces deliverables required by the next. Requirements become design, design becomes code, and testing verifies the code against the requirements. The testing team follows the software testing life cycle (STLC).

The six stages (notes p. 39)

  1. Planning and requirement analysis: the most important, fundamental stage. Plan the basic approach and study product feasibility in the economic, operational and technical areas; the technical feasibility study picks approaches with minimum risk.
  2. Defining requirements: define and document the product requirements and get the customer’s approval, in the SRS (software requirement specification).
  3. Designing the product architecture: the design approach defines the architecture models of the product.
  4. Developing the product: actual development starts; developers write the code for the modules.
  5. Testing the product: the code is compiled into a build and tested; defects are reported, tracked, fixed and retested until the product meets the quality standards in the SRS.
  6. Deployment: the tested product is released to the market and feedback taken; then it is maintained for the existing customers.
SDLC drawn as a loop: planning, defining, designing, building, testing, deployment
The SDLC as a loop: planning, defining, designing, building, testing, deployment. Course notes, p. 38

What the slides add (slides 68 to 71)

  • Requirement gathering asks: who will use the system, how will they use it, what data goes in, what data comes out? The result is a requirement specification document.
  • Design: system design specifies hardware and system requirements and the overall architecture; testers write the test strategy (what to test, how).
  • Implementation: work is divided into modules and coded; the longest phase.
  • Testing: unit, integration, system and acceptance testing, plus non-functional testing.
  • Deployment: customers first do beta testing; bugs are fixed, then final deployment. Maintenance: the real problems appear in use and are solved from time to time.
  • Every software process has four activities (slide 65): specification, development, validation, evolution.

The role of the SDLC in ICT project management (built from notes pp. 38, 39 and slide 66)

  • Structure: it breaks the work into phases in a fixed order, so the project can be planned, estimated and scheduled phase by phase.
  • Control points: every phase ends in deliverables the next phase needs, which gives natural points to review, approve and monitor progress.
  • Scope control: requirements are written in the SRS and approved by the customer before design, so everyone builds the same thing.
  • Lower risk: the feasibility study in the first stage chooses the approach with minimum risk before money is spent.
  • Quality: testing against the SRS continues until the quality standards are met.
  • Triple constraint: its aim is software that meets customer expectations within time and cost estimates.
  • Coordination: developers, testers (STLC) and managers share one map of the work.
  • After release: deployment and maintenance are planned, not improvised.
SDLC is the framework, a methodology carries it out The SDLC is a framework describing the phases involved in developing and maintaining information systems. A formalised approach to implementing the SDLC is called a methodology (notes p. 41). Waterfall, Royce, iterative and incremental, agile and lean are methodologies, not life cycles.

Predictive and adaptive SDLC (slide 109)

  • Predictive: assumes you can predict the complete workflow. The final product is fully understood, and cost, scope and timeline are fixed in the early phases. Waterfall is the common example: phases one at a time, no overlap.
  • Adaptive: a mix of incremental and iterative development. Features are added incrementally and refined from feedback, so the work adapts to changing requirements. Agile and the other iterative methods are adaptive.
In the exam
  • “What is a Software Development Life Cycle?” (2069 Chaitra): the definition, the six stages, and the loop figure.
  • “Define and explain the role of SDLC in ICT project management” (2076 Chaitra): the definition, the stages in a line each, then the role points.
  • Keep the distinction: the SDLC is the framework, a methodology carries it out. Writing only about waterfall loses the definition mark.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the similarities & differences between product life cycle & project life cycle? Define & explain role of system development life cycle (SDLC) in ICT project management. (2076 Chaitra Q1c)
  • What is a Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC)? Explain any one of its kind that you prefer in developing an IT project. Why? (2069 Chaitra Q4)

4.6System development methodologies

What a methodology is, and the existing methodologies asked 1×

Methodology, and software process model A methodology is a formalised approach to implementing the SDLC (notes p. 41). A software process model is an abstraction of the development process: it specifies the stages and the order in which they are performed (slide 72).

The existing methodologies

  • In the notes (p. 41): waterfall; Royce (conventional waterfall); iterative and incremental (evolutionary); agile; lean.
  • In the slides (slide 72): waterfall; V-model; incremental; iterative; spiral; prototype; Rational Unified Process (RUP); Microsoft Solutions Framework (MSF); agile methodologies.
  • The agile family (slides 89 to 108): Scrum, Kanban, lean software development, extreme programming (XP), feature driven development (FDD), test driven development (TDD), DSDM and Crystal.
FamilyModelsThe idea
Sequential, plan drivenWaterfall, Royce, V-modelEach phase once, in order
Iterative and incrementalIncremental, iterative, evolutionary, spiral, prototypeBuild and refine in cycles
Process frameworksRUP, MSFPhases plus disciplines, tailored per project
Agile and leanAgile (Scrum, Kanban, XP, FDD, TDD), leanShort cycles, working software, no waste
In the exam
  • “What are the existing system development methodologies?” (2082 Baishakh): the list, grouped into the four families, a line on each. The cards below give that line; the comparison of three closes the section.
Asked in past papers
  • What is product life cycle? What are the existing system development methodologies? Compare three different methodologies. (2082 Baishakh Q2a)

Sequential models: waterfall, Royce and the V-model

Waterfall model (notes pp. 42, 43, slide 74)

  • What: a sequential model that divides development into pre-defined phases. Each phase must be complete before the next begins, with no overlap: a linear-sequential life cycle model. The cascade from phase to phase gives it its name.
  • Plan driven: all activities are planned and scheduled before work starts; each phase produces documents that must be approved before the next begins.
  1. Requirements analysis and definition: all requirements captured and documented in a requirement specification.
  2. System and software design: the system design is prepared from the requirements; it specifies the hardware and system requirements and the overall architecture.
  3. Implementation and unit testing: the system is built as small programs (units), each tested for its functionality.
  4. Integration and system testing: the units are integrated and the whole system is tested for faults and failures.
  5. Deployment: after functional and non-functional testing, the product is deployed in the customer environment or released to the market.
  6. Maintenance: issues found in the client environment are fixed by releasing patches.
Waterfall staircase: feasibility study, requirement analysis and specification, design, coding and unit testing, integration and system testing, maintenance
Waterfall: each stage runs once, top to bottom, and hands its documents down to the next. Course notes, p. 42
AdvantagesDisadvantages
Simple and easy to understand and useNot suitable for projects with changeable requirements
Easy to manage, because the model is rigidNot suitable for large projects
Works well for smaller projects with very well understood requirementsHigh amounts of risk and uncertainty
Process and results are well documentedAn error can be fixed only during its own phase
  • The slides add: little customer involvement after the specification; no way to see or try the software until the last phase. Use it only when requirements are completely understood and unlikely to change radically.

Royce model: the conventional waterfall (notes p. 44)

  • What: the waterfall model, but with feedback.
  • How: each step (evaluation, requirements, analysis, design, development, validation, deployment) can feed back to the step before it, and complex feedback loops reach further back.
  • Why it matters: it admits that problems found late must travel back upstream.
Royce model: evaluation, requirements, analysis, design, development, validation and deployment as a staircase, with a feedback loop from each step to the one before it and dashed complex feedback loops reaching further back
Royce’s conventional waterfall: the same staircase, but every step can feed back to the step before it, and some problems loop further back. Course notes, p. 44

V-model (slide 76)

  • What: an extension of the waterfall model. Instead of moving down in a line, the steps bend upward after coding, forming a V.
  • The point: it pairs each development phase with its testing phase: requirement analysis with acceptance testing, system design with system testing, architecture design with integration testing, module design with unit testing. Each test is designed while its design phase happens.
  • Axes: left to right is time or project completeness; top to bottom is the level of abstraction, coarsest at the top.
V-model: the left arm goes down through requirements, system design, architecture design and module design to coding at the bottom; the right arm climbs back up through unit testing, integration testing, system testing and acceptance testing, each test level linked across to the design level it checks
The V-model: the left arm designs down to coding, the right arm tests back up, and every test level checks the design level opposite it. Course slides, slide 75

Iterative and incremental models: incremental, iterative, evolutionary, spiral, prototype

Incremental model (slide 78)

  • What: the product is designed, implemented and tested incrementally, a little more added each time, until it is finished, meaning it satisfies all its requirements.
  • How: each increment passes through requirements, design, coding and testing, and each release adds function to the previous one.
  • Roots: it combines the waterfall model with the iterative philosophy of prototyping, and it covers both development and maintenance.
Incremental model: three rows of analysis, design, code and test, each delivering increment 1, 2 and 3
Incremental: the system arrives in pieces, and each piece gets its own analysis, design, code and test. Course notes, p. 44

Iterative model (slide 80)

  • What: it does not start with a full specification. It starts with a simplified set of user features, which gains complexity and features until the system is complete.
  • How: build part of the software, review it to find further requirements, and repeat, delivering a new version each iteration.
  • Documentation: light projects may let the code be the main documentation; critical ones still need a formal specification.

Evolutionary methodology: iterative and incremental together (notes pp. 44, 45)

  • What: combines the iterative design method with the incremental build model.
  • How: start with a comparatively small task or component, and add increments in each cycle until the desired product is reached.
AdvantagesDisadvantages
Initial product delivery is fasterMore resources may be required
Customers get important functionality earlyNeeds effective planning of iterations
Lower initial delivery costMore management attention is required
Customer feedback on each incrementNot suitable for small projects
Supports changing requirementsManagement complexity is high
Testing and debugging are easy

Spiral model (slide 82)

  • What: a model built for risk handling, drawn as a spiral with many loops.
  • Loops are phases: each loop is one phase of development. The number of loops is not fixed; the project manager decides it from the project risks, so the manager’s role is central.
  • Each loop runs four quadrants: determine the objectives and alternatives; identify and resolve the risks; develop and test the next version; review and plan the next phase.
THE SPIRAL MODEL Every loop is one phase, and every loop crosses the same four quadrants. The spiral widens as the cost adds up. 1 2 3 4 1 Determine objectives, alternatives and constraints 2 Identify and resolve risks risk analysis, prototypes 3 Develop and test the next version 4 Review, and plan the next phase One loop = one phase Each loop runs quadrants 1, 2, 3, 4 in turn, then the next loop starts wider: more work done, more cost spent. The loops in the notes (representative spiral life cycle) 1 Proof of concept cycle 2 First build cycle 3 Second build cycle 4 Final cycle Why it exists: risk handling The number of loops is not fixed. The project manager decides it from the risks, loop by loop.

Prototype model (slide 84)

  • What: before the actual software is developed, a working prototype is built: a toy implementation with limited functionality.
  • Why: users evaluate the developers’ proposals and try them before implementation, get the “actual feel” of the system, and understand their own requirements better.
  • Suits complex and bigger systems.
Prototype model: requirement gathering, quick decision, build prototype, customer evaluation of the prototype, and a loop back through refining the requirements with customer suggestions; once the customer accepts, iterative development follows through design, implementation, testing and maintenance
Prototype model: build a quick prototype, let the customer try it, refine and rebuild until it is accepted, then develop the real system. Course slides, slide 83

Process frameworks: RUP and MSF

Rational Unified Process, RUP (slide 86)

  • What: a software development process from Rational, a division of IBM.
  • Four phases, each involving business modelling, analysis and design, implementation, testing and deployment:
  1. Inception: the idea is stated; the team decides whether the project is worth pursuing and what resources it needs.
  2. Elaboration: the architecture and the required resources are evaluated further; possible applications and costs are considered.
  3. Construction: the software is designed, written and tested.
  4. Transition: the software is released to the public, and final adjustments are made from end-user feedback.
Rational Unified Process: four phases across the top, inception, elaboration, construction and transition, and the disciplines down the side, business modelling, requirements, analysis and design, implementation, test, deployment, configuration and change management, project management and environment; each discipline is a hump showing when its effort peaks, across numbered iterations along the bottom
RUP: the four phases run left to right, every discipline runs through all of them, and each hump shows when that discipline is busiest. Course slides, slide 85

Microsoft Solutions Framework, MSF (slide 88)

  • What: a set of principles, models, disciplines, concepts and guidelines for delivering IT solutions, from Microsoft.
  • Not only applications: it also fits deployment, networking and infrastructure projects.
  • Methodology neutral: it does not force waterfall or agile; the team decides.
  • Its cycle (slide 87): envisioning, planning, developing, stabilising, deploying, each closed by a milestone: vision and scope approved, project plans approved, scope complete, release readiness approved, deployment complete.
Microsoft Solutions Framework process as a wheel: envisioning, planning, developing, stabilising and deploying, with a milestone between each: vision and scope approved, project plans approved, scope complete, release readiness approved, deployment complete
MSF as a cycle of five phases, each closed by a milestone that must be approved before the next begins. Course slides, slide 87

The agile model

Agile An iterative approach to project management and software development that helps teams deliver value to customers faster (slide 90). The notes: a combination of the iterative and incremental process models (p. 45).
  • Small builds: the product is broken into small incremental builds, delivered in iterations.
  • Short iterations: each typically lasts one to three weeks.
  • Cross-functional teams work simultaneously in every iteration on planning, requirements analysis, design, coding, unit testing and acceptance testing.
  • A working product is shown to the customer and important stakeholders at the end of each iteration.
  • No big bang: requirements, plans and results are evaluated continuously, so the team responds to change quickly (slide 90).
Agile iterations: iteration 1, 2 and 3 drawn as loops, each running planning, requirement analysis, designing, building and testing, with an arrow of two to three months between iterations
Agile as the notes draw it: every iteration runs the whole cycle, planning to testing, and ends in a working product. The figure marks two to three months between iterations; the notes’ text says one to three weeks, and that is the figure to write. Course notes, p. 46

The Agile Manifesto: four core values (slides 91, 92)

Valued moreValued less
Individuals and interactionsoverprocesses and tools
Working softwareovercomprehensive documentation
Customer collaborationovercontract negotiation
Responding to changeoverfollowing a plan

The twelve principles (slide 93, from the principles behind the Agile Manifesto)

  • Customer: customer satisfaction first; welcome changing requirements; frequent delivery.
  • People: business and development working together; motivated individuals at the heart of projects; face-to-face as the prime communication method.
  • Progress: working software is the primary measure of progress; aim for sustainable progress; continuous attention to what matters.
  • Team: keep it simple; create self-organising teams; make time for reflection.
Advantages (notes p. 46)Disadvantages (notes p. 46)
Minimum resource requirementsFew formal documents cause confusion over crucial decisions taken across phases
Suitable for fixed or changing requirementsLack of documentation makes maintaining the finished project hard
Little or no planning requiredNot suitable for handling complex dependencies
Easy to manageDepends heavily on the customer: an unclear customer drives the team the wrong way
Flexibility for developers
An umbrella labelled agile, sheltering Scrum, DSDM, Crystal, XP, Kanban, Lean and FDD
Agile is an umbrella: Scrum, XP, Kanban, Lean, FDD, DSDM and Crystal are all agile methods. Course slides, slide 89

Agile methods: Scrum, Kanban, TDD and FDD

Scrum (slides 94 to 101)

  • What: a lightweight framework, based on agile principles, that helps people, teams and organisations generate value through adaptive solutions for complex problems.
  • How: the product owner orders the work into a product backlog; the team turns a selection into an increment of value during a sprint of one to four weeks; the team and stakeholders inspect the result and adjust for the next sprint; repeat.
  • Why: building incrementally and iteratively reduces risk, raises visibility and exposes hidden problems early.
SCRUM: ONE SPRINT The product owner orders the work, the team turns a slice of it into a working increment, then everyone inspects and adapts. Product backlog all the work, ordered Sprint planning pick this sprint's work Sprint backlog the sprint's tasks Sprint 1 to 4 weeks daily scrum Increment working product Sprint review show it to the stakeholders Sprint retrospective improve the way of working inspect and adapt, then start the next sprint Product owner orders the product backlog, maximises value Scrum master keeps the Scrum process, removes obstacles Developers self-organising, cross-functional, build it
  • Three pillars (slide 95): transparency, making the important parts of the process visible to those responsible for the outcome; inspection, timely checks of progress toward the sprint goal to catch unwanted variances; adaptation, adjusting the process as soon as possible to limit further deviation.
  • Five values (slide 96): courage, focus, commitment, respect, openness.
  • The team (slide 97): product owner (manages the product backlog, optimises the product value); Scrum master (manages the Scrum process, removes obstacles); development team (self-organising, interdisciplinary).
  • Five events (slide 98): the sprint, sprint planning, the daily scrum, the sprint review, the sprint retrospective.
  • Three artifacts (slide 99): the product backlog, the sprint backlog, the product increment.

Kanban (slides 102, 103)

  • What: Japanese for “visual card” (literally signboard). A method of just-in-time delivery that does not overload the team.
  • How: the whole process, from task definition to delivery, is displayed on a board for stakeholders to see, and team members pull work from a queue when they have capacity.
  • Principles: visualise the workflow; just in time (build only what you need); limit work in process (WIP); manage and optimise the flow (cut lead time, make policies explicit, improve together).
  • Not an inventory control system: a pull scheduling system that says what to produce, when, and how much.
A KANBAN BOARD Kanban means visual card. Work is pulled into a column only when that column has room under its WIP limit. BACKLOG TO DO IN PROGRESS WIP 3 TESTING WIP 2 DONE report export user roles search dark mode login page payment API signup form invoice PDF email alerts full: nothing new pulled in profile page SMS gateway full database home page auth tokens work flows left to right: each column pulls the next card from the column before it

Test driven development, TDD (slide 107)

  • What: test cases are written first, to specify and validate what the code will do. If a test fails, new code is written to pass it, keeping the code simple and bug-free.

Feature driven development, FDD (slide 108)

  • What: development organised around designing and building features, with short, specific phases per feature: domain walkthrough, design inspection, promote to build, code inspection.
  • Five activities: develop an overall model; build a feature list; plan by feature; design by feature; build by feature.

The lean model

Lean model A systematic approach to identifying and eliminating waste through continuous improvement, based on the principle of just in time production. It aims to increase the speed of software development and decrease its cost (notes p. 47).
  • Origin (slide 105): lean began in manufacturing, to optimise the production line, minimising waste and maximising customer value. Software shares the conditions: a repeatable process, quality standards, and a group of specialised workers.

The seven principles (notes p. 47)

  1. Eliminate waste: deliver only what the end user needs; remove anything that adds no value, such as unnecessary code or quality issues.
  2. Build in quality: tactics such as pair programming and test driven development.
  3. Amplify learning: knowledge one engineer gains is shared with the whole team, through code review and meetings.
  4. Decide as late as possible: experiment and learn before committing to irreversible decisions.
  5. Deliver as fast as possible: launch quickly, get feedback fast, improve; fail fast and learn.
  6. Motivate the team (the slides: empower the team).
  7. Optimise the whole (the slides: see the whole): examine the process from start to finish so the whole value stream is efficient.
Advantages (notes p. 48)Disadvantages (notes p. 48)
Increased customer satisfactionHigh implementation cost
Increased productivityKeeping a high level of team cohesion
Improved use of work areas
Improved ability to react to changes

Choosing a model: requirements and technology

  • Two questions decide it (notes p. 41, slide 110): are the requirements stable or unstable, and is the technology well known or novel?
  • Stable requirements, well-known technology: plan based iterative model.
  • Stable requirements, novel technology: agile and plan based iterative model.
  • Unstable requirements, well-known technology: lean and plan based iterative model.
  • Unstable requirements, novel technology: agile and lean based iterative model.
  • The pattern: novel technology brings in agile, unstable requirements bring in lean, and plan based work stays wherever something is stable or known.
A two by two table: requirements stable or unstable across the top, technology novel or well known down the side. Stable and well known: plan based iterative. Stable and novel: agile and plan based iterative. Unstable and well known: lean and plan based iterative. Unstable and novel: agile and lean based iterative
Choosing a model from two questions: are the requirements stable, and is the technology well known? Course notes, p. 41

Comparing three methodologies, and the one you prefer asked 2×

  • Pick waterfall, iterative and incremental, and agile: they run from rigid to flexible, so the comparison writes itself.
WaterfallIterative and incrementalAgile
ApproachLinear, sequential phases, no overlapSmall parts built and refined in cyclesIterative and incremental, in short timeboxed iterations
RequirementsFixed and well understood up frontCore known, refined per incrementExpected to change throughout
DeliveryOne release at the endSeveral increments, first one earlyA working product every 1 to 3 weeks
Customer involvementAt the start and the endFeedback on each incrementContinuous, heavy
RiskHigh risk and uncertaintyLower, spread across incrementsLow, problems show each iteration
DocumentationHeavy, well documentedModerateLight; working software preferred
Planning and managementAll planned before starting; easy to manageNeeds careful iteration planning; complexLittle up-front planning; easy to manage
ResourcesPlanned onceMore may be requiredMinimum
Best forSmall projects, stable requirementsLarge systems with a known coreChanging requirements, close customer
Weak spotErrors fixed only in their phase; no software until lateNot for small projectsPoor documentation; needs a clear customer

“Explain any one you prefer in developing an IT project, and why”

  • Prefer agile for a typical ICT project, and justify it with the project’s features, not with taste.
  • Requirements move: clients in an ICT project rarely know every requirement at the start; agile suits fixed or changing requirements.
  • Early, visible progress: a working product every one to three weeks, shown to the customer, so misunderstandings surface in weeks, not at the end.
  • Lower risk: each short iteration tests the riskiest parts first.
  • Lean on resources and easy to manage (notes p. 46), with flexibility for the developers.
  • Know its limits: it needs an involved, clear customer and some documentation for maintenance. For a small system with fixed, well-understood requirements, waterfall is the better choice, and saying so earns marks.
In the exam
  • “Compare three different methodologies” (2082 Baishakh): one line of definition for each, then the table; draw the waterfall staircase if time allows.
  • “Explain any one of its kind that you prefer, why?” (2069 Chaitra): define SDLC, explain the chosen model with its figure, then the reasons above.
Asked in past papers
  • What is product life cycle? What are the existing system development methodologies? Compare three different methodologies. (2082 Baishakh Q2a)
  • What is a Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC)? Explain any one of its kind that you prefer in developing an IT project. Why? (2069 Chaitra Q4)

4.7Project influencers, key project members and stakeholders

Project influencers: organisational process assets and environmental factors

Organisational process assets, OPA (notes p. 48)

  • What: valuable information, documents and knowledge tools the organisation accumulates over time; simply, the lessons learned from the past.
  • Grows with experience: the more projects an organisation runs, the more assets it has: processes, directives and procedures, and a business knowledge base.

Enterprise environmental factors, EEF (notes pp. 48, 49)

  • What: the forces that drive change in the business.
  • Internal factors: arise inside the organisation: its events, people, systems, structures and conditions; corporate mission, culture and leadership style; staff and budget.
  • External factors: arise outside but cause internal change: customers, competition, the economy, technology, political and social conditions, resources, suppliers.
  • Linked to chapter 2: the project environment.
Project influencers split into enterprise environmental factors, internal and external, and organisational process assets, processes, directives and procedures, and the business knowledge base
Two kinds of influence on every project: the environment it runs in, and the assets the organisation has built up. Course notes, p. 48

Key project members and their responsibilities asked 2×

  • Project team: a group of people performing activities to accomplish a common goal, made of skilled workers from various domains (notes p. 49).
  • The right mix: a successful team needs the right combination of skills, abilities and personality types.
  • No project moves in the required direction without each of its key members (slide 111).

Project sponsor (notes p. 49, slide 111)

  • Resources and money: assures the availability of essential resources; approves the budget.
  • Authority: leads the project board; has the power to make decisions and settle disputes and conflicts.
  • Support: rallies support from stakeholders and executive management for the team.
  • Most involved during initiation and planning.
  • Typically: executive director, director finance.

Project manager (notes p. 50, slide 112)

  • Overall responsibility for project success, keeping perspective.
  • Plans: develops and maintains the detailed plan; detailed planning and control; delivers in time with the plan.
  • People and partners: recruits project staff; coordinates partners and working groups.
  • Issues and scope: records and manages project issues; resolves cross-functional issues; manages scope.
  • Performance: monitors progress and performance; manages resource use; sets and maintains project standards and policies.
  • Win-win: makes sure every stakeholder gains.
  • Typically: senior manager, general manager.

Functional manager (notes p. 49, slide 114)

  • Support services: provides the support the project needs, including purchases.
  • Administration: manages HR and administration of the performing organisation.
  • In IT projects the finance manager often does this job.

Project team member (slide 113)

  • Delivers: contributes to the overall objectives; completes individual deliverables; provides expertise.
  • Works with users to establish business needs, and documents the process.

System administrator (notes p. 50)

  • Technical operation: data migration; interfaces with other systems; reporting configuration and deployment; set-up and maintenance of security.
  • Testing and strategy: develops and runs technical testing programs; contributes to technical strategy, policy and procedures.

Project champion (notes p. 50, slide 113)

  • Technical voice: helps focus attention on the project from the technical perspective.
  • Who: someone with a great deal of technical expertise and industry knowledge: technical manager, CTO, technical lead.
MemberIn one lineTypically
Project sponsorPays, approves, decides, settles disputesExecutive director, director finance
Project managerPlans, runs and controls the whole projectSenior manager, general manager
Functional managerSupports: purchases, HR, administrationFinance manager in IT projects
Project team memberBuilds the deliverablesSpecialists from each domain
System administratorRuns the systems: data, interfaces, security, testingIT operations staff
Project championChampions it technicallyTechnical manager, CTO, technical lead

Recall the six by what each does for the project: pays (sponsor), runs (project manager), supports (functional manager), builds (team member), keeps the systems (system administrator), champions (champion).

In the exam
  • “Explain the roles and responsibilities of key project members” (2074 Ashwin, 2071 Chaitra): a line on what a project team is, then each member with three or four responsibilities and the typical candidate. The summary table is a good close.
Asked in past papers
  • Define PM context as per PMI. Explain the role and responsibility of key project member. (2074 Ashwin Q2b)
  • Describe project management? Explain the roles and responsibilities of key project members. (2071 Chaitra Q2b)

Project stakeholders and stakeholder management asked 2×

Stakeholder Any individual, group or party that has an interest in an organisation and the outcomes of its actions. Common examples: employees, customers, shareholders, suppliers, communities and governments (notes p. 28).
  • In a project: the sponsor, project manager, team, functional managers, customers and end users, suppliers, and anyone the project affects.
  • Their needs and expectations are the starting point of PMI’s framework (chapter 3).

Types of stakeholders (notes p. 69)

  • Primary: involved in the organisation’s monetary transactions (customers, shareholders, employees).
  • Secondary: invested in its social transactions (communities, media, the public).
  • Key: help the organisation make strategic decisions, minimise risk and grow; they have significant influence or importance within it.

Stakeholders through the project

  • Identify them in initiation: identifying stakeholders is one of the two initiation activities, and they are recorded in the stakeholder register (notes p. 35).
  • Analyse them: stakeholder analysis identifies the individuals or groups likely to affect or be affected by the proposed system, and sorts them by impact (notes p. 68).
  • The analysis records: name and organisation; role on the project; unique facts; level of influence and interest; suggestions for managing the relationship and the nature of reports.
  • Plan communication: who needs what information, when they need it, and how it will be given to them (notes p. 143).
Stakeholder management: the manage stakeholders process The management of communications to satisfy the needs of, and resolve issues with, project stakeholders. The project manager is responsible for managing stakeholders (notes p. 147, slide 276).
InputsTools and techniquesOutputs
Communication management plan; organisational process assetsCommunication methods; issue logsResolved issues; approved change requests; approved corrective actions; updated organisational process assets; updated project management plan
  • Communication methods (slide 277): face to face; telephone calls; email and other electronic tools. The choice depends on each stakeholder’s intentions, likings and experience.
  • Issue log: each stakeholder issue is recorded, given an owner and a date, and tracked until resolved.

The power and interest grid (a standard tool, not in your notes: it plots the “level of influence and interest” the notes’ analysis records)

POWER AND INTEREST GRID Place each stakeholder by the power they hold and the interest they take. The quadrant says how to engage them. KEEP SATISFIED high power, low interest e.g. senior management, a regulator MANAGE CLOSELY high power, high interest e.g. the sponsor, the key client MONITOR low power, low interest minimum effort, e.g. the general public KEEP INFORMED low power, high interest e.g. end users, the project team POWER HIGH LOW INTEREST LOW HIGH Stakeholder management 1 Identify stakeholder register, initiation 2 Analyse influence and interest: this grid 3 Plan communication who needs what, when, how 4 Manage and monitor methods, issue log, resolve
In the exam
  • Short note, “Project stakeholders” (2070 Ashad): definition, examples, the three types, and identifying them in the stakeholder register.
  • Short note, “Stakeholder management” (2081 Bhadra): the manage stakeholders definition, the project manager’s responsibility, the four steps (identify, analyse, plan communication, manage and monitor), communication methods, and the grid.
Asked in past papers
  • Write Short Notes on: a) Stakeholder Management b) Scope Creep c) Future Trends in Project Management d) Balanced Scorecard e) Risk management strategies (2081 Bhadra Q8)
  • Write short note on: a) Project stakeholders b) Project management information system c) Critical Chain Scheduling d) Categories of Risk e) Balanced Score Card f) Constructive Cost Model (COCOMO) (2070 Ashad Q16)

4.8Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 4.

Similarities between the product life cycle and the project life cycle asked 1×

“What are the similarities & differences between product life cycle & project life cycle?”

2076 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: page 40 and slide 57 give the differences, but no similarities.

  • Both are life cycles: a sequence of phases or stages with a beginning, describing how something evolves over time.
  • Both start from an idea: a product idea begins the product life cycle, a project idea begins the project life cycle, and both are checked for feasibility first.
  • Both follow a rise and fall: sales rise, peak and fall over a product’s life; cost and staffing rise, peak and fall over a project’s life.
  • Both have decision points: stage gates decide whether a project continues; a product is reviewed stage by stage to continue, improve or withdraw it.
  • Both must be planned, monitored and controlled, with resources (the four M’s) allocated to each stage.
  • Both serve stakeholders and customers, and both exist to create value for the organisation.
  • Both use feedback and lessons learned to improve the next project or the next version of the product.
  • They are linked: the product’s development stage, and each later upgrade, is carried out as a project, so one product life cycle contains one or more project life cycles.

Then the differences: the six-row table in 4.4.

Steps: define the business objectives; collect project ideas; select the best projects; validate portfolio feasibility; execute and manage the portfolio.

Differences: project management does projects right, portfolio management does the right projects; one project versus the organisation’s whole collection; temporary versus ongoing; no strategic planning versus strategic planning and prioritising.

Back to portfolio management.

Chapter 5 · 2 hours · appeared in 14 of 22 sittings

Project and organisational structure

Why a project must be seen as one system inside its organisation, the three sphere model, the forms an organisation can take, and how each form shapes the project manager’s authority and the project’s outcome.

What this chapter is about
  • The system view: a project is one system inside a larger organisational system, studied through systems philosophy, systems analysis and systems management.
  • The three sphere model: the business, organisational and technological questions to answer before any system is built or changed.
  • Organisation structure: what it is, and its forms: functional, projectized, matrix (weak, balanced, strong) and composite.
  • How the structure influences the project: the project manager’s authority, the resources, the budget and the team.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 4 said a project cannot run in isolation; this chapter shows the organisation it runs in.
  • Chapter 4’s key members (sponsor, functional manager, project manager) are arranged differently by each structure, and that arrangement decides who holds power.
  • Chapter 2’s environment and systems thinking become formal here as the system view.
  • Communication (chapter 11) runs along the reporting lines the structure draws.
What you will learn
  1. The system view of project management
  2. The three sphere model
  3. Organisation structure and its forms
  4. Functional, projectized and matrix organisations
  5. Comparing the structures and how structure influences projects
  6. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • System view with the three sphere model: five sittings, usually as one question.
  • Types of organisational structure: four sittings; comparing them (functional against matrix, or all three): four sittings.
  • Matrix organisation and its types: three sittings; functional pros and cons: two sittings.
  • How structure influences projects: two sittings.

5.1System view of project management

The system view of project management asked 5×

  • Organisation: a group of people with different knowledge and skills, working together to achieve an organisational goal (notes p. 51).
  • No project runs in isolation: it operates in a broad organisational environment, so the project manager must take a holistic, system view: understand how the project sits inside the larger organisation (notes p. 51, slide 117).
System A set of interacting components working within an environment to fulfil some purpose (slide 117).
Project management system An organised set of tools and procedures for helping managers and team members achieve the project objectives (notes p. 51, slide 118).
The general project system
The general project system: inputs, resources, go into the process, project management, which gives the outputs, results
With constraints and mechanism
Project system showing constraints and mechanism: inputs, the business need and requirements, go into project management and come out as outputs, the project deliverables, product or services; constraints of time, cost, quality and scope press from above, and the mechanism of people, tools and techniques, and environment supports it from below
The system view in two pictures: a project turns inputs into outputs, squeezed by its constraints and powered by its people and tools. Course slides, slide 118

The three parts of the system view (notes p. 51, slides 119, 120)

  1. Systems philosophy: view things as systems: interacting components working within an environment to fulfil some purpose.
  2. Systems analysis: a problem-solving approach that requires:
    • defining the scope of the system;
    • dividing it into components;
    • identifying and evaluating its problems;
    • examining alternative solutions;
    • identifying a satisfactory solution.
  3. Systems management: addressing the business, technological and organisational issues before creating or making changes to systems. This is the three sphere model.

The three essences of the system view (notes p. 51, slide 121)

  • Structured approach: an organisational structure.
  • Disciplined approach: coordinated management processes.
  • Defined approach: purposefully defined inputs and outputs for each process.
  • Example: a hospital information system is not just software. Seen as a system, it touches billing and funding, the doctors and nurses who must use it, and the servers and network it runs on. Missing any one of these sinks the project.
In the exam
  • “What is system view of project management?” (four sittings, always with the three sphere model): why a project needs it, the project management system definition, the three parts, and the project system figure.
  • “Define system philosophy” (2082 Baishakh): the one-line definition, the system definition behind it, and an example.
Asked in past papers
  • What is system view of project management? Explain about three sphere model of system management. (2079 Bhadra Q3a, 2078 Bhadra Q7a, 2075 Ashwin Q4a, 2074 Ashwin Q3b)
  • Define system philosophy. Explain on various types of organizational structures. Compare three different organizational structures. (2082 Baishakh Q2b)

The three sphere model for systems management asked 5×

Three sphere model Systems management looks at every project through three spheres, business, technological and organisational, and answers each sphere’s questions before a system is created or changed (notes p. 52).
  • Business sphere: what are the answers to the business goals?
    • How much will it cost? Where are the funds?
    • Who are the stakeholders? What will the profit be?
  • Technological sphere: the hardware and software issues to be resolved.
    • Which technology will be used, and why? Which software, hardware and network are required?
    • Proven or obsolete technology? Where will technical support come from? How will the project cope with technological change?
  • Organisational sphere: the issues involving the stakeholders.
    • What are the tangible and intangible benefits? The long and short term effects?
    • What skills and facilities are required? How will resources be mobilised? What resource development (training) is needed?
Three overlapping circles, business, organization and technology, each with its questions. Business: how much cost, where are the funds, who are the stakeholders, what will be the profit. Organization: what are the tangible and intangible benefits, the long and short term effects, what skills and facilities are required, how resources will be mobilised, what resource development is required. Technology: which technology and why, which software, hardware and network, proven versus obsolete technology, where to get technological support, how to cope with technological changes
The three spheres, each with the questions systems management must answer before a system is built or changed. Course notes, p. 52
  • Example: a college gives every student a laptop. Business: what does it cost, who pays, will it attract students? Technology: which laptops, what network and software, who repairs them? Organisation: how do teachers change their classes, who trains the students, who supports them?
  • Why the model exists: teams attend to the technology and neglect the organisation, so a technically correct system arrives that nobody adopts. Many IT failures are organisational, not technical.
In the exam
  • “Explain about three sphere model of system management” (four sittings): the diagram, each sphere with three or four of its questions, and an example.
  • “How does system management address business, technological and organizational concerns before creating or making changes to system?” (2081 Baishakh): the same model in the question’s own words. Answer each concern with its sphere’s questions, then the example.
Asked in past papers
  • What is system view of project management? Explain about three sphere model of system management. (2079 Bhadra Q3a, 2078 Bhadra Q7a, 2075 Ashwin Q4a, 2074 Ashwin Q3b)
  • How does system management address business, technological and organizational concerns before creating or making changes to system? (2081 Baishakh Q5)

5.2Organisation structure and its forms

Organisation structure, and its forms asked 4×

Organisation structure The division of labour, plus the patterns of coordination, communication, workflow and formal power that direct organisational activities (notes p. 52). The slides: the top-level view of the “structure of ownership” and the “main line of reporting order” (slide 122).
  • Division of labour: work is subdivided into separate jobs assigned to different people.
  • Coordinating work activities: so that everyone works together harmoniously.

The forms (notes p. 52, slide 122)

  1. Functional organisation: grouped by specialisation; projects run inside departments.
  2. Projectized (pure project) organisation: projects are units of their own.
  3. Matrix organisation: project lines cut across the functional departments; weak, balanced or strong.
  4. Composite organisation (slides 122, 129): a mixed structure. For example, a mainly functional organisation sets up a dedicated, projectized team for one critical project while its other projects stay inside departments.
  • One variable separates them: how much authority the project manager has, compared with the functional manager. Answer that and every advantage and disadvantage follows.
ONE VARIABLE EXPLAINS ALL FIVE STRUCTURES How much authority does the project manager have, compared with the functional manager? PROJECT MANAGER AUTHORITY, RISING FUNCTIONAL MANAGER AUTHORITY, FALLING Functional Weak matrix Balanced Strong matrix Projectized little or none coordinator shared PM rules full authority 0 percent 0 to 25 15 to 60 50 to 95 85 to 100 TEAM ON PROJECT The middle three are the matrix: weak, balanced, strong, in rising order of project manager authority.
In the exam
  • “Define organization structure” (2075 Ashwin): the definition, with division of labour and coordination.
  • “Explain, describe or discuss the different types of organisational structures” (2082 Baishakh, 2081 Bhadra, 2080 Baishakh, 2075 Ashwin): the forms, then each one with its chart and its advantages and disadvantages, from the three cards below.
Asked in past papers
  • Define system philosophy. Explain on various types of organizational structures. Compare three different organizational structures. (2082 Baishakh Q2b)
  • Describe the different types of organizational structures, specifically focusing on functional and matrix organizations. Discuss how each type influences project management practices and outcomes, providing specific examples. (2081 Bhadra Q2b)
  • What are the roles of PMI for the development of project Management profession? Discuss about different forms of organizational structure. (2080 Baishakh Q1c)
  • Define organization structure. What are the different organizational structures and which type of structure do you fell is the most effective in ICT project? (2075 Ashwin Q4b)

Functional organisation asked 2×

  • What: a common type of structure in which the organisation is divided into smaller groups by specialisation: production, marketing, finance and so on (notes p. 53).
  • An upgrade to line organisation: it overcomes line organisation’s weaknesses by fully using the principle of specialisation.
  • Functional authority: one person heads many workers, and each head is a specialist in the job.
  • In a project (slide 123): the head of department acts as the project manager, or a project coordinator is named with very limited authority.
Functional organisation chart: CEO over four departments, with projects A, X, P and B sitting inside individual departments
Functional: each project lives inside a department, so the functional manager is the boss. Course notes, p. 53
Advantages (notes p. 53)Disadvantages (notes p. 54)
Groups employees by functional skill, for a higher degree of performanceViolates unity of command: workers are under many heads, not one
Increases the efficiency of workers and staffQuick decisions are hard: the functional manager must report to top authority
Reduces the burden on top managersProblems and difficulties of multiple command
Greater scope for training and development of employeesNot as easy to understand as line organisation
Better control and supervisionEmployees are treated as machines
No duplication of work, since each department is different; clear job descriptionsConflicts may encourage indiscipline
In the exam
  • “Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of a functional organizational structure in project management” (2082 Bhadra): the definition, the chart, the table, then a verdict: strong for projects that stay inside one department, weak for cross-functional ones, because the project manager has little or no authority.
  • “Most projects follow functional structure: agree?” (2069 Chaitra) is answered at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of a functional organizational structure in project management. (2082 Bhadra Q3a)
  • Most of the project follows functional organizational structure. If you agree, justify. (2069 Chaitra Q5)

Projectized organisation

  • What: also called the pure project organisation. Unlike the functional form, the project is separate from the functional units (notes p. 54).
  • Full authority: the project manager has a line organisation of their own, with project authority and responsibility; projects report directly to the head of the organisation.
  • Resources: most of the organisation’s resources are involved in project work; team members report directly to the project manager or provide support services to several projects (slide 124).
  • The weak spot: coordinating with the departmental functions.
Projectized organisation chart: CEO over departments 1 to 3 and projects A and B as units of their own
Projectized: each project is a unit of its own beside the departments, and reports straight to the head of the organisation. Course notes, p. 54
Advantages (notes p. 54)Disadvantages (notes p. 55)
Focus on the project objectivesDuplication of facilities and effort
Clear authorityLack of job security when the project ends
Effective communicationProject-specific benefits can cause conflict between project and non-project staff
Labour used as requiredUseful for large projects only

Matrix organisation, and its types asked 3×

  • What: the modern type, set up to face the challenges of fast-changing markets; it mobilises the organisation’s resources in a systematic manner (notes p. 55).
  • Two directions: reporting lines run both vertically (functions) and horizontally (projects).
  • Two bosses: each employee reports to at least one project manager and one functional manager. The functional manager has the administrative duties; the project manager is responsible for work assignment (slide 125).
  • Best of both: it takes the advantages, and some weaknesses, of both the functional and the projectized structure.
Matrix organisation chart: CEO over four departments, with project manager 1 and project manager 2 running horizontally across staff from every department
Matrix: project managers cut across the departments, so each person answers to two bosses, the functional manager and the project manager. Course notes, p. 56

The three types of matrix (notes p. 55, slides 126 to 128)

  • Weak matrix: the project manager is a project coordinator with limited authority, who facilitates the project. The functional manager assigns the work; the project manager negotiates.
  • Balanced matrix: power is balanced between the project manager and the functional manager. The project manager assigns staff to the project according to its needs; the functional manager provides all the support.
  • Strong matrix: similar to a projectized organisation. Full-time project managers with considerable authority, and full-time project administrative staff; the project manager rules, though members still sit under functional managers.
WEAK, BALANCED AND STRONG MATRIX Same departments each time. What changes is who leads the project band, and how much authority they hold. WEAK MATRIX Chief executive Functionalmanager Functionalmanager Functionalmanager staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff project band: staff coordinate it themselves PM: a coordinator, low authority Budget: the functional manager BALANCED MATRIX Chief executive Functionalmanager Functionalmanager Functionalmanager staff staff staff staff staff PM staff staff staff a PM sits inside one department PM: shared power, low to moderate Budget: mixed STRONG MATRIX Chief executive Functionalmanager Functionalmanager Manager ofproject mgrs staff staff staff staff staff staff PM PM PM PMs have a department of their own PM: full-time, moderate to high Budget: the project manager
Advantages (notes p. 56)Disadvantages (notes p. 56)
Shares resources efficientlyCostly to maintain, with many managers
Decision making is balanced and flexiblePossible confusion over authority and responsibility
Staff communicate across boundariesDual reporting adds confusion and causes conflict
Flexible use of resourcesResources must be held for the whole project, however long it takes
Fast response to changeProblems when functional and project managers do not coordinate
Strong project coordination
In the exam
  • “Show different types of matrix organizational structure” (2080 Baishakh): “show” means draw. Draw the three charts, then a line on each.
  • “Explain various types of matrix organization” (2072 Kartik): the three types, with who holds the power in each.
  • “Explain a matrix organization structure with its advantages and disadvantages” (2070 Ashad): the definition, the chart, the table.
Asked in past papers
  • Show different types of matrix organizational structure. (2080 Baishakh Q2b)
  • Explain various types of matrix organization. (2072 Kartik Q2c)
  • Explain a Matrix Organization Structure with it's advantages and disadvantages. (2070 Ashad Q6)

5.3Organisational structure influences on projects

Comparing the structures asked 4×

Functional versus matrix (built from notes pp. 53 to 57 and slide 130)

FunctionalMatrix
BasisGrouped by specialisationFunctions plus projects cutting across them
ReportingVertical, within the departmentVertical and horizontal: two bosses
PM authorityLittle or noneLow (weak) to high (strong)
PM rolePart-time coordinatorPart-time (weak) to full-time (balanced, strong)
BudgetFunctional managerFunctional manager, mixed, or project manager, by type
ResourcesStay inside one departmentShared efficiently across projects
CommunicationWithin departmentsAcross boundaries
Decisions and changeSlow: up the functional lineBalanced, flexible, fast response to change
CostLow: no duplicationHigh: many managers
Main problemMultiple functional heads, weak project authorityDual reporting: confusion and conflict
Best forRoutine work, single-department projectsSeveral projects sharing scarce specialists

Three structures side by side

FunctionalMatrixProjectized
PM authorityLittle or noneLimited to high, by typeHigh to almost total
Team members on the projectVirtually none full-time0 to 95%, by type85 to 100%
Who manages the budgetFunctional managerMixedProject manager
PM rolePart-timePart-time to full-timeFull-time
Team after the projectNever left the departmentReturns to the functionNo home: job insecurity
Key advantageSpecialisation, control, no duplicationShared resources, flexibilityFocus, clear authority
Key disadvantageSlow decisions, multiple commandTwo bosses, costlyDuplication, large projects only
In the exam
  • “Compare: functional vs. matrix organization” (2076 Chaitra, 2075 Chaitra): a line defining each, a small chart of each, then the first table.
  • “Compare three different organizational structures” (2082 Baishakh): the second table, with the three charts.
  • “Which structure is most effective in an ICT project?” (2075 Ashwin) is answered at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Define system philosophy. Explain on various types of organizational structures. Compare three different organizational structures. (2082 Baishakh Q2b)
  • Compare the followings: a) Functional vs. Matrix organizational structure b) Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools c) Seller (contractor) selection processes vs. contract closure processes d) Cause and effect analysis versus Tornado analysis in project risk management (2076 Chaitra Q5)
  • Compare the followings: a) BOQ document vs. RFP document b) Status reporting vs. progress reporting c) Functional vs. matrix organization d) Boxplot vs. histogram analysis (2075 Chaitra Q5)
  • Define organization structure. What are the different organizational structures and which type of structure do you fell is the most effective in ICT project? (2075 Ashwin Q4b)

How organisational structure influences projects asked 2×

  • The structure is the frame: it is the top-level view of the “structure of ownership” and the “main line of reporting order” for the project (notes p. 57).
  • It sets the project manager’s authority; whatever that authority, the project manager still needs a disciplined and definite approach.
Project characteristicFunctionalWeak matrixBalanced matrixStrong matrixProjectized
PM’s authorityLittle or noneLimited (low)Low to moderateModerate to highHigh to almost total
Resource availabilityLittle or noneLowLow to moderateModerate to highHigh to almost total
Who manages the budgetFunctional managerFunctional managerMixedProject managerProject manager
Team members working on the projectVirtually none0 to 25%15 to 60%50 to 95%85 to 100%
PM’s rolePart-timePart-timeFull-timeFull-timeFull-time
Common title for the PMProject coordinator or leaderProject coordinator or leaderProject manager or officerProject or program managerProject or program manager
PM’s administrative staffPart-timePart-timeFull-time (slides: part-time)Full-timeFull-time
  • Sources: notes p. 57 (authority, team members, role, title, staff) and slide 130 (authority, resource availability, budget, role, staff). They disagree only on the balanced matrix’s administrative staff; either is accepted if you name it.

How each type shapes practice and outcome, with examples

  • Functional: the project manager is a part-time coordinator and decisions travel up the functional line. Example: the finance department upgrades its accounting software with its own staff. Outcome: strong specialist quality, but any work needing other departments is slow.
  • Weak matrix: staff from several departments, but the coordinator must negotiate for every hour of their time. Example: a bank’s IT and marketing staff build a mobile app part-time. Outcome: cheap, but delays whenever the departments’ own work comes first.
  • Balanced matrix: the project manager plans and assigns work, the functional managers supply the people. Example: a software company runs several client projects that share its testers and database experts. Outcome: specialists used efficiently, but two-boss conflicts need settling.
  • Strong matrix: a full-time project manager with budget control borrows specialists. Example: a telecom operator rolls out a new billing system. Outcome: fast decisions, while staff keep a functional home.
  • Projectized: the project manager has a dedicated team and full authority. Example: a contractor builds a hydropower plant, or an IT firm runs a years-long national ID system. Outcome: focus and speed, but duplicated facilities and job insecurity at the end.
  • What changes with the structure: authority and decision speed, how resources are obtained, who controls the budget, the communication lines, the team’s motivation and career path, and the kind of conflict the project manager must handle.
In the exam
  • “Explain how organizational structures influence projects” (2074 Ashwin): the frame sentence, the table, and the authority diagram in 5.2.
  • “Discuss how each type influences project management practices and outcomes, providing specific examples” (2081 Bhadra): the table, then the type-by-type examples.
Asked in past papers
  • Describe the different types of organizational structures, specifically focusing on functional and matrix organizations. Discuss how each type influences project management practices and outcomes, providing specific examples. (2081 Bhadra Q2b)
  • What are the major causes of failure of the ICT project? Explain how organizational structures influence projects? (2074 Ashwin Q3a)

5.4Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 5.

“Most projects follow the functional structure”: agree, and justify asked 1×

“Most of the project follows functional organizational structure. If you agree, justify.”

2069 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: page 53 calls functional a common type and lists its advantages, but does not argue whether most projects follow it.

  • Agree, with a qualification. By number, most projects are run inside functional organisations, but the structure suits only some of them.

Why most projects are functional

  • Most organisations exist for operations, not projects: banks, hospitals, ministries and factories are organised by function, so their projects arise inside departments.
  • No new structure is needed: the project uses the existing departments, so there is no extra cost and no duplication of work.
  • Specialists are already grouped: deep expertise, clear job descriptions and career paths, and better control and supervision (notes p. 53).
  • Many projects are small and internal: a payroll upgrade in HR, or a new course in a college department, fits naturally inside one function.
  • Common in Nepal: government offices and most private firms are functional, so their projects follow the same structure.

The qualification

  • Cross-functional projects suffer: the project manager has little or no authority, decisions are slow, and work crossing departments meets multiple command (notes p. 54).
  • So large or fast-changing projects, most ICT projects among them, move to a matrix or to a dedicated project team (a composite structure).
  • Conclusion: most projects do follow the functional structure, and it is the right choice for small, single-department projects; for cross-functional ones it is followed out of habit, not because it is best.

The most effective structure for an ICT project asked 1×

“What are the different organizational structures and which type of structure do you feel is the most effective in ICT project?”

2075 Ashwin

Not in the notes: they describe each structure but do not recommend one for ICT projects.

  • Answer: a matrix, balanced or strong, for most ICT organisations; projectized for a very large, dedicated ICT project.

Why matrix

  • ICT projects are cross-functional: developers, testers, network engineers, database administrators, security staff and business analysts. A matrix draws them from their functions without duplicating them.
  • Specialists are scarce: one security expert can serve several projects at once.
  • Technology and requirements change fast: the matrix gives a fast response to change and strong project coordination (notes p. 56).
  • Staff keep a functional home: their skills stay current, and they return to it after the project, avoiding the job insecurity of a projectized team.
  • A strong matrix gives the project manager a full-time role, budget control and enough authority to deliver.

When the others fit

  • Projectized: one very large, long, high-value ICT project, such as a national ID or core banking system, with a team dedicated for years.
  • Functional: a small job inside the IT department, such as upgrading the email servers.
  • Making the matrix work: define roles clearly, agree priorities between project and functional managers, and keep a single escalation path to settle two-boss conflicts.

Strong matrix. Weak, balanced, strong is the order of rising project manager authority.

In a functional organisation the functional manager controls the budget, and the project manager has little or no authority. That one fact produces most of the disadvantages of the functional form.

Back to how structure influences projects.

Sponsor pays, approves and decides; project manager runs the project; functional manager supports it; team member builds; system administrator runs the systems; project champion is its technical voice.

At a stage gate (phase exit, kill point) management reviews the phase’s deliverables and performance and decides whether the project continues.

Back to key project members and PM context as per PMI.

Chapter 6 · 2 hours · appeared in 9 of 22 sittings

Project management process groups

What a process is, the five groups PMI sorts every project management process into, how the groups overlap inside a phase and where a project manager’s time goes, and how the groups map onto the knowledge areas.

What this chapter is about
  • Processes: every piece of project management work is a process with inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs.
  • The five process groups: initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing.
  • Overlap: the groups are not phases; all five run inside every phase, overlapping in time.
  • Mapping: each process belongs to one process group and one knowledge area, giving the grid PMI draws.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 2 introduced the process groups and the knowledge areas of PMBOK; this chapter joins them into one grid.
  • Chapter 4’s life cycle has phases in sequence; this chapter shows the process groups repeating inside each phase.
  • Chapters 7 to 13 take the knowledge areas one by one; each process met there sits in one cell of this chapter’s grid.
What you will learn
  1. Processes, and the five process groups
  2. How the groups overlap in a phase, and where the time goes
  3. Mapping the process groups to the knowledge areas
  4. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • The concept of the process groups: six sittings, as a question or a short note.
  • Their relation to the knowledge areas, or the mapping: three sittings, sometimes with two processes and their inputs, tools and outputs.
  • Life cycle against process groups (concepts, overlap, coordination, comparison): two sittings.

6.1Project management processes

Processes, and the five process groups asked 8×

Process A sequence of steps taken to achieve a particular goal. Every process is described by its inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs (notes p. 58).
  • Inputs: documents, plans, designs, artifacts.
  • Tools and techniques: the mechanisms applied to the inputs.
  • Outputs: documents, products, services, knowledge, artifacts.

For a successful project (notes p. 58)

  1. Select the appropriate processes required to meet the project objectives.
  2. Use a well-defined, flexible method to satisfy the requirements.
  3. Establish and maintain communication and engagement with stakeholders.
  4. Follow the requirements to meet stakeholder needs and expectations.
  5. Balance the competing constraints of scope, schedule, budget, quality, resources and risk to produce the specified product, service or result.
Project management processes, and process groups Project management processes are concerned with describing and organising the work of a project (notes p. 58). When they are grouped logically they form process groups: for example, all the processes needed to define a new project or phase make up the initiating process group, all planning processes the planning group, and so on (slide 132).

The five process groups (notes pp. 58, 59)

  1. Initiating: recognise when a project or phase should begin; the processes that define a new project or phase.
  2. Planning: design and maintain a plan that leads to successful completion; establish the scope and define the course of action to meet the objectives.
  3. Executing: coordinate people and resources to follow the plan; complete the work defined in the project plan.
  4. Monitoring and controlling: monitor and measure progress and take the right action when necessary; track, review and regulate progress and performance, and identify corrective actions.
  5. Closing: analyse the completion of the project or phase and its acceptability; finalise all activities across all groups to close it formally.
Initiation, planning, execution and closure in a row, with monitoring and controlling arrows looping around planning and execution, and a note on what each group does
The process groups as a cycle: initiation, planning, execution and closure, with monitoring and controlling looped around planning and execution, feeding corrections back. Course notes, p. 16
  • They form a loop, not a line: planning and executing feed each other, and monitoring and controlling surrounds both, sending corrections back into planning.
Process group interactions: an initiating processes arrow enters a large circle labelled monitoring and controlling processes; inside it, planning processes and executing processes loop into each other; a closing processes arrow leaves on the right
How the groups interact: initiating starts it, planning and executing feed each other in a loop, monitoring and controlling surrounds them both, and closing ends it. Course slides, slide 133
  • “Project driven” process groups: the five groups above are the project management processes, the ones that drive and organise the project itself. PMBOK sets them apart from product-oriented processes, which create the product and depend on the field (writing code, pouring concrete). This distinction is PMBOK’s, beyond your notes.
In the exam
  • “Discuss the concept of project management process groups” (2075 Ashwin, 2070 Chaitra, 2070 Ashad, 2080 Bhadra, 2069 Chaitra, and a 2076 Chaitra short note): the process definition with ITTO, the five groups a line each, and the loop figure.
  • “What are the project driven process groups?” (2076 Chaitra): the five groups, as the processes that describe and organise the project’s work.
  • “Concepts of project life cycle and process groups as per PMI” (2081 Bhadra): the life cycle definition from chapter 4, then this card.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain the concepts of project life cycle and process groups as per the PMI definitions. Justify the overlaps of different life cycle stages and process groups within various project phase. Explain how effective coordination between these process groups contributes to project success. (2081 Bhadra Q3)
  • Discuss about project process groups. (2080 Bhadra Q6)
  • Explain briefly about 5 process group relating any project concerning your discipline. (2080 Baishakh Q2c)
  • What are the project driven process groups? Explain with sketching required diagrams & mapping of project management. (2076 Chaitra Q2a)
  • Write short notes on: a) Project management process groups b) Statement of works (SOW) c) Pareto chart d) PM-BOK (2076 Chaitra Q7)
  • Write the concept of project management process groups. How is it related to project management knowledge areas? (2075 Ashwin Q2a)
  • Discuss the concept of project management process groups (PGs). How is it related to project management knowledge area? Give the example of two processes with necessary inputs, tools and techniques and outputs. (2070 Chaitra Q3a)
  • Discuss the concept of project management process groups (PGs). List down two processes of project management process group with their inputs, tools and techniques and output. (2070 Ashad Q7)
  • Discuss about Project Management Process Groups. (2069 Chaitra Q6)

How the process groups overlap in a phase, and where the time goes asked 2×

  • Process groups are not phases: a phase is a stage of the project in time; a process group is a kind of work. All five groups run inside every phase: each phase has its own initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, and closing.
  • They overlap in time (notes p. 59, slide 134): initiating rises and falls first; planning peaks next; executing is the tallest curve in the middle; monitoring and controlling runs across the whole phase; closing rises only at the end.
PROCESS GROUPS OVERLAP, THEY ARE NOT PHASES All five run inside every phase. Monitoring and controlling never stops. ACTIVITY TIME WITHIN ONE PHASE Initiating Planning Executing Monitoring and controlling, throughout Closing A phase has its own initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and closing. That is why the groups overlap.
  • Why they overlap: the output of one group is the input of the next, so each starts before the last has finished; planning keeps being revised while work is executed; monitoring and controlling never stops.

Percentage of time spent on each process group (notes p. 59)

  • Executing takes most of the time: 82% for ordinary project managers, 69% for the best (“alpha”) project managers.
  • The best plan twice as much: 21% of their time on planning, against 11%. Good planning saves execution time.
  • The rest is small: initiating 1 to 2%, monitoring and controlling 4 to 5%, closing 2 to 3%.
Bar chart of the percentage of time spent in each process group. Other project managers: initiating 1, planning 11, executing 82, monitoring and controlling 4, closing 2. Alpha project managers: initiating 2, planning 21, executing 69, monitoring and controlling 5, closing 3
Where the time goes: the best (alpha) project managers spend about twice as long planning, 21% against 11%, and less executing, 69% against 82%. Course notes, p. 59
In the exam
  • “Justify the overlaps of different life cycle stages and process groups within various project phase” (2081 Bhadra): draw the overlap graph and give the reasons; the full justification is at the end of this chapter.
  • “Compare project life cycle phases versus process groups” (2082 Baishakh) is answered at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: i) Formal versus informal communication ii) Qualitative versus quantitative risk assessment iii) Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis iv) Project life cycle phases versus various process groups (2082 Baishakh Q3)
  • Explain the concepts of project life cycle and process groups as per the PMI definitions. Justify the overlaps of different life cycle stages and process groups within various project phase. Explain how effective coordination between these process groups contributes to project success. (2081 Bhadra Q3)

6.2Mapping the process groups to the knowledge areas

Mapping the process groups to the knowledge areas asked 4×

  • Knowledge areas give the detailed description of the processes; process groups say when in the flow of the project each process happens (notes p. 60).
  • One grid: every process belongs to exactly one knowledge area and one process group. The knowledge areas cross several process groups.

The mapping in your notes (notes p. 60: PMBOK 2000, nine knowledge areas, 39 processes)

Knowledge areaInitiatingPlanningExecutingControllingClosing
IntegrationProject plan developmentProject plan executionIntegrated change control
ScopeInitiationScope planning; scope definitionScope verification; scope change control
TimeActivity definition; activity sequencing; activity duration estimating; schedule developmentSchedule control
CostResource planning; cost estimating; cost budgetingCost control
QualityQuality planningQuality assuranceQuality control
Human resourceOrganisational planning; staff acquisitionTeam development
CommunicationsCommunications planningInformation distributionPerformance reportingAdministrative closure
RiskRisk management planning; risk identification; qualitative risk analysis; quantitative risk analysis; risk response planningRisk monitoring and control
ProcurementProcurement planning; solicitation planningSolicitation; source selection; contract administrationContract closeout

The mapping in your slides (slides 135, 136: PMBOK sixth edition, ten knowledge areas, 49 processes)

Knowledge areaInitiatingPlanningExecutingMonitoring and controllingClosing
IntegrationDevelop project charterDevelop project management planDirect and manage project work; manage project knowledgeMonitor and control project work; perform integrated change controlClose project or phase
ScopePlan scope management; collect requirements; define scope; create WBSValidate scope; control scope
SchedulePlan schedule management; define activities; sequence activities; estimate activity durations; develop scheduleControl schedule
CostPlan cost management; estimate costs; determine budgetControl costs
QualityPlan quality managementManage qualityControl quality
ResourcePlan resource management; estimate activity resourcesAcquire resources; develop team; manage teamControl resources
CommunicationsPlan communications managementManage communicationsMonitor communications
RiskPlan risk management; identify risks; perform qualitative risk analysis; perform quantitative risk analysis; plan risk responsesImplement risk responsesMonitor risks
ProcurementPlan procurement managementConduct procurementsControl procurements
StakeholderIdentify stakeholdersPlan stakeholder engagementManage stakeholder engagementMonitor stakeholder engagement

What the grid shows

  • Planning is the biggest group: 21 of the 39 processes in the notes’ version, 24 of 49 in the slides’ version. Every knowledge area has planning work.
  • Controlling appears almost everywhere: nearly every knowledge area is monitored and controlled.
  • Integration ties it together: in the slides’ version it is the only area in all five groups.
  • Initiating and closing are small: a charter and stakeholders at the start, closing the project and its contracts at the end.
  • Which version to draw: the notes’ version matches the nine knowledge areas of chapter 2; the slides’ version is the current PMBOK, which adds stakeholder management as a tenth area. Either earns the marks if you name it.

Two processes with their inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs (slides 209, 220)

ProcessInputsTools and techniquesOutputs
Cost estimating
(planning group, cost management)
Project scope management; WBS; project management plan (schedule management plan, HR management plan, risk register); enterprise environmental factors; organisational process assetsExpert judgement; analogous, parametric, bottom-up and three-point estimating; reserve analysis; cost of quality; project management software; vendor bid analysis; group decision-making techniquesActivity cost estimates; basis of estimates; project documents updates
Cost control
(monitoring and controlling group, cost management)
Project management plan; project funding requirements; work performance data; organisational process assetsEarned value management; forecasting; performance reviews; project management softwareCost estimates; change requests; project management plan updates; project documents updates; organisational process assets updates
  • Others with their inputs, tools and outputs in the slides: scope definition (slide 154), cost budgeting (218), quality planning (238), perform quality control (253), communications planning (260), manage stakeholders (276).
In the exam
  • “How is it related to project management knowledge areas?” (2075 Ashwin, 2070 Chaitra): the two definitions, the grid (at least its row and column headings with a few processes), and the four observations.
  • “Explain with sketching required diagrams and mapping” (2076 Chaitra): the loop figure plus the full grid.
  • “Two processes with inputs, tools and techniques and outputs” (2070 Chaitra, 2070 Ashad): the table above; name each process’s group and knowledge area.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the project driven process groups? Explain with sketching required diagrams & mapping of project management. (2076 Chaitra Q2a)
  • Write the concept of project management process groups. How is it related to project management knowledge areas? (2075 Ashwin Q2a)
  • Discuss the concept of project management process groups (PGs). How is it related to project management knowledge area? Give the example of two processes with necessary inputs, tools and techniques and outputs. (2070 Chaitra Q3a)
  • Discuss the concept of project management process groups (PGs). List down two processes of project management process group with their inputs, tools and techniques and output. (2070 Ashad Q7)

6.3Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 6.

Project life cycle phases versus process groups asked 1×

“Compare: project life cycle phases versus various process groups.”

2082 Baishakh

Only partly in the notes: they define each (pp. 35, 58) and draw the overlap (p. 59), but never compare them.

Life cycle phasesProcess groups
What it isStages of the project in timeCategories of management work
OrderSequential, one after another (they may overlap slightly)Repeat inside every phase, overlapping heavily
Defined byThe kind of project and its field (construction, software, pharmaceuticals)PMI, the same five for every project
NamesVary: concept, development, implementation, closure; or feasibility, design, build, handoverFixed: initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing
Ends withA deliverable and a stage gate decisionOutputs that become inputs to the next group
FocusThe product being builtManaging the project that builds it
CountAs many as the project needsAlways five
  • How they relate: the process groups run within each phase. A small project may have one phase, in which case the groups and the phase look alike; a large project repeats all five groups in each of its phases.

Justifying the overlap of life cycle stages and process groups asked 1×

“Justify the overlaps of different life cycle stages and process groups within various project phase.”

2081 Bhadra

Only partly in the notes: page 59 draws the overlap but does not explain it.

  • Outputs feed inputs: the charter from initiating feeds planning; the plan feeds executing; performance data from executing feeds monitoring. Each group starts as soon as its inputs exist, before the previous one has fully finished.
  • Planning is progressive: plans are detailed as more becomes known (rolling wave), so planning continues while earlier work is being executed.
  • Monitoring and controlling is continuous: it runs from the first day to the last, so it overlaps every other group.
  • Every phase repeats the groups: each phase is initiated, planned, executed, controlled and closed, and the closing of one phase overlaps the initiating of the next.
  • Phases themselves overlap (fast tracking): the next phase often starts before the previous one is complete, to save time, and its process groups start with it.
  • Change never waits: an approved change sends work back from monitoring to planning and executing in the middle of a phase.
  • Result: the groups are drawn as overlapping curves, not as a staircase, and a project manager works in several groups at once.

How coordination between the process groups contributes to success asked 1×

“Explain how effective coordination between these process groups contributes to project success.”

2081 Bhadra

Not in the notes: they list the groups and the conditions for a successful project (p. 58) but not how the groups work together.

  • Complete hand-offs: when each group’s outputs are complete and correct, the next group starts on solid inputs: a clear charter gives a sound plan, a sound plan gives smooth execution.
  • Early correction: monitoring and controlling feeds deviations back into planning and executing quickly, so small problems do not grow.
  • Controlled change: integrated change control keeps scope, time and cost changes consistent across all groups, avoiding scope creep.
  • Balanced constraints: coordinated decisions balance scope, schedule, budget, quality, resources and risk together, instead of fixing one and breaking another (notes p. 58).
  • Stakeholders stay engaged: communication planned in planning, carried out in executing and reported in monitoring keeps expectations aligned.
  • Clean closure: closing gathers acceptance and lessons learned that improve the next project’s initiating and planning.
  • Example: in a software project, a change request found in testing (monitoring) is approved, the plan and schedule are updated (planning) and the team builds it (executing), so the release still meets its date.

The five process groups in a project from your discipline asked 1×

“Explain briefly about 5 process group relating any project concerning your discipline.”

2080 Baishakh

Only partly in the notes: they define the five groups (p. 58) but give no worked project from computer or electronics engineering.

  • Project: an online attendance and results system for a college, built by a five-person student team in one semester.
  • Initiating: agree the need with the college, write the project charter (goal, budget, deadline, supervisor as sponsor), and list the stakeholders: administration, teachers, students, the IT office.
  • Planning: collect requirements, define the scope and the WBS (login, attendance, marks entry, reports), estimate durations and cost, draw the schedule, choose the tools, and plan testing, risks and weekly reporting.
  • Executing: design the database and the screens, write the code, set up the server, train the teachers, and hold weekly team meetings.
  • Monitoring and controlling: track progress against the schedule, test each module against the requirements, handle change requests (a new report format), and control scope and cost.
  • Closing: get the college’s acceptance, hand over the code and manuals, write the final report and the lessons learned, and release the team.

Business (how much will it cost?), technological (which technology, and why?), organisational (what skills and facilities are required?).

Weak, balanced, strong: the project manager’s authority rises in that order.

Back to the three sphere model and matrix organisation.

Chapter 7 · 4 hours · appeared in 20 of 22 sittings

Project integration management and scope management

Integration is the glue that keeps the other knowledge areas working as one project; scope is the fence that decides what is in and what is out. Between them they own the documents the examiner asks about most: the project charter and the WBS.

What this chapter is about
  • Integration management: what it is, why it is needed, and its seven processes from the charter to closing the project.
  • The project charter and the documents around it: the statement of work, the preliminary scope statement and the project management plan.
  • Keeping the project on course: directing execution, monitoring and controlling the work, integrated change control, and closing the project.
  • Scope management: project versus product scope, the scope processes, the scope statement, the work breakdown structure (WBS), the responsibility matrix, scope verification, scope control and scope creep.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 6’s grid: integration is the row that ties all five process groups together; scope is the first of PMI’s core knowledge areas (chapter 3).
  • The WBS made here is the input to activity definition and scheduling (chapter 8) and to cost estimating (chapter 9).
  • Project selection methods used for the charter (NPV, ROI, payback) are worked out in chapter 9; change control governs every later control process.
What you will learn
  1. Integration management and its processes
  2. The project charter, the statement of work and expert judgement
  3. The preliminary scope statement, the plan and execution
  4. Monitoring and control, integrated change control and closing the project
  5. Scope management and project versus product scope
  6. The WBS and the responsibility assignment matrix
  7. Scope verification, scope control and scope creep
  8. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • The project charter (what it is, its information, its inputs and tools): nine sittings, the most asked topic in the chapter.
  • Define project integration management: seven sittings, usually paired with the charter or with scope.
  • Project scope versus product scope: five sittings. The WBS (need, definition, approaches, a worked WBS): five sittings.
  • Integrated change control: four sittings. Documents (SOW, DPR, RFP, BOQ): four sittings. Expert judgement short note: three sittings.

7.1Project integration management

Project integration management and its processes asked 7×

Project integration management The collection of processes and activities needed to identify, define, combine, unify and coordinate the various processes and project management activities within the process groups (notes p. 61). The slides: a way of making the various processes work together, making sure they are coordinated (slide 138).
  • Start to finish: these actions apply from the start of the project through completion.
  • All knowledge areas: the project manager must coordinate all of them throughout the life cycle; each integration process has its inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs.

Why integration management is needed (notes p. 61)

  • Manage change and communication.
  • Reduce project time and cost.
  • Involve stakeholders early and often.
  • Make results visible.
  • Identify problems and solutions early.
  • Use relevant experience as early as possible.

The seven integration processes (notes pp. 62 to 74, slides 139 to 145)

  1. Develop project charter (initiating): formally authorises the project.
  2. Develop preliminary project scope statement (initiating): the high-level objectives and boundaries.
  3. Develop project management plan (planning): the plan that guides execution and control.
  4. Direct and manage project execution (executing): perform the work in the plan.
  5. Monitor and control project work (monitoring and controlling): compare actual performance against the plan.
  6. Perform integrated change control (monitoring and controlling): approve or reject every change.
  7. Close project (closing): finalise all activities and hand over the result.
  • All five groups: in this list integration touches every process group, from the charter to closing.
Integration as a flow: develop project charter gives the project charter to develop project management plan, which gives the project plan to direct and manage project work, which gives deliverables to a column of control processes, control scope, schedule, cost, quality, communication, risk, procurement and stakeholders, whose work performance information goes to monitoring and controlling project work, whose work performance reports go to close project
Integration management ties the flow together: charter, plan, execution, the control processes of every knowledge area, monitoring and controlling, and close. Course slides, slide 138

Each group’s integration process and its main output (notes p. 61)

Process groupIntegration processMajor output
InitiatingDeveloping the project charterProject charter
PlanningDeveloping the project management planProject management plan
ExecutingDirecting and managing project workDeliverables, work performance information, change requests
Monitoring and controllingMonitor and control project work; perform integrated change controlChange requests, status updates
ClosingClose project or phaseProduct transition

Inputs, tools and outputs of the other processes (slides 140 to 145, notes pp. 67 to 73)

ProcessInputsTools and techniquesOutputs
Preliminary scope statementProject charter; statement of work; enterprise environmental factors; organisational process assetsPM methodology; PM information system; facilitation techniques; expert judgementPreliminary project scope statement
Project management planPreliminary scope statement; PM processes; enterprise environmental factors; organisational process assetsPM methodology; PM information system; facilitation techniques; expert judgementProject management plan
Direct and manage executionPM plan; approved corrective actions, preventive actions, change requests and defect repairs; validated defect repairPM methodology; PM information systemDeliverables; requested changes; implemented changes, corrective and preventive actions, defect repair; work performance information
Monitor and control workPM plan; requested changes; work performance informationPM methodology; PM information system; earned value management; expert judgementRecommended corrective actions, preventive actions and defect repair; forecasts; requested changes
Close projectPM plan; contract documentation; work performance information; deliverables; environmental factors; process assetsPM methodology; PM information system; expert judgementAdministrative closure procedure; contract closure procedure; final product, service or result
In the exam
  • “Define project integration management” (seven sittings): the definition with its five verbs, the need, and the seven processes with their groups.
  • “Explain about project integration management” (2079 Baishakh): add a line on each process and the flow figure.
  • “Compare developing the PM plan versus monitoring and controlling” (2078 Bhadra) is answered at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Define the Project Integration Management and what are the essential information required to create Project Charter? (2080 Baishakh Q3a)
  • Explain about the project integration management and describe the inputs, tools and techniques used to develop the project charter. (2079 Baishakh Q10)
  • Compare the followings: a) Developing project management plan versus monitoring and controlling of project. b) Risk analysis using Decision tree technique versus Simulation technique. c) Data analysis using Box plot versus Scatter plot. d) Detail Project Report (DPR) document versus Request for Proposal (RFP) document. (2078 Bhadra Q6)
  • Define Project Integration Management. And Also compare project scope with product scope. (2078 Bhadra Q7b)
  • Define project integration management and compare project scope with product scope. (2075 Chaitra Q6b)
  • Define the Project Integration Management and what is the essential information required to create Project Charter? (2075 Ashwin Q3b)
  • Define project integration management. What type of information should include while making the project charter? (2074 Ashwin Q6a)
  • Define project integration management. Explain the necessary inputs, tools and techniques and outputs to develop a project charter. (2072 Kartik Q7)

Answers: “Explain about the project integration management” and its seven processes, in order (2079 Baishakh, with the definition asked in seven sittings).

How it decodes: seven words, seven processes, in order. The thief moves into his in-laws’ house and will not leave their rice for a month.

  1. CChor Charter: develop project charter
  2. SSasurali Scope statement: develop the preliminary project scope statement
  3. PPasyo Plan: develop project management plan
  4. EEk Execution: direct and manage project execution
  5. MMahina Monitor and control project work
  6. CChaamal Change control: perform integrated change control
  7. CChhodena Close project. He finally has to leave

7.2Develop project charter

The project charter asked 9×

Project charter The document that formally authorises the project: it authorises the project manager to start the project and to use organisational resources as required. It serves as an agreement between the project sponsor and the project team, documenting the project. Developing it is part of initiation (notes p. 62, slide 139).

What a project charter should address (notes p. 62)

  1. Scope.
  2. Objectives and deliverables.
  3. Project team members.
  4. Project risks.
  5. Benefits or return on investment.
  6. Budget.
  7. Business case.
  • The slides add: the goals and objectives, and the basic project scope.

Inputs, tools and techniques, and output (notes pp. 62 to 66, slide 139)

InputsTools and techniquesOutput
Agreements or contract: already hold much of what a good charter needs
Statement of work (SOW): business need, product description, strategic plan
Enterprise environmental factors: culture and infrastructure, tools, human resources, personnel policies, marketplace conditions
Organisational process assets: formal and informal plans, policies, procedures, guidelines, information, financial and management systems, lessons learned, historical information
Project selection methods
Project management methodology
Project management information system (PMIS)
Expert judgement
Facilitation techniques (slides)
Project charter

The tools in more detail (notes pp. 64 to 66)

  • Project selection methods: the techniques that decide which project deserves a charter.
    1. Focus on broad organisational needs: need (do people agree it needs doing?), funding (is the money secure?), will (is there a strong will to make it succeed?).
    2. Categorise IT projects: does the project address a problem, an opportunity or a directive?
    3. Financial analysis: net present value (accept if NPV > 0), return on investment (net income divided by the cost of the investment), payback analysis (how long until the investment is paid back; the shorter the better). Worked in chapter 9.
    4. Weighted scoring model: score each project against weighted criteria and add up (example below).
    5. Balanced scorecard (chapter 15).
  • Project management methodology: the set of process groups whose control functions are merged into one working, cohesive system.
  • Project management information system: enterprise project management software, often web-based and tied to financial systems; even small teams use it for Gantt charts.
  • Expert judgement: see below.
Weighted scoring (notes p. 66)Profit potential, weight 5Marketability, weight 3Ease to produce, weight 1Total
Project A54441 (25 + 12 + 4): selected
Project B53337
Project C34229
In the exam
  • “What is a project charter? How do you develop it? Explain the inputs and tools and techniques” (2082 Bhadra, 2071 Chaitra; the inputs and tools also in 2081 Baishakh, 2079 Baishakh, 2072 Kartik): the definition, then the table, then a line on each tool. Both halves carry marks.
  • “What information should be included in a project charter?” (2080 Baishakh, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin): the seven items.
  • If unsure of a tool, write expert judgement: it is a tool of almost every process.
Asked in past papers
  • What is a project charter? How do you develop a project charter? Explain the inputs and tools and techniques to develop it. (2082 Bhadra Q3b, 2071 Chaitra Q3)
  • Describe about the project Scope Management and describe the inputs, tools and techniques used to develop the project charter. (2081 Baishakh Q8)
  • Define the Project Integration Management and what are the essential information required to create Project Charter? (2080 Baishakh Q3a)
  • What is project charter? How we calculate probability index for a project? (2079 Bhadra Q4a)
  • Explain about the project integration management and describe the inputs, tools and techniques used to develop the project charter. (2079 Baishakh Q10)
  • Define the Project Integration Management and what is the essential information required to create Project Charter? (2075 Ashwin Q3b)
  • Define project integration management. What type of information should include while making the project charter? (2074 Ashwin Q6a)
  • Define project integration management. Explain the necessary inputs, tools and techniques and outputs to develop a project charter. (2072 Kartik Q7)

Answers: “What are the essential information required to create a project charter?” (2080 Baishakh, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin). Seven items.

How it decodes: seven words, seven items, in the notes’ order. Your friend Ole took your rakshi and ran off to the bazaar. The three B words run benefits, budget, business case.

  1. SSaathi Scope
  2. OOle Objectives and deliverables
  3. TTimro Team members
  4. RRakshi Risks of the project
  5. BBokera Benefits or return on investment
  6. BBajaar Budget. The bazaar is where the money goes
  7. BBhagyo Business case

The statement of work (SOW) asked 4×

Statement of work A legally binding document that captures and defines all the work management aspects of the project (notes p. 63). It is an input to the project charter.
  • Business need: why the organisation needs the project.
  • Product description: what the project will produce.
  • Strategic plan: how the project supports the organisation’s strategy; organisations often run a SWOT analysis for it, with managers from outside the IT department helping.

The notes’ SWOT example (notes pp. 63, 64: four people starting a business in the film industry)

  • Strengths: many contacts in the film industry; two have strong sales and interpersonal skills; two have strong technical skills with filmmaking software.
  • Weaknesses: no accounting or financial experience; no clear marketing strategy; little money to invest; no website and little use of technology.
  • Opportunities: a potential client wants a bid on a large project; the film industry keeps growing; two major conferences to promote the company.
  • Threats: others offer the same services; customers may prefer established firms; the film business is high risk.

The sections of a SOW (notes p. 64)

  1. Introduction: the basics: is it a service or a product, and who are the parties?
  2. Project overview and objectives: why the project is being done.
  3. Scope of work: the work needed to complete the project.
  4. Task list: the tasks, broken into phases.
  5. Project schedule.
  6. Project deliverables.
  7. Adoption plan: how the deliverables will be put into place.
  8. Project management: payment and administrative work.
  9. Success criteria and sign-off.

A SOW for an Engineering College MIS (the 2078 Bhadra question; the assumptions are ours, as the question invites)

  1. Introduction: the college (client) engages a software firm (vendor) to build a web-based management information system: a product, with training as a service.
  2. Overview and objectives: replace paper records; give one source of student, academic and financial data; cut report preparation from days to minutes; go live before the next academic session.
  3. Scope of work: modules for admissions, student records, attendance, examinations and results, fees and accounts, library, staff records and reports; web access for students, teachers and administration. Out of scope: payroll and hostel management.
  4. Task list: phase 1 requirements and design; phase 2 development of the modules; phase 3 testing and data migration; phase 4 deployment and training.
  5. Schedule: six months: requirements by month 1, design by month 2, development by month 4, testing and migration by month 5, go-live and training in month 6.
  6. Deliverables: SRS and design documents, the working system on the college server, migrated data, user and administrator manuals, source code, and trained staff.
  7. Adoption plan: pilot in one department, then all departments; old and new systems run in parallel for one month; a help desk for the first three months.
  8. Project management: a steering committee chaired by the principal; fortnightly progress reports; payment of 20% at signing, 30% after design, 30% after testing, 20% after acceptance.
  9. Success criteria and sign-off: all modules pass user acceptance tests, reports are produced in under a minute, 95% of staff are trained; the principal signs the acceptance certificate.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Statement of works (SOW)” (2076 Chaitra): the definition, the three things it includes, and the nine sections.
  • “Prepare a SOW for an Engineering College MIS” (2078 Bhadra): write the document itself, section by section, and state the assumptions. A document scores far better than prose about one.
  • Comparisons of DPR, RFP, BOQ and the scope document (2081 Bhadra, 2078 Bhadra, 2075 Chaitra) are answered at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: i) Horizontal versus vertical communication ii) Project risk management plan versus risk response plan iii) Control chart versus Pareto chart tools in project quality management iv) Project DPR document versus project scope document (2081 Bhadra Q5)
  • Prepare a statement of work (SOW) and IS project which is to be developed as Engineering College MIS. You are free to make your own assumptions regarding the system. (2078 Bhadra Q5)
  • Compare the followings: a) Developing project management plan versus monitoring and controlling of project. b) Risk analysis using Decision tree technique versus Simulation technique. c) Data analysis using Box plot versus Scatter plot. d) Detail Project Report (DPR) document versus Request for Proposal (RFP) document. (2078 Bhadra Q6)
  • Write short notes on: a) Project management process groups b) Statement of works (SOW) c) Pareto chart d) PM-BOK (2076 Chaitra Q7)
  • Compare the followings: a) BOQ document vs. RFP document b) Status reporting vs. progress reporting c) Functional vs. matrix organization d) Boxplot vs. histogram analysis (2075 Chaitra Q5)

Expert judgement asked 3×

Expert judgement A way of making a judgement based on expertise, skill or specialised knowledge in a specific area. The expertise may come from training or from career experience (notes p. 66).
  • Why it matters: anyone who has worked on a large, complex project knows how much good decisions depend on it.
  • Consult experts on: what methodology to follow, what programming language to use, what training approach to take (notes p. 66).
  • Where it is used: a tool in almost every process: developing the charter, the preliminary scope statement and the plan, monitoring work, change control, closing, scope planning, cost estimating (slides 139 to 145, 149, 209).
  • Who the experts are: other units of the organisation, consultants, stakeholders including the customer, professional and technical associations, industry groups, and specialists on the team.
  • When it helps most: where hard data does not exist: new technology, first-time estimates, risk identification, evaluating bids.
  • Its weakness: bias and over-confidence; ask several experts and combine their views, for example with the Delphi technique.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Expert judgement” (2080 Bhadra, 2079 Baishakh, 2069 Chaitra): the definition, where it is used, who the experts are, and one line on its weakness.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgements d) Project management and General management e) S - curve (2080 Bhadra Q13)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgments d) Contract (project) closure procedure e) Project Risk Management (2079 Baishakh Q12)
  • Write short notes on: a) Expert Judgement b) Arrow Diagramming Method c) Balance score card (2069 Chaitra Q15)

7.3The preliminary scope statement, the plan and execution

The preliminary scope statement, the project management plan, and execution

Develop preliminary project scope statement (notes p. 67, slide 140)

  • What: an output of initiation; its purpose is to identify the high-level project objectives, which must be clear, actionable and measurable.
  • It includes: objectives, constraints and assumptions; product requirements; initial risks; the preliminary estimated cost; approval requirements.
  • The slides add: acceptance criteria, project boundaries, deliverables, and an initial WBS.

Develop project management plan (notes pp. 67, 68, slide 141)

  • What: part of the planning group; its purpose is to guide project execution and control the project’s progress.
  • Uses: document the assumptions and decisions, help communication among stakeholders, and record what was approved.
  • Includes: the project charter, the management approach, the scope statement, and the budget, schedule and resources.
  • Common elements: introduction and overview; project organisation; management and technical processes; work to be performed (scope); schedule and budget information; references to other planning documents.

Baseline management (notes p. 69)

  • Baseline: a fixed reference point to measure and compare the project’s progress against, so performance can be assessed over time.
  • Four baselines: schedule, cost, scope, quality.
  • Steps: set measures; record progress; calculate the variance; take remedial action.

The project planning matrix, or logical framework (notes p. 68)

  • What: a planning tool for a well-designed, objectively described and evaluable project; a summary of the project design.
  • Vertical logic runs from activities up to the goal; horizontal logic runs from the narrative summary to the important assumptions; each cell is linked to the next by cause and effect.
Narrative summaryObjectively verifiable indicatorsMeans of verificationAssumptions and risks
GoalThe long-term aimHow success will be measuredWhere the evidence comes fromWhat must hold true
PurposeThe project’s direct objective
OutputsWhat the project delivers
ActivitiesThe work that produces the outputs

Direct and manage project execution (notes pp. 69 to 71, slide 142)

  • What: part of the executing group: manage and perform the work described in the project management plan.
  • Planning and execution are inseparable: the plan drives the work, and the work updates the plan.
  • Work performance information it produces: schedule progress; completed, pending and incomplete deliverables; how far quality standards are met; resource use; lessons learned; conflicting issues to address.
Task implementation workflow in an IT project: new task, assigned to team, implemented by developers with unit test, peer review, test by SQA, review by the joint implementation team; a failed peer review, SQA test or joint review sends the task back to the developers. Beside each step, the artifacts used or produced: URS and SRS, project schedule and task note, design documents, test cases, issue entry and code set, review report, bug entry and test report, acceptance test report, versioning and release note
Direct and manage execution in an IT project: each task moves through development, peer review and testing, and loops back whenever a review fails. Course notes, p. 70

7.4Monitoring, integrated change control and closing

Monitor and control project work asked 2×

  • What: part of the monitoring and controlling group: comparing actual project performance against the project plan (notes p. 71, slide 143).
  • Why: changes are mostly unavoidable, so the better approach is to develop and follow a monitor and control strategy.
  • How: collect, measure and circulate performance information.
  • Goal: watch all the activities so the project meets its performance objectives.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 143): project management plan, requested changes and work performance information go in; PM methodology, PMIS, earned value management and expert judgement are applied; recommended corrective and preventive actions, recommended defect repair, forecasts and requested changes come out.
  • The control loop (baseline steps, notes p. 69): set measures, record progress, calculate the variance, take remedial action, and repeat.
THE PROJECT CONTROL CYCLE Set the baseline once, then measure, compare and correct, again and again until the project closes. 1 Plan: set the baseline measures; scope, time, cost, quality 2 Measure: record progress actual work, cost, time, quality 3 Compare: find the variance variance = planned minus actual 4 Correct: take action corrective action, update the plan monitoring controlling measure again Evaluation steps outside the loop, at milestones and at the end: is the project achieving its purpose?
In the exam
  • “The need of monitoring, evaluation and controlling, with a local example” (2079 Baishakh) and “the concept of monitoring, evaluation and controlling, and the project control cycle” (2070 Ashad, CE 701) go beyond the notes; both are answered at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Describe the need of monitoring, evaluation and controlling process and explain its importance with suitable example of the local project. (2079 Baishakh Q8)
  • Write the concept of Monitoring, Evaluation and Controlling and also explain project control cycle. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q4a)

Integrated change control asked 4×

Perform integrated change control A process of the monitoring and controlling group that reviews every requested change and approves or rejects it, keeping the plan, the scope and the deliverables consistent. Since changes are unavoidable, the aim is to manage them, not to resist them (notes p. 71).

Its three objectives (notes p. 71)

  1. Influence the factors that create changes, so that the changes that do happen are beneficial.
  2. Determine that a change has occurred.
  3. Manage actual changes as they occur.

The four types of control (notes pp. 72, 73)

  • Change control system: a formal, documented process describing when and how official project documents and work may be changed, who is authorised to change them, and how.
  • Change control board (CCB): a formal group of people responsible for approving or rejecting changes. It gives guidelines for preparing change requests, evaluating them, and managing the implementation of approved changes.
  • Configuration management: ensures the descriptions of the project’s product are correct, complete and consistent; it identifies and controls the functional and physical design characteristics of the products and their documentation.
  • Version control and build management: version (source) control tracks and manages changes to software code over time, keeps the history and supports rollback; build management needs a formal check-in and check-out policy to guarantee code quality.
Centralised version control: a server repository at the top, and three workstations below, each with a working copy that commits changes to the repository and updates from it
Version control in an IT project: every workstation commits its changes to one central repository and updates from it, so there is one history and any version can be restored. Course notes, p. 73

Inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs (slide 144, notes p. 72)

InputsTools and techniquesOutputs
Project management plan; requested changes; work performance information; recommended corrective actions; recommended preventive actions; recommended defect repair; deliverables Project management methodology; project management information system; expert judgement; facilitation techniques (slides) Approved change requests; rejected change requests; updated project management plan; updated project scope statement (the slides: updated scope management plan); approved corrective actions; approved preventive actions; approved defect repair; validated defect repair; deliverables
Integrated change control flow: establish baseline plans, review status and progress against performance reports, determine whether a change has or should occur, then update plans, take corrective action and share lessons learned
Integrated change control: baseline the plans, review status against them, decide whether a change has occurred or should, then update the plans, take corrective action and record the lessons. Course notes, p. 73

Key features of change control on IT projects (built from notes pp. 71 to 73)

  • Formal requests: every change is requested in writing through the change control system.
  • Impact assessed first: its effect on scope, time, cost, quality and risk is judged before a decision.
  • A defined authority decides: the change control board approves or rejects.
  • Configuration management keeps requirements, design and code documents consistent with each other.
  • Version control and build management: every code change is committed with its history, can be rolled back, and follows a check-in and check-out policy.
  • Baselines updated: an approved change updates the plan, so the plan still matches the work.
In the exam
  • “Explain integrated change control in detail” (2072 Chaitra, 2070 Chaitra, 2070 Ashad): the definition, the three objectives, the four types of control, and the flow figure.
  • “Key features in change control on IT projects, and its inputs, tools and outputs” (2073 Shrawan): the feature list and the table.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the key features in change control on IT projects? Explain about input, tools and techniques and output of integrated change control. (2073 Shrawan Q4a)
  • Explain about the integrated change control in detail. (2072 Chaitra Q5)
  • Explain the integrated change control process in depth. (2070 Chaitra Q5a)
  • Explain about Integrated Change Control in IT project development. (2070 Ashad Q8)

Close project asked 2×

  • What: part of the closing group. To close a project or phase, finalise all activities and transfer the completed or cancelled work to the appropriate people (notes p. 73).
  • Main outputs: the final product, service or result transition; organisational process asset updates.

The main steps in closing a project (notes p. 74)

  1. Phase end activities: help the team move from one phase to the next: peer review, release management, review meeting, updating the plan for the next phase, status reporting, end-user education.
  2. Administrative closure procedure: make sure the plan has budget and time for closure, and populate the project archives: formal acceptance by the client, recommendation from sponsors and the support organisation, maintenance and upgrade, training, lessons learned.
  3. Contract closure procedure: verify the contract requirements; formal acceptance by the client; performance evaluation of the contract by the buyer and by the seller; procurement audit; update the project files and historical databases.
  4. Update organisational process assets: formal acceptance documents, project files, project closure documents, historical information and lessons learned. Archiving is the last step.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 145): project management plan, contract documentation, work performance information, environmental factors, process assets and deliverables go in; PM methodology, PMIS and expert judgement are applied; the administrative closure procedure, the contract closure procedure and the final product, service or result come out.
  • Administrative closure (communications, notes p. 143): generating, gathering and circulating information to formalise phase or project completion.
In the exam
  • “The need of the closing process, with an example of a mega project” (2081 Baishakh) and “compare project scoping and project closing” (2076 Ashwin) are answered at the end of this chapter; start from the four steps above.
Asked in past papers
  • Describe the need of closing process and explain its importance with suitable example of the mega projects. (2081 Baishakh Q6)
  • Compare the followings: a) Project scoping vs. project closing b) Formal vs. Informal communication c) Sensitivity analysis vs SWOT analysis d) Tender vs. quotation process (2076 Ashwin Q7)

7.5Project scope management

Project scope management and its processes asked 4×

Scope, and project scope management Scope is all the work involved in creating the products of the project and the processes used to create them. Project scope management includes the processes involved in defining and controlling what is or is not included in the project (notes p. 75, slide 146).
  • Shared understanding: the project team and the stakeholders must have the same understanding of what products will be produced and what processes will produce them. Most scope disputes are two parties who each thought the other agreed.

The processes of project scope management (notes p. 76)

  1. Initiation: beginning a project, or continuing to the next phase.
  2. Scope planning: developing documents that provide the basis for future project decisions.
  3. Defining scope: reviewing the charter, requirement documents and organisational process assets to create a scope statement.
  4. Creating the WBS: subdividing the major deliverables into smaller, more manageable components.
  5. Scope verification: formalising acceptance of the project scope.
  6. Scope change control: controlling changes to the project scope.
  • The slides (slide 148) list five: initiation, scope planning, scope definition (which there means the subdividing, so it absorbs creating the WBS), scope verification, scope change control.

Scope planning (slides 149, 150)

  • What: progressively elaborating and documenting the project work; it identifies the objectives and deliverables and forms the basis of agreement. It starts in planning, using the outputs of initiation.
  • Inputs, tools, output: PM plan, environmental factors, process assets, charter and preliminary scope statement go in; expert judgement and templates, standards and forms are applied; the project scope management plan comes out.
  • Understanding requirements: functional requirements (the day-to-day needs of users) and non-functional ones (performance, usability, reliability, security, financial, legal, operational).
  • Capturing them: interviews, questionnaires, in-depth observation, domain expert suggestions.
  • Documenting them: from the SMART rule to the MoSCoW rule (must have, should have, could have, would have), then a system requirement specification (SRS) with business and use cases.

The scope statement (slides 151, 152)

  • What: the document used to develop and confirm a common understanding of the project scope.
  • Components: project justification (the need; cost-benefit and cash flow analysis); the project’s product (its specification); project deliverables (the major outcomes); project objectives (SMART); and what determines success (key success factors).

Scope definition (slide 154)

  • What: subdividing major project components into smaller ones, to improve the accuracy of cost, time and resource estimates, define a baseline for performance measurement and control, and make responsibility clear.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs: PM plan, environmental factors, process assets, charter and preliminary scope statement go in; product analysis, alternative identification and stakeholder analysis are applied; the project scope statement, requested changes and an updated scope management plan come out.

From charter to WBS dictionary: scope gets more detailed

  1. Project charter (slide 139): formally authorises the project, with its goals and the basic scope.
  2. Preliminary scope statement (slide 140): objectives, acceptance criteria, boundaries, deliverables, constraints, risks and an initial WBS.
  3. Scope statement (slides 151, 152): justification, product, deliverables, SMART objectives, success factors, agreed with the stakeholders.
  4. WBS (slide 155): the deliverables decomposed into work packages.
  5. WBS dictionary: describes each WBS component (notes p. 79): its work, owner, deliverable, cost and time.
  • The pattern: each step is more detailed, and less negotiable, than the one before; scope planning is progressive elaboration (slide 149).
In the exam
  • “What is project scope management?” (2081 Baishakh, 2073 Shrawan): the definition, the shared-understanding point, and the six processes.
  • “Essential components of project scope management” (2071 Chaitra): the six processes, each with a line, plus the scope statement’s components.
  • “The process of defining scope in more detail as the project progresses, from charter to scope statement, WBS and WBS dictionary” (2069 Chaitra): the five-step chain above.
Asked in past papers
  • Describe about the project Scope Management and describe the inputs, tools and techniques used to develop the project charter. (2081 Baishakh Q8)
  • What is project scope management? And compare Project scope with product Scope. (2073 Shrawan Q4b)
  • What are the essential components of project scope management? Explain. (2071 Chaitra Q9)
  • Discuss the process of defining project scope in more detail as a project progresses, going from information in a project charter to a project scope statement, WBS and WBS dictionary. (2069 Chaitra Q7)

Answers: “What is project scope management?” and “the essential components of project scope management”: the six processes, in order.

How it decodes: six words, six processes, in order. Family honour is gone: didi is tasting whisky and vodka.

  1. IIjjat Initiation
  2. SSakiyo Scope planning
  3. DDidi Defining scope
  4. WWhisky WBS: creating the work breakdown structure
  5. VVodka Verification of scope
  6. CChakhdai Change control of scope

Project scope versus product scope asked 5×

  • One sentence carries it: project scope is the how (the work), product scope is the what (the features).
Project scopeProduct scope
DefinitionThe work required to deliver the product, service or result with the specified features and functionsThe sum of all the features, functions and characteristics of the product
FocusThe work needed to deliver the productThe features of the end product
RelationshipSubset of product scopeSuperset of project scope
OrientationThe “how”: work relatedThe “what”: functional requirements
Completion measured againstThe project planThe product requirements
Defined inThe project charter (and scope statement)The product specification
ExampleConstructing a bridgeThe bridge’s technical specifications: length, width
  • Sources: notes p. 75 (rows one to four, and the example) and slide 147 (measured against, defined in).
  • An IT example: product scope of a college MIS is its modules and features (fee payment, result publishing); project scope is the work to deliver them (requirements, design, coding, testing, training).
In the exam
  • “Differentiate project scope and product scope” (2080 Bhadra, 2079 Bhadra, 2078 Bhadra, 2075 Chaitra, 2073 Shrawan): the table, and the bridge example from the notes.
Asked in past papers
  • Differentiate project scope and product scope. Write about aspects of IT project estimation. (2080 Bhadra Q8)
  • Distinguish project scope with product scope. What is the significance of scope verification in project scope management? (2079 Bhadra Q4b)
  • Define Project Integration Management. And Also compare project scope with product scope. (2078 Bhadra Q7b)
  • Define project integration management and compare project scope with product scope. (2075 Chaitra Q6b)
  • What is project scope management? And compare Project scope with product Scope. (2073 Shrawan Q4b)

7.6Create work breakdown structure

The work breakdown structure (WBS) asked 5×

Work breakdown structure The process of systematically breaking the major project work down into smaller, more manageable components and subcomponents, in hierarchical order (notes p. 76). The slides: a deliverable-oriented grouping of the work that defines the total scope of the project, and the foundation document for planning and managing schedules, costs, resources and changes (slide 155).
  • Decomposition: subdividing project deliverables into smaller pieces.
  • Work package: a task at the lowest level of the WBS.
  • Levels: total program; project; task (activity); sub-task; work package; level of effort (notes p. 77).
A WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE, DRAWN AS A TREE Each level breaks its parent into smaller pieces. The boxes at the bottom of each branch are the work packages. LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 WORK PACKAGES 1.0 Project 1.1 Project management 1.2 Requirements 1.3 Design and build 1.4 Testing and handover 1.1.1 Charter and plan 1.1.2 Status reports 1.1.3 Closure 1.2.1 Interviews 1.2.2 SRS document 1.3.1 Database design 1.3.2 Modules coded 1.3.3 Interfaces 1.4.1 System testing 1.4.2 Training 1.4.3 Go-live 100% rule: each level adds up to exactly its parent, project management included. 8/80 rule: each work package takes between 8 and 80 hours of work.

Why a WBS is needed: its advantages (notes p. 76)

  • Planning can be performed easily.
  • Costs and budgets can be established.
  • Schedules can be established.
  • Responsibility can be assigned to each activity.
  • Risk of each activity can be analysed.

What creating a WBS identifies (notes p. 76)

  • What: the work.
  • How long: the time to complete each work package.
  • Cost: a time-phased budget for each work package.
  • How much: the resources each work package needs.
  • Who: the person responsible for each unit of work.
  • Milestones: the monitoring points for measuring success.

How the WBS affects the estimates of tasks (notes p. 81, slides 153, 154)

  • Smaller tasks are easier to estimate, so estimates made on work packages are more accurate than one estimate for the whole project.
  • Estimation errors add project risk, and a WBS makes missed work visible: a missing branch shows in a hierarchy, not in a paragraph.
  • Estimate by the team, adjusted by experts, and estimate the work effort per person, not the task duration.
  • Order of estimating: scope or size first, then time, then cost.
  • It sets the baseline: subdividing improves the accuracy of cost, time and resource estimates and defines a baseline for measuring performance (slide 154).

WBS inputs, tools and outputs (slide 155)

  • Inputs: project scope statement; scope management plan; organisational process assets; approved change requests.
  • Tools: WBS templates; decomposition.
  • Outputs: the WBS; the WBS dictionary; the scope baseline; updated scope statement and scope management plan; requested changes.
WBS example from the slides: retail web app at the top; below it project management, requirement analysis, design and analysis, software development, testing and deployment; software development splits into UI design and development, back-end development and content development; back-end development splits into database implementation, API development, security subsystems and transaction processing
The slides’ WBS example: a retail web app broken down by deliverable, three levels deep under software development. Course slides, slide 156

Approaches to developing a WBS (notes p. 77, slide 158)

  1. Using guidelines: some organisations provide guidelines for preparing WBSs.
  2. The analogy approach: review the WBS of a similar project and customise it.
  3. The top-down approach: start with the largest items and break them down.
  4. The bottom-up approach: start with the specific tasks and roll them up.
  5. Mind mapping: branches radiating out from a core idea to structure thoughts and ideas.

Principles for creating a WBS and its dictionary (notes p. 78)

  1. Once only: a unit of work appears only once in the WBS.
  2. Sum of the parts: the work content of a WBS item is the sum of the items below it.
  3. One owner: a WBS item is the responsibility of only one individual, even if many people work on it.
  4. Realistic: the WBS is consistent with the way the work will actually be done.
  5. Team built: project team members help develop it, for consistency.
  6. Documented: each WBS item is described in the WBS dictionary.

The two rules (notes p. 78)

  • The 100% rule: the WBS includes 100% of the work defined by the project scope and captures all deliverables, internal, external and interim, including project management itself. It is one of the most important principles for developing, decomposing and evaluating a WBS.
  • The 8/80 rule: the lowest level of work should be no less than 8 hours and no more than 80 hours.

Finalising the WBS with a cost-benefit analysis (slide 157)

TaskDurationWorking teamBenefitCost
Work package 1T1P110M5M
Work package 2T2P220M10M
Work package 3T3P130M20M
TotalT1, T2, T3P1, P260M35M
In the exam
  • “Describe the need of WBS” (2082 Bhadra, 2081 Baishakh, 2079 Baishakh, 2070 Chaitra): the definition, the tree, the five advantages, the six things it identifies, and the two rules.
  • “What is a WBS? How does it affect the work estimate of tasks?” (2079 Bhadra): the definition, then the estimating points.
  • “Different ways or approaches to prepare a WBS” (2070 Chaitra): the five approaches.
  • “Prepare a WBS for a library management system” (2082 Bhadra) is worked at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Describe the need of work breakdown structure (WBS). Prepare WBS for library management system development project. (2082 Bhadra Q6)
  • Describe the need of Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) and explain success criteria for projects. (2081 Baishakh Q4)
  • What is work breakdown structure (WBS)? How does it affect the work estimate of tasks/activities? (2079 Bhadra Q3b)
  • Describe the need work breakdown structure (WBS) and explain success criteria for projects. (2079 Baishakh Q4)
  • Define work break down structure and its importance in project management. What are different ways/approaches to prepare a work breakdown structure for a project? (2070 Chaitra Q3b)
  • Define WBS technique in scope management. (2070 Chaitra Q5b)

Answers: “What are different ways or approaches to prepare a work breakdown structure for a project?” (2070 Chaitra). Five approaches.

How it decodes: five words, five approaches, in the notes’ order.

  1. GGrandma Guidelines from the organisation
  2. AAte Analogy: copy a similar project’s WBS
  3. TThe Top-down: break the largest items down
  4. BBig Bottom-up: roll specific tasks up
  5. MMomo Mind mapping: branches from a core idea

The responsibility assignment matrix (RAM) and the OBS asked 1×

Responsibility assignment matrix A matrix that maps the work of the project, described in the WBS, to the people responsible for performing it. It is also known as the RACI matrix (notes p. 78, slide 159).
  • R, responsible: who does the task?
  • A, accountable: who signs off on the task, or has authority for it?
  • C, consulted: who has information needed to complete it?
  • I, informed: who needs to be told of its status and results?
  • Size matters: on smaller projects assign individual people to WBS activities; on very large projects assign the work to organisational units or teams.
  • One A per row: several people can be responsible, but if two are accountable, nobody is.

A RACI chart (slide 159)

ActivityPerson 1Person 2Person 3Person 4Person 5
DefineARII, CI
DesignIARCC
DevelopIARCC
TestAI, RIRI
ImplementationIRACI

Organisational breakdown structure, OBS (notes p. 77)

  • What: a type of organisation chart that links cost, activity and responsibility.
  • It allows: work definition, assigning owners to work packages, and assigning budgets to departments.
  • How they fit: the WBS breaks down the work, the OBS breaks down the organisation, and the RAM is the grid where the two meet.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Responsibility assignment matrix” (2072 Chaitra): the definition, the four letters, a small RACI chart, and the one-A rule.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: i) Balanced scorecard framework ii) Project management maturity model iii) Responsibility assignment matrix (2072 Chaitra Q10)

7.7Scope verification and scope control

Scope verification, scope control and scope creep asked 2×

Scope verification The process of formally accepting the finished project outcomes (deliverables) (notes p. 79, slide 160).

Scope verification includes (notes p. 79)

  • Formal acceptance of the project scope by the stakeholders: sponsor, client, customer.
  • Reviewing outcomes and work results to make sure all were completed correctly and satisfactorily.
  • Determining completion, especially if the project ends early; the process should document the level and extent of completion.
InputsTools and techniquesOutputs
Project scope statement: the outcomes and the work needed, in detail
WBS dictionary: describes each WBS component
Project scope management plan: how scope will be defined, documented, verified, managed and controlled
Outcomes (deliverables): the project’s results
Inspection: measuring, examining and verifying the work, and confirming the results meet the requirements and acceptance criteria; also called product review, review, audit or walkthrough Accepted results (deliverables); requested changes; recommended corrective actions
  • Its significance: it turns “we think it is done” into the customer’s documented acceptance: the project’s defensible definition of done, the trigger for payment, and the record if the project stops early.
  • Not quality control: scope verification is about acceptance by the customer; quality control is about correctness against the specification.

Scope control (notes p. 80, slides 162, 163)

  • What: controlling changes to the project scope; concerned with influencing the factors that create scope changes and controlling their impact.
  • Goals: influence the factors that cause scope changes; make sure changes are processed through the agreed procedure (integrated change control); manage changes when they occur.
  • Variance: the difference between planned and actual performance.
  • Proactive, not reactive (slide 162).
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 163): scope statement, WBS and dictionary, scope management plan, performance reports, approved change requests and work performance information go in; the change control system, variance analysis, re-planning and the configuration management system are applied; updated scope statement, WBS, dictionary, scope baseline and PM plan, requested changes and recommended corrective action come out.

Scope creep (notes pp. 80, 81, slide 162)

  • What: uncontrolled changes to the scope, which build up and surprise the team with budget, schedule and resource impacts. It must be managed through the formal change control process.
  • Causes: poor change control; poor initial identification or documentation of the required features; a weak project manager or executive sponsor.
  • How to reduce it: sort requirements into “must haves” and “nice to haves”; set project expectations; agree the deliverables and document them; document and review the business requirements.

Best practices for avoiding scope problems (notes p. 80)

  1. Keep the scope realistic: do not make projects so large they cannot be completed.
  2. Involve users in project scope management.
  3. Use off-the-shelf hardware and software whenever possible.
  4. Follow good project management processes.
  • The key reason for IT project failure is poor project scope management (notes p. 81). Good scope management needs strong user involvement, executive support, a clear statement of requirements, and a process for managing scope changes.
In the exam
  • “The significance of scope verification” (2079 Bhadra): the definition, what it includes, its inputs, tools and outputs, and the significance points.
  • Short note, “Scope creep” (2081 Bhadra): the definition, the three causes, the four ways to reduce it, and that it is controlled through change control.
Asked in past papers
  • Write Short Notes on: a) Stakeholder Management b) Scope Creep c) Future Trends in Project Management d) Balanced Scorecard e) Risk management strategies (2081 Bhadra Q8)
  • Distinguish project scope with product scope. What is the significance of scope verification in project scope management? (2079 Bhadra Q4b)

7.8Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 7.

Developing the project management plan versus monitoring and controlling asked 1×

“Compare: developing project management plan versus monitoring and controlling of project.”

2078 Bhadra

Only partly in the notes: each process is described (notes pp. 67 to 71, slides 141, 143), but they are never compared.

Developing the PM planMonitoring and controlling
Process groupPlanningMonitoring and controlling
Question it answersWhat will we do, and how?Are we doing it as planned, and if not, what now?
PurposeGuide execution and control; document assumptions, decisions and approved baselinesCompare actual performance with the plan and correct deviations
TimingEarly, then updated as the project goesContinuous, from start to finish
InputsPreliminary scope statement, PM processes, environmental factors, process assetsPM plan, requested changes, work performance information
ToolsPM methodology, PMIS, facilitation, expert judgementPM methodology, PMIS, earned value management, expert judgement
OutputsThe project management plan, with its baselinesRecommended corrective and preventive actions, defect repair, forecasts, requested changes
NatureForward-looking, sets the baselineBackward-looking against the baseline, then corrective
  • How they depend on each other: the plan is the baseline that monitoring measures against; monitoring sends approved changes back to update the plan. Without a plan there is nothing to control; without control the plan is ignored.

DPR, RFP, BOQ and the scope document, compared asked 3×

“Compare: Detail Project Report (DPR) document versus Request for Proposal (RFP) document.” “Compare: project DPR document versus project scope document.” “Compare: BOQ document vs. RFP document.”

2078 Bhadra; 2081 Bhadra; 2075 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: they define an RFP (p. 165) and the scope statement (slides 151, 152); slide 312 names the bill of quantities only as part of a bid document; a DPR is not in the notes or slides.

The four documents

  • DPR, detailed project report: the full report prepared after the feasibility study to get a project approved and financed: technical design and drawings, cost estimates, financial and economic analysis, implementation schedule, environmental and social assessment, and organisation. In Nepal, consultants prepare DPRs for roads, bridges, water supply and hydropower projects.
  • RFP, request for proposal: a document describing in detail what product or service the buyer wants, used to request proposals from potential sellers (notes p. 165).
  • BOQ, bill of quantities: an itemised list of the work items and materials with their units and measured quantities, and blank columns for rate and amount. The client’s engineer prepares it; every bidder prices the same list; payment is later made on measured quantities.
  • Project scope document (scope statement): the document that develops and confirms a common understanding of the project scope: justification, product, deliverables, objectives, success factors (slides 151, 152).

DPR versus RFP

DPRRFP
PurposeJustify and plan the project, for approval and fundingInvite sellers to propose how they would do the work, and at what price
Prepared byThe owner’s planning team or consultantThe buyer
WhenAfter feasibility, before the investment decisionAt procurement, after the project is approved
AudienceDecision makers, government, lendersPotential sellers and contractors
ContentsDesign, estimates, financial and economic analysis, schedule, impact assessmentRequirements, scope of work, evaluation criteria, terms, submission instructions
Leads toAn approved, funded projectProposals, then a selected seller and a contract

DPR versus project scope document

DPRProject scope document
CoversThe whole case for the project: technical, financial, economic, socialWhat work and deliverables are in, and out, of the project
StageBefore approvalPlanning, after the charter
Used forDeciding whether to investThe baseline for the WBS, estimates and scope control
Prepared byConsultant or planning teamProject manager and team, agreed with stakeholders
DetailEngineering and financial detailDeliverables, objectives, boundaries, acceptance criteria

BOQ versus RFP

BOQRFP
NatureA list of items and quantities to be pricedA request for a full proposal
Used forWorks contracts with a fixed design (construction)Services or solutions where the seller proposes the approach (software, consulting)
Bidder’s responseFills in rates and amountsWrites a technical and financial proposal
EvaluationMainly the lowest evaluated priceTechnical and financial scoring
Later useBasis for payment on measured workBasis for negotiating the contract

Monitoring, evaluation and controlling: need, importance and the control cycle asked 2×

“Describe the need of monitoring, evaluation and controlling process and explain its importance with suitable example of the local project.” “Write the concept of monitoring, evaluation and controlling and also explain project control cycle.”

2079 Baishakh; 2070 Ashad (CE 701)

Only partly in the notes: page 71 covers monitoring and controlling project work and page 69 gives the baseline steps, but evaluation, the control cycle by name and a local example are not there.

The three concepts

MonitoringEvaluationControlling
AsksWhat is happening?Is it achieving its purpose, and was it worth it?What do we do about it?
TimingContinuousAt milestones, mid-term and at the endWhenever a variance appears
Looks atInputs, activities, outputs, against the planOutcomes, relevance, efficiency, impactDeviations from the baseline
ProducesProgress data, status reportsAn evaluation report and lessonsCorrective actions, change requests

Why they are needed

  • Early warning: problems with time, cost, quality or scope show while they are still cheap to fix.
  • Control of the triple constraint: actual work is compared with the baselines, so the project stays within time and budget.
  • Accountability: payments, reports and decisions rest on measured progress, not on claims.
  • Better decisions: forecasts tell managers and sponsors whether to continue, change or stop.
  • Stakeholder confidence: regular, honest reporting keeps the sponsor, funders and community informed.
  • Learning: evaluation records what worked, for this and later projects.

The project control cycle

  1. Plan: set the baseline and the measures.
  2. Measure: record actual progress.
  3. Compare: calculate the variance between planned and actual.
  4. Correct: take corrective or remedial action, update the plan if needed, and measure again.
  • Where it comes from: these are the notes’ baseline steps (set measures, record progress, calculate the variance, take remedial action), drawn as a loop in 7.4.

A local example: a municipal drinking water project

  • Monitoring: the site engineer records monthly progress: metres of pipe laid, tanks built, money spent, against the schedule and the BOQ.
  • Controlling: when pipe laying falls behind in the monsoon, the engineer adds a second crew in the dry season; payments are released only against measured work.
  • Evaluation: a mid-term evaluation with the users’ committee checks whether households actually get water; the final evaluation asks whether the scheme improved health and saved time for families.
  • Without them: delays and cost overruns stay hidden until the budget runs out, and nobody knows whether the scheme met its purpose.

The need for the closing process, with a mega project example asked 1×

“Describe the need of closing process and explain its importance with suitable example of the mega projects.”

2081 Baishakh

Only partly in the notes: pages 73 and 74 list the closing steps, but not why closing is needed or an example.

  • Formal acceptance: the client signs that the work is complete, which settles “is it done?” and allows final payment.
  • Contracts are closed: every contract is verified, evaluated and audited, so liabilities, guarantees and retention money end on a clear date.
  • Resources are released: people, equipment and money move to other work instead of being held by a project that is effectively finished.
  • Handover to operations: the product, its documents and training pass to the people who will run it.
  • Lessons learned are captured while the team still remembers, and records are archived for audits and future estimates.
  • The phase or project officially ends: no open tasks, no hidden costs, a clean record.

Example: a mega hydropower project

  • Scale: a multi-hundred-megawatt plant built over years with many contractors, lenders and government agencies.
  • Closed properly: each contractor’s work is measured and accepted; defect liability periods start; guarantees and retention are settled; as-built drawings, manuals and trained operators pass to the operating company; lenders and government get a final report; lessons feed the next hydropower project.
  • Not closed: disputes over unpaid bills and retention drag on for years, nobody is responsible when equipment fails, the operator has no drawings, and the next project repeats the same mistakes. The engineering finished, but the project never did.

Project scoping versus project closing asked 1×

“Compare: project scoping vs. project closing.”

2076 Ashwin

Only partly in the notes: scoping (pp. 75 to 78) and closing (pp. 73, 74) are described separately, not compared.

Project scopingProject closing
WhenEarly: initiation and planningAt the end of a phase or the project
PurposeDefine what is, and is not, includedFormally finish, accept and hand over
Process groupInitiating and planningClosing
Key activitiesCollect requirements, write the scope statement, create the WBS and dictionaryPhase end activities, administrative closure, contract closure, archiving
OutputsScope statement, WBS, WBS dictionary, scope baselineAccepted product, closure documents, updated process assets, lessons learned
Main riskUnclear scope leads to scope creepSkipped closure leaves disputes and lost lessons
  • How they connect: closing checks what was delivered against the scope baseline set in scoping; scope verification is the link between the two.

Worked example: a WBS for a library management system asked 1×

“Prepare WBS for library management system development project.”

2082 Bhadra

Not in the notes: they explain the WBS but give no worked library system.

  • Draw it as a numbered hierarchy (or as a tree like the one in 7.6); three levels is enough.
1.0 Library Management System 1.1 Project management 1.1.1 Project charter and plan 1.1.2 Monitoring, reporting and reviews 1.1.3 Project closure 1.2 Requirements 1.2.1 Stakeholder interviews 1.2.2 Requirement specification (SRS) 1.2.3 Requirement sign-off 1.3 Design 1.3.1 Database design (books, members, transactions) 1.3.2 User interface design 1.3.3 System architecture 1.4 Development 1.4.1 Catalogue and search module 1.4.2 Issue and return module 1.4.3 Member management module 1.4.4 Fine and reporting module 1.5 Testing 1.5.1 Unit testing 1.5.2 Integration testing 1.5.3 User acceptance testing 1.6 Deployment 1.6.1 Data migration from the old register 1.6.2 Installation and configuration 1.6.3 Staff training 1.7 Documentation and handover
  • Project management is branch 1.1: the 100% rule says it belongs.
  • Each lowest item is a work package of 8 to 80 hours of work (the 8/80 rule).
  • Deliverable oriented: every branch names something delivered, not a department.

100% rule: the WBS holds 100% of the work in the project scope, all deliverables including project management.

8/80 rule: the lowest level of work is between 8 and 80 hours.

Scope creep is uncontrolled: an approved change went through integrated change control and updated the baselines; creep was absorbed informally, so the plan stopped matching the work.

Back to the WBS and scope creep.

Initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing.

Planning holds the most: 21 of 39 processes in the notes’ grid, 24 of 49 in the slides’.

Back to the mapping grid.

Chapter 8 · 4 hours · appeared in 22 of 22 sittings

Project time management

How a schedule is built, from defining activities to controlling the finished schedule, and the network methods that compute it: CPM, PERT, probabilities and crashing. Almost every paper has a network numerical, and every one of them is solved at the end of this chapter.

What this chapter is about
  • Why schedules matter, and the six time management processes that build and keep a schedule.
  • Activities and their order: defining activities, sequencing them, dependency types, and drawing the network (AON and AOA, with dummies).
  • Estimating: the resources and durations of each activity, three-point estimates and reserve time.
  • Computing the schedule: the critical path method with forward and backward passes and the four floats; critical chain; PERT with probabilities; crashing; Gantt charts; schedule control.
  • Every past numerical, solved step by step, with its network drawn.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Chapter 7’s WBS is the input: its work packages are decomposed into the activities scheduled here.
  • Time is one side of the triple constraint (chapter 1); cost (chapter 9) is estimated on the same activities, and earned value there measures schedule progress too.
  • Three-point estimates and probabilities connect to risk (chapter 12); resource estimates connect to procurement (chapter 13).
What you will learn
  1. Time management and its processes
  2. Activity definition and sequencing
  3. Resource and duration estimating
  4. Schedule development, CPM and the passes, the floats, critical chain
  5. PERT and probability of completion
  6. Crashing, Gantt charts and schedule control
  7. Every past numerical, solved
  8. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • A network numerical (CPM, PERT, or crashing): in almost every sitting, usually 9 to 16 marks. Nineteen of them are solved at the end of this chapter.
  • Theory is rare: sequencing and its diagrams (two sittings), short notes on critical path analysis, the application of CPM, critical chain and the arrow diagramming method, one each.

8.1Project time management

Project time management and its processes asked 1×

Project time management The processes required to manage the timely completion of the project (slide 166). Time has the least flexibility of all: it passes no matter what happens on a project.

Why schedules matter (notes p. 82)

  • The manager’s biggest challenge is delivering projects on time.
  • Schedule issues cause the most conflict, mainly in the second half of a project.
  • Planned and actual finish dates rarely match, and many change requests during the project add delay.
  • So schedule management is needed: it focuses on completing the project on time.

Plan schedule management (notes p. 82): project charter, PM plan, environmental factors and process assets go in; expert judgement, data analysis and meetings are applied; the schedule management plan comes out.

The six processes (slide 166, notes pp. 82 to 92)

ProcessGroupWhat it doesMajor output
1. Activity definitionPlanningIdentifies the specific actions needed to produce the deliverablesActivity list
2. Activity sequencingPlanningIdentifies and documents the relationships among activitiesProject schedule network diagram
3. Activity resource estimatingPlanningWorks out what resources, and how many, each activity needsActivity resource requirements
4. Activity duration estimatingPlanningWorks out how long each activity will takeActivity duration estimates
5. Schedule developmentPlanningUses the other processes’ results to set the start and end datesProject schedule
6. Schedule controlMonitoring and controllingManages changes to the scheduleWork performance measurements
In the exam
  • “Why is there necessity of project time management? Explain how is that performed” (2069 Chaitra): the four reasons, then the six processes as the “how”, a line each.
Asked in past papers
  • Why is there necessity of Project Time management? Explain how is that performed. (2069 Chaitra Q8)

Answers: “Explain how project time management is performed” (2069 Chaitra): the six processes, in order.

How it decodes: six words, six processes, in order. Brother always gulps his raksi, staggers, and screams. The three D words run definition, duration, develop.

  1. DDai Definition of activities
  2. SSadhai Sequencing of activities
  3. RRaksi Resource estimating
  4. DDhokchha Duration estimating
  5. DDhalkinchha Develop schedule
  6. CChichyaunchha Control schedule

8.2Activity definition and activity sequencing

Activity definition

Activity definition “The process of identifying the specific actions to be performed to produce the project deliverables” (slide 167). Part of planning; it develops a more detailed WBS so that realistic cost and duration estimates can be made (notes p. 83).
  • Why it matters: when the team knows what must be done across the life cycle, products are released on time.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 167): scope statement, WBS, WBS dictionary, environmental factors, process assets and scope management plan go in; decomposition, rolling wave planning, templates, expert judgement and planning components are applied; the activity list, activity attributes and milestone list come out.

Decomposition of activities (notes p. 83, slide 169)

  1. Subdivide work packages into schedule activities.
  2. Define activities to meet the project objectives.
  3. Keep activities small and manageable.
  4. An activity may be a work package or a lower-level item.
  5. The WBS and the activity list may be developed one after the other or together.
  • Example (slide 170): to fix a customer’s software bug, first reproduce the issue, then modify the code to fix it, then deploy the fix at the customer’s end: three activities.

The terms (notes p. 83, slide 171)

  • Activity list: a table of the activities on the schedule, with a name, an identifier and a brief description of each.
  • Activity attributes: more information on each activity: predecessors, successors, logical relationships, leads and lags, resource requirements, constraints, imposed dates and assumptions.
  • Activity duration: the time estimated to complete it.
  • Node (event): the beginning or end of an activity; a point in time that consumes no time, manpower or materials.

Activity sequencing, dependencies and network diagrams asked 2×

Activity sequencing “The process of identifying and documenting relationships among the project activities” (slide 172): reviewing the activities and determining their dependencies (notes p. 83).

Why sequencing is important

  • Critical path analysis needs it: dependencies must be known before CPM can be used (notes p. 83).
  • The order decides the duration: activities that could run in parallel but are wrongly made sequential add their durations instead of overlapping.
  • It shows what can start when, so resources can be planned and the critical path found.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 172): scope statement, activity list, attributes, milestone list and process assets go in; PDM, ADM, dependency determination, leads and lags and network templates are applied; project schedule network diagrams and updated activity lists and attributes come out.

Three kinds of dependency (slide 175)

  • Mandatory (hard logic): required by contract or by the nature of the work: you cannot test code before it is written.
  • Discretionary (soft, preferred logic): based on best practice in the field; use them with care, because they limit scheduling options.
  • External: between project and non-project activities, generally outside the team’s control: delivery of hardware by a supplier.

Four precedence relationships (slide 177)

  • Finish-to-start (FS): the successor starts when the predecessor finishes. The most common, and the only one the exam numericals use.
  • Finish-to-finish (FF): the successor finishes when the predecessor finishes.
  • Start-to-start (SS): the successor starts when the predecessor starts: load testing starts once system monitoring has been enabled.
  • Start-to-finish (SF): the predecessor’s start ends the successor; rarely used: migrating to a new IT system, where the old one runs until the new one starts.

Network diagrams (notes p. 83, slide 178)

  • What: the preferred way to show sequencing; a schematic of the logical relationships among the project activities.
  • Drawing rules: always left to right; one start point and one end point; every activity has a predecessor and a successor (except the ends); no loops.
Precedence diagramming method (PDM)Arrow diagramming method (ADM)
Also calledActivity on node (AON)Activity on arrow (AOA)
Activity isA boxAn arrow
Arrows showThe relationshipsThe activities themselves
Nodes areThe activitiesEvents: the start and end points of activities
DependenciesAll four typesFinish-to-start only
DummiesNever neededSometimes needed
UseMore popular; used by PM softwareOlder; still in some exam papers
How the exam gives itA table of activity, predecessor, durationA table of node pairs such as (1, 2)
AON, the precedence diagram method
Precedence diagram: Start leads to A and B, A to C to D, B to C and to E to F, and D and F to Finish; activities are boxes
AOA, with every path worked out
Activity on arrow network of eight events with durations on the arrows, and the four paths listed with their lengths: B-E-H-J is longest at 16 days
In AON the activities are the boxes and the arrows only show dependency. In AOA the activities are the arrows and the circles are events. List every path, add up its durations, and the longest is the critical path: here B-E-H-J, 16 days. Course notes, pp. 84, 88

Dummy activities (slides 182, 183)

  • What: an imaginary activity in an arrow network. It consumes no time, manpower, material or other resources, and is drawn as a dotted arrow.
  • Why: to keep the relationships between activities correct. Two uses: a grammatical purpose (two activities with the same start and end events get a dummy so each has its own pair of events) and a logical purpose (to show a dependency the arrows alone cannot).
Arrow network of seven events: A from 1 to 2; B from 2 to 3 and C from 2 to 4; D from 3 to 5; a dashed dummy arrow from 4 to 5; E from 4 to 6; F from 5 to 6; G from 6 to 7
A dummy activity (the dashed arrow from 4 to 5): it takes no time and no resources, and exists only to show that F must also wait for C. Course notes, p. 96
  • Converting node pairs to predecessors: an activity depends on every activity whose end node is its start node. This turns any arrow table into a normal predecessor table.
  • Fulkerson’s rule for numbering events (named in notes p. 95): number the start event 1; delete the arrows leaving it; the events that now have no incoming arrows get the next numbers; repeat until every event is numbered. Every arrow then runs from a lower number to a higher one.
In the exam
  • “Why is it important to determine activity sequencing? What diagrams or methods can be used?” (2070 Ashad): the importance points, then PDM and ADM with the table and a small sketch of each.
  • Short note, “Arrow diagramming method” (2069 Chaitra): what it is, events and arrows, finish-to-start only, dummies, and a small example.
Asked in past papers
  • Why is it important to determine activity sequencing on projects? What are different diagrams/methods that can be used to sequence activities in the project? (2070 Ashad Q9)
  • Write short notes on: a) Expert Judgement b) Arrow Diagramming Method c) Balance score card (2069 Chaitra Q15)

8.3Activity resource and duration estimating

Estimating resources and durations asked 1×

Activity resource estimating (notes p. 84, slides 184 to 186)

  • Goal: identify what resources, and how many, each task needs. You need this before estimating durations.
  • Questions to ask: how difficult are the activities? What is the organisation’s history with similar work? Are the resources available?
  • Resource types: information, people, technology, facilities, equipment, money; use them effectively and efficiently.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs: activity list and attributes, resource calendars, environmental factors and process assets go in; expert judgement, alternatives analysis, published estimating data, bottom-up estimating and PM software are applied; activity resource requirements, a resource breakdown structure and document updates come out.
  • Who estimates: the people doing the work, reviewed by an expert.

Activity duration estimating (notes p. 85, slides 187 to 191)

Duration estimating “The process of approximating the number of work periods needed to complete individual activities with estimated resources” (slide 187).
  • Duration is not effort: duration is the time worked plus elapsed time; effort is the number of workdays or work hours needed. They are rarely equal.
  • Based on: the work effort, the resources, productivity, risk information and the organisation’s history.
  • Three kinds of activity: stable (straightforward to estimate); dependent (testing time depends on whether tests pass: use three-point or analogous estimates); uncertain.
  • Tools: expert judgement, analogous estimating, parametric estimating, three-point estimates, reserve analysis.
  • Three-point estimate: an optimistic, a most likely and a pessimistic estimate, such as three, four and five weeks, instead of one number. PERT needs them.
  • Reserve time: a percentage of the project duration, or a set number of work periods, usually added at the end of the schedule, or to risky activities. Late activities use it up; it can be reduced as the project moves on, and every reserve decision is documented.
Asked in past papers
  • Define the terms resource histogram, resource levelling limited resource allocation and work break structure. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q3b)

8.4Schedule development: CPM, the floats and critical chain

Schedule development, its principles and milestones

Schedule development The process of analysing activity sequences, durations, resource requirements and constraints to create the project schedule (slide 193). It uses the results of the other time processes to set the project’s start and end dates; its goal is a realistic schedule that is the basis for monitoring progress (slide 192).
  • Three steps before it: define the activities (WBS), put them in order (sequencing), estimate each duration.
  • Main tools: Gantt charts, critical path analysis, critical chain scheduling, PERT analysis.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 193): activity list and attributes, network diagrams, resource requirements and calendars, duration estimates and the scope statement go in; schedule network analysis, CPM, the critical chain method, resource levelling, what-if scenarios, leads and lags and PM software are applied; the project schedule, the schedule baseline and schedule data come out.

Principles for scheduling (notes p. 86)

  1. Neither too tight nor too loose: do not commit to what the team cannot deliver.
  2. Remove uncertainty as it arises: analyse risk and use the risk plan while scheduling.
  3. Keep backup plans to deal with changes.
  4. Pick the right level of detail for activity durations.
  5. Schedule for the unexpected: events nobody foresaw will interrupt the flow.

Milestones (notes p. 86, slide 194)

  • What: a significant event that normally has no duration; it often takes several activities and a lot of work to reach one.
  • Why: they set schedule goals and let progress be monitored; large projects focus on them.
  • SMART milestones: specific, measurable, assignable, realistic, time-framed.

The critical path method, and the forward and backward passes asked 2×

Critical path method (CPM) A network diagramming technique used to predict the total project duration. The critical path is the series of activities that determines the earliest time the project can be completed: the longest path through the network, with the least slack or float (notes p. 86, slide 195).
  • Slack or float: the time an activity can be delayed without delaying a succeeding activity or the project finish date.
  • If a critical activity takes longer than planned, the whole schedule slips unless the project manager takes corrective action (notes p. 88).

Calculating the critical path (notes p. 88, slide 196)

  1. Draw a good network diagram.
  2. Add the durations of the activities on each path through it.
  3. The longest path is the critical path.

The four times of every activity (slide 196)

  • Earliest start (ES): the earliest it can begin without violating its predecessors.
  • Earliest finish (EF): the earliest it can end.
  • Latest start (LS): the latest it can begin without delaying the project.
  • Latest finish (LF): the latest it can end without delaying the project.
  • Notation: papers write EST, EFT, LST, LFT; the same four numbers.

The two passes (notes p. 87)

FORWARD PASS (left to right: early times) EF = ES + duration ES of a successor = EF of its predecessor at a MERGE, ES = the LARGEST preceding EF start activities: ES = 0 BACKWARD PASS (right to left: late times) LS = LF - duration LF of a predecessor = LS of its successor at a BURST, LF = the SMALLEST succeeding LS last activities: LF = project duration
  • Maximum forward, minimum backward: going forward, an activity waits for its slowest predecessor; going backward, it must finish before its tightest successor needs to start.
  • Check: at least one complete chain from start to end must have ES = LS on every activity; if none does, there is an arithmetic slip.
An activity node with early start, name and early finish on top, late start, duration and late finish below; the forward pass arrow notes early start comes from the predecessor early finish and early finish is early start plus duration; the backward pass arrow notes late finish comes from the successor late start and late start is late finish minus duration
The two passes in one box: the forward pass fills the top row, the backward pass the bottom row. Course notes, p. 103
Small AON network with each node showing early start and early finish on top and late start and late finish below: A is 0 to 5 early and 5 to 10 late, B is 0 to 10 both ways, C is 10 to 17 both ways
How each node is labelled: early start and early finish on top from the forward pass, late start and late finish below from the backward pass. A has 5 days of float; B and C have none, so Start, B, C is critical. Course notes, p. 87

Applications of CPM

  • Predicts the project duration and the start and finish dates of every activity.
  • Identifies the critical activities, which management must watch most closely.
  • Shows the float of the others: the freedom to delay them, or to move resources.
  • Supports schedule compression: crashing and fast tracking are applied to critical activities (notes p. 86).
  • Guides resource levelling and control: delays on the critical path are the ones that matter.
  • Where it fits best: projects with fairly certain durations, such as construction (notes p. 91).
In the exam
  • Short note, “Critical path analysis” (2070 Chaitra): the definition, the three steps, the four times and the passes, TF = 0 on the critical path, a small example.
  • Short note, “Application of CPM” (2081 Baishakh): what CPM is, then the applications list.
  • Every CPM numerical is solved at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: a) S - curve b) Balanced Scorecard c) Pareto chart d) Application of CPM e) Decision tree analysis (2081 Baishakh Q14)
  • Write short notes on: (any five) a) Balanced Scorecard b) Tornado analysis c) Critical path analysis d) Decision tree analysis e) Trends in cloud computing f) Outsourcing and off-shoring options (2070 Chaitra Q9)

The four floats

Definitions and formulas (notes pp. 86, 87)

  • Total float (TF): how long an activity can be delayed without delaying the project. TF = LS - ES = LF - EF.
  • Free float (FF): how long it can be delayed without delaying the early start of any successor. FF = ES (of the successor) - EF (of this activity); with several successors take the smallest ES; a last activity’s FF = project duration - EF.
  • Independent float (IdF): the delay available even when the predecessors finish as late as possible and the successors start as early as possible. IdF = ES (earliest successor) - LF (latest predecessor) - duration, and never below 0.
  • Interfering float (IF): IF = TF - FF: the part of the total float that, if used, delays a successor (though not the project).
TF = LS - ES (= LF - EF) FF = min(ES of successors) - EF IdF = max(0, min(ES of successors) - max(LF of predecessors) - duration) IF = TF - FF
  • TF = 0 marks the critical path.
  • Order of size: TF ≥ FF ≥ IdF; if FF comes out bigger than TF, recheck.
  • Slack and float mean the same. “Total network slack” is the sum of the total floats of all activities.
THE FOUR FLOATS, ON ONE ACTIVITY Total float is the whole slack. Free float is the part you can use without pushing anyone. ESEF LSLF activity, earliest same activity, latest TOTAL FLOAT = LS - ES FREE INTERFERING Free float delays nobody. Interfering float pushes a successor without delaying the project. TF = LS - ES. FF = earliest ES of successors - EF. IF = TF - FF. IdF also assumes the worst at both ends.

Critical chain scheduling, and Monte Carlo simulation asked 1×

Critical chain scheduling A scheduling method that considers limited resources and includes buffers to protect the project completion date (notes p. 88).
  • Buffer: additional time to complete a task.
  • The key move: it removes the buffers hidden in individual tasks and instead creates shared buffers:
    • Project buffer: time added before the project’s due date.
    • Feeding buffers: time added before tasks on the critical chain, where other chains feed into it.
  • Why it helps (beyond your notes): people pad their own estimates and then use the padding anyway (work expands to fill the time). Pooling the padding into visible buffers protects the finish date, and how fast the buffers are being eaten becomes the early warning signal.
  • Critical chain versus critical path: the critical path looks only at logical dependencies; the critical chain also counts resource dependencies, such as one tester needed by two activities at once.

Monte Carlo simulation (notes pp. 88, 89)

  • What: simulates a model’s outcome many times to give a statistical distribution of results.
  • It tells: the probability of finishing on any given day or for any given cost, the probability of each task being on the critical path, and the overall project risk.
  • Example: the project finishes by one date only 10% of the time, and by a later date 50% of the time.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Critical chain scheduling” (2070 Ashad): the definition, the two buffers, and how it differs from the critical path.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short note on: a) Project stakeholders b) Project management information system c) Critical Chain Scheduling d) Categories of Risk e) Balanced Score Card f) Constructive Cost Model (COCOMO) (2070 Ashad Q16)

8.5PERT and the probability of completion

PERT: three estimates for uncertain durations

PERT (program evaluation and review technique) A network analysis technique for estimating project duration when there is a high degree of uncertainty about the individual duration estimates. It uses three time estimates per activity (notes p. 89).
  • Optimistic time (a or to): the minimum time, when everything goes right.
  • Most likely time (m or tm): the time in normal conditions.
  • Pessimistic time (b or tp): the maximum time, when everything goes wrong.
a + 4m + b expected time te = ---------- standard deviation sd = (b - a) / 6 6 variance v = ((b - a) / 6)^2
  • Why divide by 6: te is a weighted average that counts the most likely value four times.
  • Variance depends only on the spread b - a: a wide range means an uncertain activity.
  • Then work exactly as in CPM on the te values: passes, critical path, expected project duration Te = the sum of te along it.
  • The slide 201 example: ideal 10 weeks, worst 34, normal 16. te = (10 + 4 x 16 + 34) / 6 = 108 / 6 = 18 weeks. (The slide prints 27, which is an arithmetic slip.)
Beta distribution of activity time, skewed right, with the optimistic, most likely, expected and pessimistic times marked on the time axis
PERT treats each activity time as a beta distribution: optimistic to, most likely tm, pessimistic tp. The expected time te is pulled toward the long tail, which is why te = (to + 4tm + tp) / 6. Course notes, p. 90

PERT versus CPM (notes p. 91)

PERTCPM
For uncertain activitiesFor activities with certain durations
Event oriented: the network is built on eventsActivity oriented
A probability modelA deterministic model
For high precision time estimationFor reasonable time estimation
Non-repetitive workRepetitive work
No crashing, as times are not certainCrashing possible, times are certain
Does not use dummy activitiesUses dummy activities for sequences
Suits research and developmentSuits construction
Costly to maintainEasy to maintain

Probability of finishing by a target date asked 1×

  1. Find the critical path and the expected duration Te = the sum of te on it.
  2. Project variance V = the sum of the variances of the critical activities (notes p. 99).
  3. Standard deviation σ = √V.
  4. The probability index (z-score): z = (T - Te) / σ, where T is the target date (notes p. 102).
  5. Read P(Z ≤ z) from the normal table.
  • Add variances, never standard deviations. Only critical activities count.
  • The notes’ calculator way (Casio fx-991EX, notes pp. 102, 103): Menu, Statistics, AC, OPTN, down, then Q( gives the area from 0 to z; for a positive z add 0.5: P = 0.5 + Q(z). For a negative z, P = 0.5 - Q(|z|).
  • Sanity check: a target later than Te must give more than 50%; an earlier one less.

The notes’ worked example (notes pp. 100 to 103): critical path A, C, F, G, Te = 28 weeks; variances 1 + 4/9 + 1/9 + 4/9 = 2, σ = 1.414. For 30 weeks: z = (30 - 28) / 1.414 = 1.41, Q = 0.4207, P = 0.5 + 0.4207 = 92.07%: a 92% chance of finishing within 30 weeks, and an 8% chance of running later.

z-2.0-1.5-1.0-0.50+0.5+1.0+1.41+1.5+2.0+2.5
P(Z ≤ z)2.28%6.68%15.87%30.85%50%69.15%84.13%92.07%93.32%97.72%99.38%
In the exam
  • “How do we calculate the probability index for a project?” (2079 Bhadra): the five steps, the z formula, and the notes’ example.
  • Every PERT numerical is solved at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • What is project charter? How we calculate probability index for a project? (2079 Bhadra Q4a)

8.6Crashing, Gantt charts and schedule control

Shortening the schedule: crashing and fast tracking

  • Two techniques for shortening schedules: crashing and fast tracking (notes p. 86). The rest of this card is beyond your notes, but the exam has set a 12-mark crashing question.
  • Crashing: add resources to critical activities to shorten them, at extra cost.
  • Fast tracking: overlap activities that were planned in sequence, at extra risk.
crash cost - normal cost (the extra cost of crashing) crash slope = ------------------------- = ------------------------------ normal time - crash time (the time it saves) = the cost of saving ONE unit of time on that activity
  1. Crash only critical activities: shortening one with float buys nothing.
  2. Take the cheapest option first, one unit of time at a time.
  3. Recompute the paths after every step: another path may become critical.
  4. When several paths are critical, shorten all of them, by an activity common to them or by one activity on each, whichever costs less.
  5. Stop at the target, or when nothing more can be crashed.

Gantt charts

  • What: a chart that displays schedule information: the activities and their start and finish dates in a calendar format (notes p. 91, slide 198).
  • Symbols: a black diamond is a milestone; thick black bars are summary tasks; lighter horizontal bars are task durations; arrows are dependencies.
  • Milestones on it: entered as tasks of zero duration, or any task marked as a milestone (notes p. 92).
  • Network versus Gantt: the network computes the schedule and shows the critical path; the Gantt chart presents it on a calendar for people who do not read networks.
Gantt chart of activities A to J as horizontal bars across four weeks of a calendar, with dependency arrows from each bar to the next
A Gantt chart: one bar per activity along a calendar, with the dependencies drawn as arrows. Course notes, p. 92

The notes’ bar chart examples (notes pp. 93, 94)

  • Example 8.1: A (2 weeks) and B (4) run in parallel from week 1; C (2) and D (4) start after B, in week 5; E (6) starts when half of C is done, in week 6, and runs to week 11; F (4) starts after D, weeks 9 to 12. Completion: 12 weeks.
  • Example 8.2 (days): A 40 and B 20 start at 0; D 25 after A (40 to 65); C 15 after A and B (40 to 55); F 25 after A and B (40 to 65); E 15 after C (55 to 70); G 10 after F (65 to 75). Completion: 75 days, along A, F, G.

Schedule control

Schedule control Part of monitoring and controlling: the process of monitoring the project’s status to update progress and manage changes to the schedule baseline (slide 199); its goal is a strategy to address risks and changes to the schedule during execution (notes p. 92).
  • Reality checks (notes p. 92): review the draft schedule or the completion date in the charter; prepare a more detailed schedule with the team; make sure the schedule is realistic and followed; alert top management well in advance of schedule problems.
  • Good practice (slide 199): allow for contingencies; do not plan for everyone to work at 100% capacity all the time; hold progress meetings with stakeholders and be clear and honest about schedule issues.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 199): PM plan, project schedule, work performance information and process assets go in; performance reviews, resource levelling, what-if scenarios, leads and lags and PM software are applied; work performance measurements, change requests and plan updates come out.

8.7Every past numerical, solved

Each card below is one past question, newest first: the question as set, the data, the network drawn, both passes line by line, the floats, and the answer. The working is computed, not typed, so every number is consistent.

All 39 numericals from every paper, with the formula sheet in front of them and each solution closed so you can attempt it first, are on the numericals page.

2082 Bhadra Q4: Network, critical path, EST, EFT, LST, LFT and total float asked 1×

Network, critical path, EST, EFT, LST, LFT and total float 2082 Bhadra Q4 · 2+2+2+2 marks

The question. A Project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Duration/Predecessor: A 3 -; B 4 A; C 5 A; D 6 B; E 3 C; F 2 C; G 4 D,E; H 5 F; I 6 G,H. Answer the following: a) Draw the network diagram b) Trace critical path with respective activities c) Find out EST, EFT, LST, LFT d) Find Total float of each Activities

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone3
    BA4
    CA5
    DB6
    EC3
    FC2
    GD, E4
    HF5
    IG, H6
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A start; merges at G, I; bursts after A, C.
    WORKED NETWORK, 2082 BHADRA Q4 Critical path A to B to D to G to I. Duration 23 days. Every other activity has 2 days of float. A3 B4 C5 D6 E3 F2 G4 H5 I6 RESULT 23 days A B D G I Blue boxes and thick arrows are the critical path. The number inside each node is its duration in days.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 3 = 3 B ES = EF(A) = 3, EF = 3 + 4 = 7 C ES = EF(A) = 3, EF = 3 + 5 = 8 D ES = EF(B) = 7, EF = 7 + 6 = 13 E ES = EF(C) = 8, EF = 8 + 3 = 11 F ES = EF(C) = 8, EF = 8 + 2 = 10 G ES = max(EF(D), EF(E)) = max(13, 11) = 13, EF = 13 + 4 = 17 H ES = EF(F) = 10, EF = 10 + 5 = 15 I ES = max(EF(G), EF(H)) = max(17, 15) = 17, EF = 17 + 6 = 23 Project duration = the largest EF = 23 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    I LF = 23 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 23 - 6 = 17 H LF = LS(I) = 17, LS = 17 - 5 = 12 G LF = LS(I) = 17, LS = 17 - 4 = 13 F LF = LS(H) = 12, LS = 12 - 2 = 10 E LF = LS(G) = 13, LS = 13 - 3 = 10 D LF = LS(G) = 13, LS = 13 - 6 = 7 C LF = min(LS(E), LS(F)) = min(10, 10) = 10, LS = 10 - 5 = 5 B LF = LS(D) = 7, LS = 7 - 4 = 3 A LF = min(LS(B), LS(C)) = min(3, 5) = 3, LS = 3 - 3 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A303030yes
    B437370yes
    C5385102
    D67137130yes
    E381110132
    F281010122
    G4131713170yes
    H5101512172
    I6172317230yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - B - D - G - I 23 days <- longest: critical A - C - E - G - I 21 days A - C - F - H - I 21 days
Critical path: A → B → D → G → I.
Project duration: 23 days.
Non-critical: C (TF 2), E (TF 2), F (TF 2), H (TF 2).
Asked in past papers
  • A Project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Duration/Predecessor: A 3 -; B 4 A; C 5 A; D 6 B; E 3 C; F 2 C; G 4 D,E; H 5 F; I 6 G,H. Answer the following: a) Draw the network diagram b) Trace critical path with respective activities c) Find out EST, EFT, LST, LFT d) Find Total float of each Activities (2082 Bhadra Q4)

2082 Baishakh Q4: PERT network, completion time, and the chance of finishing in 16 weeks asked 1×

PERT network, completion time, and the chance of finishing in 16 weeks 2082 Baishakh Q4 · 4x3 marks

The question. The discussion among investors of a company to explore new avenue with manufacturing gift items/merchandise targeted for various events. You are assigned as the project manager of this pilot project. Your team has come up with the following associated activities and timings. Activity/Description/Predecessor/Optimistic/Most Likely/Pessimistic: A Design package None 8 15 22; B Design product A 21 25 35; C Secure patent B 30 45 60; D Build package A 6 9 12; E Build product B 30 36 48; F Finishing and detailing C,D,E 9 12 15; G Run pilot campgain F 5 7 9. i) Draw the activity network diagram with depiction of critical path. ii) What is the project completion time in week? iii) How confident are we that this project will be completed within 16 weeks after project start? Write in exact percentage up to two decimal digits (i.e. WX.YZ %) (Table is at the end of the question paper)

  1. Expected time and variance of every activity. te = (a + 4m + b) / 6, σ2 = ((b - a) / 6)2, with a optimistic, m most likely, b pessimistic.
    ActivityDescriptionPredecessorsambteσ2
    ADesign packagenone8152215.005.44
    BDesign productA21253526.005.44
    CSecure patentB30456045.0025.00
    DBuild packageA69129.001.00
    EBuild productB30364837.009.00
    FFinishing and detailingC, D, E9121512.001.00
    GRun pilot campaignF5797.000.44
    A te = (8 + 4x15 + 22)/6 = 90/6 = 15.00 var = ((22 - 8)/6)^2 = 5.44 B te = (21 + 4x25 + 35)/6 = 156/6 = 26.00 var = ((35 - 21)/6)^2 = 5.44 C te = (30 + 4x45 + 60)/6 = 270/6 = 45.00 var = ((60 - 30)/6)^2 = 25.00 D te = (6 + 4x9 + 12)/6 = 54/6 = 9.00 var = ((12 - 6)/6)^2 = 1.00 E te = (30 + 4x36 + 48)/6 = 222/6 = 37.00 var = ((48 - 30)/6)^2 = 9.00 F te = (9 + 4x12 + 15)/6 = 72/6 = 12.00 var = ((15 - 9)/6)^2 = 1.00 G te = (5 + 4x7 + 9)/6 = 42/6 = 7.00 var = ((9 - 5)/6)^2 = 0.44
  2. Draw the network on the expected times and run both passes, exactly as in CPM.
    PERT NETWORK, 2082 BAISHAKH Q4 Durations are the expected times te; critical path A - B - C - F - G, 105.00 days. 0 15 A (15) 0 15 15 41 B (26) 15 41 41 86 C (45) 41 86 15 24 D (9) 77 86 41 78 E (37) 49 86 86 98 F (12) 86 98 98 105 G (7) 98 105 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A150150150yes
    B26154115410yes
    C45418641860yes
    D91524778662
    E37417849868
    F12869886980yes
    G798105981050yes
  3. Paths and their expected lengths.
    A - B - C - F - G 105 days <- longest: critical A - B - E - F - G 97 days A - D - F - G 43 days
  4. Project variance: add the variances of the critical activities only.
    V = 5.44(A) + 5.44(B) + 25.00(C) + 1.00(F) + 0.44(G) = 37.33 sigma = sqrt(37.33) = 6.11 days
  5. Probability of finishing by the target: z = (T - Te) / σ, then read P(Z ≤ z) from the normal table (the notes’ calculator way: P = 0.5 ± Q(|z|)).
    T = 112 (16 weeks = 112 days) z = (112 - 105.00) / 6.11 = 1.15 P = 0.5 + 0.3749 = 87.49 % T = 16 (16 taken as the same unit as the estimates) z = (16 - 105.00) / 6.11 = -14.57 P = 0.5 - 0.5000 = 0.00 %
Critical path: A → B → C → F → G.
Expected completion time Te = 105.00 days = 15.00 weeks, with σ = 6.11.
P(finish within 16 weeks = 112 days) = 87.49% (exact, without rounding z: 87.40%).
P(finish within 16 taken as the same unit as the estimates) = 0.00%.
The unit trap in this question. The estimates (5 to 60) are plainly days, but the question asks for the completion time “in week” and the chance of “16 weeks”. Convert: Te = 105 days = 15.00 weeks, and 16 weeks = 112 days, which gives 87.49%. Read 16 in the same unit as the estimates and the chance is zero, which cannot be what the examiner meant. Write the assumption in one line, then answer.
Asked in past papers
  • The discussion among investors of a company to explore new avenue with manufacturing gift items/merchandise targeted for various events. You are assigned as the project manager of this pilot project. Your team has come up with the following associated activities and timings. Activity/Description/Predecessor/Optimistic/Most Likely/Pessimistic: A Design package None 8 15 22; B Design product A 21 25 35; C Secure patent B 30 45 60; D Build package A 6 9 12; E Build product B 30 36 48; F Finishing and detailing C,D,E 9 12 15; G Run pilot campgain F 5 7 9. i) Draw the activity network diagram with depiction of critical path. ii) What is the project completion time in week? iii) How confident are we that this project will be completed within 16 weeks after project start? Write in exact percentage up to two decimal digits (i.e. WX.YZ %) (Table is at the end of the question paper) (2082 Baishakh Q4)

2081 Bhadra Q6: Crashing the robotic boat project to 15 weeks asked 1×

Crashing the robotic boat project to 15 weeks 2081 Bhadra Q6 · 12 marks

The question. You are the leader of Robotics Club at your university campus. Your team has got an opportunity to participate in an international competition of Robotic boat racing, which is to be held in London in the next 15 weeks' time. You make the following estimates for this project. Given the importance of this event, how would you crash some activities if necessary to make it in time for the event accordingly? Activity/Description/Predecessor/Activity Time (week)/Max. Crash Time (week)/Crash Cost (NRs.)/Crash Slope (NRs.): A Design boat None 3 3 - -; B Develop control system A 4 2 80000 40000; C Source material A 1 1 - -; D Build boat C 5 2 150000 50000; E Integrate system B,D 3 1 170000 85000; F Test/Design tunning E 2 2 - -; G Finalize event participation F 4 4 - -. Illustrate and calculate the followings: i) Regular Activity network diagram with Total project duration. ii) Modified network diagram and the additional crash cost incurred.

  1. Read the data, and the crash slope of each activity. Crash slope = crash cost / (normal time - crash time) = the cost of one week saved.
    ActivityDescriptionPredecessorsNormal timeCrash timeCan saveCrash costCrash slope
    ADesign boatnone330cannot crash
    BDevelop control systemA42280,00080,000 / 2 = 40,000
    CSource materialA110cannot crash
    DBuild boatC523150,000150,000 / 3 = 50,000
    EIntegrate systemB, D312170,000170,000 / 2 = 85,000
    FTest and tuningE220cannot crash
    GFinalize event participationF440cannot crash
  2. The regular network.
    NORMAL NETWORK, 2081 BHADRA Q6 Normal durations: critical path A - C - D - E - F - G, 18 weeks. 0 3 A (3) 0 3 3 7 B (4) 5 9 3 4 C (1) 3 4 4 9 D (5) 4 9 9 12 E (3) 9 12 12 14 F (2) 12 14 14 18 G (4) 14 18 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
    A - B - E - F - G 16 weeks A - C - D - E - F - G 18 weeks <- longest: critical

    Normal duration 18 weeks, critical path A → C → D → E → F → G. The event is in 15 weeks, so the project must lose 3 weeks.

  3. Crash one week at a time, always the cheapest way to shorten every critical path.
    Step 1: duration 18. Critical path(s): A - C - D - E - F - G options: D = 50,000; E = 85,000 crash D by 1 week: +NRs. 50,000 (total NRs. 50,000) -> 17 weeks Step 2: duration 17. Critical path(s): A - C - D - E - F - G options: D = 50,000; E = 85,000 crash D by 1 week: +NRs. 50,000 (total NRs. 100,000) -> 16 weeks Step 3: duration 16. Critical path(s): A - B - E - F - G; A - C - D - E - F - G options: E = 85,000; B + D = 90,000 crash E by 1 week: +NRs. 85,000 (total NRs. 185,000) -> 15 weeks
  4. The modified network.
    CRASHED NETWORK, 2081 BHADRA Q6 After crashing: 15 weeks; every path now meets the deadline. 0 3 A (3) 0 3 3 7 B (4) 3 7 3 4 C (1) 3 4 4 7 D (3) 4 7 7 9 E (2) 7 9 9 11 F (2) 9 11 11 15 G (4) 11 15 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
    A - B - E - F - G 15 weeks <- longest: critical A - C - D - E - F - G 15 weeks <- longest: critical
Regular duration: 18 weeks on A → C → D → E → F → G.
Crash: D by 2 weeks (slope NRs. 50,000); E by 1 week (slope NRs. 85,000).
New duration: 15 weeks, in time for the event.
Additional crash cost: NRs. 185,000.
Why not the cheapest slope first? B has the lowest slope (NRs. 40,000) but is not critical at first, so crashing it buys nothing. Once two paths are critical, a single activity common to both (E) can beat crashing one activity on each path (B + D). The crashing method itself is not in your notes (p. 86 only names crashing and fast tracking).
Asked in past papers
  • You are the leader of Robotics Club at your university campus. Your team has got an opportunity to participate in an international competition of Robotic boat racing, which is to be held in London in the next 15 weeks' time. You make the following estimates for this project. Given the importance of this event, how would you crash some activities if necessary to make it in time for the event accordingly? Activity/Description/Predecessor/Activity Time (week)/Max. Crash Time (week)/Crash Cost (NRs.)/Crash Slope (NRs.): A Design boat None 3 3 - -; B Develop control system A 4 2 80000 40000; C Source material A 1 1 - -; D Build boat C 5 2 150000 50000; E Integrate system B,D 3 1 170000 85000; F Test/Design tunning E 2 2 - -; G Finalize event participation F 4 4 - -. Illustrate and calculate the followings: i) Regular Activity network diagram with Total project duration. ii) Modified network diagram and the additional crash cost incurred. (2081 Bhadra Q6)

2081 Baishakh Q7: Network, critical activities and project duration asked 1×

Network, critical activities and project duration 2081 Baishakh Q7 · 3+2+2 marks

The question. Consider a project having following activities and duration required to complete them as shown in table below. Activity/Predecessor/Duration: A - 5; B A 4; C A 5; D B 6; E C 3; F D,E 4. a) Prepare the network diagram. b) Identify the critical activity. c) Find the project duration.

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone5
    BA4
    CA5
    DB6
    EC3
    FD, E4
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A start; merges at F; bursts after A.
    NETWORK, 2081 BAISHAKH Q7 Critical path A - B - D - F, project duration 19 days. 0 5 A (5) 0 5 5 9 B (4) 5 9 5 10 C (5) 7 12 9 15 D (6) 9 15 10 13 E (3) 12 15 15 19 F (4) 15 19 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 5 = 5 B ES = EF(A) = 5, EF = 5 + 4 = 9 C ES = EF(A) = 5, EF = 5 + 5 = 10 D ES = EF(B) = 9, EF = 9 + 6 = 15 E ES = EF(C) = 10, EF = 10 + 3 = 13 F ES = max(EF(D), EF(E)) = max(15, 13) = 15, EF = 15 + 4 = 19 Project duration = the largest EF = 19 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    F LF = 19 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 19 - 4 = 15 E LF = LS(F) = 15, LS = 15 - 3 = 12 D LF = LS(F) = 15, LS = 15 - 6 = 9 C LF = LS(E) = 12, LS = 12 - 5 = 7 B LF = LS(D) = 9, LS = 9 - 4 = 5 A LF = min(LS(B), LS(C)) = min(5, 7) = 5, LS = 5 - 5 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A505050yes
    B459590yes
    C55107122
    D69159150yes
    E3101312152
    F4151915190yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - B - D - F 19 days <- longest: critical A - C - E - F 17 days
Critical path: A → B → D → F.
Project duration: 19 days.
Non-critical: C (TF 2), E (TF 2).
Asked in past papers
  • Consider a project having following activities and duration required to complete them as shown in table below. Activity/Predecessor/Duration: A - 5; B A 4; C A 5; D B 6; E C 3; F D,E 4. a) Prepare the network diagram. b) Identify the critical activity. c) Find the project duration. (2081 Baishakh Q7)

2080 Bhadra Q5: CPM network, four times, total and free float, critical path asked 1×

CPM network, four times, total and free float, critical path 2080 Bhadra Q5 · 5+5+1+1 marks

The question. Construct the CPM Network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D B C E,F,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 9 7 6 7 6 4. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) EST, EFT, LST, LFT Total and free float time c) Critical path d) Project completion time

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone11
    Bnone5
    CA9
    DB7
    ED6
    FB7
    GC6
    HE, F, G4
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A and B start together; merges at H; bursts after B.
    NETWORK, 2080 BHADRA Q5 Critical path A - C - G - H, project duration 30 days. START 0 11 A (11) 0 11 0 5 B (5) 8 13 11 20 C (9) 11 20 5 12 D (7) 13 20 12 18 E (6) 20 26 5 12 F (7) 19 26 20 26 G (6) 20 26 26 30 H (4) 26 30 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 11 = 11 B ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 5 = 5 C ES = EF(A) = 11, EF = 11 + 9 = 20 D ES = EF(B) = 5, EF = 5 + 7 = 12 E ES = EF(D) = 12, EF = 12 + 6 = 18 F ES = EF(B) = 5, EF = 5 + 7 = 12 G ES = EF(C) = 20, EF = 20 + 6 = 26 H ES = max(EF(E), EF(F), EF(G)) = max(18, 12, 26) = 26, EF = 26 + 4 = 30 Project duration = the largest EF = 30 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    H LF = 30 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 30 - 4 = 26 G LF = LS(H) = 26, LS = 26 - 6 = 20 F LF = LS(H) = 26, LS = 26 - 7 = 19 E LF = LS(H) = 26, LS = 26 - 6 = 20 D LF = LS(E) = 20, LS = 20 - 7 = 13 C LF = LS(G) = 20, LS = 20 - 9 = 11 B LF = min(LS(D), LS(F)) = min(13, 19) = 13, LS = 13 - 5 = 8 A LF = LS(C) = 11, LS = 11 - 11 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF FF = min(ES of successors) - EF (last activity: duration - EF)
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFFFCritical
    A1101101100yes
    B50581380
    C91120112000yes
    D7512132080
    E61218202688
    F751219261414
    G62026202600yes
    H42630263000yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - C - G - H 30 days <- longest: critical B - D - E - H 22 days B - F - H 16 days
Critical path: A → C → G → H.
Project duration: 30 days.
Non-critical: B (TF 8), D (TF 8), E (TF 8), F (TF 14).
Asked in past papers
  • Construct the CPM Network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D B C E,F,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 9 7 6 7 6 4. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) EST, EFT, LST, LFT Total and free float time c) Critical path d) Project completion time (2080 Bhadra Q5)

2080 Baishakh Q3b: Precedence diagram, both passes, critical path, free float of E with respect to H asked 1×

Precedence diagram, both passes, critical path, free float of E with respect to H 2080 Baishakh Q3b · 2+2+2+2+2 marks

The question. Construct a precedence diagram for this project and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and what is free float for activity E with respect to activity H? Activities/Predecessor/Duration (days): A - 2; B A 4; C A 2; D B 2; E B,C 4; F A,E 6; G D 4; H D,E,F 2; I G,H 6; J H,F 6; K H,I,J 4

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone2
    BA4
    CA2
    DB2
    EB, C4
    FA, E6
    GD4
    HD, E, F2
    IG, H6
    JH, F6
    KH, I, J4
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A start; merges at E, F, H, I, J, K; bursts after A, B, D, E, F, H.
    NETWORK, 2080 BAISHAKH Q3b Critical path A - B - E - F - H - I - K, project duration 28 days. 0 2 A (2) 0 2 2 6 B (4) 2 6 2 4 C (2) 4 6 6 8 D (2) 12 14 6 10 E (4) 6 10 10 16 F (6) 10 16 8 12 G (4) 14 18 16 18 H (2) 16 18 18 24 I (6) 18 24 18 24 J (6) 18 24 24 28 K (4) 24 28 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 2 = 2 B ES = EF(A) = 2, EF = 2 + 4 = 6 C ES = EF(A) = 2, EF = 2 + 2 = 4 D ES = EF(B) = 6, EF = 6 + 2 = 8 E ES = max(EF(B), EF(C)) = max(6, 4) = 6, EF = 6 + 4 = 10 F ES = max(EF(A), EF(E)) = max(2, 10) = 10, EF = 10 + 6 = 16 G ES = EF(D) = 8, EF = 8 + 4 = 12 H ES = max(EF(D), EF(E), EF(F)) = max(8, 10, 16) = 16, EF = 16 + 2 = 18 I ES = max(EF(G), EF(H)) = max(12, 18) = 18, EF = 18 + 6 = 24 J ES = max(EF(H), EF(F)) = max(18, 16) = 18, EF = 18 + 6 = 24 K ES = max(EF(H), EF(I), EF(J)) = max(18, 24, 24) = 24, EF = 24 + 4 = 28 Project duration = the largest EF = 28 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    K LF = 28 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 28 - 4 = 24 J LF = LS(K) = 24, LS = 24 - 6 = 18 I LF = LS(K) = 24, LS = 24 - 6 = 18 H LF = min(LS(I), LS(J), LS(K)) = min(18, 18, 24) = 18, LS = 18 - 2 = 16 G LF = LS(I) = 18, LS = 18 - 4 = 14 F LF = min(LS(H), LS(J)) = min(16, 18) = 16, LS = 16 - 6 = 10 E LF = min(LS(F), LS(H)) = min(10, 16) = 10, LS = 10 - 4 = 6 D LF = min(LS(G), LS(H)) = min(14, 16) = 14, LS = 14 - 2 = 12 C LF = LS(E) = 6, LS = 6 - 2 = 4 B LF = min(LS(D), LS(E)) = min(12, 6) = 6, LS = 6 - 4 = 2 A LF = min(LS(B), LS(C), LS(F)) = min(2, 4, 10) = 2, LS = 2 - 2 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF FF = min(ES of successors) - EF (last activity: duration - EF)
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFFFCritical
    A2020200yes
    B4262600yes
    C2244622
    D268121460
    E461061000yes
    F61016101600yes
    G4812141866
    H21618161800yes
    I61824182400yes
    J61824182400yes
    K42428242800yes
Critical path: A → B → E → F → H → I → K; A → B → E → F → H → J → K (two critical paths).
Project duration: 28 days.
Non-critical: C (TF 2), D (TF 6), G (TF 6).
Free float of E with respect to H = ES(H) - EF(E) = 16 - 10 = 6 days. (Its free float against all successors is 0.)
Asked in past papers
  • Construct a precedence diagram for this project and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and what is free float for activity E with respect to activity H? Activities/Predecessor/Duration (days): A - 2; B A 4; C A 2; D B 2; E B,C 4; F A,E 6; G D 4; H D,E,F 2; I G,H 6; J H,F 6; K H,I,J 4 (2080 Baishakh Q3b)

2079 Bhadra Q6: Network with both passes, duration, and all four floats asked 1×

Network with both passes, duration, and all four floats 2079 Bhadra Q6 · 4+2+1+1+4 marks

The question. From the table below: S.N/Activity/Duration (days)/Predecessor/Successor: 1 A 5 - B,C,D; 2 B 3 A E; 3 C 2 A F,H; 4 D 3 A G; 5 E 2 B H; 6 F 1 C I; 7 G 3 D I; 8 H 1 C,E -; 9 I 2 F,G -. a) Draw the network diagram of activities involved in the project, show forward pass and backward pass calculation in Network of each node and indicates the critical path. b) What is the total duration of project completion? c) Calculate the total float, free float, Independent float and Interfering float for each activity.

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone5
    BA3
    CA2
    DA3
    EB2
    FC1
    GD3
    HC, E1
    IF, G2
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A start; merges at H, I; bursts after A, C.
    NETWORK, 2079 BHADRA Q6 Critical path A - D - G - I, project duration 13 days. START 0 5 A (5) 0 5 5 8 B (3) 7 10 5 7 C (2) 8 10 5 8 D (3) 5 8 8 10 E (2) 10 12 7 8 F (1) 10 11 8 11 G (3) 8 11 10 11 H (1) 12 13 11 13 I (2) 11 13 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 5 = 5 B ES = EF(A) = 5, EF = 5 + 3 = 8 C ES = EF(A) = 5, EF = 5 + 2 = 7 D ES = EF(A) = 5, EF = 5 + 3 = 8 E ES = EF(B) = 8, EF = 8 + 2 = 10 F ES = EF(C) = 7, EF = 7 + 1 = 8 G ES = EF(D) = 8, EF = 8 + 3 = 11 H ES = max(EF(C), EF(E)) = max(7, 10) = 10, EF = 10 + 1 = 11 I ES = max(EF(F), EF(G)) = max(8, 11) = 11, EF = 11 + 2 = 13 Project duration = the largest EF = 13 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    I LF = 13 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 13 - 2 = 11 H LF = 13 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 13 - 1 = 12 G LF = LS(I) = 11, LS = 11 - 3 = 8 F LF = LS(I) = 11, LS = 11 - 1 = 10 E LF = LS(H) = 12, LS = 12 - 2 = 10 D LF = LS(G) = 8, LS = 8 - 3 = 5 C LF = min(LS(F), LS(H)) = min(10, 12) = 10, LS = 10 - 2 = 8 B LF = LS(E) = 10, LS = 10 - 3 = 7 A LF = min(LS(B), LS(C), LS(D)) = min(7, 8, 5) = 5, LS = 5 - 5 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF FF = min(ES of successors) - EF (last activity: duration - EF) IdF = max(0, min(ES of successors) - max(LF of predecessors) - duration) IF = TF - FF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFFFIdFIFCritical
    A505050000yes
    B3587102002
    C2578103003
    D358580000yes
    E281010122002
    F17810113300
    G38118110000yes
    H1101112132200
    I2111311130000yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - B - E - H 11 days A - C - F - I 10 days A - C - H 8 days A - D - G - I 13 days <- longest: critical
Critical path: A → D → G → I.
Project duration: 13 days.
Non-critical: B (TF 2), C (TF 3), E (TF 2), F (TF 3), H (TF 2).
Asked in past papers
  • From the table below: S.N/Activity/Duration (days)/Predecessor/Successor: 1 A 5 - B,C,D; 2 B 3 A E; 3 C 2 A F,H; 4 D 3 A G; 5 E 2 B H; 6 F 1 C I; 7 G 3 D I; 8 H 1 C,E -; 9 I 2 F,G -. a) Draw the network diagram of activities involved in the project, show forward pass and backward pass calculation in Network of each node and indicates the critical path. b) What is the total duration of project completion? c) Calculate the total float, free float, Independent float and Interfering float for each activity. (2079 Bhadra Q6)

2079 Baishakh Q7: CPM network, critical path, completion time, four times and total float asked 1×

CPM network, critical path, completion time, four times and total float 2079 Baishakh Q7 · 15 marks

The question. Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D,F B C E,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 10 7 7 6 5 6. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) Critical path c) Project completion time d) EST, EFT, LST, LFT and Total float time

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone11
    Bnone5
    CA10
    DB7
    ED, F7
    FB6
    GC5
    HE, G6
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A and B start together; merges at E, H; bursts after B.
    NETWORK, 2079 BAISHAKH Q7 Critical path A - C - G - H, project duration 32 days. START 0 11 A (11) 0 11 0 5 B (5) 7 12 11 21 C (10) 11 21 5 12 D (7) 12 19 12 19 E (7) 19 26 5 11 F (6) 13 19 21 26 G (5) 21 26 26 32 H (6) 26 32 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 11 = 11 B ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 5 = 5 C ES = EF(A) = 11, EF = 11 + 10 = 21 D ES = EF(B) = 5, EF = 5 + 7 = 12 F ES = EF(B) = 5, EF = 5 + 6 = 11 E ES = max(EF(D), EF(F)) = max(12, 11) = 12, EF = 12 + 7 = 19 G ES = EF(C) = 21, EF = 21 + 5 = 26 H ES = max(EF(E), EF(G)) = max(19, 26) = 26, EF = 26 + 6 = 32 Project duration = the largest EF = 32 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    H LF = 32 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 32 - 6 = 26 G LF = LS(H) = 26, LS = 26 - 5 = 21 E LF = LS(H) = 26, LS = 26 - 7 = 19 F LF = LS(E) = 19, LS = 19 - 6 = 13 D LF = LS(E) = 19, LS = 19 - 7 = 12 C LF = LS(G) = 21, LS = 21 - 10 = 11 B LF = min(LS(D), LS(F)) = min(12, 13) = 12, LS = 12 - 5 = 7 A LF = LS(C) = 11, LS = 11 - 11 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A110110110yes
    B5057127
    C10112111210yes
    D751212197
    E7121919267
    F651113198
    G5212621260yes
    H6263226320yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - C - G - H 32 days <- longest: critical B - D - E - H 25 days B - F - E - H 24 days
Critical path: A → C → G → H.
Project duration: 32 days.
Non-critical: B (TF 7), D (TF 7), E (TF 7), F (TF 8).
Asked in past papers
  • Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D,F B C E,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 10 7 7 6 5 6. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) Critical path c) Project completion time d) EST, EFT, LST, LFT and Total float time (2079 Baishakh Q7)

2078 Bhadra Q4: Network, critical tasks, and the chance of finishing in 30 and 39 weeks asked 1×

Network, critical tasks, and the chance of finishing in 30 and 39 weeks 2078 Bhadra Q4 · 3x4 marks

The question. New software development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) If all the activities duration estimates are with variance of 2.25 weeks find out the probability of project completion within 30 weeks and 39 weeks. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Duration (in weeks): A - 2; B - 4; C - 6; D A 8; E B 10; F B 8; G C 12; H D,E 12; I G 4; J F,H,I 7

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (weeks)
    Anone2
    Bnone4
    Cnone6
    DA8
    EB10
    FB8
    GC12
    HD, E12
    IG4
    JF, H, I7
  2. Draw the network and run both passes.
    NETWORK, 2078 BHADRA Q4 Critical path B - E - H - J, 33 weeks. START 0 2 A (2) 4 6 0 4 B (4) 0 4 0 6 C (6) 4 10 2 10 D (8) 6 14 4 14 E (10) 4 14 4 12 F (8) 18 26 6 18 G (12) 10 22 14 26 H (12) 14 26 18 22 I (4) 22 26 26 33 J (7) 26 33 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 2 = 2 B ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 4 = 4 C ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 6 = 6 D ES = EF(A) = 2, EF = 2 + 8 = 10 E ES = EF(B) = 4, EF = 4 + 10 = 14 F ES = EF(B) = 4, EF = 4 + 8 = 12 G ES = EF(C) = 6, EF = 6 + 12 = 18 H ES = max(EF(D), EF(E)) = max(10, 14) = 14, EF = 14 + 12 = 26 I ES = EF(G) = 18, EF = 18 + 4 = 22 J ES = max(EF(F), EF(H), EF(I)) = max(12, 26, 22) = 26, EF = 26 + 7 = 33 Project duration = the largest EF = 33 weeks
    J LF = 33 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 33 - 7 = 26 I LF = LS(J) = 26, LS = 26 - 4 = 22 H LF = LS(J) = 26, LS = 26 - 12 = 14 G LF = LS(I) = 22, LS = 22 - 12 = 10 F LF = LS(J) = 26, LS = 26 - 8 = 18 E LF = LS(H) = 14, LS = 14 - 10 = 4 D LF = LS(H) = 14, LS = 14 - 8 = 6 C LF = LS(G) = 10, LS = 10 - 6 = 4 B LF = min(LS(E), LS(F)) = min(4, 18) = 4, LS = 4 - 4 = 0 A LF = LS(D) = 6, LS = 6 - 2 = 4
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A202464
    B404040yes
    C6064104
    D82106144
    E104144140yes
    F8412182614
    G1261810224
    H12142614260yes
    I4182222264
    J7263326330yes
  3. Every path, as a check.
    A - D - H - J 29 weeks B - E - H - J 33 weeks <- longest: critical B - F - J 19 weeks C - G - I - J 29 weeks
  4. Project variance. Every activity has variance 2.25, and the critical path has 4 activities, so
    V = 4 x 2.25 = 9 sigma = sqrt(9) = 3.00 weeks
  5. Probabilities: z = (T - Te) / σ.
    T = 30 z = (30 - 33) / 3.00 = -1.00 P = 0.5 - 0.3413 = 15.87 % T = 39 z = (39 - 33) / 3.00 = 2.00 P = 0.5 + 0.4772 = 97.72 %
Critical tasks: B → E → H → J; total completion time 33 weeks.
σ = 3.00 weeks.
P(within 30 weeks) = 15.87%
P(within 39 weeks) = 97.72%
Asked in past papers
  • New software development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) If all the activities duration estimates are with variance of 2.25 weeks find out the probability of project completion within 30 weeks and 39 weeks. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Duration (in weeks): A - 2; B - 4; C - 6; D A 8; E B 10; F B 8; G C 12; H D,E 12; I G 4; J F,H,I 7 (2078 Bhadra Q4)

2076 Chaitra Q3: PERT network, critical tasks, and the chance of finishing within 1.5 years asked 1×

PERT network, critical tasks, and the chance of finishing within 1.5 years 2076 Chaitra Q3 · 4x3 marks

The question. New Information system development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on the table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) Find out the probability of project completion within 1.5 years of period. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Optimistic/Pessimistic/Most Likely: A - 12 24 12; B - 11 35 17; C A 15 21 18; D B 15 27 21; E D 12 24 18; F C 6 18 12; G E,F 15 21 18

  1. Expected time and variance of every activity. te = (a + 4m + b) / 6, σ2 = ((b - a) / 6)2, with a optimistic, m most likely, b pessimistic.
    Read the columns. This paper prints them as Optimistic, Pessimistic, Most likely. They are re-ordered to a, m, b below.
    ActivityPredecessorsambteσ2
    Anone12122414.004.00
    Bnone11173519.0016.00
    CA15182118.001.00
    DB15212721.004.00
    ED12182418.004.00
    FC6121812.004.00
    GE, F15182118.001.00
    A te = (12 + 4x12 + 24)/6 = 84/6 = 14.00 var = ((24 - 12)/6)^2 = 4.00 B te = (11 + 4x17 + 35)/6 = 114/6 = 19.00 var = ((35 - 11)/6)^2 = 16.00 C te = (15 + 4x18 + 21)/6 = 108/6 = 18.00 var = ((21 - 15)/6)^2 = 1.00 D te = (15 + 4x21 + 27)/6 = 126/6 = 21.00 var = ((27 - 15)/6)^2 = 4.00 E te = (12 + 4x18 + 24)/6 = 108/6 = 18.00 var = ((24 - 12)/6)^2 = 4.00 F te = (6 + 4x12 + 18)/6 = 72/6 = 12.00 var = ((18 - 6)/6)^2 = 4.00 G te = (15 + 4x18 + 21)/6 = 108/6 = 18.00 var = ((21 - 15)/6)^2 = 1.00
  2. Draw the network on the expected times and run both passes, exactly as in CPM.
    PERT NETWORK, 2076 CHAITRA Q3 Durations are the expected times te; critical path B - D - E - G, 76.00 weeks. START 0 14 A (14) 14 28 0 19 B (19) 0 19 14 32 C (18) 28 46 19 40 D (21) 19 40 40 58 E (18) 40 58 32 44 F (12) 46 58 58 76 G (18) 58 76 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A14014142814
    B190190190yes
    C181432284614
    D21194019400yes
    E18405840580yes
    F123244465814
    G18587658760yes
  3. Paths and their expected lengths.
    A - C - F - G 62 weeks B - D - E - G 76 weeks <- longest: critical
  4. Project variance: add the variances of the critical activities only.
    V = 16.00(B) + 4.00(D) + 4.00(E) + 1.00(G) = 25.00 sigma = sqrt(25.00) = 5.00 weeks
  5. Probability of finishing by the target: z = (T - Te) / σ, then read P(Z ≤ z) from the normal table (the notes’ calculator way: P = 0.5 ± Q(|z|)).
    T = 78 (1.5 years = 78 weeks) z = (78 - 76.00) / 5.00 = 0.40 P = 0.5 + 0.1554 = 65.54 %
Critical path: B → D → E → G.
Expected completion time Te = 76.00 weeks, with σ = 5.00.
P(finish within 1.5 years = 78 weeks) = 65.54%.
Asked in past papers
  • New Information system development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on the table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) Find out the probability of project completion within 1.5 years of period. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Optimistic/Pessimistic/Most Likely: A - 12 24 12; B - 11 35 17; C A 15 21 18; D B 15 27 21; E D 12 24 18; F C 6 18 12; G E,F 15 21 18 (2076 Chaitra Q3)

2076 Ashwin Q2: Hospital IT project: network, critical activities and a dated schedule asked 1×

Hospital IT project: network, critical activities and a dated schedule 2076 Ashwin Q2 · 6+3+3 marks

The question. Chuchche Consulting Company (3C) is considering a new project for a local hospital to be serviced and they are in planning phase. Answer the following as per the calculations from the different project activities timings of Table-A. Activity/Description/Duration (Weeks)/Preceding Activity: A Select platform and COTS (Commercial of the shelf) software 3 -; B Design for upgrading office network 3 A; C Additional models design/development 6 B; D Model and structure database 4 B; E Integrate hardware/components 4 C,D; F System testing 5 E; G System deployment 2 F; H System tuning and hardening 4 F; I Training material Finalization 3 F; J Technical and end user Training 6 I. a) Prepare activity network diagram. b) List the critical activities c) If the project is starting from Baishakh 1, 2076, Prepare a complete schedule of the project activities, including the exact project completion date.

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityDescriptionPredecessorsDuration (weeks)
    ASelect platform and COTS softwarenone3
    BDesign for upgrading office networkA3
    CAdditional models design and developmentB6
    DModel and structure databaseB4
    EIntegrate hardware and componentsC, D4
    FSystem testingE5
    GSystem deploymentF2
    HSystem tuning and hardeningF4
    ITraining material finalizationF3
    JTechnical and end user trainingI6
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A start; merges at E; bursts after B, F.
    NETWORK, 2076 ASHWIN Q2 Critical path A - B - C - E - F - I - J, project duration 30 weeks. START 0 3 A (3) 0 3 3 6 B (3) 3 6 6 12 C (6) 6 12 6 10 D (4) 8 12 12 16 E (4) 12 16 16 21 F (5) 16 21 21 23 G (2) 28 30 21 25 H (4) 26 30 21 24 I (3) 21 24 24 30 J (6) 24 30 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 3 = 3 B ES = EF(A) = 3, EF = 3 + 3 = 6 C ES = EF(B) = 6, EF = 6 + 6 = 12 D ES = EF(B) = 6, EF = 6 + 4 = 10 E ES = max(EF(C), EF(D)) = max(12, 10) = 12, EF = 12 + 4 = 16 F ES = EF(E) = 16, EF = 16 + 5 = 21 G ES = EF(F) = 21, EF = 21 + 2 = 23 H ES = EF(F) = 21, EF = 21 + 4 = 25 I ES = EF(F) = 21, EF = 21 + 3 = 24 J ES = EF(I) = 24, EF = 24 + 6 = 30 Project duration = the largest EF = 30 weeks
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    J LF = 30 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 30 - 6 = 24 I LF = LS(J) = 24, LS = 24 - 3 = 21 H LF = 30 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 30 - 4 = 26 G LF = 30 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 30 - 2 = 28 F LF = min(LS(G), LS(H), LS(I)) = min(28, 26, 21) = 21, LS = 21 - 5 = 16 E LF = LS(F) = 16, LS = 16 - 4 = 12 D LF = LS(E) = 12, LS = 12 - 4 = 8 C LF = LS(E) = 12, LS = 12 - 6 = 6 B LF = min(LS(C), LS(D)) = min(6, 8) = 6, LS = 6 - 3 = 3 A LF = LS(B) = 3, LS = 3 - 3 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDescriptionDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    ASelect platform and COTS software303030yes
    BDesign for upgrading office network336360yes
    CAdditional models design and development66126120yes
    DModel and structure database46108122
    EIntegrate hardware and components4121612160yes
    FSystem testing5162116210yes
    GSystem deployment2212328307
    HSystem tuning and hardening4212526305
    ITraining material finalization3212421240yes
    JTechnical and end user training6243024300yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - B - C - E - F - G 23 weeks A - B - C - E - F - H 25 weeks A - B - C - E - F - I - J 30 weeks <- longest: critical A - B - D - E - F - G 21 weeks A - B - D - E - F - H 23 weeks A - B - D - E - F - I - J 28 weeks
Critical path: A → B → C → E → F → I → J.
Project duration: 30 weeks.
Non-critical: D (TF 2), G (TF 7), H (TF 5).

The dated schedule (question part c). Taking 7-day calendar weeks from Baishakh 1, 2076, which was 14 April 2019: week k runs from day 7(k - 1) + 1 to day 7k.

ActivityWeeksStartsFinishesTotal float
A1 to 314 Apr 201904 May 20190
B4 to 605 May 201925 May 20190
C7 to 1226 May 201906 Jul 20190
D7 to 1026 May 201922 Jun 20192
E13 to 1607 Jul 201903 Aug 20190
F17 to 2104 Aug 201907 Sep 20190
G22 to 2308 Sep 201921 Sep 20197
H22 to 2508 Sep 201905 Oct 20195
I22 to 2408 Sep 201928 Sep 20190
J25 to 3029 Sep 201909 Nov 20190
Completion: the end of week 30, which is day 210: 09 November 2019, that is Kartik 23, 2076. (Check the day against a 2076 calendar: Kartik 1, 2076 fell on 18 October 2019.)
Asked in past papers
  • Chuchche Consulting Company (3C) is considering a new project for a local hospital to be serviced and they are in planning phase. Answer the following as per the calculations from the different project activities timings of Table-A. Activity/Description/Duration (Weeks)/Preceding Activity: A Select platform and COTS (Commercial of the shelf) software 3 -; B Design for upgrading office network 3 A; C Additional models design/development 6 B; D Model and structure database 4 B; E Integrate hardware/components 4 C,D; F System testing 5 E; G System deployment 2 F; H System tuning and hardening 4 F; I Training material Finalization 3 F; J Technical and end user Training 6 I. a) Prepare activity network diagram. b) List the critical activities c) If the project is starting from Baishakh 1, 2076, Prepare a complete schedule of the project activities, including the exact project completion date. (2076 Ashwin Q2)

2075 Chaitra Q2: PERT network, expected completion, and the chance of 48 weeks and one year asked 1×

PERT network, expected completion, and the chance of 48 weeks and one year 2075 Chaitra Q2 · 5+3+4 marks

The question. Considering the following activity detail table having all the times in week answer the followings with calculation steps: Activity/Optimistic Time/Most Likely Time/Pessimistic Time/Preceding Activity: A 3 6 9 -; B 6 12 24 -; C 6 9 18 A; D 3 6 21 B; E 9 12 21 D; F 3 6 18 C; G 6 12 24 E; H 9 18 27 F,G. a) Draw the activity network diagram with identification of the critical path. b) Calculate the expected project completion time in weeks. c) What will be the probability for completion of the project within (i) 48 weeks and (ii) one year of the start date?

  1. Expected time and variance of every activity. te = (a + 4m + b) / 6, σ2 = ((b - a) / 6)2, with a optimistic, m most likely, b pessimistic.
    ActivityPredecessorsambteσ2
    Anone3696.001.00
    Bnone6122413.009.00
    CA691810.004.00
    DB36218.009.00
    ED9122113.004.00
    FC36187.506.25
    GE6122413.009.00
    HF, G9182718.009.00
    A te = (3 + 4x6 + 9)/6 = 36/6 = 6.00 var = ((9 - 3)/6)^2 = 1.00 B te = (6 + 4x12 + 24)/6 = 78/6 = 13.00 var = ((24 - 6)/6)^2 = 9.00 C te = (6 + 4x9 + 18)/6 = 60/6 = 10.00 var = ((18 - 6)/6)^2 = 4.00 D te = (3 + 4x6 + 21)/6 = 48/6 = 8.00 var = ((21 - 3)/6)^2 = 9.00 E te = (9 + 4x12 + 21)/6 = 78/6 = 13.00 var = ((21 - 9)/6)^2 = 4.00 F te = (3 + 4x6 + 18)/6 = 45/6 = 7.50 var = ((18 - 3)/6)^2 = 6.25 G te = (6 + 4x12 + 24)/6 = 78/6 = 13.00 var = ((24 - 6)/6)^2 = 9.00 H te = (9 + 4x18 + 27)/6 = 108/6 = 18.00 var = ((27 - 9)/6)^2 = 9.00
  2. Draw the network on the expected times and run both passes, exactly as in CPM.
    PERT NETWORK, 2075 CHAITRA Q2 Durations are the expected times te; critical path B - D - E - G - H, 65.00 weeks. START 0 6 A (6) 23.5 29.5 0 13 B (13) 0 13 6 16 C (10) 29.5 39.5 13 21 D (8) 13 21 21 34 E (13) 21 34 16 23.5 F (7.5) 39.5 47 34 47 G (13) 34 47 47 65 H (18) 47 65 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A60623.529.523.5
    B130130130yes
    C1061629.539.523.5
    D8132113210yes
    E13213421340yes
    F7.51623.539.54723.5
    G13344734470yes
    H18476547650yes
  3. Paths and their expected lengths.
    A - C - F - H 41.5 weeks B - D - E - G - H 65 weeks <- longest: critical
  4. Project variance: add the variances of the critical activities only.
    V = 9.00(B) + 9.00(D) + 4.00(E) + 9.00(G) + 9.00(H) = 40.00 sigma = sqrt(40.00) = 6.32 weeks
  5. Probability of finishing by the target: z = (T - Te) / σ, then read P(Z ≤ z) from the normal table (the notes’ calculator way: P = 0.5 ± Q(|z|)).
    T = 48 (48 weeks) z = (48 - 65.00) / 6.32 = -2.69 P = 0.5 - 0.4964 = 0.36 % T = 52 (one year = 52 weeks) z = (52 - 65.00) / 6.32 = -2.06 P = 0.5 - 0.4803 = 1.97 %
Critical path: B → D → E → G → H.
Expected completion time Te = 65.00 weeks, with σ = 6.32.
P(finish within 48 weeks) = 0.36%.
P(finish within one year = 52 weeks) = 1.97% (exact, without rounding z: 1.99%).
Asked in past papers
  • Considering the following activity detail table having all the times in week answer the followings with calculation steps: Activity/Optimistic Time/Most Likely Time/Pessimistic Time/Preceding Activity: A 3 6 9 -; B 6 12 24 -; C 6 9 18 A; D 3 6 21 B; E 9 12 21 D; F 3 6 18 C; G 6 12 24 E; H 9 18 27 F,G. a) Draw the activity network diagram with identification of the critical path. b) Calculate the expected project completion time in weeks. c) What will be the probability for completion of the project within (i) 48 weeks and (ii) one year of the start date? (2075 Chaitra Q2)

2075 Ashwin Q5: Network with START and END, both passes, total float, and what a critical path is asked 1×

Network with START and END, both passes, total float, and what a critical path is 2075 Ashwin Q5 · 1+2+2+1 marks

The question. Construct a network diagram for this project and explain what is meant by critical path? i) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass ii) Calculate the total float on each activity. Activities/Predecessor/Duration (Days): START - 0; A START 3; B START 5; C A,B 7; D C 2; E B 4; END D,E 0

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    STARTnone0
    ASTART3
    BSTART5
    CA, B7
    DC2
    EB4
    ENDD, E0
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). START start; merges at C, END; bursts after START, B.
    NETWORK, 2075 ASHWIN Q5 Critical path START - B - C - D - END, project duration 14 days. 0 0 START (0) 0 0 0 3 A (3) 2 5 0 5 B (5) 0 5 5 12 C (7) 5 12 12 14 D (2) 12 14 5 9 E (4) 10 14 14 14 END (0) 14 14 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    START ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 0 = 0 A ES = EF(START) = 0, EF = 0 + 3 = 3 B ES = EF(START) = 0, EF = 0 + 5 = 5 C ES = max(EF(A), EF(B)) = max(3, 5) = 5, EF = 5 + 7 = 12 D ES = EF(C) = 12, EF = 12 + 2 = 14 E ES = EF(B) = 5, EF = 5 + 4 = 9 END ES = max(EF(D), EF(E)) = max(14, 9) = 14, EF = 14 + 0 = 14 Project duration = the largest EF = 14 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    END LF = 14 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 14 - 0 = 14 E LF = LS(END) = 14, LS = 14 - 4 = 10 D LF = LS(END) = 14, LS = 14 - 2 = 12 C LF = LS(D) = 12, LS = 12 - 7 = 5 B LF = min(LS(C), LS(E)) = min(5, 10) = 5, LS = 5 - 5 = 0 A LF = LS(C) = 5, LS = 5 - 3 = 2 START LF = min(LS(A), LS(B)) = min(2, 0) = 0, LS = 0 - 0 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    START000000yes
    A303252
    B505050yes
    C75125120yes
    D2121412140yes
    E45910145
    END0141414140yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    START - A - C - D - END 12 days START - B - C - D - END 14 days <- longest: critical START - B - E - END 9 days
Critical path: START → B → C → D → END.
Project duration: 14 days.
Non-critical: A (TF 2), E (TF 5).
What a critical path is (asked in the same question): the longest path through the network, the series of activities that decides the earliest finish of the project. Its activities have zero total float, so any delay on them delays the whole project (notes p. 86).
Asked in past papers
  • Construct a network diagram for this project and explain what is meant by critical path? i) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass ii) Calculate the total float on each activity. Activities/Predecessor/Duration (Days): START - 0; A START 3; B START 5; C A,B 7; D C 2; E B 4; END D,E 0 (2075 Ashwin Q5)

2074 Chaitra Q4a: Network, both passes, critical path asked 1×

Network, both passes, critical path 2074 Chaitra Q4a · 2.5x4 marks

The question. Consider the following project and answer the followings: i) Construct a network diagram ii) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass iii) Indentify the critical path. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (Days): A - 11; B - 15; C A 5; D A,B 10; E B 5; F C,D 2; G E,F 7

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone11
    Bnone15
    CA5
    DA, B10
    EB5
    FC, D2
    GE, F7
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A and B start together; merges at D, F, G; bursts after A, B.
    NETWORK, 2074 CHAITRA Q4a Critical path B - D - F - G, project duration 34 days. START 0 11 A (11) 4 15 0 15 B (15) 0 15 11 16 C (5) 20 25 15 25 D (10) 15 25 15 20 E (5) 22 27 25 27 F (2) 25 27 27 34 G (7) 27 34 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 11 = 11 B ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 15 = 15 C ES = EF(A) = 11, EF = 11 + 5 = 16 D ES = max(EF(A), EF(B)) = max(11, 15) = 15, EF = 15 + 10 = 25 E ES = EF(B) = 15, EF = 15 + 5 = 20 F ES = max(EF(C), EF(D)) = max(16, 25) = 25, EF = 25 + 2 = 27 G ES = max(EF(E), EF(F)) = max(20, 27) = 27, EF = 27 + 7 = 34 Project duration = the largest EF = 34 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    G LF = 34 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 34 - 7 = 27 F LF = LS(G) = 27, LS = 27 - 2 = 25 E LF = LS(G) = 27, LS = 27 - 5 = 22 D LF = LS(F) = 25, LS = 25 - 10 = 15 C LF = LS(F) = 25, LS = 25 - 5 = 20 B LF = min(LS(D), LS(E)) = min(15, 22) = 15, LS = 15 - 15 = 0 A LF = min(LS(C), LS(D)) = min(20, 15) = 15, LS = 15 - 11 = 4
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A110114154
    B150150150yes
    C5111620259
    D10152515250yes
    E5152022277
    F2252725270yes
    G7273427340yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - C - F - G 25 days A - D - F - G 30 days B - D - F - G 34 days <- longest: critical B - E - G 27 days
Critical path: B → D → F → G.
Project duration: 34 days.
Non-critical: A (TF 4), C (TF 9), E (TF 7).
Asked in past papers
  • Consider the following project and answer the followings: i) Construct a network diagram ii) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass iii) Indentify the critical path. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (Days): A - 11; B - 15; C A 5; D A,B 10; E B 5; F C,D 2; G E,F 7 (2074 Chaitra Q4a)
  • Calculate the total float on each activity. (2074 Chaitra Q4b)

2074 Ashwin Q4: Network with START and END, critical path, both passes, total float asked 1×

Network with START and END, critical path, both passes, total float 2074 Ashwin Q4 · 2+2+2 marks

The question. Draw the network diagram and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and find the total float time. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (days): START - 0; A START 5; B A 6; C START 4; D C 5; E B 7; F E 3; END D,F 0

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    STARTnone0
    ASTART5
    BA6
    CSTART4
    DC5
    EB7
    FE3
    ENDD, F0
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). START start; merges at END; bursts after START.
    NETWORK, 2074 ASHWIN Q4 Critical path START - A - B - E - F - END, project duration 21 days. 0 0 START (0) 0 0 0 5 A (5) 0 5 5 11 B (6) 5 11 0 4 C (4) 12 16 4 9 D (5) 16 21 11 18 E (7) 11 18 18 21 F (3) 18 21 21 21 END (0) 21 21 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    START ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 0 = 0 A ES = EF(START) = 0, EF = 0 + 5 = 5 B ES = EF(A) = 5, EF = 5 + 6 = 11 C ES = EF(START) = 0, EF = 0 + 4 = 4 D ES = EF(C) = 4, EF = 4 + 5 = 9 E ES = EF(B) = 11, EF = 11 + 7 = 18 F ES = EF(E) = 18, EF = 18 + 3 = 21 END ES = max(EF(D), EF(F)) = max(9, 21) = 21, EF = 21 + 0 = 21 Project duration = the largest EF = 21 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    END LF = 21 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 21 - 0 = 21 F LF = LS(END) = 21, LS = 21 - 3 = 18 E LF = LS(F) = 18, LS = 18 - 7 = 11 D LF = LS(END) = 21, LS = 21 - 5 = 16 C LF = LS(D) = 16, LS = 16 - 4 = 12 B LF = LS(E) = 11, LS = 11 - 6 = 5 A LF = LS(B) = 5, LS = 5 - 5 = 0 START LF = min(LS(A), LS(C)) = min(0, 12) = 0, LS = 0 - 0 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    START000000yes
    A505050yes
    B65115110yes
    C404121612
    D549162112
    E7111811180yes
    F3182118210yes
    END0212121210yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    START - A - B - E - F - END 21 days <- longest: critical START - C - D - END 9 days
Critical path: START → A → B → E → F → END.
Project duration: 21 days.
Non-critical: C (TF 12), D (TF 12).
Asked in past papers
  • Draw the network diagram and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and find the total float time. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (days): START - 0; A START 5; B A 6; C START 4; D C 5; E B 7; F E 3; END D,F 0 (2074 Ashwin Q4)

2073 Shrawan Q3: Critical path network with start times, total time and total network slack asked 1×

Critical path network with start times, total time and total network slack 2073 Shrawan Q3 · 5+3+2 marks

The question. Produce a critical path network diagram, showing the earliest start times and latest start times for each task, using the data in the table below. Calculate the total project time and total network slack time. Task code/Task name/Duration/Starts after completion of task(s): PLAN Plan project 3 -; REQ Capture requirements 8 PLAN; AGREE Agree requirements with customer 2 REQ; DESIGN Design system 10 AGREE; CODE Code system 12 DESIGN; ID Identify subcontractors 3 DESIGN; BUY Buy-in subcontractor code 5 ID; INTEG Integrate code and buy-in code 6 CODE,BUY; TRAIN Train staff 5 DESIGN; REL Release system 4 INTEG,TRAIN

  1. Read the data (the table gives no unit; days are assumed).
    ActivityDescriptionPredecessorsDuration (days)
    PLANPlan projectnone3
    REQCapture requirementsPLAN8
    AGREEAgree requirements with customerREQ2
    DESIGNDesign systemAGREE10
    CODECode systemDESIGN12
    IDIdentify subcontractorsDESIGN3
    BUYBuy-in subcontractor codeID5
    INTEGIntegrate code and buy-in codeCODE, BUY6
    TRAINTrain staffDESIGN5
    RELRelease systemINTEG, TRAIN4
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). PLAN start; merges at INTEG, REL; bursts after DESIGN.
    NETWORK, 2073 SHRAWAN Q3 Critical path PLAN - REQ - AGREE - DESIGN - CODE - INTEG - REL, project duration 45 days. 0 3 PLAN (3) 0 3 3 11 REQ (8) 3 11 11 13 AGREE (2) 11 13 13 23 DESIGN (10) 13 23 23 35 CODE (12) 23 35 23 26 ID (3) 27 30 26 31 BUY (5) 30 35 35 41 INTEG (6) 35 41 23 28 TRAIN (5) 36 41 41 45 REL (4) 41 45 Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    PLAN ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 3 = 3 REQ ES = EF(PLAN) = 3, EF = 3 + 8 = 11 AGREE ES = EF(REQ) = 11, EF = 11 + 2 = 13 DESIGN ES = EF(AGREE) = 13, EF = 13 + 10 = 23 CODE ES = EF(DESIGN) = 23, EF = 23 + 12 = 35 ID ES = EF(DESIGN) = 23, EF = 23 + 3 = 26 BUY ES = EF(ID) = 26, EF = 26 + 5 = 31 INTEG ES = max(EF(CODE), EF(BUY)) = max(35, 31) = 35, EF = 35 + 6 = 41 TRAIN ES = EF(DESIGN) = 23, EF = 23 + 5 = 28 REL ES = max(EF(INTEG), EF(TRAIN)) = max(41, 28) = 41, EF = 41 + 4 = 45 Project duration = the largest EF = 45 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    REL LF = 45 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 45 - 4 = 41 TRAIN LF = LS(REL) = 41, LS = 41 - 5 = 36 INTEG LF = LS(REL) = 41, LS = 41 - 6 = 35 BUY LF = LS(INTEG) = 35, LS = 35 - 5 = 30 ID LF = LS(BUY) = 30, LS = 30 - 3 = 27 CODE LF = LS(INTEG) = 35, LS = 35 - 12 = 23 DESIGN LF = min(LS(CODE), LS(ID), LS(TRAIN)) = min(23, 27, 36) = 23, LS = 23 - 10 = 13 AGREE LF = LS(DESIGN) = 13, LS = 13 - 2 = 11 REQ LF = LS(AGREE) = 11, LS = 11 - 8 = 3 PLAN LF = LS(REQ) = 3, LS = 3 - 3 = 0
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDescriptionDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    PLANPlan project303030yes
    REQCapture requirements83113110yes
    AGREEAgree requirements with customer2111311130yes
    DESIGNDesign system10132313230yes
    CODECode system12233523350yes
    IDIdentify subcontractors3232627304
    BUYBuy-in subcontractor code5263130354
    INTEGIntegrate code and buy-in code6354135410yes
    TRAINTrain staff52328364113
    RELRelease system4414541450yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    PLAN - REQ - AGREE - DESIGN - CODE - INTEG - REL 45 days <- longest: critical PLAN - REQ - AGREE - DESIGN - ID - BUY - INTEG - REL 41 days PLAN - REQ - AGREE - DESIGN - TRAIN - REL 32 days
Critical path: PLAN → REQ → AGREE → DESIGN → CODE → INTEG → REL.
Project duration: 45 days.
Non-critical: ID (TF 4), BUY (TF 4), TRAIN (TF 13).
Total network slack = sum of all total floats = 4 + 4 + 13 = 21 days.
Asked in past papers
  • Produce a critical path network diagram, showing the earliest start times and latest start times for each task, using the data in the table below. Calculate the total project time and total network slack time. Task code/Task name/Duration/Starts after completion of task(s): PLAN Plan project 3 -; REQ Capture requirements 8 PLAN; AGREE Agree requirements with customer 2 REQ; DESIGN Design system 10 AGREE; CODE Code system 12 DESIGN; ID Identify subcontractors 3 DESIGN; BUY Buy-in subcontractor code 5 ID; INTEG Integrate code and buy-in code 6 CODE,BUY; TRAIN Train staff 5 DESIGN; REL Release system 4 INTEG,TRAIN (2073 Shrawan Q3)

2072 Chaitra Q3: MIS building project on node pairs: network, total time, total network slack asked 1×

MIS building project on node pairs: network, total time, total network slack 2072 Chaitra Q3 · 5+3+3 marks

The question. Consider the below table as the different WBS related job (activity) and sequences as per the project plan for a MIS building project. Times listed are in weeks and the activity network proceeds from 1st node to 10th node following the table sequences. Draw the critical path network diagram and calculate the total project time and total network slack time of this project. Job (activity)/initial node/Final node/Estimated Time: A 1 2 3; B 1 3 2; C 1 4 3; D 2 5 3; E 2 9 2; F 3 5 2; G 3 6 2; H 3 7 3; I 4 7 6; J 4 8 2; K 5 6 3; L 6 9 3; M 7 9 5; N 8 9 3; O 9 10 2. DeMarco states that "you cannot control what you cannot measure". Considering from software project manager's perspective, justify with relevant example?

  1. Convert the node pairs to predecessors. An activity depends on every activity that ends at its start node.
    ActivityNodes (i, j)DurationPredecessors (derived)
    A(1, 2)3none
    B(1, 3)2none
    C(1, 4)3none
    D(2, 5)3A
    E(2, 9)2A
    F(3, 5)2B
    G(3, 6)2B
    H(3, 7)3B
    I(4, 7)6C
    J(4, 8)2C
    K(5, 6)3D, F
    L(6, 9)3G, K
    M(7, 9)5H, I
    N(8, 9)3J
    O(9, 10)2E, L, M, N
  2. Draw the arrow network (the question gives it as arrows): events are circles, each activity an arrow from its start node to its end node.
    ARROW NETWORK, 2072 CHAITRA Q3 Events numbered as in the question; critical path C - I - M - O, 16 weeks. A 3 B 2 C 3 D 3 E 2 F 2 G 2 H 3 I 6 J 2 K 3 L 3 M 5 N 3 O 2 1 0 0 2 3 5 3 2 6 4 3 3 5 6 8 6 9 11 7 9 9 8 5 11 9 14 14 10 16 16 Each circle is an event: its earliest time TE above, its latest time TL below. Arrows are the activities; the critical path is in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 3 = 3 B ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 2 = 2 C ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 3 = 3 D ES = EF(A) = 3, EF = 3 + 3 = 6 E ES = EF(A) = 3, EF = 3 + 2 = 5 F ES = EF(B) = 2, EF = 2 + 2 = 4 G ES = EF(B) = 2, EF = 2 + 2 = 4 H ES = EF(B) = 2, EF = 2 + 3 = 5 I ES = EF(C) = 3, EF = 3 + 6 = 9 J ES = EF(C) = 3, EF = 3 + 2 = 5 K ES = max(EF(D), EF(F)) = max(6, 4) = 6, EF = 6 + 3 = 9 L ES = max(EF(G), EF(K)) = max(4, 9) = 9, EF = 9 + 3 = 12 M ES = max(EF(H), EF(I)) = max(5, 9) = 9, EF = 9 + 5 = 14 N ES = EF(J) = 5, EF = 5 + 3 = 8 O ES = max(EF(E), EF(L), EF(M), EF(N)) = max(5, 12, 14, 8) = 14, EF = 14 + 2 = 16 Project duration = the largest EF = 16 weeks
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    O LF = 16 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 16 - 2 = 14 N LF = LS(O) = 14, LS = 14 - 3 = 11 M LF = LS(O) = 14, LS = 14 - 5 = 9 L LF = LS(O) = 14, LS = 14 - 3 = 11 K LF = LS(L) = 11, LS = 11 - 3 = 8 J LF = LS(N) = 11, LS = 11 - 2 = 9 I LF = LS(M) = 9, LS = 9 - 6 = 3 H LF = LS(M) = 9, LS = 9 - 3 = 6 G LF = LS(L) = 11, LS = 11 - 2 = 9 F LF = LS(K) = 8, LS = 8 - 2 = 6 E LF = LS(O) = 14, LS = 14 - 2 = 12 D LF = LS(K) = 8, LS = 8 - 3 = 5 C LF = min(LS(I), LS(J)) = min(3, 9) = 3, LS = 3 - 3 = 0 B LF = min(LS(F), LS(G), LS(H)) = min(6, 9, 6) = 6, LS = 6 - 2 = 4 A LF = min(LS(D), LS(E)) = min(5, 12) = 5, LS = 5 - 3 = 2
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    A303252
    B202464
    C303030yes
    D336582
    E23512149
    F224684
    G2249117
    H325694
    I639390yes
    J2359116
    K3698112
    L391211142
    M59149140yes
    N35811146
    O2141614160yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - D - K - L - O 14 weeks A - E - O 7 weeks B - F - K - L - O 12 weeks B - G - L - O 9 weeks B - H - M - O 12 weeks C - I - M - O 16 weeks <- longest: critical C - J - N - O 10 weeks
Critical path: C → I → M → O.
Project duration: 16 weeks.
Non-critical: A (TF 2), B (TF 4), D (TF 2), E (TF 9), F (TF 4), G (TF 7), H (TF 4), J (TF 6), K (TF 2), L (TF 2), N (TF 6).
Total network slack = sum of all total floats = 2 + 4 + 2 + 9 + 4 + 7 + 4 + 6 + 2 + 2 + 6 = 48 weeks.

The second part of the same question: “DeMarco states that you cannot control what you cannot measure. Considering from software project manager’s perspective, justify with relevant example.” This part is not in your notes.

  • Software is invisible: there is no half-built wall to look at, so without measurement progress is only the developer’s opinion (“90% done” for weeks).
  • Control needs a baseline and a measure: the plan says what should be done by now; measurement says what is done; the difference (variance) is the only signal a manager can act on (the control cycle, chapter 7).
  • What a software manager measures: size (lines of code, function points), effort and cost spent, features completed and accepted, defects found and fixed, schedule and cost variance (earned value, chapter 9).
  • Example: a 10-week billing module. At week 5 the team reports “about 60% done”, but only 8 of 20 features have passed testing: 40% by measure. Earned value shows the slip at week 5, so the manager adds a tester and cuts two low-priority reports. Without the measure the slip surfaces at week 10, when nothing can be done.
  • So the statement holds: what is not measured cannot be compared with the plan, and what cannot be compared cannot be corrected.
Asked in past papers
  • Consider the below table as the different WBS related job (activity) and sequences as per the project plan for a MIS building project. Times listed are in weeks and the activity network proceeds from 1st node to 10th node following the table sequences. Draw the critical path network diagram and calculate the total project time and total network slack time of this project. Job (activity)/initial node/Final node/Estimated Time: A 1 2 3; B 1 3 2; C 1 4 3; D 2 5 3; E 2 9 2; F 3 5 2; G 3 6 2; H 3 7 3; I 4 7 6; J 4 8 2; K 5 6 3; L 6 9 3; M 7 9 5; N 8 9 3; O 9 10 2. DeMarco states that "you cannot control what you cannot measure". Considering from software project manager's perspective, justify with relevant example? (2072 Chaitra Q3)

2072 Kartik Q5: PERT on node pairs: expected completion, P(34 weeks), and event 7 by week 20 asked 1×

PERT on node pairs: expected completion, P(34 weeks), and event 7 by week 20 2072 Kartik Q5 · 3+3+3 marks

The question. A big software project is under consideration for development. Overall 10 different activities as WBS are identified as listed below table with their timings in number of weeks. Activities/a/m/b: (1,2) 7 11 13; (2,3) 1 4 7; (2,4) 10 15 48; (3,5) 12 20 26; (3,6) 4 7 16; (3,7) 4 7 16; (6,7) 5 8 11; (4,7) 2 8 14; (7,8) 9 12 15; (8,9) 1 4 7. Where a = Optimistic time, b = Pessimistic time, m = most likely time. Calculate the following: a) What is the expected time of completion of the project? b) What is the probability of completing the project in 34 weeks? c) What is the probability of the activity 7 being completed in the twentieth week?

  1. Expected time and variance of every activity. te = (a + 4m + b) / 6, σ2 = ((b - a) / 6)2, with a optimistic, m most likely, b pessimistic.
    ActivityPredecessorsambteσ2
    1-2none7111310.671.00
    2-31-21474.001.00
    2-41-210154819.6740.11
    3-52-312202619.675.44
    3-62-347168.004.00
    3-72-347168.004.00
    6-73-658118.001.00
    4-72-428148.004.00
    7-83-7, 6-7, 4-79121512.001.00
    8-97-81474.001.00
    1-2 te = (7 + 4x11 + 13)/6 = 64/6 = 10.67 var = ((13 - 7)/6)^2 = 1.00 2-3 te = (1 + 4x4 + 7)/6 = 24/6 = 4.00 var = ((7 - 1)/6)^2 = 1.00 2-4 te = (10 + 4x15 + 48)/6 = 118/6 = 19.67 var = ((48 - 10)/6)^2 = 40.11 3-5 te = (12 + 4x20 + 26)/6 = 118/6 = 19.67 var = ((26 - 12)/6)^2 = 5.44 3-6 te = (4 + 4x7 + 16)/6 = 48/6 = 8.00 var = ((16 - 4)/6)^2 = 4.00 3-7 te = (4 + 4x7 + 16)/6 = 48/6 = 8.00 var = ((16 - 4)/6)^2 = 4.00 6-7 te = (5 + 4x8 + 11)/6 = 48/6 = 8.00 var = ((11 - 5)/6)^2 = 1.00 4-7 te = (2 + 4x8 + 14)/6 = 48/6 = 8.00 var = ((14 - 2)/6)^2 = 4.00 7-8 te = (9 + 4x12 + 15)/6 = 72/6 = 12.00 var = ((15 - 9)/6)^2 = 1.00 8-9 te = (1 + 4x4 + 7)/6 = 24/6 = 4.00 var = ((7 - 1)/6)^2 = 1.00
  2. Draw the network on the expected times and run both passes, exactly as in CPM.
    PERT ARROW NETWORK, 2072 KARTIK Q5 Durations are the expected times te; critical path 1-2 - 2-4 - 4-7 - 7-8 - 8-9, 54.33 weeks. 1-2 10.67 2-3 4 2-4 19.67 3-5 19.67 3-6 8 3-7 8 6-7 8 4-7 8 7-8 12 8-9 4 1 0 0 2 10.67 10.67 3 14.67 22.33 4 30.33 30.33 5 34.33 54.33 6 22.67 30.33 7 38.33 38.33 8 50.33 50.33 9 54.33 54.33 Each circle is an event: its earliest time TE above, its latest time TL below. Arrows are the activities; the critical path is in colour.
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    1-210.67010.67010.670yes
    2-3410.6714.6718.3322.337.67
    2-419.6710.6730.3310.6730.330yes
    3-519.6714.6734.3334.6754.3320
    3-6814.6722.6722.3330.337.67
    3-7814.6722.6730.3338.3315.67
    6-7822.6730.6730.3338.337.67
    4-7830.3338.3330.3338.330yes
    7-81238.3350.3338.3350.330yes
    8-9450.3354.3350.3354.330yes
  3. Paths and their expected lengths.
    1-2 - 2-3 - 3-5 34.33 weeks 1-2 - 2-3 - 3-6 - 6-7 - 7-8 - 8-9 46.67 weeks 1-2 - 2-3 - 3-7 - 7-8 - 8-9 38.67 weeks 1-2 - 2-4 - 4-7 - 7-8 - 8-9 54.33 weeks <- longest: critical
  4. Project variance: add the variances of the critical activities only.
    V = 1.00(1-2) + 40.11(2-4) + 4.00(4-7) + 1.00(7-8) + 1.00(8-9) = 47.11 sigma = sqrt(47.11) = 6.86 weeks
  5. Probability of finishing by the target: z = (T - Te) / σ, then read P(Z ≤ z) from the normal table (the notes’ calculator way: P = 0.5 ± Q(|z|)).
    T = 34 (34 weeks) z = (34 - 54.33) / 6.86 = -2.96 P = 0.5 - 0.4985 = 0.15 %
Critical path: 1-2 → 2-4 → 4-7 → 7-8 → 8-9.
Expected completion time Te = 54.33 weeks, with σ = 6.86.
P(finish within 34 weeks) = 0.15%.
Event 7 by week 20: the longest chain into event 7 is 1-2 - 2-4 - 4-7, TE = 38.33, variance 1.00 + 40.11 + 4.00 = 45.11, σ = 6.72; z = (20 - 38.33) / 6.72 = -2.73, so P = 0.32%.
Asked in past papers
  • A big software project is under consideration for development. Overall 10 different activities as WBS are identified as listed below table with their timings in number of weeks. Activities/a/m/b: (1,2) 7 11 13; (2,3) 1 4 7; (2,4) 10 15 48; (3,5) 12 20 26; (3,6) 4 7 16; (3,7) 4 7 16; (6,7) 5 8 11; (4,7) 2 8 14; (7,8) 9 12 15; (8,9) 1 4 7. Where a = Optimistic time, b = Pessimistic time, m = most likely time. Calculate the following: a) What is the expected time of completion of the project? b) What is the probability of completing the project in 34 weeks? c) What is the probability of the activity 7 being completed in the twentieth week? (2072 Kartik Q5)

2071 Chaitra Q4: Earthwork and drains project on node pairs: critical path and all timings asked 1×

Earthwork and drains project on node pairs: critical path and all timings 2071 Chaitra Q4 · 9 marks

The question. A project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Description/Duration in days: A(1-2) Start earth work 3; B(1-4) Vendor selection 2; C(1-7) Start handling 1; D(2-3) Continue earth work 3; E(3-6) Finish earth work 2; F(4-5) Ordering raw material 4; G(4-8) Excavation for drains 6; H(5-6) Receiving raw material 5; I(6-9) Base concreting 4; J(7-8) Continue handing 4; K(8-9) Laying drains 5. Draw the network diagram and trace the critical path of the network. What are the various timings and the total duration of the above project?

  1. Convert the node pairs to predecessors. An activity depends on every activity that ends at its start node.
    ActivityNodes (i, j)DescriptionDurationPredecessors (derived)
    A(1, 2)Start earth work3none
    B(1, 4)Vendor selection2none
    C(1, 7)Start handling1none
    D(2, 3)Continue earth work3A
    E(3, 6)Finish earth work2D
    F(4, 5)Ordering raw material4B
    G(4, 8)Excavation for drains6B
    H(5, 6)Receiving raw material5F
    I(6, 9)Base concreting4E, H
    J(7, 8)Continue handling4C
    K(8, 9)Laying drains5G, J
  2. Draw the arrow network (the question gives it as arrows): events are circles, each activity an arrow from its start node to its end node.
    ARROW NETWORK, 2071 CHAITRA Q4 Events numbered as in the question; critical path B - F - H - I, 15 days. A 3 B 2 C 1 D 3 E 2 F 4 G 6 H 5 I 4 J 4 K 5 1 0 0 2 3 6 3 6 9 4 2 2 5 6 6 6 11 11 7 1 6 8 8 10 9 15 15 Each circle is an event: its earliest time TE above, its latest time TL below. Arrows are the activities; the critical path is in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 3 = 3 B ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 2 = 2 C ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 1 = 1 D ES = EF(A) = 3, EF = 3 + 3 = 6 E ES = EF(D) = 6, EF = 6 + 2 = 8 F ES = EF(B) = 2, EF = 2 + 4 = 6 G ES = EF(B) = 2, EF = 2 + 6 = 8 H ES = EF(F) = 6, EF = 6 + 5 = 11 I ES = max(EF(E), EF(H)) = max(8, 11) = 11, EF = 11 + 4 = 15 J ES = EF(C) = 1, EF = 1 + 4 = 5 K ES = max(EF(G), EF(J)) = max(8, 5) = 8, EF = 8 + 5 = 13 Project duration = the largest EF = 15 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    K LF = 15 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 15 - 5 = 10 J LF = LS(K) = 10, LS = 10 - 4 = 6 I LF = 15 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 15 - 4 = 11 H LF = LS(I) = 11, LS = 11 - 5 = 6 G LF = LS(K) = 10, LS = 10 - 6 = 4 F LF = LS(H) = 6, LS = 6 - 4 = 2 E LF = LS(I) = 11, LS = 11 - 2 = 9 D LF = LS(E) = 9, LS = 9 - 3 = 6 C LF = LS(J) = 6, LS = 6 - 1 = 5 B LF = min(LS(F), LS(G)) = min(2, 4) = 2, LS = 2 - 2 = 0 A LF = LS(D) = 6, LS = 6 - 3 = 3
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF
    ActivityDescriptionDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFCritical
    AStart earth work303363
    BVendor selection202020yes
    CStart handling101565
    DContinue earth work336693
    EFinish earth work2689113
    FOrdering raw material426260yes
    GExcavation for drains6284102
    HReceiving raw material56116110yes
    IBase concreting4111511150yes
    JContinue handling4156105
    KLaying drains581310152
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - D - E - I 12 days B - F - H - I 15 days <- longest: critical B - G - K 13 days C - J - K 10 days
Critical path: B → F → H → I.
Project duration: 15 days.
Non-critical: A (TF 3), C (TF 5), D (TF 3), E (TF 3), G (TF 2), J (TF 5), K (TF 2).
Asked in past papers
  • A project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Description/Duration in days: A(1-2) Start earth work 3; B(1-4) Vendor selection 2; C(1-7) Start handling 1; D(2-3) Continue earth work 3; E(3-6) Finish earth work 2; F(4-5) Ordering raw material 4; G(4-8) Excavation for drains 6; H(5-6) Receiving raw material 5; I(6-9) Base concreting 4; J(7-8) Continue handing 4; K(8-9) Laying drains 5. Draw the network diagram and trace the critical path of the network. What are the various timings and the total duration of the above project? (2071 Chaitra Q4)

2070 Ashad (CE 701 Project Engineering) Q3a: CE 701 paper: CPM network, critical path, and all four floats asked 1×

CE 701 paper: CPM network, critical path, and all four floats 2070 Ashad (CE 701 Project Engineering) Q3a · 16 marks

The question. Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H I J; Predecessor - - A,B B A C E,F D,F G,H I; Days 4 7 4 3 2 1 6 5 8 9. Find: i) Critical path ii) Project completion time iii) EST, EFT, LST, LFT, Total float, Free float (FF), independent float (IdF) and Interferring float (If)

  1. Read the data.
    ActivityPredecessorsDuration (days)
    Anone4
    Bnone7
    CA, B4
    DB3
    EA2
    FC1
    GE, F6
    HD, F5
    IG, H8
    JI9
  2. Draw the network (activity on node). A and B start together; merges at C, G, H, I; bursts after A, B, F.
    NETWORK, 2070 ASHAD (CE 701 PROJECT ENGINEERING) Q3a Critical path B - C - F - G - I - J, project duration 35 days. START 0 4 A (4) 3 7 0 7 B (7) 0 7 7 11 C (4) 7 11 7 10 D (3) 10 13 4 6 E (2) 10 12 11 12 F (1) 11 12 12 18 G (6) 12 18 12 17 H (5) 13 18 18 26 I (8) 18 26 26 35 J (9) 26 35 END Each box: ES | EF on top, activity (duration) in the middle, LS | LF below. The critical path is drawn in colour.
  3. Forward pass, taking the maximum EF at every merge.
    A ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 4 = 4 B ES = 0 (a start activity), EF = 0 + 7 = 7 C ES = max(EF(A), EF(B)) = max(4, 7) = 7, EF = 7 + 4 = 11 D ES = EF(B) = 7, EF = 7 + 3 = 10 E ES = EF(A) = 4, EF = 4 + 2 = 6 F ES = EF(C) = 11, EF = 11 + 1 = 12 G ES = max(EF(E), EF(F)) = max(6, 12) = 12, EF = 12 + 6 = 18 H ES = max(EF(D), EF(F)) = max(10, 12) = 12, EF = 12 + 5 = 17 I ES = max(EF(G), EF(H)) = max(18, 17) = 18, EF = 18 + 8 = 26 J ES = EF(I) = 26, EF = 26 + 9 = 35 Project duration = the largest EF = 35 days
  4. Backward pass, taking the minimum LS at every burst.
    J LF = 35 (the project duration, a last activity), LS = 35 - 9 = 26 I LF = LS(J) = 26, LS = 26 - 8 = 18 H LF = LS(I) = 18, LS = 18 - 5 = 13 G LF = LS(I) = 18, LS = 18 - 6 = 12 F LF = min(LS(G), LS(H)) = min(12, 13) = 12, LS = 12 - 1 = 11 E LF = LS(G) = 12, LS = 12 - 2 = 10 D LF = LS(H) = 13, LS = 13 - 3 = 10 C LF = LS(F) = 11, LS = 11 - 4 = 7 B LF = min(LS(C), LS(D)) = min(7, 10) = 7, LS = 7 - 7 = 0 A LF = min(LS(C), LS(E)) = min(7, 10) = 7, LS = 7 - 4 = 3
  5. Floats.
    TF = LS - ES = LF - EF FF = min(ES of successors) - EF (last activity: duration - EF) IdF = max(0, min(ES of successors) - max(LF of predecessors) - duration) IF = TF - FF
    ActivityDurESTEFTLSTLFTTFFFIdFIFCritical
    A404373003
    B707070000yes
    C47117110000yes
    D371010133221
    E24610126630
    F1111211120000yes
    G6121812180000yes
    H5121713181100
    I8182618260000yes
    J9263526350000yes
  6. Check by listing every path (the notes’ method): the longest is critical.
    A - C - F - G - I - J 32 days A - C - F - H - I - J 31 days A - E - G - I - J 29 days B - C - F - G - I - J 35 days <- longest: critical B - C - F - H - I - J 34 days B - D - H - I - J 32 days
Critical path: B → C → F → G → I → J.
Project duration: 35 days.
Non-critical: A (TF 3), D (TF 3), E (TF 6), H (TF 1).
Asked in past papers
  • Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H I J; Predecessor - - A,B B A C E,F D,F G,H I; Days 4 7 4 3 2 1 6 5 8 9. Find: i) Critical path ii) Project completion time iii) EST, EFT, LST, LFT, Total float, Free float (FF), independent float (IdF) and Interferring float (If) (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q3a)

8.8Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 8.

Resource histogram, resource levelling, limited resource allocation, WBS asked 1×

“Define the terms resource histogram, resource levelling, limited resource allocation and work breakdown structure.”

2070 Ashad (CE 701 Project Engineering paper)

Only partly in the notes: the WBS is on page 76; the slides only name resource levelling as a tool (slides 193, 199); the other terms are not there.

  • Resource histogram: a bar chart of how much of a resource (people, machines) the schedule needs in each time period. Its peaks show where a resource is over-committed; its valleys show idle capacity.
  • Resource levelling: moving activities within their float so that resource demand is smoothed and stays within what is available. Levelling within float keeps the project duration; if the peaks cannot be removed within float, the duration grows.
  • Limited resource allocation (resource-constrained scheduling): scheduling when a resource cannot exceed a fixed limit. Activities are scheduled in priority order (usually least float first) only while the resource is available, and the project duration is stretched to fit the resource, rather than the resource bought to fit the schedule.
  • Work breakdown structure: the systematic breakdown of the major project work into smaller, more manageable components in hierarchical order; the lowest level is the work package (notes p. 76; chapter 7).
  • How they connect: the WBS gives the activities; the schedule gives their timing; the histogram shows the resource load of that timing; levelling or limited allocation fixes the overloads.

Only the critical activities’. Add variances, never standard deviations; take the square root at the end.

It must be on the critical path. Crashing an activity with float buys nothing.

Back to probability and crashing.

The charter formally authorises the project: the project manager may start it and use organisational resources.

Guidelines, analogy, top-down, bottom-up, mind mapping (Grandma Ate The Big Momo).

Back to the charter and the WBS.

Chapter 9 · 4 hours · appeared in 20 of 22 sittings

Project cost management

What a project costs and why IT projects overrun, how cost is estimated, budgeted and controlled, and earned value, the most reliably examined numerical in the subject: in 18 of the 22 sittings. Every earned value and NPV question ever set is solved at the end.

What this chapter is about
  • Cost and its types, project cost versus product cost, and the principles of cost management.
  • The four cost processes: resource planning, cost estimating (with its tools, accuracy and COCOMO), cost budgeting, cost control.
  • Earned value management (EVM): PV, EV and AC, the variances and indices, forecasts, benefits, and the S curve.
  • Money over time: NPV, payback and break-even for choosing projects.
  • Every past numerical, solved.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Cost is one side of the triple constraint (chapter 1), estimated on the WBS (chapter 7) and the schedule (chapter 8).
  • EVM joins scope, time and cost into one measure, and is the tool of the monitoring and control cycle of chapter 7; its S curve returns in communications (chapter 11).
  • NPV and payback are the project selection methods behind the charter (chapter 7).
What you will learn
  1. Cost, its types and the principles
  2. Cost estimating and COCOMO
  3. Cost budgeting and cost control
  4. Earned value management, its formulas, the notes’ examples, benefits and the S curve
  5. NPV, payback and break-even
  6. Every past numerical, solved
  7. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • An earned value numerical, often with “what is EVM?”: 18 of the 22 sittings. Seventeen are solved at the end of this chapter.
  • Short notes on COCOMO (four sittings) and the S curve (three); cost estimating and its tools (two).
  • Payback and NPV: one full question (2074 Chaitra); break-even as a short note.

9.1Cost and project cost management

Cost, its types, and the principles of cost management

Project cost management The processes involved in planning, estimating, budgeting and controlling costs so that the project can be completed within the approved budget (slide 203). It helps the project manager estimate what the project will cost and set controls to reduce the chance of going over budget (notes p. 110).
  • Why it is needed: IT projects have a poor record of meeting budget goals; a 2011 Harvard Business Review study found an average cost overrun of 27% (notes p. 110).
  • The reality: you do not only manage cost; you manage everything else that incurs cost (slide 203).
  • Cost: a resource spent to accomplish a goal, usually measured in money (notes p. 110).

Types of cost (notes p. 110, slide 206)

  • Direct: come straight out of the project budget: labour, resources, machinery, developer salaries.
  • Indirect or overhead: shared across projects: building rent, maintenance, insurance, utilities, vacation and sick leave.
  • Administrative: management expenses, HRM and HRD activities.
  • Fixed: do not change over the life cycle: development space and computers.
  • Variable: change during the life cycle: the cost of maintaining the database.
  • Sunk: already spent and cannot be recovered.
Project cost (notes p. 110)Product cost (notes p. 111)
The cost of running a projectThe cost of manufacturing a product
Labour cost + resource cost + special machinery costMaterial cost + manufacturing cost + overhead cost = sales price
Covers the human resources, machinery and other resources the project needsOverhead here includes other overheads, the project cost and the profit

Basic principles of cost management (notes p. 111, slide 207)

  1. Profit = revenue - expenses.
  2. Profit margin = the ratio of profit to revenue: $2 on $100 is a 2% margin.
  3. Life cycle costing: the total development cost plus the support costs for the life of the project (total cost of ownership).
  4. Cash flow analysis: the estimated annual costs and benefits, and the resulting annual cash flow.
  5. Tangible and intangible costs and benefits: measurable in money, or hard to measure.
  6. Sunk cost should not be a criterion in project costing.
  • The slides add: the learning curve (unit cost falls in a regular pattern as more units are produced) and reserves: contingency reserves for “known unknowns” (such as staff turnover) and management reserves for “unknown unknowns” (such as a supplier going out of business).
Sunk cost, in one sentence Money already spent cannot be recovered, so it must not decide whether to continue: only the remaining cost against the remaining benefit counts. Continuing a failing project because of what has already gone into it is the classic cost error.

A cost management plan sets (notes p. 111, slide 208): the level of accuracy (precision); units of measure; links to organisational procedures; control thresholds; rules of performance measurement (earned value rules); reporting formats; process descriptions.

The four cost management processes (notes p. 111, slide 204)

  1. Resource planning: which resources, and how much of each, the project should use.
  2. Cost estimating: an estimate of the costs of the resources needed to complete the project.
  3. Cost budgeting: allocating the overall estimate to individual work items, to set a baseline for measuring performance.
  4. Cost control: controlling changes to the project budget.

9.2Resource planning and cost estimating

Resource planning and cost estimating asked 3×

Resource planning (notes p. 112)

  • What: predicting the future resource requirements of the project.
  • How: start from the project scope; once the activities are defined, use historical data, expert opinion and resource planning tools to estimate the resources needed.
Cost estimating The process of developing an approximation of the monetary resources needed to complete the project activities (slide 209); it includes identifying and considering cost alternatives, and is part of planning (notes p. 112).
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 209): scope, WBS, the PM plan (schedule and HR plans, risk register), environmental factors and process assets go in; expert judgement, analogous, parametric, bottom-up and three-point estimating, reserve analysis, cost of quality, PM software, vendor bid analysis and group decision techniques are applied; activity cost estimates and the basis of estimates come out.

Three types of cost estimate (slide 210)

TypeWhenPurposeAccuracy
Order of magnitude (rough, ROM)The very early stage: evaluation and planningAn idea of the general, total expenditure, without itemising by activity or deliverable-25% to +75%
Budget (preliminary)Within the actual planning stageA preliminary itemised list of expenditure, by the major components of the project-10% to +25%
Definitive (detailed)Once the work is known in detailMore accurate and more detailed than the other two-5% to +10%
  • The pattern: the later the estimate, the more is known, so the narrower the range. The ranges are lopsided upward because costs are far more often underestimated than overestimated.

Cost estimating tools and techniques (notes pp. 112, 113, slide 211)

  1. Top-down (analogous): compares with similar past projects; uses expert judgement; less accurate than the other tools, but quick.
  2. Bottom-up: activity-based costing on the WBS: estimate each work component, then roll up. More accurate, and better for controlling cost; needs enough detail.
  3. Three-point: most likely, optimistic and pessimistic costs, combined by the PERT weighted average.
  4. Parametric: a mathematical model (for example cost per line of code, per square metre); like top-down but formal; best with good historical data. COCOMO is one.
  5. Vendor bid analysis: estimates cost from what vendors bid.
  6. Reserve analysis: checks whether the remaining reserve is enough for the remaining risk.
  • The slides add: data-driven estimates (resource cost rates) and project management software.
  • The pair to explain if short of time: top-down (fast, cheap, less accurate) against bottom-up (slow, detailed, accurate, good for control).

Typical problems with IT cost estimates (notes p. 113): why software cost estimation is complex

  • Estimates are done too quickly, before the requirements are understood.
  • People lack estimating experience.
  • People are biased toward underestimation.
  • Management wants an accuracy the information cannot give.
  • Beyond the notes: software is intangible and progress hard to see; requirements change; productivity varies widely between developers; much of the work (design, testing, integration) is invisible in size measures.
  • The remedy (notes): a contingency reserve held against these known problems.

Aspects of IT project estimation (notes p. 81, slide 153)

  • Define the scope first: then time and cost are easier to estimate.
  • Smaller tasks are easier to estimate, which is why estimates are built on the WBS.
  • Every estimation error adds project risk.
  • Estimate by the team, then modify by experts.
  • Estimate the work effort per person, not the task duration.
  • Three types of estimation: scope or size, time, cost.
In the exam
  • “What is cost estimating? Explain its tools and techniques” (2080 Bhadra, 2069 Chaitra): the definition, the three types of estimate with accuracy, then the six tools.
  • “Why is cost estimation for a software project a bit complex?” (2075 Chaitra): the typical problems, and the contingency reserve.
  • “Write about aspects of IT project estimation” (2080 Bhadra): the six aspects.
Asked in past papers
  • Differentiate project scope and product scope. Write about aspects of IT project estimation. (2080 Bhadra Q8)
  • Describe about the cost estimating in project management and explain about the tools and techniques used for cost estimating. (2080 Bhadra Q9)
  • Why the cost estimation for software project is a bit complex? Explain the EVM technique for the cost control and monitoring. Illustrate an EVA graph with your own values. (2075 Chaitra Q4)
  • What is a cost estimating? Explain different tools and techniques used for cost estimating. (2069 Chaitra Q9)

Answers: “Explain the tools and techniques used for cost estimating” (2080 Bhadra, 2069 Chaitra). Six tools, in the notes’ order.

How it decodes: six words, six tools. Two buffaloes trample Pokhara and the vendors run. Two T words: top-down first, three-point third.

  1. TTwo Top-down (analogous) estimates
  2. BBuffaloes Bottom-up estimates
  3. TTrampled Three-point estimates
  4. PPokhara Parametric estimating
  5. VVendors Vendor bid analysis. The vendors are really there
  6. RRan Reserve analysis

COCOMO, the constructive cost model asked 4×

COCOMO A model that estimates the cost of a software project from its size in lines of code (KLOC, thousands of lines), proposed by B. W. Boehm in his book Software Engineering Economics (1981) (slide 212).
  • Three models, in rising detail (slide 212, notes p. 186): basic, intermediate, detailed. Basic uses the size alone. The notes’ steps (p. 186): take an initial effort estimate from the size in thousands of delivered lines of code (KDLOC), find 15 multiplying factors from the project’s attributes, and multiply them together with the initial estimate. The factors cover product, hardware, personnel and project attributes, and the detailed model applies them phase by phase (beyond the notes).
  • Applied to three modes of project (slides 213, 214; notes p. 186):
ModeSizeNatureInnovationDeadlineEnvironment
Organic2 to 50 KLOCSmall project, experienced developers, familiar environment: payroll, inventoryLittleNot tightFamiliar, in-house
Semidetached50 to 300 KLOCMedium size and team, some experience: utility systems, compilers, database systems, editorsMediumMediumMedium
EmbeddedOver 300 KLOCLarge, real-time, complex interfaces, little experience: ATMs, air traffic controlSignificantTightComplex hardware and customer interfaces
BASIC COCOMO (slides 215 to 217) Effort E = a (KLOC)^b person-months Duration D = c (E)^d months Staff size SS = E / D persons Productivity P = KLOC / E KLOC per person-month Mode a b c d Organic 2.4 1.05 2.5 0.38 Semidetached 3.0 1.12 2.5 0.35 Embedded 3.6 1.20 2.5 0.32
  • A worked example (organic, 32 KLOC): E = 2.4 x 321.05 = 91.33 person-months; D = 2.5 x 91.330.38 = 13.90 months; SS = 91.33 / 13.90 = 6.57, about 7 people; P = 32 / 91.33 = 0.35 KLOC per person-month.
  • Its limit (beyond your notes): it needs the size in KLOC, which is itself hard to know before the design exists, so it works best calibrated on the organisation’s own past projects.
In the exam
  • Short note, “COCOMO” (2082 Bhadra, 2074 Chaitra, 2072 Kartik, 2070 Ashad): the definition and Boehm, the three models, the three modes, the basic formulas with the coefficient table, and one line on the limit.
Asked in past papers
  • Write Short Notes on: (Any Two) a) PMBOK b) Balanced Scorecard c) SWOT d) COCOMO Model e) Pareto Chart (2082 Bhadra Q11)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balance Scorecard ii) COCOMO for IT project iii) Break-even Point iv) Cause and effect diagram (2074 Chaitra Q8)
  • Write short notes on: a) COCOMO (constructive cost model) for IT project b) Contract closure procedure c) Balanced scorecard framework d) Pareto analysis e) Quality Audit Plan (2072 Kartik Q10)
  • Write short note on: a) Project stakeholders b) Project management information system c) Critical Chain Scheduling d) Categories of Risk e) Balanced Score Card f) Constructive Cost Model (COCOMO) (2070 Ashad Q16)

9.3Cost budgeting and cost control

Cost budgeting, the baseline, and cost control asked 1×

Cost budgeting Allocating the project cost estimate to individual work items over time, giving a cost baseline (notes p. 113, slide 218). The initially approved estimate can be taken as the budget.
  • The WBS is a required input: it defines the work items.
  • The project budget is the sum of all the project costs; once the project starts it is the baseline against which actual costs are compared, showing early when costs run high.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 218): cost management plan, scope baseline, activity cost estimates, schedule, resource calendars, risk register and agreements go in; cost aggregation, reserve analysis, expert judgement, historical relationships and funding limit reconciliation are applied; the cost baseline and project funding requirements come out.

Principles of cost budgeting (notes p. 114)

  1. Plan low cost for relatively unimportant items.
  2. Estimate separately for different categories of events and functions.
  3. Estimate separately for aggregated tasks or activities.
  4. Estimate separately for emerging costs, through a contingency or reserve budget.
  5. “Promise low, deliver high.”
  • Cost aggregation: summing the individual work package estimates up the WBS to one project total (notes p. 114, slide 219). Benefits: costs seen across partners, countries and platforms; no fragmented cost data; a clear and correct picture of ROI.
  • Cost baseline: the approved, time-phased budget (salaries, materials and so on), used to measure and monitor cost performance. Built from the WBS, the task schedule, the cost estimates and the risk management plan.
Cost control Monitoring cost performance, ensuring that only appropriate changes are included in a revised cost baseline, and informing stakeholders of authorised changes that affect cost (notes p. 114, slide 220).

Cost control measures (notes p. 115, slide 221)

  • Influence the factors that cause changes to the cost baseline.
  • Agree every requested change; manage actual changes as they occur.
  • Keep overruns within the authorised funding, period by period and in total.
  • Monitor cost performance to detect and understand variances from the baseline.
  • Record every appropriate change accurately against the baseline.
  • Act to bring expected overruns within acceptable limits.
  • Two methods (notes p. 115): the cost change control system (the procedures by which the cost baseline may be changed, documented in the cost management plan and integrated with integrated change control), and performance evaluation analysis: earned value management.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 220): PM plan, funding requirements, work performance data and process assets go in; EVM, forecasting, performance reviews and PM software are applied; cost estimates, change requests and plan updates come out.

Why cost control is important

  • Overruns are the norm without it: IT projects average a 27% cost overrun (notes p. 110).
  • Money is finite: overruns must stay within the authorised funding, or the project stops.
  • Early warning: variances found early are cheap to correct.
  • Only approved changes enter the baseline, so the budget stays honest.
  • Stakeholders stay informed of changes that affect cost, and profit is protected.
In the exam
  • “Why is cost control important in a project?” (2070 Ashad, CE 701): the definition, the importance points and the control measures; its numerical part is solved at the end.
Asked in past papers
  • Why cost control is important in project? 15 houses were to be completed in three months with per unit cost of Rs 25,00,000/-. In one month 4 houses were completed with total expenditure of Rs 96,00,000/- use earn value analysis to find the status of the project. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q4b)

9.4Earned value management

Earned value management and its three numbers asked 8×

Earned value management (EVM) A project management methodology that integrates schedule, cost and scope to measure project performance; actual information must be provided periodically (notes p. 115, slide 222). Earned value analysis measures how much work has been completed at a given point, and how well.
  • Why it beats a budget comparison: spending less than planned may mean efficiency, or almost no work done; only EVM tells them apart. In the slides’ words, it paints where the project is and how long the journey ahead is (slide 222).
  • PV against EV (slide 223): planned value is the value you expected to earn by now; earned value is the value you have actually earned. The total planned value is the BAC.
TermAlso calledMeaningUsually computed as
PV, planned valueBCWS, budgeted cost of work scheduledThe authorised budget for the work that should be done by nowBAC x % of work planned
EV, earned valueBCWP, budgeted cost of work performedThe budget value of the work actually done; it cannot exceed the authorised budgetBAC x % of work complete
AC, actual costACWP, actual cost of work performedThe money actually spent on the work doneGiven
BAC, budget at completionTotal planned valueThe total approved budgetGiven
  • The notes’ illustration (notes pp. 115, 116): a 5-month project budgeted at $25,000. By month 2, 40% was planned: PV = 25,000 x 40% = $10,000. Only 30% is done: EV = 25,000 x 30% = $7,500. The team has spent AC = $15,000.
  • In one line: PV is what you promised, EV is what you delivered, AC is what you paid. Delivered against promised tells you about schedule; delivered against paid tells you about cost.
In the exam
  • “What is EVM?” (seven sittings, the first part of a numerical): the definition, the three numbers with their other names, and the one-line summary.
  • “Explain the EVM technique for cost control and monitoring” (2075 Chaitra): this card, the formulas and the S curve graph together.
Asked in past papers
  • What is EVM? You are the project manager on a project that has Rs. 800000/- software development effort. There are two team of programmers that will work for six month for a total of 10000 hours. According to the project schedule your Team should be done with 38% of the work. As of today, the project is 40% complete while 50% budget has been used. Calculate CPI and SPI. Is the project behind the schedule of ahead schedule? And share your conclusion. (2080 Baishakh Q4a)
  • What is EVM? Suppose your project has a total budget of 300,000, scheduled to last for 8 months. You check your records and find that you have spent 175,000 so far. The team has completed 40% of the project work, but when you check the schedule it says that they should have completed 50% of the work. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule. (2076 Chaitra Q6a)
  • What is EVM? Suppose you have a project to be completed in 12 months and the budget of the project is Rs 10 lac. Six months have passed and 6 lac has been spent, but on closer review you find that only 40% of the work has been completed so far. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule. (2076 Ashwin Q4)
  • Why the cost estimation for software project is a bit complex? Explain the EVM technique for the cost control and monitoring. Illustrate an EVA graph with your own values. (2075 Chaitra Q4)
  • What is EVM? Suppose you are three month into a six month project. Assume that the budget burn rate is constant and the Budget at Completion (BAC) is Rs 1,20,000/- and Actual cost is Rs 65,000/- and Schedule Performance Index is 1.2. Find the CPI of the project and Estimate at Completion (EAC). Is the project is over budget or under budget? (2074 Chaitra Q6b)
  • What is EVM? The project has been planned that total estimated cost of project is Rs 5 Lakhs and there are 20 widgets to complete in 10 months duration. At 5th months, it reported that project was completed 40% and it has been spent Rs. 3 Lakhs only. Now calculate Cost Variance and Schedule Variance. Is the project behind the schedule or ahead schedule? (2074 Ashwin Q5)
  • What is earned value analysis? A project is scheduled for the time of 12 months. The estimated cost of project is $400000. After 3 months, evaluation is done and it is identified that 40% of work is accomplished but $200000 cost has been incurred. Now calculate cost and schedule variance for the project. (2073 Shrawan Q6)
  • What is Earned Value Management (EVM)? Derive the formulas that are used in schedule and cost performance, explain their significances. (2072 Kartik Q4)

The formulas, and what they mean asked 1×

VARIANCES (subtract: money; positive is good) CV = EV - AC = BCWP - ACWP cost variance negative: over budget SV = EV - PV = BCWP - BCWS schedule variance negative: behind schedule INDICES (divide: a ratio; above 1 is good) CPI = EV / AC = BCWP / ACWP cost performance below 1: over budget SPI = EV / PV = BCWP / BCWS schedule performance below 1: behind schedule FORECASTS EAC = BAC / CPI estimate at completion (the notes' "revised cost") revised duration = original duration / SPI (the notes, p. 119) ETC = EAC - AC estimate to complete VAC = BAC - EAC variance at completion PERCENTAGES CV% = CV / EV x 100 SV% = SV / PV x 100
  • Derivation (2072 Kartik asks to derive them): every measure compares EV with something. Against AC it measures cost, against PV it measures schedule. Subtracting gives the gap in money (a variance); dividing gives efficiency (an index). If performance continues at CPI, the whole budget will cost BAC / CPI.
  • The three rules behind every formula: EV always comes first; cost pairs EV with AC and schedule pairs EV with PV; subtracting gives a variance, dividing gives an index. Two pairs and two operators make the four core formulas.
  • Significance: CV and CPI say whether the money buys the planned work; SV and SPI whether the work is where the plan said; EAC, ETC and VAC say where the project will end.
  • Rate of performance (notes p. 116): actual work completed / percentage of work planned; the same idea as SPI in percentages.
  • Sources: CV and SV, notes p. 116; CPI and SPI, notes p. 118 and slides 224, 225; revised cost and duration, notes p. 119. ETC and VAC are standard but beyond your notes.
Two traps. A negative SV means behind schedule, not over budget: a project can be over budget and ahead of schedule at once. And SPI is measured in money, not time: SPI 0.8 means 80% of the planned value has been earned.
In the exam
  • “Derive the formulas used in schedule and cost performance, and explain their significance” (2072 Kartik): the formula block, the derivation, and the significance points.
Asked in past papers
  • What is Earned Value Management (EVM)? Derive the formulas that are used in schedule and cost performance, explain their significances. (2072 Kartik Q4)

Answers: “Calculate CV, SV, CPI, SPI and EAC.” Earned value appears in 18 of the 22 sittings.

How it decodes: Not an acronym: three rules that generate all four formulas.

  • 1EV always comes first. AC minus EV has the sign backwards.
  • 2C goes with A, S goes with P. Cost pairs with actual cost (CAt), schedule with planned value (SPider).
  • 3Minus gives a variance, divide gives an index. Two pairs, two operators, four formulas.

The notes’ worked examples

  • Example 9.5.1 (notes pp. 118, 119): 20 days, Rs 5,00,000; at day 5, 25% done, Rs 1,30,000 spent. BCWS = 5 x 25,000 = 1,25,000; BCWP = 0.25 x 5,00,000 = 1,25,000; ACWP = 1,30,000. SV = 0, SPI = 1 (on schedule; revised duration 20 days). CV = -5,000, CPI = 0.96 (over budget; revised cost 5,00,000 / 0.96 = Rs 5,20,000).
  • Example 9.5.2 (notes pp. 119, 120): 125 m3 of concrete in 10 days for Rs 12,50,000; at day 3, 40 m3 done for Rs 3,75,000. BCWS = 3,75,000; BCWP = 0.32 x 12,50,000 = 4,00,000; ACWP = 3,75,000. SV = +25,000, SPI = 1.067 (ahead; revised duration 10 / 1.067, which the notes print as 9.36 days; exactly 9.375). CV = +25,000, CPI = 1.067 (under budget; revised cost 12,50,000 / 1.067 = Rs 11,71,509 in the notes; exactly Rs 11,71,875 with the unrounded CPI of 400 / 375).
  • Example 9.5.3 (notes pp. 120, 121): 50 units of plantation in two weeks at Rs 200 a unit; after one week 40% done at Rs 250 a unit. BCWS = 25 x 200 = 5,000; BCWP = 20 x 200 = 4,000; ACWP = 20 x 250 = 5,000. CV = SV = -1,000; CPI = SPI = 0.80; final cost 10,000 / 0.80 = Rs 12,500 and time 2 / 0.80 = 2.5 weeks.

Benefits of EVM

  1. An excellent measure of progress: it measures work done, not time passed or money spent (notes p. 116).
  2. Accurate forecasting: EAC and ETC predict the final cost and date.
  3. Management by exception: managers look only where the indices move away from 1.
  4. Good project management discipline: it needs a real baseline and real progress measurement.
  5. Cost effective: the data mostly exists already.

The S curve, and the earned value graph asked 4×

S curve A graph of cumulative project cost (or person-hours, quantities) against time; an effective tool in project control (notes p. 117, slide 226).
  • Why an S: a slow but growing start, a steep middle where execution spends most of the budget, and a slowing finish as the work runs out.
  • The earned value graph: draw three S curves, BCWS (PV), BCWP (EV) and ACWP (AC). At the review date, the vertical gap from EV to AC is the cost variance, from EV to PV the schedule variance, and the horizontal gap is the delay (notes pp. 117, 121).
Expense against time with three curves: BCWS the plan, ACWP the actual cost, BCWP the earned value. At the current time the vertical gap between BCWP and ACWP is marked CV, the gap between BCWP and BCWS is marked SV, and the horizontal gap along the time axis is marked project delay
The earned value graph: at today’s date the gap from earned value up to actual cost is the cost variance, the gap up to the plan is the schedule variance, and the horizontal gap is the delay. Course notes, p. 117
Progress performance evaluation: two S shaped curves of cost, quantities or manhours against time, the planned or baselined curve above and the actual progress curve below it, with the variance marked between them at the data date
Planned against actual progress as two S curves; the gap at the data date is the variance. Course notes, p. 117

An EVA graph with your own values (the drawn version)

AN EARNED VALUE GRAPH WITH YOUR OWN VALUES Budget Rs 10 lakh over 10 months, reviewed at the end of month 5. Both variances are vertical gaps, in money; the horizontal gap is the delay, in time. 2 4 6 8 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CUMULATIVE COST (Rs LAKH) TIME (MONTHS) DATA DATE, MONTH 5 BAC PV = BCWS, the plan EV = BCWP, work earned AC = ACWP, money spent CV SV delay ≈ 0.9 month THE VALUES, AT MONTH 5 PV = 10 x 50% = 5.0 lakh EV = 10 x 35% = 3.5 lakh AC (spent) = 4.5 lakh CV = 3.5 - 4.5 = -1.0 lakh SV = 3.5 - 5.0 = -1.5 lakh CPI = 3.5 / 4.5 = 0.78 SPI = 3.5 / 5.0 = 0.70 EAC = 10 / 0.778 = 12.86 lakh Over budget (CV < 0) and behind schedule (SV < 0): 3.5 lakh of work was planned by month 4.1, a delay of about 0.9 month. Draw all three curves, mark the data date, then label CV and SV as vertical gaps and the delay as the horizontal one.

The notes’ example 9.5.4 (notes pp. 121, 122): cumulative values by week

ActivityCost (Rs)WeekBCWS (Rs)BCWP (Rs)ACWP (Rs)
A2001200200200
B3003500600450
C1005600800500
D40081,000
E500101,500
F300111,800
Line chart of the notes example: cumulative BCWS rising from 200 to 1,800 over weeks 1 to 11, with BCWP and ACWP plotted over the first weeks, BCWP above ACWP
The notes’ example drawn: the planned S curve (BCWS) with the earned (BCWP) and actual (ACWP) lines for the weeks reported so far. Course notes, p. 122
In the exam
  • Short note, “S curve” (2082 Baishakh, 2081 Baishakh, 2080 Bhadra): the definition, why it is S shaped, and the three-curve graph with CV and SV marked.
  • “Illustrate an EVA graph with your own values” (2075 Chaitra): draw the three curves on a small table of your own numbers, like the example above.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: (Any Four) a) Decision Tree analysis b) S-curve c) PDCA cycle d) ICT code of ethics e) Soft skills for project manager (2082 Baishakh Q8)
  • Write short notes on: a) S - curve b) Balanced Scorecard c) Pareto chart d) Application of CPM e) Decision tree analysis (2081 Baishakh Q14)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgements d) Project management and General management e) S - curve (2080 Bhadra Q13)
  • Why the cost estimation for software project is a bit complex? Explain the EVM technique for the cost control and monitoring. Illustrate an EVA graph with your own values. (2075 Chaitra Q4)

9.5NPV, payback and break-even

NPV, ROI, payback and break-even asked 1×

  • Where they come from: the financial project selection methods behind the charter (notes p. 65, chapter 7).
Net present value (NPV) The difference between the present value of cash inflows and the present value of cash outflows over a period; all future flows are discounted to the present (notes p. 65). NPV > 0: accept; NPV < 0: reject; NPV = 0: indifferent.
n R_t NPV = SUM --------- R_t = net cash flow at time t, i = discount rate t=0 (1 + i)^t ROI = net income / cost of investment (benefits - costs) / costs PAYBACK PERIOD = the time until the cumulative inflows repay the investment; shorter is better. Break-even: net income = 0, profit = loss.
  • Why NPV beats payback: payback ignores the time value of money and everything after the payback date; NPV counts every cash flow, discounted. Payback survives as a rough measure of risk: money returned sooner is less exposed.
  • Rates and periods must match: a monthly rate with yearly cash flows must be converted, (1 + monthly)12 - 1, before discounting. This is exactly the test in 2074 Chaitra, solved at the end.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Break-even point” (2074 Chaitra): the notes give only one line, so the full note is at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: i) Balance Scorecard ii) COCOMO for IT project iii) Break-even Point iv) Cause and effect diagram (2074 Chaitra Q8)

9.6Every past numerical, solved

Each card below is one past question, newest first: the question as set, how its words become PV, EV, AC and BAC, every formula with its numbers, and the interpretation the examiner asks for. Where a question leaves a value out, the assumption is stated, as it should be in your answer.

All 39 numericals from every paper, with the formula sheet in front of them and each solution closed so you can attempt it first, are on the numericals page.

2082 Bhadra Q5: CV, SV, CPI, SPI and EAC after three of twelve weeks, and what they mean asked 1×

CV, SV, CPI, SPI and EAC after three of twelve weeks, and what they mean 2082 Bhadra Q5 · 6 marks

The question. A project is scheduled for the 12 weeks. The estimated cost of project is Rs.100000/-. After three weeks, evaluation is done and identified that 40% of work is accomplished but Rs.50000/- cost has been incurred. Now calculate CV, SV, CP and SP index and estimate at completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. Interpret results.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 1,00,000 (the estimated cost of the whole project) PV = Rs. 25,000 (3 of 12 weeks have passed, so 3/12 = 25% was planned: 1,00,000 x 0.25) EV = Rs. 40,000 (40% of the work is done: 1,00,000 x 0.40) AC = Rs. 50,000 (given: the cost incurred so far)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 40,000 - 50,000 = -Rs. 10,000 SV = EV - PV = 40,000 - 25,000 = Rs. 15,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 40,000 / 50,000 = 0.8000 SPI = EV / PV = 40,000 / 25,000 = 1.6000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 1,00,000 / 0.8000 = Rs. 1,25,000 ETC = EAC - AC = 1,25,000 - 50,000 = Rs. 75,000 VAC = BAC - EAC = 1,00,000 - 1,25,000 = -Rs. 25,000
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 12 / 1.6000 = 7.50 weeks
CV = -Rs. 10,000  SV = Rs. 15,000  CPI = 0.8000  SPI = 1.6000  EAC = Rs. 1,25,000  ETC = Rs. 75,000  VAC = -Rs. 25,000
Over budget: CPI 0.80 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.80 of planned value.
Ahead of schedule: SPI 1.60 > 1, so 160% of the planned work is done.
One story, not two: more work than planned, bought with more money than planned, as overtime or extra staff would do. At this efficiency the project ends about Rs. 25,000 over budget.
Asked in past papers
  • A project is scheduled for the 12 weeks. The estimated cost of project is Rs.100000/-. After three weeks, evaluation is done and identified that 40% of work is accomplished but Rs.50000/- cost has been incurred. Now calculate CV, SV, CP and SP index and estimate at completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. Interpret results. (2082 Bhadra Q5)

2082 Baishakh Q5: SPI, CPI and EAC at month 3 of a six-month build, and the analysis asked 1×

SPI, CPI and EAC at month 3 of a six-month build, and the analysis 2082 Baishakh Q5 · 6 marks

The question. You are overseeing a construction project to build a new office complex in 6 months. The project has the following details as of the end of Month 3: Planned Value (PV): $500,000; Earned Value (EV): $480,000; Actual Cost (AC): $520,000. Calculate the following metrics for the project: a) Schedule Performance Index (SPI) b) Cost Performance Index (CPI) c) Estimate at Completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. d) Analyze your result.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    PV = $ 500,000 (given) EV = $ 480,000 (given) AC = $ 520,000 (given) BAC = $ 1,000,000 (NOT given. Month 3 of 6 is half the schedule, so with an even plan PV is half the budget: BAC = 500,000 / 0.5. State this assumption.)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 480,000 - 520,000 = -$ 40,000 SV = EV - PV = 480,000 - 500,000 = -$ 20,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 480,000 / 520,000 = 0.9231 SPI = EV / PV = 480,000 / 500,000 = 0.9600
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 1,000,000 / 0.9231 = $ 1,083,333.33 VAC = BAC - EAC = 1,000,000 - 1,083,333.33 = -$ 83,333.33
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 6 / 0.9600 = 6.25 months
SPI = 0.9600  CPI = 0.9231  SV = -$ 20,000  CV = -$ 40,000  EAC = $ 1,083,333.33  VAC = -$ 83,333.33
Over budget: CPI 0.92 < 1, so each dollar spent earns 0.92 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.96 < 1, so 96% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • You are overseeing a construction project to build a new office complex in 6 months. The project has the following details as of the end of Month 3: Planned Value (PV): $500,000; Earned Value (EV): $480,000; Actual Cost (AC): $520,000. Calculate the following metrics for the project: a) Schedule Performance Index (SPI) b) Cost Performance Index (CPI) c) Estimate at Completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. d) Analyze your result. (2082 Baishakh Q5)

2081 Bhadra Q4: SPI of 0.9 at 25% planned: EAC, and should management intervene? asked 1×

SPI of 0.9 at 25% planned: EAC, and should management intervene? 2081 Bhadra Q4 · 6 marks

The question. A manufacturing company is outsourcing the engineering and installation of a new computer controlled conveyor belt for their new product. The total budget allocated for this project is 10 lakhs. A monitoring report is created at a point where 25% of the work should have been done. It reports a Scheduling Performance Index of 0.9. What does this indicate? If 3 lakhs has been spent during this time, what is expected cost at completion (EAC) if no changes are made to the project and assuming it follows the current project trajectory? A variance of up to 2 lakhs for the whole project was within expectation. Given the expected cost, should the top level managers intervene?

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 10,00,000 (10 lakhs) PV = Rs. 2,50,000 (25% of the work should have been done: 10,00,000 x 0.25) EV = Rs. 2,25,000 (SPI = EV / PV, so EV = SPI x PV = 0.9 x 2,50,000) AC = Rs. 3,00,000 (given: 3 lakhs spent)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 2,25,000 - 3,00,000 = -Rs. 75,000 SV = EV - PV = 2,25,000 - 2,50,000 = -Rs. 25,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 2,25,000 / 3,00,000 = 0.7500 SPI = EV / PV = 2,25,000 / 2,50,000 = 0.9000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 10,00,000 / 0.7500 = Rs. 13,33,333.33 VAC = BAC - EAC = 10,00,000 - 13,33,333.33 = -Rs. 3,33,333.33
SV = -Rs. 25,000  SPI = 0.9000  CV = -Rs. 75,000  CPI = 0.7500  EAC = Rs. 13,33,333.33  VAC = -Rs. 3,33,333.33
Over budget: CPI 0.75 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.75 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.90 < 1, so 90% of the planned work is done.
Intervene? The expected overrun |VAC| = Rs. 3,33,333.33 is more than the Rs. 2,00,000 the managers accept, so yes, top management should intervene now. SPI 0.9 means only 90% of the planned work is done (behind schedule), and CPI 0.75 means the work is costing more than planned.
Asked in past papers
  • A manufacturing company is outsourcing the engineering and installation of a new computer controlled conveyor belt for their new product. The total budget allocated for this project is 10 lakhs. A monitoring report is created at a point where 25% of the work should have been done. It reports a Scheduling Performance Index of 0.9. What does this indicate? If 3 lakhs has been spent during this time, what is expected cost at completion (EAC) if no changes are made to the project and assuming it follows the current project trajectory? A variance of up to 2 lakhs for the whole project was within expectation. Given the expected cost, should the top level managers intervene? (2081 Bhadra Q4)

2080 Bhadra Q10: From CPI 0.875 nine months in: EV, EAC, ETC and VAC asked 1×

From CPI 0.875 nine months in: EV, EAC, ETC and VAC 2080 Bhadra Q10 · 1+1+1+1+1+1 marks

The question. Define EVM. Your project is scheduled for 2 years. Nine months into the project, while the total project budget is Rs. 42,00,000, you've already spent Rs. 16,50,000. CPI is 0.875. Calculate EV, EAC, ETC, VAC and share your conclusion.

“What is EVM?” Earned value management integrates scope, schedule and cost to measure project performance, from three numbers: planned value PV (BCWS), earned value EV (BCWP) and actual cost AC (ACWP). The full answer is in 9.4.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 42,00,000 (the total project budget) AC = Rs. 16,50,000 (already spent) EV = Rs. 14,43,750 (CPI = EV / AC, so EV = CPI x AC = 0.875 x 16,50,000)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 14,43,750 - 16,50,000 = -Rs. 2,06,250
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 14,43,750 / 16,50,000 = 0.8750
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 42,00,000 / 0.8750 = Rs. 48,00,000 ETC = EAC - AC = 48,00,000 - 16,50,000 = Rs. 31,50,000 VAC = BAC - EAC = 42,00,000 - 48,00,000 = -Rs. 6,00,000
CV = -Rs. 2,06,250  CPI = 0.8750  EAC = Rs. 48,00,000  ETC = Rs. 31,50,000  VAC = -Rs. 6,00,000
Over budget: CPI 0.88 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.88 of planned value.
PV is not given, so SV and SPI cannot be calculated. Say so rather than invent a PV.
Asked in past papers
  • Define EVM. Your project is scheduled for 2 years. Nine months into the project, while the total project budget is Rs. 42,00,000, you've already spent Rs. 16,50,000. CPI is 0.875. Calculate EV, EAC, ETC, VAC and share your conclusion. (2080 Bhadra Q10)

2080 Baishakh Q4a: A Rs 8 lakh software effort at 38% planned and 40% done: CPI, SPI, conclusion asked 1×

A Rs 8 lakh software effort at 38% planned and 40% done: CPI, SPI, conclusion 2080 Baishakh Q4a · 2+2+2+1+1 marks

The question. What is EVM? You are the project manager on a project that has Rs. 800000/- software development effort. There are two team of programmers that will work for six month for a total of 10000 hours. According to the project schedule your Team should be done with 38% of the work. As of today, the project is 40% complete while 50% budget has been used. Calculate CPI and SPI. Is the project behind the schedule of ahead schedule? And share your conclusion.

“What is EVM?” Earned value management integrates scope, schedule and cost to measure project performance, from three numbers: planned value PV (BCWS), earned value EV (BCWP) and actual cost AC (ACWP). The full answer is in 9.4.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 8,00,000 (the software development effort) PV = Rs. 3,04,000 (38% of the work should be done: 8,00,000 x 0.38) EV = Rs. 3,20,000 (40% is actually complete: 8,00,000 x 0.40) AC = Rs. 4,00,000 (50% of the budget has been used: 8,00,000 x 0.50)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 3,20,000 - 4,00,000 = -Rs. 80,000 SV = EV - PV = 3,20,000 - 3,04,000 = Rs. 16,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 3,20,000 / 4,00,000 = 0.8000 SPI = EV / PV = 3,20,000 / 3,04,000 = 1.0526
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 8,00,000 / 0.8000 = Rs. 10,00,000
CPI = 0.8000  SPI = 1.0526  CV = -Rs. 80,000  SV = Rs. 16,000  EAC = Rs. 10,00,000
Over budget: CPI 0.80 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.80 of planned value.
Ahead of schedule: SPI 1.05 > 1, so 105% of the planned work is done.
The two teams and 10,000 hours are not needed: EVM needs only BAC and the three percentages.
Asked in past papers
  • What is EVM? You are the project manager on a project that has Rs. 800000/- software development effort. There are two team of programmers that will work for six month for a total of 10000 hours. According to the project schedule your Team should be done with 38% of the work. As of today, the project is 40% complete while 50% budget has been used. Calculate CPI and SPI. Is the project behind the schedule of ahead schedule? And share your conclusion. (2080 Baishakh Q4a)

2079 Bhadra Q5: Full earned value analysis at week 20 of 45, with a comment on every parameter asked 1×

Full earned value analysis at week 20 of 45, with a comment on every parameter 2079 Bhadra Q5 · 6 marks

The question. For a particular project budgeted cost of work schedule was Rs. 9,50,000 and budgeted value of the work performed was Rs. 8,00,000 at a point of reporting date i.e at 20 weeks from starting date. But, the actual cost of work performed was 10,00,000 and the project completion time is 45 weeks. The project having estimated cost of Rs. 50,00,000. Based on above information, draw features of that project and comment on each parameter of earned value analysis.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 50,00,000 (the estimated cost of the project) PV = Rs. 9,50,000 (budgeted cost of work scheduled (BCWS)) EV = Rs. 8,00,000 (budgeted cost of work performed (BCWP)) AC = Rs. 10,00,000 (actual cost of work performed (ACWP))
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 8,00,000 - 10,00,000 = -Rs. 2,00,000 SV = EV - PV = 8,00,000 - 9,50,000 = -Rs. 1,50,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 8,00,000 / 10,00,000 = 0.8000 SPI = EV / PV = 8,00,000 / 9,50,000 = 0.8421
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 50,00,000 / 0.8000 = Rs. 62,50,000 ETC = EAC - AC = 62,50,000 - 10,00,000 = Rs. 52,50,000 VAC = BAC - EAC = 50,00,000 - 62,50,000 = -Rs. 12,50,000
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 45 / 0.8421 = 53.44 weeks
  6. The features of the project as percentages.
    Planned by now PV / BAC = 9,50,000 / 50,00,000 = 19.0 % Work done EV / BAC = 8,00,000 / 50,00,000 = 16.0 % Money spent AC / BAC = 10,00,000 / 50,00,000 = 20.0 % Time elapsed 20 / 45 weeks = 44.4 %
CV = -Rs. 2,00,000  SV = -Rs. 1,50,000  CPI = 0.8000  SPI = 0.8421  EAC = Rs. 62,50,000  ETC = Rs. 52,50,000  VAC = -Rs. 12,50,000
Over budget: CPI 0.80 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.80 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.84 < 1, so 84% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • For a particular project budgeted cost of work schedule was Rs. 9,50,000 and budgeted value of the work performed was Rs. 8,00,000 at a point of reporting date i.e at 20 weeks from starting date. But, the actual cost of work performed was 10,00,000 and the project completion time is 45 weeks. The project having estimated cost of Rs. 50,00,000. Based on above information, draw features of that project and comment on each parameter of earned value analysis. (2079 Bhadra Q5)

2076 Chaitra Q6a: SPI and CPI with 40% done against 50% planned asked 1×

SPI and CPI with 40% done against 50% planned 2076 Chaitra Q6a · 1+2+2+1 marks

The question. What is EVM? Suppose your project has a total budget of 300,000, scheduled to last for 8 months. You check your records and find that you have spent 175,000 so far. The team has completed 40% of the project work, but when you check the schedule it says that they should have completed 50% of the work. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule.

“What is EVM?” Earned value management integrates scope, schedule and cost to measure project performance, from three numbers: planned value PV (BCWS), earned value EV (BCWP) and actual cost AC (ACWP). The full answer is in 9.4.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = 300,000 (the total budget) PV = 150,000 (50% should be complete: 300,000 x 0.50) EV = 120,000 (40% is complete: 300,000 x 0.40) AC = 175,000 (spent so far)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 120,000 - 175,000 = -55,000 SV = EV - PV = 120,000 - 150,000 = -30,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 120,000 / 175,000 = 0.6857 SPI = EV / PV = 120,000 / 150,000 = 0.8000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 300,000 / 0.6857 = 437,500
SPI = 0.8000  CPI = 0.6857  SV = -30,000  CV = -55,000  EAC = 437,500
Over budget: CPI 0.69 < 1, so each unit spent earns 0.69 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.80 < 1, so 80% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • What is EVM? Suppose your project has a total budget of 300,000, scheduled to last for 8 months. You check your records and find that you have spent 175,000 so far. The team has completed 40% of the project work, but when you check the schedule it says that they should have completed 50% of the work. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule. (2076 Chaitra Q6a)

2076 Ashwin Q4: Six of twelve months, 6 lakhs spent, 40% done: SPI and CPI asked 1×

Six of twelve months, 6 lakhs spent, 40% done: SPI and CPI 2076 Ashwin Q4 · 1+2+2+1 marks

The question. What is EVM? Suppose you have a project to be completed in 12 months and the budget of the project is Rs 10 lac. Six months have passed and 6 lac has been spent, but on closer review you find that only 40% of the work has been completed so far. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule.

“What is EVM?” Earned value management integrates scope, schedule and cost to measure project performance, from three numbers: planned value PV (BCWS), earned value EV (BCWP) and actual cost AC (ACWP). The full answer is in 9.4.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 10,00,000 (10 lakhs) PV = Rs. 5,00,000 (6 of 12 months have passed: 10,00,000 x 6/12) EV = Rs. 4,00,000 (40% of the work is done: 10,00,000 x 0.40) AC = Rs. 6,00,000 (6 lakhs spent)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 4,00,000 - 6,00,000 = -Rs. 2,00,000 SV = EV - PV = 4,00,000 - 5,00,000 = -Rs. 1,00,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 4,00,000 / 6,00,000 = 0.6667 SPI = EV / PV = 4,00,000 / 5,00,000 = 0.8000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 10,00,000 / 0.6667 = Rs. 15,00,000
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 12 / 0.8000 = 15.00 months
SPI = 0.8000  CPI = 0.6667  SV = -Rs. 1,00,000  CV = -Rs. 2,00,000  EAC = Rs. 15,00,000
Over budget: CPI 0.67 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.67 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.80 < 1, so 80% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • What is EVM? Suppose you have a project to be completed in 12 months and the budget of the project is Rs 10 lac. Six months have passed and 6 lac has been spent, but on closer review you find that only 40% of the work has been completed so far. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule. (2076 Ashwin Q4)

2075 Ashwin Q6: Two tasks, reviewed on September 3: SV, CV, over or under budget asked 1×

Two tasks, reviewed on September 3: SV, CV, over or under budget 2075 Ashwin Q6 · 2.5+2.5+1 marks

The question. Suppose you have IT project, which might look after project planning: Task ID/Name/Start/End/Budget: 101 Setup Database Step 1 Sept 10 Rs. 1,00,000/-; 102 Build Application Step 7 Sept 20 Rs. 1,50,000/-. Let's assume, project has started on Sep 3rd determine that the first task is 20% complete and second task is 10% complete and Budget at completion (BAC) is Rs 2,50,000/- and after reviewing your time and expenses software and compiling any miscellaneous expenses, we determine that actual cost of the first task is Rs. 45,000/- and second task of Actual cost Rs. 20,000/-. Find the SV and CV of the project. Is the project is over budget or under budget?

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 2,50,000 (given (1,00,000 + 1,50,000)) EV = Rs. 35,000 (task 101: 20% of 1,00,000 = 20,000; task 102: 10% of 1,50,000 = 15,000; total 35,000) AC = Rs. 65,000 (45,000 + 20,000) PV = Rs. 30,000 (the review is on September 3. Task 101 runs September 1 to 10, ten days, so 3 days, 30%, should be done: 30,000. Task 102 is not due to start until September 7: 0. State this reading of the date.)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 35,000 - 65,000 = -Rs. 30,000 SV = EV - PV = 35,000 - 30,000 = Rs. 5,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 35,000 / 65,000 = 0.5385 SPI = EV / PV = 35,000 / 30,000 = 1.1667
SV = Rs. 5,000  CV = -Rs. 30,000  SPI = 1.1667  CPI = 0.5385
Over budget: CPI 0.54 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.54 of planned value.
Ahead of schedule: SPI 1.17 > 1, so 117% of the planned work is done.
CV does not depend on the review date, so “over budget” holds however the date is read. If the review were at the end of task 101 (September 10), PV would be 1,00,000 plus 4 of task 102’s 14 days (42,857), SV would be negative and the project behind schedule.
Asked in past papers
  • Suppose you have IT project, which might look after project planning: Task ID/Name/Start/End/Budget: 101 Setup Database Step 1 Sept 10 Rs. 1,00,000/-; 102 Build Application Step 7 Sept 20 Rs. 1,50,000/-. Let's assume, project has started on Sep 3rd determine that the first task is 20% complete and second task is 10% complete and Budget at completion (BAC) is Rs 2,50,000/- and after reviewing your time and expenses software and compiling any miscellaneous expenses, we determine that actual cost of the first task is Rs. 45,000/- and second task of Actual cost Rs. 20,000/-. Find the SV and CV of the project. Is the project is over budget or under budget? (2075 Ashwin Q6)

2074 Chaitra Q6b: From SPI 1.2 three months into six: CPI and EAC asked 1×

From SPI 1.2 three months into six: CPI and EAC 2074 Chaitra Q6b · 1+2+1+1 marks

The question. What is EVM? Suppose you are three month into a six month project. Assume that the budget burn rate is constant and the Budget at Completion (BAC) is Rs 1,20,000/- and Actual cost is Rs 65,000/- and Schedule Performance Index is 1.2. Find the CPI of the project and Estimate at Completion (EAC). Is the project is over budget or under budget?

“What is EVM?” Earned value management integrates scope, schedule and cost to measure project performance, from three numbers: planned value PV (BCWS), earned value EV (BCWP) and actual cost AC (ACWP). The full answer is in 9.4.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 1,20,000 (given) PV = Rs. 60,000 (the burn rate is constant and 3 of 6 months have passed: 1,20,000 x 0.5) EV = Rs. 72,000 (SPI = EV / PV, so EV = 1.2 x 60,000) AC = Rs. 65,000 (given)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 72,000 - 65,000 = Rs. 7,000 SV = EV - PV = 72,000 - 60,000 = Rs. 12,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 72,000 / 65,000 = 1.1077 SPI = EV / PV = 72,000 / 60,000 = 1.2000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 1,20,000 / 1.1077 = Rs. 1,08,333.33 VAC = BAC - EAC = 1,20,000 - 1,08,333.33 = Rs. 11,666.67
CPI = 1.1077  CV = Rs. 7,000  EAC = Rs. 1,08,333.33  VAC = Rs. 11,666.67  SPI = 1.2000  SV = Rs. 12,000
Under budget: CPI 1.11 > 1, so each rupee spent earns 1.11 of planned value.
Ahead of schedule: SPI 1.20 > 1, so 120% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • What is EVM? Suppose you are three month into a six month project. Assume that the budget burn rate is constant and the Budget at Completion (BAC) is Rs 1,20,000/- and Actual cost is Rs 65,000/- and Schedule Performance Index is 1.2. Find the CPI of the project and Estimate at Completion (EAC). Is the project is over budget or under budget? (2074 Chaitra Q6b)

2074 Ashwin Q5: Rs 5 lakhs, 10 months, 40% done at month 5: CV and SV asked 1×

Rs 5 lakhs, 10 months, 40% done at month 5: CV and SV 2074 Ashwin Q5 · 1+2+2+1 marks

The question. What is EVM? The project has been planned that total estimated cost of project is Rs 5 Lakhs and there are 20 widgets to complete in 10 months duration. At 5th months, it reported that project was completed 40% and it has been spent Rs. 3 Lakhs only. Now calculate Cost Variance and Schedule Variance. Is the project behind the schedule or ahead schedule?

“What is EVM?” Earned value management integrates scope, schedule and cost to measure project performance, from three numbers: planned value PV (BCWS), earned value EV (BCWP) and actual cost AC (ACWP). The full answer is in 9.4.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 5,00,000 (5 lakhs) PV = Rs. 2,50,000 (5 of 10 months have passed: 5,00,000 x 5/10) EV = Rs. 2,00,000 (40% is complete: 5,00,000 x 0.40) AC = Rs. 3,00,000 (3 lakhs spent)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 2,00,000 - 3,00,000 = -Rs. 1,00,000 SV = EV - PV = 2,00,000 - 2,50,000 = -Rs. 50,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 2,00,000 / 3,00,000 = 0.6667 SPI = EV / PV = 2,00,000 / 2,50,000 = 0.8000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 5,00,000 / 0.6667 = Rs. 7,50,000
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 10 / 0.8000 = 12.50 months
CV = -Rs. 1,00,000  SV = -Rs. 50,000  CPI = 0.6667  SPI = 0.8000  EAC = Rs. 7,50,000
Over budget: CPI 0.67 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.67 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.80 < 1, so 80% of the planned work is done.
The 20 widgets are not needed: the percentage complete already gives EV.
Asked in past papers
  • What is EVM? The project has been planned that total estimated cost of project is Rs 5 Lakhs and there are 20 widgets to complete in 10 months duration. At 5th months, it reported that project was completed 40% and it has been spent Rs. 3 Lakhs only. Now calculate Cost Variance and Schedule Variance. Is the project behind the schedule or ahead schedule? (2074 Ashwin Q5)

2073 Shrawan Q6: Three of twelve months, 40% done, $200,000 spent: cost and schedule variance asked 1×

Three of twelve months, 40% done, $200,000 spent: cost and schedule variance 2073 Shrawan Q6 · 2+6 marks

The question. What is earned value analysis? A project is scheduled for the time of 12 months. The estimated cost of project is $400000. After 3 months, evaluation is done and it is identified that 40% of work is accomplished but $200000 cost has been incurred. Now calculate cost and schedule variance for the project.

“What is EVM?” Earned value management integrates scope, schedule and cost to measure project performance, from three numbers: planned value PV (BCWS), earned value EV (BCWP) and actual cost AC (ACWP). The full answer is in 9.4.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = $ 400,000 (the estimated cost) PV = $ 100,000 (3 of 12 months have passed: 400,000 x 3/12) EV = $ 160,000 (40% is accomplished: 400,000 x 0.40) AC = $ 200,000 (the cost incurred)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 160,000 - 200,000 = -$ 40,000 SV = EV - PV = 160,000 - 100,000 = $ 60,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 160,000 / 200,000 = 0.8000 SPI = EV / PV = 160,000 / 100,000 = 1.6000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 400,000 / 0.8000 = $ 500,000
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 12 / 1.6000 = 7.50 months
CV = -$ 40,000  SV = $ 60,000  CPI = 0.8000  SPI = 1.6000  EAC = $ 500,000
Over budget: CPI 0.80 < 1, so each dollar spent earns 0.80 of planned value.
Ahead of schedule: SPI 1.60 > 1, so 160% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • What is earned value analysis? A project is scheduled for the time of 12 months. The estimated cost of project is $400000. After 3 months, evaluation is done and it is identified that 40% of work is accomplished but $200000 cost has been incurred. Now calculate cost and schedule variance for the project. (2073 Shrawan Q6)

2072 Chaitra Q6: Rs 50,000 a month for 8 months: on time and on budget after 2 months? asked 1×

Rs 50,000 a month for 8 months: on time and on budget after 2 months? 2072 Chaitra Q6 · 8 marks

The question. Suppose you are managing a software development project. The project is expected to be completed in 8 months at a cost of Rs.50,000/- per month. After 2 months, you realize that the project is 30 percent completed at a cost of Rs 200,000/-. Determine whether the project is on-time and on-budget after 2 months. Calculate Cost and Schedule Performance Index.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 4,00,000 (8 months x 50,000 a month) PV = Rs. 1,00,000 (2 of 8 months have passed: 50,000 x 2) EV = Rs. 1,20,000 (30% is complete: 4,00,000 x 0.30) AC = Rs. 2,00,000 (the cost so far)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 1,20,000 - 2,00,000 = -Rs. 80,000 SV = EV - PV = 1,20,000 - 1,00,000 = Rs. 20,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 1,20,000 / 2,00,000 = 0.6000 SPI = EV / PV = 1,20,000 / 1,00,000 = 1.2000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 4,00,000 / 0.6000 = Rs. 6,66,666.67
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 8 / 1.2000 = 6.67 months
CPI = 0.6000  SPI = 1.2000  CV = -Rs. 80,000  SV = Rs. 20,000  EAC = Rs. 6,66,666.67
Over budget: CPI 0.60 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.60 of planned value.
Ahead of schedule: SPI 1.20 > 1, so 120% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • Suppose you are managing a software development project. The project is expected to be completed in 8 months at a cost of Rs.50,000/- per month. After 2 months, you realize that the project is 30 percent completed at a cost of Rs 200,000/-. Determine whether the project is on-time and on-budget after 2 months. Calculate Cost and Schedule Performance Index. (2072 Chaitra Q6)

2071 Chaitra Q7: Earned value twice the actual cost: CPI and CV% asked 1×

Earned value twice the actual cost: CPI and CV% 2071 Chaitra Q7 · 6 marks

The question. If earned value is twice its actual cost for a project, calculate its cost performance index and cost variance percentage. Is the project over/under budget?

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    AC = 1 (let the actual cost be 1 unit) EV = 2 (earned value is twice the actual cost)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 2 - 1 = 1 CV% = CV / EV x 100 = 1 / 2 x 100 = 50.00 %
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 2 / 1 = 2.0000
CPI = 2.0000  CV = 1  CV% = 50.00%
Under budget: CPI = 2 > 1: the project earns two units of planned value for every unit it spends, and half of the earned value is a saving (CV% = 50%).
Asked in past papers
  • If earned value is twice its actual cost for a project, calculate its cost performance index and cost variance percentage. Is the project over/under budget? (2071 Chaitra Q7)

2070 Chaitra Q8: SPI 0.75 with EV 60: planned value, ahead or behind asked 1×

SPI 0.75 with EV 60: planned value, ahead or behind 2070 Chaitra Q8 · 6 marks

The question. If schedule performance index (SPI) is 0.75 in a mega project undergoing near Devikapur district with earned value of being 60. Now calculate the planned value and also state whether the project is ahead schedule or behind schedule.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    EV = 60 (given) PV = 80 (SPI = EV / PV, so PV = EV / SPI = 60 / 0.75)
  2. Variances.
    SV = EV - PV = 60 - 80 = -20
  3. Indices.
    SPI = EV / PV = 60 / 80 = 0.7500
SPI = 0.7500  SV = -20
Behind schedule: SPI 0.75 < 1, so 75% of the planned work is done.
PV = 80. SPI = 0.75 is below 1 (SV = -20), so the project is behind schedule: it has earned three quarters of the value it planned by now.
Asked in past papers
  • If schedule performance index (SPI) is 0.75 in a mega project undergoing near Devikapur district with earned value of being 60. Now calculate the planned value and also state whether the project is ahead schedule or behind schedule. (2070 Chaitra Q8)

2070 Ashad Q10: CV, SV, CPI and SPI from the four given values asked 1×

CV, SV, CPI and SPI from the four given values 2070 Ashad Q10 · 6 marks

The question. Given the following information for one-year project, use Earned Value Management (EVM) method to calculate, cost variance, schedule variance, cost performance index (CPI) and Schedule performance index (SPI) for the project. Planned Value = NPR 23,000; Earned Value = NPR 20,000; Actual Cost = NPR 25,000; Budget at Completion = NPR 1,20,000

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    PV = NPR 23,000 (given) EV = NPR 20,000 (given) AC = NPR 25,000 (given) BAC = NPR 1,20,000 (given)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 20,000 - 25,000 = -NPR 5,000 SV = EV - PV = 20,000 - 23,000 = -NPR 3,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 20,000 / 25,000 = 0.8000 SPI = EV / PV = 20,000 / 23,000 = 0.8696
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 1,20,000 / 0.8000 = NPR 1,50,000 ETC = EAC - AC = 1,50,000 - 25,000 = NPR 1,25,000 VAC = BAC - EAC = 1,20,000 - 1,50,000 = -NPR 30,000
CV = -NPR 5,000  SV = -NPR 3,000  CPI = 0.8000  SPI = 0.8696  EAC = NPR 1,50,000  ETC = NPR 1,25,000  VAC = -NPR 30,000
Over budget: CPI 0.80 < 1, so each rupee spent earns 0.80 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.87 < 1, so 87% of the planned work is done.
Asked in past papers
  • Given the following information for one-year project, use Earned Value Management (EVM) method to calculate, cost variance, schedule variance, cost performance index (CPI) and Schedule performance index (SPI) for the project. Planned Value = NPR 23,000; Earned Value = NPR 20,000; Actual Cost = NPR 25,000; Budget at Completion = NPR 1,20,000 (2070 Ashad Q10)

2070 Ashad (CE 701 Project Engineering) Q4b: CE 701 paper: 15 houses in three months, 4 done in one: project status asked 1×

CE 701 paper: 15 houses in three months, 4 done in one: project status 2070 Ashad (CE 701 Project Engineering) Q4b · 3+4 marks

The question. Why cost control is important in project? 15 houses were to be completed in three months with per unit cost of Rs 25,00,000/-. In one month 4 houses were completed with total expenditure of Rs 96,00,000/- use earn value analysis to find the status of the project.

  1. Turn the words into the numbers.
    BAC = Rs. 3,75,00,000 (15 houses x 25,00,000) PV = Rs. 1,25,00,000 (one month of three: 3,75,00,000 x 1/3 (5 houses planned)) EV = Rs. 1,00,00,000 (4 houses completed x 25,00,000) AC = Rs. 96,00,000 (total expenditure so far)
  2. Variances.
    CV = EV - AC = 1,00,00,000 - 96,00,000 = Rs. 4,00,000 SV = EV - PV = 1,00,00,000 - 1,25,00,000 = -Rs. 25,00,000
  3. Indices.
    CPI = EV / AC = 1,00,00,000 / 96,00,000 = 1.0417 SPI = EV / PV = 1,00,00,000 / 1,25,00,000 = 0.8000
  4. Forecasts.
    EAC = BAC / CPI = 3,75,00,000 / 1.0417 = Rs. 3,60,00,000 VAC = BAC - EAC = 3,75,00,000 - 3,60,00,000 = Rs. 15,00,000
  5. Time forecast (the notes’ revised schedule, p. 119).
    Revised duration = original duration / SPI = 3 / 0.8000 = 3.75 months
CV = Rs. 4,00,000  SV = -Rs. 25,00,000  CPI = 1.0417  SPI = 0.8000  EAC = Rs. 3,60,00,000  VAC = Rs. 15,00,000
Under budget: CPI 1.04 > 1, so each rupee spent earns 1.04 of planned value.
Behind schedule: SPI 0.80 < 1, so 80% of the planned work is done.

The first part of this question, why cost control is important, is answered in 9.3.

Asked in past papers
  • Why cost control is important in project? 15 houses were to be completed in three months with per unit cost of Rs 25,00,000/-. In one month 4 houses were completed with total expenditure of Rs 96,00,000/- use earn value analysis to find the status of the project. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q4b)

2074 Chaitra Q3: Neplai Luga hemp cargo pants: payback period, NPV, accept or reject asked 1×

Neplai Luga hemp cargo pants: payback period, NPV, accept or reject 2074 Chaitra Q3 · 10 marks

The question. The clothing manufacturer, Neplai Luga, is considering introduction a line of cargo pants made entirely from hemp. The project costs NRs. 4.6 million and will generate cash flows of NRs. 1 million for 5 years. What is the payback period? If the interest rate is 0.3% per month, what is the project's NPV? Should the project be accepted? Why or why not?

  1. Payback period: the time until the cumulative inflow equals the cost (notes p. 65).
    Year 1: cumulative inflow = NRs. 10,00,000 Year 2: cumulative inflow = NRs. 20,00,000 Year 3: cumulative inflow = NRs. 30,00,000 Year 4: cumulative inflow = NRs. 40,00,000 Year 5: cumulative inflow = NRs. 50,00,000 Payback = 4 + (46,00,000 - 40,00,000) / 10,00,000 = 4.60 years
  2. Put the rate on the same basis as the cash flows. The rate is monthly, the cash flows are yearly.
    r = (1 + 0.003)^12 - 1 = 0.036600 = 3.6600 % a year
  3. Discount each year’s inflow and add them up.
    YearCash inflowDiscount factor 1/(1+r)tPresent value
    110,00,0000.9646929,64,692
    210,00,0000.9306319,30,631
    310,00,0000.8977738,97,773
    410,00,0000.8660748,66,074
    510,00,0000.8354958,35,495
    Total50,00,00044,94,666
  4. NPV = present value of inflows - cost (notes p. 65).
    NPV = 44,94,666 - 46,00,000 = -NRs. 1,05,334
Payback period = 4.6 years.
NPV = -NRs. 1,05,334: negative.
Reject the project (notes’ rule: NPV > 0 accept, NPV < 0 reject). The undiscounted inflows (NRs. 50,00,000) exceed the cost, but once money is valued over time their present value is only NRs. 44,94,666, less than the NRs. 46,00,000 spent today.
The rate conversion is the test. Compounding 0.3% a month gives 3.66% a year. Taking the simpler nominal rate 0.3 x 12 = 3.6% gives NPV = -NRs. 97,706: still negative, same decision. Using 0.3% as if it were a yearly rate gives a positive NPV and the wrong decision.
Asked in past papers
  • The clothing manufacturer, Neplai Luga, is considering introduction a line of cargo pants made entirely from hemp. The project costs NRs. 4.6 million and will generate cash flows of NRs. 1 million for 5 years. What is the payback period? If the interest rate is 0.3% per month, what is the project's NPV? Should the project be accepted? Why or why not? (2074 Chaitra Q3)

9.7Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 9.

Break-even point asked 1×

“Write short notes on: … iii) Break-even Point”

2074 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: page 65 says only that at break-even net income is zero and profit equals loss.

  • Break-even point (BEP): the level of output or sales at which total revenue equals total cost, so there is neither profit nor loss (notes p. 65: net income = 0).
  • Costs: fixed costs (F) stay the same whatever the output; variable costs (v per unit) rise with output; price p per unit.
BEP (units) = F / (p - v) (p - v) = contribution per unit BEP (sales) = F / (1 - v/p) (1 - v/p) = contribution margin ratio Example: F = Rs 2,00,000, p = Rs 500, v = Rs 300 a unit BEP = 2,00,000 / (500 - 300) = 1,000 units = Rs 5,00,000 of sales
  • On a graph: the total revenue line and the total cost line (starting at F) cross at the BEP; to the left is the loss area, to the right the profit area.
  • Uses: judging whether a project or product can ever pay, setting a minimum sales target, pricing, and the margin of safety (actual sales minus break-even sales).
  • In time terms, the break-even point of a project is where cumulative inflows equal the investment: the payback period.
  • Limits: it assumes a constant price and variable cost per unit, and fixed costs that do not change with output.

The CE 701 paper’s finance and appraisal questions asked 1×

“Differentiate between Bilateral, Multilateral and Joint Venture project with example? Discuss the external environment in which a project is operated.” (Q1)

“Define concept of project appraisal. Explain about contents of technical and financial proposal. Also explain input analysis of project formulation.” (Q2)

“Define the term project financing. Explain features of capital structure planning. A project has total capital of Rs 5,00,000 which consists of 2000 shares @ Rs 100, 1,50,000 preference share 18% interest and remaining loan @ 14% interest. Earning before interest and tax in a year is Rs 1,00,000. Calculate EPS and book value of share if tax rate is 25%.” (Q6)

2070 Ashad, CE 701 Project Engineering paper (not CT 701). The external environment (Q1) is answered in chapter 2 and the technical and financial proposal (Q2) in chapter 1.

Not in the notes: these belong to the CE 701 syllabus, which the bank includes for completeness. The rest of that paper (external environment, proposals, CPM, resource terms, monitoring, earned value, risk) is answered in the CT 701 chapters.

Bilateral, multilateral and joint venture projects

BilateralMultilateralJoint venture
WhatFunded or carried out under an agreement between two governmentsFunded by an agency owned by many countriesTwo or more parties pool capital and share ownership, risk and profit
PartiesA donor country and the host countryWorld Bank, Asian Development Bank, UN agenciesCompanies or governments, often one local and one foreign
TermsSet by the two governments; may be tied to the donor’s goods or expertsThe agency’s procurement and safeguard rulesA joint venture agreement or a jointly owned company
ExampleA road built with one friendly country’s grantA water supply project financed by the Asian Development BankA hydropower company owned by a Nepali and a foreign firm
  • Project appraisal: the independent assessment of a project proposal before approval and investment: its technical, financial, economic, commercial, managerial, social and environmental soundness. It decides whether the project should be accepted, modified or rejected.
  • Input analysis (project formulation): studying every input the project needs over its life: materials, labour, machinery and equipment, utilities (power, water), land and finance. For each: the quantity, quality, sources, availability and cost, so that the estimates and the feasibility rest on inputs that can actually be obtained.
  • Project financing: arranging the long-term funds for a project, typically through a separate project company whose own cash flows and assets repay the lenders (limited or no recourse to the sponsors). Sources: equity (shares), preference shares, loans, bonds, grants.
  • Features of capital structure planning (the mix of equity, preference capital and debt): profitability (maximise earnings per share), solvency (debt only up to what cash flows can service), flexibility (able to raise more later), control (new equity dilutes owners’ control), low cost of capital, conservatism, legal and lender requirements, and timing.

The EPS and book value numerical

Equity capital = 2,000 shares x Rs 100 = Rs 2,00,000 Preference capital = Rs 1,50,000 (18%) Loan = 5,00,000 - 2,00,000 - 1,50,000 = Rs 1,50,000 (14%) EBIT = Rs 1,00,000 less interest on loan 14% x 1,50,000 = - 21,000 EBT = Rs 79,000 less tax 25% x 79,000 = - 19,750 EAT (profit after tax) = Rs 59,250 less preference dividend 18% x 1,50,000 = - 27,000 Earnings for equity shareholders = Rs 32,250 EPS = 32,250 / 2,000 shares = Rs 16.125, about Rs 16.13 a share Book value per share = equity shareholders' funds / number of shares = 2,00,000 / 2,000 = Rs 100 (if the year's equity earnings are kept in the business: (2,00,000 + 32,250) / 2,000 = Rs 116.13)

CV = EV - AC, SV = EV - PV, CPI = EV / AC, SPI = EV / PV.

Under budget but behind schedule: the team spends efficiently but not fast enough, usually a sign of too few people rather than waste.

Back to the formulas.

Forward: at a merge, ES = the largest preceding EF. Backward: at a burst, LF = the smallest succeeding LS.

FF = min(ES of successors) - EF.

Back to the passes and the floats.

Chapter 10 · 3 hours · appeared in 20 of 22 sittings

Project quality management

What quality means and the theories behind it, the three quality processes (planning, assurance, control) with their tools, and how quality is improved in an ICT project. One question dominates: how quality assurance and quality control are implemented to deliver a successful project.

What this chapter is about
  • Quality and its theories: what quality is, the quality gurus, lean production, Kaizen and Just in Time, quality against productivity, and quality standards.
  • Quality planning: quality requirements, the cost of quality and the quality management plan.
  • Quality assurance and the quality audit: checking that the right process is followed.
  • Quality control: checking each deliverable, with the seven basic tools (control chart, Pareto chart, fishbone and the rest) and the testing of IT systems.
  • TQM, Six Sigma and improvement: quality as everybody’s job, and the steps that raise quality in an ICT project.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Quality sits inside the triple constraint of scope, time and cost (chapter 1): squeezing any of the three puts quality at risk.
  • Quality requirements are part of scope (chapter 7); quality control is the monitoring and control cycle (chapter 7) applied to deliverables.
  • The cost of quality is a cost (chapter 9); quality is one perspective of the balanced scorecard (chapter 15); maturity models return in chapter 14.
What you will learn
  1. Quality and the gurus, lean, Kaizen and JIT, quality against productivity, standards
  2. Quality planning, quality requirements, the cost of quality
  3. Quality assurance and the quality audit
  4. Quality control, how QA and QC are implemented, the seven tools, control charts, Pareto charts, fishbone diagrams, testing
  5. TQM, Six Sigma and improving quality in ICT projects
  6. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • “How are quality assurance and quality control implemented to deliver a successful project?”, with its variants on the three processes: nine sittings.
  • “How to improve quality in an ICT project?”: six sittings, usually as the second half of the same question.
  • The Pareto chart: seven sittings, mostly as a short note. TQM: four.
  • A comparison of two tools (box plot, bar chart, control chart, Pareto, fishbone, root cause against SWOT): seven different pairs, each set once, all answered at the end of this chapter.

10.1Quality and quality theories

What quality is, project quality management, and the quality gurus asked 2×

Quality How good something is compared with other similar things: its degree of excellence (notes p. 123).
Performance or Result Quality = --------------------------- (notes p. 123) Expectations or Requirements
  • Quality is relative: it is measured against what was required, so a cheap product that does exactly what was promised is high quality.
  • Totality of features: the features and characteristics of a product or service that bear on its ability to satisfy stated or implied needs (slide 229).
  • Fitness for use: the product can be used as it was intended (slide 229).
  • Conformance to requirements: the product meets its written specification (slide 229).

What project quality means (slide 229)

  • Give customers what they want.
  • Meet the standards and specifications agreed with the customer.
  • A predictable degree of reliability and uniformity.
  • A suitable price for the product or service.

Common misconceptions (notes p. 123)

  • “Hard to define, but you know it when you see it.” It is defined: by the requirements.
  • “Quality is expensive.” Poor quality is more expensive: see the cost of quality.
  • “Quality is craftsmanship”, “luxury”, “in short supply”. These confuse quality with grade (beyond your notes): a basic, low grade product that meets its requirements is still high quality.

The three C’s of quality (notes p. 123)

  • Commitment: from the top down; quality has to be wanted.
  • Competence: the skill to actually deliver it.
  • Communication: everyone knows what the standard is.
Project quality management All the activities of the overall management function that determine the quality policy, objectives and responsibilities, and implement them by quality planning, quality control, quality assurance and quality improvement within the quality system (notes p. 123). Its purpose: to ensure the project satisfies the needs for which it was undertaken (notes p. 127, slide 228).
  • The tenet of modern quality management: quality is most likely achieved by planning it into the project, not inspecting it in at the end (slide 228).

The quality gurus (slide 230)

GuruKnown for
W. Edwards DemingTotal quality management; the Plan-Do-Check-Act cycle; the rule of 85: 85% of the cost of quality is the responsibility of management
Joseph M. JuranThe quality trilogy: quality planning, quality control, quality improvement
Philip CrosbyQuality as conformance to requirements; prevention; zero defects; the cost of non-conformance
Needs or wants feed human resource, specifications and finance, which drive design, materials and production, which together produce quality, checked by conformity and reliability
Where quality comes from: needs become specifications, which drive design, materials and production, backed by people and money. Conformity and reliability are how you check you got there. Course notes, p. 126
In the exam
  • “Define project quality” (2081 Baishakh) and “What do you understand by quality in the context of project management?” (2069 Chaitra): the definition and the ratio, the three meanings (totality of features, fitness for use, conformance), what project quality means, then project quality management in one line.
Asked in past papers
  • Define project quality. As a project manager, how do you improve the quality of IT projects? (2081 Baishakh Q9)
  • What do you understand by Quality in the context of project management? Discuss quality control process and its major outputs. (2069 Chaitra Q10)

Lean production, Kaizen and Just in Time

  • Three linked theories of quality from manufacturing. Lean is the umbrella: an integrated view of TQM, Kaizen and JIT (slide 234).
Lean production An approach to management that focuses on cutting out waste while ensuring quality, because waste brings cost. It applies from design, through production, to distribution (notes p. 123).

Principles of lean production (notes p. 124)

  1. Value: define what the customer values, then remove the work that adds nothing to it.
  2. Process improvement: removing unnecessary work shortens production lead time.
  3. Map the value stream: record the flow of information and materials to find the waste in it.
  4. Create flow: remove functional barriers, cut lead time.
  5. Pursue perfection: continual process improvement, or Kaizen.
  • In short (slide 234): economical, efficient, not wasteful, effective and defect free; less head count, space, inventory, cost and defects.
Kaizen Japanese for improvement, or change for the better; in business, continual improvement of every activity by everyone, from employees to the CEO, in small steps and iterations (notes p. 124, slide 233).
  • Its principles (notes p. 124): know your customer; let it flow (zero waste); follow leadership and know what happens at every level; motivate people; be transparent, tracking performance with real data.
  • Its cycle (slide 233): standardise an operation; measure it; gauge the measures against requirements; innovate; standardise the improved operation; repeat for ever.
Just in Time (JIT) Production that eliminates all waste: every task that adds no value. Material arrives only when it is needed, aiming at zero inventory cost (notes p. 125, slide 234).
  • The seven wastes (notes p. 125): overproduction, waiting time, transportation, processing, inventory, motion, product defects.
  • Steps for JIT (notes p. 125): build trust with suppliers; strong communication; work in small lots; efficient workflows; backward scheduling.
  • In an IT project (beyond your notes): lean shows as small releases, work in progress limits (the Kanban board of chapter 4) and removing handoffs and waiting.

Quality versus productivity asked 1×

  • Productivity is the amount of product against the cost of making it; quality is whether the product is fit for its purpose (notes p. 126).
  • The notes’ position: making a product faster raises the risk of poor quality; higher quality goods take more time, labour and better material, so a drive for greater productivity almost always means a cut in quality (notes p. 126).
  • The slides’ version (slide 237): in theory an IT system can be cheaper, faster and better; in practice, a manager who chooses cheaper and faster will not also get better.
Quality triangle
A triangle with time, cost and scope on its sides and quality at the centre, arrows pointing out to each corner
Productivity triangle
An inverted triangle with speed across the top and cost and quality down the two sides, meeting at one point
The two triangles the notes set side by side: quality sits inside time, cost and scope; productivity trades speed against cost and quality. Course notes, p. 125
Is there always a trade-off? The full answer In the short run, often yes; over the life of the system, no. Rushing raises output now and lowers quality, but the defects come back as rework, support calls and lost users, and rework is what destroys software productivity. Preventing a defect is cheaper than finding it, and finding it is cheaper than fixing it after delivery (the cost of quality), so over the whole life cycle higher quality raises productivity. This is exactly what lean and TQM claim. (The argument beyond the notes’ position is ours.)
  • An IT example: a team skips code reviews and regression tests to release a college MIS a week early. Output rises that week; then wrong marksheets and crashes appear, and the next month goes on fixing them while users stop trusting the system. The week “saved” cost a month. A team that writes automated tests is slower at first but changes the code faster and more safely for the rest of the project.
In the exam
  • “Is there always a tradeoff between quality and productivity? Explain with an IT related example.” (2071 Chaitra): define both, give the notes’ position with the triangles, then the short run against long run answer and the example.
Asked in past papers
  • Is there always a tradeoff between quality and productivity? Explain with an IT related example. (2071 Chaitra Q8a)

Quality standards asked 1×

Quality management standards The requirements, specifications, guidelines and characteristics that products, services and processes should consistently meet, so that their quality matches expectations, they are fit for purpose and they meet their users’ needs. Standards are an essential element of a quality management system (notes p. 126).
Standard (notes p. 127)Covers
ISO 9001:2015The requirements for a quality management system, which any business can use to build its own quality agenda. The most widely accepted quality standard in the world
The rest of the ISO 9000 family, including ISO 9000 and ISO 9004Fundamentals and vocabulary (9000); guidance for sustained success (9004)
ISO 14000 familyEnvironmental management systems
ISO 13485Medical devices
ISO 19011Auditing management systems
ISO/TS 16949Automotive related products
  • How they relate: ISO 9001 is the generic quality system; the others either support it (9000, 9004, 19011) or apply the same idea to a sector (13485, 16949) or to another concern (14000, the environment).
  • Standards written for software (ISO/IEC 25010, 12207, 90003, CMMI and others) are not in your notes: they are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Are there quality standards for software industry and services? Relate with other types of standards too.” (2076 Ashwin, with “What is TQM?”): this table for the other standards, the software standards, and TQM.
Asked in past papers
  • What is TQM? Are there quality standards for software industry and services? Relate with other types of standards too. (2076 Ashwin Q6)

10.2Quality planning, requirements and the cost of quality

Quality planning and the quality management plan

Quality planning Identifying which quality standards are relevant to the project and determining how to satisfy them. The expected level of quality can only be achieved through quality planning during project initiation (notes p. 127, slide 238).

Principles of quality planning (notes p. 127)

  1. Quality is determined by the requirements of customers.
  2. It is better to avoid mistakes than to repair defects.
  3. The cost of quality must be approved by management.
  • Inputs (slide 238): environmental factors, organisational process assets, the scope statement, the project management plan.
  • Tools and techniques (slide 238): cost-benefit analysis (the benefit of meeting quality, less rework and more satisfied users, against the cost of the quality work); benchmarking (comparing with the practices of other projects); design of experiments (statistically finding which factors change the result); cost of quality; other planning tools.
  • Outputs (slide 238): the quality management plan, quality metrics, quality checklists, a process improvement plan, the quality baseline, an updated project management plan.
Quality management plan Describes how the project management team will implement (enforce) its quality policy; its purpose is to make the deliverables meet acceptable standards (notes p. 129, slide 241).
  • It should address (notes p. 129): responsibility of management; document management; requirement scope; design control; testing and quality assurance; quality audits; training requirements.
  • Its four parts (slide 241): quality standards, quality assurance, quality control, quality inspection.

Project quality requirements asked 2×

  • Part of scope: quality requirements belong in the project scope definition, and are optimised against the cost and schedule estimates (notes p. 128).
  • They define three things (notes p. 128): the customer’s expectations for quality; the internal attributes that show whether each quality factor is met; and the measures that make the level of quality visible.
  • They are written as quality factors, quality criteria and quality metrics (notes p. 128).
  • Attributes of quality requirements (notes p. 128, slide 239): completeness criteria, correctness criteria, usefulness criteria.

Quality requirements in IT projects (notes p. 128), with a college MIS as the example

  1. Functionality: the degree to which the system performs its intended functions: it calculates grades correctly.
  2. Features: special characteristics that appeal to users: SMS alerts for results.
  3. System outputs: what the screens and reports look like: the marksheet layout.
  4. Performance: how well it performs: a result page in under two seconds with 2,000 students online.
  5. Reliability: performing as expected under normal conditions: no crash on result day.
  6. Maintainability: how easily it is maintained: a new course added without rewriting code.

How quality requirements help project quality management

  • They turn “good quality” into targets that can be measured (the metrics), so quality stops being an opinion.
  • They are the standard that quality assurance audits the process against, and the acceptance criteria that quality control tests each deliverable against.
  • Being part of scope, they are costed and scheduled like any other work, instead of being squeezed out at the end.
  • They make quality visible to the customer and the team (notes p. 128).
In the exam
  • “What are project quality requirement? How it helps in project quality management.” (2078 Bhadra): the notes’ points, the six IT requirements with an example each, then how they help. Its third part, the role of the balanced scorecard, is in chapter 15.
Asked in past papers
  • What are project quality requirement? How it helps in project quality management. Explain role of balanced scorecard in it. (2078 Bhadra Q2b)
  • Compare the followings: i) Decision Tree vs. Tornado Analysis for risk management ii) Quotation based purchase vs. Tender based purchase for procurement process iii) Consistency vs. completeness in requirements engineering (2072 Chaitra Q9)

The cost of quality

Cost of quality (COQ) The estimate for the prevention, detection and elimination of defects to improve product quality (notes p. 128): the total cost of all the effort to reach an acceptable level of quality (slide 240).
  • Cost of conformance: providing products that meet requirements and are fit for use (notes p. 128).
  • Cost of non-conformance: taking responsibility for failures, or not meeting quality expectations (notes p. 128).

The four categories (notes p. 129, slide 240), in the order a defect meets them

  1. Prevention cost: planning and executing the project so that it is error free, or within an acceptable error range.
  2. Appraisal cost (the notes call it inspection cost): evaluating processes and their outputs to ensure the project is error free.
  3. Internal failure cost: correcting an identified defect before the customer receives the product.
  4. External failure cost: all the errors not detected and corrected before delivery to the customer.
  • The slides add a fifth: measurement and test equipment cost (slide 240).
  • The pattern: the first two are the cost of conformance, the last two the cost of non-conformance. A defect costs more the later it is found, which is why planning prefers avoiding mistakes to repairing them (notes p. 127).
  • Who carries it: Deming’s rule of 85, 85% of the cost of quality is management’s responsibility (slide 230), and management must approve the cost of quality (notes p. 127).
THE COST OF QUALITY, IN THE ORDER A DEFECT MEETS IT Money spent on the left (conformance) is what saves the much larger bill on the right (non-conformance). Prevention cost planning and executing the work so it is error free e.g. training, standards BEFORE THE WORK Appraisal cost also inspection cost: evaluating processes and their outputs e.g. reviews, testing, audits WHILE CHECKING Internal failure cost fixing a defect found before the customer gets the product e.g. rework, retesting BEFORE DELIVERY External failure cost errors not caught before delivery: the customer finds them e.g. support, fixes, lost trust AFTER DELIVERY COST OF CONFORMANCE: money spent to prevent failure COST OF NON-CONFORMANCE: money spent because it failed Rule of thumb for one defect (beyond the notes): the later it is found, the more it costs. 1 prevented x10 10 found in testing x10 100 found by the customer

10.3Quality assurance and the quality audit

Quality assurance

Quality assurance (QA) The process used to ensure the quality of products or services, with a constant effort to improve the organisation’s quality practices, so that continuous improvement is expected (notes p. 129).
  • In PMBOK terms (slide 242): performing systematic quality activities and using quality audits to decide which processes should be used to meet the requirements, and to assure they are performed efficiently and effectively; it brings continuous process improvement by removing unnecessary actions.
  • How it is performed: through benchmarking and quality audits (notes p. 129).

A dedicated QA team is responsible for (notes p. 129)

  1. Defining the process and procedures to achieve and improve quality.
  2. Formal industrial training for the team.
  3. Traceability of test cases to requirements: every requirement is tested, and every test traces to a requirement.
  • QA in an IT project (examples): a coding standard, peer code review before every merge, a definition of done, a requirements traceability matrix, an automated build that runs the tests. All of them are about how the work is done, not about one deliverable.

The quality audit asked 1×

Quality audit A structured review of process management and product development activities. Its goal is to identify lessons learned that can improve the performance of the project within the performing organisation (notes p. 130, slide 243).
  • Why: audits help organisations grow and prosper, and give a mechanism to evaluate the efficiency of the business (notes p. 130).
  • When and by whom: scheduled or random; in-house or independent (slide 243).
  • Types (notes p. 130, slide 243): post project review; internal project process review; external regulator or customer audit; internal corporate quality group audit.

The approach to a quality audit (notes p. 130)

  1. Planning: prepare the audit plan that will guide its execution: scope, criteria, team, schedule.
  2. Preparation: the auditors study the organisation’s quality management system through its documentation.
  3. Execution: collect the information that shows whether the quality standards are met.
  4. Conclusion and follow up: the audit team reviews the problem areas and recommends corrections. Here the “real” work begins: an audit that is not followed up changes nothing.

What an audit checks (slide 243)

  • The planned quality is met; products are safe and fit for use.
  • All laws and regulations are followed; the design is correct and among the best.
  • Data systems are accurate and adequate.
  • Preventive measures are planned, and corrective action is taken when required.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Quality Audit Plan” (2072 Kartik): the definition and goal, the types, the four-step approach (the plan is its first step), and what the audit checks.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: a) COCOMO (constructive cost model) for IT project b) Contract closure procedure c) Balanced scorecard framework d) Pareto analysis e) Quality Audit Plan (2072 Kartik Q10)

10.4Quality control, its tools, and testing

Quality control, and its outputs asked 1×

Quality control (QC) Monitoring specific project results to determine whether they comply with the relevant quality standards, and identifying ways to eliminate the causes of unsatisfactory performance (notes p. 130, slide 253).

The main outputs of quality control (notes p. 130)

  1. Acceptance decisions: each work item is accepted or rejected; rejected items may need rework.
  2. Rework: action to bring a defective item into conformance; it is expensive, so the aim is to need less of it.
  3. Process adjustments: immediate corrective or preventive changes to the process, found from the QC measurements.
  • Inputs (slide 253): the quality management plan, quality metrics, quality checklists, organisational process assets, work performance information, approved change requests, the deliverables.
  • Tools and techniques (slide 253): cause and effect diagram, control charts, flowcharting, histogram, Pareto chart, run chart, scatter diagram, statistical sampling, inspection, defect repair review.
  • Outputs (slide 253): QC measurements, validated defect repair, updates to the quality baseline, recommended corrective and preventive actions, requested changes, recommended defect repair, validated deliverables, updates to the plan and process assets.
  • Inspection examines a work product (a review, a test, a walkthrough); statistical sampling checks a random sample instead of every item, when checking all of them costs too much.
In the exam
  • “Discuss quality control process and its major outputs.” (2069 Chaitra): the definition, the inputs, tools and outputs in brief, then the three main outputs explained.
Asked in past papers
  • What do you understand by Quality in the context of project management? Discuss quality control process and its major outputs. (2069 Chaitra Q10)

How quality assurance and quality control are implemented asked 9×

  • The chapter’s central question: the three processes of project quality management are quality planning, quality assurance and quality control (notes p. 127, slide 228). The question is how they work together on a real project.
THE THREE QUALITY PROCESSES, AND THE LOOP THAT JOINS THEM Plan the standard, assure the process, control the product; what control finds flows back to improve the process. preventive: plans quality in 1 Quality planning PLANNING Which standards apply, and how will we meet them? Tools: cost-benefit analysis, benchmarking, design of experiments, cost of quality Out: quality management plan, metrics, checklists, baseline proactive: prevents defects 2 Quality assurance EXECUTING Are we following the right process? About the PROCESS Tools: quality audits, benchmarking, a dedicated QA team, training Out: process improvements, change requests reactive: detects defects 3 Quality control MONITORING AND CONTROLLING Is this deliverable right? About the PRODUCT Tools: inspection, statistical sampling, the seven basic quality tools, testing Out: acceptance decisions, rework, process adjustments feedback: defect data improves the process and updates the plan and baseline
Quality planningQuality assuranceQuality control
QuestionWhich standards apply, and how will we meet them?Are we following the right process?Is this deliverable correct?
FocusThe planThe processThe product
NaturePreventiveProactive: prevents defectsReactive: detects defects
TimingAt initiation and planningThroughout executionAs each deliverable is produced
Process groupPlanningExecutingMonitoring and controlling
WhoProject manager with the teamA dedicated QA teamTesters and inspectors
ToolsCost-benefit, benchmarking, design of experiments, cost of qualityQuality audits, benchmarkingInspection, sampling, the seven basic tools
OutputQuality management plan, metrics, checklistsProcess improvements, change requestsAcceptance decisions, rework, process adjustments
The line that earns the mark Quality assurance is about the process; quality control is about the product. QA asks “are we building it the right way?”, QC asks “did we build it right?”. QA prevents, QC detects.

Implementing them on an ICT project, a college MIS as the example

  1. Plan the quality before the work starts: choose the standards (an ISO 9001-style process, a coding standard), turn the requirements into metrics (results in under two seconds, no critical defect at release), write the quality management plan and the checklists.
  2. Assure the process while the work happens: train the team, review code before it is merged, trace every requirement to a test case, audit the process against the plan, and benchmark against past projects. When an audit finds a gap, the process is fixed.
  3. Control each deliverable as it is produced: inspect and test it (unit, integration, system and user acceptance tests), track defect counts on a control chart, rank defect causes on a Pareto chart, and trace recurring defects with a fishbone. Each item is accepted, reworked, or triggers a process adjustment.
  4. Close the loop: QC measurements go back to QA to improve the process, and to the plan and quality baseline; the lessons learned go to the next project. That loop, plan, do, check, act, is continuous improvement.

The approaches to each process (asked as “explain different approaches to these processes”)

  • Planning: cost-benefit analysis, benchmarking, design of experiments, cost of quality (slide 238).
  • Assurance: quality audits, benchmarking, a dedicated QA team, process improvement (notes p. 129, slide 242).
  • Control: inspection, statistical sampling and the seven basic tools (notes p. 131, slide 253).
  • Organisation-wide approaches that drive all three: TQM, Six Sigma, lean and Kaizen.
In the exam
  • “Quality is one of the most important factors to be controlled for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in order to deliver a successful project?” (2079 Bhadra, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin, 2072 Chaitra; 2082 Baishakh asks it “with appropriate examples”): the three processes, the QA against QC table, the process-product line, then the four implementation steps with the MIS example.
  • “What are the (3) processes of project quality management?” (2082 Bhadra, 2080 Baishakh): name the three with a definition each; the second half is improving quality in ICT projects.
  • “Describe quality planning, quality assurance and quality control and explain different approaches to these processes.” (2079 Baishakh, 2070 Chaitra): the three definitions, then the approaches list.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the processes of project quality management? How to improve quality management in ICT project? (2082 Bhadra Q7)
  • What is TQM? How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in projects? Briefly, explain with appropriate examples. (2082 Baishakh Q7)
  • What are the 3 processes of project quality management? and how to improve Quality Management in ICT project? (2080 Baishakh Q4b)
  • Quality is one of the most important factors to be controlled for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control is implemented in order to deliver a successful project. (2079 Bhadra Q7)
  • Describe about the quality planning, quality assurance and quality control and explain different approaches to these processes. (2079 Baishakh Q6)
  • Quality is one of the most important factors to be considered for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in order to deliver a successful project? (2075 Ashwin Q7a)
  • Quality is one of the most important factors to be controlled for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in order to deliver a successful project? (2074 Ashwin Q6b)
  • Quality is one of the most important factors to be controlled for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in order to deliver a successful project? Describe. (2072 Chaitra Q8)
  • What do you understand by Quality planning, Quality Assurance and Quality Control? Explain different approaches to these processes. (2070 Chaitra Q4a)

The seven basic tools of quality control asked 2×

The seven basic tools (notes p. 131)

ToolWhat it isWhat it tells you
FlowchartA picture of the separate steps of a process in order: activities, decision points, branching loops, parallel paths (notes p. 131)How the process really runs, and where it can go wrong
Run chartA line graph of data plotted over time (notes p. 131, slide 247)Trends and patterns in the process; with no control limits, it cannot say whether the process is stable
Scatter diagramOne variable on each axis; the pattern of points (notes p. 132, slide 249)Whether two variables are related, and how closely
Pareto diagramBars in descending order with a cumulative line (notes p. 133)Which few causes give most of the defects
Control chartData over time with a centre line and control limits (notes p. 134)Whether the process is in control
HistogramAdjacent bars showing the distribution of the data (notes p. 133)The shape and spread of one variable
Cause and effect diagram (fishbone, Ishikawa)The problem at the head, cause categories as bones (notes p. 134)The possible root causes of a problem
  • Run chart: reveals important information about a process at the start of a project, before there is enough data to set reliable control limits (notes p. 131).
  • Scatter diagram: most often used to prove or disprove a cause and effect theory; it shows a relationship but does not by itself prove that one variable causes the other (notes p. 132).
  • Check sheet: a generic data collection and analysis tool, adaptable to many purposes, also counted among the seven basic tools (notes p. 137).
Run chart
Run chart of customer complaints per month from January to September
Scatter diagram
Scatter diagram of cost against number of units, points rising together
Histogram
Histogram of weights, frequency bars peaking in the middle
Check sheet
Check sheet of telephone interruptions by reason and day, tallied with tick marks and totalled
Four of the tools as they look on paper. The Pareto chart, the control chart and the fishbone each have a card of their own. Course notes, pp. 132, 133, 137
Flowchart: plan, do, check, then a decision diamond asking whether the goal was achieved; if no, modify parameters and loop back to plan; if yes, act, and move to another problem
The notes’ flowchart example: boxes for steps, a diamond for the decision, and a loop back. It happens to draw the PDCA improvement cycle. Course notes, p. 131
  • The tool comparisons the exam sets (box plot against histogram or scatter plot, bar chart against control chart) are not in your notes: they are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Data analysis using box plot versus scatter plot” (2078 Bhadra) and “Boxplot vs. histogram analysis” (2075 Chaitra): define the histogram and scatter diagram from here, then the box plot and the comparison.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: a) Developing project management plan versus monitoring and controlling of project. b) Risk analysis using Decision tree technique versus Simulation technique. c) Data analysis using Box plot versus Scatter plot. d) Detail Project Report (DPR) document versus Request for Proposal (RFP) document. (2078 Bhadra Q6)
  • Compare the followings: a) BOQ document vs. RFP document b) Status reporting vs. progress reporting c) Functional vs. matrix organization d) Boxplot vs. histogram analysis (2075 Chaitra Q5)

Answers: “the seven basic tools of quality control”, the list every tools question starts from, including the TQM tools question (2073 Shrawan).

How it decodes: seven words, seven tools, in the notes’ order. Five rhinos storm Pokhara, chewing hot chips. Two C words at the end: control chart, then cause and effect.

  1. FFive Flowchart
  2. RRhinos Run chart
  3. SStormed Scatter diagram
  4. PPokhara Pareto diagram
  5. CChewing Control chart
  6. HHot Histogram
  7. CChips Cause and effect diagram

Control charts and the seven run rule asked 2×

Control chart A graphic display of data that shows the results of a process over time, against a centre line and upper and lower control limits calculated from the data (notes p. 134, slide 248).
  • Its main use is to prevent defects rather than to detect or reject them (notes p. 134).
  • It answers: is the process in control, is it stable? Any point outside the limit lines means no: the system may need changing (slide 248).
  • In control: variation comes from random events; the process needs no adjustment (notes p. 134).
  • Out of control: variation comes from non-random events; find their causes and adjust the process to correct or remove them (notes p. 134).
  • Against a run chart (slides 247, 248): both plot a single line of data over time; only the control chart has the limits, so only it can say whether the process is stable.
The seven run rule If seven data points in a row are all below the mean, all above the mean, or all increasing or all decreasing, the process must be examined for non-random problems (notes p. 136), even though every point is inside the limits.
Control chart: a line of data over time zig-zagging around the average, between dashed upper and lower control limits
A control chart: data over time around the average, between an upper and a lower control limit. A point outside the limits, or seven in a row on one side of the average, means the process is out of control. Course notes, p. 134
READING A CONTROL CHART: THE TWO SIGNALS Random points inside the limits: in control, leave it alone. A point outside, or seven in a row on one side: find the cause. UCL MEAN LCL TIME: SAMPLES 1 TO 24 outside the UCL: out of control seven in a row below the mean HOW TO READ IT Centre line: the process mean. Control limits: calculated from the data, usually mean +/- 3 sigma. In control random variation inside the limits; do not adjust the process. Out of control a point outside a limit, or a seven-point run: a non-random cause to find and remove.
In the exam
  • “Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools” (2076 Chaitra) and “Control charts vs. cause and effect charts for quality assessment” (2073 Shrawan): the control chart from here, then the comparisons.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: a) Functional vs. Matrix organizational structure b) Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools c) Seller (contractor) selection processes vs. contract closure processes d) Cause and effect analysis versus Tornado analysis in project risk management (2076 Chaitra Q5)
  • Compare the following: i) Traceability vs. Adaptability in reviewing steps ii) Horizontal vs. vertical communication and their degree of formalness iii) Control charts vs. Cause and effect charts for quality assessment (2073 Shrawan Q8)

Pareto charts and the 80/20 rule asked 7×

Pareto chart A chart of both a bar graph and a line graph: the bars show individual values (types of defect) in descending order, the line their cumulative total. It shows the commonest sources of defects and helps decide where to focus effort (notes p. 133, slide 244).
  • Each bar is a type of defect or problem; its height is a measure that matters, often frequency or cost (slide 244).
  • The Pareto principle, the 80/20 rule: 80% of the results come from 20% of the causes, so find the 20% of defect types that cause 80% of the defects (slide 246).
  • Examples (slide 246): 80% of complaints come from 20% of customers; 80% of sales from 20% of clients; 80% of computer crashes from 20% of the bugs.
Pareto chart of complaints in a week: bars in descending order for log-in problems, system locks up, system too slow, too hard to use and inaccurate reports, with a cumulative percentage line rising from about 50 to 100 percent
The notes’ Pareto chart: complaints sorted from most to least frequent, with the cumulative line. Log-in problems and lock-ups together are about 80% of all complaints. Course notes, p. 133

How Pareto charts help achieve a better quality project

  • They set priorities: a long list of complaints becomes an order of attack (slide 244).
  • They separate the vital few from the trivial many, so a team with limited time fixes the causes that remove most of the defects.
  • They show the gain before the work: the cumulative line shows how much of the problem each fix removes.
  • They measure the improvement: the chart redrawn after the fixes shows whether the top bars fell.
  • They focus the next tool: the top bar is the problem a fishbone diagram then explains.

Drawing one, with a sample case: 100 defects logged in a college MIS

  1. List the defect categories and count each: login 45, reports 30, slow pages 12, printing 8, other 5.
  2. Sort them in descending order and draw the bars.
  3. Add the cumulative percentage: 45, 75, 87, 95, 100.
  4. Draw the 80% line and read off the vital few: login and reports give 75 of the 100 defects, so they are fixed first.
PARETO CHART: THE VITAL FEW AND THE TRIVIAL MANY 100 defects logged on a college MIS, sorted by cause. Two causes out of five give 75 of them. 0 0% 20 20% 40 40% 60 60% 80 80% 100 100% DEFECTS CUMULATIVE 45 login 30 reports 12 slow pages 8 printing 5 other 80% line 45% 75% 87% 95% 100% vital few: fix these first trivial many: later
In the exam
  • Short note, “Pareto chart” (2082 Bhadra, 2081 Baishakh, 2076 Chaitra; “Pareto analysis”, 2072 Kartik): the definition, the 80/20 rule, a small drawn example, and how it helps.
  • “Briefly explain … with sample illustrative cases and assuming appropriate data on your own: Pareto chart” (2082 Baishakh): the four steps with your own counts, and the chart.
  • “How Pareto charts help to achieve better quality project?” (2074 Chaitra): the five ways it helps.
  • “Control chart versus Pareto chart” (2081 Bhadra): at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Write Short Notes on: (Any Two) a) PMBOK b) Balanced Scorecard c) SWOT d) COCOMO Model e) Pareto Chart (2082 Bhadra Q11)
  • Briefly explain followings with sample illustrative cases and assuming appropriate data/info on your own: i) Risk register ii) Pareto chart iii) Bidder selection scheme (2082 Baishakh Q6)
  • Compare the followings: i) Horizontal versus vertical communication ii) Project risk management plan versus risk response plan iii) Control chart versus Pareto chart tools in project quality management iv) Project DPR document versus project scope document (2081 Bhadra Q5)
  • Write short notes on: a) S - curve b) Balanced Scorecard c) Pareto chart d) Application of CPM e) Decision tree analysis (2081 Baishakh Q14)
  • Write short notes on: a) Project management process groups b) Statement of works (SOW) c) Pareto chart d) PM-BOK (2076 Chaitra Q7)
  • How Pareto charts help to achieve better quality project? (2074 Chaitra Q7b)
  • Write short notes on: a) COCOMO (constructive cost model) for IT project b) Contract closure procedure c) Balanced scorecard framework d) Pareto analysis e) Quality Audit Plan (2072 Kartik Q10)

Cause and effect (fishbone) diagrams asked 2×

Cause and effect diagram A tool for analysing the causes of a problem so as to find its root cause; also called a fishbone or Ishikawa diagram. The causes, grouped into major categories, are on the left; the effect, written as the problem statement, is on the right, at the head (notes pp. 134, 135).

Creating one, in six steps (notes pp. 135, 136)

  1. Draw the problem statement: define the problem and write it in the box at the right-hand end of the backbone.
  2. Draw the major cause categories on the left, joined to the backbone.
  3. Brainstorm causes.
  4. Categorise the causes: place each on the right bone.
  5. Determine deeper causes: ask why each cause happens.
  6. Identify the root causes: causes that appear repeatedly, chosen by group consensus, or by frequency of occurrence.
Fishbone under construction: the problem statement in a box at the right end of a horizontal backbone, with four bones for machinery, people, methods and materials
Steps 1 and 2: the problem statement at the head, then the major cause categories drawn as bones on the backbone. Course notes, p. 135
Fishbone diagram: the problem statement at the head, with bones for machinery, people, methods and materials, each fed by individual causes
The finished diagram: individual causes brainstormed and placed on each bone, then the root causes picked out. Course notes, p. 136
  • Categories: the notes use machinery, people, methods and materials (notes p. 136); common extensions add measurement and environment. For software (beyond your notes): people, process, technology, requirements, environment.
  • An IT example: problem “wrong marks on MIS marksheets”. People: data entry errors, no training. Methods: no double-check of entries. Technology: rounding bug in the grade function. Requirements: the grading rule never written down. The rounding bug and the unwritten rule both appear twice: the root causes.
  • Root cause analysis against SWOT analysis is not compared in your notes: it is at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Cause and effect diagram” (2074 Chaitra): the definition, a labelled sketch, the six steps and an example.
  • “Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis” (2082 Baishakh): at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: i) Formal versus informal communication ii) Qualitative versus quantitative risk assessment iii) Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis iv) Project life cycle phases versus various process groups (2082 Baishakh Q3)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balance Scorecard ii) COCOMO for IT project iii) Break-even Point iv) Cause and effect diagram (2074 Chaitra Q8)

Testing IT systems, and the test life cycle

  • Testing is quality control for software: each test checks a deliverable against its requirements.

Testing of IT systems (notes p. 138; slide 254 lists unit, integration, system and acceptance)

  1. Unit test: each individual component, to make sure it is defect free.
  2. Web test: a series of HTTP requests that test a website.
  3. Integration testing: between unit and system testing; tests functionally grouped components together.
  4. System testing: the entire system as one entity.
  5. Load testing: stress testing under different loads, network types and client configurations.
  6. User acceptance testing: by the end users, before they accept the delivered system.

The software testing life cycle (notes p. 139, slide 255)

  1. Requirement analysis: study what is to be tested.
  2. Test planning: strategy, effort, schedule and tools.
  3. Test case development: write the test cases and their data.
  4. Environment setup: prepare the hardware and software to test on.
  5. Test execution: run the tests, log and report the defects.
  6. Test cycle closure: evaluate the results and record the lessons.
The test life cycle as a staircase of six boxes: requirement analysis, test planning, test case development, environment setup, test execution, test cycle closure
The software testing life cycle: six stages, each finishing before the next begins. Course slides, slide 255
  • The V-model of chapter 4 pairs each development stage with its test level: see it there.

10.5TQM, Six Sigma and improving quality

Total quality management asked 4×

Total quality management (TQM) An approach to project quality management that takes everything related to quality into consideration. The processes that produce the services are thoroughly managed, which minimises variation and gives a predictable quality level, and all members of the organisation take part in improving processes, products, services and the culture they work in (notes p. 137).
  • The three words (slide 231): total, made up of the whole; quality, the degree of excellence a product or service provides; management, the act or art of handling, controlling and directing.
  • In one line (slide 231): an extensive, structured management approach focused on continuous improvement of products and services through continuous feedback.
  • What makes it different: quality is everybody’s job, all the time, not one department’s check at the end. Deming is its best-known champion (slide 230).

The seven principles of TQM (notes p. 137)

  1. Top management commitment.
  2. Training needs.
  3. Customer orientation.
  4. Involvement of employees.
  5. Corporate culture.
  6. Tools and techniques.
  7. Continuous improvement.
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT: THE SEVEN PRINCIPLES Everyone, everywhere, all the time: quality is built in by the whole organisation, not inspected in at the end. TQM 1 Top management leads, commits and funds it 2 Training needs people learn the methods 3 Customer orientation quality is what the customer needs 4 Involvement of employees everyone improves their own work 5 Corporate culture quality is how we work here 6 Tools and techniques Pareto, control charts, fishbone 7 Continuous improvement small gains, every day (kaizen)

Tools and techniques for TQM (notes pp. 137, 138), in two groups

  • Charts and sheets: Pareto chart, scatter plot, control chart, fishbone (Ishikawa) diagram, histogram, check list, check sheets.
  • Analyses: assessment of customer need, market analysis, competition analysis, workflow analysis, logistic analysis.

The basic approach of TQM, the principles put in order

  1. Start from the customer: define quality as what the customer needs.
  2. Top management commits: sets the quality policy and funds it.
  3. Train and involve everyone: each person improves their own work.
  4. Manage by facts: measure processes with the tools above.
  5. Improve continuously: small changes through the PDCA cycle, until quality is part of the culture.
In the exam
  • “What is TQM?” (2082 Baishakh, 2076 Ashwin): the definition, the three words, and the seven principles.
  • “Discuss the basic approach used for Total Quality Management” (2075 Chaitra): the principles and the five-step approach; its second half is improving quality in ICT projects.
  • “What are tools and techniques for Total Quality Management?” (2073 Shrawan): the two groups of tools.
  • Short note, “PDCA cycle” (2082 Baishakh): not explained in your notes, so it is at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • What is TQM? How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in projects? Briefly, explain with appropriate examples. (2082 Baishakh Q7)
  • Write short notes on: (Any Four) a) Decision Tree analysis b) S-curve c) PDCA cycle d) ICT code of ethics e) Soft skills for project manager (2082 Baishakh Q8)
  • What is TQM? Are there quality standards for software industry and services? Relate with other types of standards too. (2076 Ashwin Q6)
  • Discuss the basic approach used for Total Quality Management and how to improve Quality management in ICT project? (2075 Chaitra Q6a)
  • What are tools and techniques for Total Quality Management? And write possible steps to improve quality IT project. (2073 Shrawan Q7)

Answers: “What is TQM?” and “Discuss the basic approach used for Total Quality Management.” The seven principles, in the notes’ order.

How it decodes: seven words, seven principles. Two thirsty cows in Chitwan tasted chang, the local liquor. Three T words and three C words, so hold the picture, not the letters.

  1. TTwo Top management commitment
  2. TThirsty Training needs
  3. CCows Customer orientation
  4. IIn Involvement of employees
  5. CChitwan Corporate culture
  6. TTasted Tools and techniques
  7. CChang Continuous improvement

Six Sigma asked 1×

Six Sigma A quality management methodology that improves processes, reduces waste and errors, and increases customer satisfaction. Driven by data and statistical analysis, it improves the output of a process by identifying and removing the causes of defects and minimising variability (slides 250, 328; notes p. 175).
  • Methods: empirical and statistical quality management methods; a staff member with Six Sigma expertise usually monitors the process (notes p. 175).
  • Two roadmaps (slide 250, notes p. 175): DMAIC to improve an existing process, DMADV to create a new product or process design.
  • The name (beyond the notes and slides): sigma is the standard deviation; a Six Sigma process produces no more than 3.4 defects per million opportunities.

DMAIC (slide 251, notes pp. 175, 176)

  1. Define the problem, the customer, the requirements, the goals, the scope and the timeline.
  2. Measure current performance: a data collection plan for defects and metrics.
  3. Analyse the process to find the root causes of variation and defects.
  4. Improve the process by removing the root causes, with creative solutions.
  5. Control the new process with a control plan, so it does not slip back into old habits.

DMADV, also called Design for Six Sigma (slide 252, notes p. 176)

  1. Define realistic goals that suit the customer’s requirements or the business strategy.
  2. Measure the critical-to-quality (CTQ) requirements and turn them into project goals.
  3. Analyse the options and alternatives, with the estimated life cycle.
  4. Design at a high level, then in detail, into a prototype that exposes errors.
  5. Verify that customers approve the final product or process, and that it performs as designed.
SIX SIGMA: TWO ROADMAPS OF FIVE STEPS DMAIC improves a process you already have; DMADV (design for Six Sigma) builds a new one. DMAIC: IMPROVE AN EXISTING PROCESS D Define the problem, the customer and the goals M Measure current performance: defects and metrics A Analyse the root causes of variation and defects I Improve remove the root causes of defects C Control a control plan holds the gains in place DMADV: DESIGN A NEW PROCESS OR PRODUCT D Define realistic goals that suit the customer M Measure critical-to-quality (CTQ) requirements A Analyse the options and alternatives D Design high level, then in detail; prototype V Verify customers approve the final design The target named in the method: no more than 3.4 defects per million opportunities.
  • Six Sigma as an IT project methodology is also in chapter 14.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Six sigma” (2071 Chaitra): the definition, DMAIC with a line per step, DMADV in one line, and the 3.4 defects per million target.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: a) Sensitivity analysis b) The Balanced Scorecard c) Six sigma d) Project Management Maturity e) Decision tree analysis (2071 Chaitra Q10)

Improving quality in ICT projects asked 6×

Possible steps to improve the quality of IT projects (notes p. 138)

  1. Define quality to match user needs, not the team’s own opinion.
  2. Broadcast simple quality metrics, so the whole team sees the level of quality.
  3. Fine tune goals to include quality, so it is not silently traded away for the deadline.
  4. Get the requirements right, since most defects start there.
  5. Test smarter to test less: test first where defects cluster.
  6. Design applications to reduce bug risks.
  7. Optimise the use of testing tools, automating the repetitive tests.
  8. Use a maturity model such as PMMM or CMM.

What the slides add (slide 235)

  • Leadership that promotes quality.
  • Awareness of the cost of quality.
  • Attention to organisational influences and workplace factors.
  • Following maturity models.
  • Maturity models (notes p. 139): frameworks that help an organisation improve its processes. The Capability Maturity Model (CMM) benchmarks the maturity of a software process; the Project Management Maturity Model (PMMM) measures project management maturity and gives a roadmap to the next level. The five levels are in chapter 14.
In the exam
  • “How to improve quality management in ICT project?” (2082 Bhadra, 2080 Baishakh, 2075 Chaitra), “As a project manager, how do you improve the quality of IT projects?” (2081 Baishakh), “possible steps to improve quality” (2073 Shrawan, 2071 Chaitra): the eight steps with a line each, then the slides’ four points.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the processes of project quality management? How to improve quality management in ICT project? (2082 Bhadra Q7)
  • Define project quality. As a project manager, how do you improve the quality of IT projects? (2081 Baishakh Q9)
  • What are the 3 processes of project quality management? and how to improve Quality Management in ICT project? (2080 Baishakh Q4b)
  • Discuss the basic approach used for Total Quality Management and how to improve Quality management in ICT project? (2075 Chaitra Q6a)
  • What are tools and techniques for Total Quality Management? And write possible steps to improve quality IT project. (2073 Shrawan Q7)
  • What are the possible steps to improve project quality? (2071 Chaitra Q8b)

Answers: “How to improve quality management in ICT project?” Six sittings. The eight steps, in the notes’ order.

How it decodes: eight words, eight steps. Didi buys fresh gundruk, then drops it onto the momo. Two D words: define quality first, design applications sixth.

  1. DDidi Define quality to match user needs
  2. BBought Broadcast simple quality metrics
  3. FFresh Fine tune goals to include quality
  4. GGundruk Get the requirements right
  5. TThen Test smarter to test less
  6. DDropped Design applications to reduce bug risks
  7. OOnto Optimise the use of testing tools
  8. MMomo Maturity model: PMMM or CMM

10.6Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 10.

Quality standards for the software industry and services asked 1×

“What is TQM? Are there quality standards for software industry and services? Relate with other types of standards too.”

2076 Ashwin

Only partly in the notes: page 127 lists general ISO standards and page 139 the CMM, but no standard written for software.

  • Yes. Software has its own standards for the product, the process, testing and services.
StandardWhat it covers
ISO 9001 with ISO/IEC 90003ISO 9001 is the generic quality management system; ISO/IEC 90003 is the guidance for applying it to software
ISO/IEC 25010 (SQuaRE)The software product quality model. The 2011 edition names eight characteristics: functional suitability, performance efficiency, compatibility, usability, reliability, security, maintainability, portability (the 2023 revision adds safety)
ISO/IEC/IEEE 12207Software life cycle processes
ISO/IEC/IEEE 29119Software testing: concepts, processes, documentation, techniques (it replaced IEEE 829)
IEEE 730Software quality assurance processes
CMMI; ISO/IEC 33000 series (formerly 15504, SPICE)Rating the capability and maturity of software processes
ISO/IEC 20000-1IT service management: the standard for services
ISO/IEC 27001Information security management

How they relate to other standards

  • Same family, same structure: the management system standards, ISO 9001 (quality), ISO 14001 (environment), ISO 27001 (security), ISO 20000-1 (IT services), ISO 45001 (safety), share one high-level structure built on the PDCA cycle, so a software company can run them as one integrated system.
  • Different levels of the same goal: ISO 9001 and 90003 certify that a quality process exists; CMMI rates how mature it is; ISO/IEC 25010 says what quality the product itself must have; 12207 and 29119 say how the work and the testing are done.
  • Sector versions: just as ISO 13485 adapts the quality system to medical devices and ISO/TS 16949 (now IATF 16949) to cars (notes p. 127), ISO/IEC 90003 adapts it to software.

Consistency against completeness in requirements engineering asked 1×

“Compare: Consistency vs. completeness in requirements engineering”

2072 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: page 128 and slide 239 name completeness (with correctness and usefulness) criteria for quality requirements; consistency is not there, and the two are not compared.

CompletenessConsistency
MeaningEverything needed is specified: all functions, constraints and data, and the response to every input, valid and invalid; nothing left “to be decided”No requirement contradicts another, or a higher-level document; every term is used in the same sense throughout
The questionIs anything missing?Does anything conflict?
A typical defectNo rule for what happens when a fee payment fails“Reports export to PDF” in one section, “Excel only” in another; “user” meaning student in one place, staff in another
Checked againstThe stakeholders’ needs: is every need covered?The document itself, and the documents above it
How it is checkedReviews against a template or checklist, use-case coverage, traceability back to needsCross-reference reviews, a glossary, a requirements traceability matrix, formal or tool checks
  • Both are qualities of a good requirements specification: IEEE 830 lists correct, unambiguous, complete, consistent, ranked for importance and stability, verifiable, modifiable and traceable.
  • They are independent: a specification can be consistent but incomplete (nothing conflicts, but the error cases are missing), or complete but inconsistent.
  • They pull against each other: every requirement added for completeness is one more that could conflict, so each needs its own check.

The box plot, against the histogram and the scatter plot asked 2×

“Compare: Data analysis using Box plot versus Scatter plot”

2078 Bhadra

“Compare: Boxplot vs. histogram analysis”

2075 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: the histogram (notes p. 133) and the scatter diagram (p. 132, slide 249) are there; the box plot is not in the notes or the slides.

Box plot (box and whisker plot) A picture of one variable’s five-number summary: minimum, first quartile (Q1), median, third quartile (Q3), maximum. The box spans Q1 to Q3, the middle half of the data (the interquartile range, IQR); a line marks the median; whiskers reach the smallest and largest values within 1.5 × IQR of the box, and points beyond them are plotted as outliers.
BOX PLOT, HISTOGRAM AND SCATTER PLOT, SIDE BY SIDE The same data seen three ways. The box plot and the histogram describe one variable; the scatter plot relates two. Box plot one variable: five-number summary min Q1 Q3 max outlier median 0 2 4 6 8 10 LOAD TIME (S) Histogram one variable: the shape of the spread 6 18 11 4 1 0 2 4 6 8 10 LOAD TIME (S), PAGES PER BIN Scatter plot two variables: are they related? USERS ONLINE LOAD TIME Box plot vs histogram: both show one variable. The box plot summarises it (median, quartiles, spread, outliers); the histogram shows its shape. Box plot vs scatter plot: one variable against the relationship between two.

Box plot against histogram

Box plotHistogram
VariablesOneOne
ShowsA summary: median, quartiles, range, outliersThe shape: how many values fall in each bin; peaks and skew
OutliersMarked one by oneHidden in the end bins
ChoicesNone: the summary is fixedThe bin width, which can change the picture
Comparing groupsMany boxes side by side on one axisOne chart per group
Best forComparing spread across groups: load time per server, defects per moduleSeeing whether one process is centred and symmetric

Box plot against scatter plot

Box plotScatter plot
VariablesOne numeric variable (per group)Two numeric variables, paired
QuestionHow is it spread out, and are there outliers?Are the two related, and how strongly? (notes p. 132)
ReadingMedian, IQR, whisker length, outlier pointsThe pattern: rising, falling, or none; tight or loose
Quality useCompare process variation between teams, servers or releasesTest a cause and effect theory: code size against defects
CautionHides the shape inside the box (two peaks look like one)A relationship does not prove cause (notes p. 132)

Bar chart against process control chart asked 1×

“Compare: Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools”

2076 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: the control chart is on page 134 and slide 248; a bar chart appears only as the histogram (p. 133); they are not compared.

Bar chartProcess control chart
ShowsSizes compared across categories: defects by module, complaints by typeOne measure over time, against a centre line and control limits
Horizontal axisCategories (or bins, for a histogram)Time, or sample number
LimitsNoneUpper and lower control limits calculated from the data
QuestionWhich category is largest?Is the process stable, in control?
SignalThe tallest barsA point outside a limit; seven in a row on one side
Quality useSummarise and prioritise (a Pareto chart is a sorted bar chart)Monitor a running process and trigger action
TimeUsually a snapshotBuilt for a time series
  • Used together: the control chart shows that defects jumped out of control in week 7; a bar chart of that week’s defects shows which type caused it.

Control chart against Pareto chart, and against cause and effect chart asked 2×

“Compare: Control chart versus Pareto chart tools in project quality management”

2081 Bhadra

“Compare: Control charts vs. Cause and effect charts for quality assessment”

2073 Shrawan

Only partly in the notes: each tool is described (notes pp. 133 to 136, slides 244, 248), but they are not compared.

Control chart against Pareto chart

Control chartPareto chart
ShowsOne process measure over time, with control limitsDefect causes ranked by frequency, with a cumulative line
QuestionIs the process stable?What should we fix first?
Horizontal axisTimeCause categories
Built onStatistics: limits from the data, the seven run ruleThe 80/20 rule
WhenContinuously, while the process runsWhen choosing improvement work
ResultIn control, or out of controlThe vital few causes

Control chart against cause and effect chart

Control chartCause and effect (fishbone) chart
NatureQuantitative: a graph of measured dataQualitative: a diagram built by brainstorming
PurposeDetect whether variation is random or notFind the possible root causes of a known problem
InputMeasurements over timeThe team’s knowledge of the process
ResultIn control, or a signal to investigateCauses grouped by category; the root causes
WhenContinuouslyAfter a problem has been found
  • The three work in sequence: the control chart signals that something is wrong, the Pareto chart shows which problem matters most, and the fishbone explains why it happens.

Root cause analysis against SWOT analysis asked 1×

“Compare: Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis”

2082 Baishakh

Only partly in the notes: root cause analysis is the fishbone (notes pp. 134 to 136) and SWOT is on notes pp. 63, 64 and 155, but they are not compared.

Root cause analysis (RCA)SWOT analysis
QuestionWhy did this problem happen?Where do we stand, and what should we do?
DirectionBackward: diagnoses something that has already gone wrongForward: informs strategy and plans
FocusOne specific problem or defectThe whole organisation or project, inside (strengths, weaknesses) and outside (opportunities, threats)
ToolsFive whys, fishbone diagram, Pareto chartA two by two grid
OutputRoot causes, and corrective and preventive actionsStrategies: use strengths, fix weaknesses, take opportunities, counter threats
WhenAfter a failure or defect, in quality control and riskIn planning, project selection and risk identification (notes pp. 63, 155)
LevelOperationalStrategic
  • In one line: RCA explains a problem that has happened; SWOT prepares for what could happen.
  • A worked SWOT is in the statement of work example of chapter 7.

The PDCA cycle asked 1×

“Write short notes on: (Any Four) … c) PDCA cycle”

2082 Baishakh

Only partly in the notes: slide 230 names Plan-Do-Check-Act under Deming and slide 328 under Six Sigma, and notes page 131 draws a PDCA loop as its flowchart example; the cycle itself is not explained.

PDCA cycle A four-step, repeating method for continuous improvement: Plan, Do, Check, Act. It grew from Walter Shewhart’s work and was spread by W. Edwards Deming, so it is also called the Shewhart or Deming cycle; Deming later preferred Study to Check (PDSA).
  1. Plan: find the problem or opportunity, analyse its causes, and plan a change with the result it should give.
  2. Do: carry out the change on a small scale, as a pilot, and collect data.
  3. Check: compare the results with the objective; learn what worked.
  4. Act: if it worked, make it the standard and spread it; if not, adjust the plan and begin again.
THE PDCA CYCLE: PLAN, DO, CHECK, ACT The Deming (Shewhart) cycle: every improvement is a small experiment, and the wheel keeps turning. Plan Do Check Act PDCA Plan Find the problem or opportunity, analyse its causes, and plan the change and the result it should give. Do Carry out the change on a small scale, as a pilot, and record what happens. Check Compare the results with the objective: did it work, and what was learned? (also called Study) Act If it worked, make it the standard and spread it; if not, adjust the plan and go round again. Each turn of the wheel is one small step of continuous improvement (kaizen).
  • An IT example: Plan: a Pareto chart shows login failures are 45% of MIS defects; the cause is a short session timeout; plan a longer timeout, aiming to halve failures. Do: change it for one department for two weeks. Check: failures there fell by 70%. Act: roll it out to all departments, update the configuration standard, and start the next cycle on the next bar of the Pareto chart.
  • Where it appears: it is the engine of Kaizen and TQM; Six Sigma’s DMAIC follows the same pattern (slide 328); ISO management system standards are built on it.

QA is about the process (are we building it the right way?); QC is about the product (did we build it right?).

Acceptance decisions, rework, process adjustments (notes p. 130).

Back to QA and QC.

Order of magnitude -25% to +75%; budget -10% to +25%; definitive -5% to +10%.

Prevention, appraisal, internal failure, external failure.

Back to cost estimating and the cost of quality.

Chapter 11 · 3 hours · appeared in 22 of 22 sittings

Project communication management

Why communication decides whether a project succeeds, how it is planned (requirements, channels, the plan, meetings and email), how information is distributed and performance reported, and what goes wrong when it fails. Asked in every sitting.

What this chapter is about
  • Why communication matters, the communication model, the choice of method, and face to face communication.
  • Communications planning: the four processes, communication requirement analysis and channels, the communication management plan, running meetings and using email.
  • Information distribution: getting information to people, lessons learned, the traceability matrix, and managing stakeholders.
  • Performance reporting and the integrated reporting system: why a project needs a reporting system and documentation.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Communication is the project manager’s main job: 80 to 90% of the time (notes p. 141), and a key skill (chapter 2).
  • It ties the other knowledge areas together: performance reports carry scope, time, cost and quality (chapters 7 to 10), including earned value and the S curve (chapter 9).
  • Stakeholders (chapter 4) are who it serves; poor communication is a source of risk (chapter 12).
What you will learn
  1. Why communication management matters, the model, face to face and the choice of medium
  2. The four processes, channels, the communication management plan, meetings, email
  3. Information distribution, the traceability matrix, managing stakeholders
  4. Performance reporting and why a reporting system is needed
  5. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • “Why is communication management important (in an ICT project)?”: eight sittings, often with the effective meeting (three) or the communication plan (two).
  • “Why is a reporting system required? Explain the hazards of communication error”: five sittings, always as a pair.
  • Comparisons: formal against informal, horizontal against vertical (two each), status against progress reporting, traceability against adaptability.
  • Performance reporting tools (two sittings); the processes, email, a face to face scenario and communication skill with conflict, once each.

11.1Importance of communication management

Why communication management matters asked 10×

Project communication management The collection of processes that make sure the right messages are sent, received and understood by the right people (notes p. 141): the processes required for the timely and appropriate development, collection, dissemination, storage and disposition of project information, which provide the critical links among people and information (slide 257).
  • One of the ten knowledge areas of the PMBOK (notes p. 141).
  • Time to communicate must be invested in the project, and everyone must understand how communication affects the project as a whole (notes p. 141, slide 257).

Why good communication is important (notes p. 141, slide 258)

  1. The greatest threat to many projects is a failure to communicate properly.
  2. The culture of IT professionals has not made them good communicators.
  3. Research shows IT professionals must communicate effectively to succeed in their positions.
  4. Strong verbal skills are a key factor in career advancement for IT professionals.
  5. Project managers must see good communication as a means of achieving project success.

Keys to good communication (notes p. 141)

  • 80 to 90% of a project manager’s time is spent communicating.
  • Focus on needs, both group and individual.
  • Mix methods, formal and informal.
  • Set the stage for communicating bad news.
  • Distribute important information in an effective and timely manner.
  • Determine the number of communication channels: complexity rises with the number of people (see channels).

Why it is critical in an ICT project, and its role in success

  • Software is intangible: progress cannot be seen, only reported, so the whole picture depends on communication.
  • Requirements are communication: a requirement misunderstood is built wrong and found late, at the highest cost.
  • Mixed audiences: developers, users, managers and vendors use different vocabularies; someone must translate.
  • Fast change: changes must reach everyone affected, or the team builds to an old version.
  • Its role in success: it aligns everyone on the objectives, surfaces problems early enough to fix, keeps stakeholders’ support, and records decisions for control and for the lessons learned.
  • Two related questions not answered in your notes, whether communication reduces risk and the difference between communication skill and communication management, are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Why is communication management important in ICT project?” (2082 Bhadra, 2074 Ashwin), “Explain about the importance of effective communication in project management and describe its role for the successful project completion” (2081 Baishakh, 2079 Baishakh, 2076 Chaitra), “the need of communication management for the success of critical projects” (2080 Baishakh), “Why better communication (management) is critical for (ICT) projects?” (2070 Chaitra, 2069 Chaitra): the definition, the five reasons, the keys with the 80 to 90% figure, then the ICT points and the role in success.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain about the importance of effective communication in project management and describe its role for the successful project completion. (2081 Baishakh Q10, 2079 Baishakh Q11, 2076 Chaitra Q6b)
  • Why is communication management important in ICT project? And how to run the effective meeting in the project? (2082 Bhadra Q8)
  • Explain about the need of communication management for the success of critical projects. (2080 Baishakh Q4c)
  • Why communication management is important in IT project? How to run the effective meeting in project? (2074 Ashwin Q7a)
  • What is difference between communication skills and communication management? How does the communication skill help to resolve conflicts in ICT project? Explain with example. (2072 Chaitra Q7)
  • Does effective communication management skill reduce the associated risk of an IT project? Explain with example. (2072 Kartik Q8)
  • Why better communication management is critical for projects? Discuss the communication management plan that should be considered for ICT projects. (2070 Chaitra Q4b)
  • Why better communication is critical for ICT projects? Discuss the contents of communication management plan that should be considered. (2069 Chaitra Q11)

The communication model, and choosing a method

The communication model (notes p. 143)

  1. Encode: translate a thought into language.
  2. Message: the output of encoding.
  3. Medium: the method used to convey the message.
  4. Noise: anything that interferes with transmission or understanding.
  5. Decode: translate the message back into a thought or idea.
Communication model: sender, encoding, transmission, decoding, receiver, with noise acting on transmission and feedback returning from receiver to sender
The communication model: sender, encoding, transmission, decoding, receiver. Noise acts on the transmission, and feedback returns to the sender. Course notes, p. 143
  • Use it to find where a message failed: jargon the receiver does not share fails at encode; a message lost in a crowded inbox fails in the medium; one read through an old grievance fails at decode. Feedback is how the sender learns it failed.

What decides the communication technology (notes p. 142): availability; the project environment; the project length; urgency; preparation level (how ready people are to use it).

Communication methods (notes p. 142): face to face; telephone calls; email and other electronic tools; radio broadcasting; social media networking; paper advertisement. Any can be used, depending on the need and experience; the choice also follows the stakeholders’ intentions, likings and experience (slide 277).

Face to face communication, and choosing the medium asked 1×

Face to face communication Communication in which the parties can see each other. Communication has to be adjusted to the channel, and short, frequent meetings are often very effective in IT projects (notes p. 142).

Benefits (notes p. 142)

  • Keeps remote workers in the loop; boosts overall productivity.
  • Easier to convince people; more reliable communication.
  • Improves value and reduces redundancy; builds stronger connections.
  • Quicker and more effective; better non-verbal understanding.

How well each medium suits each purpose (slide 269, after Galati, 2001). Key: 1 excellent, 2 adequate, 3 inappropriate.

PurposeHard copyTelephoneVoice mailEmailMeetingWeb site
Assessing commitment323313
Building consensus323313
Mediating a conflict323313
Resolving a misunderstanding313323
Addressing negative behaviour323213
Expressing support or appreciation122123
Encouraging creative thinking233133
Making an ironic statement322313
Conveying a reference document133331
Reinforcing one’s authority123312
Providing a permanent record133131
Maintaining confidentiality212313
Conveying simple information321123
Asking an informational question321133
Making a simple request331133
Giving complex instructions333212
Addressing many people233 or 1*231
  • * Depends on system functionality (slide 269).
  • The pattern: anything about people, commitment, conflict or negative behaviour is best face to face; anything that must be kept or referred to is best in writing.
The scenario: a member is not completing assigned tasks Start with face to face communication, a private one to one meeting. The table rates a meeting excellent for addressing negative behaviour and assessing commitment, and email only adequate. Face to face lets the manager hear the reason (overload, unclear task, skill gap, personal problem), read the non-verbal signals, and agree a plan together without public embarrassment. Then confirm what was agreed in a short written note, which makes the commitment a record; formal escalation comes only if that fails.
In the exam
  • “A project manager is having trouble getting a project member to complete their tasks as assigned. What type of communication would the project manager want to use to address this problem initially and why?” (2074 Chaitra): face to face, the reasons from the benefits and the media table, then the written follow up.
Asked in past papers
  • A project manager is having trouble getting a project member to complete their tasks as assigned. What type of communication would the project manager want to use to address this problem initially and why? (2074 Chaitra Q5a)

11.2Communications planning, requirement analysis and meetings

The four communication management processes asked 1×

The four processes (notes p. 143, slide 257), in the order a project meets them

  1. Communications planning: determining the information and communications needs of the stakeholders.
  2. Information distribution: making needed information available in a timely manner.
  3. Performance reporting: collecting and disseminating performance information.
  4. Administrative closure: generating, gathering and circulating information to formalise phase or project completion.
Communications planning Determines the information and communications needs of the stakeholders (notes p. 143, slide 259): who needs what information, when they will need it, and how it will be given to them.
  • Every project needs some type of communications management plan, the document that guides project communications; a stakeholder analysis for communications also helps (notes p. 143, slide 259).
  • Inputs (slide 260): environmental factors, organisational process assets, the scope statement, the project management plan, constraints and assumptions.
  • Tools and techniques (slide 260): communication requirement analysis; communications technologies.
  • Output (slide 260): the communication management plan.
In the exam
  • “Discuss about project communication management process.” (2080 Bhadra): the four processes with a line each, then planning (who, what, when, how) with its inputs, tools and output. The second half, effective email, is below.
Asked in past papers
  • Discuss about project communication management process. As a project manager, how do you write effective email? (2080 Bhadra Q12)

Communication requirement analysis and channels

  • Communication requirement analysis results in the sum of the information needs of the project stakeholders (notes p. 144, slide 261).
  • The number of potential channels is an indicator of the complexity of a project’s communication (notes p. 144, slide 261).
n ( n - 1 ) number of channels = ------------- n = number of people involved 2 2 people -> 1 channel 5 people -> 10 channels 3 people -> 3 channels 10 people -> 45 channels 4 people -> 6 channels 20 people -> 190 channels
Pictures of people linked by arrows: 2 people with 1 communications channel, 3 people with 3 channels, 4 people with 6 channels, under the formula number of channels equals n times n minus 1 over 2
Each person added opens a channel to everyone already there: 1, 3, 6 channels for 2, 3, 4 people. Course slides, slide 262
  • The point: channels grow roughly with the square of the team, not in step with it. Doubling a team from 10 to 20 people takes the channels from 45 to 190, four times as many, which is why large teams need a formal communication structure.

Information needed to determine the communication requirements (notes p. 144, slide 261)

  • Organisational charts; the project organisation and stakeholder responsibility relationships.
  • Disciplines, departments and specialties; logistics and personnel.
  • Internal and external information needs; stakeholder information.
  • The project scope and project management plans.

The communication management plan asked 2×

Communication management plan The document that guides project communications; an output of communications planning and part of the project management plan (notes pp. 143, 146).

What it provides (notes p. 146)

  • Stakeholder communication requirements.
  • The information to be communicated.
  • Who is responsible for communicating it, and who receives it.
  • The frequency, such as weekly, and a schedule for producing the information.
  • Access methods for obtaining the information.

The slides’ contents (slide 266)

  • A collection and filing structure for gathering and storing information.
  • A distribution structure: what information goes to whom, when, and how.
  • A format for communicating key project information.
  • A schedule for producing the information, and access methods.
  • A method for updating the plan as the project progresses.
  • A stakeholder communications analysis.

A sample stakeholder communications analysis for a college MIS (the format of slide 263)

StakeholderDocumentFormatContactDue
Campus chief (sponsor)Monthly status reportHard copy, and a meetingProject managerFirst of each month
Exam section staff (users)Release notes, training planEmail, workshopBusiness analystEach release
Development teamTask status, decisionsDaily stand-up, issue trackerTeam leadDaily
Hosting vendorService requirements, incidentsEmail, phone for urgent issuesProject managerAs needed

For an ICT project, add

  • Which channel carries which message: stand-ups for coordination, written reports for decisions, face to face for conflict.
  • How technical status is translated for non-technical stakeholders.
  • Escalation: who is told, and when, if an issue cannot be solved at the lower level; and a glossary of the project’s terms.
In the exam
  • “Discuss the (contents of the) communication management plan that should be considered (for ICT projects)” (2070 Chaitra, 2069 Chaitra): the notes’ and slides’ contents, a small stakeholder table, and the ICT additions.
Asked in past papers
  • Why better communication management is critical for projects? Discuss the communication management plan that should be considered for ICT projects. (2070 Chaitra Q4b)
  • Why better communication is critical for ICT projects? Discuss the contents of communication management plan that should be considered. (2069 Chaitra Q11)

Running an effective meeting asked 3×

  • Before organising a meeting, think (notes p. 146): do you really need a meeting? Who needs to attend? How much time do you need?

Steps to conduct an effective meeting (notes p. 146, slide 264)

  1. Determine if a meeting can be avoided; an email or a call may do.
  2. Define the purpose and intended outcome of the meeting.
  3. Determine who should attend: only those needed for the outcome.
  4. Provide an agenda to participants before the meeting.
  5. Prepare handouts, slides and visual aids ahead of time, and make the logistical arrangements (slide 264).
  6. Start the meeting on time.
  7. Run the meeting professionally: keep to the agenda, let everyone contribute, record decisions and action items.
  8. Build relationships with the attendees.
  • After the meeting (beyond your notes): send the minutes, with each action’s owner and due date, within a day, and follow the actions up at the next meeting.
In the exam
  • “How to run the effective meeting in (the) project?” (2082 Bhadra, 2074 Ashwin) and the short note “Effective meeting conduction process” (2078 Bhadra): the three questions, the eight steps with a line each, and the minutes.
Asked in past papers
  • Why is communication management important in ICT project? And how to run the effective meeting in the project? (2082 Bhadra Q8)
  • Write short notes on: a) Effective meeting conduction process b) PMI framework c) Seller selection criteria d) Tornado analysis (2078 Bhadra Q8)
  • Why communication management is important in IT project? How to run the effective meeting in project? (2074 Ashwin Q7a)

Using email effectively asked 1×

Rules for effective email (notes p. 146, slide 265)

  1. Make sure email is the right medium for what you want to say (slide 265).
  2. Send it to the right people; do not copy everyone by reflex.
  3. Use meaningful subjects, so the message can be found and sorted.
  4. Limit the content to one main subject, and be as clear and concise as possible.
  5. Limit the number and size of attachments.
  6. Delete email you do not need, and do not open it if you question the source.
  7. Keep your virus software up to date.
  8. Respond to and file emails quickly.
  9. Learn to use the important features of your email tool.
In the exam
  • “As a project manager, how do you write effective email?” (2080 Bhadra): the rules, with a one-line example of a good subject line (“MIS release 2.1: approval needed by Friday”).
Asked in past papers
  • Discuss about project communication management process. As a project manager, how do you write effective email? (2080 Bhadra Q12)

11.3Information distribution

Information distribution, and lessons learned asked 5×

Information distribution Making needed information available to project stakeholders in a timely manner. It includes carrying out the communication management plan and responding to unexpected requests for information (notes p. 144, slide 267).
  • Why it is necessary: “getting the right information to the right people at the right time and in a useful format” is just as important as developing the information in the first place (notes p. 144, slide 267).
  • Considerations (notes p. 144): using technology to enhance distribution; formal and informal methods.
  • Formal and informal: formal means a project report, informal means face to face communication (notes p. 145). The full comparison, with horizontal against vertical, is at the end of this chapter.
  • Distribution techniques: written and verbal (notes p. 145).

Tools and techniques (slide 268)

  1. Communication skills: writing, speaking, listening, presenting.
  2. An information gathering and retrieval system: manual filing, electronic databases, project management software, and systems for technical documents such as drawings, design specifications and test plans (slide 271).
  3. Information distribution methods: meetings, hard copy, email, shared databases, the project web site.
  4. The lessons learned process.
  • Input (slide 268): the communication management plan. Outputs: updated organisational process assets; requested changes.

The lessons learned process (notes p. 147, slide 272)

  • Lessons learned must be used in future projects.
  • Project status review meetings and post mortem meetings are where they are discussed; they are most fruitful when the project did not meet expectations.
  • Results: an updated lessons learned knowledge base; input to the knowledge management system; updated policies, procedures and processes; improved business skills; overall product and service improvements; an updated risk management plan.
In the exam
  • “Explain about the necessity of information distribution and its tools and techniques.” (2070 Ashad): the definition, why it is necessary, the four tools with the retrieval system and lessons learned, and the outputs.
  • “Formal versus informal communication” (2082 Baishakh, 2076 Ashwin) and “Horizontal versus vertical communication (and their degree of formalness)” (2081 Bhadra, 2073 Shrawan): at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: i) Formal versus informal communication ii) Qualitative versus quantitative risk assessment iii) Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis iv) Project life cycle phases versus various process groups (2082 Baishakh Q3)
  • Compare the followings: i) Horizontal versus vertical communication ii) Project risk management plan versus risk response plan iii) Control chart versus Pareto chart tools in project quality management iv) Project DPR document versus project scope document (2081 Bhadra Q5)
  • Compare the followings: a) Project scoping vs. project closing b) Formal vs. Informal communication c) Sensitivity analysis vs SWOT analysis d) Tender vs. quotation process (2076 Ashwin Q7)
  • Compare the following: i) Traceability vs. Adaptability in reviewing steps ii) Horizontal vs. vertical communication and their degree of formalness iii) Control charts vs. Cause and effect charts for quality assessment (2073 Shrawan Q8)
  • Explain about the necessity of information distribution and its tools and techniques. (2070 Ashad Q12)

The traceability matrix asked 1×

Traceability matrix A table that ties together requirements, functional specifications, tasks, test cases, source code and other artefacts (notes p. 148, slide 270).
  • Why it is standard practice: communication among development groups tends to be constrained, so an interlinked view of the system is needed (notes p. 148, slide 270).
  • It helps the team see the relationships between the elements of the system and the requirements (notes p. 148).
  • It enables impact analysis: the effect of a proposed change on the system can be studied when required (notes p. 148).

The notes’ layout (notes p. 148), with one row filled in for a college MIS

ProposalScopeDevelopmentQuality assuranceImplementationLatest status
GoalURSSRSFunctionsCode setUnit testPeer reviewTestsEnd user
Publish results onlineU-4S-4.2Grade calculationgrade.pyUT-12PR-31ST-7Exam sectionTested, awaiting acceptance
  • Reading it: if the grading rule (S-4.2) changes, the row shows at once which code, which tests and which users are affected. URS is the user requirements specification, SRS the software requirements specification.
  • Traceability against adaptability is not in your notes: it is at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Traceability vs. adaptability in reviewing steps” (2073 Shrawan): the traceability matrix from here, then the comparison.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the following: i) Traceability vs. Adaptability in reviewing steps ii) Horizontal vs. vertical communication and their degree of formalness iii) Control charts vs. Cause and effect charts for quality assessment (2073 Shrawan Q8)

Managing stakeholders through communication

Manage stakeholders process The management of communications to satisfy the needs of, and resolve issues with, project stakeholders. The project manager is responsible for managing stakeholders (notes p. 147, slide 276).
  • Inputs (slide 276): the communication management plan; organisational process assets.
  • Tools and techniques: communication methods (face to face, telephone, email and other electronic tools, chosen by the stakeholders’ intentions, likings and experience, slide 277); issue logs, which record each issue, its owner and its due date until it is resolved.
  • Outputs: resolved issues; approved change requests; approved corrective actions; updated process assets and project management plan.
  • Who the stakeholders are and how to rank them (power and interest) is in chapter 4.

11.4Performance reporting and the integrated reporting system

Performance reporting, and its tools asked 3×

Performance reporting Collecting and disseminating performance information, to keep stakeholders informed about how resources are being used to achieve the project objectives (notes p. 145, slide 273).
  • It includes (notes p. 145, slide 273): the latest status reports, progress reports (progress measurement) and forecasting; information on scope, schedule, cost and quality, and on risks and coming procurement issues.
  • Common report types (notes p. 145): Gantt charts, S curves, histograms, tables.
  • Its reach: the performance measures it communicates affect every knowledge area, including scope, time, cost and quality (notes p. 145).

Tools and techniques for performance reporting (slide 274)

  1. Information presentation tools: software for tables, Gantt charts, S curves, histograms, dashboards.
  2. Performance information gathering and compilation: collecting actual progress, cost and quality data from the team and the systems.
  3. Status review meetings: regular meetings to exchange and review project information.
  4. Time reporting systems: record the time spent on each task.
  5. Cost reporting systems: record the costs incurred.
  • Techniques behind the reports: earned value analysis (variances, CPI, SPI, EAC) and S curves from chapter 9, and variance and trend analysis against the baseline.
  • Inputs (slide 274): work performance information, performance measurements, forecasted completion, quality control measurements, the PM plan and performance measurement baseline, approved change requests, deliverables. Outputs: performance reports, forecasts, recommended corrective actions, updated process assets, requested changes.
  • Administrative closure (notes p. 145): generating, gathering and circulating information to formalise the completion of a phase or of the project; closing is covered in chapter 7.
  • Status reporting against progress reporting is not distinguished in your notes: it is at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Describe the various tools and techniques used for performance reporting of a project execution process” (2081 Baishakh) and “Explain various tools and techniques for performance reporting” (2071 Chaitra): the definition, what it includes, the five tools, the report types and earned value.
  • “Status reporting vs. progress reporting” (2075 Chaitra): at the end of this chapter.
Asked in past papers
  • Describe the various tools and techniques used for performance reporting of a project execution process. (2081 Baishakh Q11)
  • Compare the followings: a) BOQ document vs. RFP document b) Status reporting vs. progress reporting c) Functional vs. matrix organization d) Boxplot vs. histogram analysis (2075 Chaitra Q5)
  • Explain various tools and techniques for performance reporting. (2071 Chaitra Q6)

Why a project needs a reporting system and documentation asked 5×

  • The problem (notes p. 147, slide 275): a huge amount of time goes into gathering, evaluating, formatting and disseminating status information, and most of it is repetitive, recurring work.
Integrated reporting system A system that collects data during operation, stores it in a relational database, and provides it ready for analysis whenever it is required (notes p. 147, slide 275).

Why a reporting system and documentation are required

  • Stakeholders stay informed of how resources are being used against the objectives (notes p. 145).
  • Repetitive reporting work is automated, saving the time the notes describe (notes p. 147).
  • Early warning: variances show in a report before they become a crisis.
  • One consistent picture: everyone compares the same figures against the same baseline, instead of ad hoc updates.
  • A record and an audit trail: decisions, changes and approvals are documented for control, for contracts and for disputes.
  • Impact of change: documents such as the traceability matrix show what a change affects (notes p. 148).
  • Lessons learned are captured for the next project (notes p. 147).
  • Management by exception: managers look only where the numbers move away from the plan.
  • The hazards of communication error, the second half of this question, are not listed in your notes: they are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Why (documentation and) reporting system is required in a project? Explain the hazards of communication error in a project.” (2079 Bhadra, 2076 Chaitra, 2076 Ashwin, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin): the problem, the integrated reporting system and the reasons from here, then the hazards.
Asked in past papers
  • Why reporting system is required in a project? Explain the hazards of communication error in a project. (2079 Bhadra Q8, 2076 Chaitra Q2b, 2076 Ashwin Q3b)
  • Why documentation and reporting system is required in a project? Explain the hazards of communication error in project? (2075 Ashwin Q7b)
  • Why reporting system and documentation are required in a project? Explain the hazard of communication errors in a project. (2074 Ashwin Q8b)

11.5Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 11.

Does effective communication management reduce the risk of an IT project? asked 1×

“Does effective communication management skill reduce the associated risk of an IT project? Explain with example.”

2072 Kartik

Only partly in the notes: page 141 calls a failure to communicate the greatest threat to many projects, but how communication reduces risk is not explained.

  • Yes. Many IT project risks are communication failures in disguise, so managing communication removes their cause or catches them early.

How it reduces risk

  • Requirement risk: reviewing requirements with users, and confirming them in writing, stops the wrong system being built.
  • Early warning: regular status reports and stand-ups surface slips and problems while they are still cheap to fix.
  • Scope risk: changes are requested, assessed and approved in writing, not agreed in a corridor.
  • Stakeholder risk: sponsors kept informed keep their support and funding.
  • Team risk: clear roles and a shared plan prevent duplicated or dropped work and reduce conflict.
  • Risk management itself runs on communication: risks must be reported, owned and tracked (the risk register, chapter 12).
An example A college MIS team hears in a weekly stakeholder meeting that the exam section plans to change the grading rule next semester. Because the communication plan puts the exam section on the weekly status list, the change is known in week 3, costed and scheduled. Without that channel it would surface at user acceptance testing, forcing rework of the grade module, delaying results, and damaging trust: the same event, turned from a crisis into a planned change by communication.
  • The limit: communication reduces the risks that come from people and information; it cannot remove technical or market risks, though it makes them visible sooner.

The hazards of communication error asked 5×

“Explain the hazards of communication error in a project.”

2079 Bhadra, 2076 Chaitra, 2076 Ashwin, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin (each time with “why reporting system is required”)

Only partly in the notes: page 141 and slide 258 say poor communication is the greatest threat to projects; the hazards themselves are not listed.

  1. Wrong requirements built: a misunderstood requirement becomes working software that solves the wrong problem, found only at acceptance.
  2. Duplicated or omitted work: two people each assume the other is doing a task, or neither does.
  3. Schedule and cost overrun: problems reported late are fixed late, and at a higher cost.
  4. Conflict and loss of trust within the team and with the client.
  5. Scope creep: verbal agreements that are never written down or costed.
  6. Loss of reputation and of the client, and legal dispute where a contract is involved.
  • Also: wrong management decisions taken on stale or over-optimistic information; low morale when people learn of changes last; safety or security incidents when warnings do not reach the right person.
The example that makes the answer The costliest communication error in software is a requirement that the client and the developer understand differently. Neither notices, because both believe they agree, and it is found only at user acceptance testing, when correcting it costs the most.

Answers: “Explain the hazards of communication error in a project.” Five sittings, always with why a reporting system is required.

How it decodes: six words, six hazards, in rising order of damage. Wild dogs only chase the slow lizards; write the first three if time is short.

  1. WWild Wrong requirements built, found only at acceptance testing
  2. DDogs Duplicated or omitted work
  3. OOnly Overrun of schedule and cost
  4. CChase Conflict and loss of trust
  5. SSlow Scope creep from unwritten agreements
  6. LLizards Loss of reputation and of the client

Formal against informal, and horizontal against vertical communication asked 4×

“Compare: Formal versus informal communication”

2082 Baishakh, 2076 Ashwin

“Compare: Horizontal vs. vertical communication and their degree of formalness”

2081 Bhadra, 2073 Shrawan

Only partly in the notes: page 145 says only that formal means a project report and informal means face to face; horizontal and vertical communication are not in the notes or slides.

DIRECTIONS OF COMMUNICATION IN A PROJECT Formal communication follows the organisation chart and is recorded; the informal grapevine cuts across it. Project manager Development lead Testing lead Business analyst Developer Developer Tester Analyst downward instructions, goals, feedback upward status, problems, suggestions horizontal peers coordinate informal: the grapevine, across the chart, unrecorded Solid: formal, along the chart (reports, minutes, memos). Dashed: informal (conversation, chat).
Formal communicationInformal communication
ChannelOfficial, along the organisation chartUnofficial, along relationships: the grapevine
FormMostly written: reports, minutes, memos, contracts (the notes: a project report)Mostly spoken: conversation, chat, corridor talk (the notes: face to face)
RecordDocumented and traceableUsually no record
SpeedSlowerFaster
ReliabilityHigh: it can be checkedLower: distortion builds up as it passes on
Use it forDecisions, approvals, contracts, anything you may need to proveQuick coordination, early warning, trust
Vertical communicationHorizontal communication
DirectionUp and down the hierarchyAcross, between peers at the same level
CarriesDownward: instructions, goals, policy, feedback. Upward: status, problems, suggestionsCoordination, sharing information, solving problems together
PurposeControl and directionCoordination and cooperation
Degree of formalnessMore formal, upward most of all, because it goes to someone with authority over the senderLess formal: peers talk directly and often informally
RiskFiltering: bad news is softened at each level on the way upCan bypass managers, who lose sight of decisions
ExampleThe PM assigns a sprint goal; a lead reports a slipped milestoneThe development lead and the testing lead agree a release date
  • The link between the two comparisons: vertical communication is usually formal and horizontal usually informal, so upward reports need the most care, and a project manager must go looking for problems rather than wait to be told.

Communication skill against communication management, and resolving conflict asked 1×

“What is difference between communication skills and communication management? How does the communication skill help to resolve conflicts in ICT project? Explain with example.”

2072 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: slide 268 lists communication skills as a tool of information distribution and page 23 names negotiation as a manager’s skill; the difference and the use in conflict are not explained.

Communication skillCommunication management
What it isA personal ability: speaking, writing, listening, presenting, persuadingA set of project processes: planning, distribution, performance reporting, closure
Belongs toA personThe project
QuestionCan this person get a message across, and understand others?Does the right information reach the right people at the right time?
Built byPractice, training, feedbackThe communication management plan, reports, meetings, systems
Without the otherA skilled speaker with no plan: information still misses peopleA perfect plan run by someone who cannot listen: messages arrive but are not understood

How communication skill helps resolve conflict

  • Active listening: finds what each side actually needs, behind what it demands.
  • Separating people from the problem: talk about the issue, not the person, which lowers the heat.
  • Asking questions instead of asserting: brings the underlying interests out.
  • Choosing the medium: conflict is handled face to face, not by email (slide 269).
  • Confirming the agreement in writing, so it does not flare up again.
  • Using the right mode: confronting or problem solving (best, it removes the cause), compromising, smoothing, forcing (wins, but damages relationships), withdrawing.
An example The developers and the testers of an MIS blame each other for a late release: testers say builds arrive broken, developers say bug reports are vague. The project manager meets both leads together, listens to each, and restates the real problem: no agreed definition of a testable build and no bug report template. They agree both, and the manager confirms it by email. The conflict ends because its cause was found through communication, not because one side won.

Status reporting against progress reporting asked 1×

“Compare: Status reporting vs. progress reporting”

2075 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: page 145 names status reports, progress reports and forecasting without saying how they differ.

STATUS, PROGRESS AND FORECAST Three reports, three questions: where are we now, what did we do this period, and where will we end? CUMULATIVE WORK OR COST TIME plan forecast finish LAST REPORT TODAY progress done since the last report status actual against plan, today Status report where the project stands now, against the baseline: a snapshot Progress report what was accomplished during the period since the last report Forecast where it will end: expected finish date and final cost (EAC)
Status reportProgress report
QuestionWhere does the project stand now?What has the team accomplished during this period?
NatureA snapshot at one dateA change between two dates
ComparesActual scope, time and cost against the baseline todayWork completed this period against what was planned for the period
Typical contentEarned value position (CV, SV, CPI, SPI), open issues, risksTasks and deliverables completed, percent complete, work planned for next period
ReaderSponsors and senior managers: are we on track?Project manager and team: are we moving as planned?
Example“Week 20: 40% complete against 45% planned; CPI 0.95.”“This fortnight: login and results modules finished, 8% more of the work done.”
  • The third kind, forecasting, predicts where the project will end: the expected finish date and cost, the EAC of chapter 9.

Traceability against adaptability asked 1×

“Compare: Traceability vs. Adaptability in reviewing steps”

2073 Shrawan

Only partly in the notes: the traceability matrix is on page 148 and slide 270; adaptability is not in the notes or slides.

TraceabilityAdaptability
MeaningFollowing each requirement forward to its design, code and tests, and back from any change to everything it affectsThe ability of the system, or the process, to accommodate change quickly and cheaply
In a review, it asksIs every requirement implemented and tested, and is every item justified by a requirement?Can this design or plan absorb the changes we expect without rework?
ToolThe traceability matrix (notes p. 148)Modular design, loose coupling, iterative and agile processes, change control
GivesReliable impact analysis, an audit trail, proof of coverageSpeed of change, responsiveness to users
CostDocumentation effort, and slower changeCan lose the record of why things are as they are
Most valued inRegulated, safety or contract-bound projectsVolatile requirements, fast-moving products
  • They pull against each other, and support each other: heavy traceability slows change, yet good traceability is what makes a change safe, because its impact is known. The balance depends on how regulated and how changeable the project is.

15 channels, then 66: 6 × 5 / 2 and 12 × 11 / 2. Doubling the team more than quadrupled the channels.

Communications planning, information distribution, performance reporting, administrative closure.

Back to the channels formula and the processes.

Quality assurance is about the process and is proactive; quality control is about the product and is reactive.

Seven points in a row all above or all below the mean, or all rising or all falling: examine the process for non-random causes.

Back to QA and QC and control charts.

Chapter 12 · 4 hours · appeared in 22 of 22 sittings

Project risk management

What risk is and where it comes from, the six risk management processes, how risks are identified, analysed (qualitatively, then with numbers), responded to and monitored. The most examined chapter of CT 701: in every sitting.

What this chapter is about
  • Understanding risk: what risk and project risk are, their types and sources, and why risk management is essential.
  • Planning: the six processes of the PMI risk model and the risk management plan.
  • Identification: brainstorming, Delphi, interviewing, SWOT, nominal group, checklists, and the risk register.
  • Analysis: qualitative (the probability and impact matrix) and quantitative (risk exposure, decision trees and EMV, Monte Carlo simulation, sensitivity and tornado analysis).
  • Response and control: strategies for threats and opportunities, contingency, and risk monitoring with the risk audit.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Risk touches every knowledge area: each has its own risk conditions (slide 285), from scope creep to cost estimating errors.
  • Its numbers come from other chapters: three-point estimates (chapter 8), reserves and EMV (chapter 9), control charts and fishbones (chapter 10).
  • Transfer uses procurement (chapter 13): contracts and insurance move risk to a third party.
What you will learn
  1. Risk and project risk, types and sources, why manage it
  2. The six processes and the risk management plan
  3. Identification techniques and the risk register
  4. Qualitative analysis and the quantitative tools
  5. Response strategies and monitoring and control
  6. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • The quantitative tools as short notes: decision tree analysis in six sittings, the most repeated item; SWOT in four; tornado in two; sensitivity once; and four comparisons of two tools.
  • Response planning and the strategies: five sittings and the CE 701 paper.
  • The processes and the PMI model (five sittings), identification techniques (four, with Delphi and brainstorming also asked alone), why risk management is essential (four).
  • Defining risk with its sources or types (five sittings and the CE 701 paper), the risk register, usually for a college MIS (three), and qualitative against quantitative analysis (three).

12.1Understanding risk

Risk, project risk, and the terms around them asked 4×

Risk A possible future event that may affect the project positively (an opportunity) or negatively (a threat). It is the possibility of loss or damage, and it makes the project’s goals harder to achieve (notes p. 149).
  • Its two characteristics: loss and uncertainty; an event that may or may not occur and, if it does, generally causes loss (notes p. 149).
  • Risk = f(likelihood, impact): both matter (notes p. 149). A near-certain trivial event and an impossible disaster are both not worth managing.
  • The dictionary definition (slide 280): “the possibility of loss or injury”; any event that could prevent the project realising its expected goal.
  • Positive and negative (slide 280): a positive risk brings good things, such as finishing before the delivery date or a higher return; a negative risk brings loss, such as late delivery or overspending.
  • Risk management is like insurance: an investment (slide 280).
Project risk An uncertain event or condition that, if it occurs, has a positive or negative effect on a project objective such as time, cost, scope or quality (slide 281, notes p. 149).
  • Risk exists on all projects; whether it occurs depends on the nature of the risk and the environment (slide 281).
  • Risk changes as the project progresses, so it is reassessed as risk events approach and reviewed at regular intervals (slide 281, notes p. 149).
  • All risks have consequences; not all are bad, but all need planning (slide 281).
  • The customer’s tolerance for risk must be considered (notes p. 149).
  • Risk and issue (beyond your notes): a risk is in the future; once it happens it is an issue, to be managed rather than planned for.
The notes’ risk triangle
A triangle with risk at the centre and hazard, exposure and vulnerability on its three sides
The slides’ risk triangle
A triangle with schedule at the top corner and risk and issue at the two bottom corners
Two risk triangles. The notes draw risk inside hazard, exposure and vulnerability; the slides join risk and issue to the schedule they affect. Course notes, p. 150; Course slides, slide 284
  • The risk triangle represents the impact of the project’s risks and issues on its schedule (notes p. 150, slide 284). The notes’ figure uses the classic form: risk grows with the hazard, the exposure to it and the vulnerability.

Terms (notes p. 150)

  • Risk tolerance: the amount of risk that is acceptable.
  • Risk averse: someone who does not want to take risks.
  • Risk factors: the probability of occurrence; the range of possible outcomes; the expected timing of the event; the anticipated frequency of risk events from that source.
Risk audit Evaluating and documenting how well the risk responses deal with the identified risks and their root causes, and how effective the overall risk management process is (notes p. 151, slide 299). It can be done as part of a regular quality assurance audit (slide 299).
In the exam
  • “Define project risk” (2081 Baishakh), “What is risk?” (2080 Baishakh), “Define ‘risk’” (CE 701): the definition with both directions, the two characteristics, likelihood and impact, and the project risk points.
  • “Define project risk and risk audits” (2078 Bhadra): add the risk audit definition.
Asked in past papers
  • Define project risk. Discuss about sources of risk in IT projects. (2081 Baishakh Q12)
  • What is Risk? What are the sources of risk in IT project? Explain brief one method each for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of risk. How risk can be response? (2080 Baishakh Q5a)
  • Define project risk and risk audits. Differentiate the qualitative risk analysis and quantitative risk analysis process. (2078 Bhadra Q3)
  • Define 'risk'. Explain various sources of project risk. Elaborate risk response planning. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q5)

Types of risk, and sources of risk in IT projects asked 6×

Types of risk (notes p. 149)

  1. Project risk: from the technical aspect of the work or the work product.
  2. Process risk: from the formation and processes of the project, or the methodology used.
  3. Product or technical risk: affects quality, performance, or whether the product can be implemented at all.
  4. Business risk: affects the organisation developing or procuring the software.
  5. Known risks: easily uncovered.
  6. Predictable risks: extrapolated from past project experience.
  7. Unpredictable risks: may or may not occur, and are extremely difficult to identify.
  • Two different axes: the first four say where a risk comes from, the last three how knowable it is. Known risks get a response plan; unpredictable ones need a reserve, because a risk that cannot be named cannot be planned for.

Common risks in IT projects (notes p. 150), with examples

CategoryExamples in an ICT project
Market riskA competitor releases first; the product is no longer wanted when it ships
Financial riskBudget cut mid-project; the exchange rate raises imported hardware costs; the client pays late
Technology riskAn immature or obsolete platform; integration with a legacy system fails; performance targets cannot be met
People riskA key developer resigns; skills are short; users do not adopt the system
Structure or process riskUnclear requirements; no change control; a weak project manager in a functional organisation

Sources of risk in IT projects (slide 288), each with its question

  • Technical risk: new, unproven or complex technology: what if it does not work?
  • Quality risk: the level of expectations: what if the quality measures are set too high?
  • Financial risk: the budget: what if the project goes over budget?
  • Project management risk: improper project management: what if the time and resource allocation was wrong?
  • External risk: things outside the project, such as nature and politics.

Potential risk conditions in each knowledge area (slide 285)

Knowledge areaRisk conditions
IntegrationInadequate planning; poor resource allocation; poor integration management; lack of post-project review
ScopePoor definition of scope or work packages; incomplete definition
TimeErrors in estimating time or resource availability; errors in determining the critical path; poor allocation and management of float; early release of competitive products
CostEstimating errors; inadequate productivity, cost, change, or contingency
QualityPoor attitude toward quality; substandard design, materials or workmanship; inadequate quality assurance program
Human resourcesPoor conflict management; poor project organisation and definition of responsibilities; absence of leadership
CommunicationsCarelessness in planning or communicating; lack of consultation with key stakeholders
RiskIgnoring risk; unclear analysis of risk; poor insurance management
ProcurementUnenforceable conditions or contract clauses; adversarial relations
  • For a Nepali ICT project (beyond your notes): unreliable power and connectivity; engineers leaving for jobs abroad mid-project; procurement delays under the Public Procurement Act.
  • Three typical software risks with two countermeasures each are worked at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Discuss about sources of risk in IT projects” (2081 Baishakh, 2080 Baishakh) and “Explain various sources of project risk” (CE 701): the notes’ five categories with examples and the slides’ five sources; the knowledge area table for a longer answer.
  • “Explain different types of risk” (2072 Kartik) and the short note “Categories of risk” (2070 Ashad): the seven types on their two axes.
  • “Describe three typical risks that can occur in a software project and for each suggest two possible countermeasures” (2073 Shrawan): worked at the end.
Asked in past papers
  • Define project risk. Discuss about sources of risk in IT projects. (2081 Baishakh Q12)
  • What is Risk? What are the sources of risk in IT project? Explain brief one method each for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of risk. How risk can be response? (2080 Baishakh Q5a)
  • Risk Management is an essential part of project management. Describe three typical risks that can occur in a software project and for each of these risks suggest two possible countermeasures. (2073 Shrawan Q5)
  • Explain different types of Risk and illustrate the Risk management model with block diagram according to PMI Project Risk Management process. (2072 Kartik Q6)
  • Write short note on: a) Project stakeholders b) Project management information system c) Critical Chain Scheduling d) Categories of Risk e) Balanced Score Card f) Constructive Cost Model (COCOMO) (2070 Ashad Q16)
  • Define 'risk'. Explain various sources of project risk. Elaborate risk response planning. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q5)

Answers: “Explain different types of risk” (2072 Kartik) and the short note “Categories of risk” (2070 Ashad). The seven types, in the notes’ order.

How it decodes: seven words, seven types. Pandit Pradhan, who kept a dog from Pokhara, flew away. The first four words are where a risk comes from, three P words and a B; the last three are how knowable it is: known, predictable, unpredictable.

  1. PPandit Project risk
  2. PPradhan Process risk
  3. PPokhara Product (technical) risk
  4. BBata Business risk
  5. KKukur Known risks
  6. PPaaleko Predictable risks
  7. UUdaayo Unpredictable risks

Why risk management is essential asked 4×

The notes’ argument (notes p. 151)

  • Risk involves change in mind, opinion, actions or place.
  • Risk is the possibility of loss or damage; it hinders meeting the project objectives.
  • Risk concerns the future, which is exactly what a plan is about.
  • Risk contains choice, and the uncertainty that the choice itself brings.
  • So risk is certain, like death and taxes, and must be managed.

What risk management gives a project (notes p. 151)

  • Many project problems are reduced by risk analysis, yet risk management is often overlooked.
  • It finds and avoids problems, and helps software project managers prevent surprises, improve negotiations, meet customer requirements, and reduce schedule slips and cost overruns.
  • Its objective (slide 279): to increase the probability and impact of positive events, and decrease those of negative events; to minimise potential risks while maximising potential opportunities.
  • It is an investment, like insurance (slide 280).
Results of good risk management Unlike crisis management, good project risk management often goes unnoticed: well-run projects look almost effortless, but a lot of work goes into running them well. Project managers should aim to make their jobs look easy (notes p. 161).
In the exam
Asked in past papers
  • Why risk management is an essential part of project management? Describe the risk identification techniques in ICT project. (2079 Bhadra Q9)
  • Why risk management is important in project management? What are the quantitative risk analysis processes? Write a brief note. (2076 Ashwin Q5)
  • Risk management is an essential part of project management. Describe the risk identification techniques in IT project. (2074 Ashwin Q7b)
  • Risk Management is an essential part of project management. Describe three typical risks that can occur in a software project and for each of these risks suggest two possible countermeasures. (2073 Shrawan Q5)

12.2Risk management planning

Project risk management and its six processes asked 4×

Project risk management The systematic process of identifying, analysing and responding to project risk (slide 279, notes p. 150): maximising the results of positive risks and minimising the consequences of negative events.

The six processes (slide 279, notes pp. 151 to 161)

  1. Risk management planning: deciding how to approach and plan the risk management activities for the project.
  2. Risk identification: determining which risks are likely to affect the project and documenting their characteristics.
  3. Qualitative risk analysis: characterising and analysing risks, and prioritising their effects on the project objectives.
  4. Quantitative risk analysis: measuring the probability and consequences of risks.
  5. Risk response planning: taking steps to enhance opportunities and reduce threats to the project objectives.
  6. Risk monitoring and control: monitoring known risks, identifying new ones, reducing risks, and evaluating how well the risk reduction works.
  • The notes group them in two (notes p. 151): planning (plan, identify, analyse qualitatively and quantitatively, plan responses) and controlling and monitoring.
  • The order is the logic: nothing can be analysed before it is identified, and quantitative analysis is spent only on the risks qualitative analysis ranked high.
Risk management loop: risk management plan, then identification, qualitative analysis, quantitative analysis, response planning, and monitoring and control, back to identification
The risk process as a loop: plan how, identify the risks, analyse them qualitatively and then quantitatively, plan the responses, then monitor and control, and go round again. Course notes, p. 152
  • The PMI model as a block diagram: the six boxes in order, with an arrow from monitoring and control back to identification, because new risks appear as the project moves.
In the exam
  • “What is a project risk management? Explain the processes involved briefly” (2069 Chaitra; also 2080 Bhadra) and the short note “Project risk management” (2079 Baishakh): the definition and the six processes.
  • “Illustrate the risk management model with block diagram according to PMI project risk management process” (2072 Kartik): draw the loop and label each box.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain about the project risk management and describe different types of tools and techniques for risk identification and management. (2080 Bhadra Q7)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgments d) Contract (project) closure procedure e) Project Risk Management (2079 Baishakh Q12)
  • Explain different types of Risk and illustrate the Risk management model with block diagram according to PMI Project Risk Management process. (2072 Kartik Q6)
  • What is a Project Risk Management? Explain the processes involved briefly. (2069 Chaitra Q12)

Answers: “Explain the processes involved” and “illustrate the risk management model with block diagram”. The six processes in order.

How it decodes: six words, six processes. Panicking idiots quietly quit, and return on Monday. Two Q words, in order: qualitative before quantitative.

  1. PPanicking Planning risk management
  2. IIdiots Identification of risks
  3. QQuietly Qualitative risk analysis
  4. QQuit Quantitative risk analysis
  5. RReturn Response planning
  6. MMonday Monitoring and control

Risk management planning and the risk management plan asked 1×

Risk management planning The process of deciding how to approach and plan the risk management activities for a project; part of project planning. Its output is the risk management plan (slide 282, notes p. 151).
  • Inputs (slide 282): the project management plan, the scope, environmental factors, organisational process assets. Tool: planning meetings and analysis.
  • The plan summarises the results of identification, qualitative and quantitative analysis and the response methods, and includes the contingency plan: a predefined action the team will take if an identified risk event occurs (slide 282).
Risk management plan The description of the procedure that will be used to manage risk throughout the project, including who is responsible for managing each area of risk (notes p. 152).

What it contains (notes p. 152, slide 286)

  • The methodology used, and the roles and responsibilities of the stakeholders.
  • The budget for risk management, and the timing of risk management activities.
  • Risk categories; how risk probability and impact are determined; the probability and impact matrix.
  • Revised stakeholders’ tolerances.
  • Reporting formats, and tracking of related tasks and issues.

Questions a risk management plan answers (slide 283)

  • Why is it important to take, or not take, this risk for the project objectives?
  • What is the specific risk, and what are the mitigation deliverables?
  • How will it be mitigated?
  • Who is responsible for carrying out the plan?
  • When will the milestones of the mitigation approach occur?
  • How much resource is needed to mitigate this risk?
In the exam
  • “Project risk management plan versus risk response plan” (2081 Bhadra): the plan from here, then the comparison.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: i) Horizontal versus vertical communication ii) Project risk management plan versus risk response plan iii) Control chart versus Pareto chart tools in project quality management iv) Project DPR document versus project scope document (2081 Bhadra Q5)

12.3Risk identification

Risk identification and its techniques asked 8×

Risk identification Understanding what potential events might hurt or enhance a particular project; part of project planning. Its main output is the list of identified risks, the start of the risk register (notes p. 153, slide 287).
  • It is iterative: new risks appear or become known as the project moves through its life cycle (slide 287).
  • Tools (slide 287): documentation review; information gathering; checklists; assumptions analysis; diagramming techniques. Output: the risk register.
TechniqueHow it worksWatch out for
Brainstorming (notes p. 154)A group generates ideas about a problem by collecting them without thinking and judgmentDo not overuse it: it can lead to groupthink and fewer ideas
Delphi technique (notes pp. 154, 155, slide 289)Like brainstorming, but experts need not meet and stay anonymous (email works). Each answers a questionnaire; a facilitator summarises the views and sends them round again, round after round, until they convergeSlow; depends on an honest facilitator
Interviewing (notes p. 155)Fact finding face to face, by phone, email or messaging, with people who have done similar projects, experts and stakeholdersOnly as good as the people chosen
SWOT analysis (notes p. 155)Examines the project from each point of view: strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats; finds the broad negative and positive risksBroad: misses detailed technical risks
Nominal group technique (notes p. 156)In one room, each person writes the risks they see; the papers go to a facilitator and onto the wall; the risks are then reviewed and prioritisedNeeds everyone together
Checklists (notes p. 153)Lists of risks met on past projects, walked through systematicallyFinds only risks someone has met before
Reviewing documents, diagramming (slide 289)Reading the plan and scope; cause and effect diagrams, flowchartsOnly as good as the documents
Brainstorming, Delphi and nominal group: the difference All three collect risks from a group; they differ in when people hear each other. Brainstorming: at once, which is fast but lets loud voices and groupthink win. Delphi: never directly, anonymous rounds through a facilitator, which removes the pressure of rank but is slow. Nominal group: each writes alone first, then the group discusses, which keeps most of the independence at meeting speed.

SWOT analysis (notes p. 155), the notes’ technology project example

SWOT ANALYSIS: A TECHNOLOGY PROJECT (NOTES P. 155) Internal factors above, external below; helpful on the left, harmful on the right. Weaknesses and threats become risks. S Strengths INTERNAL, HELPFUL The technology has been installed by other large companies in our industry. W Weaknesses INTERNAL, HARMFUL We have never installed this technology before. O Opportunities EXTERNAL, HELPFUL It will let us cut the cycle time to market for new products. T Threats EXTERNAL, HARMFUL Training and simulation may overlap with product updates, new versions and external changes to our technology. INTERNAL EXTERNAL For risk identification: weaknesses and threats are negative risks; strengths and opportunities point to positive risks.
  • Internal against external: strengths and weaknesses are inside the organisation and can be controlled; opportunities and threats come from outside.
  • Opportunities are things, conditions or events that let an organisation stand out from competitors and improve its standing in the market (notes p. 155).
  • For risk: weaknesses and threats become negative risks, strengths and opportunities positive ones. A second SWOT example, for a film business, is in the statement of work of chapter 7.
In the exam
  • “Describe the risk identification techniques in ICT (IT) project” (2079 Bhadra, 2074 Ashwin), “describe different types of tools and techniques for risk identification and management” (2080 Bhadra), “What are different tools and techniques for risk identification?” (2070 Ashad): the definition, then the techniques table.
  • “Discuss brainstorming and Delphi technique for risk management” (2070 Ashad) and the short note “Delphi technique” (2075 Ashwin): each in full, then the difference.
  • Short note, “SWOT analysis” (2082 Bhadra, 2075 Chaitra, 2075 Ashwin, 2073 Shrawan): the four parts, the grid with an example, and its use in risk.
Asked in past papers
  • Write Short Notes on: (Any Two) a) PMBOK b) Balanced Scorecard c) SWOT d) COCOMO Model e) Pareto Chart (2082 Bhadra Q11)
  • Explain about the project risk management and describe different types of tools and techniques for risk identification and management. (2080 Bhadra Q7)
  • Why risk management is an essential part of project management? Describe the risk identification techniques in ICT project. (2079 Bhadra Q9)
  • Write short notes: a) SWOT Analysis b) Balanced Scorecard c) Risk Register d) Custom processes for IT Projects (2075 Chaitra Q7)
  • Write short notes on: (any four) i) Balance Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure iv) Delphi Technique v) ICT Code of Ethics (2075 Ashwin Q9)
  • Risk management is an essential part of project management. Describe the risk identification techniques in IT project. (2074 Ashwin Q7b)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balanced Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure (2073 Shrawan Q9)
  • What are different tools and techniques for risk identification? Discuss brainstorming and Delphi Technique for risk management. (2070 Ashad Q13)

Answers: “Describe the risk identification techniques”, four sittings. Six techniques.

How it decodes: six words, six techniques. Big dogs inspect the small cats every night.

  1. BBig Brainstorming
  2. DDogs Delphi technique
  3. IInspect Interviewing
  4. SSmall SWOT analysis
  5. CCats Checklists
  6. NNightly Nominal group technique

The risk register asked 3×

Risk register A tool of risk and project management used to identify potential risks in a project or an organisation; it holds the outcomes of the risk management processes as they are carried out. Its electronic form is the risk database (notes p. 153).
  • It contains (notes p. 153): the list of identified risks; the list of potential responses; the root causes of risk; updated risk categories.

Its fields (notes pp. 153, 154)

  1. Risk ID: a name or number.
  2. Risk description: a brief explanation.
  3. Risk category: schedule, budget, technical, external and so on.
  4. Risk analysis: the probability and impact, qualitative or quantitative.
  5. Risk probability: the likelihood, as a qualitative or quantitative value.
  6. Risk priority: a score from impact times probability; the highest first.
  7. Risk response: the action that limits its effect, also recorded in the risk response plan.
  8. Risk owner: the team member who deploys the response and supervises it.
  • One owner per risk: a risk owned by “the team” is owned by nobody.

A risk register for an Engineering College MIS (assumptions: a web MIS for records, exams and fees; six months; a team of five)

IDRiskCategoryProbabilityImpactPriorityStatusResponseOwner
R1Departments add requirements after sign-offScope70%High1OpenMitigate: change control board, phased releasesProject manager
R2Lead developer leaves before deliveryPeople40%High2OpenMitigate: pair programming, design documents, cross trainingTeam lead
R3Staff resist the new system and keep paper registersPeople50%High2OpenMitigate: involve users early, training, phased cut-overSponsor
R4Student records migrated from paper are incompleteTechnical60%Medium3OngoingMitigate: pilot migration, reconciliation reportSystem administrator
R5Server purchase delayed by the tender processExternal50%Medium4OpenTransfer: rent cloud hosting instead of buyingProcurement officer
R6Power cut during result publicationExternal30%High5OpenAccept with contingency: UPS and an offline backup procedureSystem administrator
  • The notes’ own example (notes p. 154) has the same columns: risk 1, “product delivery: failure of supply”, impact high, probability 60%, priority 1, status ongoing, mitigation “consider all plans and do work effectively”.
  • Write responses with a named strategy (mitigate, transfer, accept, avoid): it shows the register came from a method.
In the exam
  • “Prepare a risk register for a IS project which is to be developed as Engineering College MIS” (2076 Chaitra) and “Risk register” with sample illustrative cases (2082 Baishakh): state the assumptions, then draw the table. Short note “Risk register” (2075 Chaitra): the definition, contents, fields, and a two-row example.
Asked in past papers
  • Briefly explain followings with sample illustrative cases and assuming appropriate data/info on your own: i) Risk register ii) Pareto chart iii) Bidder selection scheme (2082 Baishakh Q6)
  • Prepare a risk register for a IS project which is to be developed as Engineering College MIS. You are free to make your own assumptions regarding the system. (2076 Chaitra Q4)
  • Write short notes: a) SWOT Analysis b) Balanced Scorecard c) Risk Register d) Custom processes for IT Projects (2075 Chaitra Q7)

12.4Qualitative risk analysis

Qualitative risk analysis, and how it differs from quantitative asked 3×

Risk analysis Analysing the identified risks, their probability of occurrence and their impacts; the results go into an updated risk register with the priority of each risk. It has two methods, qualitative and quantitative (notes p. 156).
Qualitative risk analysis Evaluating the impact and likelihood of identified risks, and prioritising them by their potential effect on the project, on qualitative factors only; part of planning (notes p. 156, slide 290).
  • Tools (notes p. 156, slide 290): the probability and impact matrix; Top Ten Risk Item Tracking; expert judgment; risk data quality assessment. Output: an updated risk register.
  • Top Ten Risk Item Tracking: keeps the ten highest risks in front of management, with each risk’s rank this period and last period and the progress of its response, reviewed at every status meeting.
  • Watch list: risks that are low priority but still identified as potential risks (notes p. 156), reviewed now and then because priorities change.
Probability and impact matrix A table of risk level based on the likelihood of occurrence and the potential harm to the project (notes p. 157, slide 291).

The notes’ qualitative matrix (notes p. 157)

Probability \ ImpactVery lowLowModerateHighVery high
Very highMediumMediumHighHighHigh
HighLowMediumMediumHighHigh
ModerateLowMediumMediumMediumHigh
LowLowLowLowMediumHigh
Very lowLowLowLowMediumHigh

The slides’ numeric matrix (slide 291): risk score = probability × impact

PROBABILITY AND IMPACT MATRIX (SLIDE 291) Risk score = probability x impact. High at 0.18 and above, moderate from 0.05 to 0.18, low below 0.05. 0.9 0.045 0.09 0.18 0.36 0.72 0.7 0.035 0.07 0.14 0.28 0.56 0.5 0.025 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.3 0.015 0.03 0.06 0.12 0.24 0.1 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.80 IMPACT PROBABILITY High 0.18 or more: respond now Moderate 0.05 up to 0.18: plan Low below 0.05: watch list Example: probability 0.5 and impact 0.40 give 0.20: high.

Qualitative against quantitative risk analysis (notes p. 158)

Qualitative risk analysisQuantitative risk analysis
What it isEvaluating the impact and possibility of identified risksDetermining numerically the probability of each risk and its consequences for the project objectives
ScopePrioritises all risks by their potential effectDeals only with the risks marked for further analysis by qualitative analysis
MathematicsComplex, because there is no straightforward mathsDirect calculating methods and tools make it simple
TimeTime consuming to identify, record and rank each riskLess time consuming, as tools are used
EaseEasy to use: no tool neededReliance on tools can make it hard for the team
WhenAll projects, whatever their complexityOnly complex projects
RankingRisk ranked between 0 and 1Risks ranked closest to 1 are taken first, and their effect on the outcome calculated
ToolsProbability and impact matrix, top ten tracking, expert judgmentRisk exposure, decision trees and EMV, Monte Carlo simulation, sensitivity analysis
In the exam
  • “Differentiate the qualitative risk analysis and quantitative risk analysis process” (2078 Bhadra) and “Qualitative versus quantitative risk assessment” (2082 Baishakh): the two definitions and the notes’ table.
  • “Explain brief one method each for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of risk” (2080 Baishakh): the probability and impact matrix, and risk exposure or a decision tree.
Asked in past papers
  • Compare the followings: i) Formal versus informal communication ii) Qualitative versus quantitative risk assessment iii) Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis iv) Project life cycle phases versus various process groups (2082 Baishakh Q3)
  • What is Risk? What are the sources of risk in IT project? Explain brief one method each for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of risk. How risk can be response? (2080 Baishakh Q5a)
  • Define project risk and risk audits. Differentiate the qualitative risk analysis and quantitative risk analysis process. (2078 Bhadra Q3)

12.5Quantitative risk analysis and modelling techniques

Quantitative risk analysis: exposure, decision trees, simulation, sensitivity asked 10×

Quantitative risk analysis Determining numerically the probability of each risk and its consequences for the project objectives; part of planning. It identifies the risks that need the most attention, quantifies risk exposure, and sizes the cost and schedule contingency reserves (notes p. 157, slide 292).
  • Inputs, tools, output (slide 292): the PM plan, scope, risk management plan and risk register go in; data gathering and representation techniques and quantitative analysis and modelling techniques are applied; an updated risk register comes out.

1. Risk exposure (notes pp. 157, 158)

  1. Determine the probability of each risk.
  2. Determine the impact (cost) of each.
  3. Prepare a risk table and add up the overall risk exposure.
RE = P x C P = probability of the risk, C = cost to the project if it occurs The notes' example (p. 158): 60 reusable components were planned, but only 70% (42) can be reused, so 18 must be built. At 100 LOC each and Rs 100 per LOC: C = 18 x 100 x 100 = Rs 1,80,000 P = 80% RE = 0.80 x 1,80,000 = Rs 1,44,000 Summed over all risks, RE sizes the contingency reserve.

2. Expected monetary value and decision trees (notes p. 159, slides 293, 294)

  • EMV is the value of a decision based on its risk event probabilities and monetary values: EMV = sum of (probability × outcome). Decision trees and risk exposure are both EMV methods (notes p. 159).
  • A decision tree is a tree-shaped diagram of decisions followed by chance events, used to choose the best course of action when future outcomes are uncertain (slides 293, 294). Squares are decisions; circles are chance events; each branch carries a probability and a value.
Decision tree: project 1 has outcomes of plus 300,000 at 0.2 and minus 40,000 at 0.8 for an EMV of 28,000; project 2 has minus 50,000 at 0.2, minus 20,000 at 0.1 and plus 60,000 at 0.7 for an EMV of 30,000
The notes’ decision tree: multiply each outcome by its probability and add along each branch. Project 2 wins, EMV $30,000 against $28,000. Course notes, p. 159
The notes' tree (p. 159): Project 1: 0.2 x (+300,000) + 0.8 x (-40,000) = $28,000 Project 2: 0.2 x (-50,000) + 0.1 x (-20,000) + 0.7 x 60,000 = $30,000 Choose project 2: the higher EMV. An IT example: build in house or buy a package (Rs lakh) Build: 0.6 x 40 + 0.4 x (-10) = 24 - 4 = +20.0 Buy: 0.9 x 22 + 0.1 x 5 = 19.8 + 0.5 = +20.3 Buy has the higher EMV, and its worst case is still a gain.

3. Monte Carlo simulation (notes pp. 159, 160, slide 293)

  • What: a mathematical technique to estimate the possible outcomes of an uncertain event, by simulation: a model of the system is run many times to give a statistical distribution of the results (notes p. 159, slide 293).
  • Needs: three estimates for each variable (optimistic, most likely, pessimistic), plus the likelihood of values between them (slide 293).
  1. Evaluate the range for the variables being considered.
  2. Determine the probability distribution of each variable.
  3. For each variable, select a random value from its distribution.
  4. Run a deterministic analysis: one pass through the model.
  5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 many times to obtain the probability distribution of the results.
MONTE CARLO SIMULATION: FROM THREE ESTIMATES TO A PROBABILITY Draw a random duration for each activity from its distribution, add them up, repeat 1,000 times, and read the odds. Activity A 8 / 10 / 16 days Activity B 12 / 15 / 24 days Activity C 5 / 6 / 10 days optimistic / most likely / pessimistic (the three estimates, slide 293) x 1,000 sample, add, repeat 28 32 36 40 44 TOTAL DURATION (DAYS) 80% WHAT IT GIVES Not one date but a distribution: how likely each finish date is. Read the cumulative line 80% of the runs finish within 38 days, so promise 38 days with 80% confidence. Most likely sum: 31 days is reached in only about 11% of the runs: single estimates are optimistic.

4. Sensitivity analysis and the tornado diagram (notes pp. 159, 187, slide 293)

  • Sensitivity analysis shows the effect of changing one or more variables on an outcome; spreadsheets such as Excel are the usual tool (notes p. 159, slide 293).
  • It finds which risks have the most impact on the project (notes p. 187).
  • The tornado diagram displays it: a special bar chart with one horizontal bar per uncertain variable, arranged from the largest at the top to the smallest at the bottom, so it looks like a tornado. The vertical axis lists the variables at their base values; the horizontal axis shows how far each swings the result (notes p. 187).
  • Its use: comparing the relative importance of variables with a high degree of uncertainty; the variables at the top deserve the management attention (notes p. 187).
Table of ten risks with low and high impact, beside a tornado diagram of horizontal bars, widest at the top
A tornado diagram: each bar is how far one uncertain variable swings the result, the widest at the top. Course notes, p. 187
  • The comparisons of these tools (decision tree against simulation or tornado, cause and effect against tornado, sensitivity against SWOT) are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Decision tree analysis” (2082 Baishakh, 2081 Baishakh, 2080 Bhadra, 2079 Baishakh, 2071 Chaitra, 2070 Chaitra): the definition, squares and circles, EMV, and a small tree worked out.
  • Short notes, “Tornado analysis” (2078 Bhadra, 2070 Chaitra) and “Sensitivity analysis” (2071 Chaitra): sensitivity first, then the tornado diagram with a sketch.
  • “What are the quantitative risk analysis processes? Write a brief note.” (2076 Ashwin): the definition, risk exposure, EMV and decision trees, Monte Carlo and sensitivity, each with its method.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: (Any Four) a) Decision Tree analysis b) S-curve c) PDCA cycle d) ICT code of ethics e) Soft skills for project manager (2082 Baishakh Q8)
  • Write short notes on: a) S - curve b) Balanced Scorecard c) Pareto chart d) Application of CPM e) Decision tree analysis (2081 Baishakh Q14)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgements d) Project management and General management e) S - curve (2080 Bhadra Q13)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgments d) Contract (project) closure procedure e) Project Risk Management (2079 Baishakh Q12)
  • Compare the followings: a) Developing project management plan versus monitoring and controlling of project. b) Risk analysis using Decision tree technique versus Simulation technique. c) Data analysis using Box plot versus Scatter plot. d) Detail Project Report (DPR) document versus Request for Proposal (RFP) document. (2078 Bhadra Q6)
  • Write short notes on: a) Effective meeting conduction process b) PMI framework c) Seller selection criteria d) Tornado analysis (2078 Bhadra Q8)
  • Compare the followings: a) Functional vs. Matrix organizational structure b) Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools c) Seller (contractor) selection processes vs. contract closure processes d) Cause and effect analysis versus Tornado analysis in project risk management (2076 Chaitra Q5)
  • Why risk management is important in project management? What are the quantitative risk analysis processes? Write a brief note. (2076 Ashwin Q5)
  • Compare the followings: a) Project scoping vs. project closing b) Formal vs. Informal communication c) Sensitivity analysis vs SWOT analysis d) Tender vs. quotation process (2076 Ashwin Q7)
  • Compare the followings: i) Decision Tree vs. Tornado Analysis for risk management ii) Quotation based purchase vs. Tender based purchase for procurement process iii) Consistency vs. completeness in requirements engineering (2072 Chaitra Q9)
  • Write short notes on: a) Sensitivity analysis b) The Balanced Scorecard c) Six sigma d) Project Management Maturity e) Decision tree analysis (2071 Chaitra Q10)
  • Write short notes on: (any five) a) Balanced Scorecard b) Tornado analysis c) Critical path analysis d) Decision tree analysis e) Trends in cloud computing f) Outsourcing and off-shoring options (2070 Chaitra Q9)

12.6Risk response planning

Risk response planning and the strategies asked 6×

Risk response planning After identifying and quantifying risks, deciding how to respond to them: creating options to improve the chances of, and cut the obstacles to, the project goals, which lowers total risk; part of planning (notes p. 160, slide 295).
  • Inputs (slide 295): the risk management plan and the risk register. Tools: strategies for negative risks, for positive risks, for both, and contingent response strategies. Outputs: an updated risk register and project management plan.
  • Typical risk resolution actions (notes p. 160, slide 296): research and review; eliminate and review; reduce and protect; accept and protect.

Strategies for threats, negative risks (notes p. 160, slide 296)

  1. Avoidance: eliminating a specific threat, usually by eliminating its causes. Drop the risky feature, or use a proven technology.
  2. Acceptance: accepting the consequences if the risk occurs.
  3. Transference: shifting the consequences and the responsibility for managing them to a third party, for example by outsourcing, insurance or a fixed price contract.
  4. Mitigation: reducing the impact of the risk event, or the probability of its occurrence: more testing, backup hardware, training.

Strategies for opportunities, positive risks (notes p. 160, slide 296)

  1. Exploitation: doing whatever can be done to make sure the positive risk happens, removing its uncertainty.
  2. Sharing: giving some or all of the ownership to a third party better able to capture the opportunity.
  3. Enhancement: increasing the probability and the positive impact, by maximising the key drivers of the opportunity.
  4. Acceptance: taking no action towards the opportunity.
  5. Escalation: notifying a higher level authority (notes p. 160).

Strategies for both (notes p. 161)

  • Acceptance: allowing the consequences, should the risk occur, in a known and controlled manner; living with them.
  • Contingent response strategies: develop a contingency plan; create a contingency allowance procedure; plan for alternative development. A contingency plan runs only when a named trigger occurs.
RESPONSE STRATEGIES MIRROR EACH OTHER Learn four and you get eight. Accept is the only one that works the same in both directions. THREATS • MATA OPPORTUNITIES • EASE Mitigate reduce impact mirror Enhance raise the upside Avoid remove the cause mirror Exploit make it happen Transfer give it to a third party mirror Share partner to capture it Accept live with it same Accept take it if it comes Only AVOID removes a risk, and it does so by removing something you wanted. TRANSFER moves who pays, not whether it happens.
Residual and secondary risks Residual risks remain after all the response strategies have been carried out: even with stable hardware, it may still fail. Secondary risks are a direct result of carrying out a response: the more stable hardware may cause the peripheral devices to fail (notes p. 161).

General mitigation strategies (slide 297)

Technical risksCost risksSchedule risks
Emphasise team support and avoid a stand-alone project structureIncrease the frequency of project monitoringIncrease the frequency of project monitoring
Increase project manager authorityUse WBS and CPMUse WBS and CPM
Improve problem handling and communicationImprove communication, understanding of project goals, and team supportSelect the most experienced project manager
Increase the frequency of project monitoringIncrease project manager authority
Use WBS and CPM

How a project manager develops the risk response plan

  1. Take the prioritised risks from the risk register, highest first.
  2. Understand each one: its cause, its trigger and its effect.
  3. Choose a strategy: avoid, transfer, mitigate or accept for threats; exploit, share, enhance or accept for opportunities; escalate what is beyond the project.
  4. Plan the actions: what, by whom (one owner), by when, at what cost.
  5. Prepare contingency plans with their triggers, and reserves for accepted risks.
  6. Note residual and secondary risks, and plan for them too.
  7. Update the risk register and the project management plan, and review the responses as the project moves (risk monitoring and control).

Why risk response planning is important

  • Analysis alone changes nothing: a known risk with no response is still a surprise when it happens.
  • It lowers total risk and improves the chance of meeting the goals (notes p. 160).
  • It prepares action in advance, so the team reacts to a trigger at once instead of improvising in a crisis.
  • It assigns ownership and money: every risk has an owner and, where needed, a reserve.
  • It captures opportunities, not just threats.
In the exam
  • “Why risk response planning is important in project? What are the response strategies for negative risk?” (2075 Ashwin, 2074 Chaitra): the importance points, then the four threat strategies with examples.
  • “Explain how a project manager can develop a risk response plan? What strategies are used to mitigate threats and enhance opportunities?” (2082 Bhadra): the seven steps, then both sets of strategies.
  • “How risk can be response?” (2080 Baishakh), “Elaborate risk response planning” (CE 701) and the short note “Risk management strategies” (2081 Bhadra): the definition, resolution actions, and all the strategies.
Asked in past papers
  • Why risk response planning is important in project? What are the response strategies for negative risk? (2075 Ashwin Q8a, 2074 Chaitra Q6a)
  • Explain how a project manager can develop a risk response plan? What strategies are used to mitigate threats and enhance opportunities? (2082 Bhadra Q9)
  • Write Short Notes on: a) Stakeholder Management b) Scope Creep c) Future Trends in Project Management d) Balanced Scorecard e) Risk management strategies (2081 Bhadra Q8)
  • What is Risk? What are the sources of risk in IT project? Explain brief one method each for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of risk. How risk can be response? (2080 Baishakh Q5a)
  • Define 'risk'. Explain various sources of project risk. Elaborate risk response planning. (2070 Ashad CE 701 Q5)

Answers: “What are the response strategies for negative risk?” (2075 Ashwin, 2074 Chaitra), and the threat half of 2082 Bhadra and 2081 Bhadra.

How it decodes: MATA is mother in Nepali, and mother handles every threat one of four ways: she fixes it, dodges it, hands it to someone else, or tells you to live with it. Two A words, and they are opposites: avoid removes the risk, accept keeps it.

  1. MMitigate: reduce the impact or the probability
  2. AAvoid: eliminate the threat by eliminating its cause
  3. TTransfer: shift it, and its management, to a third party
  4. AAccept: take the consequences if it occurs

Answers: “What strategies are used to enhance opportunities?” (2082 Bhadra), the positive half. Each mirrors a threat strategy.

How it decodes: four letters, four strategies, and each has a mirror among the threats: exploit mirrors avoid, accept mirrors accept, share mirrors transfer, enhance mirrors mitigate. The notes add a fifth, escalate.

  1. EExploit: make sure it happens
  2. AAccept: take it if it comes, doing nothing towards it
  3. SShare: give ownership to whoever can best capture it
  4. EEnhance: raise its probability and positive impact

12.7Risk monitoring and control

Risk monitoring and control

Risk monitoring and control Keeping track of identified risks, monitoring residual risks, identifying new risks, executing risk plans, and evaluating how effective they are at reducing risk (notes p. 161, slide 279).
  • Monitoring risks means knowing their status; controlling risks means carrying out the risk management plans as risks occur (notes p. 161, slide 298).
  • Inputs (slide 298): the risk management plan, the risk register, approved change requests, work performance information.
  • Tools and techniques (slide 298): risk reassessment; risk audits (how well the responses work, slide 299); variance and trend analysis; status review meetings.
  • Outputs (slide 298): corrective action, change requests, updates to other plans; an updated risk register; recommended corrective and preventive actions.
  • In practice: review the register at every status meeting, watch for triggers, close risks that can no longer happen, add new ones, and check whether the reserve is being used up faster than the work progresses.

12.8Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 12.

Risk management plan against risk response plan asked 1×

“Compare: Project risk management plan versus risk response plan”

2081 Bhadra

Only partly in the notes: the risk management plan is on page 152 and slides 282 to 286, and the responses on pages 154 and 160, but the two plans are not compared.

Risk management planRisk response plan
SaysHow risk will be managed on this projectWhat will be done about each identified risk
Produced byRisk management planning, the first processRisk response planning, the fifth process
WhenEarly, before any specific risk is knownAfter identification and analysis; it grows as risks are found
ContentsMethodology, roles, budget, timing, risk categories, probability and impact definitions and matrix, tolerances, reporting formats, trackingFor each risk: the strategy, the actions, the owner, the trigger, the contingency plan, the reserve, residual and secondary risks
LevelThe processThe individual risks
ChangesRarelyConstantly, with the risk register
  • In one line: the management plan is the rulebook for handling risk; the response plan is the list of moves for the risks actually on the board.

Decision tree against simulation asked 1×

“Compare: Risk analysis using Decision tree technique versus Simulation technique”

2078 Bhadra

Only partly in the notes: each is described on pages 159 and 160 and slide 293, but they are not compared.

Decision tree (EMV)Simulation (Monte Carlo)
QuestionWhich option should we choose?What range of outcomes can we expect, and how likely is each?
InputsA few discrete decisions and chance events, each with a probability and a valueMany variables, each with a range or distribution (optimistic, most likely, pessimistic)
MethodMultiply and add along each branch, by handDraw random values and run the model hundreds or thousands of times, by computer
OutputOne expected value per optionA probability distribution: for example an 80% chance of finishing within 38 days
Best forChoosing between alternatives: build or buy, bid or notSchedule and cost risk of a whole project
LimitsGrows unmanageable with many branches; one number hides the spreadNeeds software and good distributions; results are only as good as the inputs
  • In one line: trees are for decisions, simulation is for uncertainty.

Decision tree against tornado analysis asked 1×

“Compare: Decision Tree vs. Tornado Analysis for risk management”

2072 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: the decision tree is on page 159 and the tornado diagram on page 187, which says only that decision trees are an alternative to it.

Decision treeTornado analysis
PurposeChoose the best course of action between alternativesFind which uncertain variables affect the outcome most
Built onExpected monetary value: probability times value, summed per branchSensitivity analysis: vary one variable at a time, record the swing
PictureA tree: squares for decisions, circles for chance eventsHorizontal bars, widest at the top
AnswersWhich option has the highest EMV?Where should risk management attention go first?
OutputA decision and its expected valueA ranking of the variables
  • Together: the tornado finds the variables that matter; the decision tree then weighs the options for handling them.

Cause and effect analysis against tornado analysis asked 1×

“Compare: Cause and effect analysis versus Tornado analysis in project risk management”

2076 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: the cause and effect diagram is on pages 134 to 136 and the tornado diagram on page 187, but they are not compared.

Cause and effect (fishbone)Tornado analysis
NatureQualitative: a diagram built by brainstormingQuantitative: a chart of calculated swings
DirectionBackward: why did (or could) this problem happen?Forward: which uncertainties could move the outcome most?
InputOne problem or risk event, and the team’s knowledgeA model of the outcome and a low and high value for each variable
OutputRoot causes, grouped into categoriesVariables ranked by their impact
Use in riskIdentification: finding the causes behind a riskQuantitative analysis: prioritising the risks with the biggest effect

Sensitivity analysis against SWOT analysis asked 1×

“Compare: Sensitivity analysis vs SWOT analysis”

2076 Ashwin

Only partly in the notes: sensitivity analysis is on pages 159 and 187 and SWOT on page 155, but they are not compared.

Sensitivity analysisSWOT analysis
NatureQuantitative: numbers in a modelQualitative: judgments in a two by two grid
Looks atThe project’s own variables: cost, duration, demandInternal strengths and weaknesses, external opportunities and threats
MethodChange one variable at a time, measure the effect on the outcomeList and discuss factors in each quadrant
OutputWhich variables matter most (a tornado diagram)Broad positive and negative risks, and a strategy
StageQuantitative risk analysisRisk identification and planning
ToolA spreadsheet (slide 293)A meeting and a grid

Three typical software project risks, with two countermeasures each asked 1×

“Risk Management is an essential part of project management. Describe three typical risks that can occur in a software project and for each of these risks suggest two possible countermeasures.”

2073 Shrawan

Only partly in the notes: page 150 and slide 288 list sources of risk and slide 297 general mitigation strategies, but three specific risks with countermeasures are not given. Why risk management is essential is in 12.1.

RiskWhy it happensCountermeasure 1Countermeasure 2
1. Requirements volatility: requirements change a lot after development startsUsers cannot say what they want until they see something working; the business moves during a long projectMitigate: an iterative or agile life cycle, so change is absorbed each iterationMitigate: formal change control through a change control board, so every change is costed and baselined
2. Loss of key personnel: a developer with critical knowledge leaves mid-projectSmall teams concentrate knowledge in individuals; the ICT job market in Nepal is very mobileMitigate: pair programming and code review, so no module has a single owner; keep design documents currentMitigate: cross training and a documented handover; retention incentives tied to milestones
3. Technology or integration failure: the platform cannot meet performance needs, or will not integrate with a legacy systemThe technology was chosen before its limits were tested; legacy interfaces are often undocumentedMitigate: a proof of concept in the first iteration, before the architecture is fixedAvoid or transfer: choose a proven technology, or contract the integration to the legacy vendor who owns the interface
  • Label each countermeasure with its strategy: it shows the answer comes from the framework. Other good choices: cost overrun (mitigate by bottom-up estimates and earned value tracking) and schedule slip (mitigate by CPM, frequent monitoring and an experienced project manager, slide 297).

Threats: mitigate, avoid, transfer, accept. Opportunities: exploit, accept, share, enhance (and escalate). Pairs: avoid with exploit, mitigate with enhance, transfer with share, accept with accept.

0.5 × 0.40 = 0.20: high (0.18 or more, slide 291).

Back to the strategies and the matrix.

n(n - 1) / 2 channels for n people.

Status: where the project stands now against the baseline. Progress: what was done during the period.

Back to channels and status against progress.

Chapter 13 · 3 hours · appeared in 19 of 22 sittings

Project procurement management

Buying what the project cannot, or should not, make itself: the six procurement processes from the make or buy decision to contract closure, contract types and who carries the risk, public tendering, seller selection and contract administration.

What this chapter is about
  • What procurement is and why projects need it; the six processes and their flow.
  • Planning: the make or buy decision, environmental factors and process assets, procurement documents (RFP, RFQ, statement of work), evaluation criteria, contract types.
  • Getting and choosing sellers: bidder conferences, advertising, the public tender procedure, e-bidding, seller selection and negotiation.
  • Managing the contract to the end: contract administration and contract closure.
Where it fits in the subject
  • Procurement starts from scope (chapter 7): the contract statement of work is a scope statement for one contract.
  • It moves risk (chapter 12): a contract is the transfer strategy.
  • It is controlled like any work (chapter 7), and contract closure comes before the project’s own closing. Outsourcing is in chapter 14.
What you will learn
  1. Procurement and why it is needed, the six processes
  2. Plan purchases: make or buy
  3. Plan contracting: documents and evaluation criteria, contract types
  4. Request seller responses, the public tender procedure, e-procurement
  5. Select sellers, contract administration, contract closure
  6. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • “What is project procurement management, and what processes are adopted for procurement in an ICT project?”: seven sittings, almost word for word.
  • Contract closure as a short note (five sittings), and how to manage it or how it differs from project closing.
  • Public procurement: the Nepali government procedure, tender against quotation (two), e-bidding issues, and a tender specification for a college digital library.
  • Seller selection (two), contract types with the need for procurement (one).

13.1Procurement management process flow

Procurement, and why projects need it asked 9×

Procurement Buying goods and/or services from a third party: the group of processes required to purchase the products, services, goods or results needed from outside the project team to do the work (notes p. 162, slide 301). In short, acquiring the necessary products or services from the best suppliers at the best price (slide 302).
Project procurement management The processes required to acquire goods and services for a project from outside the performing organisation. An organisation can be the buyer or the seller under a contract or other agreement (notes p. 162).
  • Who provides it: suppliers, vendors, contractors, subcontractors or sellers; “suppliers” is the most widely used term (notes p. 162).
  • How common it is: most organisations do some outsourcing to meet their IT needs, and spend most of that money within their own country (notes p. 162).

Why procurement (slide 302)

  1. To reduce both fixed and recurrent costs.
  2. To let the organisation focus on its core business.
  3. To access skills and technologies it does not have.
  4. To provide flexibility: capacity when it is needed, not all the time.
  5. To increase accountability: a contract makes the seller answerable for results.
  • Why it is a crucial part of project management: much of the budget passes through contracts, so a bad contract or a bad seller can sink the project; contracts are legally binding (notes p. 165), so mistakes are costly to undo; and a contract is how risk is transferred (chapter 12).
In the exam
  • “What do you mean by project procurement management?” (2082 Bhadra, 2079 Bhadra, 2079 Baishakh, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Chaitra, 2074 Ashwin, 2071 Chaitra): both definitions, buyer and seller, then the six processes.
  • “Explain needs of procurement” (2080 Bhadra) and “What makes the project procurement process of very crucial component in project management?” (2072 Kartik): the five reasons and the crucial points.
Asked in past papers
  • What do you mean by project procurement management? Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project. (2079 Bhadra Q10a, 2075 Ashwin Q8b, 2074 Chaitra Q7a, 2074 Ashwin Q8a)
  • What do you mean by project procurement management? Discuss on different processes adopted for procurement in ICT project. (2082 Bhadra Q10)
  • Explain needs of procurement. Discuss about contract types. (2080 Bhadra Q11)
  • Explain about the project procurement management and explain the types of processes adopted for procurement. (2079 Baishakh Q9)
  • What makes the project procurement process of very crucial component in project management? What are typical issues to be considered in e-bidding as a procurement processing tool? (2072 Kartik Q9)
  • What do you mean by Project Procurement management and what are the different processes adopted for procurement? (2071 Chaitra Q5)

The six procurement processes asked 8×

The procurement processes (notes p. 162, slide 301)

  1. Plan purchases and acquisitions: decide what to buy, when to buy it, and how; first, whether to buy at all. Planning.
  2. Plan contracting: describe the requirements for the goods or services, and find potential suppliers. Planning.
  3. Request seller responses: obtain information, quotes, bids, offers or proposals from sellers. Planning (notes p. 168).
  4. Select sellers: evaluate the potential sellers, choose, and negotiate the contract. Executing (notes p. 169).
  5. Administer the contract: manage the relationship with the selected seller. Controlling (notes p. 170).
  6. Close the contract: complete and settle each contract, resolving any open items. Closing (notes p. 171).
Procurement flow: need for procurement, procurement planning with the make or buy decision, contract planning and issuing the RFP, requesting seller responses, selecting a seller and awarding the contract, contract administration, and contract close out
Procurement end to end: plan it and decide make or buy, plan the contract and issue the RFP, receive proposals, select a seller and award, administer the contract, then close it out. Course notes, p. 163
  • How it runs in a project: a need for procurement leads to planning with the make or buy decision, contract planning and the issue of an RFP, receiving proposals, selecting a seller and awarding the contract, administering it while the product or service is acquired, and formally closing it (notes p. 163, slide 303).
  • Procurement reaches four process groups: planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing.
In the exam
  • “Explain (Discuss on) the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project” (seven sittings, always after the definition): the six processes, one or two lines each with an ICT example, and the flow figure.
  • “What is a procurement process? How is it performed in a project?” (2070 Ashad): the definition, then the flow step by step.
Asked in past papers
  • What do you mean by project procurement management? Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project. (2079 Bhadra Q10a, 2075 Ashwin Q8b, 2074 Chaitra Q7a, 2074 Ashwin Q8a)
  • What do you mean by project procurement management? Discuss on different processes adopted for procurement in ICT project. (2082 Bhadra Q10)
  • Explain about the project procurement management and explain the types of processes adopted for procurement. (2079 Baishakh Q9)
  • What do you mean by Project Procurement management and what are the different processes adopted for procurement? (2071 Chaitra Q5)
  • What is a procurement process? How is it performed in a project? (2070 Ashad Q14)

Answers: “Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project”, seven sittings. The six processes in order.

How it decodes: six words, six processes. Papa pays, and the rickshaw seller cheats him anyway. Two P words first: plan purchases, then plan contracting.

  1. PPapa Plan purchases and acquisitions
  2. PPays Plan contracting
  3. RRickshaw Request seller responses
  4. SSeller Select sellers
  5. AAlso Administer the contract
  6. CCheats Close the contract

13.2Plan purchases and acquisitions

Plan purchases and acquisitions: the make or buy decision

Plan purchases and acquisitions Identifying which project needs are best met by products or services from outside the organisation: deciding whether to procure, what, how much, how and when; part of project planning (notes p. 163, slide 304).

The make or buy checklist (notes p. 164)

Reasons to makeReasons to buy
Cheaper to makeCheaper to buy
Experience in making itInexperience with the making process
An idle production facility is availableNo production facility
Compatible, fits the production lineAvoid fluctuating or seasonal demand
The part is proprietarySuppliers are available
Not dependent on a supplierMaintain existing suppliers
High transportation costsHigher reliability and quality
  • In an ICT project: build a college MIS in house when the team knows the college’s rules and must own the code; buy a ready library system or rent cloud hosting when good products exist and the team lacks the skill or time.

Two inputs the notes explain (notes pp. 163, 164)

  • Organisational process assets (OPA): valuable information, documents and knowledge tools the organisation builds up over time; in effect, the lessons learned from the past, including its procurement history.
  • Enterprise environmental factors (EEF): internal and external factors that change the business: the conditions of the marketplace, what is available, from whom, and on what conditions.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 304): the scope baseline, requirements, risk register and risk-related contract decisions, resource requirements, schedule and cost estimates, EEF and OPA go in; make or buy analysis, expert judgment and contract type selection are applied; the procurement management plan, procurement statement of work, make or buy decisions, procurement documents, source selection criteria and change requests come out.
  • Procurement management plan: describes how procurement will be managed, from developing the procurement documents to contract closure (notes p. 164).

13.3Plan contracting: documents, standard forms and evaluation criteria

Plan contracting: procurement documents and evaluation criteria

Plan contracting Preparing the documents needed for the request seller responses and select seller processes (slide 309).
Request for proposal (RFP)Request for quotation (RFQ)
What it isA document describing in detail what the customer wants to buy and how bids will be evaluated (notes p. 165)A request for quotes or bids from potential suppliers (notes p. 165)
Used whenThere are several ways to meet the buyer’s needThe items are defined in detail and the buyer wants to compare prices
The seller returnsA proposal: how it would do the work, and at what priceA list of prices for the defined items
Chosen onTechnical approach, management, experience and priceMainly price
  • Contract statement of work: the description of the work required for the purchase; used in a contract for only that contract’s work. It is a type of scope statement, and a good one gives bidders a better understanding of the buyer’s expectations (notes p. 165).
  • Standard forms (notes p. 167): standard contracts, standard descriptions of procurement items, non-disclosure agreements, proposal evaluation checklists, and standard versions of all parts of the bid documents.
Evaluation criteria The standards used to rate or score proposals, often included in the procurement documents; prepared for source selection, normally before the formal RFP is published. Each criterion gets a weight to show its importance (notes p. 167).
  • The notes’ example weights (notes p. 167): technical approach 30%, management approach 30%, past performance 20%, price 20%.
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 309): the procurement management plan, risk register and risk-related contract decisions, resource requirements, schedule and cost estimates go in; standard forms and expert judgment are applied; the procurement documents, updated contract statement of work and evaluation criteria come out.

Contracts, contract types, and who carries the risk asked 1×

Contract A mutually binding agreement that obliges the seller to provide the specified products or services and the buyer to pay for them. Being legally binding, it carries more responsibility to deliver the work as stated (notes p. 165); an agreement between two or more parties to reach a goal in a certain way (slide 305).
  • What most contracts contain (slide 305): the statement of work or deliverables; schedule baseline and project period; pricing and payment terms; warranty; penalties and incentives; insurance arrangements; change request criteria; acceptance criteria; claims handling.

Contract types (notes pp. 165, 166, slide 307)

TypeHow it worksUse when
Fixed price (lump sum)A fixed total price for a clearly defined good or service; the buyer faces less risk (notes p. 165). A fixed price incentive adds a predefined incentive for cost or time (slide 307)The requirement is well defined and stable
Cost reimbursableThe money the contractor spends is paid back during or after the project, plus a fee (notes p. 166)The scope cannot be defined up front: research, new development
  CPFF, cost plus fixed feeAllowable costs plus a fixed fee, usually a percentage of the estimated costs; the fee does not vary with actual costsScope uncertain, fee kept neutral
  CPAF, cost plus award feeAllowable costs plus an award fee for meeting subjective performance criteriaPerformance matters but is hard to measure
  CPPC, cost plus percentage of costsAllowable costs plus a predetermined percentage of the total costsRarely: the seller earns more by spending more
  CPIF, cost plus incentive feeAllowable costs plus a predetermined fee and an incentive bonusThe seller should be motivated to cut cost
Time and materialA hybrid of fixed price and cost reimbursable (notes p. 166), often used for consultants (slide 307)Staff support, small or urgent work
Unit priceA set amount per unit of good or service; the quantity needed decides the total (notes p. 166)Unit well defined, quantity not
Contract types against risk Buyers have the least risk with fixed price contracts, because they know exactly what they must pay, and the most risk with CPPC, because they do not know the seller’s costs in advance and the seller can be encouraged to keep raising them. For the seller it is the mirror image: CPPC carries the least risk, fixed price the most (notes p. 167, slide 308).
CONTRACT TYPE AGAINST RISK (AFTER SLIDE 308) Whoever cannot predict the final bill carries the risk: the buyer under cost plus, the seller under fixed price. High BUYER RISK Low Cost plus percentage of costs CPPC Buyer pays every overrun, and the fee grows with it Cost plus fixed fee CPFF Buyer pays the costs; the fee stays fixed Cost plus incentive fee CPIF Overrun shared; a bonus rewards lower cost Fixed price incentive FPI Overrun shared up to a ceiling (see PTA) Firm fixed price FFP Seller pays every overrun Low SELLER RISK High Between the two families: time and material (a hybrid, fixed rates, open quantity) and unit price (fixed rate per unit).
Point of total assumption (PTA) The cost at which the contractor bears full responsibility for every extra rupee of contract cost; contractors are motivated to limit overruns so as not to reach it (notes p. 167).
PTA = (ceiling price - target price) / buyer's share + target cost (notes p. 167, which says "government share") Example: target cost Rs 10,00,000, target price Rs 11,00,000, ceiling price Rs 12,00,000, buyer's share of any overrun 70%: PTA = (12,00,000 - 11,00,000) / 0.70 + 10,00,000 = 1,42,857 + 10,00,000 = Rs 11,42,857 Above Rs 11,42,857 of cost, every extra rupee is the seller's.
In the exam
  • “Discuss about contract types” (2080 Bhadra, with the need for procurement): the definition, the types table, the risk rule with the picture, and PTA.
Asked in past papers
  • Explain needs of procurement. Discuss about contract types. (2080 Bhadra Q11)

Answers: “Discuss about contract types” (2080 Bhadra): who carries the risk under each.

How it decodes: Not an acronym: one rule with two sides. Whoever cannot predict the final bill is the one who sweats.

  • BBuyer: least risk with fixed price, most with CPPC
  • SSeller: least risk with CPPC, most with fixed price

13.4Request seller responses, and public tendering

Request seller responses

Request seller responses Gathering information from potential sellers on how to meet the project’s needs, as bids, quotes and proposals; part of project planning (notes p. 168, slide 311).
  • Three ways to reach sellers (notes p. 168): approach the preferred vendor; approach several vendors; advertise to anyone interested.
  • Bidder conferences: meetings with vendors held before bids or proposals are prepared, so that all prospective sellers have a clear, common understanding of the procurement. Their goals: equal chances for all potential sellers, treating them with consideration and respect, understanding what motivates them, and communicating carefully (notes p. 168).
  • Advertising in newspapers or professional journals enlarges the list of potential vendors; a good advertisement gets attention, gains interest, creates desire, and gets action (notes p. 168).
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 311): the procurement management plan, process assets and procurement documents go in; bidder conferences, expert judgment and advertising are applied; the procurement document package, a qualified seller list and the proposals come out.

The public tender procedure asked 4×

The contracting process, step by step (slide 306)

  1. Advertising the invitation for bids.
  2. Prequalification, if required.
  3. Preparation and sale of the tender documents.
  4. A pre-bid meeting, if required.
  5. Public bid opening.
  6. Bid evaluation.
  7. Post qualification of the chosen bidder.
  8. Notification of award, and signing of the contract.
  9. Contract execution.

Contents of a tender notice (slide 310)

  • The authority inviting bids, and a description of the goods, works or services.
  • The delivery or completion time; the earnest money (bid bond).
  • The price of the bidding documents and where they can be had.
  • Bid validity; the bid submission date and place.

Components of the bidding documents (slide 312)

  • The tender notice (invitation for bids) and instructions to bidders.
  • General and special (particular) conditions of contract.
  • The schedule of requirements or bill of quantities, and the technical specifications.
  • Forms: bid form, contract form, bank guarantee formats.

Bid evaluation, in two steps (slide 313)

  1. Bid examination: which bids are responsive? Is the bid complete and signed? Is the bid security attached? Are there computational errors? Any major deviation from the bid conditions or the technical specifications?
  2. Bid evaluation of the substantially responsive bids only.
  • The Nepali government procedure under the Public Procurement Act, tender against quotation, and a tender specification for a college digital library are not in your notes: they are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “Write step by step procedure for the procurement of goods and services in government/public office in the context of Nepal” (2080 Baishakh): the slides’ steps here, then the Nepali procedure.
  • “Tender vs. quotation process” (2076 Ashwin, 2072 Chaitra) and the tender specification for a digital library (2070 Chaitra): at the end.
Asked in past papers
  • Write step by step procedure for the procurement of goods and services in government/public office in the context of Nepal. (2080 Baishakh Q5b)
  • Compare the followings: a) Project scoping vs. project closing b) Formal vs. Informal communication c) Sensitivity analysis vs SWOT analysis d) Tender vs. quotation process (2076 Ashwin Q7)
  • Compare the followings: i) Decision Tree vs. Tornado Analysis for risk management ii) Quotation based purchase vs. Tender based purchase for procurement process iii) Consistency vs. completeness in requirements engineering (2072 Chaitra Q9)
  • Consider you are hired as a consultant in a IT college where every year 50 students are admitted in 4 year program. You are asked to prepare a tender. Specification document for setting up a digital library to be set-up on that college. State your all assumptions that you will be making while preparing the document. (2070 Chaitra Q7)

E-procurement and e-bidding asked 1×

  • E-procurement is procuring goods, services or construction work through an electronic medium; e-bidding is bidding through an electronic medium (slide 317).
  • Software for procurement (notes p. 172): e-procurement software saves money in buying goods and services; web-based ERP; e-MRO (maintenance, repair and overhaul); e-sourcing (finding new suppliers); e-tendering. The web, industry publications and discussion groups also help research and compare suppliers.

Merits of e-bidding (slide 317)

  • More transparent.
  • Checks unwarranted pressure on bidding.
  • Promotes free and fair competition.
  • Saves time.
  • Records are easily extracted for future reference.
In the exam
  • “What are typical issues to be considered in e-bidding as a procurement processing tool?” (2072 Kartik): the definition and merits here, then the issues.
Asked in past papers
  • What makes the project procurement process of very crucial component in project management? What are typical issues to be considered in e-bidding as a procurement processing tool? (2072 Kartik Q9)

13.5Select sellers

Selecting sellers, and the selection criteria asked 2×

Select sellers Receiving bids or proposals and applying the evaluation criteria to choose one or more sellers who are both qualified and acceptable; part of project execution. The final output is a contract signed by the buyer and the selected seller (notes p. 169, slide 314).
  • How: an initial evaluation of all proposals and bids, then a short list for further evaluation; shortlisted sellers often prepare a best and final offer (BAFO) (notes p. 169).
  • Source selection criteria: develop them before releasing a formal RFP or RFQ. Do not accept ideas just because they look good on paper; weigh previous performance and management style (notes p. 169).
  • Conducting procurements (notes p. 169): decide whom to ask; send them the documents; obtain proposals or bids; select a seller; award a contract.
  • Tools (slide 314): expert judgment; independent estimates; contract negotiation; a seller rating system; proposal evaluation techniques. Outputs: the selected seller, the contract, the contract management plan, resource availability, the updated procurement plan, requested changes.

A bidder selection scheme: a weighted scoring model, with the notes’ kinds of criteria (notes p. 167). Two bidders for a college MIS, each scored out of 10.

CriterionWeightBidder A scoreA weightedBidder B scoreB weighted
Technical approach3082407210
Management approach2071406120
Past performance2091805100
Price2061209180
Support and maintenance10770880
Total100750690
  • Bidder A wins, 750 to 690, although it is dearer, because its technical approach and past performance outweigh B’s price. Saying why the winner won is part of the answer.
  • In a public tender the rule is different: after the responsiveness check, the award goes to the lowest evaluated substantially responsive bid (slide 313). Nepal changed that rule for public works in 2083: see the Nepali procedure.

Contract negotiation, which makes the contract’s requirements and structure clear so both sides agree before signing (notes pp. 169, 170)

  1. Protocol: learn about one another.
  2. Probing: each side states its main priorities.
  3. Scratch bargaining: bargaining, and adjustments.
  4. Closure: final agreements after summarising both positions.
  5. Agreement: the agreements are equally understood by both parties.
  • Project contracts should be treated as two-way contracts (notes p. 170): the buyer has obligations too.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Seller selection criteria” (2078 Bhadra): source selection criteria, the weights, the process, BAFO.
  • “Bidder selection scheme” with sample illustrative cases and your own data (2082 Baishakh): the weighted scoring table and why the winner won.
Asked in past papers
  • Briefly explain followings with sample illustrative cases and assuming appropriate data/info on your own: i) Risk register ii) Pareto chart iii) Bidder selection scheme (2082 Baishakh Q6)
  • Write short notes on: a) Effective meeting conduction process b) PMI framework c) Seller selection criteria d) Tornado analysis (2078 Bhadra Q8)

13.6Contract administration

Contract administration

Contract administration Making sure the buyer agrees with the terms of the contract and the seller’s performance satisfies it: managing the procurement relationship, monitoring contract performance and making changes as needed. Both buyer and seller manage the contract, each to protect its rights and meet its commitments; part of project controlling (notes p. 170, slide 315).
  • Buyer-conducted seller performance review: an organised evaluation of the seller’s progress in delivering scope and quality on time, within budget and to the contract, including its paperwork and quality testing. It shows the completeness of the agreement, overall performance, and the payment due (notes p. 170).
  • Inspections and audits during execution find flaws in the seller’s work processes or deliverables (notes p. 171).
  • Controlling procurements makes the seller perform to the contract; legal and contract experts should take part, and the team should watch for constructive change orders (notes p. 171).
  • Change control in contracts (notes p. 172): assess the impact of every change on scope, time, cost and quality; document changes in writing; keep records of significant meetings and phone calls.
  • Tools (slide 315): the contract change control system, procurement performance reviews, inspections and audits, performance reporting, payment systems, claims administration, a records management system.

13.7Contract closure

Contract closure asked 7×

Contract closure (closing procurements) Completing and settling each procurement, including any open items; part of project closing (notes pp. 162, 171, slide 316).

The contract closure procedure (notes pp. 171, 172)

  1. Verify the work: determine whether all work was completed correctly and satisfactorily, against the acceptance criteria in the contract.
  2. Settle: resolve open claims, by negotiated settlement where possible.
  3. Audit: a procurement audit identifies the lessons learned in the procurement.
  4. Record: update the records to reflect the final results and archive them with a records management system; they help in the future.
  5. Close formally: the buyer, through its contract administrator, tells the seller in writing that the contract has been completed.
  • The formal acceptance and closing requirements should be specified in the contract itself, and covered by the contract management plan (notes pp. 171, 172).
  • Early termination is a special case of contract closure: by agreement of the parties, or by the default of one (notes p. 171).
  • Procurement audit: a regular review of contracts, processes and vendor history, to check accuracy and compliance with the contracts (notes p. 172).
  • Inputs, tools, outputs (slide 316): the PM plan and procurement documentation go in; procurement audits, negotiated settlements and the records management system are applied; closed procurements and updated process assets come out.

Managing contract closure smoothly

  • Write the acceptance criteria and closing requirements into the contract from the start.
  • Accept deliverables progressively, not all at the end.
  • Keep complete records of changes, correspondence and payments throughout.
  • Settle claims by negotiation before they become disputes.
  • Run the procurement audit, then give formal written notice of closure.
  • How contract closure differs from project closing, and seller selection against contract closure, are not compared in your notes: they are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Contract (project) closure procedure” (2079 Baishakh, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin, 2073 Shrawan, 2072 Kartik): the definition, the five steps, the three tools, early termination.
  • “How to manage the contract closure processes smoothly as per PMI procurement management? How different it is from project closing?” (2081 Bhadra): the smooth closure points, then the difference.
Asked in past papers
  • How to manage the contract closure processes smoothly as per PMI procurement management? How different it is from project closing? Briefly, explain. (2081 Bhadra Q7)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgments d) Contract (project) closure procedure e) Project Risk Management (2079 Baishakh Q12)
  • Compare the followings: a) Functional vs. Matrix organizational structure b) Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools c) Seller (contractor) selection processes vs. contract closure processes d) Cause and effect analysis versus Tornado analysis in project risk management (2076 Chaitra Q5)
  • Write short notes on: (any four) i) Balance Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure iv) Delphi Technique v) ICT Code of Ethics (2075 Ashwin Q9)
  • Write short notes on: (Any two) a) Balanced scorecard b) Contract closure procedure c) Out sourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT code of ethics (2074 Ashwin Q9)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balanced Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure (2073 Shrawan Q9)
  • Write short notes on: a) COCOMO (constructive cost model) for IT project b) Contract closure procedure c) Balanced scorecard framework d) Pareto analysis e) Quality Audit Plan (2072 Kartik Q10)

13.8Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 13.

Procurement in a Nepali government office, step by step asked 1×

“Write step by step procedure for the procurement of goods and services in government/public office in the context of Nepal.”

2080 Baishakh

Only partly in the notes: slides 306, 310, 312 and 313 give the general public bidding steps, but Nepal’s own law, regulator and methods are in neither the notes nor the slides. The law has also moved since they were written: it was amended in 2083 (2026), and the changes reach the steps themselves.

  • The law: the Public Procurement Act, 2063, as amended by the Public Procurement (Second Amendment) Act, 2083, with the Public Procurement Regulations, 2064, now at their sixteenth amendment (Bhadra 2083). The regulator is the Public Procurement Monitoring Office (PPMO), which runs the electronic Government Procurement system, e-GP, the bolpatra portal.
  • The methods, chosen by the estimated value against thresholds in the regulations: open competitive bidding (national or international), sealed quotation, direct procurement, limited bidding, and users’ committees for local work. The 2083 amendment adds reverse auction, framework agreements, a government e-marketplace for small direct purchases, and EPC, design and build and turnkey for technically complex projects.
  • Name the method, not a figure. The money limits that separate direct purchase, quotation and open bidding sit in the regulations, and nearly every amendment moves them. Writing “above the threshold prescribed in the regulations” is safe; a stale number is not.

The procedure, as the law stands now

  1. Plan the purchase. It must sit in the public entity’s annual procurement plan, with budget for the fiscal year; a large or multi year purchase also needs a master procurement plan.
  2. Clear the ground before calling bids. Budget assured, and for construction the site, right of way, utility shifting, compensation and the environmental study (IEE or EIA) settled first. A multi year contract needs the first year funded and the source of the later years identified. This condition is new in 2083, and it exists because tenders were being called for sites the entity did not yet hold.
  3. Prepare the documents. Specification, cost estimate on government approved norms, bidding documents and a bill of quantities. Small, simple purchases go in a single envelope; large or complex work goes in two envelopes, technical and financial.
  4. Publish the notice on e-GP. At least 21 days for a national bid and 30 days for an international one, and 7 and 15 days respectively when the bid is called again. Publishing on e-GP now satisfies the notice by itself.
  5. Issue the documents and answer questions. Hold the pre-bid meeting if one is called, and send every clarification to all bidders alike.
  6. Receive the bids with their bid security, through e-GP, by the deadline.
  7. Open them in public at the announced time, before the bidders’ representatives, and read out the prices.
  8. Evaluate. Responsiveness and qualification first, price only after that. A bid more than 30 per cent below the cost estimate is now dropped: the committee calls for a rate analysis, and if the work cannot be done at those rates against the norms, the bid goes out.
  9. Pick the winner. For public works, the 2083 amendment replaced the lowest bid with the average bid rule: average the bids that survive step 8, and award to the one closest to that average, which must still not exceed the cost estimate. A tie is settled by lottery. Where a bidding document does not use that rule, the classic one stands: the lowest evaluated substantially responsive bid.
  10. Notify the intention to award, and let the complaint and review period run before the contract is signed.
  11. Sign the contract against the performance security. A mobilisation advance is capped at 20 per cent, given only against a bank guarantee and a work schedule, and spending it on anything but the work is now a criminal matter, not just a breach of contract.
  12. Administer the contract: inspection and quality tests, running bills, variation within the officer’s authority, price adjustment, and the contractor’s duty to enrol workers in social security and pay wages through a bank.
  13. Accept, close and record. Take over the goods or works, release the securities, keep the file. If the contract is terminated, the whole performance security is forfeited and the extra cost of finishing the job is recovered from the contractor.

What changed in 2083, and what it replaced

BeforeNow
Award of public worksLowest evaluated substantially responsive bidAverage of the surviving bids; the bid closest to it wins, and must not exceed the estimate
A very low bidCould still winMore than 30 per cent below the estimate: rate analysis, then rejection
Notice period30 days national, 45 international21 days national, 30 international; 7 and 15 on a re-bid
Where the notice goesA national daily, and e-GPe-GP alone is enough
Before bids are calledNo readiness test in the ActBudget, site, right of way and environmental clearance first
Methods availableBidding, quotation, direct, limited, users’ committeePlus reverse auction, framework agreement, e-marketplace, EPC and turnkey
Misused mobilisation advanceA contract remedyProsecution for fraud
An official who sits on a decisionNo specific sanctionDepartmental action, and grants may be withheld

Where this comes from. The Public Procurement (Second Amendment) Ordinance, 2083 was published on 2083/01/17; the House of Representatives passed the replacement bill on 14 Ashar 2083; the amended Act was in force on publication in the Nepal Gazette by mid July 2026. The regulations reached their sixteenth amendment on 3 Bhadra 2083. The current texts are on the PPMO site, and the changes were reported by the Kathmandu Post and Republica in July 2026.

In the exam
  • Write the thirteen steps as a numbered list, one line each. The marks are in the sequence, not in an essay around it.
  • Name the law in the first line: Public Procurement Act 2063 with its 2083 amendment, Regulations 2064, PPMO, e-GP. That one sentence separates a Nepal specific answer from a generic tendering answer.
  • On the award rule, say both. The old rule, lowest evaluated substantially responsive bid, and the 2083 average bid rule for public works with its 30 per cent floor. An older answer is not wrong if you date it.
  • Two or three of the 2083 changes (shorter notice, readiness before tender, criminal liability for a misused advance) are enough to show the answer is current.

Tender against quotation asked 2×

“Compare: Tender vs. quotation process”

2076 Ashwin

“Compare: Quotation based purchase vs. Tender based purchase for procurement process”

2072 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: the request for quotes is on page 165 and the tender procedure on slides 306 to 313, but they are not compared.

QuotationTender
WhatA request for prices from suppliers, for items defined in detail (the RFQ, notes p. 165)A formal, publicly advertised invitation for sealed bids against full bidding documents (slides 306, 312)
ValueLow or medium value purchasesHigh value purchases, and public money above the thresholds
Who is invitedA few known suppliers, or a short open noticeAnyone qualified, through a public notice
DocumentsA short specification and a price formNotice, instructions, conditions of contract, BOQ, specifications, forms
SecurityUsually none, or smallBid security and performance security
Opening and evaluationSimple comparison, mostly on pricePublic opening; responsiveness check, then evaluation (slide 313)
Time and costQuick and cheapSlow and costly to run
TransparencyLowerHigh: published criteria, public opening, records

Issues to consider in e-bidding asked 1×

“What makes the project procurement process of very crucial component in project management? What are typical issues to be considered in e-bidding as a procurement processing tool?”

2072 Kartik

Only partly in the notes: slide 317 gives the merits of e-bidding, but not the issues. The first part, why procurement is crucial, is in 13.1.

  • Security and authentication: bids must be encrypted until the opening time, and each bidder identified by a digital signature or certificate.
  • Confidentiality and a time lock: nobody, including the buyer, may see a bid before the public opening.
  • Availability of the system: portal downtime, power cuts and slow connections near the deadline can shut honest bidders out; a fallback rule is needed.
  • Access and skills: small or rural firms may lack connectivity or the skill to bid online; training and a help desk are needed.
  • Legal validity: electronic documents, signatures and payments (bid security, fees) must be recognised by law and the procurement rules.
  • File formats and sizes: clear rules for uploads and scanned documents.
  • Audit trail: every action logged, so that complaints can be checked.
  • Collusion does not disappear: online bidding still needs checks for cartels and bid rigging.
  • Cost: building, running and maintaining the system, and keeping it secure.

A tender specification for a college digital library asked 1×

“Consider you are hired as a consultant in a IT college where every year 50 students are admitted in 4 year program. You are asked to prepare a tender. Specification document for setting up a digital library to be set-up on that college. State your all assumptions that you will be making while preparing the document.”

2070 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: slides 310 and 312 list what a tender notice and bidding documents contain; a digital library specification is not given.

Assumptions

  • Users: 200 students (50 a year, four years), about 30 teachers and 5 staff; at most 60 users at once.
  • Collection: 5,000 printed titles to catalogue and 1,000 theses and reports to digitise; e-journal access bought separately.
  • Setting: a campus LAN and internet already exist; a room for the library is ready.
  • Money and time: one lot, delivered and running within four months; one year warranty and one year of support after it.

Structure of the document (following slides 310 and 312)

  1. Invitation for bids: the college, the scope, delivery time, bid security, where to get the documents, bid validity, deadline and opening time.
  2. Instructions to bidders and eligibility: registration, tax clearance, at least two similar installations in three years.
  3. Schedule of requirements and bill of quantities.
  4. Technical specifications (below).
  5. Evaluation criteria: responsiveness first, then technical compliance, then the lowest evaluated price.
  6. Conditions of contract: delivery, installation, acceptance tests, payment terms, warranty, penalties for delay, support.
  7. Forms: bid form, price schedule, bid security, performance security, contract.

Technical specifications (minimums)

ItemQtyMinimum specification
Library management software1Web-based; cataloguing (MARC 21), circulation, online public catalogue, barcode support, user accounts, reports; open source acceptable with installation, customisation and training
Institutional repository1For theses and reports; full-text search, Dublin Core metadata, OAI-PMH harvesting, access control by user group
Server1Rack server; at least 16 CPU cores, 64 GB RAM, 8 TB usable storage in RAID, redundant power supply, 3 years on-site warranty
Backup1Network storage of at least 16 TB for daily backups, with an off-site copy procedure
Reading workstations20Desktop, current generation processor, 8 GB RAM, 256 GB SSD, 22-inch monitor, licensed operating system
Book scanner1A3 overhead scanner, at least 600 dpi, OCR software
Barcode printer and readers1 and 4For labels and circulation desks
Network1 lot24-port gigabit managed switch, 4 Wi-Fi access points, structured cabling
Power15 kVA online UPS with at least 30 minutes backup
Services1 lotInstallation, migration of 5,000 catalogue records, digitising 1,000 documents, training 3 library staff and 2 IT staff, documentation
  • Acceptance: the college tests every item against this table before accepting, and payment follows acceptance.

Contract closure against project closing asked 1×

“How to manage the contract closure processes smoothly as per PMI procurement management? How different it is from project closing? Briefly, explain.”

2081 Bhadra

Only partly in the notes: contract closure (pages 171, 172) and project closing (pages 73, 74) are described separately, not compared. Managing closure smoothly is in 13.7.

Contract closureProject closing
ClosesOne agreement with one sellerThe whole project, or a phase
How manyOne for each contract: a project may have manyOne
Main workVerify the deliverables against the contract, settle claims, make the final payment, release securities, formal written noticeFinal acceptance by the customer, hand over to operations, release the team and resources, archive, lessons learned
NatureContractual and legalOrganisational and administrative
OrderComes first: every contract is closed before the projectComes last, after all contracts are closed
ToolsProcurement audits, negotiated settlements, records managementClosing reviews, the final report, administrative closure
  • Why the order matters: an open contract is an open liability; the project cannot be closed while a seller can still claim, or be owed, money.

Seller selection against contract closure asked 1×

“Compare: Seller (contractor) selection processes vs. contract closure processes”

2076 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: seller selection (pages 169, 170, slide 314) and contract closure (pages 171, 172, slide 316) are described separately, not compared.

Seller selectionContract closure
WhenAt the start of the contract, in executingAt the end of the contract, in closing
PurposeChoose a qualified, acceptable seller and sign a contractConfirm the work is done and settle the contract
InputsProposals, the qualified seller list, evaluation criteriaThe contract, the procurement documentation, the PM plan
ToolsEvaluation criteria and weighted scoring, independent estimates, negotiation, seller ratingProcurement audits, negotiated settlements, records management
OutputThe selected seller and the signed contractA closed procurement and updated process assets
Main riskChoosing on paper alone (notes p. 169)Unsettled claims and missing records

Plan purchases and acquisitions, plan contracting, request seller responses, select sellers, administer the contract, close the contract.

Cost plus percentage of costs: the buyer cannot know the costs in advance, and the seller’s fee grows as it spends more.

Back to the processes and contract types.

Transference: the cost risk moves to the seller, who prices it into the contract. It does not remove the risk; it changes who pays.

Back to the response strategies.

Chapter 14 · 3 hours · appeared in 14 of 22 sittings

Developing custom processes for IT projects

Why organisations build their own IT project methodology (PRINCE2, RUP, Six Sigma, a tailored multi-pass model), how project management maturity is measured, certification, awards, the code of ethics, outsourcing and the future of the field.

What this chapter is about
  • Methodologies: why an organisation develops its own, and three it can draw on: PRINCE2, the Rational Unified Process, Six Sigma.
  • Customising: why IT projects need custom processes, the multi-pass model, tailoring and its barriers, and the project management information system.
  • Maturity and recognition: the five maturity levels, PMI certification, awards and assessment.
  • Professional practice: the code of ethics, outsourcing and off-shoring, future trends.
Where it fits in the subject
  • It turns the knowledge areas into a working method: the process groups (chapter 6) and life cycle models (chapter 4) become the organisation’s own way of working.
  • Maturity models are one of the steps for improving quality (chapter 10); Six Sigma is taught in full there.
  • Outsourcing is procurement (chapter 13) on a larger scale.
What you will learn
  1. IT project management methodologies
  2. Custom processes, tailoring and the multi-pass model, the PMIS
  3. Certification, maturity, excellence through awards and assessment
  4. The code of ethics, outsourcing, future trends
  5. Questions the exam has asked that your notes do not answer
How it is examined
  • Short notes: the ICT code of ethics (five sittings), outsourcing and off-shoring (three), future trends (two), project management maturity (two), custom processes, PMIS and cloud trends (one each).
  • Maturity as a question (two more sittings); why custom processes (one); the IT project management methodology (one); awards and assessment (one); managing a project through market trends (one).

14.1Developing an IT project management methodology

IT project management methodologies: PRINCE2, RUP, Six Sigma asked 1×

  • Why organisations build their own: many invest heavily in training project managers in general skills, yet the managers still do not know how to adapt those methods to the organisation’s needs; so some develop an internal IT project management methodology (notes p. 173).
  • Its phases (notes p. 173): initiation; planning; executing or production; monitoring and control; closing.
  • A project management methodology is a set of process groups whose control functions are merged into one working, cohesive system (notes p. 66).

What each phase delivers (slide 322)

  • Initiation: assign the project manager, identify the key stakeholders, complete the business case, and complete and sign the project charter (documents: business case, charter, stakeholder analysis).
  • Planning, whose purpose is to guide execution: a team contract, the scope statement, the WBS, the schedule (Gantt chart), a prioritised list of risks.
  • Executing, controlling, closing, and post-project follow-up.

PRINCE2 (PRojects IN Controlled Environments), originally developed for IT projects, with eight process groups (notes p. 173)

  1. Starting up a project.
  2. Planning.
  3. Initiating a project.
  4. Directing a project.
  5. Controlling a stage.
  6. Managing product delivery.
  7. Managing stage boundaries.
  8. Closing a project.
  • Beyond your notes: since the 2009 edition, planning is a theme rather than a process, which leaves seven processes. And PMBOK is a body of knowledge (what to know), while PRINCE2 is a method (what to do, with defined roles and stages).
Rational Unified Process (RUP) An iterative software development process for object-oriented models that focuses on team productivity and delivers software best practices to all team members; also called the Unified Process (notes p. 174).
  • Three reasons for using it (notes p. 174): it is iterative; its practices give an example structure for doing and explaining object-oriented analysis and design; it is flexible, and can be applied in a lightweight, agile way.

The four phases (notes pp. 174, 175)

  1. Inception: requirements gathered; feasibility and scope determined; actors and their interactions analysed.
  2. Elaboration: project plan developed; risk assessment; non-functional requirements elaborated; software architecture described; use case model completed.
  3. Construction: all components developed and integrated; all features tested; refactoring each iteration; a stable product released.
  4. Transition: the product launched to users; deployment baseline completed; final product released.
RUP drawn as a cycle of four arrows: inception, elaboration, construction, transition
RUP runs four phases in a cycle: inception, elaboration, construction, transition. Course notes, p. 174
  • Other methods the notes name (p. 173): agile methods (chapter 4) and Six Sigma with DMAIC and DMADV (chapter 10; notes pp. 175, 176).
In the exam
  • “Discuss about IT project management methodology.” (2070 Ashad): why organisations build one, the phases with their outputs, then PRINCE2, RUP and Six Sigma in brief.
Asked in past papers
  • Discuss about IT project management methodology. (2070 Ashad Q15)

14.2Moving forward with customised management processes

Custom processes for IT projects, and tailoring asked 2×

  • The starting point (notes p. 178): each project is unique, so an organisation’s project management processes will usually need to be tailored to ensure success.

Why IT projects need custom processes (notes p. 178, slide 319)

  1. The customer’s role is dominant.
  2. The environment is more dynamic.
  3. Tasks are mental, unique and complex.
  4. Society is more democratic and educated.
  5. Individuals have higher aspirations and expectations.
  6. The government’s role is less clear, and its performance more closely scrutinised.
  7. Sources of knowledge are different: tacit knowledge, held by the practitioner.
Tailoring Adjusting project activities to reflect the uniqueness of the project while keeping the project’s goal in mind (notes p. 177).
Tailoring of project process: project info, organisation inputs and external inputs go in, guided by the SDLC and PMI guidelines, and a tailored project process comes out, with lessons learned fed back
Tailoring: project, organisation and external inputs go in, shaped by the SDLC and PMI guidelines, and a tailored process comes out, with the lessons learned fed back. Course notes, p. 177

A customised SDLC: the multi-pass model (notes p. 177, slide 323)

  • What it is: a “customised, tailored, tuned” methodology; not a full development method, but the iterative and incremental model and the agile model merged and fitted together.
  1. Outline the initial requirements, focus on the mission-critical issues, develop a proof of concept: agile way (slide 323).
  2. Sort out the major requirements, prioritise them by business need, develop an initial stable solution: iterative and incremental way.
  3. Increase the client’s involvement, develop more functional, more sensible solutions: agile way.
  4. Finalise the requirements, enhance the design, develop the complete solution, test rigorously: iterative and incremental way.

Barriers to implementing tailored project management (notes p. 178)

  • Lack of sustained top management commitment; insufficient training in integrated project management.
  • Lack of planning; lack of resources.
  • Lessons learned and good practice not shared across projects.
  • “Not invented here” syndrome.
  • Poor incentives or award criteria; over-extended reviews.
  • What shapes the tailoring (slide 326): the external environment (unpredictability, dependence on it, the customer); objectives and constraints (ambiguity, strategic importance, required speed, funding, contract type); the task (innovation, size and duration, interdependence, type); organisation and people (structure and culture, top management support, the project leader, the team).

The economics of IT project management (slides 320, 321)

  • Demand comes from the customer (business strategy, requirements, operational resources); supply from the project manager (deliverables, performance, ICT resources).
  • The manager balances them: demand management makes the customer’s operations visible and weighs demand against funding; supply management tracks work and benefits and runs what-if analysis; the balance is judged by client satisfaction and IT governance, and supply is regulated through cost analysis of hardware, software and people.
The economics of project management
Supply and demand in IT project management: on the demand side the customer with business strategy, business requirements and operational resources; on the supply side the project manager with deliverables, performance and ICT resources; demand management and supply management below them; then apprehending the balance between supply and demand through client satisfaction and IT governance, and regulating supply through cost analysis of hardware, software and people
Managing supply and demand for a project manager
A two by two grid of supply efficiency against demand efficiency: low and low is module through, lack of credibility; high supply and low demand is do the project right, reliable delivery; low supply and high demand is do the project right, at risk of over-committing; high and high is maximum business value, a business-centric IT solution
The project manager balances supply (the team’s capacity to deliver) against demand (the business’s needs); only when both are efficient does IT deliver maximum business value. Course slides, slides 320, 321

A customised workflow (slide 324): activity management (tasks from the WBS, durations, resources, corrections from actual data) runs beside schedule and resource management (Gantt chart, dependencies, milestones, levelling, updating the plan), and both feed the status report.

A guideline for project management workflow: activity management on the left (select and take tasks from the WBS, put estimated duration for each task, assign preliminary resources, collect actual data and decide corrections) and schedule and resource management on the right (perform scheduling and prepare the Gantt chart, check dependencies, add summary tasks and milestones, adjust schedule and resource utilisation, compare and update the plan), both leading to update project status, report and distribute
A customised project management workflow: activity management and schedule and resource management run side by side and meet in the status report. Course slides, slide 324
In the exam
  • “Why custom processes need for IT projects?” (2081 Baishakh): the starting point and the seven reasons, with a line each on what they mean for an IT project.
  • Short note, “Custom processes for IT projects” (2075 Chaitra): the reasons, tailoring with the figure, the multi-pass model and the barriers.
Asked in past papers
  • Why custom processes need for IT projects? (2081 Baishakh Q13)
  • Write short notes: a) SWOT Analysis b) Balanced Scorecard c) Risk Register d) Custom processes for IT Projects (2075 Chaitra Q7)

Answers: “Why custom processes need for IT projects?” (2081 Baishakh) and the short note (2075 Chaitra). The seven reasons in order.

How it decodes: seven words, seven reasons. The thief was dead tired; his friend lost face and went to sleep.

  1. CChor Customer’s role is dominant
  2. EEkdam Environment is more dynamic
  3. TThakyo Tasks are mental, unique and complex
  4. SSaathi Society is more democratic and educated
  5. IIjjat Individuals have higher aspirations
  6. GGumayera Government’s role is less clear
  7. SSutyo Sources of knowledge are different

The project management information system (PMIS) asked 1×

  • What the notes say (notes p. 66): many enterprise project management systems are now available; they are accessible over the internet and tie into other systems, such as financial systems; even in small organisations, project managers or team members can create Gantt charts.
PMIS (beyond the notes’ wording) The set of tools and techniques used to gather, integrate and distribute the outputs of the project management processes.
  • What it does: schedule development and tracking; resource and cost management; document storage and version control; communication and reporting; the consolidated data that performance reporting and earned value need.
  • Examples: Microsoft Project, Primavera, Jira, Redmine.
  • Why it matters: one source of truth for the plan and the actuals, which the integrated reporting system of chapter 11 builds on.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Project management information system” (2070 Ashad): the notes’ points, the definition, what it does, and examples.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short note on: a) Project stakeholders b) Project management information system c) Critical Chain Scheduling d) Categories of Risk e) Balanced Score Card f) Constructive Cost Model (COCOMO) (2070 Ashad Q16)

14.3Certification, maturity, and excellence

PMI certification

  • CAPM, Certified Associate in Project Management: PMI’s entry-level certification for practitioners with less experience; it shows understanding of the fundamental knowledge, terminology and processes of project management (notes p. 179, slide 328).
  • PMP, Project Management Professional: the holder has documented enough project experience, agreed to follow a code of ethics, and passed the PMP exam; the number of PMPs is increasing (notes p. 179).

The PMI certification programme (notes pp. 179, 180)

  1. CAPM, Certified Associate in Project Management.
  2. PMI-ACP, Agile Certified Practitioner.
  3. PMI-RMP, Risk Management Professional.
  4. PMI-SP, Scheduling Professional.
  5. PfMP, Portfolio Management Professional.
  6. PgMP, Program Management Professional.
  7. PMP, Project Management Professional.
  8. PMI-PBA, Professional in Business Analysis.

Preventive measures for office computer systems (notes p. 179)

  • General: a suitable working environment (heat, humidity, air flow); conditioned power supply; kept away from strong magnets; normal shut-down procedures.
  • Daily: automated virus scan; differential or incremental backup.
  • Weekly: clear temporary files, folders and the recycle bin; update the antivirus; defragment the hard disk; clean the printer.
  • Monthly: clean the machines, keyboards, mice and external drives. Yearly: clean the inside of the machine.

Project management maturity and maturity models asked 4×

Project management maturity A formal tool used to measure an organisation’s project management maturity. Once the initial level and the areas for improvement are found, it gives a logical path of progressive development. It follows the Software Engineering Institute’s Capability Maturity Model with five evolutionary levels, and examines maturity across the ten knowledge areas (notes p. 180).
  • Maturity models are frameworks that help an organisation improve its processes and systems, mapping logical ways to improve its service (notes p. 139).
  • The Capability Maturity Model (CMM) benchmarks the maturity of an organisation’s software process; a process improvement approach based on a process model (notes p. 139).
  • The Project Management Maturity Model (PMMM), from PM Solutions, measures project management maturity and gives a roadmap to the next level (notes p. 139).

The five maturity levels (notes pp. 140, 180, 181)

  1. Initial: processes are ad hoc and chaotic; no stable environment; products often work, but budgets and schedules are frequently exceeded.
  2. Managed (repeatable): requirements are managed; processes are planned, performed, measured and controlled.
  3. Defined: processes are well characterised and understood, and described in standards, procedures, tools and methods.
  4. Quantitatively managed: subprocesses that matter most to performance are controlled with statistical and other quantitative techniques.
  5. Optimising: processes are continually improved from a quantitative understanding of the common causes of their variation.
Five maturity levels as a staircase: initial, repeatable, defined, managed, optimising, each step labelled disciplined, standard and consistent, predictable, and continuously improving
The five maturity levels as steps: initial, repeatable, defined, managed, optimising. Course notes, p. 180

The same five levels under three sets of names

LevelNotes (CMMI names, pp. 180, 181)PMMM, slide 327PMMM, slide 236
1InitialInitial process: ad hoc, randomAd-hoc
2Managed (repeatable)Structured process: basic processes, not standard on all projectsManaged
3DefinedOrganisational standards: standard and repeatable on all projectsOrganized
4Quantitatively managedManaged process: measured with well defined metricsQuantitatively managed
5OptimizingOptimizing process: measure effectiveness and efficiency, and improveAdaptive
  • The logic of the ladder: level 2 makes one project repeatable, level 3 makes the process organisation-wide, level 4 makes it measured, level 5 makes it self-improving. Measurement arrives only at level 4, so a level 3 organisation still cannot predict its results reliably.
  • Using a maturity model is one of the steps for improving the quality of IT projects (chapter 10).
In the exam
  • “What is project management maturity?” (2079 Bhadra), “What is a maturity model for software development? Explain them.” (2070 Ashad), and the short notes “Project management maturity (model)” (2072 Chaitra, 2071 Chaitra): the definition, CMM and PMMM, the five levels with a line each, the staircase figure.
Asked in past papers
  • What is project management maturity? (2079 Bhadra Q10c)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balanced scorecard framework ii) Project management maturity model iii) Responsibility assignment matrix (2072 Chaitra Q10)
  • Write short notes on: a) Sensitivity analysis b) The Balanced Scorecard c) Six sigma d) Project Management Maturity e) Decision tree analysis (2071 Chaitra Q10)
  • What is a Maturity Model for software development? Explain them. (2070 Ashad Q11)

Answers: “What is a maturity model? Explain them” and the maturity short notes: four sittings. The five levels in order.

How it decodes: five words, five levels. Idiots make the dinner, and quality is optional, until level 4 makes it measured.

  1. IIdiots Initial
  2. MMake Managed (repeatable)
  3. DDinner Defined
  4. QQuality Quantitatively managed
  5. OOptional Optimising

Promoting project excellence asked 1×

  • Excellent projects respect and appreciate their people (notes p. 182): they recognise their potential and skills, promote their development, and create a culture in which people are enabled and motivated to apply their knowledge for the success of the project.

Dealing responsibly with people (notes p. 182)

  • The skills needed for the project objectives are identified, and people are deployed accordingly.
  • Dialogue with people takes place systematically and transparently.
  • Legal and moral responsibilities, especially work safety, are carried out consciously.
  • Enablement (notes p. 183): people’s knowledge and abilities are promoted and developed; personal interests, career development and self-development are supported.
  • Empowerment (notes p. 183): people work in an environment that allows and motivates them to apply their skills, talents and creativity; they act in coordination, are involved, and take initiative.
  • The role of awards and assessment themselves is not explained in your notes: it is at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • “What are the roles of award and assessment in achieving Excellency in project completion?” (2069 Chaitra): what excellent projects do for people, from here, then the roles of awards and assessment.
Asked in past papers
  • What are the roles of award and assessment in achieving Excellency in project completion, Briefly explain. (2069 Chaitra Q14)

14.4Code of ethics

The code of ethics asked 5×

Ethics A set of principles that guides decision making, based on personal values of what is right and wrong. Making ethical decisions is an important part of a project manager’s personal and professional life (notes p. 182). PMI sets the ethical standards professionals must follow (slide 329).

The code: four values (notes p. 182, slide 329)

  1. Responsibility, towards the community: owning our decisions and their consequences.
  2. Respect, in the relationship between employers and clients: for people, resources and the environment.
  3. Fairness, in work performance: impartial, objective decisions, free of conflict of interest, favouritism and prejudice.
  4. Honesty, in personal performance: understanding the truth and acting truthfully in communication and conduct.
  • The first two are about how we treat others; the last two about how we conduct ourselves.

How to create a code of ethics (notes p. 182, slide 329)

  1. Decide why you are writing it: to inspire employees, or to spell out expected behaviour?
  2. Begin with an introduction explaining its purpose and what you hope to achieve.
  3. Add the items: interpersonal relationships, behaviour around customers and clients, and items specific to the company or industry.
  4. Decide how you will implement it.
What makes it an ICT code (beyond the notes) The issues peculiar to computing: privacy and the protection of personal data; information security and responsible disclosure of weaknesses; intellectual property and software licensing (no pirated software); professional competence (not taking work beyond one’s skill); avoiding harm from systems that fail dangerously; honest reporting of what a system can do. In Nepal the related law is the Electronic Transactions Act, 2063.
In the exam
  • “Explain ICT code of ethics” (2080 Baishakh) and the short note “ICT code of ethics” (2082 Baishakh, 2076 Ashwin, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin): the definition, the four values, how to create a code, and the ICT issues.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes on: (Any Four) a) Decision Tree analysis b) S-curve c) PDCA cycle d) ICT code of ethics e) Soft skills for project manager (2082 Baishakh Q8)
  • Explain ICT code of Ethics. (2080 Baishakh Q5c)
  • Write short notes: a) Balance scorecard framework b) Future trend of ICT Project c) Outsourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT Code of Ethics (2076 Ashwin Q8)
  • Write short notes on: (any four) i) Balance Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure iv) Delphi Technique v) ICT Code of Ethics (2075 Ashwin Q9)
  • Write short notes on: (Any two) a) Balanced scorecard b) Contract closure procedure c) Out sourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT code of ethics (2074 Ashwin Q9)

14.5Outsourcing, off-shoring and future trends

Outsourcing and off-shoring asked 4×

  • Outsourcing: a company contracts a specific process out to a third party that specialises in it (notes p. 178).
  • Off-shoring: a business sends in-house jobs overseas, out of the country (notes p. 178).
  • Both save the organisation money (notes p. 178).
OptionMeaning
OutsourcingWork contracted to an outside company, at home or abroad
Off-shoringWork moved to another country, to a vendor or to the company’s own branch
Offshore outsourcingBoth at once: a foreign vendor does the work
Near-shoringOff-shoring to a nearby country, for a similar time zone and culture
In-sourcingBringing outsourced work back in house

Why organisations move towards outsourcing (the reasons for procurement, slide 302; notes p. 178)

  • Lower fixed and recurrent costs.
  • Focus on the core business.
  • Access to skills and technologies not available in house.
  • Flexibility: capacity when needed, without permanent hiring.
  • Accountability through the contract; and, across time zones, round-the-clock work.
  • For Nepal, the country is more often the destination of off-shoring than its source: Nepali IT firms win outsourced work on cost and skill.
  • The challenges of outsourcing are not in your notes: they are at the end of this chapter.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Outsourcing and off-shoring options” (2076 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin, 2070 Chaitra): both definitions, the options table, the reasons, and a line on the challenges.
  • “Why are organization moving towards the trend of outsourcing? Discuss the challenges of outsourcing.” (2069 Chaitra): the reasons here, the challenges at the end.
Asked in past papers
  • Write short notes: a) Balance scorecard framework b) Future trend of ICT Project c) Outsourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT Code of Ethics (2076 Ashwin Q8)
  • Write short notes on: (Any two) a) Balanced scorecard b) Contract closure procedure c) Out sourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT code of ethics (2074 Ashwin Q9)
  • Write short notes on: (any five) a) Balanced Scorecard b) Tornado analysis c) Critical path analysis d) Decision tree analysis e) Trends in cloud computing f) Outsourcing and off-shoring options (2070 Chaitra Q9)
  • Why are organization moving towards the trend of outsourcing? Discuss the challenges of outsourcing. (2069 Chaitra Q13)

14.6Asked in the exam, not answered by your course notes

These questions appeared in past papers, but your notes and slides do not answer them, or only partly. If you have studied the notes, this is what you still need for chapter 14.

The roles of awards and assessment in achieving excellence asked 1×

“What are the roles of award and assessment in achieving Excellency in project completion, Briefly explain.”

2069 Chaitra

Only partly in the notes: pages 182 and 183 describe what excellent projects do for their people; slide 328 names the topic, but the roles of awards and assessment are not explained.

  • Awards recognise excellent projects or organisations against published criteria. Examples: the Deming Prize (Japan, since 1951), the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award (United States, since 1987), the EFQM award (Europe), the IPMA Global Project Excellence Award, and PMI’s Project of the Year.
  • Assessment measures a project or organisation against a model: maturity assessments, quality and procurement audits, post-project reviews, and the self-assessment an award application requires.

Their roles

  1. A benchmark: an external, objective standard of excellence, instead of a team judging itself.
  2. Structured self-examination: preparing for an award or assessment forces the team to review its processes, results and people against the criteria, and to find gaps.
  3. Motivation and recognition: people see their work valued, which supports the enablement and empowerment of the notes.
  4. Spreading good practice: winners publish what they did, so others learn.
  5. Credibility: customers, sponsors and funders trust an assessed or award-winning organisation.
  6. Continuous improvement: repeated assessment shows progress over time, as a maturity model does.
  • The limit: chasing an award can turn into a paperwork exercise that improves the documents rather than the project.

The challenges of outsourcing asked 1×

“Why are organization moving towards the trend of outsourcing? Discuss the challenges of outsourcing.”

2069 Chaitra

Not in the notes: page 178 defines outsourcing and off-shoring and says both save money; the challenges are not given. The reasons are in 14.5.

Control and quality

  • Loss of direct control over how, and how well, the work is done.
  • Quality is hard to monitor from a distance.
  • Dependence on one vendor, and loss of internal skill and knowledge over time.

Communication and culture

  • Communication gaps and time-zone differences slow decisions.
  • Cultural and language differences lead to misunderstood requirements.

Risk and cost

  • Security and data privacy: sensitive data leaves the organisation.
  • Hidden costs: vendor selection, contract management, travel, knowledge transfer.
  • Legal and jurisdiction problems when the vendor is in another country.
  • Staff morale when in-house jobs are moved out.
  • Managing them: a clear contract with service levels, strong communication plans, regular reviews and audits (chapter 13), and keeping core knowledge in house.

Trends in cloud computing asked 1×

“Write short notes on: (any five) … e) Trends in cloud computing”

2070 Chaitra

Not in the notes or slides.

Cloud computing On-demand access over a network to a shared pool of computing resources (servers, storage, software), provisioned quickly and paid for as used.
  • Service models: IaaS (infrastructure: virtual servers and storage), PaaS (a platform to build and run applications), SaaS (ready software used through a browser).
  • Deployment models: public, private, hybrid, community.

Trends

  • Hybrid and multi-cloud: mixing providers and on-premises systems to avoid lock-in.
  • Serverless computing: code runs on demand without managing servers.
  • Containers and orchestration (such as Kubernetes) for portable applications.
  • Edge computing: processing near where data is produced, for low delay.
  • AI and machine learning as cloud services.
  • Cost management (FinOps) as cloud bills grow.
  • Security and data sovereignty: zero-trust security and rules on where data may be stored.

What it changes for an IT project

  • Buy as a service instead of purchasing hardware: operating cost instead of capital, no procurement lead time, capacity that scales with demand.
  • Faster delivery through automated build and deployment.
  • New risks: vendor lock-in, outages, data residency; new skills for the team.

Initial, managed (repeatable), defined, quantitatively managed, optimising.

Responsibility, respect, fairness, honesty.

Back to maturity and ethics.

Plan purchases, plan contracting, request seller responses, select sellers, administer the contract, close the contract.

Contract closure settles one agreement with one seller and comes first; project closing closes the whole project after every contract is closed.

Back to the processes and the comparison.

Chapter 15 · 1 hour · appeared in 20 of 22 sittings

Balanced scorecard and ICT project management

A strategy map for balancing today and tomorrow: the four perspectives of the balanced scorecard, why organisations use it, and how to build one. A one hour chapter asked in 20 of the 22 sittings, 17 of them as a short note.

What this chapter is about
  • What the balanced scorecard is, where it came from, what it balances, and its four perspectives.
  • Why it is used: its purposes, its three uses, and the strategy-focused organisation.
  • How to build one, with the notes’ example, and its role in the quality of an ICT project.
Where it fits in the subject
  • It measures what the other chapters manage: cost (chapter 9) is the financial perspective, quality (chapter 10) the internal process and customer perspectives, people and skills (chapters 2 and 14) learning and growth.
  • It ties projects to strategy (chapter 3): a project is chosen and judged by what it does for the organisation’s objectives.
What you will learn
  1. The balanced scorecard and its four perspectives
  2. Why use it, and the strategy-focused organisation
  3. Building one, and its role in project quality
How it is examined
  • Short note, “Balanced scorecard (framework)”: 17 sittings, the most repeated question in the subject.
  • “What is balanced scorecard? Why do it? Why is it important in a large organisation?” (two sittings), and its role in project quality (one).

15.1The balanced scorecard

The balanced scorecard and its four perspectives asked 19×

Balanced scorecard (BSC) A performance metric used to identify, improve and control a business’s functions and their outcomes; a strategy map for balancing today and tomorrow (notes p. 184). A strategic planning and performance management framework that tracks financial and non-financial measures to judge an organisation’s effectiveness and when corrective action is needed (slide 333).
  • Origin (slide 335): in 1992 Robert S. Kaplan and David P. Norton examined the problem of reporting only on financial measures. Financial measures are a lagging report: they tell what happened last month, quarter or year, but cannot look forward. Kaplan and Norton looked for forward-looking measures, leading indicators, and how they could shape an organisation’s strategy.
  • Who uses it (notes p. 184, slide 337): first built for for-profit companies, later adapted for non-profits and government; proven in all industries and in organisations of every size.

What it balances (slide 333)

  • Financial and non-financial measures.
  • Short-term and long-term measures.
  • Performance drivers (leading indicators) and outcome measures (lagging indicators).
  • Just enough data to give a complete picture of performance, and no more; it leads to strategic focus and organisational alignment.

The four perspectives (notes p. 184), with the question each asks (slide 336)

  1. Learning and growth: training and knowledge resources; how well information is captured and how effectively employees turn it into competitive advantage. To achieve our vision, how must our organisation learn and improve?
  2. Internal business processes: how well products are made; operations checked for gaps, delays, bottlenecks, shortages or waste. What must we do well internally to meet our customer goals?
  3. Customer perspective: customer satisfaction with the quality, price and availability of products or services, gathered as feedback. What matters to our customers, and in turn to our financial standing?
  4. Financial data: sales, expenditure and income; dollar amounts, financial ratios, budget variances, income targets. What financial goals affect our organisation?
The four perspectives as linked boxes: learning and growth (to achieve our vision, how must our organisation learn and improve) supports the internal perspective (what do we need to do well internally to meet customer goals), which supports both the customer perspective (what is important to our customers, which in turn affects our financial standing) and the financial perspective (what financial goals affect our organisation)
The four perspectives and the question each asks; the arrows run upward from learning and growth to the financial results. Course slides, slide 336
  • The perspectives form a causal chain, read bottom to top: investing in learning improves internal processes, which please customers, which produce financial results. That chain is why the scorecard is called balanced, not four separate boxes.
THE BALANCED SCORECARD AS A STRATEGY MAP Four perspectives, and the arrow is the point: causality runs upward. Learn It, Cash Follows. DRIVES FINANCIAL How do we look to those who fund us? Revenue, cost, profit, return on investment. F CUSTOMER How do customers see us? Satisfaction, retention, market share. C INTERNAL BUSINESS PROCESS What must we excel at? Cycle time, defect rate, efficiency. I LEARNING AND GROWTH Can we keep improving? Training, knowledge, skills, culture. L Read bottom to top: invest in learning, which improves process, which pleases customers, which produces results.
In the exam
  • Short note, “Balanced scorecard (framework)” (17 sittings, from 2069 Chaitra to 2082 Bhadra): the definition, the origin and the leading and lagging idea, what it balances, the four perspectives with their questions, the causal chain drawn as the strategy map, and a four-row example from 15.3.
  • “What is balance(d) scorecard?” (2080 Baishakh, 2079 Bhadra): the same opening, then why.
Asked in past papers
  • Write Short Notes on: (Any Two) a) PMBOK b) Balanced Scorecard c) SWOT d) COCOMO Model e) Pareto Chart (2082 Bhadra Q11)
  • Write Short Notes on: a) Stakeholder Management b) Scope Creep c) Future Trends in Project Management d) Balanced Scorecard e) Risk management strategies (2081 Bhadra Q8)
  • Write short notes on: a) S - curve b) Balanced Scorecard c) Pareto chart d) Application of CPM e) Decision tree analysis (2081 Baishakh Q14)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgements d) Project management and General management e) S - curve (2080 Bhadra Q13)
  • What is Balanced Scored Card? Why do it? (2080 Baishakh Q3c)
  • What is balance scorecard? And why it is important in large organization? (2079 Bhadra Q10b)
  • Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgments d) Contract (project) closure procedure e) Project Risk Management (2079 Baishakh Q12)
  • Write short notes: a) Balance scorecard framework b) Future trend of ICT Project c) Outsourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT Code of Ethics (2076 Ashwin Q8)
  • Write short notes: a) SWOT Analysis b) Balanced Scorecard c) Risk Register d) Custom processes for IT Projects (2075 Chaitra Q7)
  • Write short notes on: (any four) i) Balance Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure iv) Delphi Technique v) ICT Code of Ethics (2075 Ashwin Q9)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balance Scorecard ii) COCOMO for IT project iii) Break-even Point iv) Cause and effect diagram (2074 Chaitra Q8)
  • Write short notes on: (Any two) a) Balanced scorecard b) Contract closure procedure c) Out sourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT code of ethics (2074 Ashwin Q9)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balanced Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure (2073 Shrawan Q9)
  • Write short notes on: i) Balanced scorecard framework ii) Project management maturity model iii) Responsibility assignment matrix (2072 Chaitra Q10)
  • Write short notes on: a) COCOMO (constructive cost model) for IT project b) Contract closure procedure c) Balanced scorecard framework d) Pareto analysis e) Quality Audit Plan (2072 Kartik Q10)
  • Write short notes on: a) Sensitivity analysis b) The Balanced Scorecard c) Six sigma d) Project Management Maturity e) Decision tree analysis (2071 Chaitra Q10)
  • Write short notes on: (any five) a) Balanced Scorecard b) Tornado analysis c) Critical path analysis d) Decision tree analysis e) Trends in cloud computing f) Outsourcing and off-shoring options (2070 Chaitra Q9)
  • Write short note on: a) Project stakeholders b) Project management information system c) Critical Chain Scheduling d) Categories of Risk e) Balanced Score Card f) Constructive Cost Model (COCOMO) (2070 Ashad Q16)
  • Write short notes on: a) Expert Judgement b) Arrow Diagramming Method c) Balance score card (2069 Chaitra Q15)

Answers: the balanced scorecard short note, 17 sittings, and “What is balanced scorecard?”. The four perspectives in causal order.

How it decodes: four words, four perspectives, read bottom to top: learn it, and the cash follows. The sentence is the causal chain itself.

  1. LLearn Learning and growth
  2. IIt Internal business processes
  3. CCash Customer perspective
  4. FFollows Financial

Why use a balanced scorecard asked 2×

Why the balanced scorecard (slide 334)

  1. To achieve strategic objectives.
  2. To provide quality with fewer resources.
  3. To eliminate non-value-added effort.
  4. To align customer priorities and expectations.
  5. To track progress.
  6. To evaluate process changes.
  7. To improve continually.
  8. To increase accountability.

Its three uses (slide 337)

  • To bring the strategy to life, so people across the company can make decisions with it.
  • To communicate the strategy across the organisation: the strategy map is printed, put on the intranet, shared with partners and published.
  • To track strategic performance through monthly, quarterly and annual reports.

The strategy-focused organisation (slide 338)

  • Mission: what we do. Vision: what we aspire to be. Strategies: how we reach our goals. Measures: indicators of our progress.
  • Its five principles: translate the strategy into operational terms; align the organisation to the strategy; make strategy everyone’s job; make strategy a continual process; mobilise change through executive leadership.
Why it matters in a large organisation In a large organisation, strategy set at the top rarely reaches the people doing the work, and each department improves its own numbers at the expense of the whole. The scorecard translates the strategy into measures every unit can act on, communicates it across the organisation (slide 337), and, by reporting all four perspectives together, stops one department improving its figure by damaging another’s. It also makes managers accountable for leading indicators, not only last quarter’s results.
In the exam
  • “Why do it?” (2080 Baishakh) and “Why it is important in large organization?” (2079 Bhadra): the purposes, the three uses, and the large organisation paragraph.
Asked in past papers
  • What is Balanced Scored Card? Why do it? (2080 Baishakh Q3c)
  • What is balance scorecard? And why it is important in large organization? (2079 Bhadra Q10b)

Building a balanced scorecard, and its role in project quality asked 1×

Steps for a balanced scorecard (notes p. 185)

  1. Establish a clear vision of the future.
  2. Define the strategic objectives.
  3. Determine the critical resource factors.
  4. Choose indicators to measure and monitor performance.
  5. Set goals, action plans and initiatives.

The notes’ example: an online shopping business (notes p. 185)

PerspectiveObjectivesGoalsIndicatorsInitiatives
FinancialRaise sales, cut costNet sales up 15%, operational cost down 10%Financial statementsNegotiate with suppliers
CustomersBe a reference for variety of productsProducts launched every quarter up 15%Number of new products launched quarterlyCreate an innovation committee
Internal processDevelop new products constantlyStart at least 5 new development projects every monthProject innovation reportAcquire software for managing products
Learning and growthKnowledgeable staff in product developmentAt least 2 professionals with a master’s degree in product developmentNumber of such professionalsHire employees with master’s degrees; send employees for them
Its role in project quality The scorecard directs you to develop metrics, set objectives, and gather and analyse data for each perspective. It therefore gives an effective way to measure and analyse how a plan is being carried out, ensuring better quality of the project (notes p. 185).

A scorecard for an ICT project (a college MIS)

PerspectiveMeasureTarget
FinancialCost variance; cost of reworkWithin 10% of budget; rework under 5% of cost
CustomerUser satisfaction after go-live; complaintsAt least 4 out of 5; complaints falling each month
Internal processDefect density; schedule variance; test coverageBelow 2 defects per thousand lines; SPI of 0.95 or more; 80% coverage
Learning and growthTraining completed; staff turnoverEvery developer trained on the new stack; no key person lost
  • How it helps quality management: the quality requirements of chapter 10 become targets in all four rows, so quality is measured from the users’ side (customer), the process’s side (internal) and the team’s capability (learning), not only by cost and schedule. See quality requirements.
In the exam
  • “Explain role of balanced scorecard in it”, in project quality management (2078 Bhadra): the notes’ role, then the ICT scorecard table.
Asked in past papers
  • What are project quality requirement? How it helps in project quality management. Explain role of balanced scorecard in it. (2078 Bhadra Q2b)

Learning and growth, internal business processes, customer, financial. Learn it, cash follows.

Lagging: reports what already happened (financial results). Leading: predicts what will happen (training, process quality).

Back to the balanced scorecard.

Maturity: initial, managed, defined, quantitatively managed, optimising (Idiots Make Dinner, Quality Optional).

Threats: mitigate, avoid, transfer, accept (MATA).

Process groups: initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing.

QA is about the process and prevents defects; QC is about the product and detects them.

Anything that came slowly is the chapter to reopen: maturity, risk responses, process groups, QA and QC.

Every question from 23 papers · 22 CT 701 sittings, 2069 Chaitra to 2082 Bhadra

The complete question bank

All 292 questions set on this subject, reproduced verbatim from the scanned papers. Read them by paper, newest first, or by chapter, where repeats are merged and counted. Every question links to the cards that answer it.

How to use the bank

  • By paper: work backwards from the newest paper; the pattern repeats, so the last three papers are the best guide to the next one.
  • By chapter: revise a chapter, then answer its questions. A question asked in several sittings appears once, with how many times it was set and when, and every other wording listed under it, so nothing is dropped. A question that spans chapters appears in each, with the part for that chapter in bold.
  • Every link goes to the answer. If a question has three links, the full answer needs all three. After following a link, Back to the question at the bottom of the screen returns you to where you were.
  • Numericals are tagged, and each links to its own step-by-step solution in chapter 8 or 9.

Regular2082 Bhadra

2082 Bhadra · Regular · 14 questions

Q1a. What is the triple constraint in project management? How does change to one constraint affect the others?

Q1b. What are the external environmental factors affecting the project? Discuss on interpersonal and managerial skills of project manager?

Q2a. Define “Program” in the context of project management. How does it differ from project and portfolio? Discuss its role in achieving strategic objectives of Project.

Q2b. What are the phases in project life cycle? How does a project life cycle differ from product life cycle?

Q3a. Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of a functional organizational structure in project management.

Q3b. What is a project charter? How do you develop a project charter? Explain the inputs and tools and techniques to develop it.

Q4. A Project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Duration/Predecessor: A 3 -; B 4 A; C 5 A; D 6 B; E 3 C; F 2 C; G 4 D,E; H 5 F; I 6 G,H. Answer the following: a) Draw the network diagram b) Trace critical path with respective activities c) Find out EST, EFT, LST, LFT d) Find Total float of each Activities

Q5. A project is scheduled for the 12 weeks. The estimated cost of project is Rs.100000/-. After three weeks, evaluation is done and identified that 40% of work is accomplished but Rs.50000/- cost has been incurred. Now calculate CV, SV, CP and SP index and estimate at completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. Interpret results.

Q6. Describe the need of work breakdown structure (WBS). Prepare WBS for library management system development project.

Q7. What are the processes of project quality management? How to improve quality management in ICT project?

Q8. Why is communication management important in ICT project? And how to run the effective meeting in the project?

Q9. Explain how a project manager can develop a risk response plan? What strategies are used to mitigate threats and enhance opportunities?

Q10. What do you mean by project procurement management? Discuss on different processes adopted for procurement in ICT project.

Back2082 Baishakh

2082 Baishakh · Back · 10 questions

Q1a. What are the key differences between project and process as per the context of project management? Explain briefly the characteristics of a project.

Q1b. Explain the concept of the project life cycle according to PMI (Project Management Institute). Discuss how understanding these phases contributes to effective project management with illustration of time and effort graph.

Q2a. What is product life cycle? What are the existing system development methodologies? Compare three different methodologies.

Q2b. Define system philosophy. Explain on various types of organizational structures. Compare three different organizational structures.

Q3. Compare the followings: i) Formal versus informal communication ii) Qualitative versus quantitative risk assessment iii) Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis iv) Project life cycle phases versus various process groups

Q4. The discussion among investors of a company to explore new avenue with manufacturing gift items/merchandise targeted for various events. You are assigned as the project manager of this pilot project. Your team has come up with the following associated activities and timings. Activity/Description/Predecessor/Optimistic/Most Likely/Pessimistic: A Design package None 8 15 22; B Design product A 21 25 35; C Secure patent B 30 45 60; D Build package A 6 9 12; E Build product B 30 36 48; F Finishing and detailing C,D,E 9 12 15; G Run pilot campgain F 5 7 9. i) Draw the activity network diagram with depiction of critical path. ii) What is the project completion time in week? iii) How confident are we that this project will be completed within 16 weeks after project start? Write in exact percentage up to two decimal digits (i.e. WX.YZ %) (Table is at the end of the question paper)

Q5. You are overseeing a construction project to build a new office complex in 6 months. The project has the following details as of the end of Month 3: Planned Value (PV): $500,000; Earned Value (EV): $480,000; Actual Cost (AC): $520,000. Calculate the following metrics for the project: a) Schedule Performance Index (SPI) b) Cost Performance Index (CPI) c) Estimate at Completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. d) Analyze your result.

Q6. Briefly explain followings with sample illustrative cases and assuming appropriate data/info on your own: i) Risk register ii) Pareto chart iii) Bidder selection scheme

Q7. What is TQM? How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in projects? Briefly, explain with appropriate examples.

Q8. Write short notes on: (Any Four) a) Decision Tree analysis b) S-curve c) PDCA cycle d) ICT code of ethics e) Soft skills for project manager

Regular2081 Bhadra

2081 Bhadra · Regular · 10 questions

Q1a. Explain project triple constraints. How do these project constraints influence each other throughout a project lifecycle?

Q1b. Discuss the essential interpersonal and managerial skills required for a project manager to be effective. Illustrate how each skill contributes to successful project outcomes by providing practical examples.

Q2a. What are the key drivers of project success according to the PMI framework? Provide detailed explanations and examples of how these drivers contribute to the success of a project.

Q2b. Describe the different types of organizational structures, specifically focusing on functional and matrix organizations. Discuss how each type influences project management practices and outcomes, providing specific examples.

Q3. Explain the concepts of project life cycle and process groups as per the PMI definitions. Justify the overlaps of different life cycle stages and process groups within various project phase. Explain how effective coordination between these process groups contributes to project success.

Q4. A manufacturing company is outsourcing the engineering and installation of a new computer controlled conveyor belt for their new product. The total budget allocated for this project is 10 lakhs. A monitoring report is created at a point where 25% of the work should have been done. It reports a Scheduling Performance Index of 0.9. What does this indicate? If 3 lakhs has been spent during this time, what is expected cost at completion (EAC) if no changes are made to the project and assuming it follows the current project trajectory? A variance of up to 2 lakhs for the whole project was within expectation. Given the expected cost, should the top level managers intervene?

Q5. Compare the followings: i) Horizontal versus vertical communication ii) Project risk management plan versus risk response plan iii) Control chart versus Pareto chart tools in project quality management iv) Project DPR document versus project scope document

Q6. You are the leader of Robotics Club at your university campus. Your team has got an opportunity to participate in an international competition of Robotic boat racing, which is to be held in London in the next 15 weeks' time. You make the following estimates for this project. Given the importance of this event, how would you crash some activities if necessary to make it in time for the event accordingly? Activity/Description/Predecessor/Activity Time (week)/Max. Crash Time (week)/Crash Cost (NRs.)/Crash Slope (NRs.): A Design boat None 3 3 - -; B Develop control system A 4 2 80000 40000; C Source material A 1 1 - -; D Build boat C 5 2 150000 50000; E Integrate system B,D 3 1 170000 85000; F Test/Design tunning E 2 2 - -; G Finalize event participation F 4 4 - -. Illustrate and calculate the followings: i) Regular Activity network diagram with Total project duration. ii) Modified network diagram and the additional crash cost incurred.

Q7. How to manage the contract closure processes smoothly as per PMI procurement management? How different it is from project closing? Briefly, explain.

Q8. Write Short Notes on: a) Stakeholder Management b) Scope Creep c) Future Trends in Project Management d) Balanced Scorecard e) Risk management strategies

Back2081 Baishakh

2081 Baishakh · Back · 14 questions

Q1. Define project. List some key benefits of conducting feasibility study.

Q2. Explain about the project management and project portfolio management. Explain differences between them.

Q3. Define PMI. What are the drivers of the ICT projects success?

Q4. Describe the need of Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) and explain success criteria for projects.

Q5. How does system management address business, technological and organizational concerns before creating or making changes to system?

Q6. Describe the need of closing process and explain its importance with suitable example of the mega projects.

Q7. Consider a project having following activities and duration required to complete them as shown in table below. Activity/Predecessor/Duration: A - 5; B A 4; C A 5; D B 6; E C 3; F D,E 4. a) Prepare the network diagram. b) Identify the critical activity. c) Find the project duration.

Q8. Describe about the project Scope Management and describe the inputs, tools and techniques used to develop the project charter.

Q9. Define project quality. As a project manager, how do you improve the quality of IT projects?

Q10. Explain about the importance of effective communication in project management and describe its role for the successful project completion.

Q11. Describe the various tools and techniques used for performance reporting of a project execution process.

Q12. Define project risk. Discuss about sources of risk in IT projects.

Q13. Why custom processes need for IT projects?

Q14. Write short notes on: a) S - curve b) Balanced Scorecard c) Pareto chart d) Application of CPM e) Decision tree analysis

Regular2080 Bhadra

2080 Bhadra · Regular · 13 questions

Q1. Explain about the project and describe in detail about the characteristics of the project.

Q2. Define a project manager. Explain how you can be an effective IT project manager.

Q3. Explain about the Project Management Institute (PMI) and describe the area of knowledge for the project manager to successfully completion of the project.

Q4. Explain project management context as per PMI.

Q5. Construct the CPM Network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D B C E,F,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 9 7 6 7 6 4. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) EST, EFT, LST, LFT Total and free float time c) Critical path d) Project completion time

Q6. Discuss about project process groups.

Q7. Explain about the project risk management and describe different types of tools and techniques for risk identification and management.

Q8. Differentiate project scope and product scope. Write about aspects of IT project estimation.

Q9. Describe about the cost estimating in project management and explain about the tools and techniques used for cost estimating.

Q10. Define EVM. Your project is scheduled for 2 years. Nine months into the project, while the total project budget is Rs. 42,00,000, you've already spent Rs. 16,50,000. CPI is 0.875. Calculate EV, EAC, ETC, VAC and share your conclusion.

Q11. Explain needs of procurement. Discuss about contract types.

Q12. Discuss about project communication management process. As a project manager, how do you write effective email?

Q13. Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgements d) Project management and General management e) S - curve

Back2080 Baishakh

2080 Baishakh · Back · 15 questions

Q1a. List out the type of project on different bases of project classification.

Q1b. What is PMBOK? How the external environmental influences on ICT project?

Q1c. What are the roles of PMI for the development of project Management profession? Discuss about different forms of organizational structure.

Q2a. What are the phases in project life cycle? How does project life cycle differ from product life cycle?

Q2b. Show different types of matrix organizational structure.

Q2c. Explain briefly about 5 process group relating any project concerning your discipline.

Q3a. Define the Project Integration Management and what are the essential information required to create Project Charter?

Q3b. Construct a precedence diagram for this project and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and what is free float for activity E with respect to activity H? Activities/Predecessor/Duration (days): A - 2; B A 4; C A 2; D B 2; E B,C 4; F A,E 6; G D 4; H D,E,F 2; I G,H 6; J H,F 6; K H,I,J 4

Q3c. What is Balanced Scored Card? Why do it?

Q4a. What is EVM? You are the project manager on a project that has Rs. 800000/- software development effort. There are two team of programmers that will work for six month for a total of 10000 hours. According to the project schedule your Team should be done with 38% of the work. As of today, the project is 40% complete while 50% budget has been used. Calculate CPI and SPI. Is the project behind the schedule of ahead schedule? And share your conclusion.

Q4b. What are the 3 processes of project quality management? and how to improve Quality Management in ICT project?

Q4c. Explain about the need of communication management for the success of critical projects.

Q5a. What is Risk? What are the sources of risk in IT project? Explain brief one method each for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of risk. How risk can be response?

Q5b. Write step by step procedure for the procurement of goods and services in government/public office in the context of Nepal.

Q5c. Explain ICT code of Ethics.

Regular2079 Bhadra

2079 Bhadra · Regular · 16 questions

Q1a. Define project. Discuss final year project characteristics of your own. How you compare SMART objective of your final year project?

Q1b. What is PMBOK? Explain problem tree approach for solving project management issues.

Q2a. Describe PMI's framework for project management. List out common enablers of project success.

Q2b. Distinguish product life cycle with project life cycle.

Q3a. What is system view of project management? Explain about three sphere model of system management.

Q3b. What is work breakdown structure (WBS)? How does it affect the work estimate of tasks/activities?

Q4a. What is project charter? How we calculate probability index for a project?

Q4b. Distinguish project scope with product scope. What is the significance of scope verification in project scope management?

Q5. For a particular project budgeted cost of work schedule was Rs. 9,50,000 and budgeted value of the work performed was Rs. 8,00,000 at a point of reporting date i.e at 20 weeks from starting date. But, the actual cost of work performed was 10,00,000 and the project completion time is 45 weeks. The project having estimated cost of Rs. 50,00,000. Based on above information, draw features of that project and comment on each parameter of earned value analysis.

Q6. From the table below: S.N/Activity/Duration (days)/Predecessor/Successor: 1 A 5 - B,C,D; 2 B 3 A E; 3 C 2 A F,H; 4 D 3 A G; 5 E 2 B H; 6 F 1 C I; 7 G 3 D I; 8 H 1 C,E -; 9 I 2 F,G -. a) Draw the network diagram of activities involved in the project, show forward pass and backward pass calculation in Network of each node and indicates the critical path. b) What is the total duration of project completion? c) Calculate the total float, free float, Independent float and Interfering float for each activity.

Q7. Quality is one of the most important factors to be controlled for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control is implemented in order to deliver a successful project.

Q8. Why reporting system is required in a project? Explain the hazards of communication error in a project.

Q9. Why risk management is an essential part of project management? Describe the risk identification techniques in ICT project.

Q10a. What do you mean by project procurement management? Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project.

Q10b. What is balance scorecard? And why it is important in large organization?

Q10c. What is project management maturity?

Back2079 Baishakh

2079 Baishakh · Back · 12 questions

Q1. Explain about the Project and describe in detail about the characteristics of the Project.

Q2. Describe the different skill sets required by a project manager and briefly explain each of them.

Q3. Explain about the Project Management Institute (PMI) and describe the area of knowledge for the project manager to successfully completion of the Project.

Q4. Describe the need work breakdown structure (WBS) and explain success criteria for projects.

Q5. Describe with comparison between the project management and project portfolio management.

Q6. Describe about the quality planning, quality assurance and quality control and explain different approaches to these processes.

Q7. Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D,F B C E,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 10 7 7 6 5 6. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) Critical path c) Project completion time d) EST, EFT, LST, LFT and Total float time

Q8. Describe the need of monitoring, evaluation and controlling process and explain its importance with suitable example of the local project.

Q9. Explain about the project procurement management and explain the types of processes adopted for procurement.

Q10. Explain about the project integration management and describe the inputs, tools and techniques used to develop the project charter.

Q11. Explain about the importance of effective communication in project management and describe its role for the successful project completion.

Q12. Write short notes on: a) Decision Tree analysis b) Balance scorecard c) Expert judgments d) Contract (project) closure procedure e) Project Risk Management

Regular2078 Bhadra

2078 Bhadra · Regular · 12 questions

Q1a. What is PMBOK? How the external environmental influences on ICT project?

Q1b. Define the project portfolio management and what are the key benefits of project portfolio management?

Q1c. What is the role of Project Management and also explain the recommended skills for all project managers as well as ICT project managers.

Q2a. Describe the drivers for the project success and factor that slowing the project the project success in detail.

Q2b. What are project quality requirement? How it helps in project quality management. Explain role of balanced scorecard in it.

Q3. Define project risk and risk audits. Differentiate the qualitative risk analysis and quantitative risk analysis process.

Q4. New software development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) If all the activities duration estimates are with variance of 2.25 weeks find out the probability of project completion within 30 weeks and 39 weeks. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Duration (in weeks): A - 2; B - 4; C - 6; D A 8; E B 10; F B 8; G C 12; H D,E 12; I G 4; J F,H,I 7

Q5. Prepare a statement of work (SOW) and IS project which is to be developed as Engineering College MIS. You are free to make your own assumptions regarding the system.

Q6. Compare the followings: a) Developing project management plan versus monitoring and controlling of project. b) Risk analysis using Decision tree technique versus Simulation technique. c) Data analysis using Box plot versus Scatter plot. d) Detail Project Report (DPR) document versus Request for Proposal (RFP) document.

Q7a. What is system view of project management? Explain about three sphere model of system management.

Q7b. Define Project Integration Management. And Also compare project scope with product scope.

Q8. Write short notes on: a) Effective meeting conduction process b) PMI framework c) Seller selection criteria d) Tornado analysis

Regular2076 Chaitra

2076 Chaitra · Regular · 11 questions

Q1a. What is the triple constraint of Project? How is project different from operational work?

Q1b. Describe about the characteristics of a project and explain the role of feasibility study for the successful completion of a project.

Q1c. What are the similarities & differences between product life cycle & project life cycle? Define & explain role of system development life cycle (SDLC) in ICT project management.

Q2a. What are the project driven process groups? Explain with sketching required diagrams & mapping of project management.

Q2b. Why reporting system is required in a project? Explain the hazards of communication error in a project.

Q3. New Information system development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on the table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) Find out the probability of project completion within 1.5 years of period. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Optimistic/Pessimistic/Most Likely: A - 12 24 12; B - 11 35 17; C A 15 21 18; D B 15 27 21; E D 12 24 18; F C 6 18 12; G E,F 15 21 18

Q4. Prepare a risk register for a IS project which is to be developed as Engineering College MIS. You are free to make your own assumptions regarding the system.

Q5. Compare the followings: a) Functional vs. Matrix organizational structure b) Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools c) Seller (contractor) selection processes vs. contract closure processes d) Cause and effect analysis versus Tornado analysis in project risk management

Q6a. What is EVM? Suppose your project has a total budget of 300,000, scheduled to last for 8 months. You check your records and find that you have spent 175,000 so far. The team has completed 40% of the project work, but when you check the schedule it says that they should have completed 50% of the work. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule.

Q6b. Explain about the importance of effective communication in project management and describe its role for the successful project completion.

Q7. Write short notes on: a) Project management process groups b) Statement of works (SOW) c) Pareto chart d) PM-BOK

Back2076 Ashwin

2076 Ashwin · Back · 10 questions

Q1a. What are the triple constraints of Project? How is project different from operational work?

Q1b. What are the essential interpersonal skill and managerial skill to be a successful Project Manager?

Q2. Chuchche Consulting Company (3C) is considering a new project for a local hospital to be serviced and they are in planning phase. Answer the following as per the calculations from the different project activities timings of Table-A. Activity/Description/Duration (Weeks)/Preceding Activity: A Select platform and COTS (Commercial of the shelf) software 3 -; B Design for upgrading office network 3 A; C Additional models design/development 6 B; D Model and structure database 4 B; E Integrate hardware/components 4 C,D; F System testing 5 E; G System deployment 2 F; H System tuning and hardening 4 F; I Training material Finalization 3 F; J Technical and end user Training 6 I. a) Prepare activity network diagram. b) List the critical activities c) If the project is starting from Baishakh 1, 2076, Prepare a complete schedule of the project activities, including the exact project completion date.

Q3a. What are the phases in project life cycle? How does project life cycle differ from product life cycle?

Q3b. Why reporting system is required in a project? Explain the hazards of communication error in a project.

Q4. What is EVM? Suppose you have a project to be completed in 12 months and the budget of the project is Rs 10 lac. Six months have passed and 6 lac has been spent, but on closer review you find that only 40% of the work has been completed so far. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule.

Q5. Why risk management is important in project management? What are the quantitative risk analysis processes? Write a brief note.

Q6. What is TQM? Are there quality standards for software industry and services? Relate with other types of standards too.

Q7. Compare the followings: a) Project scoping vs. project closing b) Formal vs. Informal communication c) Sensitivity analysis vs SWOT analysis d) Tender vs. quotation process

Q8. Write short notes: a) Balance scorecard framework b) Future trend of ICT Project c) Outsourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT Code of Ethics

Regular/Back2075 Chaitra

2075 Chaitra · Regular/Back · 9 questions

Q1a. What is PMBOK? How the external environmental influences on ICT project?

Q1b. Define the project portfolio management and what are the key benefits of project portfolio management?

Q2. Considering the following activity detail table having all the times in week answer the followings with calculation steps: Activity/Optimistic Time/Most Likely Time/Pessimistic Time/Preceding Activity: A 3 6 9 -; B 6 12 24 -; C 6 9 18 A; D 3 6 21 B; E 9 12 21 D; F 3 6 18 C; G 6 12 24 E; H 9 18 27 F,G. a) Draw the activity network diagram with identification of the critical path. b) Calculate the expected project completion time in weeks. c) What will be the probability for completion of the project within (i) 48 weeks and (ii) one year of the start date?

Q3. What do you mean by project development life cycle? Explain describing various part, phase, stage and activities of the project development life cycle.

Q4. Why the cost estimation for software project is a bit complex? Explain the EVM technique for the cost control and monitoring. Illustrate an EVA graph with your own values.

Q5. Compare the followings: a) BOQ document vs. RFP document b) Status reporting vs. progress reporting c) Functional vs. matrix organization d) Boxplot vs. histogram analysis

Q6a. Discuss the basic approach used for Total Quality Management and how to improve Quality management in ICT project?

Q6b. Define project integration management and compare project scope with product scope.

Q7. Write short notes: a) SWOT Analysis b) Balanced Scorecard c) Risk Register d) Custom processes for IT Projects

Back2075 Ashwin

2075 Ashwin · Back · 15 questions

Q1a. What are the triple constraints of project? How is project different from operational work?

Q1b. What are the essential managerial skill and soft skill to be a successful Project Manager?

Q2a. Write the concept of project management process groups. How is it related to project management knowledge areas?

Q2b. Define PMI framework. What are the key benefits of project portfolio management?

Q3a. What is PMBOK? And how the external environmental influence on ICT project?

Q3b. Define the Project Integration Management and what is the essential information required to create Project Charter?

Q4a. What is system view of project management? Explain about three sphere model of system management.

Q4b. Define organization structure. What are the different organizational structures and which type of structure do you fell is the most effective in ICT project?

Q5. Construct a network diagram for this project and explain what is meant by critical path? i) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass ii) Calculate the total float on each activity. Activities/Predecessor/Duration (Days): START - 0; A START 3; B START 5; C A,B 7; D C 2; E B 4; END D,E 0

Q6. Suppose you have IT project, which might look after project planning: Task ID/Name/Start/End/Budget: 101 Setup Database Step 1 Sept 10 Rs. 1,00,000/-; 102 Build Application Step 7 Sept 20 Rs. 1,50,000/-. Let's assume, project has started on Sep 3rd determine that the first task is 20% complete and second task is 10% complete and Budget at completion (BAC) is Rs 2,50,000/- and after reviewing your time and expenses software and compiling any miscellaneous expenses, we determine that actual cost of the first task is Rs. 45,000/- and second task of Actual cost Rs. 20,000/-. Find the SV and CV of the project. Is the project is over budget or under budget?

Q7a. Quality is one of the most important factors to be considered for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in order to deliver a successful project?

Q7b. Why documentation and reporting system is required in a project? Explain the hazards of communication error in project?

Q8a. Why risk response planning is important in project? What are the response strategies for negative risk?

Q8b. What do you mean by Project Procurement Management? Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project?

Q9. Write short notes on: (any four) i) Balance Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure iv) Delphi Technique v) ICT Code of Ethics

Regular2074 Chaitra

2074 Chaitra · Regular · 14 questions

Q1a. What do you mean by Project Development Lift Cycle? Explain various phases of the project development lift cycle.

Q1b. What are the triple constraints of project? What makes a project different from operational work?

Q2a. What are the essential interpersonal and managerial skills to be a successful project manager?

Q2b. "The Project Management Institute's Framework provides a basic structure for understand project management." Justify the statement.

Q3. The clothing manufacturer, Neplai Luga, is considering introduction a line of cargo pants made entirely from hemp. The project costs NRs. 4.6 million and will generate cash flows of NRs. 1 million for 5 years. What is the payback period? If the interest rate is 0.3% per month, what is the project's NPV? Should the project be accepted? Why or why not?

Q4a. Consider the following project and answer the followings: i) Construct a network diagram ii) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass iii) Indentify the critical path. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (Days): A - 11; B - 15; C A 5; D A,B 10; E B 5; F C,D 2; G E,F 7

Q4b. Calculate the total float on each activity.

Q5a. A project manager is having trouble getting a project member to complete their tasks as assigned. What type of communication would the project manager want to use to address this problem initially and why?

Q5b. What is PMBOK? And how the external environmental influences on ICT project?

Q6a. Why risk response planning is important in project? What are the response strategies for negative risk?

Q6b. What is EVM? Suppose you are three month into a six month project. Assume that the budget burn rate is constant and the Budget at Completion (BAC) is Rs 1,20,000/- and Actual cost is Rs 65,000/- and Schedule Performance Index is 1.2. Find the CPI of the project and Estimate at Completion (EAC). Is the project is over budget or under budget?

Q7a. What do you mean by Project Procurement Management? Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project?

Q7b. How Pareto charts help to achieve better quality project?

Q8. Write short notes on: i) Balance Scorecard ii) COCOMO for IT project iii) Break-even Point iv) Cause and effect diagram

Back2074 Ashwin

2074 Ashwin · Back · 15 questions

Q1a. What is the project? Explain the triple constraints of project with figure and describe their relationship.

Q1b. What are the managerial skills and essential soft skills to be a successful project manager?

Q2a. What are the key benefits of project portfolio management? Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram.

Q2b. Define PM context as per PMI. Explain the role and responsibility of key project member.

Q3a. What are the major causes of failure of the ICT project? Explain how organizational structures influence projects?

Q3b. What is system view of project management? Explain about three sphere model of system management.

Q4. Draw the network diagram and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and find the total float time. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (days): START - 0; A START 5; B A 6; C START 4; D C 5; E B 7; F E 3; END D,F 0

Q5. What is EVM? The project has been planned that total estimated cost of project is Rs 5 Lakhs and there are 20 widgets to complete in 10 months duration. At 5th months, it reported that project was completed 40% and it has been spent Rs. 3 Lakhs only. Now calculate Cost Variance and Schedule Variance. Is the project behind the schedule or ahead schedule?

Q6a. Define project integration management. What type of information should include while making the project charter?

Q6b. Quality is one of the most important factors to be controlled for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in order to deliver a successful project?

Q7a. Why communication management is important in IT project? How to run the effective meeting in project?

Q7b. Risk management is an essential part of project management. Describe the risk identification techniques in IT project.

Q8a. What do you mean by Project Procurement Management? Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project?

Q8b. Why reporting system and documentation are required in a project? Explain the hazard of communication errors in a project.

Q9. Write short notes on: (Any two) a) Balanced scorecard b) Contract closure procedure c) Out sourcing and off-shoring options d) ICT code of ethics

New Back (2066 & Later Batch)2073 Shrawan

2073 Shrawan · New Back (2066 & Later Batch) · 12 questions

Q1a. What is PMBOK? What are the knowledge contents that falls under PMBOK?

Q1b. What are the key benefits of project portfolio management? Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram.

Q2a. How can IT projects be classified? Write about the challenges of IT projects.

Q2b. Explain the key elements of project proposal.

Q3. Produce a critical path network diagram, showing the earliest start times and latest start times for each task, using the data in the table below. Calculate the total project time and total network slack time. Task code/Task name/Duration/Starts after completion of task(s): PLAN Plan project 3 -; REQ Capture requirements 8 PLAN; AGREE Agree requirements with customer 2 REQ; DESIGN Design system 10 AGREE; CODE Code system 12 DESIGN; ID Identify subcontractors 3 DESIGN; BUY Buy-in subcontractor code 5 ID; INTEG Integrate code and buy-in code 6 CODE,BUY; TRAIN Train staff 5 DESIGN; REL Release system 4 INTEG,TRAIN

Q4a. What are the key features in change control on IT projects? Explain about input, tools and techniques and output of integrated change control.

Q4b. What is project scope management? And compare Project scope with product Scope.

Q5. Risk Management is an essential part of project management. Describe three typical risks that can occur in a software project and for each of these risks suggest two possible countermeasures.

Q6. What is earned value analysis? A project is scheduled for the time of 12 months. The estimated cost of project is $400000. After 3 months, evaluation is done and it is identified that 40% of work is accomplished but $200000 cost has been incurred. Now calculate cost and schedule variance for the project.

Q7. What are tools and techniques for Total Quality Management? And write possible steps to improve quality IT project.

Q8. Compare the following: i) Traceability vs. Adaptability in reviewing steps ii) Horizontal vs. vertical communication and their degree of formalness iii) Control charts vs. Cause and effect charts for quality assessment

Q9. Write short notes on: i) Balanced Scorecard ii) SWOT Analysis iii) Contract Closure Procedure

Regular2072 Chaitra

2072 Chaitra · Regular · 11 questions

Q1a. What is project? Explain the triple constraints of project with figure.

Q1b. What are the essential interpersonal and managerial skills to be a successful project manager?

Q2. What are the major causes of failure of the ICT project? Describe what bodies of knowledge are required by a PM to contribute for a successful project implementation.

Q3. Consider the below table as the different WBS related job (activity) and sequences as per the project plan for a MIS building project. Times listed are in weeks and the activity network proceeds from 1st node to 10th node following the table sequences. Draw the critical path network diagram and calculate the total project time and total network slack time of this project. Job (activity)/initial node/Final node/Estimated Time: A 1 2 3; B 1 3 2; C 1 4 3; D 2 5 3; E 2 9 2; F 3 5 2; G 3 6 2; H 3 7 3; I 4 7 6; J 4 8 2; K 5 6 3; L 6 9 3; M 7 9 5; N 8 9 3; O 9 10 2. DeMarco states that "you cannot control what you cannot measure". Considering from software project manager's perspective, justify with relevant example?

Q4. A project manager can modify three basic elements of a software project: the resources available, the time available and the amount of product to be built. Describe how each of these three can be varied during a development process in order to ensure the resulting software is of high quality.

Q5. Explain about the integrated change control in detail.

Q6. Suppose you are managing a software development project. The project is expected to be completed in 8 months at a cost of Rs.50,000/- per month. After 2 months, you realize that the project is 30 percent completed at a cost of Rs 200,000/-. Determine whether the project is on-time and on-budget after 2 months. Calculate Cost and Schedule Performance Index.

Q7. What is difference between communication skills and communication management? How does the communication skill help to resolve conflicts in ICT project? Explain with example.

Q8. Quality is one of the most important factors to be controlled for effective delivery of project objectives. How quality assurance and quality control are implemented in order to deliver a successful project? Describe.

Q9. Compare the followings: i) Decision Tree vs. Tornado Analysis for risk management ii) Quotation based purchase vs. Tender based purchase for procurement process iii) Consistency vs. completeness in requirements engineering

Q10. Write short notes on: i) Balanced scorecard framework ii) Project management maturity model iii) Responsibility assignment matrix

New Back (2066 & Later Batch)2072 Kartik

2072 Kartik · New Back (2066 & Later Batch) · 13 questions

Q1a. Explain the triple constraints of Project with figure and describe their relationship?

Q1b. What are the essential interpersonal and managerial skill to be a successful project manager?

Q2a. Explain the Project Management Institute's (PMI) framework.

Q2b. What is PMBOK? What are the knowledge contents that falls under PMBOK?

Q2c. Explain various types of matrix organization.

Q3. Compare project management with project portfolio management. Explain the characteristics of simple generic life cycle with necessary diagrams.

Q4. What is Earned Value Management (EVM)? Derive the formulas that are used in schedule and cost performance, explain their significances.

Q5. A big software project is under consideration for development. Overall 10 different activities as WBS are identified as listed below table with their timings in number of weeks. Activities/a/m/b: (1,2) 7 11 13; (2,3) 1 4 7; (2,4) 10 15 48; (3,5) 12 20 26; (3,6) 4 7 16; (3,7) 4 7 16; (6,7) 5 8 11; (4,7) 2 8 14; (7,8) 9 12 15; (8,9) 1 4 7. Where a = Optimistic time, b = Pessimistic time, m = most likely time. Calculate the following: a) What is the expected time of completion of the project? b) What is the probability of completing the project in 34 weeks? c) What is the probability of the activity 7 being completed in the twentieth week?

Q6. Explain different types of Risk and illustrate the Risk management model with block diagram according to PMI Project Risk Management process.

Q7. Define project integration management. Explain the necessary inputs, tools and techniques and outputs to develop a project charter.

Q8. Does effective communication management skill reduce the associated risk of an IT project? Explain with example.

Q9. What makes the project procurement process of very crucial component in project management? What are typical issues to be considered in e-bidding as a procurement processing tool?

Q10. Write short notes on: a) COCOMO (constructive cost model) for IT project b) Contract closure procedure c) Balanced scorecard framework d) Pareto analysis e) Quality Audit Plan

Regular2071 Chaitra

2071 Chaitra · Regular · 13 questions

Q1a. Briefly explain the traits of being an effective and ineffective project manager?

Q1b. Explain the necessity of IT Project Management? How do you perform feasibility study in IT project?

Q2a. Explain about knowledge areas of PMI framework.

Q2b. Describe project management? Explain the roles and responsibilities of key project members.

Q3. What is a project charter? How do you develop a project charter, explain the inputs and tools and techniques to develop it.

Q4. A project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Description/Duration in days: A(1-2) Start earth work 3; B(1-4) Vendor selection 2; C(1-7) Start handling 1; D(2-3) Continue earth work 3; E(3-6) Finish earth work 2; F(4-5) Ordering raw material 4; G(4-8) Excavation for drains 6; H(5-6) Receiving raw material 5; I(6-9) Base concreting 4; J(7-8) Continue handing 4; K(8-9) Laying drains 5. Draw the network diagram and trace the critical path of the network. What are the various timings and the total duration of the above project?

Q5. What do you mean by Project Procurement management and what are the different processes adopted for procurement?

Q6. Explain various tools and techniques for performance reporting.

Q7. If earned value is twice its actual cost for a project, calculate its cost performance index and cost variance percentage. Is the project over/under budget?

Q8a. Is there always a tradeoff between quality and productivity? Explain with an IT related example.

Q8b. What are the possible steps to improve project quality?

Q9. What are the essential components of project scope management? Explain.

Q10. Write short notes on: a) Sensitivity analysis b) The Balanced Scorecard c) Six sigma d) Project Management Maturity e) Decision tree analysis

Regular2070 Chaitra

2070 Chaitra · Regular · 14 questions

Q1a. List out the characteristics of a project. Explain the role of effective feasibility study for the successful completion of a project.

Q1b. What is the role of project manager? What are suggested skills for all project managers and for information technology project managers?

Q2a. What is project management institute (PMI)? How is it related to project management? Discuss PMI framework in relation with project management.

Q2b. Explain with example the concept of drivers of project success and inhibitors of project success.

Q3a. Discuss the concept of project management process groups (PGs). How is it related to project management knowledge area? Give the example of two processes with necessary inputs, tools and techniques and outputs.

Q3b. Define work break down structure and its importance in project management. What are different ways/approaches to prepare a work breakdown structure for a project?

Q4a. What do you understand by Quality planning, Quality Assurance and Quality Control? Explain different approaches to these processes.

Q4b. Why better communication management is critical for projects? Discuss the communication management plan that should be considered for ICT projects.

Q5a. Explain the integrated change control process in depth.

Q5b. Define WBS technique in scope management.

Q6. Being an IT project manager how are you going to manage an IT based project that demands regular updates with new trends in market.

Q7. Consider you are hired as a consultant in a IT college where every year 50 students are admitted in 4 year program. You are asked to prepare a tender. Specification document for setting up a digital library to be set-up on that college. State your all assumptions that you will be making while preparing the document.

Q8. If schedule performance index (SPI) is 0.75 in a mega project undergoing near Devikapur district with earned value of being 60. Now calculate the planned value and also state whether the project is ahead schedule or behind schedule.

Q9. Write short notes on: (any five) a) Balanced Scorecard b) Tornado analysis c) Critical path analysis d) Decision tree analysis e) Trends in cloud computing f) Outsourcing and off-shoring options

New Back (2066 & Later Batch)2070 Ashad

2070 Ashad · New Back (2066 & Later Batch) · 16 questions

Q1. What is a project? List out its characteristics.

Q2. What are different skill sets required by a project manager? Briefly explain each of them.

Q3. Define project management body of knowledge.

Q4. Explain about Project Management Institute Framework.

Q5. What are the phases in project life cycle? How does a project life cycle differ from a product life cycle?

Q6. Explain a Matrix Organization Structure with it's advantages and disadvantages.

Q7. Discuss the concept of project management process groups (PGs). List down two processes of project management process group with their inputs, tools and techniques and output.

Q8. Explain about Integrated Change Control in IT project development.

Q9. Why is it important to determine activity sequencing on projects? What are different diagrams/methods that can be used to sequence activities in the project?

Q10. Given the following information for one-year project, use Earned Value Management (EVM) method to calculate, cost variance, schedule variance, cost performance index (CPI) and Schedule performance index (SPI) for the project. Planned Value = NPR 23,000; Earned Value = NPR 20,000; Actual Cost = NPR 25,000; Budget at Completion = NPR 1,20,000

Q11. What is a Maturity Model for software development? Explain them.

Q12. Explain about the necessity of information distribution and its tools and techniques.

Q13. What are different tools and techniques for risk identification? Discuss brainstorming and Delphi Technique for risk management.

Q14. What is a procurement process? How is it performed in a project?

Q15. Discuss about IT project management methodology.

Q16. Write short note on: a) Project stakeholders b) Project management information system c) Critical Chain Scheduling d) Categories of Risk e) Balanced Score Card f) Constructive Cost Model (COCOMO)

New Back (2066 & Later Batch)2070 Ashad (CE 701 Project Engineering)

Not your subject. DIFFERENT SUBJECT. This page is CE 701 Project Engineering for BCE, BEL and B.Agri, not CT 701 Project Management for BEX/BCT. Included for completeness only; its finance questions (EPS, book value, capital structure) are NOT on the CT 701 syllabus.

2070 Ashad (CE 701 Project Engineering) · New Back (2066 & Later Batch) · 8 questions

Q1. Differentiate between Bilateral, Multilateral and Joint Venture project with example? Discuss the external environment in which a project is operated.

Q2. Define concept of project appraisal. Explain about contents of technical and financial proposal. Also explain input analysis of project formulation.

Q3a. Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H I J; Predecessor - - A,B B A C E,F D,F G,H I; Days 4 7 4 3 2 1 6 5 8 9. Find: i) Critical path ii) Project completion time iii) EST, EFT, LST, LFT, Total float, Free float (FF), independent float (IdF) and Interferring float (If)

Q3b. Define the terms resource histogram, resource levelling limited resource allocation and work break structure.

Q4a. Write the concept of Monitoring, Evaluation and Controlling and also explain project control cycle.

Q4b. Why cost control is important in project? 15 houses were to be completed in three months with per unit cost of Rs 25,00,000/-. In one month 4 houses were completed with total expenditure of Rs 96,00,000/- use earn value analysis to find the status of the project.

Q5. Define 'risk'. Explain various sources of project risk. Elaborate risk response planning.

Q6. Define the term project financing. Explain features of capital structure planning. A project has total capital of Rs 5,00,000 which consists of 2000 shares @ Rs 100, 1,50,000 preference share 18% interest and remaining loan @ 14% interest. Earning before interest and tax in a year is Rs 1,00,000. Calculate EPS and book value of share if tax rate is 25%.

Regular2069 Chaitra

2069 Chaitra · Regular · 15 questions

Q1. What is a project, and what are its main attributes? How is a project different from what most people do in their day-to-clay jobs? Discuss the specific attributes that are specific to IT related projects.

Q2. What is a Project Management Body of knowledge? Explain different general management skills necessary to be a good project manager.

Q3. What does it mean by the term "project management practice"? Discuss project management framework as per the standard of Project Management Institute (PMI) along with the concept.

Q4. What is a Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC)? Explain any one of its kind that you prefer in developing an IT project. Why?

Q5. Most of the project follows functional organizational structure. If you agree, justify.

Q6. Discuss about Project Management Process Groups.

Q7. Discuss the process of defining project scope in more detail as a project progresses, going from information in a project charter to a project scope statement, WBS and WBS dictionary.

Q8. Why is there necessity of Project Time management? Explain how is that performed.

Q9. What is a cost estimating? Explain different tools and techniques used for cost estimating.

Q10. What do you understand by Quality in the context of project management? Discuss quality control process and its major outputs.

Q11. Why better communication is critical for ICT projects? Discuss the contents of communication management plan that should be considered.

Q12. What is a Project Risk Management? Explain the processes involved briefly.

Q13. Why are organization moving towards the trend of outsourcing? Discuss the challenges of outsourcing.

Q14. What are the roles of award and assessment in achieving Excellency in project completion, Briefly explain.

Q15. Write short notes on: a) Expert Judgement b) Arrow Diagramming Method c) Balance score card

34 lists · 63 mnemonics to choose from

Mnemonics, and which of them you keep

A mnemonic only works if it sticks to you. Every list the paper asks you to recite is here once, with several keys written for it, and you throw away the ones that do not land. Press Not this one and it goes; Undo brings it back. What is left is your own set, and it is remembered on this device.

How these are built

  • A word first, always. One word is one thing to hold, and its letters unpack into the list, which is why SMART works. When the order of the list does not matter, the letters are rearranged until they make a word.
  • A sentence only when the letters refuse. Some lists have no vowel to work with, and a few are sequences whose letters spell nothing in order. Those get a sentence, and it is marked as one.
  • The words should belong to the subject. SMART is the model: the key itself says what it is about. A random string of words is a second thing to memorise, so a grouping of consonants is not offered here at all.
  • A letter may come from inside the item. Balanced risk and reward can be an R, which is what makes a real word possible for a list whose first letters have no vowel between them. The word the letter stands for is printed in bold, so the key still decodes.
  • Keep one, not five. Read the alternatives once, keep the one that makes you smile, and drop the rest so the page stops offering them.
  • The chapters are unchanged. Each card still shows the key it was written with; this page is where you decide what to learn.

1Introduction

The nine characteristics of a project asked 6×

“Describe in detail the characteristics of the project.” Nine of them.

The list (9): Specific objective · Temporary, it ends · Unique output · Non-routine, not business as usual · Planning and control · Resource integration, the four M’s · Flexibility · Constraints of time, cost, quality · Team work

In the chapter now: Sasto Tempo Ulto Nachchha; Pulis Rakshi Fyaakchha, Chappal Thokchha

Specific Tasks Usually Need Proper Resources For Complete Teamworka sentence, where no word exists

Nine letters with one vowel make no real word, so take a sentence that is itself a project rule: specific tasks need resources.

  1. SSpecific objective
  2. TTemporary, it ends
  3. UUnique output
  4. NNon-routine, not business as usual
  5. PPlanning and control
  6. RResource integration, the four M’s
  7. FFlexibility
  8. CConstraints of time, cost, quality
  9. TTeam work
Set Time, Unique New Plans Require Flexible Costly Teams.a sentence, where no word exists

No real word exists: the bag C F N P R S T T U holds one vowel (U) and eight consonants, so nothing sayable can be spelled from it. This sentence is the fallback, and every word hints its own characteristic, so it carries meaning as well as letters.

  1. SSpecific objective
  2. TTemporary, it ends
  3. UUnique output
  4. NNon-routine, not business as usual
  5. PPlanning and control
  6. RResource integration, the four M’s
  7. FFlexibility
  8. CConstraints of time, cost, quality
  9. TTeam work

Project objectives and SMART asked 1×

“How should the project objective be?” and 2079's “compare the SMART objective of your final year project”.

A rule, not a list: the key states the rule itself, so there is nothing to spell out.

In the chapter now: SMART

SMARTa word

A rule rather than a list, so there is nothing to spell.

Nine bases of classification asked 1×

“List out the type of project on different bases of project classification.” Nine bases for five marks, which is the cheapest mark on the paper.

The list (9): Sponsorship customer, organisation, contractor, government, donor · Nature individual, staff, special, complex · Orientation product oriented, process oriented · Speed normal, crash, disaster · Funding source private, government, grant, loan · Size mega 5 to 10 yrs, major 3 · Technique labour intensive, capital intensive · Purposes single purpose, multi purpose · Relationship independent, dependent, mutually exclusive

In the chapter now: Sano Nepali Officer Sadhai Furti Sanga Time Pass Rakhcha

SIGNPOSTSa word

The nine bases are the signposts you read a project by, so the word names exactly what the list does.

  1. SSponsorship customer, organisation, contractor, government, donor
  2. IRelationship independent, dependent, mutually exclusive
  3. GFunding source private, government, grant, loan
  4. NNature individual, staff, special, complex
  5. PPurposes single purpose, multi purpose
  6. OOrientation product oriented, process oriented
  7. SSpeed normal, crash, disaster
  8. TTechnique labour intensive, capital intensive
  9. SSize mega 5 to 10 yrs, major 3
PROGNOSISa word

Classifying a project is a prognosis: you say what kind of thing it is before you plan it.

  1. PPurposes single purpose, multi purpose
  2. RRelationship independent, dependent, mutually exclusive
  3. OSponsorship customer, organisation, contractor, government, donor
  4. GFunding source private, government, grant, loan
  5. NNature individual, staff, special, complex
  6. OOrientation product oriented, process oriented
  7. SSpeed normal, crash, disaster
  8. ITechnique labour intensive, capital intensive
  9. SSize mega 5 to 10 yrs, major 3
LOGISTICSa word

Logistics is plain project language, and the nine letters each sit on one basis of classification, so the word itself is the checklist.

  1. LFunding source private, government, grant, loan
  2. OOrientation product oriented, process oriented
  3. GSponsorship customer, organisation, contractor, government, donor
  4. INature individual, staff, special, complex
  5. SSize mega 5 to 10 yrs, major 3
  6. TTechnique labour intensive, capital intensive
  7. IRelationship independent, dependent, mutually exclusive
  8. CSpeed normal, crash, disaster
  9. SPurposes single purpose, multi purpose
Sponsors Need Orientation, Speedy Funds, Small Teams, Proper Relations.a sentence, where no word exists

No real word exists: one vowel (O) against F N P R S S S T. The fallback sentence names the bases almost literally, so there is nothing extra to memorise: sponsors, nature, orientation, speed, funding, size, technique, purpose, relationship.

  1. SSponsorship customer, organisation, contractor, government, donor
  2. NNature individual, staff, special, complex
  3. OOrientation product oriented, process oriented
  4. SSpeed normal, crash, disaster
  5. FFunding source private, government, grant, loan
  6. SSize mega 5 to 10 yrs, major 3
  7. TTechnique labour intensive, capital intensive
  8. PPurposes single purpose, multi purpose
  9. RRelationship independent, dependent, mutually exclusive

The feasibility study asked 4×

“What are the types of feasibility study?” TELOS is a Greek god who will not let you start until all five boxes are ticked, and he is extremely annoying about the last one.

A rule, not a list: the key states the rule itself, so there is nothing to spell out.

In the chapter now: TELOS, the god who blocks your project

TELOS, the god who blocks your projecta sentence, where no word exists

A rule rather than a list, so there is nothing to spell.

2Project Management Body of Knowledge

PMBOK, its five process groups and nine knowledge areas asked 13×

“Discuss the concept of project management process groups.” Five stages of a deeply unfortunate evening, in the right order.

The list (5): Initiating. Formally recognising that a project exists or · Planning. Planning the project to the right level · Executing. Coordinating people and resources and completing the · Monitoring and Controlling. Tracking and reviewing progress and · Closing. Completing every task in every process group

In the chapter now: I Peed, Everyone Clapped, Cringe

IPECCa word

IPECC is the standard PMP-prep key for the five process groups, said 'eye-peck'. It is an abbreviation in common use in project management study material, and it already spells the groups in their real running order.

  1. IInitiating. Formally recognising that a project exists or
  2. PPlanning. Planning the project to the right level
  3. EExecuting. Coordinating people and resources and completing the
  4. CMonitoring and Controlling. Tracking and reviewing progress and
  5. CClosing. Completing every task in every process group
PRICEa word

One word for the five groups, and the R is the reviewing that monitoring and controlling is made of.

  1. PPlanning. Planning the project to the right level
  2. RMonitoring and Controlling. Tracking and reviewing progress and
  3. IInitiating. Formally recognising that a project exists or
  4. CClosing. Completing every task in every process group
  5. EExecuting. Coordinating people and resources and completing the
Initiate, Plan, Execute, Check, Closea sentence, where no word exists

The five words are the five process groups, in order, said the way you would give an instruction.

  1. IInitiating. Formally recognising that a project exists or
  2. PPlanning. Planning the project to the right level
  3. EExecuting. Coordinating people and resources and completing the
  4. CMonitoring and Controlling. Tracking and reviewing progress and
  5. CClosing. Completing every task in every process group

PMBOK, its five process groups and nine knowledge areas asked 13×

“What are the knowledge areas that fall under PMBOK?” One long guilty evening in a Kathmandu tea shop, in nine steps.

The list (9): Integration management · Scope management · Time management · Cost management · Quality management · Human resource management · Communications management · Risk management · Procurement management

In the chapter now: I Stole The Chiya, Quietly Hid Chicken, Ran, Panicked

I Set Time, Cost, Quality High, Calling Risk Partners.a sentence, where no word exists

No real word exists: the bag carries a Q with no U, one vowel (I) and seven other consonants. The fallback sentence names the areas as it goes: Set is scope, High is human resource, Calling is communications, Partners is procurement.

  1. IIntegration management
  2. SScope management
  3. TTime management
  4. CCost management
  5. QQuality management
  6. HHuman resource management
  7. CCommunications management
  8. RRisk management
  9. PProcurement management
It Started To Cost Quite Heavily, Clients Rejected Paymenta sentence, where no word exists

A real project disaster in one line, and the middle of it is cost and quality.

  1. IIntegration management
  2. SScope management
  3. TTime management
  4. CCost management
  5. QQuality management
  6. HHuman resource management
  7. CCommunications management
  8. RRisk management
  9. PProcurement management

General management skills, and project management versus general management asked 2×

“Explain different general management skills necessary to be a good project manager.” Eight skills (2069 Chaitra).

The list (8): Planning · Organising · Staffing · Directing · Motivating · Controlling · Coordinating · Communicating

In the chapter now: Paagal Officer Sadhai Daal Maagchha, Chini Chamal Chiya

Please Organise Staff Daily; Motivate, Control, Coordinate, Communicate.a sentence, where no word exists

No real word exists: one vowel (O) against C C C D M P S. The famous POSDCORB key does not fit this bag either, because this list swaps reporting and budgeting for motivating and communicating. The fallback sentence is an instruction to a manager, and five of its eight words ARE the skills.

  1. PPlanning
  2. OOrganising
  3. SStaffing
  4. DDirecting
  5. MMotivating
  6. CControlling
  7. CCoordinating
  8. CCommunicating

The eleven essential interpersonal and managerial skills asked 13×

“What are the essential interpersonal and managerial skills to be a successful project manager?” The eight core skills; the notes add three more.

The list (8): Negotiation · Energised and initiator · Perspective, sees past the team · Communication · Leadership · Influencing · Motivator · Problem solver

In the chapter now: Nepali Engineer Pani Chiya Lincha, Internet Mail Pachhi

PM PENCILa phrase

The PM's pencil: the one tool a project manager is never without. PM is the everyday abbreviation for project manager, which is exactly whose skills these are.

  1. PPerspective, sees past the team
  2. MMotivator
  3. PProblem solver
  4. EEnergised and initiator
  5. NNegotiation
  6. CCommunication
  7. IInfluencing
  8. LLeadership
Negotiate Early, Persuade Clients, Lead, Influence, Motivate Peoplea sentence, where no word exists

Every word is nearly the skill it stands for, so the sentence teaches itself.

  1. NNegotiation
  2. EEnergised and initiator
  3. PPerspective, sees past the team
  4. CCommunication
  5. LLeadership
  6. IInfluencing
  7. MMotivator
  8. PProblem solver
Nepali Engineers Practise Calm Leadership In Many Projectsa sentence, where no word exists

A flat, true sentence about the reader's own profession, easy to say and hard to garble.

  1. NNegotiation
  2. EEnergised and initiator
  3. PPerspective, sees past the team
  4. CCommunication
  5. LLeadership
  6. IInfluencing
  7. MMotivator
  8. PProblem solver

3Portfolio and PMI framework

Project, program and portfolio, and portfolio management asked 9×

“What are the key benefits of project portfolio management?” Asked by name in at least five sittings.

The list (6): Strategic alignment · Better project selection · Efficient resource use · Balanced risk and reward · Visibility · Fewer failed and duplicated projects

In the chapter now: Sapana: Bihe, England, Bidesh, Video, Fail

BRAVEDa word

Portfolio management is how an organisation braves risk: it picks the right projects, spreads resources and balances risk against reward.

  1. BBetter project selection
  2. RBalanced risk and reward
  3. AStrategic alignment
  4. VVisibility
  5. EEfficient resource use
  6. DFewer failed and duplicated projects
PAVERSa word

The six benefits are the pavers of the portfolio path: each one a flat stone the programme walks on.

  1. PFewer failed and duplicated projects
  2. AStrategic alignment
  3. VVisibility
  4. EEfficient resource use
  5. RBalanced risk and reward
  6. SBetter project selection
Strategy Builds Efficient, Balanced, Visible Firmsa sentence, where no word exists

Four of the six benefits are in the words, and strategic alignment leads, as it should.

  1. SStrategic alignment
  2. BBetter project selection
  3. EEfficient resource use
  4. BBalanced risk and reward
  5. VVisibility
  6. FFewer failed and duplicated projects

The project management office (PMO)

“What are the functions of a Project Management Office?” Six headline functions that cover the thirteen.

The list (6): Standardises estimating, planning, scheduling, controlling, reporting · Owns the methodology and the templates, and improves · Identifies standards and best practices · Trains and mentors transferring knowledge through coaching · Assesses risk across projects, and plans for disaster · Guards the intellectual property of project management in

In the chapter now: Some Officers Ignore Tea And Gossip

IT'S A GOa phrase

The phrase every project waits to hear, and the PMO is who says it: the office that sets the standards, trains the people and clears the work to start.

  1. IIdentifies standards and best practices
  2. TTrains and mentors transferring knowledge through coaching
  3. SStandardises estimating, planning, scheduling, controlling, reporting
  4. AAssesses risk across projects, and plans for disaster
  5. GGuards the intellectual property of project management in
  6. OOwns the methodology and the templates, and improves
Strong Offices Invent Tools And Guidesa sentence, where no word exists

The PMO owns the templates and the methodology, which is exactly tools and guides.

  1. SStandardises estimating, planning, scheduling, controlling, reporting
  2. OOwns the methodology and the templates, and improves
  3. IIdentifies standards and best practices
  4. TTrains and mentors transferring knowledge through coaching
  5. AAssesses risk across projects, and plans for disaster
  6. GGuards the intellectual property of project management in

PMI and the PMI framework asked 12×

“What are the roles of PMI for the development of project management profession?” (2080 Baishakh).

The list (5): Standard publishes the PMBOK Guide, so the profession · Certifies practitioners: PMP for experienced managers, CAPM for · Ethics defines a code of ethics and professional · Research promotes it, and republishes the body of · PMO treats it as the catalyst for organisational

In the chapter now: Some Certificates Earn Real Prestige

SCOREa word

What PMI keeps for the profession, and the O is the organisational catalyst the PMO line ends on.

  1. SStandard publishes the PMBOK Guide, so the profession
  2. CCertifies practitioners: PMP for experienced managers, CAPM for
  3. OPMO treats it as the catalyst for organisational
  4. RResearch promotes it, and republishes the body of
  5. EEthics defines a code of ethics and professional
CRESTa word

Certify, Research, Ethics, Standard, and the T of treats: the five roles in one word.

  1. CCertifies practitioners: PMP for experienced managers, CAPM for
  2. RResearch promotes it, and republishes the body of
  3. EEthics defines a code of ethics and professional
  4. SStandard publishes the PMBOK Guide, so the profession
  5. TPMO treats it as the catalyst for organisational
Standards Certify Every Real Practitionera sentence, where no word exists

Three of the five roles are in the words, and it is a true sentence about PMI.

  1. SStandard publishes the PMBOK Guide, so the profession
  2. CCertifies practitioners: PMP for experienced managers, CAPM for
  3. EEthics defines a code of ethics and professional
  4. RResearch promotes it, and republishes the body of
  5. PPMO treats it as the catalyst for organisational

Drivers and inhibitors of project success asked 5×

“Describe the drivers for the project success” and “what are the common enablers of project success?” Asked in five sittings.

The list (11): Top management support · Clear goals and objectives · Client support · Realistic plan · Appropriate resources, the four M’s: man, machine · Ownership · Formal methodology · Hard working, focused staff · Standard, structured ICT support infrastructure · Effective communication · Experienced project manager

In the chapter now: Thulo Chor Chitwanma Rakshi Aayepachhi Okhati Fyaakyo, Hatti Sanga Ekdam Eklai

ATMOSPHERICa word

Eleven drivers in one word, and seven of its letters are the driver’s own first letter.

  1. AAppropriate resources, the four M’s: man, machine
  2. TTop management support
  3. MFormal methodology
  4. OOwnership
  5. SClient support
  6. PExperienced project manager
  7. HHard working, focused staff
  8. EEffective communication
  9. RRealistic plan
  10. IStandard, structured ICT support infrastructure
  11. CClear goals and objectives
A FREE SCOTCHa phrase

A free scotch, what the team gets when everything on this list went right. Eleven letters, eleven drivers, and a reward you will not forget.

  1. AAppropriate resources, the four M’s: man, machine
  2. FFormal methodology
  3. RRealistic plan
  4. EEffective communication
  5. EExperienced project manager
  6. SStandard, structured ICT support infrastructure
  7. CClear goals and objectives
  8. OOwnership
  9. TTop management support
  10. CClient support
  11. HHard working, focused staff
FACTS COHEREa phrase

The facts cohere, plain English for everything fitting together. That IS project success: plan, people, money and client all lining up instead of pulling apart.

  1. FFormal methodology
  2. AAppropriate resources, the four M’s: man, machine
  3. CClear goals and objectives
  4. TTop management support
  5. SStandard, structured ICT support infrastructure
  6. CClient support
  7. OOwnership
  8. HHard working, focused staff
  9. EEffective communication
  10. RRealistic plan
  11. EExperienced project manager
The Contractor Cut Right Across Our Fresh Home Site Every Eveninga sentence, where no word exists

A site you can see, in the reader's own order, so the list comes out in the order it is written.

  1. TTop management support
  2. CClear goals and objectives
  3. CClient support
  4. RRealistic plan
  5. AAppropriate resources, the four M’s: man, machine
  6. OOwnership
  7. FFormal methodology
  8. HHard working, focused staff
  9. SStandard, structured ICT support infrastructure
  10. EEffective communication
  11. EExperienced project manager

4Project management and life cycles

Characteristics of the project life cycle asked 3×

“Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram.” Asked in 2074, 2073 and 2072.

The list (6): Phases each ending in a deliverable and a · Cost and staffing low at the start, peak · Risk and uncertainty highest at the beginning, falling · Stakeholder influence highest at the start, because early · Cost of change rises steeply as the project · Overlap phases usually overlap, they are rarely clean

In the chapter now: Pahilo Chulo Raakhda Saasu Chichyaain: Oho!

SOCCERa word

Six characteristics in one word, and the E is the each that every phase ends with.

  1. SStakeholder influence highest at the start, because early
  2. OOverlap phases usually overlap, they are rarely clean
  3. CCost and staffing low at the start, peak
  4. CCost of change rises steeply as the project
  5. EPhases each ending in a deliverable and a
  6. RRisk and uncertainty highest at the beginning, falling
CLOSERa word

The same six read the other way: the closer you get, the more the curves have moved.

  1. CCost of change rises steeply as the project
  2. LCost and staffing low at the start, peak
  3. OOverlap phases usually overlap, they are rarely clean
  4. SStakeholder influence highest at the start, because early
  5. EPhases each ending in a deliverable and a
  6. RRisk and uncertainty highest at the beginning, falling
Phases, Cost, Risk, Stakeholders, Change, Overlap.a sentence, where no word exists

C C O P R S carries one vowel and no arrangement of it is a word, so the fallback is the six characteristics in their own keywords, in the notes' order.

  1. PPhases each ending in a deliverable and a
  2. CCost and staffing low at the start, peak
  3. RRisk and uncertainty highest at the beginning, falling
  4. SStakeholder influence highest at the start, because early
  5. CCost of change rises steeply as the project
  6. OOverlap phases usually overlap, they are rarely clean

7Project integration management

Project integration management and its processes asked 7×

“Explain about the project integration management” and its seven processes, in order (2079 Baishakh, with the definition asked in seven sittings).

The list (7), in this order: Charter: develop project charter · Scope statement: develop the preliminary project scope · Plan: develop project management plan · Execution: direct and manage project execution · Monitor and control project work · Change control: perform integrated change control · Close project

In the chapter now: Chor Sasurali Pasyo, Ek Mahina Chaamal Chhodena

Charter Scope Plan, Execute Monitor, Change Close.a sentence, where no word exists

Nothing in English spells C S P E M C C in this fixed order, so the key is the seven processes cut to one word each; the words are the answer itself, so the only new thing is the sequence.

  1. CCharter: develop project charter
  2. SScope statement: develop the preliminary project scope
  3. PPlan: develop project management plan
  4. EExecution: direct and manage project execution
  5. MMonitor and control project work
  6. CChange control: perform integrated change control
  7. CClose project
Contractor Submits Plan, Executes, Monitors, Corrects, Closes.a sentence, where no word exists

The sentence IS the process: one contractor walking a job from paperwork to handover.

  1. CCharter: develop project charter
  2. SScope statement: develop the preliminary project scope
  3. PPlan: develop project management plan
  4. EExecution: direct and manage project execution
  5. MMonitor and control project work
  6. CChange control: perform integrated change control
  7. CClose project

The project charter asked 9×

“What are the essential information required to create a project charter?” (2080 Baishakh, 2075 Ashwin, 2074 Ashwin). Seven items.

The list (7): Scope · Objectives and deliverables · Team members · Risks of the project · Benefits or return on investment · Budget · Business case

In the chapter now: Saathi Ole Timro Rakshi Bokera Bajaar Bhagyo

SORT BBBa phrase

SORT is the word, and the three B’s are the money ones: Benefits, Budget, Business case.

  1. SScope
  2. OObjectives and deliverables
  3. RRisks of the project
  4. TTeam members
  5. BBenefits or return on investment
  6. BBudget
  7. BBusiness case
Scope Objectives Team Risks, Benefits Budget Business.a sentence, where no word exists

Fallback if the BBB half feels made up: the seven charter entries in the notes' order, one word each.

  1. SScope
  2. OObjectives and deliverables
  3. TTeam members
  4. RRisks of the project
  5. BBenefits or return on investment
  6. BBudget
  7. BBusiness case

Project scope management and its processes asked 4×

“What is project scope management?” and “the essential components of project scope management”: the six processes, in order.

The list (6), in this order: Initiation · Scope planning · Defining scope · WBS: creating the work breakdown structure · Verification of scope · Change control of scope

In the chapter now: Ijjat Sakiyo, Didi Whisky Vodka Chakhdai

Initiate Scope, Define WBS, Verify Control.a sentence, where no word exists

No word spells I S D W V C in this fixed order, so the key is a working instruction that names the six processes in sequence.

  1. IInitiation
  2. SScope planning
  3. DDefining scope
  4. WWBS: creating the work breakdown structure
  5. VVerification of scope
  6. CChange control of scope
I Sign Documents Which Verify Changes.a sentence, where no word exists

One clerk at one desk, and the last two words are literally scope verification and change control.

  1. IInitiation
  2. SScope planning
  3. DDefining scope
  4. WWBS: creating the work breakdown structure
  5. VVerification of scope
  6. CChange control of scope

The work breakdown structure (WBS) asked 5×

“What are different ways or approaches to prepare a work breakdown structure for a project?” (2070 Chaitra). Five approaches.

The list (5): Guidelines from the organisation · Analogy: copy a similar project’s WBS · Top-down: break the largest items down · Bottom-up: roll specific tasks up · Mind mapping: branches from a core idea

In the chapter now: Grandma Ate The Big Momo

ATOMSa word

A WBS breaks the work down into its atoms, and the five ways of building one spell the word.

  1. AAnalogy: copy a similar project’s WBS
  2. TTop-down: break the largest items down
  3. OGuidelines from the organisation
  4. MMind mapping: branches from a core idea
  5. SBottom-up: roll specific tasks up
Guidelines Analogy, Top-down Bottom-up Mindmap.a sentence, where no word exists

A B G M T has one vowel and makes no single word, so the fallback names the five approaches in the notes' order.

  1. GGuidelines from the organisation
  2. AAnalogy: copy a similar project’s WBS
  3. TTop-down: break the largest items down
  4. BBottom-up: roll specific tasks up
  5. MMind mapping: branches from a core idea

8Project time management

Project time management and its processes asked 1×

“Explain how project time management is performed” (2069 Chaitra): the six processes, in order.

The list (6), in this order: Definition of activities · Sequencing of activities · Resource estimating · Duration estimating · Develop schedule · Control schedule

In the chapter now: Dai Sadhai Raksi Dhokchha, Dhalkinchha, Chichyaunchha

Define Sequence, Resource Duration, Develop Control.a sentence, where no word exists

No word spells D S R D D C in this fixed order; these six words are the process names themselves, so the sequence is all there is to hold.

  1. DDefinition of activities
  2. SSequencing of activities
  3. RResource estimating
  4. DDuration estimating
  5. DDevelop schedule
  6. CControl schedule
Daily Standups Require Detailed Duration Checks.a sentence, where no word exists

A real project sentence, and its last three words are duration, schedule and control in order.

  1. DDefinition of activities
  2. SSequencing of activities
  3. RResource estimating
  4. DDuration estimating
  5. DDevelop schedule
  6. CControl schedule

9Project cost management

Resource planning and cost estimating asked 3×

“Explain the tools and techniques used for cost estimating” (2080 Bhadra, 2069 Chaitra). Six tools, in the notes’ order.

The list (6): Top-down (analogous) estimates · Bottom-up estimates · Three-point estimates · Parametric estimating · Vendor bid analysis · Reserve analysis

In the chapter now: Two Buffaloes Trampled Pokhara, Vendors Ran

BETTERa word

Six ways to estimate, and each one you add makes the number better.

  1. BVendor bid analysis
  2. EBottom-up estimates
  3. TTop-down (analogous) estimates
  4. TThree-point estimates
  5. EParametric estimating
  6. RReserve analysis
BATTERa word

The same six with the bid read as analysis, if BETTER will not stay put.

  1. BBottom-up estimates
  2. AVendor bid analysis
  3. TTop-down (analogous) estimates
  4. TThree-point estimates
  5. EParametric estimating
  6. RReserve analysis
Top Bottom Three, Parametric Vendor Reserve.a sentence, where no word exists

The bag T B T P V R has no vowel at all, so no word or phrase can exist; each word here is the tool's own name, in the notes' order.

  1. TTop-down (analogous) estimates
  2. BBottom-up estimates
  3. TThree-point estimates
  4. PParametric estimating
  5. VVendor bid analysis
  6. RReserve analysis

The formulas, and what they mean asked 1×

“Calculate CV, SV, CPI, SPI and EAC.” Earned value appears in 18 of the 22 sittings.

A rule, not a list: the key states the rule itself, so there is nothing to spell out.

In the chapter now: EV always goes first. Then CATs and SPiders.

EV always goes first. Then CATs and SPiders.a sentence, where no word exists

A rule rather than a list, so there is nothing to spell.

10Project quality management

The seven basic tools of quality control asked 2×

“the seven basic tools of quality control”, the list every tools question starts from, including the TQM tools question (2073 Shrawan).

The list (7): Flowchart · Run chart · Scatter diagram · Pareto diagram · Control chart · Histogram · Cause and effect diagram

In the chapter now: Five Rhinos Stormed Pokhara, Chewing Hot Chips

Faults Rise, So Plot Charts, Hunt Causes.a sentence, where no word exists

No word hides in F R S P C H C, so the sentence says what the seven tools are for: you plot the charts and hunt the cause.

  1. FFlowchart
  2. RRun chart
  3. SScatter diagram
  4. PPareto diagram
  5. CControl chart
  6. HHistogram
  7. CCause and effect diagram
Flow Run Scatter Pareto, Control Histogram Cause.a sentence, where no word exists

The bag F R S P C H C has no vowel, so no word is possible; each word is the tool itself, which makes the line the list.

  1. FFlowchart
  2. RRun chart
  3. SScatter diagram
  4. PPareto diagram
  5. CControl chart
  6. HHistogram
  7. CCause and effect diagram

Total quality management asked 4×

“What is TQM?” and “Discuss the basic approach used for Total Quality Management.” The seven principles, in the notes’ order.

The list (7): Top management commitment · Training needs · Customer orientation · Involvement of employees · Corporate culture · Tools and techniques · Continuous improvement

In the chapter now: Two Thirsty Cows In Chitwan Tasted Chang

Top Training Customer Involvement, Culture Tools Continuous.a sentence, where no word exists

Seven letters, and no word hides in them: I with three C’s and three T’s. Count them instead. The C’s are Customer, Culture, Continuous; the T’s are Top management, Training, Tools; the I is Involvement.

  1. TTop management commitment
  2. TTraining needs
  3. CCustomer orientation
  4. IInvolvement of employees
  5. CCorporate culture
  6. TTools and techniques
  7. CContinuous improvement

Improving quality in ICT projects asked 6×

“How to improve quality management in ICT project?” Six sittings. The eight steps, in the notes’ order.

The list (8), in this order: Define quality to match user needs · Broadcast simple quality metrics · Fine tune goals to include quality · Get the requirements right · Test smarter to test less · Design applications to reduce bug risks · Optimise the use of testing tools · Maturity model: PMMM or CMM

In the chapter now: Didi Bought Fresh Gundruk, Then Dropped Onto Momo

Define Better, Fix Goals, Test Designs, Optimise Maturity.a sentence, where no word exists

Four instructions that are the steps themselves, in order, so the sentence doubles as the answer.

  1. DDefine quality to match user needs
  2. BBroadcast simple quality metrics
  3. FFine tune goals to include quality
  4. GGet the requirements right
  5. TTest smarter to test less
  6. DDesign applications to reduce bug risks
  7. OOptimise the use of testing tools
  8. MMaturity model: PMMM or CMM
Define Broadcast Fine-tune Get, Test Design Optimise Maturity.a sentence, where no word exists

No word spells D B F G T D O M in this fixed order, so the key is the eight steps as eight verbs, in order.

  1. DDefine quality to match user needs
  2. BBroadcast simple quality metrics
  3. FFine tune goals to include quality
  4. GGet the requirements right
  5. TTest smarter to test less
  6. DDesign applications to reduce bug risks
  7. OOptimise the use of testing tools
  8. MMaturity model: PMMM or CMM

11Project communication management

The hazards of communication error asked 5×

“Explain the hazards of communication error in a project.” Five sittings, always with why a reporting system is required.

The list (6): Wrong requirements built, found only at acceptance testing · Duplicated or omitted work · Overrun of schedule and cost · Conflict and loss of trust · Scope creep from unwritten agreements · Loss of reputation and of the client

In the chapter now: Wild Dogs Only Chase Slow Lizards

CROWDSa word

What a communication failure draws: the six hazards in one word.

  1. CConflict and loss of trust
  2. RLoss of reputation and of the client
  3. OOverrun of schedule and cost
  4. WWrong requirements built, found only at acceptance testing
  5. DDuplicated or omitted work
  6. SScope creep from unwritten agreements
Wrong, Doubled, Overrun, Conflicted, Sprawling, Losta sentence, where no word exists

Six adjectives for the state of a badly communicated project, one per hazard and each word is the hazard itself, so there is nothing extra to memorise.

  1. WWrong requirements built, found only at acceptance testing
  2. DDuplicated or omitted work
  3. OOverrun of schedule and cost
  4. CConflict and loss of trust
  5. SScope creep from unwritten agreements
  6. LLoss of reputation and of the client

12Project risk management

Types of risk, and sources of risk in IT projects asked 6×

“Explain different types of risk” (2072 Kartik) and the short note “Categories of risk” (2070 Ashad). The seven types, in the notes’ order.

The list (7): Project risk · Process risk · Product (technical) risk · Business risk · Known risks · Predictable risks · Unpredictable risks

In the chapter now: Pandit Pradhan Pokhara Bata Kukur Paaleko Udaayo

Projects, Processes, Products, Business, Known, Predictable, Unpredictablea sentence, where no word exists

Four P letters with only B, K and U to help them spell nothing in any language, so the key is the seven names themselves in order: three P risks, then Business, then the three graded by how much you know. Say it as PPP B, then KPU.

  1. PProject risk
  2. PProcess risk
  3. PProduct (technical) risk
  4. BBusiness risk
  5. KKnown risks
  6. PPredictable risks
  7. UUnpredictable risks

Project risk management and its six processes asked 4×

“Explain the processes involved” and “illustrate the risk management model with block diagram”. The six processes in order.

The list (6), in this order: Planning risk management · Identification of risks · Qualitative risk analysis · Quantitative risk analysis · Response planning · Monitoring and control

In the chapter now: Panicking Idiots Quietly Quit, Return Monday

Plan, Identify, Qualify, Quantify, Respond, Monitora sentence, where no word exists

No word spells P I Q Q R M in that order, so the key is the six processes turned into six orders you give yourself, in the same order as the model.

  1. PPlanning risk management
  2. IIdentification of risks
  3. QQualitative risk analysis
  4. QQuantitative risk analysis
  5. RResponse planning
  6. MMonitoring and control
Plan It, Question Quantities, Respond Monthlya sentence, where no word exists

Six words for six processes, in nearly the syllabus words: qualitative asks, quantitative counts.

  1. PPlanning risk management
  2. IIdentification of risks
  3. QQualitative risk analysis
  4. QQuantitative risk analysis
  5. RResponse planning
  6. MMonitoring and control

Risk identification and its techniques asked 8×

“Describe the risk identification techniques”, four sittings. Six techniques.

The list (6): Brainstorming · Delphi technique · Interviewing · SWOT analysis · Checklists · Nominal group technique

In the chapter now: Big Dogs Inspect Small Cats Nightly

Brainstorm, Delphi, Interview, SWOT, Checklist, Nominala sentence, where no word exists

The six technique names themselves, cut to one word each and kept in the order of the notes, so the sentence is the answer and not a second thing to learn.

  1. BBrainstorming
  2. DDelphi technique
  3. IInterviewing
  4. SSWOT analysis
  5. CChecklists
  6. NNominal group technique

Risk response planning and the strategies asked 6×

“What are the response strategies for negative risk?” (2075 Ashwin, 2074 Chaitra), and the threat half of 2082 Bhadra and 2081 Bhadra.

A rule, not a list: the key states the rule itself, so there is nothing to spell out.

In the chapter now: MATA, your mother, handling your threats

MATA, your mother, handling your threatsa sentence, where no word exists

A rule rather than a list, so there is nothing to spell.

Risk response planning and the strategies asked 6×

“What strategies are used to enhance opportunities?” (2082 Bhadra), the positive half. Each mirrors a threat strategy.

A rule, not a list: the key states the rule itself, so there is nothing to spell out.

In the chapter now: EASE, because opportunities are the easy ones

EASE, because opportunities are the easy onesa sentence, where no word exists

A rule rather than a list, so there is nothing to spell.

13Project procurement management

The six procurement processes asked 8×

“Explain the different process adopted for procurement in ICT project”, seven sittings. The six processes in order.

The list (6), in this order: Plan purchases and acquisitions · Plan contracting · Request seller responses · Select sellers · Administer the contract · Close the contract

In the chapter now: Papa Pays, Rickshaw Seller Also Cheats

Plan, Prepare, Request, Select, Administer, Closea sentence, where no word exists

No word spells P P R S A C in that order. Six verbs in the buying order: plan what to buy, prepare the contract, ask sellers, pick one, run the contract, close it.

  1. PPlan purchases and acquisitions
  2. PPlan contracting
  3. RRequest seller responses
  4. SSelect sellers
  5. AAdminister the contract
  6. CClose the contract
Please Prepare Requests, Select Approved Contractorsa sentence, where no word exists

It says the whole procurement cycle in plain office English, in order.

  1. PPlan purchases and acquisitions
  2. PPlan contracting
  3. RRequest seller responses
  4. SSelect sellers
  5. AAdminister the contract
  6. CClose the contract

Contracts, contract types, and who carries the risk asked 1×

“Discuss about contract types” (2080 Bhadra): who carries the risk under each.

A rule, not a list: the key states the rule itself, so there is nothing to spell out.

In the chapter now: Fixed price, the seller sweats. Cost plus, the buyer sweats.

Fixed price, the seller sweats. Cost plus, the buyer sweats.a sentence, where no word exists

A rule rather than a list, so there is nothing to spell.

14Developing custom processes

Custom processes for IT projects, and tailoring asked 2×

“Why custom processes need for IT projects?” (2081 Baishakh) and the short note (2075 Chaitra). The seven reasons in order.

The list (7): Customer’s role is dominant · Environment is more dynamic · Tasks are mental, unique and complex · Society is more democratic and educated · Individuals have higher aspirations · Government’s role is less clear · Sources of knowledge are different

In the chapter now: Chor Ekdam Thakyo, Saathi Ijjat Gumayera Sutyo

CREDITSa word

Seven reasons an IT project is its own animal, in one word.

  1. CCustomer’s role is dominant
  2. RGovernment’s role is less clear
  3. EEnvironment is more dynamic
  4. DSources of knowledge are different
  5. IIndividuals have higher aspirations
  6. TTasks are mental, unique and complex
  7. SSociety is more democratic and educated
DIGESTSa word

The same seven, six of them cued by the reason’s own first word.

  1. DCustomer’s role is dominant
  2. IIndividuals have higher aspirations
  3. GGovernment’s role is less clear
  4. EEnvironment is more dynamic
  5. SSociety is more democratic and educated
  6. TTasks are mental, unique and complex
  7. SSources of knowledge are different
Customers, Environment, Tasks, Society, Individuals, Government, Sourcesa sentence, where no word exists

These seven letters spell no word and no phrase, so the key is the subject of each reason in the order of the notes: seven nouns, each one the thing that is different about an IT project.

  1. CCustomer’s role is dominant
  2. EEnvironment is more dynamic
  3. TTasks are mental, unique and complex
  4. SSociety is more democratic and educated
  5. IIndividuals have higher aspirations
  6. GGovernment’s role is less clear
  7. SSources of knowledge are different

Project management maturity and maturity models asked 4×

“What is a maturity model? Explain them” and the maturity short notes: four sittings. The five levels in order.

The list (5), in this order: Initial · Managed (repeatable) · Defined · Quantitatively managed · Optimising

In the chapter now: Idiots Make Dinner, Quality Optional

It Must Deliver Quality Outcomesa sentence, where no word exists

The reason maturity models exist, and the five levels, in one short sentence.

  1. IInitial
  2. MManaged (repeatable)
  3. DDefined
  4. QQuantitatively managed
  5. OOptimising
Initial, Managed, Defined, Quantified, Optimisinga sentence, where no word exists

No word spells I M D Q O in that order, so the key is the five level names themselves, one word each, climbing in order.

  1. IInitial
  2. MManaged (repeatable)
  3. DDefined
  4. QQuantitatively managed
  5. OOptimising

15Balanced scorecard

The balanced scorecard and its four perspectives asked 19×

the balanced scorecard short note, 17 sittings, and “What is balanced scorecard?”. The four perspectives in causal order.

The list (4), in this order: Learning and growth · Internal business processes · Customer perspective · Financial

In the chapter now: Learn It, Cash Follows

Learning Improves Customers Financesa sentence, where no word exists

No word spells L I C F in that order. This one is a real sentence and it is also the causal chain of the scorecard: learning improves the internal processes, better processes win customers, customers produce the financial result.

  1. LLearning and growth
  2. IInternal business processes
  3. CCustomer perspective
  4. FFinancial
Learning Inside Creates Fortunesa sentence, where no word exists

It states the scorecard's causal chain: learning inside the company ends up as money.

  1. LLearning and growth
  2. IInternal business processes
  3. CCustomer perspective
  4. FFinancial

39 numericals · 21 of the 22 CT 701 sittings · every one worked

Every numerical, and the formulas that solve it

The paper has set a numerical in 21 of its 22 sittings, and twice in nine of them. They are worth 6 to 16 marks each, they are the most predictable marks on the paper, and they are the only questions you can get completely right. Every one of them is here, verbatim, with the formula sheet first and the worked solution closed, so the page can be used as a practice sheet rather than a reading. Each solution also sits in its own chapter, 8 for time and 9 for cost, where the theory around it is.

How to use this page

  • Read the formula sheet once, at the start. Six blocks cover every numerical the examiner has ever set. Nothing else is needed, and nothing here is new: each block is exactly the one used in the worked solutions, and links to the chapter that derives it.
  • Solutions are closed until you ask for them. Attempt the question on paper first, then press Show the worked solution. Reading a solution you have not attempted feels like learning and is not.
  • By topic groups the questions the way you practise: all the networks together, then PERT, crashing, earned value and appraisal. By paper shows what a single sitting actually asked, which is how they arrive in the exam hall.
  • The same solution is in its chapter too. Nothing is duplicated: this page opens the card that lives in chapter 8 or 9, so there is one worked answer, in two places.
  • Show every step. The tables, both passes and the final statement carry marks on their own. A correct answer with no working scores a fraction of a wrong answer with working.

N.1The formula sheet

Network analysis: the two passes, and the four floats

Critical path The longest path through the network. It fixes the project duration, it carries zero total float, and a delay anywhere on it delays the whole project.
FORWARD PASS (left to right: early times) EF = ES + duration ES of a successor = EF of its predecessor at a MERGE, ES = the LARGEST preceding EF start activities: ES = 0 BACKWARD PASS (right to left: late times) LS = LF - duration LF of a predecessor = LS of its successor at a BURST, LF = the SMALLEST succeeding LS last activities: LF = project duration
TF = LS - ES (= LF - EF) FF = min(ES of successors) - EF IdF = max(0, min(ES of successors) - max(LF of predecessors) - duration) IF = TF - FF
  • Maximum forward, minimum backward. Going forward an activity waits for its slowest predecessor; going backward it must finish before its tightest successor starts.
  • Papers write EST, EFT, LST, LFT for the same four numbers as ES, EF, LS, LF.
  • Check before you write the answer: one complete chain from start to end must have ES = LS on every activity. If none does, there is an arithmetic slip.
  • Then list every path and its length. The longest is the critical path, and the list is the proof the examiner wants.
In the exam
  • Answer in this order: table of predecessors, network drawing, both passes in a times table, the floats, the path list, then a sentence naming the critical path and the duration.
  • Node pairs (i, j) instead of predecessors: an activity depends on every activity that ends at its start node. Convert first, then proceed as usual.

Derived in 8.5, the critical path method and the four floats.

PERT: expected time, variance, and the chance of finishing on time

a + 4m + b expected time te = ---------- standard deviation sd = (b - a) / 6 6 variance v = ((b - a) / 6)^2
  1. Compute te and the variance of every activity, then run the network on te exactly as in CPM.
  2. Expected duration Te = the sum of te along the critical path.
  3. Project variance V = the sum of the variances of the critical activities only.
  4. Standard deviation σ = √V.
  5. Probability index z = (T - Te) / σ, where T is the target date.
  6. Read P(Z ≤ z) from the normal table, or on the Casio: P = 0.5 + Q(z) for a positive z, P = 0.5 - Q(|z|) for a negative one.
z-2.0-1.5-1.0-0.50+0.5+1.0+1.41+1.5+2.0+2.5
P(Z ≤ z)2.28%6.68%15.87%30.85%50%69.15%84.13%92.07%93.32%97.72%99.38%
  • Add variances, never standard deviations, and only along the critical path.
  • Two critical paths: use the one with the larger variance. It is the cautious answer and the one the examiner expects.
  • Sanity check: a target later than Te must come out above 50%, an earlier one below.

Derived in 8.5, PERT and the probability of finishing by a target date.

Crashing: the slope, and the rule for spending money

crash cost - normal cost (the extra cost of crashing) crash slope = ------------------------- = ------------------------------ normal time - crash time (the time it saves) = the cost of saving ONE unit of time on that activity
  1. Solve the normal network first: duration, critical path, and how much time must be saved to reach the deadline.
  2. Work out the slope of every crashable activity.
  3. Crash one unit at a time, choosing the cheapest set of activities that shortens every critical path at once.
  4. Re-run the network after each unit. Crashing creates new critical paths, and a path that was not critical can become the one holding the project.
  5. Total cost = normal cost + everything spent crashing. State it, with the new duration.
The cheapest slope is not always the right activity. Once there are two critical paths, shortening one of them changes nothing. The cheapest combination that cuts every critical path wins, even when a single cheaper activity exists.

Derived in 8.6, shortening the schedule.

Earned value: three inputs, and everything else derived from them

The three inputs PV (planned value, BCWS): what the work scheduled by now was budgeted to cost. EV (earned value, BCWP): the budgeted cost of the work actually done, so EV = BAC × percent complete. AC (actual cost, ACWP): what has actually been spent. BAC is the budget at completion, the whole project's budget.
VARIANCES (subtract: money; positive is good) CV = EV - AC = BCWP - ACWP cost variance negative: over budget SV = EV - PV = BCWP - BCWS schedule variance negative: behind schedule INDICES (divide: a ratio; above 1 is good) CPI = EV / AC = BCWP / ACWP cost performance below 1: over budget SPI = EV / PV = BCWP / BCWS schedule performance below 1: behind schedule FORECASTS EAC = BAC / CPI estimate at completion (the notes' "revised cost") revised duration = original duration / SPI (the notes, p. 119) ETC = EAC - AC estimate to complete VAC = BAC - EAC variance at completion PERCENTAGES CV% = CV / EV x 100 SV% = SV / PV x 100
  • Get EV and PV from the percentages. EV = BAC × percent of work complete; PV = BAC × percent of work that should have been complete by now.
  • Always finish with the meaning, in one line: what the signs say about cost and schedule, and what the forecast means for the budget. Questions carry marks for it.
  • If a number is not given, say so. Without PV there is no SV and no SPI. Writing that is the correct answer; inventing a PV is not.

Derived in 9.4, earned value management and the formulas.

Money over time: payback, NPV, ROI, and the share numbers

n R_t NPV = SUM --------- R_t = net cash flow at time t, i = discount rate t=0 (1 + i)^t discount factor for year t = 1 / (1 + i)^t NPV > 0 accept, NPV < 0 reject ROI = net income / cost of investment (benefits - costs) / costs PAYBACK PERIOD = the time until the cumulative inflows repay the investment; shorter is better. Break-even: net income = 0, profit = loss. payback = last full year before repayment + (cost - cumulative inflow by then) / inflow of the next year
  • Put the rate on the same basis as the cash flows before discounting anything. A monthly rate against yearly inflows becomes r = (1 + monthly)12 - 1.
  • Answer the question that was asked. Payback alone is a ranking, NPV is the decision, and the decision sentence is worth a mark on its own.

The CE 701 share numbers (one question, 2070 Ashad, on the CE 701 paper)

EBT = EBIT - interest on loans net profit = EBT - tax earnings for equity = net profit - preference dividend EPS = earnings for equity / number of equity shares book value per share = equity shareholders' funds / number of equity shares

Derived in 9.6, selecting projects; the share calculation is worked in the CE 701 card.

COCOMO: effort, duration, staff and productivity

BASIC COCOMO (slides 215 to 217) Effort E = a (KLOC)^b person-months Duration D = c (E)^d months Staff size SS = E / D persons Productivity P = KLOC / E KLOC per person-month Mode a b c d Organic 2.4 1.05 2.5 0.38 Semidetached 3.0 1.12 2.5 0.35 Embedded 3.6 1.20 2.5 0.32
  • Asked as a short note so far, never yet with numbers. The formulas are here because a single line of arithmetic is all a paper would need to turn it into one.
  • Pick the mode from the wording: a small familiar team is organic, a tight real time or embedded system is embedded, anything between is semidetached.

Derived in 9.3, COCOMO.

The traps that cost marks, taken from these very papers

  • Units. 2082 Baishakh gives estimates in days and asks for the chance of finishing in 16 weeks: that is 112 days. 2076 Chaitra asks about 1.5 years against estimates in weeks. Convert before you compute, and say which unit your answer is in.
  • Column order. 2076 Chaitra prints the three estimates as optimistic, pessimistic, most likely, not a, m, b. Read the heading of every column before using it.
  • Variances, not standard deviations. They add only as variances, and only along the critical path.
  • A missing input is an answer. 2080 Bhadra gives no PV, so SV and SPI cannot be calculated. Write that. Do not invent a number to fill the line.
  • Extra data is bait. Team sizes, hours and unit counts are often not needed: earned value needs only BAC and the percentages.
  • Crash every critical path. The cheapest single activity is often the wrong move once two paths are critical.
  • Finish with a sentence. Critical path and duration, or the status and the forecast, in words. The arithmetic alone is not the answer.

N.2Every numerical the examiner has set

Grouped by topic for practice, or by paper to see what one sitting actually asked. Every question is reproduced word for word, and every solution is the card that lives in its own chapter.

Critical path networks 14 questions from 14 sittings · Draw the network, run both passes, state the floats and the critical path. The formulas

Chapter 8CPM2+2+2+2 marks2082 Bhadra Q4

A Project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Duration/Predecessor: A 3 -; B 4 A; C 5 A; D 6 B; E 3 C; F 2 C; G 4 D,E; H 5 F; I 6 G,H. Answer the following: a) Draw the network diagram b) Trace critical path with respective activities c) Find out EST, EFT, LST, LFT d) Find Total float of each Activities

Chapter 8CPM3+2+2 marks2081 Baishakh Q7

Consider a project having following activities and duration required to complete them as shown in table below. Activity/Predecessor/Duration: A - 5; B A 4; C A 5; D B 6; E C 3; F D,E 4. a) Prepare the network diagram. b) Identify the critical activity. c) Find the project duration.

Chapter 8CPM5+5+1+1 marks2080 Bhadra Q5

Construct the CPM Network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D B C E,F,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 9 7 6 7 6 4. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) EST, EFT, LST, LFT Total and free float time c) Critical path d) Project completion time

Chapter 8CPM2+2+2+2+2 marks2080 Baishakh Q3b

Construct a precedence diagram for this project and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and what is free float for activity E with respect to activity H? Activities/Predecessor/Duration (days): A - 2; B A 4; C A 2; D B 2; E B,C 4; F A,E 6; G D 4; H D,E,F 2; I G,H 6; J H,F 6; K H,I,J 4

Chapter 8CPM4+2+1+1+4 marks2079 Bhadra Q6

From the table below: S.N/Activity/Duration (days)/Predecessor/Successor: 1 A 5 - B,C,D; 2 B 3 A E; 3 C 2 A F,H; 4 D 3 A G; 5 E 2 B H; 6 F 1 C I; 7 G 3 D I; 8 H 1 C,E -; 9 I 2 F,G -. a) Draw the network diagram of activities involved in the project, show forward pass and backward pass calculation in Network of each node and indicates the critical path. b) What is the total duration of project completion? c) Calculate the total float, free float, Independent float and Interfering float for each activity.

Chapter 8CPM15 marks2079 Baishakh Q7

Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H; Predecessor - - A B D,F B C E,G; Durations (Days) 11 5 10 7 7 6 5 6. Find: a) Draw CPM Network Diagram b) Critical path c) Project completion time d) EST, EFT, LST, LFT and Total float time

Chapter 8CPM6+3+3 marks2076 Ashwin Q2

Chuchche Consulting Company (3C) is considering a new project for a local hospital to be serviced and they are in planning phase. Answer the following as per the calculations from the different project activities timings of Table-A. Activity/Description/Duration (Weeks)/Preceding Activity: A Select platform and COTS (Commercial of the shelf) software 3 -; B Design for upgrading office network 3 A; C Additional models design/development 6 B; D Model and structure database 4 B; E Integrate hardware/components 4 C,D; F System testing 5 E; G System deployment 2 F; H System tuning and hardening 4 F; I Training material Finalization 3 F; J Technical and end user Training 6 I. a) Prepare activity network diagram. b) List the critical activities c) If the project is starting from Baishakh 1, 2076, Prepare a complete schedule of the project activities, including the exact project completion date.

Chapter 8CPM1+2+2+1 marks2075 Ashwin Q5

Construct a network diagram for this project and explain what is meant by critical path? i) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass ii) Calculate the total float on each activity. Activities/Predecessor/Duration (Days): START - 0; A START 3; B START 5; C A,B 7; D C 2; E B 4; END D,E 0

Chapter 8CPM2.5x4 marks2074 Chaitra Q4a

Consider the following project and answer the followings: i) Construct a network diagram ii) Calculate the forward pass and backward pass iii) Indentify the critical path. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (Days): A - 11; B - 15; C A 5; D A,B 10; E B 5; F C,D 2; G E,F 7

Chapter 8CPM2+2+2 marks2074 Ashwin Q4

Draw the network diagram and find the critical path using data below. Calculate the forward pass and backward pass and find the total float time. Activities/Predecessor/Durations (days): START - 0; A START 5; B A 6; C START 4; D C 5; E B 7; F E 3; END D,F 0

Chapter 8CPM5+3+2 marks2073 Shrawan Q3

Produce a critical path network diagram, showing the earliest start times and latest start times for each task, using the data in the table below. Calculate the total project time and total network slack time. Task code/Task name/Duration/Starts after completion of task(s): PLAN Plan project 3 -; REQ Capture requirements 8 PLAN; AGREE Agree requirements with customer 2 REQ; DESIGN Design system 10 AGREE; CODE Code system 12 DESIGN; ID Identify subcontractors 3 DESIGN; BUY Buy-in subcontractor code 5 ID; INTEG Integrate code and buy-in code 6 CODE,BUY; TRAIN Train staff 5 DESIGN; REL Release system 4 INTEG,TRAIN

Chapter 8CPM5+3+3 marks2072 Chaitra Q3

Consider the below table as the different WBS related job (activity) and sequences as per the project plan for a MIS building project. Times listed are in weeks and the activity network proceeds from 1st node to 10th node following the table sequences. Draw the critical path network diagram and calculate the total project time and total network slack time of this project. Job (activity)/initial node/Final node/Estimated Time: A 1 2 3; B 1 3 2; C 1 4 3; D 2 5 3; E 2 9 2; F 3 5 2; G 3 6 2; H 3 7 3; I 4 7 6; J 4 8 2; K 5 6 3; L 6 9 3; M 7 9 5; N 8 9 3; O 9 10 2. DeMarco states that "you cannot control what you cannot measure". Considering from software project manager's perspective, justify with relevant example?

Chapter 8CPM9 marks2071 Chaitra Q4

A project work consists of the following activities as listed below in table. Activity/Description/Duration in days: A(1-2) Start earth work 3; B(1-4) Vendor selection 2; C(1-7) Start handling 1; D(2-3) Continue earth work 3; E(3-6) Finish earth work 2; F(4-5) Ordering raw material 4; G(4-8) Excavation for drains 6; H(5-6) Receiving raw material 5; I(6-9) Base concreting 4; J(7-8) Continue handing 4; K(8-9) Laying drains 5. Draw the network diagram and trace the critical path of the network. What are the various timings and the total duration of the above project?

Chapter 8CPMCE 70116 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q3a

Construct the CPM network for a project with following activities: Activities A B C D E F G H I J; Predecessor - - A,B B A C E,F D,F G,H I; Days 4 7 4 3 2 1 6 5 8 9. Find: i) Critical path ii) Project completion time iii) EST, EFT, LST, LFT, Total float, Free float (FF), independent float (IdF) and Interferring float (If)

PERT and the probability of finishing on time 5 questions from 5 sittings · Three estimates per activity, then the same network, then a z score. The formulas

Chapter 8PERT4x3 marks2082 Baishakh Q4

The discussion among investors of a company to explore new avenue with manufacturing gift items/merchandise targeted for various events. You are assigned as the project manager of this pilot project. Your team has come up with the following associated activities and timings. Activity/Description/Predecessor/Optimistic/Most Likely/Pessimistic: A Design package None 8 15 22; B Design product A 21 25 35; C Secure patent B 30 45 60; D Build package A 6 9 12; E Build product B 30 36 48; F Finishing and detailing C,D,E 9 12 15; G Run pilot campgain F 5 7 9. i) Draw the activity network diagram with depiction of critical path. ii) What is the project completion time in week? iii) How confident are we that this project will be completed within 16 weeks after project start? Write in exact percentage up to two decimal digits (i.e. WX.YZ %) (Table is at the end of the question paper)

Chapter 8PERT3x4 marks2078 Bhadra Q4

New software development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) If all the activities duration estimates are with variance of 2.25 weeks find out the probability of project completion within 30 weeks and 39 weeks. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Duration (in weeks): A - 2; B - 4; C - 6; D A 8; E B 10; F B 8; G C 12; H D,E 12; I G 4; J F,H,I 7

Chapter 8PERT4x3 marks2076 Chaitra Q3

New Information system development project has the following different activities to be accomplished as listed on the table. Answer the followings: (i) Prepare the activity network diagram. (ii) Identify the critical tasks and calculate the total completion time. (iii) Find out the probability of project completion within 1.5 years of period. Activity/Immediate Predecessor/Optimistic/Pessimistic/Most Likely: A - 12 24 12; B - 11 35 17; C A 15 21 18; D B 15 27 21; E D 12 24 18; F C 6 18 12; G E,F 15 21 18

Chapter 8PERT5+3+4 marks2075 Chaitra Q2

Considering the following activity detail table having all the times in week answer the followings with calculation steps: Activity/Optimistic Time/Most Likely Time/Pessimistic Time/Preceding Activity: A 3 6 9 -; B 6 12 24 -; C 6 9 18 A; D 3 6 21 B; E 9 12 21 D; F 3 6 18 C; G 6 12 24 E; H 9 18 27 F,G. a) Draw the activity network diagram with identification of the critical path. b) Calculate the expected project completion time in weeks. c) What will be the probability for completion of the project within (i) 48 weeks and (ii) one year of the start date?

Chapter 8PERT3+3+3 marks2072 Kartik Q5

A big software project is under consideration for development. Overall 10 different activities as WBS are identified as listed below table with their timings in number of weeks. Activities/a/m/b: (1,2) 7 11 13; (2,3) 1 4 7; (2,4) 10 15 48; (3,5) 12 20 26; (3,6) 4 7 16; (3,7) 4 7 16; (6,7) 5 8 11; (4,7) 2 8 14; (7,8) 9 12 15; (8,9) 1 4 7. Where a = Optimistic time, b = Pessimistic time, m = most likely time. Calculate the following: a) What is the expected time of completion of the project? b) What is the probability of completing the project in 34 weeks? c) What is the probability of the activity 7 being completed in the twentieth week?

Crashing 1 question from 1 sitting · Shorten the schedule to a deadline for the least money. The formulas

Chapter 8Crashing12 marks2081 Bhadra Q6

You are the leader of Robotics Club at your university campus. Your team has got an opportunity to participate in an international competition of Robotic boat racing, which is to be held in London in the next 15 weeks' time. You make the following estimates for this project. Given the importance of this event, how would you crash some activities if necessary to make it in time for the event accordingly? Activity/Description/Predecessor/Activity Time (week)/Max. Crash Time (week)/Crash Cost (NRs.)/Crash Slope (NRs.): A Design boat None 3 3 - -; B Develop control system A 4 2 80000 40000; C Source material A 1 1 - -; D Build boat C 5 2 150000 50000; E Integrate system B,D 3 1 170000 85000; F Test/Design tunning E 2 2 - -; G Finalize event participation F 4 4 - -. Illustrate and calculate the followings: i) Regular Activity network diagram with Total project duration. ii) Modified network diagram and the additional crash cost incurred.

Earned value 17 questions from 17 sittings · Three inputs, then every variance, index and forecast, then what they mean. The formulas

Chapter 9EVM6 marks2082 Bhadra Q5

A project is scheduled for the 12 weeks. The estimated cost of project is Rs.100000/-. After three weeks, evaluation is done and identified that 40% of work is accomplished but Rs.50000/- cost has been incurred. Now calculate CV, SV, CP and SP index and estimate at completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. Interpret results.

Chapter 9EVM6 marks2082 Baishakh Q5

You are overseeing a construction project to build a new office complex in 6 months. The project has the following details as of the end of Month 3: Planned Value (PV): $500,000; Earned Value (EV): $480,000; Actual Cost (AC): $520,000. Calculate the following metrics for the project: a) Schedule Performance Index (SPI) b) Cost Performance Index (CPI) c) Estimate at Completion (EAC) assuming the project continues at the current cost performance rate. d) Analyze your result.

Chapter 9EVM6 marks2081 Bhadra Q4

A manufacturing company is outsourcing the engineering and installation of a new computer controlled conveyor belt for their new product. The total budget allocated for this project is 10 lakhs. A monitoring report is created at a point where 25% of the work should have been done. It reports a Scheduling Performance Index of 0.9. What does this indicate? If 3 lakhs has been spent during this time, what is expected cost at completion (EAC) if no changes are made to the project and assuming it follows the current project trajectory? A variance of up to 2 lakhs for the whole project was within expectation. Given the expected cost, should the top level managers intervene?

Chapter 9EVM1+1+1+1+1+1 marks2080 Bhadra Q10

Define EVM. Your project is scheduled for 2 years. Nine months into the project, while the total project budget is Rs. 42,00,000, you've already spent Rs. 16,50,000. CPI is 0.875. Calculate EV, EAC, ETC, VAC and share your conclusion.

Chapter 9EVM2+2+2+1+1 marks2080 Baishakh Q4a

What is EVM? You are the project manager on a project that has Rs. 800000/- software development effort. There are two team of programmers that will work for six month for a total of 10000 hours. According to the project schedule your Team should be done with 38% of the work. As of today, the project is 40% complete while 50% budget has been used. Calculate CPI and SPI. Is the project behind the schedule of ahead schedule? And share your conclusion.

Chapter 9EVM6 marks2079 Bhadra Q5

For a particular project budgeted cost of work schedule was Rs. 9,50,000 and budgeted value of the work performed was Rs. 8,00,000 at a point of reporting date i.e at 20 weeks from starting date. But, the actual cost of work performed was 10,00,000 and the project completion time is 45 weeks. The project having estimated cost of Rs. 50,00,000. Based on above information, draw features of that project and comment on each parameter of earned value analysis.

Chapter 9EVM1+2+2+1 marks2076 Chaitra Q6a

What is EVM? Suppose your project has a total budget of 300,000, scheduled to last for 8 months. You check your records and find that you have spent 175,000 so far. The team has completed 40% of the project work, but when you check the schedule it says that they should have completed 50% of the work. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule.

Chapter 9EVM1+2+2+1 marks2076 Ashwin Q4

What is EVM? Suppose you have a project to be completed in 12 months and the budget of the project is Rs 10 lac. Six months have passed and 6 lac has been spent, but on closer review you find that only 40% of the work has been completed so far. Find the SPI and CPI deduce whether the project is behind or ahead of schedule.

Chapter 9EVM2.5+2.5+1 marks2075 Ashwin Q6

Suppose you have IT project, which might look after project planning: Task ID/Name/Start/End/Budget: 101 Setup Database Step 1 Sept 10 Rs. 1,00,000/-; 102 Build Application Step 7 Sept 20 Rs. 1,50,000/-. Let's assume, project has started on Sep 3rd determine that the first task is 20% complete and second task is 10% complete and Budget at completion (BAC) is Rs 2,50,000/- and after reviewing your time and expenses software and compiling any miscellaneous expenses, we determine that actual cost of the first task is Rs. 45,000/- and second task of Actual cost Rs. 20,000/-. Find the SV and CV of the project. Is the project is over budget or under budget?

Chapter 9EVM1+2+1+1 marks2074 Chaitra Q6b

What is EVM? Suppose you are three month into a six month project. Assume that the budget burn rate is constant and the Budget at Completion (BAC) is Rs 1,20,000/- and Actual cost is Rs 65,000/- and Schedule Performance Index is 1.2. Find the CPI of the project and Estimate at Completion (EAC). Is the project is over budget or under budget?

Chapter 9EVM1+2+2+1 marks2074 Ashwin Q5

What is EVM? The project has been planned that total estimated cost of project is Rs 5 Lakhs and there are 20 widgets to complete in 10 months duration. At 5th months, it reported that project was completed 40% and it has been spent Rs. 3 Lakhs only. Now calculate Cost Variance and Schedule Variance. Is the project behind the schedule or ahead schedule?

Chapter 9EVM2+6 marks2073 Shrawan Q6

What is earned value analysis? A project is scheduled for the time of 12 months. The estimated cost of project is $400000. After 3 months, evaluation is done and it is identified that 40% of work is accomplished but $200000 cost has been incurred. Now calculate cost and schedule variance for the project.

Chapter 9EVM8 marks2072 Chaitra Q6

Suppose you are managing a software development project. The project is expected to be completed in 8 months at a cost of Rs.50,000/- per month. After 2 months, you realize that the project is 30 percent completed at a cost of Rs 200,000/-. Determine whether the project is on-time and on-budget after 2 months. Calculate Cost and Schedule Performance Index.

Chapter 9EVM6 marks2071 Chaitra Q7

If earned value is twice its actual cost for a project, calculate its cost performance index and cost variance percentage. Is the project over/under budget?

Chapter 9EVM6 marks2070 Chaitra Q8

If schedule performance index (SPI) is 0.75 in a mega project undergoing near Devikapur district with earned value of being 60. Now calculate the planned value and also state whether the project is ahead schedule or behind schedule.

Chapter 9EVM6 marks2070 Ashad Q10

Given the following information for one-year project, use Earned Value Management (EVM) method to calculate, cost variance, schedule variance, cost performance index (CPI) and Schedule performance index (SPI) for the project. Planned Value = NPR 23,000; Earned Value = NPR 20,000; Actual Cost = NPR 25,000; Budget at Completion = NPR 1,20,000

Chapter 9EVMCE 7013+4 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q4b

Why cost control is important in project? 15 houses were to be completed in three months with per unit cost of Rs 25,00,000/-. In one month 4 houses were completed with total expenditure of Rs 96,00,000/- use earn value analysis to find the status of the project.

Appraisal and finance 2 questions from 2 sittings · Payback, discounting and the share numbers: money valued over time. The formulas

Chapter 9NPV10 marks2074 Chaitra Q3

The clothing manufacturer, Neplai Luga, is considering introduction a line of cargo pants made entirely from hemp. The project costs NRs. 4.6 million and will generate cash flows of NRs. 1 million for 5 years. What is the payback period? If the interest rate is 0.3% per month, what is the project's NPV? Should the project be accepted? Why or why not?

Chapter 9EPSCE 7012+4+4 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q6

Define the term project financing. Explain features of capital structure planning. A project has total capital of Rs 5,00,000 which consists of 2000 shares @ Rs 100, 1,50,000 preference share 18% interest and remaining loan @ 14% interest. Earning before interest and tax in a year is Rs 1,00,000. Calculate EPS and book value of share if tax rate is 25%.

15 maps · 132 topics · 184 lists · 1034 items

Every chapter as one map

You can explain a term and still go blank on “name the types”. That is a retrieval problem, and it is fixed by practising the lists themselves. Each map opens whole: the chapter, its topics, every list and every member, with the size of each list beside its name. To turn a map into a test, press Close all: the items go and the names and counts stay, so “7 Types of risk” becomes a question. The canvas pans, zooms and goes full screen, so a big chapter is explored rather than squeezed. Nothing is explained here on purpose: the explanations are in the chapters, one press away.

How to use the maps

  • Press anything to have it explained. A topic, a list, or a single item such as Measurable: a note opens beside the map saying what it means, in a line or two. The chapter card behind it is one more press away.
  • Close all turns the map into a test. 7 Types of risk with the items gone means: name seven, then press it. Answering before you look is what moves a list into memory; reading one you have not tried to recall feels like learning and is not.
  • The count is half the memory. Knowing there are six processes is what tells you to keep going when you have named four.
  • The chevron folds a topic or a list away; Open all brings the chapter back whole. The arrow beside a topic opens the card it came from.
  • Drag the canvas to move, and zoom with the buttons or ctrl and the wheel. Fit puts the whole chapter back on screen, and Full screen gives the map the whole display.
  • One chapter a sitting, and revisit it the next day. Spaced retrieval is what moves a list into memory, which is why the mnemonics and the recall prompts in the chapters work the same way.
100%

Drag to move · ctrl and wheel to zoom

Chapter 1Introduction 10 topics · 19 lists · 114 items
  • ↗
  • ↗
  • ↗
  • ↗
  • ↗
  • ↗
  • ↗
  • ↗
  • ↗

9 questions that ask you to produce something · answered in full

The practical questions, and what a full answer looks like

Some questions do not ask what a thing is. They hand you a college and ask for the document: prepare a WBS, write a statement of work, fill a risk register, draft a tender, show the structure. They are worth 3 to 8 marks each, they appear in most papers, and they are the ones students answer with an essay about the document instead of the document itself. Every one is here with a complete model answer, sized and costed for a real Nepali college, with the assumptions stated the way the question asks for them.

How these are marked, and how to answer them

  • Produce the artefact, do not describe it. “Prepare a WBS” wants a WBS on the page. A paragraph explaining what a WBS is earns the definition mark and loses the rest.
  • State your assumptions first, in two lines. Every one of these questions says you may make your own. Name the college, the number of students, the budget, the duration and the team. Numbers make the answer look like it was written for a real place.
  • Use the reader’s own section names. The examiner is marking against a list: the nine sections of a SOW, the eight fields of a risk register, the parts of a tender. Missing a section is a missing mark, whatever else you wrote.
  • Draw where drawing is faster. A WBS, an organisation chart, a block diagram and an S curve are drawn in a minute and carry marks that a paragraph cannot.
  • Keep one page per 8 marks. These answers are longer than exam length on purpose, so you can see the full shape; in the hall, write the skeleton and fill what time allows, in order of the marks.

PR.1Build the document

Prepare a WBS for a library management system

Work breakdown structure, library management system2082 Bhadra Q6 · 3+3 marks

The question. “Describe the need of work breakdown structure (WBS). Prepare WBS for library management system development project.”

Assumptions. A college library of about 12,000 titles and 1,200 members moves from registers to software. One vendor, a team of five, six months, NRs. 1,800,000, and the existing catalogue is in three spreadsheets. Circulation, cataloguing, membership, search and reports are in scope; procurement of RFID gates is not.

Part one: why a WBS is needed (3 marks, keep it to five lines)

  • It defines the total scope: what is not in the WBS is not in the project, so it settles arguments about scope before they start.
  • It makes estimating possible: nobody can estimate “a library system”, but anyone can estimate “barcode setup”.
  • It is the base for the schedule, the budget and the responsibility matrix: each work package gets a duration, a cost and one owner.
  • It supports control: progress is measured package by package instead of by feeling, which is what earned value needs.
  • It reduces risk: decomposition exposes the work nobody had thought about, usually data migration and training.

Part two: the WBS itself (3 marks). Draw it as a tree, or write it as the indented numbered list below. Both earn the marks; the tree is faster.

WBS: LIBRARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (2082 BHADRA Q6) Deliverable oriented: every box is a thing produced, not an activity. Numbering carries the level. 1.0 Library Management System 1.1 Project management Charter and plan Progress reports Closure report 1.2 Requirements User interviews SRS document Sign off 1.3 Design Database design Screen design Architecture 1.4 Build Catalogue module Circulation module Member module Search and reports 1.5 Data and migration Data cleaning Catalogue import Barcode setup 1.6 Testing and handover System testing User acceptance test Training and go live THE 100 PERCENT RULE Each level adds up to exactly its parent, project management included. THE 8 TO 80 RULE A work package is 8 to 80 hours of work.

The same WBS as a tree. Level 2 is deliverables, level 3 is work packages, and project management is a branch of its own, because the 100 percent rule counts it as work.

1.0 LIBRARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 1.1 Project management 1.4 Build 1.1.1 Charter and plan 1.4.1 Catalogue module 1.1.2 Progress reports 1.4.2 Circulation module (issue, return, fine) 1.1.3 Closure report 1.4.3 Member module 1.2 Requirements 1.4.4 Search and reports 1.2.1 User interviews 1.5 Data and migration 1.2.2 SRS document 1.5.1 Data cleaning 1.2.3 Sign off 1.5.2 Catalogue import 1.3 Design 1.5.3 Barcode setup 1.3.1 Database design 1.6 Testing and handover 1.3.2 Screen design 1.6.1 System testing 1.3.3 Architecture 1.6.2 User acceptance testing 1.6.3 Training and go live
  • Say the two rules under the diagram. The 100 percent rule: each level adds up to exactly its parent, project management included. The 8/80 rule: a work package is between 8 and 80 hours, small enough to estimate and big enough to manage.
  • Name the approach you used: top down from the deliverables, which is what the numbering shows. Analogy, bottom up, guidelines and mind mapping are the alternatives.
How the marks fall
  • 3 marks for the need: five distinct reasons, not one reason said five ways.
  • 3 marks for the WBS: three levels, numbering that carries the level, deliverables at level 2 and work packages at level 3, with project management included.
  • Do not write activities. “Design the database” is an activity; “Database design” is a deliverable. The examiner is looking for nouns.

Prepare a statement of work for an Engineering College MIS

Statement of work, college MIS2078 Bhadra Q5 · 8 marks

The question. “Prepare a statement of work (SOW) and IS project which is to be developed as Engineering College MIS. You are free to make your own assumptions regarding the project.”

Assumptions. The client is Himalaya Engineering College, Lalitpur, affiliated to Tribhuvan University, running four BE programmes (civil, computer, electrical, electronics) with about 1,800 students, 120 teaching and 45 non-teaching staff, and eight years of paper and spreadsheet records to migrate. The vendor is Sagarmatha Softworks Pvt. Ltd. The system is a single web-based MIS hosted on the college server room with a nightly off-site backup. Budget is NRs. 4,500,000 including one year of warranty support, duration is seven months from contract signing, and the vendor team is eight people: one project manager, one business analyst, one UI designer, three developers, one tester and one database administrator at half time. The college nominates a three-member user committee. Payroll, hostel and alumni management are deliberately left out of this phase.

1. Introduction

  • Parties: Himalaya Engineering College (the client, represented by the Principal as project sponsor) and Sagarmatha Softworks Pvt. Ltd. (the vendor, represented by its project manager).
  • Nature of the engagement: it is chiefly a product, a custom web-based management information system delivered with its source code, bundled with services: data migration, staff training and one year of warranty support.
  • Effective period: seven months of execution from the date of signing, followed by twelve months of warranty.
  • Governing documents: this statement of work is an input to the project charter and, once signed, is legally binding on both parties. Anything not written here is out of scope until a signed change request adds it.

2. Project overview and objectives

  • Business need: admission, attendance, examination and fee records are kept on paper registers and unlinked Excel files. A single student’s record sits in five places, fee defaulters are found only at the end of a semester, and the university return takes the administration four to five days to compile by hand.
  • Objective 1: hold every student, academic and financial record in one database, so a student’s full profile is retrieved in one search.
  • Objective 2: cut the preparation of routine reports (attendance shortfall, fee dues, result summaries) from days to under one minute.
  • Objective 3: give students and parents self-service access to attendance, results and fee status, removing about 60 counter enquiries a day from the administration office.
  • Objective 4: go live before the start of the next academic session, so the new intake is admitted through the system rather than on paper.
  • Strategic fit: the college’s five-year plan commits it to accreditation readiness and to doubling the intake. Both need auditable, retrievable records, which a paper office cannot supply.

3. Scope of work

  • Admissions: online application, entrance shortlisting, merit list, admission confirmation and roll number generation.
  • Student records: one profile per student holding personal details, guardian details, programme, semester, documents and status (regular, back paper, dropped).
  • Attendance: subject-wise daily entry by teachers, automatic shortfall alerts below 75 per cent, monthly summaries per class.
  • Examinations and results: internal assessment entry, examination form filling, marks entry with two-stage verification, grade sheets and semester GPA, and the university result import.
  • Fees and accounts: fee structure per programme, invoicing, receipts, dues ageing, scholarship and waiver handling, and a daily collection register.
  • Library: catalogue, member accounts, issue and return, fines, and lost book records.
  • Staff records: profiles, department, designation, teaching load and leave balance (not payroll).
  • Reporting: a report module with the university return, attendance shortfall, fee dues, result analysis and admission funnel, each exportable to PDF and Excel.
  • Access: role-based web access for administration, accounts, librarian, head of department, teacher, student and parent, over both desktop and mobile browsers.
  • Non-functional: 200 concurrent users, page response under three seconds, daily automated backup, password hashing and an audit trail on every financial and marks transaction.
  • Explicitly out of scope: payroll, hostel and transport management, an alumni portal, a native mobile application, biometric hardware, and any integration with the university’s own portal beyond a CSV import and export.

4. Task list

  1. Phase 1, requirements: interview the seven user groups, study existing registers and forms, apply the MoSCoW rule to the collected requirements, and produce a signed SRS.
  2. Phase 2, design: database design, module and interface design, security and role matrix, and a clickable prototype of the five most used screens for user sign-off.
  3. Phase 3, development: build the modules in the agreed order: student records and admissions first, then attendance, examinations, fees, library, staff and reporting, with unit tests at each build.
  4. Phase 4, data migration: clean and load eight years of student, fee and library data from the existing registers and spreadsheets, then reconcile totals with the accounts section.
  5. Phase 5, testing: system testing, security testing, load testing at 200 users, and two rounds of user acceptance testing by the user committee.
  6. Phase 6, deployment and training: install on the college server, run the parallel period, train staff and students, and hand over documentation and source code.

5. Project schedule

MonthPhaseMilestone
1RequirementsSRS signed by the user committee
2DesignDatabase and interface design approved, prototype accepted
3 and 4DevelopmentAll eight modules code complete, internal demonstration held
5Data migration and testingLegacy data loaded and reconciled, system and load testing passed
6User acceptance and trainingUAT closed, 150 staff and student users trained
7Go-live and parallel runSystem live, one month parallel run closed, acceptance certificate signed
  • Critical dependency: the college must supply the cleaned legacy fee ledger by the end of month 4. Every week of delay pushes go-live by a week.

6. Project deliverables

  • Documents: the signed SRS, the database and system design document, the test plan with test results, and the data migration report.
  • The system: the working MIS with all eight modules, installed on the college server with staging and production environments.
  • Data: eight years of migrated records, reconciled and signed off by the accounts section.
  • Source and rights: full source code, database scripts and deployment instructions, with intellectual property transferred to the college on final payment.
  • Manuals: a user manual per role and one administrator manual, in English, plus six recorded training videos.
  • People: trained staff: all 45 non-teaching staff, all 120 teachers, and two nominated system administrators from the IT department.

7. Adoption plan

  • Pilot: the computer department alone uses the full system for the last four weeks of month 6, with roughly 400 students, so defects surface at a survivable scale.
  • Roll-out: all four departments follow in month 7, one department per week, starting with the department whose head is on the user committee.
  • Parallel running: the paper registers continue alongside the system for one month after go-live. The system is declared the single source of record only after one clean month of reconciliation.
  • Training: role-based sessions of two hours each, delivered in the college computer laboratory in batches of 25, plus a fifteen-minute orientation for students at the start of the session.
  • Support: an on-site help desk staffed by the vendor for the first three months, then remote support with a one working day response time for the rest of the warranty year.
  • Handover: the two college system administrators shadow the vendor during the parallel month so the college can operate the system on its own from month 8.

8. Project management

  • Governance: a steering committee chaired by the Principal, with the Vice Principal, the Accounts Chief, the head of the IT department and the vendor’s project manager, meeting monthly.
  • Reporting: a written fortnightly progress report covering work completed, work planned, issues and risks, plus a monthly presentation to the steering committee.
  • Single point of contact: the head of the IT department for the college, the project manager for the vendor. All approvals go through them in writing.
  • Change control: any request outside the scope of work above is costed by the vendor and takes effect only after a change request signed by the Principal. Changes above NRs. 200,000 in total require a revised contract.
  • Payment schedule: total NRs. 4,500,000 excluding VAT, paid as 20 per cent (NRs. 900,000) on signing, 25 per cent (NRs. 1,125,000) on approval of the design, 30 per cent (NRs. 1,350,000) on passing system testing, and 25 per cent (NRs. 1,125,000) on the signed acceptance certificate.
  • Penalty and termination: a delay penalty of 0.5 per cent of the contract value per week of vendor delay, capped at 5 per cent, with delays caused by the college excluded. Either party may terminate with 30 days’ written notice, with payment for work completed.
  • Client obligations: the server and network, the cleaned legacy data, the user committee’s time, and a training room. Vendor delays caused by their absence are not vendor delays.
  • Key risks to manage: incomplete or dirty legacy records, staff resistance to leaving the registers, requirement creep from departments outside the committee, and a change in the university’s result format during the build.

9. Success criteria and sign-off

  • Functional: all eight modules pass user acceptance testing with zero open critical or high-severity defects.
  • Performance: every listed report is produced in under one minute, and pages respond within three seconds at 200 concurrent users.
  • Data: migrated fee and marks totals reconcile with the manual ledgers to 100 per cent, with a signed reconciliation statement from the Accounts Chief.
  • Adoption: at least 95 per cent of staff trained, and one full month of parallel running closed with no discrepancy that forces a fallback to the registers.
  • Business outcome: the university return and the fee dues report are produced from the system alone, without any manual compilation.
  • Sign-off: the Principal signs the acceptance certificate on behalf of the college, countersigned by the head of the IT department and the Accounts Chief. Signing releases the final payment and starts the twelve-month warranty.
How the marks fall
  • A document, not an essay: the examiner wants the nine SOW sections written out as a real document. Prose explaining what a SOW is scores a fraction of what the document itself scores.
  • Assumptions stated up front: the question invites them, so state student numbers, budget, duration and team size explicitly. An answer with no numbers looks like it was written without thinking about a real college.
  • Every section filled with MIS-specific content: name the modules (admissions, records, attendance, examinations, fees, library, staff, reporting) and say what is out of scope. Generic filler in a section reads as a section not attempted.
  • The hard parts carry the marks: a schedule with months, a payment split that adds to the budget, and measurable success criteria. Those three show you understand that a SOW is legally binding, not descriptive.

Prepare a risk register for the same college MIS

Risk register, college MIS2076 Chaitra Q4 · 8 marks

The question. “Prepare a risk register for a IS project which is to be developed as Engineering College MIS. You are free to make your own assumptions regarding the project.”

Assumptions. The client is Himalaya Engineering College, a single campus of about 1,200 students and 90 staff. The MIS is a web system with seven modules: admissions, student records, attendance, exams, fees, library and reporting. Build time is nine months, with go live one month before the next admission intake. The team is six people: one project manager, one team lead, three developers and one tester, with the Campus Chief as sponsor. Budget is NRs. 3,200,000, of which NRs. 250,000 is held as a contingency reserve. Records today sit in paper files and departmental spreadsheets. Hosting has not yet been bought. In the register below, risk analysis is qualitative: probability is a percentage from expert judgment, impact is read off the probability and impact matrix as High, Medium or Low, and risk priority is probability times impact with the highest first. Row R5 is an opportunity, a positive risk, so it carries a positive strategy.

Risk ID Risk description Risk category Risk probability Impact Risk priority Status Risk response Risk owner
R1 Departments keep adding requirements after the requirement document is signed off, for example a new scholarship workflow asked for in month five Project risk, scope 70% High 1 Open Mitigation: a change control board of the manager, sponsor and registrar meets fortnightly; anything new goes to a phase two backlog, and only a board decision moves it into scope Project manager
R2 Migration of student records from paper files and departmental spreadsheets comes out incomplete, duplicated or with wrong roll numbers Product or technical risk, data 65% High 2 Ongoing Mitigation: pilot the migration on one department of 120 students first, run a reconciliation report of counts and totals against the paper register, and get the head of department to sign it before the next batch Database administrator
R3 Teaching and office staff do not adopt the system and keep the paper attendance register, so the data in the MIS is half true Business risk, people 60% High 3 Open Mitigation: two staff representatives sit in the design reviews, two training rounds before go live, a one month parallel run, and a written date after which the paper register stops being accepted Sponsor, the Campus Chief
R4 The nine month schedule slips because the exam and fee modules were estimated on the same basis as the simpler ones Process risk, project management 55% High 4 Open Mitigation: re-estimate both modules from the WBS with the team, track the critical path weekly, keep two weeks of schedule reserve, and release in phases so records and attendance go live even if exams slip Project manager
R5 Opportunity: the sister campus under the same trust asks for the same MIS, which would share the maintenance cost and fund a support post Business risk, opportunity 50% High 5 Open Exploitation: design the data model for more than one college from week one and keep college specific rules in configuration, not in code, so a second campus is a setup job and not a rewrite; the sponsor raises it with the trust in month four Sponsor, the Campus Chief
R6 The team lead, the only person who knows the fee and accounting logic, leaves for a job abroad around month six Project risk, people 45% High 6 Open Mitigation: pair programming on the fee module, a written design document kept current, cross training one developer as second owner, and the code and credentials in the college’s own repository, never on a personal machine Team lead
R7 The exam module computes a wrong grade or GPA, for example on back papers and re totalling, and results are published from it Product or technical risk, quality 40% High 7 Open Mitigation: the grading rules are tested against 200 archived results whose answers are already known, the Exam Controller signs a parallel run for one full examination, and nothing publishes without a second approval click Test and QA lead
R8 On result day roughly 1,200 students open the site at once and the untried reporting library cannot serve the load, so the site stalls Technical risk, performance 35% High 8 Open Avoidance: remove the cause rather than manage it; results are generated once into a static read only page served from the web server, so no live computation happens under peak load at all Technical lead
R9 Purchase of the server is delayed by the tender and approval process, leaving no environment for user testing in month seven External risk, procurement 50% Medium 9 Open Transference: rent cloud hosting on an annual contract with an uptime clause instead of buying hardware, which moves availability and replacement to the provider; the tender continues in the background Procurement officer
R10 Cost runs past the approved NRs. 3,200,000, mainly through rework and the sub contracted library module Business risk, financial 40% Medium 10 Ongoing Transference: a fixed price contract for the library module so the overrun sits with the vendor, plus monthly earned value reporting to the sponsor and the NRs. 250,000 reserve released only by him Finance officer
R11 Student personal data leaks, or a marks record is changed by someone who should not be able to change it Technical risk, security 25% High 11 Open Mitigation: role based access by module, hashed passwords, an audit trail on every marks and fee change, encrypted nightly backups held off site, and a security review before go live System administrator
R12 A power cut or an internet failure hits the campus during admission entry or result publication External risk 35% Medium 12 Open Acceptance with a contingency plan: the college cannot remove load shedding, so it lives with it in a controlled way; a UPS on the office machines, a printed offline admission form, and a documented catch up entry procedure triggered when the outage passes two hours IT support officer

How to read it: the rows are sorted by risk priority, so R1 to R4 are the ones this project actually lives or dies by, and it is worth noting that none of them is a technology problem. Scope creep, dirty legacy data, staff who quietly keep the paper register and an underestimated exam module are all management and process risks, and they are answered with change control, a pilot migration, training and a parallel run rather than with money or better tools. The cheap technical fears sit lower down. R5 is the one opportunity and is worth a real design decision now, because building for more than one college in week one costs little and rebuilding for it later costs a lot. R8 is the one risk removed by avoidance rather than reduced, R9 and R10 are pushed onto a third party by transference, and only R12 is accepted, because load shedding is outside the project and all the project can own is the contingency plan and its trigger. The register is not a one off document: it is reviewed fortnightly with Top Ten Risk Item Tracking, probabilities are revised, closed risks are marked, and new ones are added as they surface.

How the marks fall
  • About 1 mark for the assumptions, stated before the table: college size, duration, team, modules, budget, and how probability, impact and priority are being measured. The question invites assumptions, so the examiner looks for them, and a register whose scoring scheme is never explained loses this mark even if the rows are good.
  • About 4 marks for the table itself, which must carry the eight standard fields: risk ID, risk description, risk category, the analysis as probability and impact, risk priority, risk response and risk owner. Ten to twelve rows sorted with the highest priority first show the register came from an analysis and not from a brainstorm.
  • About 2 marks for the content of the rows: risks that are specific to a college MIS, such as migration of paper records, the exam grading logic and staff adoption, spread across the categories of risk rather than five versions of the same technical worry, with at least one opportunity treated by a positive strategy.
  • About 1 mark for the responses and owners: every response opens with a named strategy, avoidance, acceptance, transference, mitigation or exploitation, then gives the actual action, and every risk has exactly one owner named by role. A risk owned by “the team” is owned by nobody, and a response that only says “be careful” earns nothing.

Prepare a tender specification for a college digital library

Tender specification, digital library2070 Chaitra Q7 · 6 marks

The question. “Consider you are hired as a consultant in a IT college where every year 50 students are admitted in 4 year program. You are asked to prepare a tender for establishing a digital library in the college. Prepare a tender specification document for the purpose. State your all assumptions that you have taken.”

Assumptions, and the sizing they give. The paper hands over exactly one number, 50 students admitted a year to a four year programme, so every other figure in the document has to be assumed, and the assumptions are what turn that one number into quantities. Fifty a year for four years is 200 students on the roll; with about 30 teaching staff and 5 library and IT staff the user base is 235 people, and peak occupancy is taken as 60 users in the library at once. From that: reading seats, at the usual norm of one seat per five students, 200 divided by 5 is 40, rounded up to 50 seats for teachers as well; workstations, about a third of the 60 peak users wanting a machine rather than their own laptop, so 20 reader workstations plus 2 staff machines and 2 catalogue kiosks; bandwidth, 60 concurrent users at 2 Mbps each is 120 Mbps, and since they do not all pull data in the same instant a 100 Mbps dedicated symmetric link, upgradable to 200 Mbps; licences, 235 users rounded to a 250 named user licence with 60 concurrent sessions, and e-resources priced for a band of up to 250 full time equivalent users; storage, 1,000 theses and reports of about 100 pages each is roughly 100,000 scanned pages and about 50 GB, so 8 TB usable covers five years of growth including lecture video, backed by 16 TB; power, 20 workstations at about 150 W plus the server, switch and lighting is close to 4 kW, so a 5 kVA online UPS.

Assumptions stated on the face of the document

  • The buyer: Himalaya Engineering College, a private engineering college running one four year BE programme with an intake of 50, so the Public Procurement Act does not bind it; it follows the same open competitive bidding practice voluntarily. If the college were a public institution the notice would go on e-GP for 21 days instead of in the press.
  • Users: 200 students, 30 teachers, 5 library and IT staff, 235 in all, 60 at once at peak.
  • The collection: 5,000 printed titles to be catalogued into the new system and 1,000 theses, project reports and question papers to be digitised; one year of e-journal and e-book subscription bought inside this contract, renewals by the college afterwards.
  • Site and civil work: a ready room of about 150 square metres on the ground floor of the existing block, with flooring, lighting, air conditioning, earthing and false ceiling done by the college before delivery. No civil work is in the bidder’s scope.
  • Power: three phase mains plus the existing campus generator of 25 kVA; the supplier provides only the UPS and the distribution inside the library.
  • Network: a campus LAN and an existing internet connection exist; the internet link and its monthly charge stay with the college, the supplier sizes and configures the library segment to carry 100 Mbps.
  • Money: a sanctioned budget of NRs. 7,500,000 and a cost estimate of NRs. 6,800,000, both inclusive of VAT, funded from the college development budget of the current fiscal year.
  • Time: one lot, single stage single envelope bidding, with delivery, installation, commissioning and training complete within 120 days of signing the contract.
  • Who runs it afterwards: the college IT unit, one system administrator, and a qualified librarian already in post; the supplier trains them and gives one year of warranty, with a two year annual maintenance contract quoted as a priced option.
  • Prices: in Nepalese rupees, delivered duty paid at the college premises, inclusive of VAT, customs and transport.

1. Invitation for bids

  • The authority: Himalaya Engineering College invites sealed bids from eligible, registered firms for the supply, installation, commissioning and one year support of a digital library system, as one lot.
  • Scope in one line: library and repository software, server or cloud hosting, workstations, network, scanning, power backup, furniture, one year of e-resource subscription, data migration, digitisation and training.
  • Documents: available at the college administration office and on the college website against a non-refundable fee of NRs. 2,000, from the date of this notice until one day before the deadline.
  • Bid security: NRs. 190,000, about 2.5 per cent of the estimate, as a bank guarantee or cash deposit.
  • Deadline and opening: bids to be submitted by 12:00 on the 22nd day from publication, and opened at 13:00 the same day in the presence of bidders’ representatives who choose to attend.
  • Bid validity: 90 days from the date of opening. Late or incomplete bids are rejected. The college reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids without assigning a reason.

2. Scope of supply

  • Supply: all goods listed in the schedule of requirements, new, unused and of current production, with manufacturer warranty.
  • Installation and integration: mounting, cabling, configuration, and integration of the library software with the college user directory so that students log in with their existing accounts.
  • Data work: conversion of the 5,000 existing catalogue cards into machine readable records, barcode labelling of the stock, and digitisation of 1,000 documents with searchable text.
  • Training and documentation: 3 library staff and 2 IT staff trained on site, with an administrator manual, a user manual and the as built network drawing.
  • Excluded, and done by the college: civil and interior work, the internet subscription, electricity, and the room itself.

3. Technical specifications (minimum requirements, any equivalent or better is acceptable)

ItemMinimum specification
Integrated library systemWeb based; cataloguing in MARC 21, circulation, reservations, fines, serials, acquisitions, online public access catalogue, reports; Z39.50 or SRU search, SIP2 for self issue, barcode support; login against the college directory over LDAP or equivalent; licence for 250 named users and 60 concurrent sessions; open source acceptable provided installation, configuration, customisation, source code and training are included in the price
Institutional repositoryFor theses, project reports and question papers; full text search, Dublin Core metadata, OAI-PMH harvesting, persistent links, access control by user group, bulk import and export in an open format
Server or cloudEither a rack server with at least 16 CPU cores, 64 GB RAM, 8 TB usable storage in RAID 5 or equivalent, redundant power supplies, on site warranty for 3 years; or an equivalent cloud subscription priced for 3 years, with at least 99.5 per cent monthly availability, daily backup, and full data export on demand and at exit. The bidder may quote either and must state which
BackupNetwork attached storage of at least 16 TB for daily automatic backup, with a documented procedure for an off site copy
Reader workstationsCurrent generation processor of at least 4 cores, 8 GB RAM, 256 GB SSD, 21.5 inch IPS monitor, gigabit LAN, licensed operating system and office suite, power rating certified to Energy Star or equivalent, 3 years on site warranty
Network24 port managed gigabit switch with PoE, capable of routing and filtering at least 200 Mbps at the gateway; 4 wireless access points to 802.11ax or equivalent; Cat 6A structured cabling with 30 outlets, patch panel and 9U wall rack
E-resource subscriptionAggregated engineering and computing package, at least 500 journal titles and 5,000 e-books, authenticated by campus IP range with off campus login, COUNTER 5 or equivalent usage reports, priced for up to 250 full time equivalent users, one year from the date of acceptance
Book scannerA3 overhead book scanner, at least 600 dpi optical, book cradle, OCR producing searchable PDF/A and archival TIFF, rated for at least 3,000 pages a day
Flatbed scanner and barcode equipmentOne A4 duplex flatbed scanner; one thermal barcode label printer; four handheld barcode readers for the circulation desk and stock verification
UPS5 kVA online double conversion, pure sine wave, at least 30 minutes at full load, sealed maintenance free batteries, network management card, conforming to IEC 62040 or equivalent
FurnitureReading tables for 50 seats with chairs; 20 computer carrels with cable management; 20 double sided steel shelving racks of 6 shelves, about 300 volumes each; one circulation desk; two staff tables; one display rack and one bank of lockers. Powder coated steel or seasoned hardwood, edges banded, all to the colour scheme approved by the college

4. Schedule of requirements

S.N.ItemUnitQtyDelivery, from contract
1Server or 3 year cloud subscriptionlot1Week 4
2Backup storage, 16 TBno.1Week 4
3Reader workstationsno.20Week 4
4Staff workstations and catalogue kiosksno.2 and 2Week 4
5Managed switch, gateway, access points, cablinglot1Week 6
6UPS, 5 kVA, with distributionno.1Week 6
7Book scanner, flatbed scanner, barcode printer, barcode readersno.1, 1, 1, 4Week 6
8Furniture: seats, carrels, racks, deskslot50 seats, 20 carrels, 20 racksWeek 6
9Library system and repository, installed and configuredlot1Week 8
10Catalogue conversion and barcode labellingrecord5,000Week 14
11Digitisation with OCR, about 100 pages a documentdocument1,000Week 14
12E-resource subscription, one yearlot1Week 8
13Training, documentation and handoverstaff5Week 16

5. Delivery, installation and acceptance

  • Place and terms: delivered duty paid at the college library, unloading, unpacking and disposal of packing by the supplier.
  • Completion: the whole system operational within 120 days of signing, on the milestones in the schedule above.
  • Acceptance test: the college checks every item against the specification table, loads 30 workstations sessions and 60 concurrent catalogue searches, restores one backup, and searches five digitised documents by their text. Acceptance is a signed certificate; payment follows acceptance.
  • Payment: 80 per cent against delivery, installation and the acceptance certificate; 20 per cent after 90 days of trouble free running.
  • Liquidated damages: 0.05 per cent of the contract price for each day of delay, to a ceiling of 10 per cent, after which the college may terminate and forfeit the performance security.

6. Warranty and support

  • Warranty: one year comprehensive on the whole system from the date of acceptance, three years on the server and the workstations, with all parts, labour and software updates included.
  • Response: support by telephone and email on working days, an engineer on site within 24 hours for a failure that stops circulation or the catalogue, and a standby unit if a repair runs beyond 72 hours.
  • Software: bug fixes and security patches free during the warranty; the college keeps its own data and gets a full export in an open format at any time.
  • Maintenance after warranty: a two year annual maintenance contract quoted separately as a percentage of the goods price, which the college may accept or not, and which is added into the evaluated price.

7. Bidder eligibility and qualification

  • Registration: a firm registered in Nepal with a valid VAT registration and tax clearance for the last fiscal year, not blacklisted by any public body.
  • Experience: at least two similar library automation or digitisation installations completed in the last three years, with completion certificates, at least one of them in an academic institution.
  • Turnover: an average annual turnover of at least NRs. 15,000,000 over the last three years, about twice the estimate.
  • People: at least one library system specialist and two certified network or hardware engineers on the payroll, with names and certificates in the bid.
  • Authorisation and after sales: a manufacturer authorisation for the hardware offered, and a service centre reachable within a day of the college.
  • Bid contents: the bid form, price schedule, clause by clause compliance sheet against the specification table, and the bid security. A missing compliance sheet or bid security makes the bid non-responsive.

8. Evaluation criteria

  • Step one, examination: is the bid complete, signed, accompanied by the bid security, and free of any major deviation from the bid conditions or the technical specifications? Arithmetic errors are corrected, and the unit rate governs.
  • Step two, qualification and technical compliance: pass or fail against section 7 and against every line of the specification table. The college may ask for a demonstration of the library software before it decides.
  • Step three, price: because the requirement is fully defined, this is a quotation style comparison, so the contract goes to the lowest evaluated substantially responsive bid, and the evaluated price is the quoted price plus the two year maintenance option, so that a cheap supply with expensive support does not win.
  • If a proposal route were used instead for the software and digitisation, where several approaches could meet the need, weighted scoring would apply: technical approach 30 per cent, management approach 30 per cent, past performance 20 per cent, price 20 per cent. The document must say which of the two is being used, and say it before bids are invited.

9. Bid security, validity and performance security

  • Bid security: NRs. 190,000, valid for at least 30 days beyond the bid validity, returned to unsuccessful bidders once the contract is signed, and forfeited if a bidder withdraws within the validity or refuses to sign.
  • Bid validity: 90 days from opening, extendable once by mutual consent without any change in price.
  • Performance security: 5 per cent of the contract price as an unconditional bank guarantee, valid until 30 days after the warranty period ends, released on the final acceptance certificate.
  • Forms attached: bid form, price schedule, compliance sheet, bid security format, performance security format, contract agreement, and the general and special conditions of contract.
How the marks fall
  • The assumptions carry the first marks, because the question asks for them by name. State them as a list and make them arithmetic, not decoration: 50 a year for four years is 200 on the roll, 235 users, 60 at peak, and every quantity in the document traces back to that.
  • It must look like a document, not advice about documents. Write the numbered sections of a real bid package, invitation, scope, specifications, schedule of requirements, delivery, warranty, eligibility, evaluation, securities, exactly the components listed on slide 312.
  • The specification table is where the technical marks are. Give minimums with units and quantities, and keep every line brand neutral with “or equivalent”, since naming a product in a tender kills the competition the tender exists to create.
  • Close the loop on evaluation and money. Responsiveness first, qualification second, price last, the lowest evaluated substantially responsive bid for a defined supply like this, plus bid security, bid validity and performance security. A specification with no evaluation rule is only half the answer.

The shorter version of this answer, written for the chapter, is at 13, the digital library tender, and the Nepali procedure the tender sits inside is at the procurement procedure.

PR.2Show it with a diagram

Illustrate the PMI risk management model with a block diagram

Risk management model, block diagram2072 Kartik Q6 · 7 marks, with the types of risk

The question. “Explain different types of Risk and illustrate the Risk management model with block diagram according to PMI Project Risk Management process.”

PMI RISK MANAGEMENT MODEL (2072 KARTIK Q6) Six processes, one register passing through them, and a feedback loop from control back to identification. 1 Risk management planning Risk management plan 2 Risk identification Risk register 3 Qualitative risk analysis Priorities 4 Quantitative risk analysis Numbers and reserves 5 Risk response planning Strategies and owners 6 Risk monitoring and control Updates and actions New risks found while the project runs go back to identification THE REGISTER IS THE THREAD: IT IS CREATED AT 2 AND UPDATED BY EVERY PROCESS AFTER IT

The six processes as blocks, each with what it produces underneath, and the loop that takes newly found risks back to identification.

  • Draw six blocks, left to right, and write under each one what it produces: the risk management plan, the risk register, the priorities, the numbers and reserves, the strategies and owners, and the updates.
  • Draw the feedback arrow. Monitoring and control returns to identification, because new risks appear while the project runs. An answer without that loop is a list, not a model.
  • Say what threads through it: the risk register is created in process 2 and updated by every process after it.
  • The types of risk go first (the other half of the question): project, process, product or technical, business, then known, predictable and unpredictable. They are worked in 12, types of risk.
How the marks fall
  • About 3 marks for the seven types, named and each given a line.
  • About 4 marks for the diagram: six labelled blocks in order, the outputs, and the feedback loop. Label the blocks with PMI’s names, not your own.

Show the different types of matrix organisational structure

Weak, balanced and strong matrix2080 Baishakh Q2b · 4 marks

The question. “Show different types of matrix organizational structure.”

WEAK, BALANCED AND STRONG MATRIX Same departments each time. What changes is who leads the project band, and how much authority they hold. WEAK MATRIX Chief executive Functionalmanager Functionalmanager Functionalmanager staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff project band: staff coordinate it themselves PM: a coordinator, low authority Budget: the functional manager BALANCED MATRIX Chief executive Functionalmanager Functionalmanager Functionalmanager staff staff staff staff staff PM staff staff staff a PM sits inside one department PM: shared power, low to moderate Budget: mixed STRONG MATRIX Chief executive Functionalmanager Functionalmanager Manager ofproject mgrs staff staff staff staff staff staff PM PM PM PMs have a department of their own PM: full-time, moderate to high Budget: the project manager

The same organisation drawn three times. What changes is who holds the authority and the budget: the functional manager, both, or the project manager.

Weak matrixBalanced matrixStrong matrix
Who has authorityThe functional managerSharedThe project manager
The project manager’s titleCoordinator or expediterProject managerProject manager
Time on the projectPart timeFull timeFull time
Who controls the budgetThe functional managerMixedThe project manager
Staff report toTheir departmentBoth, which is the classic two boss problemThe project, then their department
Administrative staffPart timePart timeFull time
  • Draw one chart and change one line, rather than three unrelated pictures: the same chief executive, the same three departments, and the project manager moved.
  • Say the one sentence that earns the mark: a matrix gives every member two bosses, and the type says which of the two wins when they disagree.
How the marks fall
  • About 2 marks for the three charts, drawn as one organisation with the project manager moved. Label each one weak, balanced or strong.
  • About 2 marks for the differences, given as a table: authority, the manager’s title, full or part time, who holds the budget, and who the staff report to.
  • Name the problem the matrix creates: two bosses. An answer that never mentions it has drawn the picture without understanding it.

The structures themselves, with their advantages and disadvantages, are in 5, the matrix organisation.

Illustrate an EVA graph and read it

Earned value graph, the S curve2075 Chaitra Q4 · 2 of 10 marks

The question. “Why the cost estimation for software project is a bit complex? Explain the EVM technique for the cost control and monitoring. Illustrate an EVA graph with the help of an example.”

AN EARNED VALUE GRAPH WITH YOUR OWN VALUES Budget Rs 10 lakh over 10 months, reviewed at the end of month 5. Both variances are vertical gaps, in money; the horizontal gap is the delay, in time. 2 4 6 8 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CUMULATIVE COST (Rs LAKH) TIME (MONTHS) DATA DATE, MONTH 5 BAC PV = BCWS, the plan EV = BCWP, work earned AC = ACWP, money spent CV SV delay ≈ 0.9 month THE VALUES, AT MONTH 5 PV = 10 x 50% = 5.0 lakh EV = 10 x 35% = 3.5 lakh AC (spent) = 4.5 lakh CV = 3.5 - 4.5 = -1.0 lakh SV = 3.5 - 5.0 = -1.5 lakh CPI = 3.5 / 4.5 = 0.78 SPI = 3.5 / 5.0 = 0.70 EAC = 10 / 0.778 = 12.86 lakh Over budget (CV < 0) and behind schedule (SV < 0): 3.5 lakh of work was planned by month 4.1, a delay of about 0.9 month. Draw all three curves, mark the data date, then label CV and SV as vertical gaps and the delay as the horizontal one.

Three curves, one status date, and the two gaps that are the whole answer: the vertical gap to PV is the schedule variance, the gap to AC is the cost variance.

How to draw it in the hall, in four strokes

  1. Axes: time along the bottom, cumulative cost up the side. Mark BAC on the cost axis and the planned finish on the time axis.
  2. PV: the planned S curve from the origin to BAC at the planned finish. It is an S because spending is slow at the start, fast in the middle and slow at the end.
  3. Today: a vertical dashed line at the status date. Stop EV and AC there, because they do not exist beyond today.
  4. EV and AC: EV below PV means behind schedule, AC above EV means over budget. Label the two gaps SV = EV - PV and CV = EV - AC, then extend a dotted line from AC to EAC at the new finish.
  • Use one worked number so the graph is an example and not a sketch: BAC 1,000,000, PV 400,000, EV 320,000, AC 400,000 gives SV -80,000, CV -80,000, SPI 0.8, CPI 0.8, so EAC = BAC / CPI = 1,250,000.
  • Say what the shape means: the project is doing 80 per cent of the work it planned for every rupee, and at this rate it finishes 250,000 over budget.
How the marks fall
  • The 2 marks are for the graph itself: labelled axes, three named curves, the status line, and the two gaps marked SV and CV.
  • Put numbers on it. The question says “with the help of an example”, so one set of figures turns a sketch into an illustration.
  • The other 8 marks are the two written parts: why software cost estimation is complex, and EVM as a control technique.

The formulas and every past earned value numerical are on the numericals page; the curve itself is explained at 9, the S curve.

PR.3Illustrate with your own case

Three sample illustrative cases: risk register, Pareto chart, bidder selection

Explain with a sample, on your own data2082 Baishakh Q6 · 3x3 marks

The question. “Briefly explain followings with sample illustrative cases and assuming appropriate data/info on your own: i) Risk register ii) Pareto chart iii) Bidder selection scheme”

i) Risk register (3 marks): two lines on what it is, then a sample of three rows.

IDRiskCategoryPImpactScoreResponseOwner
R1Requirements keep changing after sign offProject, scope0.7High1Mitigate: change control board, phase two backlogProject manager
R2Legacy records migrate incompleteTechnical, data0.6High2Mitigate: pilot one department, reconcile countsDatabase administrator
R3Load shedding during result publicationExternal0.4Medium3Accept with a contingency: UPS and an offline procedureIT support

ii) Pareto chart (3 marks): the 80/20 rule drawn. Bars in descending order, a cumulative line on a second axis, and the vital few named.

PARETO CHART: THE VITAL FEW AND THE TRIVIAL MANY 100 defects logged on a college MIS, sorted by cause. Two causes out of five give 75 of them. 0 0% 20 20% 40 40% 60 60% 80 80% 100 100% DEFECTS CUMULATIVE 45 login 30 reports 12 slow pages 8 printing 5 other 80% line 45% 75% 87% 95% 100% vital few: fix these first trivial many: later

100 defects from a college MIS. Login and reports are 75 of them: fix those two and three quarters of the complaints stop.

iii) Bidder selection scheme (3 marks): the criteria, their weights and the arithmetic, on a sample of three bidders for the same MIS.

CriterionWeightBidder AA x WBidder BB x WBidder CC x W
Technical approach and methodology30824072109270
Similar work done before25922561507175
Team and their qualifications20714081608160
Price1569091357105
Support and warranty10880660880
Total100775715790
  • Bidder C wins on 790, although B is the cheapest. Say that sentence: the award goes to the best evaluated bid, and price is one weighted criterion among five.
  • Two stage or one: in public procurement the technical envelope is opened and scored first, and only bids that pass the technical threshold have their price envelope opened.
  • State the rule you used and the pass mark, for example 70 of 100 on the technical part, so the scheme is repeatable by someone else.
How the marks fall
  • 3 marks each, and each needs both halves: two lines of definition, then the sample with your own data. A definition with no sample scores half.
  • Keep the samples small: three rows, five bars, three bidders. The examiner is checking that you can build the thing, not that you can fill a page.
  • Say what your sample shows: which risk is top, which defects are the vital few, which bidder wins and why. That sentence is the third mark.
  • State the rule you used and the pass mark, for example 70 of 100 on the technical part, so the scheme is repeatable by someone else.
  • Your own final year project: characteristics and a SMART objective

    A project you actually have2079 Bhadra Q1a · 1+3+3 marks

    The question. “Define project. Discuss final year project characteristics of your own. How you compare SMART objective of your final year project?”

    The example used here. A final year project to build an attendance system using face recognition for one department: four members, 16 weeks, a supervisor, a budget of NRs. 15,000 for a camera and a hosting account.

    Its characteristics (3 marks), taken one by one from the nine in chapter 1

    CharacteristicIn this project
    Specific objectiveMark attendance from a classroom camera at 95 per cent accuracy
    Temporary16 weeks: proposal week 1, defence week 16
    UniqueNo attendance system exists for this department, and the classroom conditions are its own
    Non routineIt is not the department’s daily work; it is done once
    Planning and controlA Gantt chart in the proposal, weekly supervisor meetings, a mid term review
    Resource integrationFour members, a supervisor, the laboratory, a camera and the college network
    ConstraintsTime is fixed by the calendar, cost by the budget, scope by the syllabus
    FlexibilityThe model can change, the deadline cannot
    Team workFour members with split roles: data, model, application, report

    The SMART objective (3 marks): write the objective once, then test it letter by letter.

    Objective: "Deliver a face recognition attendance system that marks the attendance of one 60 student class in under 30 seconds with at least 95 per cent accuracy, demonstrated on live classes in week 14, within a budget of NRs. 15,000." S Specific one class, one department, attendance only, not a full MIS M Measurable 95 per cent accuracy, 30 seconds, 60 students: all countable A Achievable an existing pre-trained model, four members, laboratory access R Realistic scoped to one classroom, not the whole college, and no hardware to build T Time bound demonstrated in week 14, two weeks before the defence
    How the marks fall
    • 1 mark for the definition of a project: temporary, unique, with a definite beginning and end and a specific objective.
    • 3 marks for the characteristics, and they must be your project, with real numbers. The examiner has read a hundred generic answers.
    • 3 marks for SMART, which needs the objective written out first. Testing letter by letter against a written objective is what turns a list into an answer.

    The characteristics list and the SMART test are in 1, the nine characteristics and SMART objectives; a shorter version of this answer is at the end of chapter 1.

    208 questions · answered here, in full · most asked first

    Every theory question, with its answer

    Every theory question the examiner has set, asked once however many times it was set, with the answer written out underneath it. Nothing here points anywhere else: this page is meant to be read on its own, the night before, without hopping back into the chapters. The most asked question is at the top, and the bar below filters the page to one chapter.

    How to use this page

    • Read from the top. The order is how often the examiner has asked it, counting sittings, not papers. The first twenty entries are most of the theory marks on any given paper.
    • One question, one answer. A question set in six sittings appears once, with all six shown under it. Two questions that want the same answer are merged, so nothing is read twice.
    • Answer first, then the list. Every answer opens with the direct answer in a line or two, which is how the first line of an exam answer should read, and then gives the list or the table that carries the marks.
    • Filter by chapter when you are revising one chapter, and use the search box in the rail for a word.
    • What is not here. Numericals have their own section, and so do the questions that ask you to produce a document, because a shortened copy of either would be the worse of the two.

    Short note: Balanced Scorecard asked 19×

    Ch 152x3 marks2082 Bhadra Q11 · 2081 Bhadra Q8 · 2081 Baishakh Q14 · 2080 Bhadra Q13 · 2080 Baishakh Q3c · 2079 Bhadra Q10b · 2079 Baishakh Q12 · 2076 Ashwin Q8 · 2075 Chaitra Q7 · 2075 Ashwin Q9 · 2074 Chaitra Q8 · 2074 Ashwin Q9 · 2073 Shrawan Q9 · 2072 Chaitra Q10 · 2072 Kartik Q10 · 2071 Chaitra Q10 · 2070 Chaitra Q9 · 2070 Ashad Q16 · 2069 Chaitra Q15

    The balanced scorecard is a performance metric used to identify, improve and control a business's functions and their outcomes: a strategy map for balancing today and tomorrow. It is a strategic planning and performance management framework that tracks financial and non financial measures to judge an organisation's effectiveness and when corrective action is needed.

    Its origin. In 1992 Robert S. Kaplan and David P. Norton examined the problem of reporting only on financial measures. Financial measures are a lagging report: they tell what happened last month, quarter or year, but cannot look forward. Kaplan and Norton looked for forward looking measures, leading indicators, and for how they could shape an organisation's strategy.

    What it balances: financial and non financial measures; short term and long term measures; performance drivers, the leading indicators, and outcome measures, the lagging ones; and just enough data to give a complete picture of performance, and no more.

    The four perspectives, with the question each one asks

    • Learning and growth. Training and knowledge resources: how well information is captured, and how effectively employees turn it into competitive advantage. To achieve our vision, how must our organisation learn and improve?
    • Internal business processes. How well products are made, with operations checked for gaps, delays, bottlenecks, shortages or waste. What must we do well internally to meet our customer goals?
    • Customer. Customer satisfaction with the quality, price and availability of the products or services, gathered as feedback. What matters to our customers, and in turn to our financial standing?
    • Financial. Sales, expenditure and income: amounts, financial ratios, budget variances and income targets. What financial goals affect our organisation?

    Read it bottom to top as a causal chain: investing in learning improves internal processes, which please customers, which produce financial results. That chain is why the scorecard is called balanced, rather than four separate boxes. It was first built for for profit companies and later adapted for non profits and government, and it is proven in all industries and in organisations of every size.

    Building one, in five steps: establish a clear vision of the future; define the strategic objectives; determine the critical resource factors; choose indicators to measure and monitor performance; and set goals, action plans and initiatives.

    Discuss on interpersonal and managerial skills of project manager? asked 12×

    Ch 22+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q1b · 2082 Baishakh Q8 · 2081 Bhadra Q1b · 2079 Baishakh Q2 · 2078 Bhadra Q1c · 2076 Ashwin Q1b · 2075 Ashwin Q1b · 2074 Chaitra Q2a · 2074 Ashwin Q1b · 2072 Chaitra Q1b · 2072 Kartik Q1b · 2070 Ashad Q2

    The project manager must be a people manager: the team does the technical work, so what the manager contributes above all is soft skill. Interpersonal skills are the qualities and behaviours we show when dealing with other people, and the syllabus lists eleven of them. Nepali Engineer Pani Chiya Lincha, Internet Mail Pachhi.

    SkillWhat it is, and how it decides the outcomeExample
    Energised and initiatorEnergy and fitness, works under pressure and in odd conditions, and takes the initiativeA server fails a week before go live and the manager starts recovery that evening
    CommunicationExpresses ideas clearly in writing and speech, simply, and checks for feedback, so everyone works from the same informationA written change note prevents a later scope dispute
    InfluencingGets people to do what they otherwise would not, usually without authority over themFinance releases licence money early once the cost of delay is shown
    LeadershipImparts vision, gains consensus on goals, sets direction and inspiresOne clear goal, live before Dashain, held through a crisis
    MotivatorEnergises people to high performance and past their resistance to changeExtra effort recognised publicly, and dull work shared fairly
    NegotiationResolves conflict, makes agreement possible, finds the best solution for both sidesA vendor's delay penalty traded for longer support
    Problem solverMeets problems with an analysing, problem solving attitudeA failed bank API integration traced to an expired certificate
    Perspective natureLooks beyond the team and sees how the project and the team fit the organisationSpots that one department's feature breaks another department's process
    Result orientedWorks to achieve the objective, not for the sake of activityMeasures progress by delivered features, not by hours worked
    Global literacyWorks in cross cultural environments and understands cross cultural issuesPlans around an offshore team's time zone and holidays
    Problem solving with problem treesExamines and analyses, then builds a problem tree to reach the root causeRepeated slips traced to missing requirement sign off

    They matter because a project is delivered through people the manager rarely commands. These skills are what keep the stakeholders aligned, the team performing, and the project pointed at its objective.

    Short note: PMBOK asked 12×

    Ch 22x3 marks2082 Bhadra Q11 · 2080 Baishakh Q1b · 2079 Bhadra Q1b · 2078 Bhadra Q1a · 2076 Chaitra Q7 · 2075 Chaitra Q1a · 2075 Ashwin Q3a · 2074 Chaitra Q5b · 2073 Shrawan Q1a · 2072 Kartik Q2b · 2070 Ashad Q3 · 2069 Chaitra Q2

    The Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK) is the sum of knowledge within the profession of project management: a collection of processes and knowledge areas generally accepted as best practice. It recognises five process groups and nine knowledge areas that apply to every type of project.

    • What it contains. Widely used, proven traditional practices, plus some innovative and advanced ones.
    • What it is for. Guidelines for managing an individual project: good practice for most projects, most of the time.
    • Who publishes it. The Project Management Institute (PMI), founded in the USA in 1969, as the PMBOK Guide.
    • How it describes work. It is process based: every process is defined by its inputs, its tools and techniques, and its outputs.

    The five process groups, in the order a project meets them: Initiating, Planning, Executing, Monitoring and Controlling, and Closing. Monitoring and controlling is one group, not two.

    The nine knowledge areas: integration, scope, time, cost, quality, human resource, communications, risk and procurement management. The fifth edition of the PMBOK Guide adds a tenth, stakeholder management.

    What are the processes of project quality management? asked 9×

    Ch 102+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q7 · 2082 Baishakh Q7 · 2080 Baishakh Q4b · 2079 Bhadra Q7 · 2079 Baishakh Q6 · 2075 Ashwin Q7a · 2074 Ashwin Q6b · 2072 Chaitra Q8 · 2070 Chaitra Q4a

    Project quality management has three processes: quality planning, which identifies which quality standards are relevant and determines how to satisfy them; quality assurance, which ensures the quality of products and services through a constant effort to improve the organisation's practices; and quality control, which monitors specific project results to determine whether they comply with the relevant standards and identifies ways to eliminate the causes of unsatisfactory performance.

    Quality planningQuality assuranceQuality control
    QuestionWhich standards apply, and how will we meet them?Are we following the right process?Is this deliverable correct?
    FocusThe planThe processThe product
    NaturePreventiveProactive: prevents defectsReactive: detects defects
    TimingAt initiation and planningThroughout execution As each deliverable is produced
    Process groupPlanningExecutingMonitoring and controlling
    WhoProject manager with the teamA dedicated QA team Testers and inspectors
    Approaches and toolsCost benefit analysis, benchmarking, design of experiments, cost of qualityQuality audits, benchmarking, process improvementInspection, statistical sampling, the seven basic tools
    OutputQuality management plan, metrics, checklistsProcess improvements, change requestsAcceptance decisions, rework, process adjustments

    The line that earns the mark. Quality assurance is about the process; quality control is about the product. QA asks whether we are building it the right way, QC asks whether we built it right. QA prevents, QC detects.

    Implementing them on an ICT project, a college MIS as the example

    • Plan the quality before the work starts. Choose the standards, an ISO 9001 style process and a coding standard; turn the requirements into metrics, such as results in under two seconds and no critical defect at release; write the quality management plan and the checklists.
    • Assure the process while the work happens. Train the team, review code before it is merged, trace every requirement to a test case, audit the process against the plan, and benchmark against past projects. When an audit finds a gap, the process is fixed.
    • Control each deliverable as it is produced. Inspect and test it, with unit, integration, system and user acceptance tests; track defect counts on a control chart; rank defect causes on a Pareto chart; trace recurring defects with a fishbone. Each item is accepted, reworked, or triggers a process adjustment.
    • Close the loop. QC measurements go back to QA to improve the process, and back into the plan and the quality baseline; the lessons learned go to the next project. That loop, plan, do, check, act, is continuous improvement.

    What is a project charter? What essential information should it contain, how do you develop one, and what are the inputs and the tools and techniques used? asked 9×

    Ch 72+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q3b · 2081 Baishakh Q8 · 2080 Baishakh Q3a · 2079 Bhadra Q4a · 2079 Baishakh Q10 · 2075 Ashwin Q3b · 2074 Ashwin Q6a · 2072 Kartik Q7 · 2071 Chaitra Q3

    A project charter is the document that formally authorises the project. It authorises the project manager to start the project and to use organisational resources as required, and it serves as an agreement between the project sponsor and the project team. Developing it is part of initiation.

    The essential information it must contain

    • Scope, the basic project scope.
    • Objectives and deliverables, with the goals.
    • Project team members.
    • Project risks.
    • Benefits or return on investment.
    • Budget.
    • Business case.

    How it is developed: the sponsor and the project manager take the agreement or contract, the statement of work, the enterprise environmental factors and the organisational process assets; they apply project selection methods, the project management methodology, the project management information system, expert judgement and facilitation techniques; and the output is the signed charter.

    InputsTools and techniquesOutput
    Agreements or contract, which already hold much of what a good charter needs.
    Statement of work: business need, product description, strategic plan.
    Enterprise environmental factors: culture and infrastructure, tools, human resources, personnel policies, marketplace conditions.
    Organisational process assets: formal and informal plans, policies, procedures, guidelines, financial and management systems, lessons learned, historical information.
    Project selection methods
    Project management methodology
    Project management information system
    Expert judgement
    Facilitation techniques
    The project charter

    The tools in more detail

    • Project selection methods decide which project deserves a charter. They focus on broad organisational needs (is there a need, is the funding secure, is there a strong will to make it succeed), categorise IT projects (does it address a problem, an opportunity or a directive), apply financial analysis (net present value, accepted when it is above zero; return on investment; payback analysis, the shorter the better), use a weighted scoring model, and use the balanced scorecard.
    • Project management methodology: the set of process groups whose control functions are merged into one working, cohesive system.
    • Project management information system: enterprise project management software, often web based and tied to the financial systems.
    • Expert judgement: a judgement based on expertise, skill or specialised knowledge, and a tool of almost every process.

    Weighted scoring, worked. With profit potential weighted 5, marketability 3 and ease of production 1, project A scoring 5, 4 and 4 totals 41 and is selected, against 37 for project B and 29 for project C.

    What is the triple constraint in project management? asked 9×

    Ch 13+2 marks2082 Bhadra Q1a · 2081 Bhadra Q1a · 2076 Chaitra Q1a · 2076 Ashwin Q1a · 2075 Ashwin Q1a · 2074 Chaitra Q1b · 2074 Ashwin Q1a · 2072 Chaitra Q1a · 2072 Kartik Q1a

    The triple constraint, also called the project triangle or the iron triangle, is the model that every project is limited by three things at once: scope, time and cost, balanced so as to deliver the quality the customer asked for.

    • Scope. The goals, deliverables, features and functions, and so the tasks needed to reach them.
    • Time. The schedule for completion, and the deadline of each phase.
    • Cost. The budget: materials, labour, vendors and quality control.

    Quality sits in the middle of the triangle. It is not a fourth corner you can trade away, it is the result of how the three are balanced. You may fix any two of the three, and the third must then be allowed to move; if all three are frozen, quality absorbs the difference silently, through rushed work and cut testing.

    What do you mean by project procurement management? asked 9×

    Ch 132+4 marks2082 Bhadra Q10 · 2080 Bhadra Q11 · 2079 Bhadra Q10a · 2079 Baishakh Q9 · 2075 Ashwin Q8b · 2074 Chaitra Q7a · 2074 Ashwin Q8a · 2072 Kartik Q9 · 2071 Chaitra Q5

    Procurement is buying goods or services from a third party: the group of processes required to purchase the products, services, goods or results needed from outside the project team to do the work. Project procurement management is the processes required to acquire goods and services for a project from outside the performing organisation, where the organisation can be either the buyer or the seller under a contract.

    The provider is called a supplier, vendor, contractor, subcontractor or seller, and supplier is the most widely used term. Most organisations do some outsourcing to meet their IT needs, and spend most of that money within their own country.

    Why an organisation procures

    • To reduce both fixed and recurrent costs.
    • To let the organisation focus on its core business.
    • To access skills and technologies it does not have.
    • To provide flexibility: capacity when it is needed, rather than all the time.
    • To increase accountability: a contract makes the seller answerable for results.

    Why it is a crucial component of project management. Much of the budget passes through contracts, so a bad contract or a bad seller can sink the project on its own. Contracts are legally binding, which makes a mistake expensive to undo. And a contract is one of the main ways project risk is transferred, so the choice of contract type decides who carries the cost of things going wrong.

    Discuss on different processes adopted for procurement in ICT project. asked 8×

    Ch 132+4 marks2082 Bhadra Q10 · 2079 Bhadra Q10a · 2079 Baishakh Q9 · 2075 Ashwin Q8b · 2074 Chaitra Q7a · 2074 Ashwin Q8a · 2071 Chaitra Q5 · 2070 Ashad Q14

    Procurement has six processes, and between them they reach four of the five process groups.

    • Plan purchases and acquisitions (planning). Decide what to buy, when and how, and first of all whether to buy at all. This is the make or buy decision. In an ICT project: build the college MIS in house when the team knows the rules and must own the code, buy a ready library system or rent cloud hosting when good products exist.
    • Plan contracting (planning). Describe the requirements for the goods or services and find potential suppliers, preparing the RFP or RFQ, the contract statement of work and the evaluation criteria.
    • Request seller responses (planning). Obtain information, quotes, bids, offers or proposals from sellers, through the preferred vendor, several vendors or a public advertisement, with a bidder conference where one is needed.
    • Select sellers (executing). Evaluate the proposals against the criteria, choose, negotiate and sign the contract.
    • Administer the contract (monitoring and controlling). Manage the relationship with the selected seller, review performance, inspect and audit, and handle changes and claims.
    • Close the contract (closing). Complete and settle each contract, resolving any open items.

    How it runs in a project: a need for procurement leads to planning with the make or buy decision, then contract planning and the issue of an RFP, receiving proposals, selecting a seller and awarding the contract, administering it while the product or service is acquired, and formally closing it.

    Define project. asked 8×

    Ch 12+2 marks2081 Baishakh Q1 · 2080 Bhadra Q1 · 2079 Bhadra Q1a · 2079 Baishakh Q1 · 2074 Ashwin Q1a · 2072 Chaitra Q1a · 2070 Ashad Q1 · 2069 Chaitra Q1

    A project is a temporary effort undertaken to create a unique product, service or result (PMI). The notes put it as a set of organised activities designed to fulfil a specific objective within a limited time and with limited resources, and Cleland and King as a combination of human and non-human resources pulled together in a temporary organisation to achieve a specific purpose.

    • Temporary means it has a definite beginning and a definite end, not that it is short. A ten year dam is temporary.
    • Unique means the output has never been made in exactly this form before.

    Every project therefore has a start and a finish, a specified outcome at a stated level of performance, a budget, and planning, execution and control over it. Its purpose is to convert a vision, a dream or a need into reality. Building a road, installing an ERP system and writing a thesis are projects; running the road and the system afterwards is not.

    What is EVM? asked 8×

    Ch 92+2+2+1+1 marks2080 Baishakh Q4a · 2076 Chaitra Q6a · 2076 Ashwin Q4 · 2075 Chaitra Q4 · 2074 Chaitra Q6b · 2074 Ashwin Q5 · 2073 Shrawan Q6 · 2072 Kartik Q4

    Earned value management (EVM) is a project management methodology that integrates schedule, cost and scope to measure project performance, using actual information provided periodically. Earned value analysis measures how much work has been completed at a given point, and how well.

    Why it beats a simple budget comparison. Spending less than planned may mean the team is efficient, or that almost no work has been done. Only EVM tells the two apart, because it brings the work completed into the comparison.

    TermAlso calledMeaningUsually computed as
    PV, planned valueBCWS, budgeted cost of work scheduledThe authorised budget for the work that should be done by nowBAC times the percentage of work planned
    EV, earned valueBCWP, budgeted cost of work performedThe budget value of the work actually done; it cannot exceed the authorised budgetBAC times the percentage of work complete
    AC, actual costACWP, actual cost of work performedThe money actually spent on the work doneGiven
    BAC, budget at completionTotal planned valueThe total approved budgetGiven

    In one line: PV is what you promised, EV is what you delivered, AC is what you paid. Delivered against promised tells you about the schedule; delivered against paid tells you about the cost.

    How it is used for cost control and monitoring. At each review date the four core measures are computed: CV = EV - AC and CPI = EV / AC for cost, SV = EV - PV and SPI = EV / PV for schedule. A negative variance or an index below 1 is bad. The forecast EAC = BAC / CPI says what the project will finally cost if performance continues as it is, so the manager can act while there is still budget left to act with. The results are drawn as three S curves, PV, EV and AC against time, where the vertical gap from EV to AC is the cost variance and the gap from EV to PV is the schedule variance.

    The example from the notes. A five month project budgeted at 25,000. By month two, 40 percent was planned, so PV = 10,000; only 30 percent is done, so EV = 7,500; and the team has spent AC = 15,000. The project is behind schedule and over budget.

    Why is communication management important in ICT project? asked 8×

    Ch 113+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q8 · 2081 Baishakh Q10 · 2080 Baishakh Q4c · 2079 Baishakh Q11 · 2076 Chaitra Q6b · 2074 Ashwin Q7a · 2070 Chaitra Q4b · 2069 Chaitra Q11

    Project communication management is the collection of processes that make sure the right messages are sent, received and understood by the right people: the processes required for the timely and appropriate development, collection, dissemination, storage and disposition of project information, which provide the critical links among people and information. It is one of the knowledge areas of the PMBOK.

    Why good communication is important

    • The greatest threat to many projects is a failure to communicate properly.
    • The culture of IT professionals has not made them good communicators.
    • Research shows IT professionals must communicate effectively to succeed in their positions.
    • Strong verbal skills are a key factor in career advancement for IT professionals.
    • Project managers must see good communication as a means of achieving project success.

    The keys to good communication: 80 to 90 percent of a project manager's time is spent communicating; focus on needs, both group and individual; mix formal and informal methods; set the stage for communicating bad news; distribute important information effectively and in time; and watch the number of communication channels, because complexity rises with the number of people.

    Why it is critical in an ICT project

    • Software is intangible. Progress cannot be seen, only reported, so the whole picture depends on communication.
    • Requirements are communication. A requirement misunderstood is built wrong and found late, at the highest cost.
    • Mixed audiences. Developers, users, managers and vendors use different vocabularies, and someone must translate.
    • Fast change. Changes must reach everyone affected, or the team keeps building to an old version.

    Its role in successful completion: it aligns everyone on the objectives, surfaces problems early enough to fix them, keeps the stakeholders' support, and records the decisions for control and for the lessons learned.

    Discuss the concept of project management process groups, and the project driven process groups. asked 7×

    Ch 65 marks2081 Bhadra Q3 · 2080 Bhadra Q6 · 2076 Chaitra Q7 · 2076 Chaitra Q2a · 2075 Ashwin Q2a · 2070 Chaitra Q3a · 2070 Ashad Q7 · 2069 Chaitra Q6

    A process is a sequence of steps taken to achieve a particular goal, and every process is described by its inputs, its tools and techniques, and its outputs. Project management processes are the processes concerned with describing and organising the work of a project, and when they are grouped logically they form the five process groups.

    • Initiating. Recognising when a project or a phase should begin: the processes that define a new project or phase.
    • Planning. Designing and maintaining a plan that leads to successful completion: establishing the scope and defining the course of action that will meet the objectives.
    • Executing. Coordinating people and resources to follow the plan, and completing the work defined in it.
    • Monitoring and controlling. Tracking, reviewing and regulating progress and performance, and identifying the corrective action to take. It is one group, not two.
    • Closing. Finalising all activities across all the groups to close the project or phase formally, and judging its acceptability.

    They form a loop, not a line. Planning and executing feed each other, and monitoring and controlling surrounds both, sending corrections back into planning.

    Project driven process groups. These five are the project management processes, the ones that drive and organise the project itself. PMBOK sets them apart from the product oriented processes, which create the product and depend on the field, such as writing code or pouring concrete.

    Process groups are not life cycle phases. A phase is a stage of the project in time; a process group is a kind of work. All five groups run inside every phase.

    For a project to succeed the team must select the appropriate processes for the objectives, use a well defined but flexible method, establish and maintain communication with the stakeholders, follow the requirements to meet their needs, and balance the competing constraints of scope, schedule, budget, quality, resources and risk.

    What are the external environmental factors affecting the project? asked 7×

    Ch 22+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q1b · 2080 Baishakh Q1b · 2078 Bhadra Q1a · 2075 Chaitra Q1a · 2075 Ashwin Q3a · 2074 Chaitra Q5b · 2070 Ashad CE 701 Q1

    The project environment is the set of forces that influence a project's ability to achieve its objectives. It has three layers, and control falls as you move outward: the internal environment, the task or operating environment, and the external environment, which is outside the organisation and beyond its control but can force internal change.

    • Economy. Inflation, interest rates, unemployment, exchange rates. A bad economy can sink a well run organisation.
    • Competition. Every organisation except a monopoly fights for market share.
    • Politics and law. Government policy, taxes, legislation and stability. Since the 1950s tobacco firms have had to print warnings, lost television advertising and faced smoking bans, and their market shrank.
    • Customers and suppliers. A supplier's power comes from how unique its goods are; a customer's power comes from being free to choose a competitor.
    • Socio cultural and technological factors. Values and habits of the people affected, and the pace at which the technology moves.

    How this hits an ICT project in Nepal. Exchange rate and import duty raise hardware and licence costs in the middle of the project; ICT policy, the Electronic Transactions Act and data rules change the requirements, and instability delays approvals; users' language, literacy and trust in digital services decide adoption; a platform can go obsolete before launch, and power and bandwidth shape the design; a competitor may launch first, or a vendor with a unique product may hold the price.

    The environment cannot be controlled, so it must be monitored continuously and adapted to. PMBOK calls these the enterprise environmental factors, and pairs them with the organisational process assets, the processes and knowledge the organisation already has.

    Describe PMI's framework for project management. asked 7×

    Ch 32+2 marks2079 Bhadra Q2a · 2078 Bhadra Q8 · 2075 Ashwin Q2b · 2072 Kartik Q2a · 2070 Chaitra Q2a · 2070 Ashad Q4 · 2069 Chaitra Q3

    The PMI framework arranges the knowledge areas into one structure that runs from the stakeholders' needs at the bottom to project success at the top, and it is the standard picture of what project management is made of.

    • Stakeholders' needs and expectations. The starting point. A stakeholder is anyone with an interest in the project and its outcome: employees, customers, shareholders, suppliers, communities and governments.
    • Core knowledge areas: scope, time, cost and quality. They produce the project's specific objectives, so they are the ends.
    • Facilitating knowledge areas: human resources, communication, risk and procurement. They are the means by which the objectives are achieved.
    • Integrative knowledge area: project integration management, which affects and is affected by all the others.
    • Tools and techniques. They help in every knowledge area and most of all in the core ones. Software helps, but the same techniques worked for years with paper and pencil.
    • The result: project success.

    Draw it as a stack: stakeholders at the base, the four core areas as pillars with the four facilitating areas beside them, integration wrapping all eight, and project success on top.

    Define the Project Integration Management and what are the essential information required to create Project Charter? asked 7×

    Ch 72+3 marks2080 Baishakh Q3a · 2079 Baishakh Q10 · 2078 Bhadra Q7b · 2075 Chaitra Q6b · 2075 Ashwin Q3b · 2074 Ashwin Q6a · 2072 Kartik Q7

    Project integration management is the collection of processes and activities needed to identify, define, combine, unify and coordinate the various processes and project management activities within the process groups. In the slides' words, it is the way of making the various processes work together and making sure they are coordinated. It applies from the start of the project through to completion, and the project manager must coordinate every knowledge area throughout the life cycle.

    Why it is needed

    • To manage change and communication.
    • To reduce project time and cost.
    • To involve stakeholders early and often.
    • To make results visible.
    • To identify problems and their solutions early.
    • To use relevant experience as early as possible.

    The seven integration processes

    • Develop project charter (initiating): formally authorises the project.
    • Develop preliminary project scope statement (initiating): the high level objectives and boundaries.
    • Develop project management plan (planning): the plan that guides execution and control.
    • Direct and manage project execution (executing): perform the work in the plan.
    • Monitor and control project work (monitoring and controlling): compare actual performance against the plan.
    • Perform integrated change control (monitoring and controlling): approve or reject every change.
    • Close project (closing): finalise all activities and hand over the result.

    Integration is the only knowledge area that touches all five process groups, from the charter to closing.

    Process groupIntegration processMajor output
    InitiatingDeveloping the project charterProject charter
    PlanningDeveloping the project management planProject management plan
    ExecutingDirecting and managing project workDeliverables, work performance information, change requests
    Monitoring and controllingMonitor and control project work; perform integrated change controlChange requests, status updates
    ClosingClose project or phaseProduct transition

    Explain how a project manager can develop a risk response plan. What strategies are used to mitigate threats and enhance opportunities? asked 6×

    Ch 123+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q9 · 2081 Bhadra Q8 · 2080 Baishakh Q5a · 2075 Ashwin Q8a · 2074 Chaitra Q6a · 2070 Ashad CE 701 Q5

    Risk response planning is deciding, after the risks have been identified and quantified, how to respond to them: creating options that improve the chances of reaching the project goals and cut the obstacles to them, which lowers the total risk.

    How a project manager develops the plan

    • Take the prioritised risks from the risk register, highest first.
    • Understand each one: its cause, its trigger and its effect.
    • Choose a strategy for it.
    • Plan the actions: what, by whom, one named owner, by when, and at what cost.
    • Prepare contingency plans with their triggers, and reserves for accepted risks.
    • Note the residual and secondary risks, and plan for them too.
    • Update the risk register and the project management plan, and review the responses as the project moves.

    Strategies for threats, the negative risks

    • Avoidance: eliminating a specific threat, usually by eliminating its cause. Drop the risky feature, or use a proven technology.
    • Mitigation: reducing the impact of the risk event or the probability of its occurrence. More testing, backup hardware, training.
    • Transference: shifting the consequences and the responsibility for managing them to a third party, through outsourcing, insurance or a fixed price contract.
    • Acceptance: accepting the consequences if the risk occurs, in a known and controlled manner, usually with a reserve behind it.

    Strategies for opportunities, the positive risks

    • Exploitation: doing whatever can be done to make sure the positive risk happens, removing its uncertainty.
    • Enhancement: increasing the probability and the positive impact, by maximising the key drivers of the opportunity.
    • Sharing: giving some or all of the ownership to a third party better able to capture the opportunity.
    • Acceptance: taking no action towards the opportunity, and escalation, notifying a higher level authority when it is beyond the project.

    The pairs are worth naming: avoid with exploit, mitigate with enhance, transfer with share, accept with accept. Contingent response strategies apply to both: a contingency plan that runs only when a named trigger occurs, a contingency allowance procedure, and planning for alternative development.

    Residual and secondary risks. Residual risks remain after all the responses have been carried out: even with stable hardware, it may still fail. Secondary risks are a direct result of carrying out a response: the more stable hardware may cause the peripheral devices to fail.

    General mitigation by risk type: for technical risks, emphasise team support and avoid a stand alone project structure, increase the project manager's authority, improve problem handling and communication; for cost risks, monitor more frequently, use the WBS and CPM, improve communication and understanding of the goals; for schedule risks, monitor more frequently, use the WBS and CPM, and select the most experienced project manager.

    Explain briefly the characteristics of a project. asked 6×

    Ch 13+2 marks2082 Baishakh Q1a · 2080 Bhadra Q1 · 2079 Baishakh Q1 · 2076 Chaitra Q1b · 2070 Chaitra Q1a · 2070 Ashad Q1

    A characteristic is a feature every project has, and the nine below are what let you recognise one. Sasto Tempo Ulto Nachchha; Pulis Rakshi Fyaakchha, Chappal Thokchha.

    • Specific objective. Clearly defined; the project succeeds when it is achieved.
    • Temporary. It has a life span, a birth and a death, and cannot continue endlessly.
    • Unique. No two projects are exactly alike.
    • Non routine and non repetitive. Not the day to day work of the organisation.
    • Planning and control. It needs an effective planning and control system to finish efficiently.
    • Resource integration. The four M's, man, machine, money and minutes or materials, integrated for efficient use.
    • Flexibility. Risk and change are unavoidable, so the project must absorb them.
    • Constraints. It works inside the limits of time, cost and quality.
    • Team work. A manager leads a team towards the goal.

    The slides add that a project delivers unique requirements inside its own boundaries, has its own resources and budget, is progressively elaborated, is done for a customer, and is cross functional, drawing people from several departments or organisations.

    What are the key differences between project and process as per the context of project management? asked 6×

    Ch 13+2 marks2082 Baishakh Q1a · 2076 Chaitra Q1a · 2076 Ashwin Q1a · 2075 Ashwin Q1a · 2074 Chaitra Q1b · 2069 Chaitra Q1

    A project is the one off, temporary effort that creates something new; operational work is the ongoing execution of activities after the product exists, producing the same result again and again. Operations are managed by business process management, which is why the same question is also set as project versus process.

    AspectProjectOperational work
    NatureTemporary, defined start and endPermanent, ongoing
    OutputA unique product, service or resultThe same product or service, repeatedly
    ObjectiveAttain a new objective, then closeSustain the business, keep the system running
    BudgetDefined and fixed for the workNot defined per piece of work; it must earn a profit
    RiskHigher, because it is done for the first timeLower, because it has been done before
    CharacterInnovative, transformationalRepetitive, improves normal practice
    TimingExists before the productExists after the product
    TeamAssembled, then disbandedStable and permanent
    Managed byProject managementBusiness process management
    ExampleBuilding a billing system, building a roadRunning the billing system, maintaining the road

    In one line: building a road is a project, maintaining it is an operation.

    How does a project life cycle differ from product life cycle? asked 6×

    Ch 42+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q2b · 2080 Baishakh Q2a · 2079 Bhadra Q2b · 2076 Chaitra Q1c · 2076 Ashwin Q3a · 2070 Ashad Q5

    The product life cycle is the longer, outer thing: the stages a product passes through from conception to retirement. The project life cycle lives inside it: one or more projects are run during a product's life, and each has a definite end.

    Product life cycleProject life cycle
    LengthAlways longer than a project'sShorter than the product's
    RelationshipA superset of the project life cycleCan be a subset, part of one or more product phases
    EndingMay or may not endHas a definite end
    PhasesDevelopment, introduction, growth, maturity, declineInitiation, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing
    OverlapAlways sequential, phases never overlapPhases usually overlap
    How manyCan contain more than one project life cycleA single project during its life
    PlanningAdaptive and iterative, with continual improvementPredictive, planned up front, a one off delivery
    TeamA long lived feature teamA short term project team
    Investment deliversBenefits and KPIs, for evolving customer needsThe agreed scope, against the project requirements

    Draw it as a circle inside a circle: the product life on the outside, one or more project lives inside it.

    How to improve quality management in ICT project? asked 6×

    Ch 102+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q7 · 2081 Baishakh Q9 · 2080 Baishakh Q4b · 2075 Chaitra Q6a · 2073 Shrawan Q7 · 2071 Chaitra Q8b

    Quality in an ICT project is improved by eight deliberate steps, and the first of them is refusing to let the team define quality for itself.

    • Define quality to match user needs, not the team's own opinion.
    • Broadcast simple quality metrics, so the whole team can see the level of quality.
    • Fine tune goals to include quality, so it is not silently traded away for the deadline.
    • Get the requirements right, since most defects start there.
    • Test smarter to test less: test first where the defects cluster.
    • Design applications to reduce bug risks.
    • Optimise the use of testing tools, automating the repetitive tests.
    • Use a maturity model such as PMMM or CMM.

    The slides add: leadership that promotes quality; awareness of the cost of quality; attention to organisational influences and workplace factors; and following maturity models. A maturity model is a framework that helps an organisation improve its processes: the Capability Maturity Model benchmarks the maturity of a software process, and the Project Management Maturity Model measures project management maturity and gives a roadmap to the next level.

    Short note: Decision Tree analysis asked 6×

    Ch 124x2.5 marks2082 Baishakh Q8 · 2081 Baishakh Q14 · 2080 Bhadra Q13 · 2079 Baishakh Q12 · 2071 Chaitra Q10 · 2070 Chaitra Q9

    A decision tree is a tree shaped diagram of decisions followed by chance events, used to choose the best course of action when the future outcomes are uncertain. Squares are decisions, circles are chance events, and each branch carries a probability and a value.

    It is an expected monetary value method: EMV is the value of a decision based on its risk event probabilities and monetary values, computed as the sum of probability times outcome along each branch. The option with the higher EMV is chosen.

    EMV = sum of ( probability x outcome ) Project 1: 0.2 x (+300,000) + 0.8 x (-40,000) = $28,000 Project 2: 0.2 x (-50,000) + 0.1 x (-20,000) + 0.7 x 60,000 = $30,000 Choose project 2: the higher EMV. An IT example, build in house or buy a package (Rs lakh): Build: 0.6 x 40 + 0.4 x (-10) = 24 - 4 = +20.0 Buy: 0.9 x 22 + 0.1 x 5 = 19.8 + 0.5 = +20.3 Buy has the higher EMV, and its worst case is still a gain.

    Its limits: the tree grows unmanageable when there are many branches, and one expected number hides the spread of the outcomes behind it.

    Define the project portfolio management and what are the key benefits of project portfolio management? asked 5×

    Ch 34 marks2078 Bhadra Q1b · 2075 Chaitra Q1b · 2075 Ashwin Q2b · 2074 Ashwin Q2a · 2073 Shrawan Q1b

    Project portfolio management (PPM) is the analysis and optimisation of the costs, resources, technologies and processes of all the projects and programs in a portfolio, carried out by portfolio managers or by the PMO. Its goal is to balance risk and reward so that every outcome supports the organisation's strategic goals. It works like an investment portfolio: a balanced set lowers the risk of the individual projects and raises the overall return.

    The key benefits. Sapana: Bihe, England, Bidesh, Video, Fail.

    • Strategic alignment. Every project serves the strategy, and managers can make business based decisions rather than political ones.
    • Better project selection. The projects that pay are the ones picked, using cost benefit analysis, payback period, net present value and risk level, and outcomes can be predicted and planned for.
    • Efficient resource use. Resources are shared across the portfolio instead of being fought over, financial resources are estimated and managed for the group, and cost falls while productivity rises.
    • Balanced risk and reward across the whole set, which also shows which project risks offer the most reward.
    • Visibility for senior management. A global view of every project, real time monitoring with detailed data, and therefore early warning of future problems.
    • Fewer failed and duplicated projects, and people who are enabled to succeed.

    The five steps of the PPM process: define the business objectives; collect project ideas for the portfolio; select the best projects; validate the portfolio's feasibility; then execute and manage the portfolio with the project and program managers.

    Describe the need of work breakdown structure (WBS). asked 5×

    Ch 73+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q6 · 2081 Baishakh Q4 · 2079 Bhadra Q3b · 2079 Baishakh Q4 · 2070 Chaitra Q3b · 2070 Chaitra Q5b

    A work breakdown structure is the process of systematically breaking the major project work down into smaller, more manageable components and subcomponents, in hierarchical order. The slides call it a deliverable oriented grouping of the work that defines the total scope of the project, and the foundation document for planning and managing schedules, costs, resources and changes. Subdividing the deliverables is decomposition, and a task at the lowest level is a work package.

    Why it is needed, its advantages

    • Planning can be performed easily.
    • Costs and budgets can be established.
    • Schedules can be established.
    • Responsibility can be assigned to each activity.
    • The risk of each activity can be analysed.

    What creating a WBS identifies: what the work is; how long each work package takes; the cost, as a time phased budget per work package; how much resource each package needs; who is responsible for each unit of work; and the milestones that are the monitoring points for measuring success.

    Its levels: total program, project, task or activity, sub task, work package, and level of effort.

    The two rules

    • The 100 percent rule. The WBS includes 100 percent of the work defined by the project scope and captures all the deliverables, internal, external and interim, including project management itself. It is the most important principle for developing, decomposing and evaluating a WBS.
    • The 8/80 rule. The lowest level of work should be no less than 8 hours and no more than 80 hours.

    Principles: a unit of work appears only once; the work content of an item is the sum of the items below it; each item is the responsibility of only one individual; the WBS is consistent with the way the work will really be done; the team helps build it; and each item is described in the WBS dictionary.

    Provide detailed explanations and examples of how these drivers contribute to the success of a project. asked 5×

    Ch 35 marks2081 Bhadra Q2a · 2081 Baishakh Q3 · 2079 Bhadra Q2a · 2078 Bhadra Q2a · 2070 Chaitra Q2b

    Drivers, also called enablers, are the conditions that push a project towards success. The notes give eleven. Thulo Chor Chitwanma Rakshi Aayepachhi Okhati Fyaakyo, Hatti Sanga Ekdam Eklai.

    DriverHow it contributesExample
    Top management supportClears budget and removes blockers fastThe chief executive approves overtime and a vendor contract within a week
    Clear goals and objectivesEvery decision is judged against one targetOnline admission live by Shrawan 1, for 5,000 applicants a day
    Client supportQuestions are answered quickly, so there is less reworkThe client names a product owner who replies within a day
    Realistic planDeadlines that can actually be metEstimates taken from past projects and a WBS, not a heroic guess
    Appropriate resources, the four M'sWork never waits for its inputsSkilled developers, test servers, licences and funds released on time
    OwnershipPeople fix problems without being told toThe payment module's owner chases its defects
    Formal methodologyPredictable steps, reviews and recordsScrum sprints with a review every two weeks
    Hard working, focused staffAttention stays on one projectA dedicated team, not people split across five projects
    Standard, structured ICT infrastructureFewer environment problemsVersion control, stable test servers, automated builds
    Effective communicationEveryone works from the same informationDaily stand ups and a weekly status report
    Experienced project managerRisks are foreseen from past projectsThe plan works around the Dashain and Tihar staff shortage

    Open with PMI's view that success comes from meeting the stakeholders' needs through the knowledge areas, and that the drivers are the conditions which make that possible. Close with the sentence that removes any one driver and it becomes an inhibitor.

    How does system management address business, technological and organizational concerns before creating or making changes to system? asked 5×

    Ch 54 marks2081 Baishakh Q5 · 2079 Bhadra Q3a · 2078 Bhadra Q7a · 2075 Ashwin Q4a · 2074 Ashwin Q3b

    The three sphere model is how systems management addresses concerns before a system is created or changed: every project is looked at through three spheres, business, technological and organisational, and each sphere's questions are answered first.

    • Business sphere. What are the answers to the business goals? How much will it cost, and where are the funds? Who are the stakeholders? What will the profit be?
    • Technological sphere. Which technology will be used, and why? Which software, hardware and network are required? Is the technology proven or obsolete? Where will technical support come from? How will the project cope with technological change?
    • Organisational sphere. What are the tangible and intangible benefits? What are the long and short term effects? What skills and facilities are required? How will resources be mobilised, and what training is needed?

    Example. A college decides to give every student a laptop. Business: what does it cost, who pays for it, will it attract students? Technology: which laptops, what network and software, who repairs them? Organisation: how do teachers change their classes, who trains the students, who supports them afterwards?

    Why the model exists. Teams attend to the technology and neglect the organisation, so a technically correct system arrives that nobody adopts. Many IT failures are organisational, not technical.

    Differentiate project scope and product scope. asked 5×

    Ch 72+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q8 · 2079 Bhadra Q4b · 2078 Bhadra Q7b · 2075 Chaitra Q6b · 2073 Shrawan Q4b

    One sentence carries it: project scope is the how, the work; product scope is the what, the features.

    Project scopeProduct scope
    DefinitionThe work required to deliver the product, service or result with the specified features and functionsThe sum of all the features, functions and characteristics of the product
    FocusThe work needed to deliver the productThe features of the end product
    RelationshipA subset of product scopeA superset of project scope
    OrientationThe how: work relatedThe what: functional requirements
    Completion measured againstThe project planThe product requirements
    Defined inThe project charter and the scope statementThe product specification
    ExampleConstructing a bridgeThe bridge's technical specifications: its length and width

    An IT example. The product scope of a college management information system is its modules and features, such as fee payment and result publishing; the project scope is the work to deliver them, which is requirements, design, coding, testing and training.

    Short note: Pareto Chart asked 5×

    Ch 102x3 marks2082 Bhadra Q11 · 2081 Baishakh Q14 · 2076 Chaitra Q7 · 2074 Chaitra Q7b · 2072 Kartik Q10

    A Pareto chart combines a bar graph and a line graph: the bars show the individual values, usually types of defect, in descending order, and the line shows their cumulative total. It reveals the commonest sources of defects and helps decide where to focus effort.

    • The Pareto principle, the 80/20 rule: 80 percent of the results come from 20 percent of the causes, so the job is to find the 20 percent of defect types that cause 80 percent of the defects.
    • Examples: 80 percent of complaints come from 20 percent of customers, 80 percent of sales from 20 percent of clients, and 80 percent of computer crashes from 20 percent of the bugs.

    How it helps achieve a better quality project

    • It sets priorities: a long list of complaints becomes an order of attack.
    • It separates the vital few from the trivial many, so a team with limited time fixes the causes that remove most of the defects.
    • It shows the gain before the work: the cumulative line shows how much of the problem each fix removes.
    • It measures the improvement: the chart redrawn after the fixes shows whether the top bars fell.
    • It focuses the next tool: the top bar is the problem a fishbone diagram then explains.

    Drawing one, with 100 defects logged in a college MIS: list the categories and count each, login 45, reports 30, slow pages 12, printing 8, other 5; sort them in descending order and draw the bars; add the cumulative percentage, 45, 75, 87, 95, 100; draw the 80 percent line and read off the vital few. Login and reports give 75 of the 100 defects, so they are fixed first.

    Explain the hazards of communication error in a project. asked 5×

    Ch 112+2 marks2079 Bhadra Q8 · 2076 Chaitra Q2b · 2076 Ashwin Q3b · 2075 Ashwin Q7b · 2074 Ashwin Q8b

    A communication error is not a small thing on a project: most of the classic project failures are communication failures wearing another name.

    • Wrong requirements built. A misunderstood requirement becomes working software that solves the wrong problem, found only at acceptance.
    • Duplicated or omitted work. Two people each assume the other is doing a task, or neither does.
    • Schedule and cost overrun. Problems reported late are fixed late, and at a higher cost.
    • Conflict and loss of trust, within the team and with the client.
    • Scope creep, through verbal agreements that are never written down or costed.
    • Loss of reputation and of the client, and legal dispute where a contract is involved.
    • Wrong management decisions taken on stale or over optimistic information.
    • Low morale, when people learn of changes last, and safety or security incidents when warnings do not reach the right person.

    The example that makes the answer. The costliest communication error in software is a requirement that the client and the developer understand differently. Neither notices, because both believe they agree, and it is found only at user acceptance testing, when correcting it costs the most.

    Why reporting system is required in a project? asked 5×

    Ch 112+2 marks2079 Bhadra Q8 · 2076 Chaitra Q2b · 2076 Ashwin Q3b · 2075 Ashwin Q7b · 2074 Ashwin Q8b

    A reporting system is required because a huge amount of time goes into gathering, evaluating, formatting and disseminating status information, and most of it is repetitive, recurring work. An integrated reporting system collects the data during operation, stores it in a relational database, and provides it ready for analysis whenever it is required.

    • Stakeholders stay informed of how resources are being used against the objectives.
    • Repetitive reporting work is automated, which saves exactly the time the manual system wastes.
    • Early warning: a variance shows in a report before it becomes a crisis.
    • One consistent picture: everyone compares the same figures against the same baseline, instead of ad hoc updates.
    • A record and an audit trail: decisions, changes and approvals are documented for control, for contracts and for disputes.
    • Impact of change: documents such as the traceability matrix show what a change affects.
    • Lessons learned are captured for the next project.
    • Management by exception: managers look only where the numbers move away from the plan.

    Short note: Contract (project) closure procedure asked 5×

    Ch 135x3 marks2079 Baishakh Q12 · 2075 Ashwin Q9 · 2074 Ashwin Q9 · 2073 Shrawan Q9 · 2072 Kartik Q10

    Contract closure, also called closing procurements, is completing and settling each procurement, including any open items. It is part of project closing.

    The contract closure procedure

    • Verify the work. Determine whether all the work was completed correctly and satisfactorily, against the acceptance criteria in the contract.
    • Settle. Resolve open claims, by negotiated settlement where possible.
    • Audit. A procurement audit identifies the lessons learned in the procurement.
    • Record. Update the records to reflect the final results and archive them with a records management system, because they help in the future.
    • Close formally. The buyer, through its contract administrator, tells the seller in writing that the contract has been completed.

    The formal acceptance and closing requirements should be written into the contract itself and covered by the contract management plan. Its tools are procurement audits, negotiated settlements and the records management system, and its outputs are closed procurements and updated organisational process assets.

    Early termination is a special case of contract closure: by agreement of the parties, or by the default of one of them.

    Short note: ICT code of ethics asked 5×

    Ch 144x2.5 marks2082 Baishakh Q8 · 2080 Baishakh Q5c · 2076 Ashwin Q8 · 2075 Ashwin Q9 · 2074 Ashwin Q9

    Ethics is a set of principles that guides decision making, based on personal values of what is right and wrong, and making ethical decisions is an important part of a project manager's personal and professional life. PMI sets the ethical standards that professionals must follow.

    The code: four values

    • Responsibility, towards the community: owning our decisions and their consequences.
    • Respect, in the relationship between employers and clients: for people, resources and the environment.
    • Fairness, in work performance: impartial and objective decisions, free of conflict of interest, favouritism and prejudice.
    • Honesty, in personal performance: understanding the truth and acting truthfully in communication and conduct.

    The first two are about how we treat others, the last two about how we conduct ourselves.

    How to create a code of ethics: decide why you are writing it, to inspire employees or to spell out expected behaviour; begin with an introduction explaining its purpose; add the items, covering interpersonal relationships, behaviour around customers and clients, and anything specific to the company or industry; then decide how you will implement it.

    What makes it an ICT code are the issues peculiar to computing: privacy and the protection of personal data; information security and responsible disclosure of weaknesses; intellectual property and software licensing, with no pirated software; professional competence, not taking work beyond one's skill; avoiding harm from systems that fail dangerously; and honest reporting of what a system can do. In Nepal the related law is the Electronic Transactions Act, 2063.

    Define PMI. asked 4×

    Ch 32+2 marks2081 Baishakh Q3 · 2080 Bhadra Q3 · 2079 Baishakh Q3 · 2070 Chaitra Q2a

    The Project Management Institute (PMI) is a United States based, not for profit professional organisation for project management. It publishes the PMBOK Guide, certifies practitioners, and regards the project management office as a major catalyst for organisational excellence.

    How it relates to project management. PMI is the profession's own body: it defines what project management is, through the PMBOK Guide; it certifies who practises it, through CAPM and PMP; and it sets how they must behave, through its code of ethics and professional conduct. Project management practice across the world follows its standard, which is why the same five process groups and the same knowledge areas are recognised everywhere.

    Explain about input, tools and techniques and output of integrated change control. asked 4×

    Ch 73+3 marks2073 Shrawan Q4a · 2072 Chaitra Q5 · 2070 Chaitra Q5a · 2070 Ashad Q8

    Perform integrated change control is a process of the monitoring and controlling group that reviews every requested change and approves or rejects it, keeping the plan, the scope and the deliverables consistent with each other. Changes are unavoidable, so the aim is to manage them rather than to resist them.

    Its three objectives

    • Influence the factors that create changes, so that the changes which do happen are beneficial.
    • Determine that a change has occurred.
    • Manage the actual changes as they occur.

    The four types of control

    • Change control system: a formal, documented process describing when and how official project documents and work may be changed, who is authorised to change them, and how.
    • Change control board: a formal group responsible for approving or rejecting changes. It gives the guidelines for preparing change requests, evaluating them, and managing the implementation of approved ones.
    • Configuration management: ensures the descriptions of the project's product are correct, complete and consistent, identifying and controlling the functional and physical design characteristics of the products and their documentation.
    • Version control and build management: version or source control tracks and manages changes to code over time, keeps the history and supports rollback; build management needs a formal check in and check out policy to guarantee code quality.
    InputsTools and techniquesOutputs
    Project management plan; requested changes; work performance information; recommended corrective actions; recommended preventive actions; recommended defect repair; deliverablesProject management methodology; project management information system; expert judgement; facilitation techniquesApproved change requests; rejected change requests; updated project management plan; updated project scope statement; approved corrective actions; approved preventive actions; approved defect repair; validated defect repair; deliverables

    Key features of change control on IT projects

    • Formal requests. Every change is requested in writing through the change control system.
    • Impact assessed first. Its effect on scope, time, cost, quality and risk is judged before any decision.
    • A defined authority decides. The change control board approves or rejects.
    • Configuration management keeps the requirements, design and code documents consistent with each other.
    • Version control and build management. Every code change is committed with its history, can be rolled back, and follows a check in and check out policy.
    • Baselines updated. An approved change updates the plan, so the plan still matches the work.

    Define project risk. asked 4×

    Ch 122+2 marks2081 Baishakh Q12 · 2080 Baishakh Q5a · 2078 Bhadra Q3 · 2070 Ashad CE 701 Q5

    Risk is a possible future event that may affect the project positively, as an opportunity, or negatively, as a threat. It is the possibility of loss or damage, and it makes the project's goals harder to achieve. A project risk is an uncertain event or condition that, if it occurs, has a positive or negative effect on a project objective such as time, cost, scope or quality.

    • Its two characteristics are loss and uncertainty: an event that may or may not occur and, if it does, generally causes loss.
    • Risk is a function of likelihood and impact. Both matter: a near certain trivial event and an impossible disaster are equally not worth managing.
    • Risk exists on all projects, and it changes as the project progresses, so it is reassessed as risk events approach and reviewed at regular intervals.
    • All risks have consequences. Not all of them are bad, but all of them need planning, and the customer's tolerance for risk must be considered.
    • Risk against issue: a risk is in the future; once it happens it is an issue, to be managed rather than planned for.

    The terms around it: risk tolerance is the amount of risk that is acceptable; a risk averse person does not want to take risks; the risk factors are the probability of occurrence, the range of possible outcomes, the expected timing of the event, and the anticipated frequency of risk events from that source.

    A risk audit is evaluating and documenting how well the risk responses deal with the identified risks and their root causes, and how effective the overall risk management process is. It can be carried out as part of a regular quality assurance audit.

    What is project management maturity? asked 4×

    Ch 142 marks2079 Bhadra Q10c · 2072 Chaitra Q10 · 2071 Chaitra Q10 · 2070 Ashad Q11

    Project management maturity is a formal tool used to measure an organisation's project management maturity. Once the initial level and the areas for improvement are found, it gives a logical path of progressive development. It follows the Software Engineering Institute's Capability Maturity Model, with five evolutionary levels, and examines maturity across the knowledge areas.

    A maturity model is a framework that helps an organisation improve its processes and systems by mapping logical ways to improve its service. The CMM benchmarks the maturity of an organisation's software process; the Project Management Maturity Model measures project management maturity and gives a roadmap to the next level.

    The five levels

    • Initial. Processes are ad hoc and chaotic, there is no stable environment, and products often work but budgets and schedules are frequently exceeded.
    • Managed, or repeatable. Requirements are managed, and processes are planned, performed, measured and controlled.
    • Defined. Processes are well characterised and understood, and described in standards, procedures, tools and methods.
    • Quantitatively managed. The subprocesses that matter most to performance are controlled with statistical and other quantitative techniques.
    • Optimising. Processes are continually improved from a quantitative understanding of the common causes of their variation.

    The logic of the ladder: level 2 makes one project repeatable, level 3 makes the process organisation wide, level 4 makes it measured, and level 5 makes it self improving. Measurement arrives only at level 4, so a level 3 organisation still cannot predict its results reliably. Using a maturity model is one of the named steps for improving the quality of IT projects.

    What are the phases in project life cycle? asked 4×

    Ch 12+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q2b · 2080 Baishakh Q2a · 2076 Ashwin Q3a · 2070 Ashad Q5

    The project life cycle is the logical sequence of activities a project passes through to accomplish its goal. The notes give four phases, each building on the one before and triggering the next.

    • Formulation. Identify the idea and set the criteria to judge it. Project identification gathers creative ideas from the environment and from internal and external resources; project evaluation identifies the constraints, fixes the objective, and develops the proposal after a pre feasibility study and a prototype design.
    • Planning. A detailed plan for time, cost and quality. It contains the feasibility study, which is technical, economic, market, management and environmental, and appraisal and estimation, which judges the chance of success, compares the project with similar ones, and develops the requirements and the implementation plan.
    • Implementation. The activities are carried out and controlled. A proper team is formed, the manager monitors and supervises, inspection and testing happen from time to time, and progress is reviewed regularly.
    • Termination. The work is complete, the project is evaluated and handed over. Operation and evaluation reviews the outcome and returns to an earlier phase if required; handover passes the result to the client, releases the resources and evaluates success.

    How does change to one constraint affect the others? asked 4×

    Ch 13+2 marks2082 Bhadra Q1a · 2081 Bhadra Q1a · 2074 Ashwin Q1a · 2072 Kartik Q1a

    No constraint moves alone. A change to any one of scope, time and cost forces a change in at least one of the other two, which is why the model is drawn as a triangle.

    • Time and scope. Running late, so cut scope: fewer tasks take less time.
    • Scope and cost. Less scope means fewer tasks and fewer resources, so lower cost; more scope costs more.
    • Time and cost. Usually directly related: rented equipment and hired labour are paid for every day the project runs, and buying time back means overtime or extra crews.

    As rules of thumb: to reduce cost, reduce scope or add time; to reduce time, add cost or reduce scope; to increase scope, add cost or time.

    Through the life cycle the trade gets dearer. Early, in initiation and planning, all three are still flexible and a change only means redrawing a plan. Later, in execution, scope is fixed in designs and finished work, money is committed and the deadline is near, so the same change costs far more. That is why scope is frozen after planning and every later change goes through formal change control.

    Explain on various types of organizational structures. asked 4×

    Ch 51+2+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q2b · 2081 Bhadra Q2b · 2080 Baishakh Q1c · 2075 Ashwin Q4b

    There are four forms of organisation structure, and one variable separates them: how much authority the project manager has, compared with the functional manager. Answer that and every advantage and disadvantage follows.

    • Functional organisation. The organisation is divided into smaller groups by specialisation, such as production, marketing and finance, and projects run inside those departments. The head of department acts as the project manager, or a project coordinator is named with very limited authority.
    • Projectized, or pure project, organisation. The project is separate from the functional units. The project manager has a line organisation of their own, with full project authority and responsibility, and projects report directly to the head of the organisation.
    • Matrix organisation. Reporting lines run both vertically, by function, and horizontally, by project, so each employee reports to at least one project manager and one functional manager. It comes in three strengths: weak, balanced and strong.
    • Composite organisation. A mixture. For example, a mainly functional organisation sets up a dedicated, projectized team for one critical project while its other projects stay inside departments.

    Draw the authority line: functional at one end with almost no project manager authority, then weak, balanced and strong matrix, then projectized at the other end with almost total authority.

    What is system view of project management? asked 4×

    Ch 52+3 marks2079 Bhadra Q3a · 2078 Bhadra Q7a · 2075 Ashwin Q4a · 2074 Ashwin Q3b

    No project runs in isolation: it operates inside a broad organisational environment, so the project manager must take a holistic system view and understand how the project sits inside the larger organisation. A system is a set of interacting components working within an environment to fulfil some purpose, and a project management system is an organised set of tools and procedures that helps managers and team members achieve the project objectives.

    The three parts of the system view

    • Systems philosophy. Viewing things as systems: interacting components working within an environment to fulfil a purpose.
    • Systems analysis. A problem solving approach that defines the scope of the system, divides it into components, identifies and evaluates its problems, examines alternative solutions, and identifies a satisfactory one.
    • Systems management. Addressing the business, technological and organisational issues before creating or changing a system. This is the three sphere model.

    The three essences: a structured approach, meaning an organisational structure; a disciplined approach, meaning coordinated management processes; and a defined approach, meaning purposefully defined inputs and outputs for each process.

    Example. A hospital information system is not just software. Seen as a system it touches billing and funding, the doctors and nurses who must use it, and the servers and network it runs on. Missing any one of these sinks the project.

    Short note: COCOMO Model asked 4×

    Ch 92x3 marks2082 Bhadra Q11 · 2074 Chaitra Q8 · 2072 Kartik Q10 · 2070 Ashad Q16

    COCOMO, the constructive cost model, is a model that estimates the cost of a software project from its size in lines of code, counted in KLOC, thousands of lines. It was proposed by B. W. Boehm in Software Engineering Economics in 1981, and it is a parametric estimating model.

    Three models, in rising detail: basic, which uses the size alone; intermediate, which multiplies the initial effort by 15 cost drivers taken from the product, hardware, personnel and project attributes; and detailed, which applies those drivers phase by phase.

    ModeSizeNatureDeadline and environment
    Organic2 to 50 KLOCSmall project, experienced developers, a familiar environment: payroll, inventoryNot tight; familiar and in house
    Semidetached50 to 300 KLOCMedium size and team with some experience: utility systems, compilers, database systems, editorsMedium
    EmbeddedOver 300 KLOCLarge, real time, complex interfaces, little experience: ATMs, air traffic controlTight; complex hardware and customer interfaces
    BASIC COCOMO Effort E = a (KLOC)^b person-months Duration D = c (E)^d months Staff size SS = E / D persons Productivity P = KLOC / E KLOC per person-month Mode a b c d Organic 2.4 1.05 2.5 0.38 Semidetached 3.0 1.12 2.5 0.35 Embedded 3.6 1.20 2.5 0.32

    Worked example, organic, 32 KLOC: E = 2.4 x 32^1.05 = 91.33 person months; D = 2.5 x 91.33^0.38 = 13.90 months; SS = 91.33 / 13.90 = 6.57, so about 7 people; and P = 32 / 91.33 = 0.35 KLOC per person month.

    Its limit: it needs the size in KLOC, which is itself hard to know before the design exists, so it works best when calibrated on the organisation's own past projects.

    Explain about the project risk management and describe different types of tools and techniques for risk identification and management. asked 4×

    Ch 123+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q7 · 2079 Bhadra Q9 · 2074 Ashwin Q7b · 2070 Ashad Q13

    Risk identification is understanding what potential events might hurt or enhance a particular project. It is part of planning, its main output is the list of identified risks that starts the risk register, and it is iterative, because new risks appear as the project moves through its life cycle.

    TechniqueHow it worksWatch out for
    BrainstormingA group generates ideas about a problem by collecting them without thinking and judgmentDo not overuse it: it can lead to groupthink and fewer ideas
    Delphi techniqueLike brainstorming, but the experts need not meet and stay anonymous. Each answers a questionnaire, a facilitator summarises and sends the views round again, round after round, until they convergeSlow, and it depends on an honest facilitator
    InterviewingFact finding with people who have done similar projects, with experts and with stakeholdersOnly as good as the people chosen
    SWOT analysisExamines the project from each point of view: strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threatsBroad: it misses detailed technical risks
    Nominal group techniqueIn one room each person writes the risks they see, the papers go to a facilitator and onto the wall, then the risks are reviewed and prioritisedNeeds everyone together
    ChecklistsLists of risks met on past projects, walked through systematicallyFinds only risks that someone has met before
    Document review and diagrammingReading the plan and the scope; cause and effect diagrams and flowchartsOnly as good as the documents

    Its formal tools list is documentation review, information gathering, checklists, assumptions analysis and diagramming techniques; its output is the risk register.

    Why risk management is an essential part of project management? asked 4×

    Ch 122+4 marks2079 Bhadra Q9 · 2076 Ashwin Q5 · 2074 Ashwin Q7b · 2073 Shrawan Q5

    Risk management is essential because risk is certain. Risk concerns the future, which is exactly what a plan is about; it involves change in mind, opinion, actions or place; it contains choice, and the uncertainty the choice itself brings; and it is the possibility of loss or damage that hinders meeting the project objectives.

    What risk management gives a project

    • Many project problems are reduced by risk analysis, and yet risk management is the process most often overlooked.
    • It finds and avoids problems, and helps software project managers prevent surprises, improve negotiations, meet customer requirements, and reduce schedule slips and cost overruns.
    • Its objective is to increase the probability and impact of positive events and decrease those of negative events: minimise the potential risks while maximising the potential opportunities.
    • It is an investment, like insurance. You pay a small, certain cost to avoid a large, uncertain one.

    The results of good risk management. Unlike crisis management, good project risk management often goes unnoticed: well run projects look almost effortless, but a great deal of work goes into running them well. Project managers should aim to make their jobs look easy.

    Short note: SWOT asked 4×

    Ch 122x3 marks2082 Bhadra Q11 · 2075 Chaitra Q7 · 2075 Ashwin Q9 · 2073 Shrawan Q9

    SWOT analysis examines a project or organisation from four points of view: strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats. In risk management it is a risk identification technique, because it finds the broad negative and positive risks.

    • Internal against external. Strengths and weaknesses are inside the organisation and can be controlled; opportunities and threats come from outside and cannot be.
    • Opportunities are things, conditions or events that let an organisation stand out from its competitors and improve its standing in the market.
    • For risk: weaknesses and threats become negative risks, and strengths and opportunities become positive ones.

    An example, four people starting a business in the film industry. Strengths: many contacts in the industry, two with strong sales and interpersonal skills, two with strong technical skills in filmmaking software. Weaknesses: no accounting or financial experience, no clear marketing strategy, little money to invest, no website. Opportunities: a potential client wants a bid on a large project, the industry keeps growing, two major conferences are coming. Threats: others offer the same services, customers may prefer established firms, the film business is high risk.

    Draw it as a two by two grid, internal on the top row and external on the bottom, positive on the left and negative on the right.

    Short note: Outsourcing and off-shoring options asked 4×

    Ch 143x4 marks2076 Ashwin Q8 · 2074 Ashwin Q9 · 2070 Chaitra Q9 · 2069 Chaitra Q13

    Outsourcing is a company contracting a specific process out to a third party that specialises in it. Off-shoring is a business sending in house jobs overseas, out of the country. Both save the organisation money.

    OptionMeaning
    OutsourcingWork contracted to an outside company, at home or abroad
    Off-shoringWork moved to another country, to a vendor or to the company's own branch
    Offshore outsourcingBoth at once: a foreign vendor does the work
    Near-shoringOff-shoring to a nearby country, for a similar time zone and culture
    In-sourcingBringing outsourced work back in house

    Why organisations are moving towards outsourcing

    • Lower fixed and recurrent costs.
    • Focus on the core business.
    • Access to skills and technologies not available in house.
    • Flexibility: capacity when it is needed, without permanent hiring.
    • Accountability through the contract, and, across time zones, round the clock work.

    For Nepal the country is more often the destination of off-shoring than its source: Nepali IT firms win outsourced work on cost and skill.

    Explain about the project management and project portfolio management. asked 3×

    Ch 32+3 marks2081 Baishakh Q2 · 2079 Baishakh Q5 · 2072 Kartik Q3

    Project management is doing projects right; project portfolio management is doing the right projects. The first drives one project to completion; the second looks at every project and every potential project, and asks whether it fits the business goals.

    Project managementProject portfolio management
    Do projects rightDo the right projects
    Applies knowledge, skills, tools and techniques to meet project goalsA collection of projects managed to meet the organisation's strategy
    Directs a single project successfullySelects and executes the right projects for the organisation
    Temporary and uniqueOngoing, performed every day
    Does not make strategic plans or prioritise projectsMakes strategic plans and prioritises projects
    Goal: complete one project and deliver its serviceGoal: look across all projects, improve return on investment, reduce cost
    Smaller scale, more detailedLarge scale and more diffuse

    PPM also has two kinds of user: execution focused users, who manage the technical side of execution and report progress and spending to sponsors and executives; and portfolio level users, who build the decision frameworks, select projects with them, and plan, track and report the investments.

    Describe about the project Scope Management and describe the inputs, tools and techniques used to develop the project charter. asked 3×

    Ch 73+3 marks2081 Baishakh Q8 · 2073 Shrawan Q4b · 2071 Chaitra Q9

    Scope is all the work involved in creating the products of the project and the processes used to create them. Project scope management includes the processes involved in defining and controlling what is, and what is not, included in the project. Its purpose is a shared understanding: the team and the stakeholders must agree on what products will be produced and what processes will produce them, because most scope disputes are two parties who each thought the other had agreed.

    Its essential components, the six processes

    • Initiation: beginning a project, or continuing it to the next phase.
    • Scope planning: developing the documents that provide the basis for future project decisions, and producing the scope management plan.
    • Defining scope: reviewing the charter, the requirement documents and the organisational process assets to create the scope statement.
    • Creating the WBS: subdividing the major deliverables into smaller, more manageable components.
    • Scope verification: formalising acceptance of the project scope.
    • Scope change control: controlling changes to the project scope.

    The scope statement, the document that develops and confirms the common understanding, contains the project justification (the need, with cost benefit and cash flow analysis), the project's product and its specification, the project deliverables, the project objectives written to SMART, and what determines success, the key success factors.

    Requirements are either functional, the day to day needs of the users, or non functional, covering performance, usability, reliability, security, financial, legal and operational needs. They are captured by interviews, questionnaires, in depth observation and domain expert suggestions, and documented by the SMART rule and the MoSCoW rule, must have, should have, could have and would have, then written into a system requirement specification with business and use cases.

    Explain about the project risk management and describe different types of tools and techniques for risk identification and management. asked 3×

    Ch 123+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q7 · 2079 Baishakh Q12 · 2069 Chaitra Q12

    Project risk management is the systematic process of identifying, analysing and responding to project risk: maximising the results of positive risks and minimising the consequences of negative events.

    Its six processes

    • Risk management planning. Deciding how to approach and plan the risk management activities for the project. Output: the risk management plan.
    • Risk identification. Determining which risks are likely to affect the project and documenting their characteristics. Output: the risk register.
    • Qualitative risk analysis. Characterising and analysing risks, and prioritising their effects on the project objectives.
    • Quantitative risk analysis. Measuring numerically the probability and the consequences of the risks that qualitative analysis ranked high.
    • Risk response planning. Taking steps to enhance opportunities and reduce threats to the project objectives.
    • Risk monitoring and control. Monitoring known risks, identifying new ones, reducing risks, and evaluating how well the risk reduction is working.

    The order is the logic: nothing can be analysed before it is identified, and quantitative analysis is spent only on the risks that qualitative analysis ranked high. The notes group them in two: planning, which is the first five, and controlling and monitoring.

    The PMI model as a block diagram: draw the six boxes in order, with an arrow from monitoring and control back to identification, because new risks appear as the project moves.

    Risk monitoring and control in detail: monitoring means knowing the status of the risks, controlling means carrying out the risk management plans as risks occur. Its tools are risk reassessment, risk audits, variance and trend analysis, and status review meetings; its outputs are corrective action, change requests, an updated risk register and recommended preventive actions.

    What are the knowledge contents that falls under PMBOK? asked 3×

    Ch 21+4 marks2073 Shrawan Q1a · 2072 Kartik Q2b · 2071 Chaitra Q2a

    The nine knowledge areas are the same PMBOK processes grouped by subject rather than by when they happen; each area contains some or all of the five process groups. I Stole The Chiya, Quietly Hid Chicken, Ran, Panicked.

    • Integration management. Coordinates all the other areas into one plan, and manages change across them.
    • Scope management. Defines and controls what work is and is not in the project.
    • Time management. Schedules the activities so the project finishes on time.
    • Cost management. Estimates, budgets and controls cost.
    • Quality management. Makes sure the project satisfies the needs it was undertaken for.
    • Human resource management. Acquires, develops and manages the team.
    • Communications management. Generates, distributes and stores project information.
    • Risk management. Identifies, analyses and responds to risk.
    • Procurement management. Acquires goods and services from outside the organisation.

    Add in one line that the fifth edition of the PMBOK Guide adds a tenth area, stakeholder management.

    Explain about the Project Management Institute (PMI) and describe the area of knowledge for the project manager to successfully completion of the project. asked 3×

    Ch 22+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q3 · 2079 Baishakh Q3 · 2072 Chaitra Q2

    PMI, the Project Management Institute, is the professional body founded in the USA in 1969 that publishes the PMBOK Guide and certifies practitioners. Its model of what a project manager must know has five overlapping areas of expertise, with the manager standing where they overlap.

    • The Project Management Body of Knowledge. The knowledge unique to project management: the five process groups, the nine knowledge areas, and tools such as CPM, PERT, the WBS and earned value. Necessary, but not sufficient on its own.
    • Application area knowledge, standards and regulations. The field the project is in, such as software, telecom, construction or banking; the recommended guidelines, such as ISO and IEEE standards; and the compulsory rules, such as Nepal's Electronic Transactions Act or the Public Procurement Act.
    • Understanding the project environment. Cultural and social, the people affected and their values; international and political, the laws, customs, time zones and stability; physical, the geography, climate and infrastructure.
    • General management knowledge and skills. Planning, organising, staffing, executing and controlling an ongoing enterprise, with the supporting disciplines of finance, purchasing, marketing, contracts, logistics, human resources and IT.
    • Interpersonal skills. Communication, influencing the organisation, leadership, motivation, negotiation and conflict management, and problem solving.

    Draw it as five overlapping ovals with the project manager at the centre. Success needs all five together, which is exactly why the manager sits in the overlap.

    Explain the characteristics of project life cycle with diagram. asked 3×

    Ch 42+3 marks2074 Ashwin Q2a · 2073 Shrawan Q1b · 2072 Kartik Q3

    The project life cycle is a collection of project phases that defines what work will be performed in each phase, what deliverables will be produced and when, who is involved in each phase, and how management will control and approve the work produced. Its characteristics are these.

    • It passes through every phase. A project should successfully pass through each phase in order to continue to the next.
    • Each phase ends in a review of the key deliverables and of project performance: the phase exit, stage gate or kill point, where management decides whether to continue and corrects errors.
    • Cost and staffing are low at the start, higher towards the end, peaking in execution, and drop rapidly as the project closes.
    • Risk and uncertainty are highest at the start, because the probability of success is lowest then, and fall as more becomes known.
    • Stakeholder influence on the final characteristics of the product and on its final cost is highest at the start, and becomes progressively lower.
    • The cost of change is low early and rises steeply as the project goes on.
    • Phases usually overlap. They are rarely clean handovers.

    The middle four are one idea seen from four angles: early is cheap and uncertain, late is expensive and certain. Draw both graphs: cost and staffing across the phases as one hump skewed right, and on the same axes stakeholder influence and risk falling while the cost of change rises.

    Explain with sketching required diagrams & mapping of project management. asked 3×

    Ch 65 marks2076 Chaitra Q2a · 2075 Ashwin Q2a · 2070 Chaitra Q3a

    The two are the two axes of one grid. Knowledge areas give the detailed description of the processes, by subject; process groups say when in the flow of the project each process happens. Every process belongs to exactly one knowledge area and one process group, and each knowledge area crosses several groups.

    Knowledge areaInitiatingPlanningExecuting ControllingClosing
    IntegrationProject plan developmentProject plan executionIntegrated change control
    ScopeInitiationScope planning; scope definitionScope verification; scope change control
    TimeActivity definition; activity sequencing; activity duration estimating; schedule developmentSchedule control
    CostResource planning; cost estimating; cost budgetingCost control
    QualityQuality planningQuality assuranceQuality control
    Human resourceOrganisational planning; staff acquisitionTeam development
    CommunicationsCommunications planningInformation distributionPerformance reportingAdministrative closure
    RiskRisk management planning; risk identification; qualitative risk analysis; quantitative risk analysis; risk response planningRisk monitoring and control
    ProcurementProcurement planning; solicitation planningSolicitation; source selection; contract administrationContract closeout

    What the grid shows

    • Planning is the biggest group: 21 of the 39 processes. Every knowledge area has planning work in it.
    • Controlling appears almost everywhere: nearly every knowledge area is monitored and controlled.
    • Integration ties it together, and in the current PMBOK it is the only area present in all five groups.
    • Initiating and closing are small: a charter and the stakeholders at the start, closing the project and its contracts at the end.

    The current PMBOK has ten knowledge areas and 49 processes, adding stakeholder management and renaming time as schedule and human resource as resource. Either version earns the marks as long as you say which one you are drawing.

    Short note: Expert judgements asked 3×

    Ch 75x3 marks2080 Bhadra Q13 · 2079 Baishakh Q12 · 2069 Chaitra Q15

    Expert judgement is a way of making a judgement based on expertise, skill or specialised knowledge in a specific area. The expertise may come from training or from career experience, and anyone who has worked on a large, complex project knows how much good decisions depend on it.

    • What experts are consulted on: what methodology to follow, what programming language to use, what training approach to take.
    • Where it is used: it is a tool in almost every process, including developing the charter, the preliminary scope statement and the project management plan, monitoring work, change control, closing, scope planning and cost estimating.
    • Who the experts are: other units of the organisation, consultants, stakeholders including the customer, professional and technical associations, industry groups, and specialists on the team.
    • When it helps most: where hard data does not exist, such as new technology, first time estimates, risk identification and evaluating bids.
    • Its weakness: bias and over confidence. Ask several experts and combine their views, for example with the Delphi technique.

    Short note: S-curve asked 3×

    Ch 94x2.5 marks2082 Baishakh Q8 · 2081 Baishakh Q14 · 2080 Bhadra Q13

    An S curve is a graph of cumulative project cost, or cumulative person hours or quantities, plotted against time. It is one of the most effective tools in project control.

    • Why it is an S. A slow but growing start, a steep middle where execution spends most of the budget, and a slowing finish as the work runs out.
    • The earned value graph draws three S curves together: PV (BCWS), EV (BCWP) and AC (ACWP). At the review date, the vertical gap from EV to AC is the cost variance, the vertical gap from EV to PV is the schedule variance, and the horizontal gap between the EV and PV curves is the delay in time.
    • How to draw it. Money up the vertical axis and time along the horizontal; PV runs the full width to BAC at the end; EV and AC stop at today's date. EV below PV is behind schedule; AC above EV is over budget.

    What is TQM? asked 3×

    Ch 102+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q7 · 2076 Ashwin Q6 · 2075 Chaitra Q6a

    Total quality management (TQM) is an approach to project quality management that takes everything related to quality into consideration. The processes that produce the services are thoroughly managed, which minimises variation and gives a predictable quality level, and all members of the organisation take part in improving processes, products, services and the culture they work in.

    The three words: total, made up of the whole; quality, the degree of excellence a product or service provides; management, the act or art of handling, controlling and directing. In one line, it is an extensive, structured management approach focused on continuous improvement through continuous feedback. What makes it different is that quality is everybody's job, all the time, not one department's check at the end. Deming is its best known champion.

    The seven principles. Top management commitment; training needs; customer orientation; involvement of employees; corporate culture; tools and techniques; continuous improvement. Three C words, Customer, Culture, Continuous, and three T words, Top management, Training, Tools, with Involvement as the odd one.

    The basic approach, the principles put in order

    • Start from the customer: define quality as what the customer needs.
    • Top management commits: it sets the quality policy and funds it.
    • Train and involve everyone: each person improves their own work.
    • Manage by facts: measure the processes with the quality tools.
    • Improve continuously: small changes through the PDCA cycle, until quality is part of the culture.

    And how to run the effective meeting in the project? asked 3×

    Ch 113+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q8 · 2078 Bhadra Q8 · 2074 Ashwin Q7a

    Before organising a meeting, ask three questions: do you really need a meeting, who needs to attend, and how much time do you need. Then run it in eight steps.

    • Determine whether the meeting can be avoided. An email or a call may do.
    • Define the purpose and the intended outcome of the meeting.
    • Determine who should attend: only those needed for that outcome.
    • Provide an agenda to the participants before the meeting.
    • Prepare handouts, slides and visual aids ahead of time, and make the logistical arrangements.
    • Start the meeting on time.
    • Run it professionally: keep to the agenda, let everyone contribute, and record the decisions and the action items.
    • Build relationships with the attendees.

    After the meeting: send the minutes, with each action's owner and due date, within a day, and follow those actions up at the next meeting. A meeting whose actions are never followed up teaches people that meetings do not matter.

    Discuss about sources of risk in IT projects. asked 3×

    Ch 122+2 marks2081 Baishakh Q12 · 2080 Baishakh Q5a · 2070 Ashad CE 701 Q5

    The sources of risk in an IT project fall into five categories, and each category is really a question the project must answer.

    CategoryExamples in an ICT project
    Market riskA competitor releases first; the product is no longer wanted when it ships
    Financial riskThe budget is cut mid project; the exchange rate raises imported hardware costs; the client pays late
    Technology riskAn immature or obsolete platform; integration with a legacy system fails; performance targets cannot be met
    People riskA key developer resigns; skills are short; users do not adopt the system
    Structure or process riskUnclear requirements; no change control; a weak project manager in a functional organisation

    The slides' five sources, each with its question: technical risk, new, unproven or complex technology, what if it does not work; quality risk, the level of expectations, what if the quality measures are set too high; financial risk, the budget, what if the project goes over; project management risk, improper management, what if the time and resource allocation was wrong; and external risk, the things outside the project such as nature and politics.

    Risk conditions by knowledge area: integration, inadequate planning and poor resource allocation; scope, poor or incomplete definition of the work packages; time, errors in estimating or in determining the critical path; cost, estimating errors and inadequate contingency; quality, substandard design, materials or workmanship; human resources, poor conflict management and absence of leadership; communications, carelessness in planning and lack of consultation with key stakeholders; risk, ignoring risk or analysing it unclearly; procurement, unenforceable contract clauses and adversarial relations.

    For a Nepali ICT project, add unreliable power and connectivity, engineers leaving for jobs abroad mid project, and procurement delays under the Public Procurement Act.

    Describe about the cost estimating in project management and explain about the tools and techniques used for cost estimating. asked 2×

    Ch 93+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q9 · 2069 Chaitra Q9

    Cost estimating is the process of developing an approximation of the monetary resources needed to complete the project activities. It includes identifying and considering cost alternatives, and it belongs to planning. Before it comes resource planning, which predicts the future resource requirements from the project scope, using historical data, expert opinion and resource planning tools.

    The three types of estimate

    TypeWhenPurposeAccuracy
    Order of magnitude, roughThe very early stage, evaluation and planningAn idea of the general, total expenditure, without itemising by activity or deliverableminus 25 to plus 75 percent
    Budget, preliminaryWithin the actual planning stageA preliminary itemised list of expenditure, by the major componentsminus 10 to plus 25 percent
    Definitive, detailedOnce the work is known in detailMore accurate and more detailed than the other twominus 5 to plus 10 percent

    The later the estimate, the more is known, so the narrower the range; and the ranges are lopsided upward because costs are far more often underestimated than overestimated.

    The tools and techniques

    • Top down, or analogous. Compares the project with similar past projects and uses expert judgement. Quick, but less accurate than the others.
    • Bottom up. Activity based costing on the WBS: estimate each work component and roll the estimates up. More accurate and better for controlling cost, but it needs enough detail to exist.
    • Three point. A most likely, an optimistic and a pessimistic cost, combined by the PERT weighted average.
    • Parametric. A mathematical model, such as cost per line of code or per square metre. Like top down but formal, and best with good historical data. COCOMO is a parametric model.
    • Vendor bid analysis. Estimates the cost from what vendors actually bid.
    • Reserve analysis. Checks whether the remaining reserve is enough for the remaining risk.

    If time is short, explain the pair that matters: top down is fast, cheap and less accurate; bottom up is slow, detailed, accurate and good for control.

    Describe about the characteristics of a project and explain the role of feasibility study for the successful completion of a project. asked 2×

    Ch 12+2 marks2076 Chaitra Q1b · 2070 Chaitra Q1a

    The role of the feasibility study in the successful completion of a project is to test the idea against reality while it is still only an idea, so that the project that does go ahead is one that can be finished.

    • It stops money going into something that cannot work. It is the cheapest place to kill a bad project.
    • It sets realistic cost and time expectations before the budget and the deadline are fixed, which is what most overruns are traced back to.
    • It exposes technical, legal and market obstacles while they are still cheap to solve.
    • It gives the sponsor evidence for the go or no go decision, rather than enthusiasm.
    • It narrows the alternatives and picks a rational technology, so the team does not discover halfway through that another approach was needed.

    Its five areas of analysis are market, technical, financial, socio economic and ecological; the four types in the notes are technical, economic, operational and legal, to which most textbooks add schedule. TELOS.

    What are the major causes of failure of the ICT project? asked 2×

    Ch 12+3 marks2074 Ashwin Q3a · 2072 Chaitra Q2

    The single key reason ICT projects fail is poor project scope management; good scope management is the foundation of success. Around it sit the usual causes.

    • Improper requirement analysis, and requirements that then keep changing.
    • Poor project management, with poor planning and estimation.
    • Lack of executive level support.
    • No linkage to business strategy.
    • Wrong team members, too few of them or unskilled.
    • No measures to evaluate project success.
    • No risk management.
    • Inability to adapt to change.
    • Lack of control and visibility, which an intangible product makes worse.

    Surveys of IT projects, such as the Standish Group's CHAOS reports, find the same list: no user involvement, incomplete and changing requirements with scope creep, no top management support, unrealistic time frames and budgets, too few or unskilled people, immature technology, and poor communication.

    In Nepal add brain drain in the middle of a project, unreliable power and connectivity, procurement delays, and shifting government priorities.

    What do you mean by project development life cycle? asked 2×

    Ch 110 marks2075 Chaitra Q3 · 2074 Chaitra Q1a

    The project development life cycle is the logical sequence of activities through which a project is developed from an idea into a delivered and evaluated result. Each project has its own life, with a beginning and an end, and it is called a cycle because each stage builds on the stage before it and triggers the one after it.

    In the notes it has four phases: formulation, planning, implementation and termination. It is the same life that PMI names initiation, planning, execution and closure, with monitoring and controlling running throughout.

    Explain describing various part, phase, stage and activities of the project development life cycle. asked 2×

    Ch 110 marks2075 Chaitra Q3 · 2074 Chaitra Q1a

    The project development life cycle is read at four levels: the part, which is the broad half of the project, the phase, the stage inside a phase, and the activities that make up a stage.

    PhaseStagesActivities
    FormulationProject identification; project evaluationCollect creative ideas from the environment and from internal and external resources; identify constraints; fix the objective; pre feasibility study and prototype design; develop the proposal
    PlanningFeasibility study; appraisal and estimationTechnical, economic, market, management and environmental analysis; judge the chance of success; compare with similar projects; develop the requirements and the implementation plan for time, cost and quality
    ImplementationExecution; monitoring and controlForm the team; carry out the activities; the manager monitors and supervises; inspection and testing from time to time; regular progress review
    TerminationOperation and evaluation; handoverReview the outcome and the results; return to an earlier phase if required; hand over to the client; release the resources; evaluate success

    The first two phases are the formulation part, where the project is decided on paper and is still cheap to change, and the last two are the execution part, where the money is spent.

    What is the role of Project Management and also explain the recommended skills for all project managers as well as ICT project managers. asked 2×

    Ch 24 marks2078 Bhadra Q1c · 2070 Chaitra Q1b

    The project manager holds overall responsibility for the success of the project and keeps perspective on the whole of it, while everyone else works on a part.

    • Responsibility. Overall responsibility for project success.
    • Planning. Develops and maintains the detailed project plan, and delivers on time against it.
    • Scope and progress. Manages the scope, and monitors progress and performance.
    • Coordination. Coordinates partners and working groups, and resolves cross functional issues.
    • People. Recruits the project staff, and manages resource use and performance.
    • Issues. Records and manages project issues.
    • Standards. Sets and maintains the project's standards and policies.
    • Stakeholders. Builds a win win situation for everyone with an interest in the project.

    The role is normally filled by a senior manager or a general manager.

    Describe the need of Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) and explain success criteria for projects. asked 2×

    Ch 32+2 marks2081 Baishakh Q4 · 2079 Baishakh Q4

    Success criteria are the measures by which a project is judged a success. The notes split them into two families: the technical ones, which are tangible and quantitative, and the people ones, which are intangible and qualitative.

    Technical: tangible, quantitativePeople: intangible, qualitative
    Deadlines metCommitment
    Performance specifications metCooperative attitude
    Quality standards metPositive image and total project focus
    Cost requirements metRisk evaluation
    Resource constraints respected

    Obstacles to project success: poor project planning and direction; insufficient communication; no change, risk, financial or performance management system; failure to coordinate with the stakeholders; ineffective involvement of management; lack of skilled team members; and poor or missing technology and tools.

    Describe the drivers for the project success and factor that slowing the project the project success in detail. asked 2×

    Ch 32+2 marks2078 Bhadra Q2a · 2070 Chaitra Q2b

    Inhibitors are the conditions that slow a project down or sink it, and almost every one of them is a driver turned upside down.

    • Communication and leadership: poor communication, lack of leadership, lack of teamwork.
    • Goals: unclear expectations, conflicting objectives, changing business strategies.
    • Planning and analysis: poor up front planning, a poor feasibility study, poor requirement analysis.
    • Support: poor top management support, and an inbuilt negative attitude towards IT.
    • Resources: inadequate resources, financial limitations, lack of historical data.
    Driver of successThe inhibitor that mirrors it
    Top management supportPoor top management support
    Clear goals and objectivesUnclear expectations, conflicting objectives
    Client supportFailure to coordinate with stakeholders
    Realistic planPoor up front planning, poor feasibility study
    Appropriate resources, the four M'sInadequate resources, financial limitations
    OwnershipInbuilt negative attitude towards IT
    Formal methodologyLack of historical data, poor requirement analysis
    Hard working, focused staffLack of teamwork
    Standard, structured ICT infrastructureChanging business strategies
    Effective communicationPoor communication
    Experienced project managerLack of leadership, lack of skilled team members

    Explain the role and responsibility of key project member. asked 2×

    Ch 41+4 marks2074 Ashwin Q2b · 2071 Chaitra Q2b

    A project team is a group of people performing activities to accomplish a common goal, made of skilled workers from various domains, and a successful one needs the right combination of skills, abilities and personality types. No project moves in the required direction without each of its key members.

    • Project sponsor. Assures the availability of essential resources and approves the budget; leads the project board and has the power to make decisions and settle disputes; rallies support from stakeholders and executive management. Most involved during initiation and planning. Typically the executive director or the director of finance.
    • Project manager. Carries overall responsibility for success and keeps perspective; develops and maintains the detailed plan and delivers against it; recruits staff and coordinates partners and working groups; records and manages issues, resolves cross functional issues and manages scope; monitors progress and performance, manages resource use, and sets the project's standards and policies; makes sure every stakeholder gains. Typically a senior manager or a general manager.
    • Functional manager. Provides the support services the project needs, including purchases, and manages the human resources and administration of the performing organisation. In IT projects the finance manager often does this job.
    • Project team member. Contributes to the overall objectives, completes the individual deliverables and provides expertise; works with users to establish the business needs and documents the process.
    • System administrator. Handles data migration, interfaces with other systems, reporting configuration and deployment, and the set up and maintenance of security; develops and runs technical testing programs and contributes to technical strategy, policy and procedures.
    • Project champion. Focuses attention on the project from the technical perspective; someone with a great deal of technical expertise and industry knowledge, such as the technical manager, the CTO or a technical lead.

    In one line each: the sponsor pays, the project manager runs, the functional manager supports, the team member builds, the system administrator keeps the systems, and the champion champions it.

    Explain project management context as per PMI. asked 2×

    Ch 45 marks2080 Bhadra Q4 · 2074 Ashwin Q2b

    As per PMI, the project management context is that a project is subdivided into phases, initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling and closing, in order to decrease uncertainty. Each phase is marked by the completion of one or more deliverables, and the phases together make up the project life cycle.

    The three terms it is built on

    • Project phase: a division of the project made so that uncertainty falls; each phase ends when one or more deliverables are complete.
    • Deliverable: a tangible, visible, verifiable work product, such as a feasibility report, a design document or working code.
    • Project life cycle: a rational collection of project phases, with a definite beginning and end, linking the project to the ongoing operations of the performing organisation.

    Stage gates, also called phase exits or kill points, sit at the end of each phase. Management reviews the key deliverables and the project performance, and decides whether the project continues into its next phase, correcting errors if required. A project that no longer makes sense is killed there, cheaply, instead of failing later and expensively.

    PhaseGate decision after itDeliverables
    ConceptIdea approvalPreliminary cost estimates; primary WBS
    DevelopmentCarry onBudgetary cost estimates; complete WBS
    ImplementationContinue, or kill the projectDefinitive cost estimates; performance report
    ClosureThe project endsLessons learned; customer acceptance

    Notice that the estimates sharpen phase by phase, preliminary to budgetary to definitive. That is uncertainty falling, which is exactly what the phases are for. In the PMBOK Guide the context has five parts: project phases and the life cycle, project stakeholders, organisational influences, key general management skills, and social, economic and environmental influences.

    What is a Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC)? Define and explain its role in ICT project management. asked 2×

    Ch 42+2 marks2076 Chaitra Q1c · 2069 Chaitra Q4

    The software development life cycle (SDLC) is the process used by the software industry to design, develop and test high quality software. It aims to produce software that meets or exceeds customer expectations and reaches completion within the time and cost estimates. The syllabus also calls it the IT product development life cycle.

    The six stages

    • Planning and requirement analysis. The most important and fundamental stage: plan the basic approach and study the product's feasibility in the economic, operational and technical areas, the technical study picking the approach with the minimum risk.
    • Defining requirements. Define and document the product requirements and get the customer's approval, in the software requirement specification (SRS).
    • Designing the product architecture. The design approach defines the architecture models of the product.
    • Developing the product. Development starts and the developers write the code for the modules.
    • Testing the product. The code is compiled into a build and tested; defects are reported, tracked, fixed and retested until the product meets the quality standards in the SRS.
    • Deployment. The tested product is released, feedback is taken, and it is then maintained for the existing customers.

    Its role in ICT project management

    • Structure. It breaks the work into phases in a fixed order, so the project can be planned, estimated and scheduled phase by phase.
    • Control points. Every phase ends in deliverables the next phase needs, which gives natural points to review, approve and monitor progress.
    • Scope control. Requirements are written in the SRS and approved by the customer before design, so everyone builds the same thing.
    • Lower risk. The feasibility study in the first stage chooses the approach with the minimum risk before money is spent.
    • Quality. Testing against the SRS continues until the quality standards are met.
    • The triple constraint. Its stated aim is software that meets customer expectations within the time and cost estimates.
    • Coordination and afterlife. Developers, testers and managers share one map of the work, and deployment and maintenance are planned rather than improvised.

    Keep the distinction: the SDLC is the framework, and a methodology carries it out. Waterfall, iterative and incremental, agile and lean are methodologies, not life cycles.

    Compare: Functional vs. Matrix organizational structure asked 2×

    Ch 54x4 marks2076 Chaitra Q5 · 2075 Chaitra Q5

    A functional structure groups people by specialisation and runs projects inside departments; a matrix lays project lines across those departments, so each person answers to both a functional and a project manager.

    FunctionalMatrix
    BasisGrouped by specialisationFunctions plus projects cutting across them
    ReportingVertical, within the departmentVertical and horizontal: two bosses
    Project manager's authorityLittle or noneLow in a weak matrix to high in a strong one
    Project manager's rolePart time coordinatorPart time in a weak matrix, full time in a balanced or strong one
    BudgetFunctional managerFunctional manager, mixed, or project manager, by type
    ResourcesStay inside one departmentShared efficiently across projects
    CommunicationWithin departmentsAcross boundaries
    Decisions and changeSlow, up the functional lineBalanced, flexible, fast response to change
    CostLow, with no duplicationHigh, with many managers
    Main problemMultiple functional heads and weak project authorityDual reporting: confusion and conflict
    Best forRoutine work and single department projectsSeveral projects sharing scarce specialists

    Show different types of matrix organizational structure. asked 2×

    Ch 54 marks2080 Baishakh Q2b · 2072 Kartik Q2c

    There are three types of matrix, and they differ only in how much authority the project manager holds against the functional manager. Show means draw all three charts, then give a line on each.

    • Weak matrix. The project manager is really a project coordinator with limited authority who facilitates the project. The functional manager assigns the work and the project manager negotiates for it. The project manager works part time and 0 to 25 percent of staff are on the project.
    • Balanced matrix. Power is balanced between the two. The project manager assigns staff to the project according to its needs and the functional manager provides all the support. The project manager is full time and 15 to 60 percent of staff are on the project.
    • Strong matrix. Close to a projectized organisation: full time project managers with considerable authority and full time project administrative staff. The project manager rules, though the members still sit under functional managers, and 50 to 95 percent of staff are on the project.

    How to draw each one. Put the functional managers along the top and the project managers down the side in every chart. In the weak chart, the boxes are solid under the functional managers and the coordinator's line to them is dotted. In the balanced chart, one project manager sits inside a function and shares the team. In the strong chart, the project managers have their own row reporting to a manager of project managers, and they draw solid lines to the staff.

    Discuss how each type influences project management practices and outcomes, providing specific examples. asked 2×

    Ch 52+4 marks2081 Bhadra Q2b · 2074 Ashwin Q3a

    The structure is the frame the project is built in: it is the top level view of the structure of ownership and the main line of reporting order, and above all it sets how much authority the project manager has. Whatever that authority, the project manager still needs a disciplined and definite approach.

    Project characteristicFunctionalWeak matrixBalanced matrixStrong matrixProjectized
    Project manager's authorityLittle or noneLimitedLow to moderateModerate to highHigh to almost total
    Resource availabilityLittle or noneLowLow to moderateModerate to highHigh to almost total
    Who manages the budgetFunctional managerFunctional managerMixedProject managerProject manager
    Team members on the projectVirtually none0 to 25 percent15 to 60 percent50 to 95 percent85 to 100 percent
    Project manager's rolePart timePart timeFull timeFull timeFull time
    Common titleProject coordinator or leaderProject coordinator or leaderProject manager or officerProject or program managerProject or program manager

    How each type shapes practice, with examples

    • Functional. The project manager is a part time coordinator and decisions travel up the functional line. Example: the finance department upgrades its accounting software with its own staff. Outcome: strong specialist quality, but any work needing other departments is slow.
    • Weak matrix. Staff come from several departments, but the coordinator must negotiate for every hour of their time. Example: a bank's IT and marketing staff build a mobile app part time. Outcome: cheap, but it slips whenever the departments' own work comes first.
    • Balanced matrix. The project manager plans and assigns the work and the functional managers supply the people. Example: a software company runs several client projects that share its testers and database experts. Outcome: specialists used efficiently, but two boss conflicts need settling.
    • Strong matrix. A full time project manager with budget control borrows specialists. Example: a telecom operator rolls out a new billing system. Outcome: fast decisions, while staff keep a functional home.
    • Projectized. The project manager has a dedicated team and full authority. Example: a contractor builds a hydropower plant, or an IT firm runs a years long national ID system. Outcome: focus and speed, but duplicated facilities and job insecurity at the end.

    What changes with the structure: authority and decision speed, how resources are obtained, who controls the budget, the communication lines, the team's motivation and career path, and the kind of conflict the project manager has to handle.

    Give the example of two processes with necessary inputs, tools and techniques and outputs. asked 2×

    Ch 64 marks2070 Chaitra Q3a · 2070 Ashad Q7

    Two processes, each named with its process group and its knowledge area, and set out as inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs.

    ProcessInputsTools and techniquesOutputs
    Cost estimating
    planning group, cost management
    Project scope statement; WBS; project management plan, including the schedule management plan, the human resource management plan and the risk register; enterprise environmental factors; organisational process assetsExpert judgement; analogous, parametric, bottom up and three point estimating; reserve analysis; cost of quality; project management software; vendor bid analysis; group decision making techniquesActivity cost estimates; basis of estimates; project document updates
    Cost control
    monitoring and controlling group, cost management
    Project management plan; project funding requirements; work performance data; organisational process assetsEarned value management; forecasting; performance reviews; project management softwareWork performance information; cost forecasts; change requests; project management plan updates; project document updates; organisational process asset updates

    Any two will do as long as each is named with its group and area: scope definition, cost budgeting, quality planning, perform quality control, communications planning and manage stakeholders are all set out the same way.

    Describe the need of monitoring, evaluation and controlling process and explain its importance with suitable example of the local project. asked 2×

    Ch 72+3 marks2079 Baishakh Q8 · 2070 Ashad CE 701 Q4a

    Monitoring asks what is happening, evaluation asks whether the project is achieving its purpose and was worth doing, and controlling decides what to do about the difference. Together they are how a plan becomes a result rather than a document.

    MonitoringEvaluationControlling
    AsksWhat is happening?Is it achieving its purpose, and was it worth it?What do we do about it?
    TimingContinuousAt milestones, mid term and at the endWhenever a variance appears
    Looks atInputs, activities and outputs, against the planOutcomes, relevance, efficiency, impactDeviations from the baseline
    ProducesProgress data and status reportsAn evaluation report and lessonsCorrective actions and change requests

    Why they are needed

    • Early warning. Problems with time, cost, quality or scope show while they are still cheap to fix.
    • Control of the triple constraint. Actual work is compared with the baselines, so the project stays within time and budget.
    • Accountability. Payments, reports and decisions rest on measured progress, not on claims.
    • Better decisions. Forecasts tell managers and sponsors whether to continue, change or stop.
    • Stakeholder confidence. Regular, honest reporting keeps the sponsor, the funders and the community informed.
    • Learning. Evaluation records what worked, for this project and for later ones.

    The project control cycle: plan, setting the baseline and the measures; measure, recording the actual progress; compare, calculating the variance between planned and actual; correct, taking remedial action and updating the plan if needed; then measure again. Draw it as a closed loop.

    A local example: a municipal drinking water project. Monitoring: the site engineer records monthly progress, metres of pipe laid, tanks built and money spent, against the schedule and the bill of quantities. Controlling: when pipe laying falls behind in the monsoon, a second crew is added in the dry season, and payments are released only against measured work. Evaluation: a mid term evaluation with the users' committee checks whether households actually get water, and the final evaluation asks whether the scheme improved health and saved families time. Without them, delays and cost overruns stay hidden until the budget runs out, and nobody knows whether the scheme met its purpose.

    Define project quality. asked 2×

    Ch 102+3 marks2081 Baishakh Q9 · 2069 Chaitra Q10

    Quality is how good something is compared with other similar things: its degree of excellence. In a project it is measured against what was required, so it is a ratio.

    Performance or Result Quality = ----------------------------- Expectations or Requirements

    Three standard meanings: the totality of features and characteristics of a product or service that bear on its ability to satisfy stated or implied needs; fitness for use, meaning the product can be used as it was intended; and conformance to requirements, meaning it meets its written specification.

    What project quality means: giving customers what they want; meeting the standards and specifications agreed with the customer; a predictable degree of reliability and uniformity; and a suitable price for the product or service.

    Project quality management is all the activities of the overall management function that determine the quality policy, objectives and responsibilities, and implement them through quality planning, quality control, quality assurance and quality improvement. Its purpose is to ensure the project satisfies the needs for which it was undertaken, and the tenet of modern quality management is that quality is achieved by planning it into the project, not inspecting it in at the end.

    The three C's of quality: commitment from the top down, competence to deliver it, and communication so that everyone knows what the standard is. Quality is not the same as grade: a basic, low grade product that meets its requirements is still high quality.

    Compare: Formal versus informal communication asked 2×

    Ch 114x4 marks2082 Baishakh Q3 · 2076 Ashwin Q7

    Formal communication travels along the official channel and is mostly written; informal communication travels along relationships and is mostly spoken.

    Formal communicationInformal communication
    ChannelOfficial, along the organisation chartUnofficial, along relationships: the grapevine
    FormMostly written: reports, minutes, memos, contractsMostly spoken: conversation, chat, corridor talk
    RecordDocumented and traceableUsually no record
    SpeedSlowerFaster
    ReliabilityHigh, because it can be checkedLower: distortion builds up as it passes on
    Use it forDecisions, approvals, contracts, anything you may need to proveQuick coordination, early warning, building trust

    The notes put it in one line: formal means a project report, informal means face to face. A project needs both, and the keys to good communication say to mix them deliberately.

    Compare: Horizontal versus vertical communication asked 2×

    Ch 114x4 marks2081 Bhadra Q5 · 2073 Shrawan Q8

    Vertical communication runs up and down the hierarchy; horizontal communication runs across, between peers. Vertical is usually the more formal of the two, and upward communication is the most formal of all, because it goes to someone with authority over the sender.

    Vertical communicationHorizontal communication
    DirectionUp and down the hierarchyAcross, between peers at the same level
    CarriesDownward: instructions, goals, policy, feedback. Upward: status, problems, suggestionsCoordination, sharing information, solving problems together
    PurposeControl and directionCoordination and cooperation
    Degree of formalnessMore formal, upward most of allLess formal: peers talk directly and often informally
    RiskFiltering: bad news is softened at each level on the way upCan bypass managers, who then lose sight of decisions
    ExampleThe project manager assigns a sprint goal; a lead reports a slipped milestoneThe development lead and the testing lead agree a release date

    The consequence for a project manager: because upward communication is filtered, problems must be gone looking for rather than waited for.

    Discuss the communication management plan that should be considered for ICT projects. asked 2×

    Ch 115 marks2070 Chaitra Q4b · 2069 Chaitra Q11

    The communication management plan is the document that guides project communications. It is an output of communications planning and part of the project management plan, and every project needs one.

    What it provides

    • The stakeholder communication requirements.
    • The information to be communicated.
    • Who is responsible for communicating it, and who receives it.
    • The frequency, such as weekly, and a schedule for producing the information.
    • The access methods for obtaining the information.
    • A collection and filing structure for gathering and storing information, and a distribution structure saying what goes to whom, when and how.
    • A format for communicating key project information.
    • A method for updating the plan as the project progresses, and the stakeholder communications analysis.
    StakeholderDocumentFormatContactDue
    Campus chief, the sponsorMonthly status reportHard copy, and a meetingProject managerFirst of each month
    Exam section staff, the usersRelease notes, training plan Email, workshopBusiness analystEach release
    Development teamTask status, decisionsDaily stand up, issue trackerTeam leadDaily
    Hosting vendorService requirements, incidentsEmail, phone for urgent issuesProject managerAs needed

    For an ICT project, add: which channel carries which message, with stand ups for coordination, written reports for decisions and face to face for conflict; how technical status is translated for non technical stakeholders; an escalation rule saying who is told and when if an issue cannot be solved at the lower level; and a glossary of the project's terms.

    Describe the various tools and techniques used for performance reporting of a project execution process. asked 2×

    Ch 115 marks2081 Baishakh Q11 · 2071 Chaitra Q6

    Performance reporting is collecting and disseminating performance information, to keep the stakeholders informed about how resources are being used to achieve the project objectives. It includes the latest status reports, the progress reports and the forecasting, covering scope, schedule, cost and quality as well as risks and coming procurement issues.

    Its tools and techniques

    • Information presentation tools: software for tables, Gantt charts, S curves, histograms and dashboards.
    • Performance information gathering and compilation: collecting the actual progress, cost and quality data from the team and the systems.
    • Status review meetings: regular meetings to exchange and review project information.
    • Time reporting systems: recording the time spent on each task.
    • Cost reporting systems: recording the costs incurred.
    • The techniques behind the reports: earned value analysis, with its variances, CPI, SPI and EAC; the S curve; and variance and trend analysis against the baseline.

    Common report types are Gantt charts, S curves, histograms and tables. Its inputs are work performance information, performance measurements, forecasted completion, quality control measurements, the project management plan and its performance measurement baseline, approved change requests and the deliverables; its outputs are the performance reports, forecasts, recommended corrective actions, updated process assets and requested changes.

    Short note: Delphi Technique asked 2×

    Ch 122x4 marks2075 Ashwin Q9 · 2070 Ashad Q13

    Both collect risks from a group, and they differ in when the people hear each other.

    • Brainstorming is a group generating ideas about a problem by collecting them without thinking and judgment: quantity first, judgment later. It is fast, and it builds on other people's ideas, but it must not be overused, because it can lead to groupthink and to fewer ideas rather than more. The loudest voice and the most senior person can dominate.
    • The Delphi technique is like brainstorming, except that the experts need not meet and stay anonymous, so email is enough. Each answers a questionnaire, a facilitator summarises the views and sends the summary round again, and the rounds continue until the views converge. It removes the pressure of rank and personality, but it is slow and it depends on an honest facilitator.
    • The nominal group technique sits between them: each person writes alone first, then the group discusses, which keeps most of the independence at meeting speed.

    In risk management both are used in risk identification: brainstorming to open the list quickly with the project team, Delphi where the question needs outside experts, or where seniority would distort the answer, such as estimating the chance that a technology will fail.

    Compare: Qualitative versus quantitative risk assessment asked 2×

    Ch 124x4 marks2082 Baishakh Q3 · 2078 Bhadra Q3

    Qualitative risk analysis evaluates the impact and likelihood of the identified risks and prioritises them on qualitative factors alone. Quantitative risk analysis determines numerically the probability of each risk and its consequences for the project objectives. The first ranks everything; the second measures only what the first ranked high.

    Qualitative risk analysisQuantitative risk analysis
    What it isEvaluating the impact and possibility of identified risksDetermining numerically the probability of each risk and its consequences
    ScopePrioritises all risks by their potential effectDeals only with the risks marked for further analysis by qualitative analysis
    MathematicsComplex, because there is no straightforward mathsDirect calculating methods and tools make it simple
    TimeTime consuming: each risk is identified, recorded and rankedLess time consuming, because tools are used
    EaseEasy to use: no tool neededReliance on tools can make it hard for the team
    WhenAll projects, whatever their complexityOnly complex projects
    ToolsProbability and impact matrix, Top Ten Risk Item Tracking, expert judgmentRisk exposure, decision trees and EMV, Monte Carlo simulation, sensitivity analysis

    Why risk response planning is important in project? asked 2×

    Ch 122+3 marks2075 Ashwin Q8a · 2074 Chaitra Q6a

    Risk response planning is important because analysis alone changes nothing: a known risk with no response is still a surprise when it happens.

    • It lowers total risk and improves the chance of meeting the project goals.
    • It prepares the action in advance, so the team reacts to a trigger at once instead of improvising in a crisis.
    • It assigns ownership and money: every risk gets an owner and, where needed, a reserve.
    • It captures opportunities, not only threats, so a favourable event is exploited rather than missed.
    • It is what turns the register into management. Identification and analysis produce a list; response planning produces decisions.

    Explain different types of Risk and illustrate the Risk management model with block diagram according to PMI Project Risk Management process. asked 2×

    Ch 127 marks2072 Kartik Q6 · 2070 Ashad Q16

    Risks are classified on two different axes: where the risk comes from, and how knowable it is.

    By source

    • Project risk: from the technical aspect of the work or the work product.
    • Process risk: from the formation and processes of the project, or the methodology used.
    • Product or technical risk: affects quality, performance, or whether the product can be implemented at all.
    • Business risk: affects the organisation developing or procuring the software.

    By how knowable it is

    • Known risks: easily uncovered.
    • Predictable risks: extrapolated from past project experience.
    • Unpredictable risks: may or may not occur, and are extremely difficult to identify.

    The distinction matters in practice: known risks get a response plan, while unpredictable ones need a reserve, because a risk that cannot be named cannot be planned for.

    Short note: Tornado analysis asked 2×

    Ch 124x3 marks2078 Bhadra Q8 · 2070 Chaitra Q9

    A tornado diagram is the picture of a sensitivity analysis: a special bar chart with one horizontal bar per uncertain variable, arranged from the largest swing at the top to the smallest at the bottom, so that the shape looks like a tornado.

    • The axes. The vertical axis lists the variables at their base values; the horizontal axis shows how far each one swings the result when it is moved between its low and its high value.
    • What it is for: comparing the relative importance of variables that carry a high degree of uncertainty.
    • How it is read: the variables at the top matter most, so that is where management attention, further analysis and risk responses belong. The narrow bars at the bottom can be ignored.
    • Where it fits: quantitative risk analysis, alongside risk exposure, decision trees and Monte Carlo simulation.

    Compare: Tender vs. quotation process asked 2×

    Ch 134x4 marks2076 Ashwin Q7 · 2072 Chaitra Q9

    A quotation asks a few suppliers for prices on items already defined in detail; a tender is a formal, publicly advertised invitation for sealed bids against full bidding documents.

    QuotationTender
    What it isA request for prices from suppliers, for items defined in detailA publicly advertised invitation for sealed bids against full documents
    ValueLow or medium value purchasesHigh value purchases, and public money above the thresholds
    Who is invitedA few known suppliers, or a short open noticeAnyone qualified, through a public notice
    DocumentsA short specification and a price formNotice, instructions to bidders, conditions of contract, bill of quantities, specifications, forms
    SecurityUsually none, or smallBid security and performance security
    Opening and evaluationSimple comparison, mostly on pricePublic opening, a responsiveness check, then evaluation
    Time and costQuick and cheapSlow and costly to run
    TransparencyLowerHigh: published criteria, public opening, records

    Why custom processes need for IT projects? asked 2×

    Ch 145 marks2081 Baishakh Q13 · 2075 Chaitra Q7

    Each project is unique, so an organisation's project management processes usually need to be tailored to ensure success. IT projects need custom processes for seven reasons.

    • The customer's role is dominant.
    • The environment is more dynamic.
    • Tasks are mental, unique and complex.
    • Society is more democratic and educated.
    • Individuals have higher aspirations and expectations.
    • The government's role is less clear, and its performance more closely scrutinised.
    • Sources of knowledge are different: the knowledge is tacit, held by the practitioner.

    Tailoring is adjusting project activities to reflect the uniqueness of the project while keeping the project's goal in mind. What shapes it: the external environment, its unpredictability and the customer; the objectives and constraints, including ambiguity, strategic importance, required speed, funding and contract type; the task, its innovation, size, duration and interdependence; and the organisation and people, its structure and culture, top management support, the project leader and the team.

    The multi-pass model is a customised SDLC: not a full development method, but the iterative and incremental model and the agile model merged. Outline the initial requirements, focus on the mission critical issues and develop a proof of concept, the agile way; sort out the major requirements, prioritise them by business need and develop an initial stable solution, the iterative way; increase the client's involvement and develop more functional solutions, the agile way; then finalise the requirements, enhance the design, develop the complete solution and test rigorously, the iterative way.

    The barriers to implementing tailored project management: lack of sustained top management commitment; insufficient training in integrated project management; lack of planning and of resources; lessons learned and good practice not shared across projects; the not invented here syndrome; poor incentives or award criteria; and over extended reviews.

    Why do it? asked 2×

    Ch 151+2 marks2080 Baishakh Q3c · 2079 Bhadra Q10b

    A balanced scorecard is used because financial results alone report the past and cannot be acted on in time. It translates the strategy into measures across all four perspectives, so that people can act on it before the financial numbers move.

    What it is for

    • To achieve the strategic objectives.
    • To provide quality with fewer resources.
    • To eliminate non value added effort.
    • To align customer priorities and expectations.
    • To track progress, and to evaluate process changes.
    • To improve continually, and to increase accountability.

    Its three uses: to bring the strategy to life, so people across the company can make decisions with it; to communicate the strategy across the organisation, with the strategy map printed, put on the intranet, shared with partners and published; and to track strategic performance through monthly, quarterly and annual reports.

    Why it matters in a large organisation. In a large organisation the strategy set at the top rarely reaches the people doing the work, and each department improves its own numbers at the expense of the whole. The scorecard translates the strategy into measures every unit can act on, communicates it across the organisation, and, by reporting all four perspectives together, stops one department improving its figure by damaging another's. It also makes managers accountable for leading indicators, not only for last quarter's results.

    The strategy focused organisation states its mission, what we do, its vision, what we aspire to be, its strategies, how we reach our goals, and its measures, the indicators of our progress. Its five principles are: translate the strategy into operational terms; align the organisation to the strategy; make strategy everyone's job; make strategy a continual process; and mobilise change through executive leadership.

    Define "Program" in the context of project management. How does it differ from project and portfolio? Discuss its role in achieving strategic objectives of the project. asked 1×

    Ch 33+3 marks2082 Bhadra Q2a

    A program is a group of related projects managed in a coordinated way to obtain benefits and control that are not available from managing them individually, and it may include work that lies outside those projects. A national digital government program, for example, may contain an e passport project, a national ID project and an online payment project, managed together because they share data and infrastructure.

    ProjectProgramPortfolio
    What it isOne temporary, unique endeavourA group of related projectsAll projects, programs and processes
    FocusDeliver a defined outputDeliver combined benefitsMeet strategic objectives
    ScopeNarrow and fixedWider, evolves with the benefitsOrganisation wide
    TimeIts own life, then it closesSeveral project livesContinuous
    Success measured byOn time, on budget, to specificationBenefits realisedReturn on the whole investment
    Managed byProject managerProgram managerPortfolio manager or the PMO
    The question it asksAre we doing this right?Are these pulling together?Are we doing the right things?

    Its role in achieving strategic objectives

    • Translates strategy into projects. It takes one strategic goal from the portfolio and breaks it into the set of projects that together deliver it.
    • Manages interdependencies. Shared data, infrastructure and deadlines are coordinated, so the projects neither block nor duplicate each other.
    • Shares resources. People, budget and vendors move between projects to where they add the most value.
    • Realises benefits. It measures and delivers the business benefit, which no single project can do on its own.
    • Controls program level risk and governance. One board, one set of standards, one escalation path.
    • Keeps alignment. When the strategy changes, projects are added, reshaped or stopped at program level.

    What is difference between communication skills and communication management? asked 1×

    Ch 112+4 marks2072 Chaitra Q7

    A communication skill is a personal ability; communication management is a set of project processes. One belongs to a person, the other to the project.

    Communication skillCommunication management
    What it isA personal ability: speaking, writing, listening, presenting, persuadingA set of project processes: planning, distribution, performance reporting, closure
    Belongs toA personThe project
    QuestionCan this person get a message across, and understand others?Does the right information reach the right people at the right time?
    Built byPractice, training, feedbackThe communication management plan, reports, meetings, systems
    Without the otherA skilled speaker with no plan: information still misses peopleA perfect plan run by someone who cannot listen: messages arrive but are not understood

    How communication skill helps resolve conflict in an ICT project

    • Active listening: finds what each side actually needs, behind what it demands.
    • Separating the people from the problem: talk about the issue, not the person, which lowers the heat.
    • Asking questions instead of asserting: brings the underlying interests out.
    • Choosing the medium: conflict is handled face to face, never by email.
    • Confirming the agreement in writing, so it does not flare up again.
    • Using the right conflict mode: confronting or problem solving is best because it removes the cause; then compromising and smoothing; forcing wins but damages the relationship; withdrawing settles nothing.

    An example. The developers and the testers of an MIS blame each other for a late release: the testers say builds arrive broken, the developers say bug reports are vague. The project manager meets both leads together, listens to each, and restates the real problem: there is no agreed definition of a testable build and no bug report template. They agree both, and the manager confirms it by email. The conflict ends because its cause was found through communication, not because one side won.

    How to manage the contract closure processes smoothly as per PMI procurement management? asked 1×

    Ch 133+2 marks2081 Bhadra Q7

    Contract closure is managed smoothly by preparing for it at the beginning, not at the end.

    • Write the acceptance criteria and the closing requirements into the contract from the start, so there is nothing to argue about later.
    • Accept deliverables progressively, not all at the end, so defects are found while the seller is still working.
    • Keep complete records of changes, correspondence and payments throughout.
    • Settle claims by negotiation before they harden into disputes.
    • Run the procurement audit, then give formal written notice of closure.

    How it differs from project closing

    Contract closureProject closing
    ClosesOne agreement with one sellerThe whole project, or a phase
    How manyOne for each contract: a project may have manyOne
    Main workVerify the deliverables against the contract, settle claims, make the final payment, release the securities, give formal written noticeFinal acceptance by the customer, handover to operations, release of the team and resources, archiving, lessons learned
    NatureContractual and legalOrganisational and administrative
    OrderComes first: every contract is closed before the projectComes last, after every contract is closed
    ToolsProcurement audits, negotiated settlements, records managementClosing reviews, the final report, administrative closure

    Why the order matters: an open contract is an open liability, and the project cannot be closed while a seller can still claim, or be owed, money.

    A project manager can modify three basic elements of a software project: the resources available, the time available and the amount of product to be built. asked 1×

    Ch 16 marks2072 Chaitra Q4

    The three elements a software manager can modify, the resources available, the time available and the amount of product to be built, are the triple constraint in software words: resources are cost, time is schedule, and the amount of product is scope. Quality sits in the middle, so quality is protected by moving these three deliberately rather than letting one of them squeeze testing.

    • Amount of product, the most effective lever. Prioritise the features as must, should and could, and build the essential ones properly. Move the rest to a later release and deliver in fully tested increments. Control scope creep through change control so that testing time is not eaten. Cut features, never testing.
    • Time available. Extend the deadline where it can be extended, so design reviews, code reviews and testing survive. Build schedule buffers, plan testing as an activity of its own, and iterate so that defects are found early, when they are cheap to fix.
    • Resources available. Add skilled people early, especially testers and experienced reviewers; add better tools, such as automated testing, continuous integration, static analysis and version control; and train the team. Remember Brooks's law: adding people to a late software project makes it later, because of training and communication overhead.

    The balance. If scope is fixed and time is cut, add resources early. If resources are fixed, cut scope or extend time. What must never happen is that all three stay fixed and testing shrinks, because then quality absorbs the whole shortfall without anybody deciding that it should.

    Explain any one of its kind that you prefer in developing an IT project. asked 1×

    Ch 42+5 marks2069 Chaitra Q4

    For a typical ICT project I prefer agile, and the justification is in the project's own features rather than in taste.

    • Requirements move. Clients on an ICT project rarely know every requirement at the start, and agile suits fixed or changing requirements equally.
    • Early, visible progress. A working product every one to three weeks, shown to the customer, so a misunderstanding surfaces in weeks rather than at handover.
    • Lower risk. Each short iteration tests the riskiest part first, instead of leaving integration to the end.
    • Lean on resources and easy to manage, with flexibility for the developers.

    How it works: the product is broken into small incremental builds delivered in iterations of one to three weeks; cross functional teams work simultaneously on planning, requirements analysis, design, coding, unit testing and acceptance testing; and a working product is shown to the customer and the important stakeholders at the end of each iteration.

    Know its limits, and say so, because it earns marks: agile needs an involved, clear customer, and it needs some documentation for maintenance. For a small system with fixed, well understood requirements, waterfall is the better choice.

    Most of the project follows functional organizational structure. asked 1×

    Ch 54 marks2069 Chaitra Q5

    Agree, with a qualification. By number, most projects are run inside functional organisations, but the structure suits only some of them.

    Why most projects are functional

    • Most organisations exist for operations, not projects. Banks, hospitals, ministries and factories are organised by function, so their projects arise inside departments.
    • No new structure is needed. The project uses the existing departments, so there is no extra cost and no duplication of work.
    • Specialists are already grouped, which gives deep expertise, clear job descriptions and career paths, and better control and supervision.
    • Many projects are small and internal. A payroll upgrade in human resources, or a new course in a college department, fits naturally inside one function.
    • It is the common form in Nepal. Government offices and most private firms are functional, so their projects follow the same structure.

    The qualification. Cross functional projects suffer: the project manager has little or no authority, decisions are slow, and work that crosses departments meets multiple command. So large or fast changing projects, most ICT projects among them, move to a matrix or to a dedicated project team. Most projects do follow the functional structure, and it is the right choice for small, single department projects; for cross functional ones it is followed out of habit, not because it is best.

    What are different diagrams/methods that can be used to sequence activities in the project? asked 1×

    Ch 85 marks2070 Ashad Q9

    Activity sequencing is the process of identifying and documenting the relationships among the project activities, that is, reviewing the activities and determining their dependencies.

    Why it is important

    • Critical path analysis needs it. The dependencies must be known before CPM can be used at all.
    • The order decides the duration. Activities that could run in parallel but are wrongly made sequential add their durations instead of overlapping.
    • It shows what can start when, so resources can be planned and the critical path can be found.

    Three kinds of dependency: mandatory or hard logic, required by contract or by the nature of the work, such as not testing code before it is written; discretionary or soft logic, based on best practice, to be used with care because it limits scheduling options; and external, between project and non project activities outside the team's control, such as a supplier's hardware delivery.

    Four precedence relationships: finish to start, the most common and the only one the numericals use; finish to finish; start to start; and start to finish, which is rare.

    The diagrams and methods used to sequence activities

    Precedence diagramming method (PDM)Arrow diagramming method (ADM)
    Also calledActivity on nodeActivity on arrow
    An activity isA boxAn arrow
    Arrows showThe relationshipsThe activities themselves
    Nodes areThe activitiesEvents: the start and end points of activities
    DependenciesAll four typesFinish to start only
    DummiesNever neededSometimes needed
    UseMore popular, and used by project management softwareOlder, but still set in exam papers

    Drawing rules for either: always left to right; one start point and one end point; every activity has a predecessor and a successor except at the ends; and no loops.

    Why is there a necessity of project time management? Explain how it is performed. asked 1×

    Ch 81+4 marks2069 Chaitra Q8

    Project time management is the set of processes required to manage the timely completion of the project. It is necessary because time is the constraint with the least flexibility of all: it passes no matter what happens on the project.

    Why it is needed

    • Delivering projects on time is the manager's biggest single challenge.
    • Schedule issues cause more conflict than anything else, mostly in the second half of a project.
    • Planned and actual finish dates rarely match.
    • Many change requests arrive during the project, and each one adds delay.

    How it is performed: the six processes

    ProcessGroupWhat it doesMajor output
    Activity definitionPlanningIdentifies the specific actions needed to produce the deliverablesActivity list
    Activity sequencingPlanningIdentifies and documents the relationships among the activitiesProject schedule network diagram
    Activity resource estimatingPlanningWorks out what resources, and how many, each activity needsActivity resource requirements
    Activity duration estimatingPlanningWorks out how long each activity will takeActivity duration estimates
    Schedule developmentPlanningUses the other processes' results to set the start and end datesProject schedule
    Schedule controlMonitoring and controllingManages changes to the scheduleWork performance measurements

    Before them all sits plan schedule management, which takes the charter, the project management plan, the environmental factors and the process assets, applies expert judgement, data analysis and meetings, and produces the schedule management plan.

    Define the term project financing. Explain the features of capital structure planning. asked 1×

    Ch 9CE 701, not your syllabus2+4+4 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q6

    Project financing is the arrangement of long term funds for a project, typically through a separate project company whose own cash flows and assets repay the lenders, with limited or no recourse to the sponsors. Its sources are equity shares, preference shares, loans, bonds and grants.

    Features of capital structure planning, that is, planning the mix of equity, preference capital and debt.

    • Profitability: the mix should maximise earnings per share.
    • Solvency: take on debt only up to what the cash flows can service.
    • Flexibility: the structure must leave room to raise more money later.
    • Control: new equity dilutes the owners' control, while debt does not.
    • Low cost of capital, weighing the cheapness of debt against its risk.
    • Conservatism, plus the legal and lender requirements, and the timing of the issue.

    Worked example. Total capital Rs 5,00,000: 2,000 equity shares at Rs 100 = Rs 2,00,000; preference capital Rs 1,50,000 at 18 percent; the rest, Rs 1,50,000, a loan at 14 percent. EBIT is Rs 1,00,000 and tax is 25 percent.

    EBIT Rs 1,00,000 less interest 14% x 1,50,000 = - 21,000 EBT Rs 79,000 less tax 25% x 79,000 = - 19,750 EAT Rs 59,250 less preference dividend 18% x 1,50,000 = - 27,000 Earnings for equity shareholders Rs 32,250 EPS = 32,250 / 2,000 shares = Rs 16.13 a share Book value = 2,00,000 / 2,000 = Rs 100 a share (keeping the year's earnings in the business: (2,00,000 + 32,250) / 2,000 = Rs 116.13)

    How it helps in project quality management. asked 1×

    Ch 103+3 marks2078 Bhadra Q2b

    Project quality requirements are the part of the project scope that states the quality the deliverables must have. They are optimised against the cost and schedule estimates, and they define three things: the customer's expectations for quality, the internal attributes that show whether each quality factor is met, and the measures that make the level of quality visible. They are written as quality factors, quality criteria and quality metrics, and are judged by completeness, correctness and usefulness criteria.

    Quality requirements in IT projects, with a college MIS as the example

    • Functionality: the degree to which the system performs its intended functions. It calculates grades correctly.
    • Features: special characteristics that appeal to users. SMS alerts for results.
    • System outputs: what the screens and reports look like. The marksheet layout.
    • Performance: how well it performs. A result page in under two seconds with 2,000 students online.
    • Reliability: performing as expected under normal conditions. No crash on result day.
    • Maintainability: how easily it is maintained. A new course added without rewriting code.

    How they help project quality management

    • They turn good quality into targets that can be measured, so quality stops being an opinion.
    • They are the standard that quality assurance audits the process against, and the acceptance criteria that quality control tests each deliverable against.
    • Being part of scope, they are costed and scheduled like any other work, instead of being squeezed out at the end.
    • They make quality visible to the customer and to the team.

    Are there quality standards for software industry and services? asked 1×

    Ch 102+5 marks2076 Ashwin Q6

    Yes. Software and IT services have their own standards, for the product, the process, the testing and the service, and they sit inside the same ISO family as the general quality standards.

    StandardWhat it covers
    ISO 9001 with ISO/IEC 90003ISO 9001 is the generic quality management system; ISO/IEC 90003 is the guidance for applying it to software
    ISO/IEC 25010, SQuaREThe software product quality model: functional suitability, performance efficiency, compatibility, usability, reliability, security, maintainability and portability
    ISO/IEC/IEEE 12207Software life cycle processes
    ISO/IEC/IEEE 29119Software testing: concepts, processes, documentation and techniques
    IEEE 730Software quality assurance processes
    CMMI, and the ISO/IEC 33000 seriesRating the capability and maturity of software processes
    ISO/IEC 20000-1IT service management: the standard for services
    ISO/IEC 27001Information security management

    The other types of standard are the general ones: ISO 9001:2015, the requirements for a quality management system and the most widely accepted quality standard in the world; the rest of the ISO 9000 family, with 9000 for fundamentals and vocabulary and 9004 for sustained success; ISO 14000 for environmental management; ISO 13485 for medical devices; ISO 19011 for auditing management systems; and ISO/TS 16949 for automotive products.

    How they relate

    • Same family, same structure. The management system standards, quality, environment, security, IT services and safety, share one high level structure built on the PDCA cycle, so one company can run them as a single integrated system.
    • Different levels of the same goal. ISO 9001 and 90003 certify that a quality process exists; CMMI rates how mature it is; ISO/IEC 25010 says what quality the product itself must have; 12207 and 29119 say how the work and the testing are done.
    • Sector versions. Just as 13485 adapts the quality system to medical devices and 16949 to cars, ISO/IEC 90003 adapts it to software.

    Is there always a tradeoff between quality and productivity? asked 1×

    Ch 103 marks2071 Chaitra Q8a

    In the short run, often yes; over the life of the system, no. Productivity is the amount of product against the cost of making it; quality is whether the product is fit for its purpose.

    • The notes' position. Making a product faster raises the risk of poor quality, and higher quality goods take more time, more labour and better material, so a drive for greater productivity almost always means a cut in quality. In theory an IT system can be cheaper, faster and better; in practice a manager who chooses cheaper and faster will not also get better.
    • Why the trade off disappears over the life cycle. Rushing raises output now and lowers quality, but the defects come back as rework, support calls and lost users, and rework is what destroys software productivity. Preventing a defect is cheaper than finding it, and finding it is cheaper than fixing it after delivery, which is the cost of quality argument. So over the whole life cycle, higher quality raises productivity, and that is exactly what lean and TQM claim.

    An IT example. A team skips code reviews and regression tests to release a college MIS a week early. Output rises that week; then wrong marksheets and crashes appear, and the next month goes on fixing them while users stop trusting the system. The week saved cost a month. A team that writes automated tests is slower at first but changes the code faster and more safely for the rest of the project.

    Does effective communication management skill reduce the associated risk of an IT project? asked 1×

    Ch 114 marks2072 Kartik Q8

    Yes. Many IT project risks are communication failures in disguise, so managing communication either removes their cause or catches them early enough to be cheap.

    • Requirement risk: reviewing requirements with the users and confirming them in writing stops the wrong system being built.
    • Early warning: regular status reports and stand ups surface slips and problems while they are still cheap to fix.
    • Scope risk: changes are requested, assessed and approved in writing, not agreed in a corridor.
    • Stakeholder risk: sponsors who are kept informed keep their support and their funding.
    • Team risk: clear roles and a shared plan prevent duplicated or dropped work and reduce conflict.
    • Risk management itself runs on communication: risks must be reported, owned and tracked in the risk register.

    An example. A college MIS team hears in a weekly stakeholder meeting that the exam section plans to change the grading rule next semester. Because the communication plan puts the exam section on the weekly status list, the change is known in week 3, costed and scheduled. Without that channel it would surface at user acceptance testing, forcing rework of the grade module, delaying results and damaging trust: the same event, turned from a crisis into a planned change by communication.

    The limit: communication reduces the risks that come from people and information; it cannot remove technical or market risks, although it makes them visible sooner.

    What type of communication would the project manager want to use to address this problem initially and why? asked 1×

    Ch 115 marks2074 Chaitra Q5a

    Use face to face communication first: a private, one to one meeting with the team member.

    • Why face to face. On the standard media table a meeting is rated excellent for addressing negative behaviour and for assessing commitment, while email is only adequate. Anything about people, commitment or conflict belongs face to face.
    • What it lets the manager do. Hear the reason, which may be overload, an unclear task, a skill gap or a personal problem; read the non verbal signals; and agree a plan together, without public embarrassment.
    • Then put it in writing. Confirm what was agreed in a short written note, which turns the commitment into a record.
    • Escalate only if that fails. Formal escalation to the functional manager or the sponsor comes after the private conversation, not instead of it.

    The general pattern is worth stating: anything about people is best handled face to face, and anything that must be kept or referred to later is best in writing.

    What are the quantitative risk analysis processes? asked 1×

    Ch 123+4 marks2076 Ashwin Q5

    Quantitative risk analysis determines numerically the probability of each risk and its consequences for the project objectives. It identifies the risks that need the most attention, quantifies risk exposure, and sizes the cost and schedule contingency reserves. Its processes are four.

    • Risk exposure. Determine the probability of each risk and the cost if it occurs, then RE = P times C. Prepare a risk table and add up the overall exposure, which sizes the reserve.
    • Expected monetary value and decision trees. EMV is the value of a decision based on its risk event probabilities and monetary values: the sum of probability times outcome. A decision tree draws the decisions as squares and the chance events as circles, and the option with the higher EMV is chosen.
    • Monte Carlo simulation. A model of the system is run many times with random values drawn from each variable's distribution, giving a statistical distribution of the results: evaluate the range of each variable, determine its probability distribution, select a random value, run one deterministic pass, and repeat many times.
    • Sensitivity analysis. Change one variable at a time and record the effect on the outcome, to find which risks have the most impact. The tornado diagram displays it as horizontal bars ordered from the widest at the top.

    Its inputs are the project management plan, the scope, the risk management plan and the risk register; its tools are data gathering and representation techniques and quantitative analysis and modelling techniques; its output is an updated risk register.

    List out the type of project on different bases of project classification. asked 1×

    Ch 15 marks2080 Baishakh Q1a

    Projects are classified on nine bases, each of which is a question about the project whose answers are its categories. Sano Nepali Officer Sadhai Furti Sanga Time Pass Rakhcha.

    BasisCategories
    Sponsorship: who pays for and owns itCustomer, organisation, contractor, government, donor
    Nature: how staffed, how complexIndividual, staff, special, complex
    Orientation: what it deliversProduct oriented, process oriented
    Speed: how urgentNormal, crash, disaster
    Funding sourcePrivate sector, government sector, grant, loan
    Size, by durationMega 5 to 10 years, major 3 to 5, medium 1 to 3, small
    Technique: what it consumesLabour intensive, capital intensive
    Number of key purposesSingle purpose, multi purpose
    Relationship with other projectsIndependent, dependent, mutually exclusive
    • Crash project: run at maximum speed, paying extra to finish sooner.
    • Disaster project: a response to an emergency, such as earthquake reconstruction.
    • Mutually exclusive: alternatives, where choosing one rules the other out.

    Classification matters because it tells the manager in advance what organisation, funding, speed and risk to expect.

    List some key benefits of conducting feasibility study. asked 1×

    Ch 12+2 marks2081 Baishakh Q1

    A feasibility study is the survey done at the start of a project to decide whether the idea is realistic, before money is committed. Its key benefits are these.

    • Focus. It improves the project team's focus.
    • Opportunities. It identifies new ones that were not in the original idea.
    • Go or no go. It gives the sponsor the information that decision needs.
    • Alternatives. It narrows the business alternatives down to the workable ones.
    • Reason. It identifies a valid reason to undertake the project.
    • Success rate. It raises the success rate by evaluating many parameters before commitment.
    • Decisions. It aids decision making on the project throughout.
    • Stop signals. It identifies the reasons not to proceed, which is just as valuable.

    How do you perform feasibility study in IT project? asked 1×

    Ch 12+2 marks2071 Chaitra Q1b

    A feasibility study is performed as a sequence of analyses with two decision gates in it, so that a weak idea is stopped before the expensive work starts.

    • Generate project ideas.
    • Initial evaluation. Is the idea promising? If not, stop here.
    • Plan the in depth study.
    • Market analysis and technical analysis.
    • Financial analysis.
    • Economic and ecological analysis.
    • Second gate. Is the project worthwhile? If not, terminate it; if yes, prepare the funding proposal.

    In an IT project the technical analysis covers the platform, the architecture and the skills of the team; the financial analysis weighs development, licence, hosting and maintenance cost against the benefit; the operational analysis asks how the system will be run and maintained after deployment; and the legal analysis covers data protection, copyright and licensing.

    Discuss final year project characteristics of your own. asked 1×

    Ch 11+3+3 marks2079 Bhadra Q1a

    Take your own final year project and show it has all nine characteristics of a project. The example below is a real time Nepali Sign Language recognition app; substitute your own project and keep the structure.

    • Specific objective. Recognise the Nepali Sign Language alphabet from a phone camera.
    • Temporary. Proposal in the seventh semester to final defence in the eighth, about ten months.
    • Unique. No identical app exists; the dataset and the model are our own.
    • Non routine. It is not regular coursework.
    • Planning and control. Proposal, mid term and final presentations as milestones, a Gantt chart, and weekly supervisor meetings.
    • Resource integration. Four members, laptops, a cloud GPU, the dataset and the budget.
    • Flexibility. Dataset, model and scope all changed with supervisor feedback.
    • Constraints. Time, the defence date; cost, about Rs 20,000 for cloud training and a test phone; quality, the accuracy target.
    • Team work. Four members with a leader, guided by a supervisor.

    How you compare SMART objective of your final year project? asked 1×

    Ch 11+3+3 marks2079 Bhadra Q1a

    State your final year project's objective as one sentence with a number and a date in it, then test it letter by letter against SMART. A good objective would be: build an Android app that recognises every alphabet sign of Nepali Sign Language with at least 90 percent accuracy, before the final defence in the eighth semester, using the team and budget already approved.

    TestHow the objective meets it
    SpecificWhat it is (an Android app), for what (NSL alphabet signs), for whom (NSL users)
    MeasurableEvery alphabet sign, at 90 percent accuracy or better on a held out test set
    AchievableThe team has machine learning skills and can start from pre trained models
    RealisticIt fits the team's time alongside coursework and the approved budget
    Time boundThe deadline is the final defence in the eighth semester

    Contrast it with make an AI app for sign language, which fails the measurable and time bound tests, and so can never be judged a success or a failure.

    Discuss the specific attributes that are specific to IT related projects. asked 1×

    Ch 14 marks2069 Chaitra Q1

    IT projects share the six attributes of any project, and then add a set of their own that make them harder to manage.

    • Diverse in size and kind. One person installing hardware at one end, and hundreds building a national system at the other.
    • Diverse teams. Hardware, software, networking, database, security, business analysis and domain experts all on one project.
    • Many and fast changing technologies, which sometimes change during the project itself.
    • Intangible product. Progress and quality are hard to see and hard to measure.
    • Requirements are hard to state and keep changing.
    • Integration with existing systems and data, and with it security and privacy obligations.
    • High failure rate compared with other engineering work.

    Write about the challenges of IT projects. asked 1×

    Ch 12+2 marks2073 Shrawan Q2a

    IT projects carry challenges that construction or manufacturing projects do not, because the product is invisible, the technology moves and the people are mobile.

    ChallengeWhat to do about it
    CommunicationTrain communication skills; manage communication actively
    Staff turnoverBetter job satisfaction; non compete agreements
    Information security and privacyAn IT user policy, and regulations
    Visibility: the work is hard to seeThe manager stays closely involved with the team
    Political and cultural riskPlan for it in the risk register
    Environment and infrastructure riskBackup power, redundant links
    Connectivity problemsRedundant connectivity, offline capable design
    Brain drain and loss of institutional knowledgeDocumentation, knowledge sharing, succession planning
    Legal and regulatory requirementsEarly legal review; compliance written into the requirements

    How can IT projects be classified? asked 1×

    Ch 12+2 marks2073 Shrawan Q2a

    IT projects are classified into four types by what the supplier is being asked to deliver.

    • System integration. Brings diverse ICT products and services together into one working system. Example: a nationwide WAN.
    • Facilities management. Takes full responsibility for establishing and operating the customer's IT facility without taking ownership of it. Example: an automated security and disaster control centre.
    • Software application development. Building software. Example: an ERP application.
    • Services consulting. A specific consulting service, which may or may not end in a product. Example: ICT training and counselling.

    Explain the necessity of IT Project Management? asked 1×

    Ch 12+2 marks2071 Chaitra Q1b

    IT project management is necessary because IT projects have a poor track record, the stakes are high, and the discipline directly removes the causes of that failure.

    • The track record. The 1995 CHAOS report found only about 16 percent of software projects finished on time and on budget with all their features, and about 31 percent were cancelled outright.
    • The stakes. IT is now central to almost every organisation and absorbs large investments.
    • It removes the causes of failure. Clear objectives and scope, proper estimates, change control, risk management, user and management involvement, and visible tracking of an otherwise intangible product.

    What it brings: control of financial, physical and human resources; better customer relationships; higher quality and reliability; higher profit and productivity; better coordination and morale; and shorter development time at lower cost.

    Discuss how understanding these phases contributes to effective project management with illustration of time and effort graph. asked 1×

    Ch 12+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q1b

    Understanding the phases is what makes management effective, because each phase has a different job, a different level of effort and a different level of risk.

    • Gates. Each phase ends in a deliverable and a go or no go decision, so a failing project is caught early rather than at handover.
    • Staffing. Knowing the shape of the effort curve lets the manager plan people and money for the execution peak instead of being surprised by it.
    • Early planning pays. Changes are cheapest at the start, so the effort spent in planning is the cheapest effort in the project.
    • Early risk work. Risk and uncertainty are highest at the beginning, so that is where risk identification and response belong.

    The time and effort graph. Put effort or cost up the vertical axis and time along the horizontal. The curve is one hump skewed to the right: low in initiation, rising through planning, peaking in execution, then falling fast at closure. On the same axes draw risk and uncertainty starting high and falling, and the cost of change starting low and rising steeply; where they cross is why scope is frozen after planning.

    Explain the concept of the project life cycle according to PMI (Project Management Institute). asked 1×

    Ch 12+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q1b

    PMI describes the life cycle as initiation, planning, execution and closure, with monitoring and controlling running across the whole of it. It is the same life as the four phases in the notes: formulation is initiation, implementation is execution with monitoring and control, and termination is closure.

    PhaseWhat happensTypical steps
    InitiationIdentify the need or opportunity, set the objective, judge feasibility, name the deliverablesFeasibility study; scope, deliverables and stakeholders; business case; statement of work
    PlanningBreak the work into tasks, build the team, scheduleProject plan and timeline; milestones; budget; resources; risks and quality roadblocks; kick off meeting
    ExecutionTurn the plan into action and keep the work on trackAssign tasks; brief the team; communicate; monitor quality; manage the budget
    Monitoring and controllingTrack the work against the plan Activity tracking, goal tracking, budget tracking
    ClosureDeliver, release resources, judge successPerformance analysis; closure documents; post implementation review; unused budget

    Planning takes about half the total effort and never fully stops: the plan is revised until the work is done.

    Describe project management? asked 1×

    Ch 12+2 marks2071 Chaitra Q2b

    Project management is the application of knowledge, skills, tools and techniques to project activities in order to meet the project requirements and the stakeholders' needs and expectations (PMI). In one line: completing the project on time, within budget, without compromising quality.

    It works in two halves, which run side by side for the life of the project.

    Project planningProject monitoring
    Definition of the work requirementsTracking progress
    Definition of the quantity of workComparing actual against predicted
    Definition of the resources neededAnalysing the impact of the difference
    Making adjustments

    Underneath both is management in the ordinary sense: understanding the problem and the need, and controlling the use of resources, cost, time, scope and quality.

    What is a project, and what are its main attributes? asked 1×

    Ch 14 marks2069 Chaitra Q1

    A project is a temporary endeavour undertaken to create a unique product, service or result, and it is recognised by six attributes.

    • Unique purpose. It is undertaken to achieve one clearly stated objective.
    • Temporary. A definite beginning and a definite end.
    • Progressively elaborated. Detail is added step by step as understanding of the work grows.
    • Requires resources, often drawn from several areas and several organisations.
    • A primary customer or sponsor, who pays for it and owns the result.
    • Uncertainty. Because it has not been done in this form before, estimates, requirements and outcomes all carry risk.

    This is what separates a project from the day to day work most people do, which is operational: ongoing, repetitive, and producing the same result again and again.

    Explain the key elements of project proposal. asked 1×

    Ch 15 marks2073 Shrawan Q2b

    A project proposal is the document that asks for approval and money once the feasibility study says yes. It explains the overall planning of the project, why it exists, what problem it addresses, what will make it successful and what resources it needs. It has seven key elements.

    • Reasons for the proposal. The problem or the opportunity it answers.
    • Project planning matrix. Goal, purpose, inputs and outputs.
    • Solution of the problem. What is actually proposed.
    • Implementation plan. Estimates, cost benefit analysis, resources, schedule, risk and contingency plan, milestones and deliverables.
    • Plan for technical and administrative support.
    • Budget or financial plan.
    • Relevant past experience. Why this team can be trusted to deliver it.

    Explain about contents of technical and financial proposal. asked 1×

    Ch 1CE 701, not your syllabus2+7+3 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q2

    For large bids, usually for consulting or design services, the proposal is split into two documents submitted in two envelopes. The technical proposal says what will be done, how, by whom and when; the financial proposal says how much it will cost and how it will be paid.

    Technical proposalFinancial proposal
    Covering letterCovering letter and the validity period of the offer
    Understanding of the project, and comments on the terms of referenceSummary of the total cost
    Approach and methodologyRemuneration: person months times the rate per expert
    Work plan and schedule, usually a bar chartReimbursables: travel, accommodation, equipment, surveys, reports
    Organisation and staffing, with the CVs of key expertsTaxes and duties, such as VAT
    The firm's experience and relevant past projectsContingency, if it is allowed
    Quality assurance plan; facilities and equipmentPayment schedule and terms

    Why they are separate. The technical proposal is evaluated first, and only bidders who pass have their financial proposal opened, so the client judges quality without being swayed by price. The two scores are then combined, which is quality and cost based selection.

    Briefly explain the traits of being an effective and ineffective project manager? asked 1×

    Ch 22+2 marks2071 Chaitra Q1a

    The difference between an effective and an ineffective project manager is almost entirely behavioural, and it shows in nine pairs.

    Effective project managersIneffective project managers
    Lead by exampleSet bad examples
    Are visionariesAre confused and not self assured
    Are technically competentLack technical expertise
    Are decisiveAre indecisive
    Are good communicatorsAre poor communicators
    Are good motivatorsDemotivate the team
    Stand up to top management when necessaryComplain about top management
    Support their team membersLack team spirit
    Encourage new ideasAre conservative

    Explain how you can be an effective IT project manager. asked 1×

    Ch 21+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q2

    An effective IT project manager needs everything an effective project manager needs, and then a set of things that the nature of IT work demands.

    • The general traits. Lead by example, be a visionary, be technically competent, be decisive, communicate well, motivate the team, stand up to top management when necessary, support the team, and encourage new ideas.
    • Technical understanding. Enough to judge estimates and risks for yourself, and enough to earn the respect of the engineers.
    • Bridging. Translate between technical staff and business users, in both directions.
    • Scope and change control. IT requirements keep moving, so changes must be captured and priced rather than absorbed.
    • Visible tracking. The product is intangible, so progress has to be made measurable deliberately, through demonstrable increments and tracked tasks.
    • Early risk work. Security, integration and technology choices are the risks that kill IT projects, and all three are cheapest to handle at the start.
    • Tools. Scheduling software, version control and issue trackers.

    Explain different general management skills necessary to be a good project manager. asked 1×

    Ch 22+5 marks2069 Chaitra Q2

    A project manager is first a manager, so the classic functions of general management apply. The notes give eight. Paagal Officer Sadhai Daal Maagchha, Chini Chamal Chiya.

    • Planning. Deciding in advance what to do. Its steps are: determine the objectives; set the planning premises and constraints; decide the planning period; collect, classify and process the information; list the alternative courses of action; evaluate them and select the best plan; then prepare the supporting plans for the master plan and the plans for controlling it.
    • Organising. Arranging work, people and resources into a structure.
    • Staffing. Filling the positions with the right people, and developing them.
    • Directing. Guiding and instructing people in the work.
    • Motivating. Creating the will to perform well.
    • Controlling. Measuring performance against the plan and correcting the deviations.
    • Coordinating. Making separate parts work together.
    • Communicating. Passing information so that everyone understands and acts.

    The slides give a shorter list: planning, organising, staffing, executing and controlling.

    Define a project manager. asked 1×

    Ch 21+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q2

    A project manager is the person responsible for leading a project from its inception through its execution to its completion. They carry overall responsibility for the success of the project, and they usually carry it with very little formal authority over the people doing the work, which is why the job is a people job before it is a technical one.

    What are suggested skills for all project managers and for information technology project managers? asked 1×

    Ch 25 marks2070 Chaitra Q1b

    Every project manager needs the same six families of skill; an IT project manager needs those plus a set that the intangible, fast changing and technically diverse nature of IT work demands.

    Suggested for all project managers

    • Communication: listening, and persuading.
    • Organisational: planning, goal setting, analysing.
    • Team building: empathy, motivation, team spirit.
    • Leadership: sets an example, is energetic, has vision, delegates, stays positive.
    • Coping: flexibility, creativity, patience, persistence.
    • Technology: experience and knowledge of the field the project is in.

    Additionally for IT project managers

    • Technical knowledge of hardware, software, networks and development methods, enough to judge estimates and risks.
    • Business knowledge: how the system creates value for the organisation.
    • Bridging: explaining technical and business needs to each other.
    • People skills first. Surveys of IT managers rank people skills, leadership, listening, integrity, trust, verbal communication, team building, conflict resolution, critical thinking and balancing priorities at the top of the list.
    • Change and risk management, because requirements and technology both move during the project.
    • Tools: scheduling software, issue tracking and version control.

    Explain problem tree approach for solving project management issues. asked 1×

    Ch 22+2 marks2079 Bhadra Q1b

    A problem tree is a pictorial representation of a problem, its causes and its effects. It analyses an existing situation by identifying the major problems and the main cause and effect relationships between them, arranged in a hierarchy: causes as roots below, the core problem in the trunk, effects as branches above.

    Steps for developing one

    • Identify the major problems within the stated problem area, using brainstorming to supply the ideas.
    • Analyse their interrelationships, and pick the core problem.
    • Write the causes of the major problems.
    • Write the effects of the core problem.
    • Draw the tree: causes, problems, effects.
    • Review it for validity and completeness, and repeat from step two if needed.

    Applied to a project management issue, an IT project that keeps missing its deadlines: the core problem is late deliveries; the major problems are rework after testing and idle time waiting for decisions; the causes are unclear requirements and an absent sponsor, with no requirement sign off and no escalation procedure as contributing factors; the effects are penalty payments and an unhappy client. The lesson is that working longer hours treats a symptom, while requirement sign off attacks a root.

    Short note: Project management and General management asked 1×

    Ch 25x3 marks2080 Bhadra Q13

    General management runs the organisation's ongoing work; project management runs a temporary, unique piece of work that changes something and then closes.

    General managementProject management
    FocusGeneral, ongoing activitiesProjects and their related tasks
    ProcessContinuousTemporary, one time
    NatureRepetitive and regularNon repetitive and unique
    StateA single steady stateMoves from one state to another, bringing change
    Start and endNo real start and end pointsDefinite start and end points
    Place of workWithin the organisation's premisesInside and outside the premises
    AuthorityWide authority over their staffLittle formal authority over the team
    RolePermanent or long termThe role and the team membership are both temporary

    What they share is the body of general management skill: planning, organising, staffing, directing, motivating, controlling, coordinating and communicating. What is unique to project management is its tools: CPM, PERT and the work breakdown structure.

    What does it mean by the term "project management practice"? asked 1×

    Ch 35 marks2069 Chaitra Q3

    Project management practice is the actual application of project management knowledge, processes, skills, tools and techniques to real projects, as opposed to the body of knowledge itself.

    • Good practice, in PMBOK's sense, means there is general agreement that applying these skills, tools and techniques correctly improves the chance of success over a wide range of projects.
    • It is not one size fits all. Good practice does not mean every process is applied the same way to every project; the team decides what suits the project, which is tailoring.

    What the practice is made of: the five process groups; the nine knowledge areas; the tools and techniques, such as the WBS, CPM, PERT and earned value; professional responsibility, meaning ethics and a code of conduct; and continuous improvement, where the lessons learned on one project feed the next.

    "The Project Management Institute's Framework provides a basic structure for understand project management." Justify the statement. asked 1×

    Ch 35 marks2074 Chaitra Q2b

    The statement is justified: the framework is a basic structure because it takes the whole of project management and gives every part of it a place, a purpose and a relationship to the other parts.

    • It orders the whole discipline. Every piece of project work falls into one of the nine knowledge areas, so nothing is left uncategorised.
    • It separates ends from means. The core areas, scope, time, cost and quality, set the objectives; the facilitating areas, human resources, communication, risk and procurement, are how those objectives are reached.
    • It shows the linkage. Integration ties the areas together, so a change in one is managed across all of them rather than handled in isolation.
    • It starts from stakeholders and ends at project success, so every activity in between has a stated purpose and a stated test.
    • It is shared. The same structure is used worldwide, which gives the profession one common language.

    What are the roles of PMI for the development of project Management profession? asked 1×

    Ch 32+4 marks2080 Baishakh Q1c

    PMI's roles in developing the project management profession are five. Some Certificates Earn Real Prestige.

    • Standard. It publishes the PMBOK Guide, so the profession shares one vocabulary and one definition of good practice.
    • Certifies practitioners. PMP for experienced managers and CAPM for associates, among others, so competence can be recognised.
    • Ethics. It defines the principles of ethics and the code of professional conduct.
    • Research. It promotes research and republishes the body of knowledge as practice evolves.
    • PMO and network. It treats the project management office as the catalyst for organisational excellence, and brings project managers from many countries into one worldwide network for knowledge sharing and continuous improvement.

    What are the similarities & differences between product life cycle & project life cycle? asked 1×

    Ch 42+2 marks2076 Chaitra Q1c

    The two life cycles are usually contrasted, but they have a great deal in common, and the question asks for both halves.

    Similarities

    • Both are life cycles: a sequence of phases or stages with a beginning, describing how something evolves over time.
    • Both start from an idea, a product idea or a project idea, and both check it for feasibility first.
    • Both follow a rise and a fall. Sales rise, peak and fall over a product's life; cost and staffing rise, peak and fall over a project's life.
    • Both have decision points. Stage gates decide whether a project continues; a product is reviewed stage by stage to continue it, improve it or withdraw it.
    • Both must be planned, monitored and controlled, with resources, the four M's, allocated to each stage.
    • Both serve stakeholders and customers, and both exist to create value for the organisation.
    • Both use feedback and lessons learned to improve the next project or the next version of the product.
    • They are linked. A product's development stage, and each later upgrade, is carried out as a project, so one product life cycle contains one or more project life cycles.

    Differences. The product life is longer and is a superset; it may never end, while a project has a definite end; its stages are development, introduction, growth, maturity and decline against the project's initiation, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling and closing; product stages never overlap while project phases usually do; and one product life can hold many project lives.

    Compare three different methodologies. asked 1×

    Ch 41+2+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q2a

    Compare waterfall, iterative and incremental and agile: they run from rigid to flexible, so the comparison writes itself.

    WaterfallIterative and incrementalAgile
    ApproachLinear, sequential phases, no overlapSmall parts built and refined in cyclesIterative and incremental, in short timeboxed iterations
    RequirementsFixed and well understood up frontCore known, refined per incrementExpected to change throughout
    DeliveryOne release at the endSeveral increments, the first one earlyA working product every one to three weeks
    Customer involvementAt the start and the endFeedback on each incrementContinuous and heavy
    RiskHigh risk and uncertaintyLower, spread across incrementsLow: problems show up each iteration
    DocumentationHeavy and well documentedModerateLight; working software preferred
    PlanningAll planned before starting; easy to manageNeeds careful iteration planning; complexLittle up front planning; easy to manage
    Best forSmall projects with stable requirementsLarge systems with a known coreChanging requirements and a close customer
    Weak spotErrors fixed only in their own phase; no software until lateNot suitable for small projectsPoor documentation; needs a clear customer

    What are the existing system development methodologies? asked 1×

    Ch 41+2+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q2a

    A methodology is a formalised approach to implementing the SDLC; a software process model is an abstraction of the development process, specifying the stages and the order in which they are performed. The existing ones fall into four families.

    FamilyModelsThe idea
    Sequential, plan drivenWaterfall, Royce, V modelEach phase once, in order
    Iterative and incrementalIncremental, iterative, evolutionary, spiral, prototypeBuild and refine in cycles
    Process frameworksRational Unified Process, Microsoft Solutions FrameworkPhases plus disciplines, tailored per project
    Agile and leanAgile: Scrum, Kanban, extreme programming, feature driven development, test driven development, DSDM, Crystal; and leanShort cycles, working software, no waste

    The notes name waterfall, Royce, iterative and incremental (evolutionary), agile and lean; the slides add the V model, spiral, prototype, RUP and MSF.

    What is product life cycle? asked 1×

    Ch 41+2+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q2a

    A product is anything that can be offered to a market to solve a problem or to satisfy a want or a need; it is not limited to physical objects, so software, an app or a service is a product too. The product life cycle is the stages a product passes through from conception to retirement, and with them the course of its sales and its profit over that lifetime.

    StageSalesCost per customerProfitCustomers targetedCompetition
    Product developmentZeroInvestment is highNegativeNone yetNone yet
    IntroductionLowHighNegativeInnovators Little
    GrowthRising rapidlyAverageRisingEarly adoptersGrowing
    MaturityAt its peakLowHighThe middle majorityHigh
    DeclineDecliningLowDecliningLaggards Declining

    Draw the sales and profit curve: sales rise through introduction and growth, peak at maturity, then fall; profit lags behind and turns positive during growth.

    Short note: Stakeholder Management asked 1×

    Ch 45x3 marks2081 Bhadra Q8

    Stakeholder management, the manage stakeholders process, is the management of communications to satisfy the needs of project stakeholders and to resolve issues with them. The project manager is responsible for it.

    InputsTools and techniquesOutputs
    Communication management plan; organisational process assets Communication methods; issue logsResolved issues; approved change requests; approved corrective actions; updated organisational process assets; updated project management plan

    The four steps: identify the stakeholders and record them in the stakeholder register; analyse them by influence and interest; plan the communication, deciding who needs what information, when, and in what form; then manage and monitor, resolving issues as they arise.

    • Communication methods: face to face, telephone calls, and email and other electronic tools. The choice depends on each stakeholder's intentions, preferences and experience.
    • Issue log: every stakeholder issue is recorded, given an owner and a date, and tracked until it is resolved.
    • The power and interest grid plots influence against interest, and gives the four standard strategies: manage closely, keep satisfied, keep informed, and monitor with minimum effort.

    Short note: Project stakeholders asked 1×

    Ch 42x6 marks2070 Ashad Q16

    A stakeholder is any individual, group or party that has an interest in an organisation and in the outcomes of its actions. The common examples are employees, customers, shareholders, suppliers, communities and governments; on a project they are the sponsor, the project manager, the team, functional managers, customers and end users, suppliers, and anyone else the project affects. Their needs and expectations are the starting point of the PMI framework.

    Types of stakeholder

    • Primary: involved in the organisation's monetary transactions, such as customers, shareholders and employees.
    • Secondary: invested in its social transactions, such as communities, the media and the public.
    • Key: those who help the organisation make strategic decisions, minimise risk and grow, and who have significant influence or importance within it.

    Stakeholders are identified in initiation, which is one of that phase's two activities, and recorded in the stakeholder register. Stakeholder analysis then records, for each of them, the name and organisation, the role on the project, unique facts, the level of influence and interest, and suggestions for managing the relationship and the nature of reports.

    Explain a Matrix Organization Structure with it's advantages and disadvantages. asked 1×

    Ch 54 marks2070 Ashad Q6

    A matrix organisation is the modern form, set up to face the challenges of fast changing markets by mobilising the organisation's resources systematically. Reporting runs in two directions, vertically by function and horizontally by project, so every employee has two bosses: the functional manager holds the administrative duties, and the project manager is responsible for work assignment. It takes the advantages, and some of the weaknesses, of both the functional and the projectized structure.

    AdvantagesDisadvantages
    Shares resources efficientlyCostly to maintain, with many managers
    Decision making is balanced and flexiblePossible confusion over authority and responsibility
    Staff communicate across boundariesDual reporting adds confusion and causes conflict
    Flexible use of resourcesResources must be held for the whole project, however long it takes
    Fast response to changeProblems arise when functional and project managers do not coordinate
    Strong project coordination

    Draw the functional departments across the top as columns, the projects down the left as rows, and the team members at the intersections, each with a line going up to a functional manager and a line going across to a project manager.

    What are the different organizational structures and which type of structure do you fell is the most effective in ICT project? asked 1×

    Ch 51+4 marks2075 Ashwin Q4b

    For most ICT organisations the most effective structure is a matrix, balanced or strong; for a very large, dedicated ICT project it is projectized.

    Why a matrix

    • ICT projects are cross functional: developers, testers, network engineers, database administrators, security staff and business analysts. A matrix draws them from their functions without duplicating them.
    • Specialists are scarce. One security expert can serve several projects at once.
    • Technology and requirements change fast, and the matrix gives a fast response to change with strong project coordination.
    • Staff keep a functional home, so their skills stay current and they return to it afterwards, which avoids the job insecurity of a projectized team.
    • A strong matrix gives the project manager a full time role, budget control and enough authority to deliver.

    When the others fit. Projectized suits one very large, long, high value ICT project, such as a national ID or a core banking system, with a team dedicated for years. Functional suits a small job inside the IT department, such as upgrading the email servers.

    Making the matrix work: define the roles clearly, agree priorities between the project and functional managers, and keep a single escalation path to settle two boss conflicts.

    Compare three different organizational structures. asked 1×

    Ch 51+2+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q2b

    The three structures are best compared on one axis: how much authority the project manager has.

    FunctionalMatrixProjectized
    Project manager's authorityLittle or noneLimited to high, by typeHigh to almost total
    Team members on the projectVirtually none full time0 to 95 percent, by type85 to 100 percent
    Who manages the budgetFunctional managerMixedProject manager
    Project manager's rolePart timePart time to full timeFull time
    The team after the projectNever left the departmentReturns to its functionNo home, so job insecurity
    Key advantageSpecialisation, control, no duplicationShared resources and flexibilityFocus and clear authority
    Key disadvantageSlow decisions, multiple commandTwo bosses, and costlyDuplication, and useful for large projects only

    Projectized in more detail. Its advantages are focus on the project objectives, clear authority, effective communication and labour used as required; its disadvantages are duplication of facilities and effort, lack of job security when the project ends, conflict between project and non project staff over project specific benefits, and that it is useful for large projects only.

    Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of a functional organizational structure in project management. asked 1×

    Ch 55 marks2082 Bhadra Q3a

    A functional organisation divides the organisation into smaller groups by specialisation, such as production, marketing and finance. It is an upgrade on line organisation because it uses the principle of specialisation fully: one person heads many workers, and each head is a specialist in that job. In a project, the head of department acts as project manager, or a coordinator is named with very limited authority.

    AdvantagesDisadvantages
    Groups employees by functional skill, giving a higher degree of performanceViolates unity of command: workers are under many heads, not one
    Increases the efficiency of workers and staffQuick decisions are hard: the functional manager must report to top authority
    Reduces the burden on top managersProblems and difficulties of multiple command
    Greater scope for training and development of employeesNot as easy to understand as line organisation
    Better control and supervisionEmployees are treated as machines
    No duplication of work, since each department is different, and clear job descriptionsConflicts may encourage indiscipline

    The verdict. It is strong for projects that stay inside one department and weak for cross functional ones, because there the project manager has little or no authority.

    Define organization structure. asked 1×

    Ch 51+4 marks2075 Ashwin Q4b

    Organisation structure is the division of labour, plus the patterns of coordination, communication, workflow and formal power that direct organisational activities. The slides put it as the top level view of the structure of ownership and the main line of reporting order.

    • Division of labour: the work is subdivided into separate jobs assigned to different people.
    • Coordinating work activities: so that everyone works together harmoniously.

    Define system philosophy. asked 1×

    Ch 51+2+3 marks2082 Baishakh Q2b

    Systems philosophy is the first part of the system view: it is the habit of viewing things as systems, that is, as sets of interacting components working within an environment to fulfil some purpose, rather than as isolated parts.

    Applied to a project, it means the project is not the deliverable alone. A hospital information system is not just software: it is the billing and funding around it, the doctors and nurses who must use it, and the servers and network it runs on. The other two parts of the system view follow from it: systems analysis, the problem solving approach, and systems management, which addresses business, technological and organisational issues before a system is created or changed.

    Compare: Project life cycle phases versus various process groups asked 1×

    Ch 64x4 marks2082 Baishakh Q3

    A life cycle phase is a stage of the project in time; a process group is a category of management work. The five groups repeat inside every phase.

    Life cycle phasesProcess groups
    What it isStages of the project in timeCategories of management work
    OrderSequential, one after another, though they may overlapRepeat inside every phase, overlapping heavily
    Defined byThe kind of project and its field: construction, software, pharmaceuticalsPMI: the same five for every project
    NamesThey vary: concept, development, implementation, closure; or feasibility, design, build, handoverFixed: initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, closing
    Ends withA deliverable and a stage gate decisionOutputs that become the inputs of the next group
    FocusThe product being builtManaging the project that builds it
    How manyAs many as the project needsAlways five

    How they relate. The process groups run within each phase. A small project may have only one phase, in which case the groups and the phase look alike; a large project repeats all five groups in each of its phases.

    Justify the overlaps of different life cycle stages and process groups within various project phase. asked 1×

    Ch 65 marks2081 Bhadra Q3

    The process groups overlap because the output of one is the input of the next, so each starts as soon as its inputs exist rather than waiting for the previous one to finish.

    • Outputs feed inputs. The charter from initiating feeds planning, the plan feeds executing, and performance data from executing feeds monitoring.
    • Planning is progressive. Plans are detailed as more becomes known, which is rolling wave planning, so planning continues while earlier work is already being executed.
    • Monitoring and controlling is continuous. It runs from the first day to the last, so it overlaps every other group by definition.
    • Every phase repeats the groups. Each phase is initiated, planned, executed, controlled and closed, and the closing of one phase overlaps the initiating of the next.
    • Phases themselves overlap. The next phase often starts before the previous one is complete, which is fast tracking, and its process groups start with it.
    • Change never waits. An approved change sends work back from monitoring into planning and executing in the middle of a phase.

    Draw it as overlapping curves rather than a staircase: initiating rises and falls first, planning peaks next, executing is the tallest curve in the middle, monitoring and controlling runs flat across the whole phase, and closing rises only at the end.

    Where the time goes. Executing takes most of it, 82 percent for ordinary project managers and 69 percent for the best ones. The best plan twice as much, 21 percent of their time against 11 percent, and good planning is what saves the execution time. The rest is small: initiating 1 to 2 percent, monitoring and controlling 4 to 5 percent, and closing 2 to 3 percent.

    Explain how effective coordination between these process groups contributes to project success. asked 1×

    Ch 65 marks2081 Bhadra Q3

    Effective coordination between the process groups is what turns five separate kinds of work into one project, and it contributes to success in six ways.

    • Complete hand offs. When each group's outputs are complete and correct, the next group starts on solid inputs: a clear charter gives a sound plan, and a sound plan gives smooth execution.
    • Early correction. Monitoring and controlling feeds deviations back into planning and executing quickly, so small problems do not grow into large ones.
    • Controlled change. Integrated change control keeps scope, time and cost changes consistent across all the groups, which is what prevents scope creep.
    • Balanced constraints. Coordinated decisions balance scope, schedule, budget, quality, resources and risk together, instead of fixing one and breaking another.
    • Stakeholders stay engaged. Communication planned in planning, carried out in executing and reported in monitoring keeps expectations aligned.
    • Clean closure. Closing gathers the acceptance and the lessons learned that improve the next project's initiating and planning.

    Example. In a software project a change request found in testing, which is monitoring, is approved, the plan and schedule are updated, which is planning, and the team builds it, which is executing, so the release still meets its date.

    Explain briefly about 5 process group relating any project concerning your discipline. asked 1×

    Ch 66 marks2080 Baishakh Q2c

    Take a computer engineering project: an online attendance and results system for a college, built by a five person student team in one semester. The five process groups run through it as follows.

    • Initiating. Agree the need with the college, write the project charter with its goal, budget, deadline and the supervisor as sponsor, and list the stakeholders: the administration, the teachers, the students and the IT office.
    • Planning. Collect the requirements, define the scope and the WBS, which is login, attendance, marks entry and reports, estimate the durations and cost, draw the schedule, choose the tools, and plan the testing, the risks and the weekly reporting.
    • Executing. Design the database and the screens, write the code, set up the server, train the teachers, and hold the weekly team meetings.
    • Monitoring and controlling. Track progress against the schedule, test each module against its requirements, handle change requests such as a new report format, and control scope and cost.
    • Closing. Get the college's acceptance, hand over the code and the manuals, write the final report and the lessons learned, and release the team.

    Describe the need of closing process and explain its importance with suitable example of the mega projects. asked 1×

    Ch 73+3 marks2081 Baishakh Q6

    Closing is needed because a project that is technically finished is not legally, financially or organisationally finished. To close a project or phase is to finalise all activities and transfer the completed or cancelled work to the appropriate people.

    • Formal acceptance. The client signs that the work is complete, which settles the question of whether it is done and allows final payment.
    • Contracts are closed. Every contract is verified, evaluated and audited, so liabilities, guarantees and retention money end on a clear date.
    • Resources are released. People, equipment and money move to other work instead of being held by a project that is effectively over.
    • Handover to operations. The product, its documents and the training pass to the people who will run it.
    • Lessons learned are captured while the team still remembers, and the records are archived for audits and for future estimates.
    • The phase or project officially ends: no open tasks, no hidden costs, a clean record.

    The four steps: phase end activities (peer review, release management, review meeting, updating the plan for the next phase, status reporting, end user education); administrative closure (formal acceptance by the client, recommendations from sponsors and the support organisation, maintenance and upgrade, training, lessons learned); contract closure (verify the contract requirements, formal acceptance, performance evaluation by buyer and seller, procurement audit, update the files and historical databases); and updating the organisational process assets, with archiving as the last step.

    Example: a mega hydropower project. A plant of several hundred megawatts is built over years with many contractors, lenders and government agencies. Closed properly, each contractor's work is measured and accepted, defect liability periods start, guarantees and retention are settled, as built drawings, manuals and trained operators pass to the operating company, lenders and government receive a final report, and the lessons feed the next hydropower project. Not closed, disputes over unpaid bills and retention drag on for years, nobody is responsible when equipment fails, the operator has no drawings, and the next project repeats the same mistakes. The engineering finished, but the project never did.

    Compare: BOQ document vs. RFP document asked 1×

    Ch 74x4 marks2075 Chaitra Q5

    A bill of quantities (BOQ) is an itemised list of the work items and materials with their units and measured quantities, and blank columns for rate and amount. A request for proposal (RFP) describes what the buyer wants and asks sellers to propose how they would deliver it. The BOQ is priced; the RFP is answered.

    BOQRFP
    NatureA list of items and quantities to be pricedA request for a full proposal
    Used forWorks contracts with a fixed design, as in constructionServices or solutions where the seller proposes the approach, as in software or consulting
    Bidder's responseFills in the rates and the amountsWrites a technical and a financial proposal
    EvaluationMainly the lowest evaluated priceTechnical and financial scoring together
    Later useThe basis for payment on measured workThe basis for negotiating the contract

    The client's engineer prepares the BOQ, every bidder prices the same list, and payment is later made on the measured quantities.

    Compare: Detail Project Report (DPR) document versus Request for Proposal (RFP) document asked 1×

    Ch 74x3 marks2078 Bhadra Q6

    A detailed project report (DPR) is the full report prepared after the feasibility study to get a project approved and financed. A request for proposal (RFP) is a document describing in detail what product or service the buyer wants, used to request proposals from potential sellers. One asks for money, the other asks for offers.

    DPRRFP
    PurposeJustify and plan the project, for approval and fundingInvite sellers to propose how they would do the work, and at what price
    Prepared byThe owner's planning team or a consultantThe buyer
    WhenAfter feasibility, before the investment decisionAt procurement, after the project is approved
    AudienceDecision makers, government, lendersPotential sellers and contractors
    ContentsDesign and drawings, cost estimates, financial and economic analysis, implementation schedule, environmental and social assessment, organisationRequirements, scope of work, evaluation criteria, terms, submission instructions
    Leads toAn approved, funded projectProposals, then a selected seller and a contract

    In Nepal, consultants prepare DPRs for roads, bridges, water supply and hydropower projects.

    Compare: Project DPR document versus project scope document asked 1×

    Ch 74x4 marks2081 Bhadra Q5

    A DPR is the case for investing in the project; a project scope document, the scope statement, is the agreement on what the project will and will not deliver once the investment is made.

    DPRProject scope document
    CoversThe whole case for the project: technical, financial, economic and socialWhat work and which deliverables are in, and out, of the project
    StageBefore approvalPlanning, after the charter
    Used forDeciding whether to investThe baseline for the WBS, the estimates and scope control
    Prepared byA consultant or the planning teamThe project manager and the team, agreed with the stakeholders
    DetailEngineering and financial detailDeliverables, objectives, boundaries, acceptance criteria

    Compare: Developing project management plan versus monitoring and controlling of project asked 1×

    Ch 74x3 marks2078 Bhadra Q6

    Developing the project management plan sets the baseline; monitoring and controlling measures against it. One is forward looking, the other is a comparison that produces corrections.

    Developing the project management planMonitoring and controlling
    Process groupPlanningMonitoring and controlling
    Question it answersWhat will we do, and how?Are we doing it as planned, and if not, what now?
    PurposeGuide execution and control; document the assumptions, decisions and approved baselinesCompare actual performance with the plan and correct the deviations
    TimingEarly, then updated as the project goesContinuous, from start to finish
    InputsPreliminary scope statement, project management processes, environmental factors, process assetsProject management plan, requested changes, work performance information
    ToolsMethodology, project management information system, facilitation, expert judgementMethodology, project management information system, earned value management, expert judgement
    OutputsThe project management plan, with its baselines Recommended corrective and preventive actions, defect repair, forecasts, requested changes
    NatureForward looking; it sets the baselineBackward looking against the baseline, then corrective

    How they depend on each other. The plan is the baseline that monitoring measures against, and monitoring sends approved changes back to update the plan. Without a plan there is nothing to control; without control the plan is ignored.

    Compare: Project scoping vs. project closing asked 1×

    Ch 74x4 marks2076 Ashwin Q7

    Scoping decides what the project will deliver; closing proves that it did, and ends it formally. They are the two ends of the same string.

    Project scopingProject closing
    WhenEarly: initiation and planningAt the end of a phase or of the project
    PurposeDefine what is, and is not, includedFormally finish, accept and hand over
    Process groupInitiating and planningClosing
    Key activitiesCollect requirements, write the scope statement, create the WBS and the dictionaryPhase end activities, administrative closure, contract closure, archiving
    OutputsScope statement, WBS, WBS dictionary, scope baselineAccepted product, closure documents, updated process assets, lessons learned
    Main riskUnclear scope leads to scope creepSkipped closure leaves disputes and lost lessons

    How they connect. Closing checks what was delivered against the scope baseline set in scoping, and scope verification is the link between the two.

    Discuss the process of defining project scope in more detail as a project progresses, going from information in a project charter to a project scope statement, WBS and WBS dictionary. asked 1×

    Ch 75 marks2069 Chaitra Q7

    Scope is not defined once. It is progressively elaborated, and each document is more detailed and less negotiable than the one before it.

    • Project charter. Formally authorises the project and states its goals and the basic scope, in a page or two.
    • Preliminary project scope statement. The high level objectives, which must be clear, actionable and measurable, plus the constraints and assumptions, the product requirements, the initial risks, the preliminary estimated cost, the approval requirements, the acceptance criteria, the project boundaries, the deliverables and an initial WBS.
    • Project scope statement. The justification, the product and its specification, the deliverables, the SMART objectives and the key success factors, agreed with the stakeholders. Produced by scope definition, which subdivides the major components to improve the accuracy of cost, time and resource estimates, to define a baseline for performance measurement, and to make responsibility clear.
    • Work breakdown structure. The deliverables decomposed into work packages.
    • WBS dictionary. Describes each WBS component: its work, its owner, its deliverable, its cost and its time.

    That chain is the answer: from a paragraph of authority in the charter to a costed, owned work package in the dictionary.

    What is the significance of scope verification in project scope management? asked 1×

    Ch 72+2 marks2079 Bhadra Q4b

    Scope verification is the process of formally accepting the finished project outcomes, the deliverables. Its significance is that it turns we think it is done into the customer's documented acceptance: it is the project's defensible definition of done, the trigger for payment, and the record of how much was completed if the project stops early.

    What it includes

    • Formal acceptance of the project scope by the stakeholders: the sponsor, the client, the customer.
    • Reviewing the outcomes and work results to make sure everything was completed correctly and satisfactorily.
    • Determining completion, especially where a project ends early; the process should document the level and extent of completion.
    InputsTools and techniquesOutputs
    Project scope statement; WBS dictionary; project scope management plan; the outcomes, that is the deliverablesInspection: measuring, examining and verifying the work and confirming that the results meet the requirements and the acceptance criteria. It is also called product review, review, audit or walkthroughAccepted deliverables; requested changes; recommended corrective actions

    It is not quality control. Scope verification is about acceptance by the customer; quality control is about correctness against the specification.

    Short note: Responsibility assignment matrix asked 1×

    Ch 73x3 marks2072 Chaitra Q10

    A responsibility assignment matrix (RAM) is a matrix that maps the work of the project, described in the WBS, to the people responsible for performing it. It is also known as the RACI matrix.

    • R, responsible: who does the task.
    • A, accountable: who signs off on the task, or has the authority for it.
    • C, consulted: who has information needed to complete it.
    • I, informed: who needs to be told of its status and results.
    ActivityPerson 1Person 2Person 3Person 4Person 5
    DefineARII, CI
    DesignIARCC
    DevelopIARCC
    TestAI, RIRI
    ImplementationIRACI

    One A per row. Several people can be responsible, but if two are accountable, nobody is. On smaller projects assign individual people to WBS activities; on very large ones assign the work to organisational units or teams. The WBS breaks down the work, the organisational breakdown structure breaks down the organisation, and the RAM is the grid where the two meet.

    Short note: Scope Creep asked 1×

    Ch 75x3 marks2081 Bhadra Q8

    Scope creep is uncontrolled change to the project scope: small additions that are absorbed informally, build up, and then surprise the team with budget, schedule and resource impacts. It must be managed through the formal change control process, which is exactly what separates creep from an approved change.

    • Causes: poor change control; poor initial identification or documentation of the required features; a weak project manager or executive sponsor.
    • How to reduce it: sort the requirements into must haves and nice to haves; set the project expectations; agree the deliverables and document them; document and review the business requirements.

    Best practice for avoiding scope problems: keep the scope realistic and do not make projects so large they cannot be completed; involve the users in scope management; use off the shelf hardware and software wherever possible; and follow good project management processes. The key reason for IT project failure is poor project scope management, and good scope management needs strong user involvement, executive support, a clear statement of requirements and a process for managing scope changes.

    Short note: Statement of works (SOW) asked 1×

    Ch 73x4 marks2076 Chaitra Q7

    A statement of work (SOW) is a legally binding document that captures and defines all the work management aspects of the project. It is one of the inputs to the project charter.

    • Business need: why the organisation needs the project.
    • Product description: what the project will produce.
    • Strategic plan: how the project supports the organisation's strategy. Organisations often run a SWOT analysis for this part, with managers from outside the IT department helping.

    The sections of a SOW

    • Introduction: the basics, whether it is a service or a product, and who the parties are.
    • Project overview and objectives: why the project is being done.
    • Scope of work: the work needed to complete the project.
    • Task list: the tasks, broken into phases.
    • Project schedule.
    • Project deliverables.
    • Adoption plan: how the deliverables will be put into place.
    • Project management: payment and administrative work.
    • Success criteria and sign off.

    What are different ways/approaches to prepare a work breakdown structure for a project? asked 1×

    Ch 75 marks2070 Chaitra Q3b

    There are five approaches to preparing a work breakdown structure, and most real projects use more than one of them together.

    • Using guidelines. Some organisations provide guidelines for preparing WBSs, and following them is the fastest route where they exist.
    • The analogy approach. Review the WBS of a similar past project and customise it.
    • The top down approach. Start with the largest items and break them down.
    • The bottom up approach. Start with the specific tasks and roll them up into groups.
    • Mind mapping. Branches radiating out from a core idea, used to structure the thoughts before they are put into a hierarchy.

    Its inputs, tools and outputs: the project scope statement, scope management plan, organisational process assets and approved change requests go in; WBS templates and decomposition are applied; and the WBS, the WBS dictionary, the scope baseline, an updated scope statement and scope management plan, and requested changes come out.

    How does it affect the work estimate of tasks/activities? asked 1×

    Ch 72+3 marks2079 Bhadra Q3b

    A WBS changes the estimate because it changes what is being estimated: many small, well understood work packages instead of one large, vague project.

    • Smaller tasks are easier to estimate, so estimates made on work packages are far more accurate than a single estimate for the whole project.
    • It makes missed work visible. Estimation errors add project risk, and a missing branch shows up in a hierarchy in a way it never does in a paragraph.
    • It fixes who estimates. The estimate is made by the team and adjusted by experts, and it is the work effort per person that is estimated, not the duration of the task.
    • It fixes the order of estimating: scope or size first, then time, then cost.
    • It sets the baseline. Subdividing improves the accuracy of cost, time and resource estimates and defines the baseline against which performance is later measured.
    • The 8/80 rule keeps the packages in the range where an estimate is meaningful, between 8 and 80 hours.

    How we calculate probability index for a project? asked 1×

    Ch 82+2 marks2079 Bhadra Q4a

    The probability index is the z score that says how likely the project is to finish by a target date. It is computed from the PERT expected duration and the variance of the critical activities.

    • Find the critical path and its expected duration, Te, the sum of the expected times te on it.
    • Project variance V is the sum of the variances of the critical activities only.
    • Standard deviation is the square root of V.
    • The probability index: z = (T - Te) divided by the standard deviation, where T is the target date.
    • Read P(Z at most z) from the normal table.
    te = (o + 4m + p) / 6 variance = ((p - o) / 6)^2 Te = sum of te on the critical path V = sum of the variances of the critical activities z = (T - Te) / sqrt(V)

    Add variances, never standard deviations, and count only the critical activities. As a sanity check, a target later than Te must give more than 50 percent and an earlier one less.

    Worked example. Critical path A, C, F, G with Te = 28 weeks; variances 1 + 4/9 + 1/9 + 4/9 = 2, so the standard deviation is 1.414. For a 30 week target, z = (30 - 28) / 1.414 = 1.41, and P = 92.07 percent: a 92 percent chance of finishing within 30 weeks, and an 8 percent chance of running later.

    Define the terms resource histogram, resource levelling limited resource allocation and work break structure. asked 1×

    Ch 8CE 701, not your syllabus2+2+2+2 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q3b

    Four scheduling terms, defined.

    • Resource histogram. A bar chart of how much of a resource, such as people or machines, the schedule needs in each time period. Its peaks show where a resource is over committed and its valleys show idle capacity.
    • Resource levelling. Moving activities within their float so that resource demand is smoothed and stays within what is available. Levelling within float keeps the project duration; if the peaks cannot be removed within float, the duration grows.
    • Limited resource allocation, also called resource constrained scheduling. Scheduling when a resource cannot exceed a fixed limit: activities are scheduled in priority order, usually least float first, only while the resource is available, so the project duration is stretched to fit the resource rather than the resource bought to fit the schedule.
    • Work breakdown structure. The systematic breakdown of the major project work into smaller, more manageable components in hierarchical order, where the lowest level is the work package.

    How they connect: the WBS gives the activities, the schedule gives their timing, the histogram shows the resource load of that timing, and levelling or limited allocation fixes the overloads.

    Short note: Arrow Diagramming Method asked 1×

    Ch 83x3 marks2069 Chaitra Q15

    The arrow diagramming method (ADM), also called activity on arrow, is a network technique in which each activity is drawn as an arrow and the nodes are events, the start and end points of activities. It supports finish to start dependencies only.

    • How the exam gives it: as a table of node pairs such as (1, 2), (2, 3). Convert it by the rule that an activity depends on every activity whose end node is its start node, which turns any arrow table into an ordinary predecessor table.
    • Dummy activity: an imaginary activity drawn as a dotted arrow that consumes no time, manpower, material or other resource. It has two uses: a grammatical one, where two activities share the same start and end events and a dummy gives each its own pair, and a logical one, to show a dependency the arrows alone cannot.
    • Fulkerson's rule for numbering events: number the start event 1, delete the arrows leaving it, give the next numbers to the events that now have no incoming arrows, and repeat. Every arrow then runs from a lower number to a higher one.

    ADM is the older method; the precedence diagramming method, where activities are boxes, is what project management software uses.

    Short note: Application of CPM asked 1×

    Ch 85x3 marks2081 Baishakh Q14

    The critical path method is a network diagramming technique that predicts the total project duration by finding the longest path through the network. Its applications are these.

    • Predicts the project duration, and the start and finish dates of every activity.
    • Identifies the critical activities, the ones management must watch most closely, because a delay in any of them delays the project.
    • Shows the float of the others, and so the freedom to delay them or to move their resources elsewhere.
    • Supports schedule compression. Crashing and fast tracking are applied to critical activities, because compressing anything else buys nothing.
    • Guides resource levelling and control, since delays on the critical path are the ones that matter.
    • Fits best where durations are fairly certain, as in construction.

    Short note: Critical Chain Scheduling asked 1×

    Ch 82x6 marks2070 Ashad Q16

    Critical chain scheduling is a scheduling method that considers limited resources and includes buffers to protect the project completion date. A buffer is additional time to complete a task.

    • The key move. It removes the buffers hidden inside individual tasks and creates shared ones instead.
    • Project buffer: time added before the project's due date.
    • Feeding buffers: time added before tasks on the critical chain, where other chains feed into it.
    • Why it helps. People pad their own estimates and then use the padding anyway, because work expands to fill the time. Pooling the padding into visible buffers protects the finish date, and how fast the buffers are being consumed becomes the early warning signal.
    • Critical chain against critical path. The critical path looks only at logical dependencies; the critical chain also counts resource dependencies, such as one tester needed by two activities at the same time.

    Short note: Critical path analysis asked 1×

    Ch 84x5 marks2070 Chaitra Q9

    Critical path analysis, the critical path method, is a network diagramming technique used to predict the total project duration. The critical path is the series of activities that determines the earliest time the project can be completed: the longest path through the network, carrying the least slack or float.

    • Slack or float is the time an activity can be delayed without delaying a succeeding activity or the project finish date. On the critical path the total float is zero.
    • The three steps: draw a good network diagram; add the durations of the activities along each path through it; the longest path is the critical path.

    The four times of every activity are the earliest start, the earliest finish, the latest start and the latest finish, written in the papers as EST, EFT, LST and LFT.

    FORWARD PASS (left to right: early times) EF = ES + duration ES of a successor = EF of its predecessor at a MERGE, ES = the LARGEST preceding EF start activities: ES = 0 BACKWARD PASS (right to left: late times) LS = LF - duration LF of a predecessor = LS of its successor at a BURST, LF = the SMALLEST succeeding LS last activities: LF = project duration

    Maximum forward, minimum backward. Going forward an activity waits for its slowest predecessor; going backward it must finish before its tightest successor needs to start. As a check, at least one complete chain from start to end must have ES equal to LS on every activity; if none does, there is an arithmetic slip. If a critical activity takes longer than planned, the whole schedule slips unless the manager takes corrective action.

    Why cost control is important in project? asked 1×

    Ch 9CE 701, not your syllabus3+4 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q4b

    Cost control is monitoring cost performance, ensuring that only appropriate changes are included in a revised cost baseline, and informing stakeholders of authorised changes that affect cost. It matters because without it overruns are the norm.

    • Overruns are the norm without it. IT projects average a 27 percent cost overrun.
    • Money is finite. Overruns must stay within the authorised funding, or the project stops.
    • Early warning. Variances found early are cheap to correct.
    • The budget stays honest, because only approved changes enter the baseline.
    • Stakeholders stay informed of the changes that affect cost, and the profit is protected.

    The control measures: influence the factors that cause changes to the cost baseline; agree every requested change and manage the actual changes as they occur; keep overruns within the authorised funding, period by period and in total; monitor cost performance to detect and understand variances; record every appropriate change accurately against the baseline; and act to bring expected overruns within acceptable limits.

    The two methods are the cost change control system, the procedures by which the cost baseline may be changed, documented in the cost management plan and integrated with integrated change control; and performance evaluation analysis, which is earned value management.

    Derive the formulas that are used in schedule and cost performance, explain their significances. asked 1×

    Ch 91+3+3 marks2072 Kartik Q4

    Every earned value measure compares EV with something else. Against AC it measures cost; against PV it measures schedule. Subtracting gives the gap in money, which is a variance; dividing gives efficiency, which is an index. Two pairs and two operators make the four core formulas, and that is the derivation.

    VARIANCES (subtract: money; positive is good) CV = EV - AC = BCWP - ACWP cost variance negative: over budget SV = EV - PV = BCWP - BCWS schedule variance negative: behind schedule INDICES (divide: a ratio; above 1 is good) CPI = EV / AC = BCWP / ACWP cost performance below 1: over budget SPI = EV / PV = BCWP / BCWS schedule performance below 1: behind schedule FORECASTS EAC = BAC / CPI estimate at completion revised duration = original duration / SPI ETC = EAC - AC estimate to complete VAC = BAC - EAC variance at completion PERCENTAGES CV% = CV / EV x 100 SV% = SV / PV x 100

    Their significance. CV and CPI say whether the money is buying the planned work. SV and SPI say whether the work is where the plan said it would be. EAC, ETC and VAC say where the project will end up if nothing changes: if performance continues at CPI, the whole budget will cost BAC divided by CPI.

    Two traps. A negative SV means behind schedule, not over budget: a project can be over budget and ahead of schedule at the same time. And SPI is measured in money, not in time: an SPI of 0.8 means 80 percent of the planned value has been earned.

    Write about aspects of IT project estimation. asked 1×

    Ch 92+3 marks2080 Bhadra Q8

    IT project estimation has six aspects, and they are the reason estimates are built on the WBS rather than on the project as a whole.

    • Define the scope first. Once the scope is fixed, time and cost are far easier to estimate.
    • Smaller tasks are easier to estimate, which is exactly why estimates are built on the work packages of the WBS.
    • Every estimation error adds project risk, so a missed piece of work is not only a cost problem.
    • Estimate by the team, then modify by experts. The people doing the work make the estimate and an expert reviews it.
    • Estimate the work effort per person, not the task duration. Duration is effort plus elapsed time, and the two are rarely equal.
    • Three types of estimation, in order: scope or size first, then time, then cost.

    Define concept of project appraisal. asked 1×

    Ch 9CE 701, not your syllabus2+7+3 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q2

    Project appraisal is the independent assessment of a project proposal before it is approved and money is committed. It judges the project's technical, financial, economic, commercial, managerial, social and environmental soundness, and it decides whether the project should be accepted, modified or rejected.

    • Technical: is the design, technology and scale workable?
    • Financial: will it pay back, by net present value, return on investment and payback period?
    • Economic: is it worth doing for the country, in shadow prices?
    • Managerial: can the organisation actually run it?
    • Social and environmental: who gains, who loses, and what damage is done?

    It sits between the feasibility study, which asks whether the project can be done, and the investment decision, which asks whether it should be.

    Differentiate between Bilateral, Multilateral and Joint Venture project with example? asked 1×

    Ch 9CE 701, not your syllabus4+6 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q1

    The three differ in who puts up the money and who carries the risk.

    BilateralMultilateralJoint venture
    What it isFunded or carried out under an agreement between two governmentsFunded by an agency owned by many countriesTwo or more parties pool capital and share ownership, risk and profit
    PartiesA donor country and the host countryThe World Bank, the Asian Development Bank, United Nations agenciesCompanies or governments, often one local and one foreign
    TermsSet by the two governments, and may be tied to the donor's goods or expertsThe agency's own procurement and safeguard rulesA joint venture agreement, or a jointly owned company
    ExampleA road built with one friendly country's grantA water supply project financed by the Asian Development BankA hydropower company owned by a Nepali and a foreign firm

    Also explain input analysis of project formulation. asked 1×

    Ch 9CE 701, not your syllabus2+7+3 marks2070 Ashad CE 701 Q2

    Input analysis in project formulation is the study of every input the project will need over its life, so that the estimates and the feasibility rest on inputs that can actually be obtained.

    • Materials: raw materials and components.
    • Labour: skilled and unskilled.
    • Machinery and equipment.
    • Utilities: power, water, fuel, communications.
    • Land and buildings.
    • Finance.

    For each input the analysis records the quantity, the quality, the sources, the availability and the cost. An input that cannot be obtained on time, in the quality needed and at the assumed price, is a project risk before the project has even started.

    Short note: Break-even Point asked 1×

    Ch 92.5x4 marks2074 Chaitra Q8

    The break even point is the level of output or sales at which total revenue equals total cost, so there is neither profit nor loss: net income is zero.

    BEP (units) = F / (p - v) (p - v) = contribution per unit BEP (sales) = F / (1 - v/p) (1 - v/p) = contribution margin ratio F = fixed costs, which do not change with output v = variable cost per unit p = price per unit Example: F = Rs 2,00,000, p = Rs 500, v = Rs 300 a unit BEP = 2,00,000 / (500 - 300) = 1,000 units = Rs 5,00,000 of sales

    On a graph, the total revenue line and the total cost line, which starts at F, cross at the break even point; to the left is the loss area and to the right the profit area.

    Uses: judging whether a project or product can ever pay, setting a minimum sales target, pricing, and computing the margin of safety, which is actual sales minus break even sales. In time terms, the break even point of a project is where the cumulative inflows equal the investment, which is the payback period.

    Limits: it assumes a constant price and a constant variable cost per unit, and fixed costs that do not change with output.

    Why the cost estimation for software project is a bit complex? asked 1×

    Ch 93+5+2 marks2075 Chaitra Q4

    Cost estimation for a software project is complex because the product is invisible while it is being built, and because the people estimating are under pressure to answer before they can know.

    • Estimates are made too quickly, before the requirements are understood.
    • People lack estimating experience.
    • People are biased towards underestimation.
    • Management wants an accuracy the information cannot give, and asks for a single number where only a range exists.
    • The product is intangible, so progress is hard to see and hard to measure.
    • Requirements change during the project, which invalidates the basis of the estimate.
    • Productivity varies widely between developers, far more than in most other engineering work.
    • Much of the work is invisible in size measures: design, testing and integration do not show up in lines of code.

    The remedy is a contingency reserve held against these known problems, plus estimating on the WBS, three point estimates instead of single numbers, and calibration against the organisation's own past projects.

    Compare: Bar chart vs. process control chart as quality control tools asked 1×

    Ch 104x4 marks2076 Chaitra Q5

    A bar chart compares sizes across categories; a process control chart follows one measure over time against limits. One asks which category is the biggest, the other asks whether the process is stable.

    Bar chartProcess control chart
    ShowsSizes compared across categories: defects by module, complaints by typeOne measure over time, against a centre line and control limits
    Horizontal axisCategories, or bins for a histogramTime, or sample number
    LimitsNoneUpper and lower control limits calculated from the data
    QuestionWhich category is largest?Is the process stable, in control?
    SignalThe tallest barsA point outside a limit, or seven in a row on one side
    Quality useSummarise and prioritise; a Pareto chart is a sorted bar chartMonitor a running process and trigger action
    TimeUsually a snapshotBuilt for a time series

    Used together: the control chart shows that defects jumped out of control in week 7, and a bar chart of that week's defects shows which type caused it.

    Compare: Boxplot vs. histogram analysis asked 1×

    Ch 104x4 marks2075 Chaitra Q5

    A box plot is a picture of one variable's five number summary: minimum, first quartile, median, third quartile and maximum. The box spans the middle half of the data, a line marks the median, the whiskers reach the values within 1.5 times the interquartile range, and anything beyond them is plotted as an outlier. A histogram shows the same variable as adjacent bars, one per bin.

    Box plotHistogram
    VariablesOneOne
    ShowsA summary: median, quartiles, range and outliersThe shape: how many values fall in each bin, with the peaks and the skew
    OutliersMarked one by oneHidden inside the end bins
    ChoicesNone: the summary is fixedThe bin width, which can change the picture
    Comparing groupsMany boxes side by side on one axisOne chart per group
    Best forComparing spread across groups: load time per server, defects per moduleSeeing whether one process is centred and symmetric

    The caution: a box plot hides the shape inside the box, so two peaks look like one.

    Compare: Data analysis using Box plot versus Scatter plot asked 1×

    Ch 104x3 marks2078 Bhadra Q6

    A box plot summarises one variable; a scatter plot puts one variable on each axis to show whether two are related. One answers how the data is spread, the other whether two things move together.

    Box plotScatter plot
    VariablesOne numeric variable, per groupTwo numeric variables, paired
    QuestionHow is it spread out, and are there outliers?Are the two related, and how strongly?
    ReadingMedian, interquartile range, whisker length, outlier pointsThe pattern: rising, falling or none; tight or loose
    Quality useCompare process variation between teams, servers or releasesTest a cause and effect theory: code size against defects
    CautionHides the shape inside the box, so two peaks look like oneA relationship does not prove that one variable causes the other

    Compare: Consistency vs. completeness in requirements engineering asked 1×

    Ch 103x3 marks2072 Chaitra Q9

    Completeness asks whether anything is missing from the requirements; consistency asks whether anything in them conflicts. Both are qualities of a good requirements specification, and they are independent of each other.

    CompletenessConsistency
    MeaningEverything needed is specified: all functions, constraints and data, and the response to every input, valid and invalid, with nothing left to be decidedNo requirement contradicts another or a higher level document, and every term is used in the same sense throughout
    The questionIs anything missing?Does anything conflict?
    A typical defectNo rule for what happens when a fee payment failsReports export to PDF in one section and Excel only in another; user meaning student in one place and staff in another
    Checked againstThe stakeholders' needs: is every need covered?The document itself, and the documents above it
    How it is checkedReviews against a template or checklist, use case coverage, traceability back to the needsCross reference reviews, a glossary, a requirements traceability matrix, formal or tool checks

    They pull against each other: every requirement added for completeness is one more that could conflict, so each needs its own check. A specification can be consistent but incomplete, or complete but inconsistent.

    Compare: Control charts vs. Cause and effect charts for quality assessment asked 1×

    Ch 103x3 marks2073 Shrawan Q8

    A control chart is quantitative and detects that something is wrong; a cause and effect chart is qualitative and explains why.

    Control chartCause and effect, fishbone, chart
    NatureQuantitative: a graph of measured dataQualitative: a diagram built by brainstorming
    PurposeDetect whether the variation is random or notFind the possible root causes of a known problem
    InputMeasurements over timeThe team's knowledge of the process
    ResultIn control, or a signal to investigateCauses grouped by category, and the root causes among them
    When usedContinuouslyAfter a problem has been found

    The three work in sequence: the control chart signals that something is wrong, the Pareto chart shows which problem matters most, and the fishbone explains why it happens.

    Compare: Control chart versus Pareto chart tools in project quality management asked 1×

    Ch 104x4 marks2081 Bhadra Q5

    A control chart asks whether the process is stable; a Pareto chart asks what to fix first. One watches, the other prioritises.

    Control chartPareto chart
    ShowsOne process measure over time, with control limitsDefect causes ranked by frequency, with a cumulative line
    QuestionIs the process stable?What should we fix first?
    Horizontal axisTimeCause categories
    Built onStatistics: limits calculated from the data, and the seven run ruleThe 80/20 rule
    When usedContinuously, while the process runsWhen choosing the improvement work
    ResultIn control, or out of controlThe vital few causes

    A control chart is a graphic display of data showing the results of a process over time against a centre line and control limits. Its main use is to prevent defects rather than to detect or reject them. In control means the variation comes from random events and no adjustment is needed; out of control means the variation is non random, so the causes must be found and removed. The seven run rule says that seven points in a row all above the mean, all below it, or all rising or all falling, must be investigated even when every point is inside the limits.

    Compare: Root cause analysis versus SWOT analysis asked 1×

    Ch 104x4 marks2082 Baishakh Q3

    Root cause analysis explains a problem that has already happened; SWOT analysis prepares for what could happen. One is backward looking and operational, the other forward looking and strategic.

    Root cause analysisSWOT analysis
    QuestionWhy did this problem happen?Where do we stand, and what should we do?
    DirectionBackward: it diagnoses something that has already gone wrongForward: it informs strategy and plans
    FocusOne specific problem or defectThe whole organisation or project: inside, strengths and weaknesses, and outside, opportunities and threats
    ToolsFive whys, fishbone diagram, Pareto chartA two by two grid
    OutputRoot causes, and corrective and preventive actions Strategies: use the strengths, fix the weaknesses, take the opportunities, counter the threats
    When usedAfter a failure or defect, in quality control and in riskIn planning, project selection and risk identification
    LevelOperationalStrategic

    Discuss quality control process and its major outputs. asked 1×

    Ch 105 marks2069 Chaitra Q10

    Quality control is monitoring specific project results to determine whether they comply with the relevant quality standards, and identifying ways to eliminate the causes of unsatisfactory performance. It is a monitoring and controlling process, and it is about the product rather than the process.

    Its three major outputs

    • Acceptance decisions. Each work item is either accepted or rejected; rejected items may need rework.
    • Rework. Action to bring a defective item into conformance with its requirements. It is expensive, which is why the aim is to need less of it.
    • Process adjustments. Immediate corrective or preventive changes to the process, decided from the quality control measurements.

    Its inputs are the quality management plan, the quality metrics and checklists, the organisational process assets, work performance information, approved change requests and the deliverables. Its tools are the cause and effect diagram, control charts, flowcharting, the histogram, the Pareto chart, the run chart, the scatter diagram, statistical sampling, inspection and defect repair review. Its full output list adds quality control measurements, validated defect repair, updates to the quality baseline, recommended corrective and preventive actions, requested changes and validated deliverables.

    Inspection examines a work product through a review, a test or a walkthrough; statistical sampling checks a random sample instead of every item, when checking all of them would cost too much.

    Short note: Cause and effect diagram asked 1×

    Ch 102.5x4 marks2074 Chaitra Q8

    A cause and effect diagram is a tool for analysing the causes of a problem in order to find its root cause. It is also called a fishbone or Ishikawa diagram: the effect, written as the problem statement, sits at the head on the right, and the causes, grouped into major categories, come off the backbone on the left.

    Creating one, in six steps

    • Draw the problem statement in the box at the right hand end of the backbone.
    • Draw the major cause categories on the left, joined to the backbone.
    • Brainstorm the causes.
    • Categorise them, placing each on the right bone.
    • Determine deeper causes by asking why each cause happens.
    • Identify the root causes: the ones that appear repeatedly, chosen by group consensus or by frequency of occurrence.

    Categories: machinery, people, methods and materials, often extended with measurement and environment. For software, use people, process, technology, requirements and environment.

    An IT example. Problem: wrong marks on MIS marksheets. People: data entry errors, no training. Methods: no double check of entries. Technology: a rounding bug in the grade function. Requirements: the grading rule was never written down. The rounding bug and the unwritten rule both appear twice, so they are the root causes.

    Short note: PDCA cycle asked 1×

    Ch 104x2.5 marks2082 Baishakh Q8

    The PDCA cycle is a four step, repeating method for continuous improvement: Plan, Do, Check, Act. It grew from Walter Shewhart's work and was spread by W. Edwards Deming, so it is also called the Shewhart or Deming cycle; Deming later preferred Study to Check, making it PDSA.

    • Plan. Find the problem or the opportunity, analyse its causes, and plan a change together with the result it should give.
    • Do. Carry out the change on a small scale, as a pilot, and collect data.
    • Check. Compare the results with the objective, and learn what worked.
    • Act. If it worked, make it the standard and spread it; if not, adjust the plan and begin again.

    An IT example. Plan: a Pareto chart shows login failures are 45 percent of MIS defects, the cause is a short session timeout, so plan a longer timeout aiming to halve the failures. Do: change it for one department for two weeks. Check: failures there fell by 70 percent. Act: roll it out to all departments, update the configuration standard, and start the next cycle on the next bar of the Pareto chart.

    Where it appears: it is the engine of Kaizen and of TQM, Six Sigma's DMAIC follows the same pattern, and the ISO management system standards are built on it.

    Short note: Quality Audit Plan asked 1×

    Ch 103x5 marks2072 Kartik Q10

    A quality audit is a structured review of process management and product development activities. Its goal is to identify lessons learned that can improve the performance of the project within the performing organisation.

    • Why: audits help organisations grow and prosper, and give a mechanism to evaluate the efficiency of the business.
    • When and by whom: scheduled or random, in house or independent.
    • Types: post project review; internal project process review; external regulator or customer audit; internal corporate quality group audit.

    The approach, and where the audit plan sits

    • Planning. Prepare the audit plan that will guide the execution: its scope, criteria, team and schedule.
    • Preparation. The auditors study the organisation's quality management system through its documentation.
    • Execution. Collect the information that shows whether the quality standards are met.
    • Conclusion and follow up. The audit team reviews the problem areas and recommends corrections. Here the real work begins: an audit that is not followed up changes nothing.

    What the audit checks: that the planned quality is met and the products are safe and fit for use; that all laws and regulations are followed and the design is correct; that the data systems are accurate and adequate; and that preventive measures are planned and corrective action is taken when required.

    Short note: Six sigma asked 1×

    Ch 105x4 marks2071 Chaitra Q10

    Six Sigma is a quality management methodology that improves processes, reduces waste and errors, and increases customer satisfaction. Driven by data and statistical analysis, it improves the output of a process by identifying and removing the causes of defects and minimising variability. Sigma is the standard deviation, and a Six Sigma process produces no more than 3.4 defects per million opportunities.

    DMAIC, to improve an existing process

    • Define the problem, the customer, the requirements, the goals, the scope and the timeline.
    • Measure current performance, with a data collection plan for defects and metrics.
    • Analyse the process to find the root causes of variation and defects.
    • Improve the process by removing those root causes.
    • Control the new process with a control plan, so it does not slip back into old habits.

    DMADV, also called Design for Six Sigma, to create a new product or process: Define realistic goals that suit the customer's requirements or the business strategy; Measure the critical to quality requirements and turn them into project goals; Analyse the options and alternatives with their estimated life cycle; Design at a high level, then in detail, into a prototype that exposes errors; and Verify that customers approve the final product and that it performs as designed.

    What are tools and techniques for Total Quality Management? asked 1×

    Ch 104+3 marks2073 Shrawan Q7

    The tools and techniques of TQM fall into two groups: the charts and sheets that measure the process, and the analyses that point it at the customer and the market.

    • Charts and sheets: the Pareto chart, the scatter plot, the control chart, the fishbone or Ishikawa diagram, the histogram, the check list and the check sheet.
    • Analyses: assessment of customer need, market analysis, competition analysis, workflow analysis and logistic analysis.

    The charts are how TQM manages by facts rather than by opinion, and the analyses are how it keeps the definition of quality anchored to the customer rather than to the team's own taste.

    Compare: Status reporting vs. progress reporting asked 1×

    Ch 114x4 marks2075 Chaitra Q5

    A status report is a snapshot: where does the project stand now? A progress report is a change: what has the team accomplished during this period?

    Status reportProgress report
    QuestionWhere does the project stand now?What has the team accomplished during this period?
    NatureA snapshot at one dateA change between two dates
    ComparesActual scope, time and cost against the baseline todayWork completed this period against what was planned for the period
    Typical contentThe earned value position, CV, SV, CPI and SPI, open issues and risksTasks and deliverables completed, percent complete, and the work planned for next period
    ReaderSponsors and senior managers: are we on track?Project manager and team: are we moving as planned?
    ExampleWeek 20: 40 percent complete against 45 percent planned, CPI 0.95This fortnight: login and results modules finished, 8 percent more of the work done

    The third kind of report is forecasting, which predicts where the project will end: the expected finish date and the estimate at completion.

    Compare: Traceability vs. Adaptability in reviewing steps asked 1×

    Ch 113x3 marks2073 Shrawan Q8

    Traceability is following each requirement forward to its design, code and tests and back again; adaptability is the ability of the system or the process to absorb change quickly and cheaply. In a review they ask different questions.

    TraceabilityAdaptability
    MeaningFollowing each requirement forward to its design, code and tests, and back from any change to everything it affectsThe ability to accommodate change quickly and cheaply
    In a review it asksIs every requirement implemented and tested, and is every item justified by a requirement?Can this design or plan absorb the changes we expect without rework?
    ToolThe traceability matrixModular design, loose coupling, iterative and agile processes, change control
    GivesReliable impact analysis, an audit trail, proof of coverageSpeed of change, and responsiveness to users
    CostDocumentation effort, and slower changeCan lose the record of why things are as they are
    Most valued inRegulated, safety or contract bound projectsVolatile requirements and fast moving products

    A traceability matrix is a table that ties together requirements, functional specifications, tasks, test cases, source code and other artefacts, so the team can see the relationships and study the impact of a proposed change.

    They pull against each other, and support each other. Heavy traceability slows change, yet good traceability is what makes a change safe, because its impact is known. The balance depends on how regulated and how changeable the project is.

    Discuss about project communication management process. asked 1×

    Ch 112+2 marks2080 Bhadra Q12

    Project communication management has four processes, in the order a project meets them.

    • Communications planning. Determining the information and communications needs of the stakeholders: who needs what information, when they will need it, and how it will be given to them. Its output is the communication management plan.
    • Information distribution. Making the needed information available in a timely manner, by carrying out the communication management plan and responding to unexpected requests.
    • Performance reporting. Collecting and disseminating performance information, so the stakeholders know how resources are being used to achieve the objectives.
    • Administrative closure. Generating, gathering and circulating information to formalise the completion of a phase or of the project.

    Communications planning in detail. Its inputs are the environmental factors, the organisational process assets, the scope statement, the project management plan, and the constraints and assumptions. Its tools are communication requirement analysis and communications technologies. Its output is the communication management plan.

    Communication requirement analysis sums up the information needs of the stakeholders, and the number of channels measures how complex the communication will be.

    n ( n - 1 ) number of channels = ------------- n = number of people involved 2 2 people -> 1 channel 5 people -> 10 channels 3 people -> 3 channels 10 people -> 45 channels 4 people -> 6 channels 20 people -> 190 channels

    Channels grow roughly with the square of the team, so doubling a team from 10 to 20 takes the channels from 45 to 190, four times as many. That is why large teams need a formal communication structure.

    As a project manager, how do you write effective email? asked 1×

    Ch 112+2 marks2080 Bhadra Q12

    Email is effective when it is the right medium, reaches only the people who need it, and can be found again later.

    • Make sure email is the right medium for what you want to say. Conflict and negative behaviour are not email subjects.
    • Send it to the right people, and do not copy everyone by reflex.
    • Use meaningful subjects, so the message can be found and sorted. For example: MIS release 2.1: approval needed by Friday.
    • Limit the content to one main subject, and be as clear and concise as possible.
    • Limit the number and size of attachments.
    • Delete email you do not need, and do not open it if you question the source.
    • Keep your virus software up to date.
    • Respond to and file emails quickly.
    • Learn to use the important features of your email tool.

    Explain about the necessity of information distribution and its tools and techniques. asked 1×

    Ch 115 marks2070 Ashad Q12

    Information distribution is making the needed information available to the project stakeholders in a timely manner. It includes carrying out the communication management plan and responding to unexpected requests for information.

    Why it is necessary. Getting the right information to the right people at the right time and in a useful format is just as important as developing the information in the first place. Information that exists but does not reach the person who needs it has no value to the project.

    Its tools and techniques

    • Communication skills: writing, speaking, listening and presenting.
    • An information gathering and retrieval system: manual filing, electronic databases, project management software, and systems for technical documents such as drawings, design specifications and test plans.
    • Information distribution methods: meetings, hard copy, email, shared databases and the project web site.
    • The lessons learned process. Lessons learned must be used in future projects. They are discussed at project status review meetings and post mortem meetings, and are most fruitful when the project did not meet expectations. The results are an updated lessons learned knowledge base, input to the knowledge management system, updated policies and procedures, improved business skills, product and service improvements, and an updated risk management plan.

    Its input is the communication management plan; its outputs are updated organisational process assets and requested changes. The distribution considerations are using technology to enhance distribution and mixing formal methods, meaning a project report, with informal ones, meaning face to face.

    Compare: Risk analysis using Decision tree technique versus Simulation technique asked 1×

    Ch 124x3 marks2078 Bhadra Q6

    Trees are for decisions, simulation is for uncertainty. A decision tree asks which option to choose; a Monte Carlo simulation asks what range of outcomes to expect.

    Decision tree, EMVSimulation, Monte Carlo
    QuestionWhich option should we choose?What range of outcomes can we expect, and how likely is each?
    InputsA few discrete decisions and chance events, each with a probability and a valueMany variables, each with a range or a distribution: optimistic, most likely, pessimistic
    MethodMultiply and add along each branch, by handDraw random values and run the model hundreds or thousands of times, by computer
    OutputOne expected value per optionA probability distribution: for example an 80 percent chance of finishing within 38 days
    Best forChoosing between alternatives: build or buy, bid or notThe schedule and cost risk of a whole project
    LimitsGrows unmanageable with many branches; one number hides the spreadNeeds software and good distributions; the results are only as good as the inputs

    Compare: Decision Tree vs. Tornado Analysis for risk management asked 1×

    Ch 123x3 marks2072 Chaitra Q9

    A decision tree chooses between alternatives; a tornado analysis finds which uncertain variables matter most. One decides, the other prioritises.

    Decision treeTornado analysis
    PurposeChoose the best course of action between alternativesFind which uncertain variables affect the outcome most
    Built onExpected monetary value: probability times value, summed per branchSensitivity analysis: vary one variable at a time and record the swing
    PictureA tree, with squares for decisions and circles for chance eventsHorizontal bars, widest at the top
    AnswersWhich option has the highest EMV?Where should risk management attention go first?
    OutputA decision and its expected valueA ranking of the variables

    Together: the tornado finds the variables that matter, and the decision tree then weighs the options for handling them.

    Compare: Cause and effect analysis versus Tornado analysis in project risk management asked 1×

    Ch 124x4 marks2076 Chaitra Q5

    Cause and effect analysis is qualitative and looks backward at why a problem happens; tornado analysis is quantitative and looks forward at which uncertainties could move the outcome most.

    Cause and effect, fishboneTornado analysis
    NatureQualitative: a diagram built by brainstorming Quantitative: a chart of calculated swings
    DirectionBackward: why did, or could, this problem happen?Forward: which uncertainties could move the outcome most?
    InputOne problem or risk event, and the team's knowledgeA model of the outcome, and a low and a high value for each variable
    OutputRoot causes, grouped into categoriesVariables ranked by their impact
    Use in risk managementIdentification: finding the causes behind a riskQuantitative analysis: prioritising the risks with the biggest effect

    Compare: Project risk management plan versus risk response plan asked 1×

    Ch 124x4 marks2081 Bhadra Q5

    The risk management plan is the rulebook for handling risk on the project; the risk response plan is the list of moves for the risks actually on the board.

    Risk management planRisk response plan
    SaysHow risk will be managed on this projectWhat will be done about each identified risk
    Produced byRisk management planning, the first processRisk response planning, the fifth process
    WhenEarly, before any specific risk is knownAfter identification and analysis; it grows as risks are found
    ContentsMethodology, roles and responsibilities, budget, timing, risk categories, how probability and impact are determined, the probability and impact matrix, stakeholder tolerances, reporting formats, trackingFor each risk: the strategy, the actions, the owner, the trigger, the contingency plan, the reserve, and the residual and secondary risks
    LevelThe processThe individual risks
    ChangesRarelyConstantly, with the risk register

    The risk management plan answers: why it is important to take, or not take, this risk; what the specific risk is and what the mitigation deliverables are; how it will be mitigated; who is responsible; when the milestones of the mitigation occur; and how much resource is needed.

    Compare: Sensitivity analysis vs SWOT analysis asked 1×

    Ch 124x4 marks2076 Ashwin Q7

    Sensitivity analysis is quantitative and looks inside the project's own numbers; SWOT analysis is qualitative and looks at the project's position, inside and outside.

    Sensitivity analysisSWOT analysis
    NatureQuantitative: numbers in a modelQualitative: judgments in a two by two grid
    Looks atThe project's own variables: cost, duration, demandInternal strengths and weaknesses, external opportunities and threats
    MethodChange one variable at a time and measure the effect on the outcomeList and discuss the factors in each quadrant
    OutputWhich variables matter most, shown as a tornado diagramBroad positive and negative risks, and a strategy
    StageQuantitative risk analysisRisk identification and planning
    ToolA spreadsheetA meeting and a grid

    Explain brief one method each for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of risk. asked 1×

    Ch 121+2+1+1+2 marks2080 Baishakh Q5a

    One method from each side, explained.

    Qualitative: the probability and impact matrix. A table of risk level based on the likelihood of occurrence and the potential harm to the project. Each identified risk is placed by its probability, from very low to very high, against its impact, from very low to very high, and the cell gives the risk level. In the numeric version the risk score is probability times impact, so a risk with probability 0.5 and impact 0.40 scores 0.20, which is high. The high cells are the risks that get a response plan and, where the analysis continues, quantitative treatment.

    Probability against impactVery lowLowModerate HighVery high
    Very highMediumMediumHighHigh High
    HighLowMediumMediumHigh High
    ModerateLowMediumMediumMedium High
    LowLowLowLowMediumHigh
    Very lowLowLowLowMedium High

    Quantitative: risk exposure. Determine the probability of each risk, determine the cost to the project if it occurs, and multiply.

    RE = P x C P = probability of the risk C = cost to the project if it occurs Example: 60 reusable components were planned, but only 70% (42) can be reused, so 18 must be built. At 100 lines each and Rs 100 per line: C = 18 x 100 x 100 = Rs 1,80,000 P = 80% RE = 0.80 x 1,80,000 = Rs 1,44,000

    Summed over all the risks, risk exposure sizes the contingency reserve.

    Short note: Risk Register asked 1×

    Ch 123x4 marks2075 Chaitra Q7

    A risk register is a tool of risk and project management used to identify potential risks in a project or an organisation. It holds the outcomes of the risk management processes as they are carried out, and its electronic form is the risk database.

    What it contains: the list of identified risks, the list of potential responses, the root causes of risk, and the updated risk categories.

    Its fields

    • Risk ID: a name or number.
    • Risk description: a brief explanation.
    • Risk category: schedule, budget, technical, external and so on.
    • Risk analysis: the probability and impact, qualitative or quantitative.
    • Risk probability: the likelihood.
    • Risk priority: a score from impact times probability, highest first.
    • Risk response: the action that limits its effect.
    • Risk owner: the team member who deploys the response and supervises it.
    IDRiskCategoryProbabilityImpact PriorityResponseOwner
    R1Departments add requirements after sign offScope 70 percentHigh1Mitigate: change control board, phased releasesProject manager
    R2Lead developer leaves before deliveryPeople40 percentHigh2Mitigate: pair programming, design documents, cross trainingTeam lead
    R3Server purchase delayed by the tender processExternal 50 percentMedium4Transfer: rent cloud hosting instead of buyingProcurement officer

    One owner per risk: a risk owned by the team is owned by nobody. Write every response with a named strategy, mitigate, transfer, accept or avoid, because it shows the register came from a method.

    Short note: Sensitivity analysis asked 1×

    Ch 125x4 marks2071 Chaitra Q10

    Sensitivity analysis shows the effect of changing one or more variables on an outcome. It is used in quantitative risk analysis to find which risks have the most impact on the project, and a spreadsheet is the usual tool.

    • Method: hold everything at its base value, change one uncertain variable between its low and its high value, and record how far the outcome swings. Repeat for each variable, then rank them by the size of the swing.
    • What it gives: the variables at the top of the ranking are the ones that deserve management attention, extra estimating effort and a risk response; the ones at the bottom can be left at their base values.
    • How it is displayed: as a tornado diagram, a bar chart with one horizontal bar per variable, widest at the top.
    • Its limit: it changes one variable at a time, so it misses the effect of two moving together. Monte Carlo simulation is what handles that.

    Describe three typical risks that can occur in a software project and for each of these risks suggest two possible countermeasures. asked 1×

    Ch 128 marks2073 Shrawan Q5

    Three typical risks of a software project, each with two countermeasures labelled by its strategy.

    RiskWhy it happensCountermeasure 1Countermeasure 2
    Requirements volatility: requirements change a lot after development startsUsers cannot say what they want until they see something working, and the business moves during a long projectMitigate: an iterative or agile life cycle, so change is absorbed each iterationMitigate: formal change control through a change control board, so every change is costed and baselined
    Loss of key personnel: a developer with critical knowledge leaves mid projectSmall teams concentrate knowledge in individuals, and the ICT job market is very mobileMitigate: pair programming and code review, so no module has a single owner, and keep the design documents currentMitigate: cross training and a documented handover, with retention incentives tied to milestones
    Technology or integration failure: the platform cannot meet the performance needs, or will not integrate with a legacy systemThe technology was chosen before its limits were tested, and legacy interfaces are often undocumentedMitigate: a proof of concept in the first iteration, before the architecture is fixedAvoid or transfer: choose a proven technology, or contract the integration to the legacy vendor who owns the interface

    Other good choices are cost overrun, mitigated by bottom up estimates and earned value tracking, and schedule slip, mitigated by CPM, frequent monitoring and an experienced project manager.

    Compare: Seller (contractor) selection processes vs. contract closure processes asked 1×

    Ch 134x4 marks2076 Chaitra Q5

    Seller selection opens the contract; contract closure ends it. One chooses and signs, the other verifies and settles.

    Seller selectionContract closure
    WhenAt the start of the contract, in executingAt the end of the contract, in closing
    PurposeChoose a qualified, acceptable seller and sign a contractConfirm the work is done and settle the contract
    InputsProposals, the qualified seller list, the evaluation criteriaThe contract, the procurement documentation, the project management plan
    ToolsEvaluation criteria and weighted scoring, independent estimates, negotiation, seller ratingProcurement audits, negotiated settlements, records management
    OutputThe selected seller and the signed contractA closed procurement and updated process assets
    Main riskChoosing on paper aloneUnsettled claims and missing records

    Discuss about contract types. asked 1×

    Ch 132+2 marks2080 Bhadra Q11

    A contract is a mutually binding agreement that obliges the seller to provide the specified products or services and the buyer to pay for them. Being legally binding, it carries more responsibility to deliver the work as stated.

    TypeHow it worksUse when
    Fixed price, lump sumA fixed total price for a clearly defined good or service; the buyer faces less risk. A fixed price incentive adds a predefined incentive for cost or timeThe requirement is well defined and stable
    Cost reimbursableThe money the contractor spends is paid back during or after the project, plus a feeThe scope cannot be defined up front: research, new development
    Cost plus fixed fee, CPFFAllowable costs plus a fixed fee, usually a percentage of the estimated costs; the fee does not vary with the actual costsScope uncertain, and the fee kept neutral
    Cost plus award fee, CPAFAllowable costs plus an award fee for meeting subjective performance criteriaPerformance matters but is hard to measure
    Cost plus percentage of costs, CPPCAllowable costs plus a predetermined percentage of the total costsRarely: the seller earns more by spending more
    Cost plus incentive fee, CPIFAllowable costs plus a predetermined fee and an incentive bonusThe seller should be motivated to cut cost
    Time and materialA hybrid of fixed price and cost reimbursable, often used for consultantsStaff support, small or urgent work
    Unit priceA set amount per unit of good or service; the quantity needed decides the totalThe unit is well defined but the quantity is not

    Contract type against risk. Buyers have the least risk with fixed price, because they know exactly what they must pay, and the most with cost plus percentage of costs, because they do not know the seller's costs in advance and the seller is encouraged to raise them. For the seller it is the mirror image.

    Point of total assumption. The cost at which the contractor bears full responsibility for every extra rupee of contract cost.

    PTA = (ceiling price - target price) / buyer's share + target cost Example: target cost Rs 10,00,000, target price Rs 11,00,000, ceiling price Rs 12,00,000, buyer's share of any overrun 70%: PTA = (12,00,000 - 11,00,000) / 0.70 + 10,00,000 = Rs 11,42,857 Above that cost, every extra rupee is the seller's.

    What are typical issues to be considered in e-bidding as a procurement processing tool? asked 1×

    Ch 132+4 marks2072 Kartik Q9

    E-procurement is procuring goods, services or construction work through an electronic medium, and e-bidding is bidding through one. Its merits are that it is more transparent, it checks unwarranted pressure on bidding, it promotes free and fair competition, it saves time, and its records are easily extracted for future reference. The issues to consider are these.

    • Security and authentication. Bids must be encrypted until the opening time, and each bidder identified by a digital signature or certificate.
    • Confidentiality and a time lock. Nobody, including the buyer, may see a bid before the public opening.
    • Availability of the system. Portal downtime, power cuts and slow connections near the deadline can shut honest bidders out, so a fallback rule is needed.
    • Access and skills. Small or rural firms may lack connectivity or the skill to bid online, so training and a help desk are needed.
    • Legal validity. Electronic documents, signatures and payments, including the bid security and fees, must be recognised by law and by the procurement rules.
    • File formats and sizes: clear rules for uploads and scanned documents.
    • Audit trail: every action logged, so complaints can be checked.
    • Collusion does not disappear. Online bidding still needs checks for cartels and bid rigging.
    • Cost: building, running, maintaining and securing the system.

    Write step by step procedure for the procurement of goods and services in government/public office in the context of Nepal. asked 1×

    Ch 135 marks2080 Baishakh Q5b

    Procurement in a Nepali public office runs under the Public Procurement Act 2063, as amended by the Public Procurement (Second Amendment) Act 2083, with the Public Procurement Regulations 2064. The regulator is the Public Procurement Monitoring Office (PPMO), which runs the electronic government procurement system, e-GP, the bolpatra portal.

    The methods, chosen by the estimated value against the thresholds in the regulations: open competitive bidding, national or international; sealed quotation; direct procurement; limited bidding; and users' committees for local work. The 2083 amendment adds reverse auction, framework agreements, a government e-marketplace for small direct purchases, and EPC, design and build and turnkey for technically complex projects. Name the method rather than a figure, because the money limits move with nearly every amendment.

    The procedure, step by step

    • Plan the purchase. It must sit in the entity's annual procurement plan with budget for the fiscal year; a large or multi year purchase also needs a master procurement plan.
    • Clear the ground before calling bids. Budget assured, and for construction the site, right of way, utility shifting, compensation and the environmental study settled first. This condition is new in 2083, because tenders were being called for sites the entity did not yet hold.
    • Prepare the documents: specification, cost estimate on government approved norms, bidding documents and a bill of quantities. Simple purchases go in a single envelope, large or complex work in two, technical and financial.
    • Publish the notice on e-GP: at least 21 days for a national bid and 30 for an international one, and 7 and 15 days on a re-bid. Publishing on e-GP now satisfies the notice by itself.
    • Issue the documents and answer questions, holding the pre-bid meeting if one is called and sending every clarification to all bidders alike.
    • Receive the bids with their bid security, through e-GP, by the deadline.
    • Open them in public at the announced time, before the bidders' representatives, and read out the prices.
    • Evaluate: responsiveness and qualification first, price only after that. A bid more than 30 percent below the cost estimate is now dropped after a rate analysis.
    • Pick the winner. For public works the 2083 amendment replaced the lowest bid with the average bid rule: average the surviving bids and award to the one closest to that average, which must still not exceed the cost estimate, a tie being settled by lottery. Where a bidding document does not use that rule, the classic one stands, the lowest evaluated substantially responsive bid.
    • Notify the intention to award, and let the complaint and review period run before the contract is signed.
    • Sign the contract against the performance security. A mobilisation advance is capped at 20 percent, given only against a bank guarantee and a work schedule, and spending it on anything but the work is now a criminal matter.
    • Administer the contract: inspection and quality tests, running bills, variation within the officer's authority, price adjustment, and the contractor's duty to enrol workers in social security and pay wages through a bank.
    • Accept, close and record. Take over the goods or works, release the securities, keep the file. If the contract is terminated, the whole performance security is forfeited and the extra cost of finishing the job is recovered from the contractor.

    What changed in 2083: the award rule for public works moved from lowest bid to the average bid rule; a bid more than 30 percent below the estimate is now rejected after a rate analysis; notice periods fell from 30 and 45 days to 21 and 30; e-GP alone is enough for the notice; readiness, budget, site and clearance, must be proved before bids are called; new methods were added; a misused mobilisation advance is now prosecuted as fraud; and an official who sits on a decision faces departmental action.

    On the award rule, write both, the old and the new, and date them. An older answer is not wrong if it is dated.

    Short note: Seller selection criteria asked 1×

    Ch 134x3 marks2078 Bhadra Q8

    Select sellers is receiving bids or proposals and applying the evaluation criteria to choose one or more sellers who are both qualified and acceptable. It is part of project execution, and its final output is a contract signed by the buyer and the selected seller.

    The selection criteria, also called source selection criteria, are the standards used to rate or score proposals. They are prepared before the formal RFP is published, included in the procurement documents, and each one is weighted to show its importance. Typical weights are technical approach 30 percent, management approach 30 percent, past performance 20 percent and price 20 percent.

    • How the process runs: an initial evaluation of all proposals and bids, then a short list for further evaluation, and shortlisted sellers often prepare a best and final offer.
    • The warning from the notes: do not accept ideas just because they look good on paper. Weigh previous performance and management style.
    • Its tools: expert judgment, independent estimates, contract negotiation, a seller rating system and proposal evaluation techniques.

    A weighted example, two bidders for a college MIS scored out of 10: technical approach weight 30, management approach 20, past performance 20, price 20, support 10. Bidder A scores 8, 7, 9, 6, 7 for a weighted total of 750; bidder B scores 7, 6, 5, 9, 8 for 690. A wins although it is dearer, because its technical approach and past performance outweigh B's price.

    In a public tender the rule is different: after the responsiveness check, the award goes to the lowest evaluated substantially responsive bid, unless the law says otherwise.

    Contract negotiation follows in five stages: protocol, learning about one another; probing, each side stating its main priorities; scratch bargaining, with adjustments; closure, the final agreements after both positions are summarised; and agreement, understood equally by both parties.

    What are the roles of award and assessment in achieving Excellency in project completion, Briefly explain. asked 1×

    Ch 145 marks2069 Chaitra Q14

    Awards recognise excellent projects or organisations against published criteria; assessment measures a project or organisation against a model. Between them they give a project the outside standard it cannot give itself.

    • Awards: the Deming Prize in Japan, the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award in the United States, the EFQM award in Europe, the IPMA Global Project Excellence Award, and PMI's Project of the Year.
    • Assessments: maturity assessments, quality and procurement audits, post project reviews, and the self assessment an award application requires.

    Their roles

    • A benchmark: an external, objective standard of excellence, instead of a team judging itself.
    • Structured self examination: preparing for an award forces the team to review its processes, results and people against the criteria, and to find the gaps.
    • Motivation and recognition: people see their work valued, which is the enablement and empowerment that excellent projects give their people.
    • Spreading good practice: winners publish what they did, so others learn.
    • Credibility: customers, sponsors and funders trust an assessed or award winning organisation.
    • Continuous improvement: repeated assessment shows progress over time, in the way a maturity model does.

    The limit, worth saying: chasing an award can turn into a paperwork exercise that improves the documents rather than the project.

    What excellent projects do for their people, from which the whole question starts: they recognise their potential and skills, promote their development, and create a culture in which people are enabled and motivated to apply their knowledge for the success of the project.

    Discuss about IT project management methodology. asked 1×

    Ch 145 marks2070 Ashad Q15

    Organisations build their own IT project management methodology because they invest heavily in training project managers in general skills, and the managers still do not know how to adapt those methods to the organisation's own needs. A methodology is a set of process groups whose control functions are merged into one working, cohesive system.

    Its phases, and what each delivers

    • Initiation: assign the project manager, identify the key stakeholders, complete the business case, and complete and sign the project charter.
    • Planning: a team contract, the scope statement, the WBS, the schedule as a Gantt chart, and a prioritised list of risks.
    • Executing or production, monitoring and control, closing, and post project follow up.

    PRINCE2, Projects in Controlled Environments, was originally developed for IT projects and has eight process groups: starting up a project, planning, initiating a project, directing a project, controlling a stage, managing product delivery, managing stage boundaries, and closing a project. PMBOK is a body of knowledge, what to know; PRINCE2 is a method, what to do, with defined roles and stages.

    The Rational Unified Process is an iterative software development process for object oriented models that focuses on team productivity and delivers software best practices to all team members. It is used because it is iterative, because its practices give an example structure for object oriented analysis and design, and because it is flexible enough to be applied in a lightweight, agile way. Its four phases are inception, requirements, feasibility and scope; elaboration, the project plan, risk assessment, non functional requirements and the architecture; construction, all components developed, integrated and tested; and transition, the product launched to users and the final release made.

    Six Sigma is the third named method, with DMAIC to improve an existing process and DMADV to design a new one.

    Discuss the challenges of outsourcing. asked 1×

    Ch 145 marks2069 Chaitra Q13

    Outsourcing saves money, and it buys a new set of problems in exchange. They fall into three groups.

    Control and quality

    • Loss of direct control over how, and how well, the work is done.
    • Quality is hard to monitor from a distance.
    • Dependence on one vendor, and the loss of internal skill and knowledge over time.

    Communication and culture

    • Communication gaps and time zone differences slow decisions.
    • Cultural and language differences lead to misunderstood requirements.

    Risk and cost

    • Security and data privacy: sensitive data leaves the organisation.
    • Hidden costs: vendor selection, contract management, travel, knowledge transfer.
    • Legal and jurisdiction problems when the vendor is in another country.
    • Staff morale, when in house jobs are moved out.

    Managing them: a clear contract with service levels, strong communication plans, regular reviews and audits, and keeping the core knowledge in house.

    Short note: Project management information system asked 1×

    Ch 142x6 marks2070 Ashad Q16

    A project management information system (PMIS) is the set of tools and techniques used to gather, integrate and distribute the outputs of the project management processes. Many enterprise project management systems are now available, accessible over the internet and tied into other systems such as the financial ones, and even in small organisations project managers or team members can create Gantt charts with them.

    • What it does: schedule development and tracking; resource and cost management; document storage and version control; communication and reporting; and the consolidated data that performance reporting and earned value need.
    • Examples: Microsoft Project, Primavera, Jira, Redmine.
    • Why it matters: it is one source of truth for the plan and the actuals, which is what an integrated reporting system is built on, and it is named as a tool of almost every integration process in PMBOK.

    Explain role of balanced scorecard in it. asked 1×

    Ch 153+3 marks2078 Bhadra Q2b

    The balanced scorecard directs the team to develop metrics, set objectives, and gather and analyse data for each perspective. That is why it gives an effective way to measure and analyse how a plan is being carried out, and so ensures better quality of the project.

    PerspectiveMeasureTarget
    FinancialCost variance; cost of reworkWithin 10 percent of budget; rework under 5 percent of cost
    CustomerUser satisfaction after go live; complaintsAt least 4 out of 5; complaints falling each month
    Internal processDefect density; schedule variance; test coverageBelow 2 defects per thousand lines; SPI of 0.95 or more; 80 percent coverage
    Learning and growthTraining completed; staff turnoverEvery developer trained on the new stack; no key person lost

    How it helps quality management: the project's quality requirements become targets in all four rows, so quality is measured from the users' side, from the process's side and from the team's capability, and not only by cost and schedule. A project that is on budget and on time while its defect density climbs is visibly failing on the scorecard, and invisible on a cost report.